CONTENTS

GDG 0000 Guideline for Design Standards

GDG 0100 System General
GDG 0200 Mapping
GDG 0300 Earthing
GDG 0400 Protection Coordination for Medium Voltage
GDG 0500 Anti-Pollution
GDG 0600 Insulation Coordination
GDG 0700 Distribution Transformers
GDG 0800 Service Drop
GDG 0900 Watt Hour Meters
GDO 1000 Support
GDO 1100 Guy & Strut
GDO 1200 Overhead Distribution Conductors
GDO 1300 Assembly
GDO 1400 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage
GDO 1500 Clearance
GDU 2000 Cables
GDU 2100 Underground Lines
GDU 2200 Switching Stations
GD3 3000 30kV Lines
GDA 4000 Emergency Generator
GDA 4100 Street Lighting
GDA 4200 Customer Specification
GDS 5000 Substation Type
GDS 5100 Substation Scale
GDS 5200 Bus-Bar Scheme
GDS 5300 Protection System
GDS 5400 Power Transformer
GDS 5500 Switchgear
GDS 5600 Auxiliary Power
GDS 5700 Battery and Charger
GDS 5800 Substation Earthing
GDS 5900 Building Service
GD6 6000 Survey & Profile for 66kV
GD6 6100 Steel Tower
GD6 6200 Tower Earthing
GD6 6300 Conductor for 66kV
GD6 6400 Insulator & Fitting for 66kV
GD6 6500 Sag for 66kV
GD6 6600 Poles for 66kV
 GDG 0000
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Guideline for Design Standards

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Definitions ······································································································1
3. Duty·················································································································2
3.1 Planning and Design Department (P&D dept)·························································2
3.2 Technical Specification Management Department (TSM dept) ·······························2
3.3 Construction Department·························································································2
3.4 Operation and Maintenance Department (O&M dept)·············································2

4. Management of GDS·····················································································2
4.1 Organization············································································································2
4.2 Establishment and Revision of GDS ·······································································3
4.2.1 Condition ·······································································································3
4.2.2 Considerations ·······························································································4
4.3 Evaluation on the Validity of GDS ··········································································4
4.4 Abolishment of GDS ·······························································································5
4.5 Design standards committee····················································································6

5. Application of GDS ·······················································································6

5.1 General····················································································································6
5.2 GDS code ················································································································7
5.3 References···············································································································8
5.4 Procedures of design ·······························································································9

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > GDS code····································································································· 7

< Table 2 > Abbreviations of referred standards ····························································· 8

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Recommended organization··········································································· 3

[Figure 2] Flow chart of 11kV Overhead line design standard········································ 9
[Figure 3] Flow chart of cables(66kV – 0.4kV) design standard··································· 10
[Figure 4] Flow chart of 11kV Transformer design standard (GDG 0700)···················· 11
[Figure 5] Flow chart of 30kV overhead lines design standard ····································· 12
[Figure 6] Flow chart of 30 & 66kV Substations design standard································· 13
[Figure 7] Flow chart of 66kV overhead lines design standard ····································· 14

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A Request Form for Establishment and Revision of GDS ······································ 15

v
 Guideline for Design Standards

1. Scope

This guideline can be applied to use and manage the GECOL Design Standard (GDS).
This guideline includes the organizations, procedures, duties, responsibility and
qualification about how to use and manage the design standards. This guideline is divided
into 2 parts - application guideline and management guideline. But this guideline is just
recommendations referring to other electric companies, especially KECPO, so this
guideline can/shall be modified to be suitable for GECOL’s circumstance.

2. Definitions

GDS
GECOL Design Standards

Design Standards Committee

The highest deliberative assembly on GDS This committee consists of not only the
general manager(s) and engineers in charge of GDS but also the staff in the departments
of construction, technical specification management, operation & maintenance and so on.
The important policies on GDS shall be decided in this committee. Hereinafter, this
committee is referred as the committee.

Planning and Design Department (P&D dept)

The department mainly responsible for planning and designing the distribution facilities
This department can be included in the organization of the headquarters and/or regional
offices.

Construction Department
The department mainly responsible to construct the distribution facilities Generally this
department can be included in the regional offices.

Operation and Maintenance Department (O&M dept)

The department mainly responsible to operate and maintain distribution facilities
Generally this department can be included in the regional offices.

Technical Specification Management Department (TSM dept)

The regular department mainly responsible for managing the technical specifications for

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 /16 Version 1.0
 Guideline for Design Standards

GECOL (GES) Generally this department is included in the organization of the

headquarters, and shall be in exclusive and full charge of managing and controlling GES.

3. Duty

3.1 Planning and Design Department (P&D dept)

(a) Establishment, revision and abolition of GDS
(b) Valuation on the validity of GDS
(c) Authoritative interpretation on GDS
(d) Convocation and operation of the committee
(e) Holding and operating public hearings
(f) Observing the change of the international & domestic laws, standards, regulations, etc.

3.2 Technical Specification Management Department (TSM dept)

(a) Making new technical specifications and revising and abolishing technical
specifications related to GDS
(b) Requesting P&D dept to establish, revise and abolish GDS if needed

3.3 Construction Department

(a) Constructing the distribution facilities in reference with GDS
(b) Requesting P&D dept to establish, revise and abolish GDS if needed

3.4 Operation and Maintenance Department (O&M dept)

(a) Operating and maintaining the distribution facilities in reference with GDS
(b) Requesting P&D dept to establish, revise and abolish GDS if needed

4. Management of GDS

4.1 Organization
The P&D department that mainly takes responsible for GDS shall be independent of
other departments, such as TSM departments, Construction departments, O&M
departments, T&I departments and Procurement departments. The P&D department shall
be a regular organization. The staff of the P&D dept shall gather the information such as
international and domestic laws, policies and regulations of GECOL from other

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 /16 Version 1.0
 Guideline for Design Standards

departments or outer sources in order to improve the design standards. The TSM
department shall give the P&D department the information such as the revision of
international standards - IEC, ISO, etc. and the newly made facilities. The construction
department shall give the P&D department the information about the founded problems
when the distribution facilities are being constructed. Also the O&M department shall give
the P&D department the information about the founded problems when the distribution
facilities are being operated and maintained. The staff of the P&D department shall also
periodically evaluate the validity of GDS. Invalid and out-of-date design standards should
be reviewed and revised or abolished. And also, The P&D department is recommended to
be under the general manager in charge of the division for planning and/or study. The
design standards committee needs not to be a regular organization. But the members of the
committee shall be designated in advance. The recommended organization can be referred
as below.

Planning and/or Study Division

Other Departments P&D Department

Design Standards Committee

66 & 30 kV line Sector 11 & 0.4 kV line Sector Substation Sector

• The organization of the sector is just for reference.

[Figure 1] Recommended organization

4.2 Establishment and Revision of GDS

4.2.1 Condition
(a) When GDS is required to be established or revised according to international or
domestic laws relevant to GDS
(b) When GDS is required to be established or revised according to international or
national standards relevant to GDS
(c) When GDS is required to be established or revised due to change of the policies of
GECOL
(d) When GDS is required to be revised due to following the updated technology.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 /16 Version 1.0
 Guideline for Design Standards

(e) When GDS is required to be established or revised when requested by other

departments
(f) When required by the government

4.2.2 Considerations
(a) Easiness of the construction and operation & maintenance
(b) Reflection of required improvement
(c) Safety requirements from sites
(d) Compliance with international and domestic laws
(e) Compliance with international and national standards
(f) Compliance with the policy of the government and management
(g) Compatibility with existing design standards
(h) Economical efficiency and Simplification
(i) Up-to-date characteristics and features

If GDS needs to be established or revised, The P&D dept can request the relevant
departments to submit the data and opinions related to GDS. The requested departments
shall submit the data and opinions, if any. If the departments other than the P&D dept want
to establish or revise GDS, they can request the establishment or revision by means of the
establishment or revision request form affixed this document (refer to the Appendix A).
The departments can also submit the draft of the GDS to be established or revised. The
P&D dept shall refer the draft of the GDS with the relevant data and opinions to the design
standards committee. After committee, the P&D dept shall report the result of the
committee to the management of GECOL including the general manager of planning and
studying division, and get an approval of the management. The P&D dept shall
immediately publish the approved GDS to the relevant departments.

4.3 Evaluation on the Validity of GDS

The P&D dept shall evaluate the validity of GDS every 5 year regardless of requests by
other departments. When valuating the validity of GDS, the requirements listed below shall
be taken into account.
(a) The GDS have been used frequently to keep it.
(b) The GDS is expected to be used until at least 5 years.
(c) The GDS can be merged with another GDS.
(d) The GDS meets the laws, regulations and standards.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 /16 Version 1.0
 Guideline for Design Standards

(e) The policies related to GDS are changed.

The P&D dept shall make a schedule table to evaluate the validity of GDS. If GDS
needs to be valuated, the P&D dept can request the relevant departments to submit the data
and opinions. The requested departments shall submit the data and opinions, if any. The
P&D dept shall refer the result of the valuation with the relevant data and opinions to the
design standards committee. After committee, the P&D dept shall report the result of the
committee to the management of GECOL including the general manager of planning and
studying division, and get an approval of the management. The P&D dept shall
immediately publish the approved result to the relevant departments. The P&D dept shall
keep the date of valuation on the GDS.

4.4 Abolishment of GDS

The P&D department shall review the feasibility and necessity of abolishing GDS in the
case listed below.
(a) When GDS is required to be abolished according to abolishment of the international or
domestic laws relevant to the GDS
(b) When GDS is required to be abolished according to abolishment of the international or
national standards relevant to GDS
(c) When GDS is required to be abolished due to change of the policies of GECOL
(d) When GDS is required to be abolished because the related devices or material are no
more used.
(e) When GDS is required to be abolished when requested by other departments
(f) When required by the government

Before abolishment of GDS, the opinions of the construction dept and O&M dept shall
be carefully taken into consideration. If GDS needs to be abolished, the P&D dept can
request the relevant departments to submit the data and opinions related to GDS. The
requested departments shall submit the data and opinions, if any. If the departments other
than the P&D dept want to abolish GDS, they can request the abolishment by means of the
written request form. The P&D dept shall refer the abolishment of the GDS with the
relevant data and opinions to the design standards committee. After committee, the P&D
dept shall report the result of the committee to the management of GECOL including the
general manager of planning and studying division, and get an approval of the management.
The P&D dept shall immediately publish the abolishment of GDS to the relevant
departments.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 /16 Version 1.0
 Guideline for Design Standards

4.5 Design standards committee

To deliberate and decide the matters listed below, Design Standards Committee shall be
configured under the Planning and Study Division. But this committee needs not to be a
regular organization.
(a) Important matters relevant to GDS
(b) Establishment, revision, abolishment of the GDS
(c) Policies, organizations relevant to GDS
(d) Others requested by the P&D dept

Among the subclasses (b) and (c) the trivial matters, such as correction of misprinted
words, need not to be referred to the committee. The committee consists of the members
listed below.
(a) The manager of the P&D dept shall be in charge of the chairman of the committee.
(b) The members other than the chairman of the committee shall be designated by the
chairperson.
(c) The number of the members shall be 10 to 20 persons, and the representatives from
the relevant departments shall be included.
(d) If needed, experts in and/or out of the company can be included in the committee.

The chairperson shall call and proceed with the committee. If the chairman is absent, the
member designated by the director over the committee shall succeed as the chairman. The
committee shall decide the matters to be passed or not by means of the majority vote. Both
of two conditions listed below shall be met.
(a) More than 50 % attendance of the members of the committee
(b) More than 50 % consents of the attendant members

In case of a tie-vote, the chairman shall decide the matter. The members of the
committee can be provided with attendance money for expense of the committee.

5. Application of GDS

5.1 General
All departments related to GDS, such as TSM, construction, O&M departments, shall
take GDS into consideration during their works. All departments related to GDS shall/can
propose establishment, revision and abolishment of GDS to the P&D dept, if needed. GDS

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 /16 Version 1.0
 Guideline for Design Standards

shall be distributed as the latest version to the related departments. The departments and
the number of copies to be distributed shall be specified by the P&D dept. If there are any
vague clauses in GDS, the related departments shall/can request the authoritative
interpretation to the P&D dept. If there are any arguments about GDS between departments,
they can request the authoritative interpretation to the P&D dept. All departments shall
follow the decision of the P&D dept.

5.2 GDS code

When the designer designs the new facilities, he or she shall comply with the related
GDS. The next table shows all the GDS codes composed of 38 parts.

< Table 1 > GDS code

Code Design standard title Remarks
GDG 0100 System General General
GDG 0200 Mapping General
GDG 0300 Earthing General
Protection Coordination for Medium
GDG 0400 General
Voltage
GDG 0500 Anti-Pollution General
GDG 0600 Insulation Coordination General
GDG 0700 Distribution Transformers General
GDG 0800 Service Drop General
GDG 0900 Watt Hour Meters General
GDO 1000 Support Overhead
GDO 1100 Guy & Strut Overhead
GDO 1200 Overhead Distribution Conductors Overhead
GDO 1300 Assembly Overhead
GDO 1400 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage Overhead
GDO 1500 Clearance Overhead
GDU 2000 Cables Underground
GDU 2100 Underground Lines Underground
GDU 2200 Switching Stations Underground
GD3 3000 30kV Lines 30kV Overhead Lines
GDA 4000 Emergency Generator Accessories
GDA 4100 Street Lighting Accessories
GDA 4200 Customer Specification Accessories
GDS 5000 Substation Type 30/11kV, 66/11kV Substation

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 /16 Version 1.0
 Guideline for Design Standards

GDS 5100 Substation Scale 30/11kV, 66/11kV Substation

GDS 5200 Bus-Bar Scheme 30/11kV, 66/11kV Substation
GDS 5300 Protection System 30/11kV, 66/11kV Substation
GDS 5400 Power Transformer 30/11kV, 66/11kV Substation
GDS 5500 Switchgear 30/11kV, 66/11kV Substation
GDS 5600 Auxiliary Power 30/11kV, 66/11kV Substation
GDS 5700 Battery and Charger 30/11kV, 66/11kV Substation
GDS 5800 Substation Earthing 30/11kV, 66/11kV Substation
GDS 5900 Building Service 30/11kV, 66/11kV Substation
GD6 6000 Survey & Profile for 66kV 66kV Overhead Lines
GD6 6100 Steel Tower 66kV Overhead Lines
GD6 6200 Tower Earthing 66kV Overhead Lines
GD6 6300 Conductor for 66kV 66kV Overhead Lines
GD6 6400 Insulator & Fitting for 66kV 66kV Overhead Lines
GD6 6500 Sag for 66kV 66kV Overhead Lines
GD6 6600 Poles for 66kV 66kV Overhead Lines

5.3 References
Abbreviations of main referred standards are as follows.

< Table 2 > Abbreviations of referred standards

Abbreviations Meanings
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
ANSI American National Standard Institute
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASTM American Society of Testing Materials
AWS American Welding Society
BS British Standards
ENA Energy network association of Australia
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
KDS KEPCO Design Standard
KEEH Korea Electric Engineering Handbook
NEGA Japan Engine Generator Association
NESC National Electrical Safety Code of American National Standard Institute
NS Network Standard of EnergyAustralia

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 /16 Version 1.0
 Guideline for Design Standards

5.4 Procedures of design

For the effective design, the some design procedures shall be followed. The next
procedures are the samples of the important design procedures.

GDG 0100 Clause 9.1

Site survey GDO 1000 Clause 4
GDO 1500

GDG 0500 Clause 5.1 Pollution level

Conductor GDO 1200 Clause 2,3,4

GDO 1300 Clause 2, 3&4

Assembly
GDO 1300 Clause 5, 6

GDO 1000 Clause 3

Pole GDO 1000 Clause 5.4
GDO 1000 Clause 5.5

GDO 1100 Guy & strut

Transformer GDG 0700

GDO 1400 Overhead devices

Earthing GDG 0300

GDG 0200 Drawing

[Figure 2] Flow chart of 11kV Overhead line design standard

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 /16 Version 1.0
 Guideline for Design Standards

(Clause 2 & 6 of
Cable Types & Sizes
GDU 2000)

Yes No
Direct burial

(Clause 3.1 of
GDU 2100)
Depth of laying cables Conduit sizes

(Clause 2.2 of (Clause 3.2 of

GDU 2100) GDU 2100)

Depth, width of trenches

(Clause 2.1&2.3 of
GDU 2100)

(Clause 3, 4&5 of
Cable installation
GDU 2100)

(Clause 5&6 of
Cable backfill & marking
GDU 2100)

(Clause 7 of
Pillar boxes
GDU 2100)

(Appendix E of
Maximum LV length circuits
GDU 2000)

[Figure 3] Flow chart of cables(66kV – 0.4kV) design standard

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 /16 Version 1.0
 Guideline for Design Standards

New consumers

Existing lines New lines

Formula of circuit Formula of load density

(Clause 2.1) (Clause 2.1)

Load estimation

(Clause 2)

Yes No
New transformer

Yes
Transformer rating Over loading
(Clause 3 & 7.1)
& initial loading (Clause 7.1)
No

No Supplying power
Overhead TR

Yes
Ground mounted TR (Clause 5)
(Clause 4)

RMU (Clause 11)

Earthing (Clause 6)

[Figure 4] Flow chart of 11kV Transformer design standard (GDG 0700)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 /16 Version 1.0
 Guideline for Design Standards

GDG 0100 Clause 9 Select Line route

Review Normal GDG 0100 Clause 4.4.3

operation current of GDO 1200 Clause 4.2
conductor

GDG 0100 Clause 4.4.3 Select Main line

GDO 1200 Clause 3.1 conductor size

Select Branch line GDG 0100 Clause 4.4.3

conductor size GDO 1200 Clause 3.1

GDO 1000 Clause 6.4 Select Pole size

Decide Pole location GDO 1000 Clause 4

GDO 1300 Clause 3 Decide Pole type

GDO 1000 5.1 & 5.2

Decide Pole & 5.3
GDO 1000 Clause 5.4
&5.5 Decide Anchor type

GDO 1100 Clause 3

Decide Guy or Strut &4

GD3 3000 Clause 8, Decide Overhead

GDO 1400 devices

GDG 0300 Clause 3.2

Decide Earthing & 3.3 & 4 & 5

GD3 3000 Appendix K Make Legends of

materials

GDG 0200 Clause 3.2 &

Make Drawings 3.3

[Figure 5] Flow chart of 30kV overhead lines design standard

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 /16 Version 1.0
 Guideline for Design Standards

GDS 5000 Clause 7 Select Type

GDS 5100
Select Scale
Clause 6, 7, 8, 9

GDS 5100 Clause 5.3 Draw Outline of

GDS 5100 App. C Substation Layout

Select Substation Site GDS 5100 Clause 5

Select Power
GDS 5400 Transformer Ratings

GDS 5200
Select Switchgear
GDS 5500

Select Battery and

GDS 5700 Battery Charger

Select Auxiliary GDS 5600 Clause 2

Transformer GDS 5600 App. B

Select Protection
GDS 5300 Scheme

GDS 5800
Earthing Design
GDS 5800 App. C

GDS 5800 Clause 4 Control Cable Design

GDS 5800 App. C

Building Service
GDS 5900
Design

Revise Substation
Layout

[Figure 6] Flow chart of 30 & 66kV Substations design standard

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 /16 Version 1.0
 Guideline for Design Standards

GD6 6000 Clause 2 Select Line Route

Decide Tower Location GD6 6000 Clause 2

GD6 6000 Clause Survey & Mapping

3&4

Review of Profile GD6 6000 Clause 5 & 6

GD6 6100 Clause Decide Tower

3&5 Type & Height

Decide Insulator String

Set Type GD6 6400 Clause 2

Decide Tower
GD6 6100 Clause 16 Foundation

Decide Tower Earthing GD6 6200 Clause 6

GD6 6100 Clause Review Tower Design

8 ~ 15

Decide Sag GD6 6500 Clause 3

GD6 6300 Clause 6

Quantities of materials
Make Legends of
for the 66kV overhead Materials
line

[Figure 7] Flow chart of 66kV overhead lines design standard

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 /16 Version 1.0
 Guideline for Design Standards

Appendix A : Request Form for Establishment and Revision of GDS

Request for Establishment and Revision of GDS

Title
Staff and/or
Department to
request
Date of request

Reason to establish
or revise GDS

Main contents or
Drawing

Expected effects
(Economical or
other effects)

Applied standards
or
Related basis

Others

List of attachments

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 /16 Version 1.0
 Guideline for Design Standards

Explanation for the Request Form

a) Title: Title of the request form

Ex 1) ‘Request for revision of GDG 0100 – System General’

b) Reason to establish or revise GDS: Writing the reason briefly

Ex 1) ‘To improve the easiness of the construction’
Ex 2) ‘For economical efficiency’

c) Main contents or drawing: Writing the contents in detail or making a drawing to

explain in detail
1) The point at issue and existing problems shall be included.
2) The plan or draft to improve GDS shall be included.
3) If any, the draft can be attached.
4) If needed, technical background shall be included.

d) Expected effects
Ex) 1,000,000 LD can be saved a year.
1) The technical or economical basis shall be included.

e) Applied standards: International and/or domestic standards

Ex) IEC 62271-100

f) List of attachments: Draft of GDS, Technical background, detailed contents can be

attached.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 /16 Version 1.0
 GDG 0100
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

System General

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Definitions ······································································································1
3. Environmental Conditions ·········································································13
4. Distribution System·····················································································13
4.1 Distribution system voltage ···················································································13
4.2 Distribution system type························································································13
4.2.1 Low voltage distribution system type ··························································13
4.2.2 66kV & medium voltage distribution system type ·······································14
4.3 Voltage regulation··································································································14
4.4 Maximum permissible current of feeder································································15
4.4.1 Maximum permissible current of cables ······················································15
4.4.2 Maximum permissible current of overhead conductors································15
4.4.3 The relation with normal operation current and emergency operation
current···················································································································16
5. Distribution System Planning····································································20
5.1 Planning process····································································································20
5.1.1 Basic principles in distribution system planning ··········································21
5.1.2 Planning methods·························································································23
5.2 Planning criteria and standards··············································································24

6. Electricity Forecasting ················································································25

6.1 Power loads ···········································································································25
6.1.1 Load type ·····································································································25
6.1.2 Feeder load characteristics ···········································································26
6.1.3 System load··································································································26
6.2 Load forecasting····································································································26
6.2.1 Introduction ·································································································26
6.2.2 Forecast and time frame···············································································27
6.2.3 Historical data······························································································28

ii
 6.2.4 Statistical and econometric models ······························································30
7. Distribution Planning ·················································································30
7.1 Short-term distribution planning············································································30
7.1.1 Purpose of short-term distribution planning·················································30
7.1.2 Procedure of short-term distribution planning··············································31
7.1.3 Points to watch out on short-term distribution planning·······························32
7.2 Long-term distribution planning············································································33
7.2.1 Purpose of long-term distribution planning··················································33
7.2.2 Procedure of long-term distribution planning ··············································34
7.2.3 Effects of long-term distribution planning ···················································36
8. MV Networks and Substation Considerations ········································36
9. Design Guideline··························································································38
9.1 Selection of line route····························································································38
9.2 Making the design specifications and drawings·····················································38

iii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Distribution system voltage ······································································· 13

< Table 2 > Voltage regulation ······················································································ 14
< Table 3 > Current carrying capacity of cables···························································· 15
< Table 4 > Permissible current of cables ····································································· 15
< Table 5 > Permissible current of overhead conductors··············································· 15
< Table 6 > Normal operation currents for cables at 1S1I ············································· 17
< Table 7 > Normal operation currents for overhead conductors at 1S1I ······················ 17
< Table 8 > Normal operation currents for cables at 2S2I ············································· 18
< Table 9 > Normal operation currents for overhead conductors at 2S2I ······················ 18
< Table 10 > Normal operation currents for cables at 3S3I ··········································· 19
< Table 11 > Normal operation currents for overhead conductors at 3S3I ···················· 19
< Table 12 > Proper distance between substations per load density ······························ 37
< Table 13 > Proper distance between LV transformers per load density······················ 37

iv
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Type of low voltage distribution system······················································· 14

[Figure 2] Type of 66kV & medium voltage distribution system ·································· 14
[Figure 3] 1 section-1 interconnection configuration ···················································· 17
[Figure 4] 2 section-2 interconnection configuration ···················································· 18
[Figure 5] 3 section-3 interconnection configuration ···················································· 19
[Figure 6] Components of the planning process···························································· 20
[Figure 7] Planning actions ··························································································· 21
[Figure 8] Steps for power system planning·································································· 22

v
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ············································································································ 39
B Design samples ···································································································· 40

vi
 System General

1. Scope

This standard describes the basic concept of the electric distribution system such as
voltage level, grounding system type, limit current of feeder, guideline of feeder
connection, and distribution planning.

2. Definitions

Service drop
The low voltage conductor or cable used for supplying the customer from the low
voltage lines to the customer building

AC
Pertaining to alternating electric quantities such as voltage or current, to devices
operated with these, or to quantities associated with these devices

Active power
Under periodic conditions, mean value, taken over one period T, of the instantaneous
power p:
1 T
T ∫0
P= pdt

Alternating current
Electric current that is a periodic function of time with a zero direct component or, by
extension, a negligible direct component

Alternating voltage
Voltage that is a periodic function of time with a zero direct component or, by extension,
a negligible direct component

Apparent power
Product of the rms voltage U between the terminals of a two-terminal element or two-
terminal circuit and the rms electric current I in the element or circuit:
S=UI

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

Arc
Self-maintained gas conduction for which most of the charge carriers are electrons
supplied by primary-electron emission

Busbar
Low-impedance conductor to which several electric circuits can be connected at separate
points

Cable
Assembly of one or more conductors and/or optical fibres, with a protective covering
and possibly filling, insulating and protective material

Cap and pin insulator

An insulator comprising an insulating part having the form of a disk or bell, with or
without ribs on its lower surface, and fixing devices consisting of an outside cap and an
inside pin attached axially.

Coincident factor (= Simultaneity factor)

The reciprocal of the diversity factor

Composite insulator
Insulator made of at least two insulating materials: the core and the external envelope.
The composite insulator, for example, can consist either of individual sheds mounted on
the core, with or without an intermediate sheath or alternatively, of the complete
envelope with sheds directly molded or cast in one piece on to the core.

Conductivity
Scalar or tensor quantity the product of which by the electric field strength in a medium
is equal to the electric current density

Conductor
Medium in which a time-varying electric field produces an electric current density the
component vector of which in a given direction has a magnitude large compared with
that of the component vector of the displacement current density in this direction, in a
particular frequency band

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

Connector
Device providing connection and disconnection to a suitable mating component

Creepage distance
The shortest distance along the surface of an insulator between two conductive parts The
surface of cement or of any other non-insulating jointing material is not considered as
forming part of the creepage distance. If high resistance coating is applied to parts of the
insulating part of an insulator such parts are considered to be effective insulating
surfaces and the distance over them is included in the creepage distance.

Current
Scalar quantity equal to the flux of the electric current density through a given directed
surface

DC
Pertaining to time-independent electric quantities such as voltage or current, to devices
operated with direct voltage and current, or to quantities associated with these devices

Delta connection
The winding connection so arranged that the phase windings of a three-phase
transformer or reactor, or the windings for the same rated voltage of single phase
transformers or reactors associated in a three-phase bank, are connected in series to form
a closed circuit.

Demand factor
The ratio of the maximum demand of a system to the total connected load of the system

Dielectric
Medium which can be electrically polarized and in which a time-varying electric field
produces an electric current density the vector component of which in a given direction
has a magnitude small compared with that of the vector component of the displacement
current density in this direction, in a particular frequency band

Dielectric loss
Power absorbed from a time-varying electric field by a polarized substance, excluding
absorbed power due to the conductivity of the substance

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

Direct current
Electric current that is time-independent or, by extension, periodic current the direct
component of which is of primary importance

Direct voltage
Voltage that is time-independent or, by extension, periodic voltage the direct component
of which is of primary importance

Diversity factor
The ratio of the sum of the individual maximum demands of the various subdivisions of
a system to the maximum demand of the whole system

Dry-type transformer
A transformer of which the magnetic circuit and windings are not immersed in an
insulating liquid

Earth fault
Occurrence of an accidental conductive path between a live conductor and the Earth

Eddy currents
Induced currents circulating along closed paths within a substance

Efficiency
Ratio of output power to input power of a device

Electrode
Conductive part in electric contact with a medium of lower conductivity and intended to
perform one or more of the functions of emitting charge carriers to or receiving charge
carriers from that medium or to establish an electric field in that medium

Enclosure
Housing affording the type and degree of protection suitable for the intended application

Flashover
A disruptive discharge external to the insulator, and over its surface, connecting those
parts which normally have the operating voltage between them

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

Generator
Energy transducer that transforms non-electric energy into electric energy

Highest system voltage

Means the highest value of voltage which occurs under normal operating conditions at
any time and at any point on the system It excludes voltage transients, such as those due
to system switching, and temporary voltage variations.

High Voltage
Voltage having a value above 35kV and not exceeding 230kV for the distribution of AC
electric power

Impedance
For a linear two-terminal element or two-terminal circuit with terminals A and B under
sinusoidal conditions, quotient of the phasor UAB representing the voltage between the
terminals by the phasor I representing the electric current in the element or circuit:
U
Z = AB
I
Where the voltage is the line integral of the electric field strength from A to B, and
where the sinusoidal electric current represented by the phasor I is taken positive if its
direction is from A to B and negative in the opposite case

Insulating material
Material used to prevent electric conduction between conductive elements

Insulator
A device designed to support and insulate a conductive element

Interconnection
Connection of distinct electric circuits or electric networks to each other

Leakage current
Electric current in an unwanted conductive path other than a short circuit

Line
Device connecting two points for the purpose of conveying electromagnetic energy

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

between them

Line conductor
Conductor which is energized in normal operation and capable of contributing to the
transmission or distribution of electric energy but which is not a neutral or mid-point
conductor

Line-to-neutral voltage
Voltage between a line conductor and the neutral conductor of a polyphase line

Line-to-line voltage
Voltage at a given point of a polyphase line and appearing between two polyphase-line
conductors belonging to two different phase elements of that polyphase line

Load
Device intended to absorb power supplied by another device or an electric power system

Load factor
The ratio of the average load over a designated period of time to the peak load occurring
in that period

Load loss
The active power absorbed at rated frequency when rated current is flowing through the
line terminal(s) of one of the windings, the terminals of the other winding being short-
circuited, and any winding fitted with taps being connected on its principal tapping.

Loss factor
The ratio of the average power loss to the peak load loss during a specified period of
time

Low Voltage
Voltage having a value below a conventionally adopted limit, for the distribution of AC
electric system

No-load
Qualifies an operation of a device or an electric circuit when it does not supply power,

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

or by power, the upper limit is generally accepted to be 1 000 V.

Maximum demand
The greatest of all demands which have occurred during the specified period of time

Medium Voltage
Voltage having a value above 1kV and not exceeding 35kV for the distribution of AC
electric power

Neutral point
Common point of a star-connected polyphase system or the earthed mid-point of a
single-phase extension qualifies a quantity associated with this device or circuit

No-load current
The current flowing through a line terminal of a winding when a given voltage is applied
at rated frequency, the other winding(s) being open-circuited.

No-load loss
The active power absorbed when a given voltage at rated frequency is applied to the
terminals of one of the windings, the other winding(s) being open-circuited.

Oil-immersed type transformer

A transformer of which the magnetic circuit and windings are immersed in oil

On-load
Qualifies an operation of a device or an electric circuit which supplies power, or by
extension qualifies a quantity associated with this device or circuit

On-load tap-changer
A device for changing the tapping connections of a winding, suitable for operation while
the transformer is energized or on load

Over-current
Electric current the value of which exceeds a specified limiting value

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

Overhead earth wire

Conductor intentionally earthed at some or all supports of an overhead line, which is
generally but not necessarily installed above the line conductors

Overhead line
Line with one or more conductors or a cable supported above ground by appropriate
means

Overload
Excess of the actual load (151-15-16) over the full load, expressed by their difference

Over-voltage
Voltage the value of which exceeds a specified limiting value

PE conductor
Conductor provided for purposes of safety, for example protection against electric shock

PEN conductor
Conductor combining the functions of both a protective earthing conductor and a neutral
conductor

Phase current
Electric current in a phase element, for star connection of a phase element which is
connected to line conductors, the phase currents are equal to the line currents.

Phase voltage
Voltage between the two terminals of a phase element, for star connection of a
polyphase element which is connected to line conductors and to a neutral conductor, the
phase voltages are equal to the line-to-neutral voltages. For polygonal connection of a
polyphase element which is connected to line conductors, the phase-element voltages are
equal to the line-to-line voltages.

Planned outage
Outage scheduled in advance, for maintenance or other purposes

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

Polygonal connection
In a polyphase element, connection in which the phase elements form a closed path

Power factor
Under periodic conditions, ratio of the absolute value of the active power P to the
apparent power S:
P
λ=
S

Power loss
Difference between input power and output power of a device

Power transformer
A static piece of apparatus with two or more windings which, by electromagnetic
induction, transforms a system of alternating voltage and current into another system of
voltage and current usually of different values and at the same frequency for the purpose
of transmitting electrical power.

Protective earthing
Earthing a point or points in a system or in an installation or in equipment, for purposes
of electrical safety

Rated current
The current, flowing through a line terminal of a winding, derived by dividing the rated
power of the winding by the rated voltage of the winding and by an appropriate phase
factor

Rated power
A conventional value of apparent power, establishing a basis for the design of a
transformer, a shunt reactor or an arc-suppression coil, the manufacturer’s guarantees
and the tests, determining a value of the rated current that may be carried with rated
voltage applied, under specified conditions.

Rated value
A quantity value assigned, generally by the manufacturer, for a specified operating
condition of a component, device or equipment

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

Reactive power
For a two-terminal element or a two-terminal circuit under periodic conditions, quantity
equal to the square root of the difference of the squares of the apparent power and the
active power:
Q = S 2 − P2
Where S is the apparent power and P is the active power

Reliability
Generally, reliability Performance is quantified using appropriate measures. In some
applications, these measures include an expression of reliability performance as a
probability, which is also called reliability

Resistance
For a resistive two-terminal element or two-terminal circuit with terminals A and B,
quotient of the voltage uAB between the terminals by the electric current i in the element
or circuit:
u
R = AB
i
Where uAB is the line integral of the electric field strength from A to B, and where the
electric current is taken positive if its direction is from A to B and negative in the
opposite case

Resistivity
Inverse of the conductivity when this inverse exists

Series reactor
A reactor intended for series connection in a network, either for limiting the current
under fault conditions or for load-sharing in parallel circuits.

Shunt reactor
A reactor intended for shunt connection in a network to compensate for capacitive
current.

Spacing
The distance between two consecutive points recurring in repetitive positions on an
insulator or insulator assembly.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

Star connection (Y or wye connection)

The winding connection so arranged that one end of each of the phase windings of a
polyphase transformer or reactor, or of each of the windings for the same rated voltage
of single-phase transformers or reactors associated in a polyphase bank, is connected to
a common point, i.e. the neutral point, and the other end to its appropriate line terminal.

Stranded conductor
Conductor consisting of a number of wires, all or some of which are wound in a helix

Switch
Device for changing the electric connections among its terminals

Switchgear
A general term covering switching devices and their combination with associated
control, measuring, protective and regulating equipment, also assemblies of such devices
and equipment with associated interconnections, accessories, enclosures and supporting
structures, intended in principle for use in connection with generation, transmission,
distribution and conversion of electric energy.

System grounding
Functional earthing and protective earthing of a point or points in a power system

System voltage
Voltage by which a system is designated

Tap
A connection made at some intermediate point in a winding.

Terminal
Conductive part of a device, electric circuit or electric network, provided for connecting
that device, electric circuit or electric network to one or more external conductors

Line-post insulator
A rigid insulator consisting of one or more components of insulating material
permanently assembled with a metal base and intended to be mounted rigidly on a
supporting structure.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

Total connected load

The sum of the continuous ratings of the load consuming equipment connected to the
system

Transformer
Electric energy converter without moving parts that changes voltages and currents
associated with electric energy without change of frequency

Transmission line
Line for transfer of electric energy in bulk

Underground
Capable of operating when directly buried in the ground, or in a compartment buried in
the ground

Utilization ratio
The ratio of the maximum demand of a system to the rated capacity of the system

Var
Special name of the voltampere in the case of reactive power

Voltage (electric tension)

Scalar quantity equal to the line integral of the electric field strength E along a specific
path linking two points

Voltage drop
Voltage between the terminals of a resistive element being part of an electric circuit due
to the electric current through that element

Winding
The assembly of turns forming an electric circuit associated with one of the voltages
assigned to the transformer or to the reactor.

Wire
Flexible cylindrical conductor, with or without an insulating covering, the length of
which is large with respect to its cross-sectional dimensions

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

3. Environmental Conditions
All GECOL Design Standards are considered under the following environmental
conditions.
■ Ambient air temperature
- Maximum ambient air temperature : 50°C
- Minimum ambient air temperature : -10°C
- Yearly average ambient air temperature : 25°C
■ Maximum wind speed : 35m/s
■ Altitude : Below 1,000m

4. Distribution System

4.1 Distribution system voltage

Nominal system voltages used in distribution system are as follows.

< Table 1 > Distribution system voltage

Voltage level Nominal system voltage
Low voltage 230/400 V
11kV
Medium voltage
30kV
High voltage 66kV
Note :
1) The values indicated in medium voltage and high voltage level are voltages between phases

4.2 Distribution system type

4.2.1 Low voltage distribution system type
The type of system earthing for low voltage distribution system is a solid earthing
system which refers to the connection of the neutral of a distribution transformer directly to
the station earth or to the earth.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

400V

400V
400V

11kV
[Figure 1] Type of low voltage distribution system

4.2.2 66kV & medium voltage distribution system type

The type of system earthing for medium voltage distribution system is a resistance
earthing system which refers to the connection of the neutral of a distribution transformer
through the neutral earthing resistor to the station earth or to the earth.

11kV

11kV
11kV
66kV or 30kV

Resistor

[Figure 2] Type of 66kV & medium voltage distribution system

4.3 Voltage regulation

The voltage regulation is different from the nations and their situations. The next voltage
ranges are used for design standard considering the IEC and the voltage regulations of
world wide power companies. In a normal system of low voltage level 230/400V and
medium voltage level 11kV, the highest voltage and the lowest voltage do not differ by
more than approximately +5%, -10% from the nominal voltage of the system. In a normal
system of 30kV and 66kV, the highest voltage and the lowest voltage do not differ by more
than approximately +10%, -10% from the nominal voltage of the system.

< Table 2 > Voltage regulation

Nominal system voltage Voltage range
230/400 V 207/360 ~ 242/420V
11kV 10 ~ 11.5kV

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

30kV 27 ~ 33kV
66kV 59.5 ~ 72.5kV

4.4 Maximum permissible current of feeder

4.4.1 Maximum permissible current of cables
The permissible current of feeder is related to the current carrying capacity of
conductors. The current carrying capacities of cables are as follows.
< Table 3 > Current carrying capacity of cables
Current carrying capacity (A)
Cable type
Copper Aluminum
(mm2)
1.2K·m/W 2.0K·m/W 2.7K·m/W 1.2K·m/W 2.0K·m/W 2.7K·m/W
3C×150 280 235 209 218 183 163
3C×240 363 305 271 285 239 213
1C×400 525 409 353 418 326 281
1C×630 811 619 541 679 518 453

The permissible current of cable depends on the current carrying capacity of cable and
shall not be greater than 90% of the current-carrying capacity of cables.

< Table 4 > Permissible current of cables

Permissible current (A)
Cable type
Copper Aluminum
(mm2)
1.2K·m/W 2.0K·m/W 2.7K·m/W 1.2K·m/W 2.0K·m/W 2.7K·m/W
3C×150 252 211 188 196 164 146
3C×240 326 274 243 256 215 191
1C×400 472 368 317 376 293 252
1C×630 729 557 486 611 466 407

4.4.2 Maximum permissible current of overhead conductors

The permissible current of feeder is related to the current carrying capacity of
conductors. The current carrying capacities and permissible current of overhead conductors
are as follows. The permissible current of conductor depends on the current carrying
capacity of conductor and shall not be greater than 90% of the current-carrying capacity of
conductors.

< Table 5 > Permissible current of overhead conductors

Bare copper ACSR

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

Current Current
Conductor Permissible Conductor Permissible
carrying carrying
size (mm2) current (A) size (mm2) current (A)
capacity (A) capacity (A)
35 199 179 40 177 159
50 246 221 63 237 213
70 299 269 100 317 285
- - - 160 427 384

4.4.3 The relation with normal operation current and emergency operation current
The permissible current of feeder is also related to the type of the interconnection for the
feeder. The permissible current is applied to the distribution feeders as an emergency
operation current. Normal operation current is estimated to be lower than emergency
operation current to make up for potential faults in adjacent line. If interconnection is
considered, normal operation current has the following relationship with emergency
operation current.

Emergency operation current ≥ Normal operation current + Emergency

interconnection current

In the aforementioned equation, emergency operation current means current with which
line can withstand for a certain period of time without damage. As distribution line is
required to be operated without damage during emergency, emergency operation current
must be bigger than or equal to the sum of normal operation current and emergency
interconnection current. Therefore, load supplied by uninterrupted line becomes equal to
emergency operation current.

4.4.3.1 The normal operation current at 1 section-1 interconnection configuration

If 1 section-1 interconnection configuration is applied to distribution line, normal
operation current is half of emergency operation current, which indicates that
interconnected line in normal conditions should supply the entire load connected to
interrupted line in worst scenario.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

A Feeder

30/11kV S/S

B Feeder

: Circuit : Switch Close

: Switch : Fuse
[Figure 3] 1 section-1 interconnection configuration

The normal operation currents for cables are as follows.

< Table 6 > Normal operation currents for cables at 1S1I
Normal operation current (A)
Cable type
Copper Aluminum
(mm2)
1.2K·m/W 2.0K·m/W 2.7K·m/W 1.2K·m/W 2.0K·m/W 2.7K·m/W
3C×150 126 106 94 98 82 73
3C×240 163 137 122 128 108 96
1C×400 236 184 159 188 147 126
1C×630 365 279 243 306 233 204

The normal operation currents for operation conductors are as follows.

< Table 7 > Normal operation currents for overhead conductors at 1S1I
Bare copper ACSR
Conductor size Normal operation Conductor size Normal operation
2 2
(mm ) current (A) (mm ) current (A)
35 90 40 80
50 111 63 107
70 135 100 143
- - 160 192

4.4.3.2 The normal operation current at 2 section-2 interconnection configuration

In 2 section-2 interconnection line, normal operation current is 66.7% of an emergency
operation current. If one of the two sections of distribution line is tripped, 1/2 of the loads
connected to interrupted line are supplied by adjacent uninterrupted line. If a fault occurs

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

while one interrupted line and the other uninterrupted line are operated at normal operation
current, uninterrupted line supplies more load which is 1/2 of its normal operation current.

A Feeder

B Feeder
30/11kV

C Feeder
: Circuit : Switch Close : Switch : Fuse
[Figure 4] 2 section-2 interconnection configuration

The normal operation currents for cables are as follows.

< Table 8 > Normal operation currents for cables at 2S2I
Normal operation current (A)
Cable type
Copper Aluminum
(mm2)
1.2K·m/W 2.0K·m/W 2.7K·m/W 1.2K·m/W 2.0K·m/W 2.7K·m/W
3C×150 168 141 125 131 109 97
3C×240 217 183 162 171 143 127
1C×400 315 245 211 251 195 168
1C×630 486 371 324 407 311 271

The normal operation currents for operation conductors are as follows.

< Table 9 > Normal operation currents for overhead conductors at 2S2I
Bare copper ACSR
Conductor size Normal operation Conductor size Normal operation
2 2
(mm ) current (A) (mm ) current (A)
35 119 40 106
50 147 63 142
70 179 100 190
- - 160 256

4.4.3.4 The normal operation current at 3 section-3 interconnection configuration

In 3 section-3 interconnection line, normal operation current is 75% of emergency
operation current. If one of the three sections of distribution line is tripped, 1/3 of the loads
connected to interrupted line are supplied by adjacent uninterrupted line. If a fault occurs

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

while one interrupted line and the other uninterrupted line are operated at normal operation
current, uninterrupted line supplies more load which is 1/3 times its normal operation
current.

A Feeder D Feeder

B Feeder

30/11kV S/S

C Feeder

: Circuit : Switch Close : Switch : Fuse

[Figure 5] 3 section-3 interconnection configuration

The normal operation currents for cables are as follows.

< Table 10 > Normal operation currents for cables at 3S3I

Normal operation current (A)
Cable type
Copper Aluminum
(mm2)
1.2K·m/W 2.0K·m/W 2.7K·m/W 1.2K·m/W 2.0K·m/W 2.7K·m/W
3C×150 189 158 141 147 123 110
3C×240 245 206 182 192 161 143
1C×400 354 276 238 282 220 189
1C×630 547 418 365 458 350 305

The normal operation currents for operation conductors are as follows.

< Table 11 > Normal operation currents for overhead conductors at 3S3I
Bare copper ACSR
Conductor size Normal operation Conductor size Normal operation
(mm2) current (A) (mm2) current (A)
35 134 40 119
50 166 63 160
70 202 100 214
- - 160 288

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

5. Distribution System Planning

5.1 Planning process

The objective of system planning is to develop a distribution system which is acceptable
within the present and future standards in order to provide an adequate and reliable
electrical service to present and future customers at lowest possible cost. Planning is the
process of taking a careful decision. The main input in planning is quality systematic
thought. It involves selecting the vision, values, mission and objectives, and deciding what
should be done to attain them. The components of the planning process are shown in
[Figure 6]. In a power utility, this process seeks to identify the best schedule of future
resources and actions to achieve the utility’s goals.

Creating
Vision Values Mission

Formulating objectives
Long Medium Short

Supporting Plans
Policies Strategies Regulatory Criteria Budgets
Measures Standards
Rules
[Figure 6] Components of the planning process

Planning is driven by two inputs: Future needs and time to fulfill these needs with

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

defined priorities in Master Plan. Long-term planning determines the power energy
forecasts and optimum network arrangements. What investment would be required and the
timing of these to obtain maximum benefits. Network planning covers individual
investments in one or two years and a medium-term planning within the period of a long-
term plan. A short-term plan covers the current or next year, that is, annual plans for each
year on the horizon. This covers engineering design of each network component, smaller
and more common type of investments for system improvements. The following steps are
involved in the planning process:
A. Feasibility studies are carried out to identify, evaluate and finalize the best plan.
Define the problem Æ Find the alternatives Æ Evaluate the alternatives Æ Select
the best one.
B. A project report for long, medium and short-term works along with the action plan
for each activity/work is prepared. Dates are set for milestones, that is, important

events measurable along the path to the fulfillment of the plan.

C. Final approval is accorded after financial and economic appraisal.
D. Once the best plan has been selected, the next process of implementation begins.

In executing the plan, monitoring is important. Develop a detailed task list that supports
the milestones. Without detailing, who will do what and when, the plan may not be
successfully implemented. The planning action is shown in [Figure 7].

No undesirable
New plans deviation from
plans

Monitoring,
Implementation
Planning comparing
of plans
plans with
Undesirable
deviation

Corrective action

[Figure 7] Planning actions

5.1.1 Basic principles in distribution system planning

Any distribution system planned is used to transport a certain amount of power to

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

maximum capability from the source point at one location to another location with certain
consequences. In essence, sub-transmission and distribution lines transport power from one
bulk power location to the consumer site, and transformers change the voltage level of the
power, considering the following basic principles:
A. It is more economical to transport power at a high voltage. The higher the voltage,
the lower the cost/kW to transport power to a distant point.
B. Electricity travels as per Kirchhoff’s current and voltage laws. It follows the least
resistance path.
C. Power must be delivered in relatively small quantities at a low voltage (e.g.
400/230V) level.
D. Voltage drop occurs from the source point to the end location.
E. Losses in power are incurred, creating a cost.
F. Equipment and labour come at a cost.
G. Operation and maintenance add to service cost.
H. Future growth accounting is survival.
I. When electric power is used for any purpose by the consumer, the responsibility for
the degradation of environment lies on the consumer and the power utilities on this
account.
J. Nominal rated system voltage is the most efficient voltage for equipment operation.
Arise above this voltage tends to reduce the power factor of equipment.

The main steps in planning power distribution are shown in [Figure 8]. The goal should
be to provide the electricity at the lowest possible economic and social cost.
Forecast of Spatial forecast of Deciding primary and
energy and energy and power secondary network
power demand demand with (location and capacity),
for horizon specific growth existing system
period year- rates and improvement and/or
wise characteristics expansion program

Deciding generation Deciding sub-

and energy purchase transmission, distribution
and demand sub-stations capacity,
management and existing system
transmission improvement and/or
program expansion program
[Figure 8] Steps for power system planning

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

5.1.2 Planning methods

Planning of integrated resources requires the following two methods.

5.1.2.1 Traditional least cost planning

It is a process by which utilities minimize the cost of supplying a given amount of
electricity. It is the method of acquiring resources at the lowest cost, taking into account all
possible means of meeting electricity needs and all resource costs including construction,
operation, sub-transmission, distribution, consumer and environment costs.
Firstly the existing system inadequacies are identified as:
A. Poor voltage regulation;
B. Higher equipment failures/breakdowns and/or higher line breakdowns/trippings;
C. Bad quality of power supply; and
D. No scope for future load growth.

The initial system improvements can be very cost-effective in removing the above
inadequacies as compared to the other alternative of laying a new extended system. Thus,
there are two options:
A. System improvement: Augmentation and strengthening of the existing system;
improving the reliability and quality of supply; reduction of commercial and
technical losses, and/or
B. Expansion of the existing network: The least cost optimal solution from various
alternative schemes may be worked out considering the capital cost of the proposed
works and present values of the kW and energy losses over the expected life of
equipment on case of expansion of network. When the augmentation and
strengthening of existing system are involved, the benefits of saving in loses (kW
and energy), net revenue increase due to additional sale of power and energy after
adjusting the expenditure incurred on generation of the additional energy. The net
present values of alternate plans are compared to choose the least-cost solution. Also,
financial analysis of the chosen scheme is done to satisfy the funding organization.

5.1.2.2 Demand-side planning (DSP)

It is the process by which power utilities quantify and assess program to alter the pattern
and level of their consumers’ demand for electricity. This is planning at the consumer level
and often has a long planning period, much longer than distribution planning and often as
long as that of generation. It can take years of slow progress to obtain meaningful levels of
participation. Demand-side planning (DSP) measures require special programs that try to

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

mobilize cost-effective savings in electricity and peak demand. DSP benefits households,
industry, agriculture, utilities and society in the following ways:

A. Reduces consumer energy bills.

B. Reduces the need for power plant, transmission and distribution construction.
C. Stimulates economic development.
D. Creates long-term jobs that benefit the economy.
E. Increases the competitiveness of local enterprises.
F. Can reduce maintenance and equipment replacement costs.
G. Reduces local air pollution.
H. Reduces emissions that contribute to national and international environmental
problems such as acid rain and global warming.
I. Enhances national security by easing dependence on foreign energy sources.
J. Can increase the comfort and quality of work spaces, which in turn can increase
worker productivity.

5.2 Planning criteria and standards

Criteria and standards together form a set of requirements against which the planning
process can compare alternatives in the evaluation and final choice. A distribution plan
must provide good economy and also satisfy various criteria and standards. Criteria are
rules or procedures. Standards are the specifications to ensure that the system is built with
compatible equipment that will fit and function together when installed and maintained in
an economical manner. Standards and criteria and their applications to the planning process
depend upon vision, mission, and the value system of the utility. Criteria and standards
convey direction in the Master Plan. The following can be the typical criteria for planning:
A. A perspective plan for a certain period to meet the anticipated load growth and
forecast load centers. The plan will be reviewed yearly on the basis of annual plans
with respect to targets achieved.
B. Detailed project reports be framed to identify the system strengthening works on
long-term and short-term bases:
(a) Feeders having poor performance: re-configuration (bifurcation or trifurcation,
etc.) of feeder or augmentation of line conductors and distribution transformers;
(b) New technology deployment for system improvement; and
(c) Loss minimization plan.
C. Demand-side Management projects reports be undertaken on pay-back period
financial analysis to achieve tangible reduction in demand and energy consumption

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

in the planned horizon year.

D. Economic appraisal of alternate plans is done on least net present values.
E. Power utility would create and use load research facilities in order to identify
consumer load profiles in the respective geographical area of the system to forecast
changes in the load.

Planning standards exist for reasons of efficiency, to achieve the greatest economy or
utility convenience. The planning standards can be of the following types:
A. Development of a standard cost structure for material and labour rates for different
voltage systems to be used in the estimation.
B. Standards for system voltages.
C. The load growth of at least 10 years will be taken into account to prepare new or
system improvement schemes.

6. Electricity Forecasting

6.1 Power loads

6.1.1 Load type
The load requirement of an area depends upon its terrain, its population and their living
standards, its present and future development plans, cost of power, etc. it is necessary to
know the general nature of load which is characterized by the demand factor, load factor,
power factor, diversity factor, utilization factor and power factor. In general the types of
load can be divided into the following categories.
A. Domestic: This consists mainly of lights, fans, domestic appliances, such as
refrigerators, air-conditioners, mixers, ovens, heating ranges and small motors for
pumping, various other small household appliances, etc.
B. Commercial: This consists mainly of lighting for shops and advertisements, fans, air-
conditioners and other electrical appliances used in commercial establishments, such
as shops, restaurants, market places, etc.
C. Industrial: These loads may be of the following type.
(a) Small-scale industries.
(b) Medium-scale industries
(c) Large-scale industries
(d) Heavy industries
D. Public: This load is for street lighting and remains practically constant throughout
the night. For this the demand factor is 100% while the diversity factor can be taken

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

as 100%. Street lights are required mainly at night but there may be the small load of
traffic signals throughout the day also. The load factor for street light is usually taken
as 25 ~ 30%. Another type of public load is for water supply and drainage.
E. Agriculture: This type of load is required for supplying water for irrigation by means
of suitable pumps driven by electric motors. The load factor is generally taken as 20
~ 25%, the diversity factor as 1 ~ 1.5 and the demand factor as 90 ~ 100%.
F. Other loads: Apart from the above mentioned loads, there are other loads such as
bulk supplies, special industries such as paper, textile, traction and government loads
which have their own peculiar characteristics.
6.1.2 Feeder load characteristics
The load characteristics of a distribution feeder at the substation bus are important in
terms of its load composition and its electrical characteristics. The load composition
approximately is known by the type of feeder. Categories like domestic, commercial,
industrial, agriculture, etc. are expressed as percentage of total load at a time. The
percentage load of each category in the total demand is dependent on the time of the year,
time of the day, geographical location, socio-economic conditions and diversity factors of
the different categories of loads. Yearly peak in the plain areas is usually in the summer
season and in the hilly area, it is during severe winter season. Each category load may be
function of voltage, frequency and time derivatives.

6.1.3 System load

The character of electric load itself changes as a function of the number of consumers.
As the number of consumers in a group or a system increase, the contribution to group or
the system peak of each consumer decrease and the high rate of fluctuations decrease. The
whole picture of load is based on the statistical laws, whereas the individual load may be
entirely random in character. The certain average pattern is recognizable at the distribution
transformers. At the sub-transmission level, this average effect is still more pronounced.
Finally, at the transmission level, load profile is an almost predictable situation. The
general load characteristics of the system load are linearized for the values of voltage and
for the values of frequency close to the normal one.

6.2 Load forecasting

6.2.1 Introduction
Over the years forecasting has been refined considerably and has now reached a stage
where it is more precise and unbiased. It has been extensively used in areas as diverse as
electrical load forecasting, economic trends, market surveys, etc. In power systems, there is

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

a great need for accurately forecasting the load and energy requirements because a great
amount of money is spent in the electricity distribution industry. If the energy forecast is
too conservative, there is the likelihood of the generating capacity falling short of the
actual demand, resulting in restrictions being imposed on the power supply which will be
detrimental to the economic well-being of the country. If the forecast is too optimistic, it
may lead to the creation of an excess generating capacity, resulting in part of the
investment not giving immediate returns. Distribution engineers require knowledge of the
future loads in the areas to be served in order to plan adequate electrical facilities. Load
forecasting falls into three categories. These are: what you know, what you think you know,
and what you do not know. What you know is historical loads, and this data can be applied
as a forecast base. What you think you know is tomorrow’s loads you feel you can predict
with some certainty. What you do not know are the future loads. Choice of influencing
factors has been left to the discretion of the forecaster. In some cases the material may not
be available or not have sufficient weight to be included. From the probable things that
may happen, the forecaster makes his choice of what should be included in the production
of the load forecaster.

6.2.2 Forecast and time frame

The first step in the preparation of a distribution forecast is to define the specific area
within the time frame required. The specific area could be any type of area from residential
to heavy industrial. Just as important, the time frame could mean one to five years, 5 to 10
years, or 10 to 30 years. Defining the time base and the units of load measurement is the
choice of the forecaster. To assist the forecaster, reference is made below to more specific
values and the reason for their choice.
Most utilities have at some time in the past made a long-term forecast, usually about 30
years, to establish generation and transmission requirements. At that time the more specific
details of distribution substations may or may not have been included. Whatever was done,
the 30 year forecast had to be developed from estimated load growths for city, suburban,
rural, and industrial areas. Customer loads and use trends are therefore fundamental in
establishing generation and transmission facilities. This, however, will only be a by-
product to the distribution engineer who is more interested in the establishment of
substations, distribution duct banks and optimum distribution voltages based on a long-
term forecast.
A long-term forecast is only a rough guide that is reviewed and referred to periodically
as requirements arise. Take the example of a new highway bridge to be built over a river
where it is necessary to provide cable ducts in that bridge. It is necessary to make a long-

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

term forecast and then lay out a plan of feeder requirements crossing this bridge.
A 5 or 10 year forecast could be a satisfactory period for establishing future substation
sites and transmission rights of way. Five years is the usual short-term forecast period to
determine additional feeder positions and transformer capacity required in substations. The
first two years of five year forecast should be as accurate as possible. Beyond two years a
certain amount of time flexibility in station layout and equipment ordering is usually
available.
Units of load measurement vary with type and density of load. In a downtown area of a
large city values of MW/block are common. Rural area may use kW/km of distribution line.
As forecasting is done for substation loads and feeder requirements, it is usually done by
substation area.

6.2.3 Historical data

6.2.3.1 Substation metering
Among the most used sources of base material for forecasting are actual metered values.
Most utilities meter their substations, some to a greater extent than others. For transformer
capacity, it is necessary to have individual transformer kVA demand metering. If there is
more than one transformer a totalizing meter gives an exact demand on the station. The
unit derived from this would be kVA demand/substation.
Substation feeders can have kVA demand meters although most utilities meter the
demand amps per phase balancing information as well as feeder loading. Peak current of
the feeder is measured as a weekly or monthly demand and converted to kVA. The unit in
this case would be kVA demand/feeder.
Because it is a feeder demand susceptible to load transfer to other feeders, it is not
usually used as a historical record for measuring feeder growth trends. The exception of
course is the radial non-intertie feeder. However, feeder demands are useful if they are
summated for a substation and compared to the station totalizing meter. This provides a
check of metering and also gives the diversity factor of the feeders. If this value is less than
one, it is an indication that your metering or readings are incorrect. The useful units
derived from these measurements are kVA demand/substation or substation area and kVA
demand/feeder or feeder area.

6.2.3.2 Energy sales

Energy generally forms the basis of generation forecasts. The information on energy is
generally readily available and more accurate than demand information from an historical
standpoint. Energy sales are somewhat loss influenced by weather than demand. In

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

28 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

distribution forecasting, demand is generally the building block since it causes the overload
on our substation equipment, distribution equipment, etc. energy can be used as a means of
checking demand data.
Using historical monthly load factor, a comparison of demand and energy consumption
will indicate if any metering discrepancies appear to exist. Some smaller substations may
not have demand metering. In this case the energy consumption, usually available from
metering or customer billings, can be used with a given load factor to determine the daily,
monthly, or annual peak demand as required. The useful units derived are a check on
demand metering, the appropriate power factor will give the results in kVA.
6.2.3.3 Customer growth
Data on customer growth should be available directly from utility records. This data will
usually be expressed as numbers of customer connections in various classes, that is,
residential, commercial, etc. for a given area, growth of residential customers should show
a direct correlation with population growth. On a larger scale, growth in the numbers of
commercial and industrial customers in a region will go hand in hand with population
growth. Some useful units derived from customer growth would be number of
customers/unit of population, kWh/customer and kVA demand/customer.

6.2.3.4 Plant growth

Plant growth should parallel demand and customer growth. Good statistics on connected
distribution transformer kVA, pole line lengths, etc., should give a historical growth trend.
This trend could be used for projections of crosschecks depending on what other
information is available. If projections are to be made in kW demand per km of line then
historical plant growth would be a necessity. The useful units derived are kW demand/km
of line and kW demand/kVA connected. A correlative check can also be made on metering,
customer growth, etc.

6.2.3.5 Population growth

Historical population statistics are used to conjunction with historical demand statistics
to develop a relationship which can be applied to population forecasts to determine future
load growth. In some cases a planner may require population figures of relatively small
areas which may put a limitation on the possible sources of statistics. Therefore it is
necessary for the planner to choose these statistics which are in the most useful format for
his purposes.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

29 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

6.2.4 Statistical and econometric models

A statistical model is a mathematical model which relates one variable with one or more
variables in the form of assumptions and hypotheses. All variables have well-defined
statistical properties. In general, an economic model is a model which relates the behaviour
of one economic function in terms of other economic functions. Economic models which
qualify as statistical models, where all the variables are definable and mathematically
measurable, are called econometric models. Often, as in the case of power system load
forecasting, the model will consist of just one equation, in which case the model is called
regression model. Most load forecasting models do not include economic factors directly,
though they certainly do play a part. Thus, a complete load forecasting model involving
economic indicators would be a form of an econometric model.

7. Distribution Planning
Distribution planning refers to the plan that is established to build a more efficient
distribution system while satisfying the load requirement of a given year by identifying
system problem areas and forecasting future load demand.
There are two types of distribution planning: short term plan and long term plan. Short
term plan refers generally to 3-5 year plan; and here, we deal primarily with overload
alleviation of feeder, new feeder construction by new/expanded substations, reduce loss
and interruptions by sectionalize/interconnection of distribution system. On the other hand,
long term plan generally looks forward 10 years or more into the future, and addresses
such issues as forecasting long-term demand, deciding the construction time, location,
capacity of new substations, and optimizing the coverage for each substation as well as the
number of circuits and shortest route.

7.1 Short-term distribution planning

7.1.1 Purpose of short-term distribution planning
The objective of short term distribution planning is to develop a system configuration
and expansion plan for the next 3-5 years and cope, in an efficient manner, with the
increasing loading level as well as to secure the necessary budget. An efficient system
means that satisfying reliability and economic performance, preventing unnecessary
facilities and waste of resources by maximized utilization ratio, reducing loss and voltage
drop by load balancing, preventing large scale black down by maintaining reasonable
number of customers by feeder.
Furthermore, the plan includes the development of a system configuration that is aimed
at the prevention of power quality deterioration by separately supplying those loads that

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

30 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

negatively affect overall system performance and security of power supply by optimal
sectionalize/interconnections.
The purposes of short term distribution planning work are followings;
(a) Increase the system efficiency: Improvement of the feeder utilization ratio, feeder
load balancing, system reliability, power quality and loss reduction
(b) Improve the restoration ability: Efficient sectionalizing & interconnection
(c) Setup the economical service plan: Load transfer & new construction plan

7.1.2 Procedure of short-term distribution planning

Short term distribution planning work consists of 6 steps.

▣ Condition of system operation

- Peak load and Voltage drop
Step 1
- Length and Number of customers
Present System
- Interconnection status
Analysis
▣ Restoration ability assessment
- Contingency simulation

▣ Conditions out of standards

Step 2 - Feeder capacity, Voltage drop, Length, Number of
Week Point Analysis customers, Contamination Grade
▣ Insufficient interconnection

▣ Solution
- New construction or extension of substation
Step 3 - New construction of feeders
Countermeasures - Load transfer between feeders
- Conductor size upgrade
- Build the tie lines between feeders

Step 4 ▣ Determine the priority of each projects

Project Priority - Priority evaluation criteria

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

31 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

Step 5
▣ Estimate the budget of each project
Budget

Step 6
▣ Approve the projects and construction
Construction

7.1.3 Points to watch out on short-term distribution planning

7.1.3.1 Apply reasonable load forecasting and foreign exchange rate
Load forecast, together with current operational status, is the most important point of
consideration in deciding distribution facility expansion. As such, load forecast should be
done in accordance to its correlation with national economic growth, the data is provided
by government. It is also essential to apply exact exchange rate if one needs to import
materials/devices from overseas.

7.1.3.2 Develop construction plan based on long-term view

When drawing up distribution plan, it is important to make sure that no frequent system
changes are made. Also it is undesirable that budget of system expansion should not be
transferred to maintenance field. 3-5 year load forecast of distribution system and voltage
drop should be made.

7.1.3.3 Prevent duplicate investment

Cooperation with other related departments should be carried out to review the
economics and efficiency of an investment as well as to prevent duplicate investment in
new supply construction or movement of obstacle poles.

7.1.3.4 Describe in detail the purpose and effects of a construction

Purpose and expected effects should be clearly stated as to make sure that inappropriate
construction works do not take place (e.g. constructions that are irrelevant or whose effect
is questionable).

7.1.3.5 Apply design standards for typhoon, contamination and lightning

Relevant standards should be applied when conducting work on areas prone to typhoon,
contamination or lightning.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

32 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

7.1.3.6 Points to watch out when replacing poles or conductors

When designing for pole or conductor replacement, make sure to review power line
clearance standards and current of conductor as to prevent unnecessary upgrade to a higher
level material and to promote reuse whenever possible.

7.1.3.7 Route selection for distribution lines

Route for distribution lines should be carefully selected as not to create any potential
transferring work in the future. As such, careful review of urban planning and load forecast
should be made while taking into consideration historical logs to prevent line exposure to
typhoons, landslides, flooding etc. Of course, any line route should be chosen after full
technical and economic feasibility review.

7.1.3.8 Review voltage drop

Maximum voltage drop at primary and branch lines should be reviewed to come up with
an alternative that efficiently satisfies voltage drop criteria.

7.2 Long-term distribution planning

7.2.1 Purpose of long-term distribution planning
Whereas short term plan refers to relatively short 3~5 year plan, long term plan deals
with facilities plan over a period of 10 years or more. By nature, electrical facilities
relocation is very expensive and difficult once they are constructed. As such, in large cities,
it takes years to build a substation from land procurement to completion. This means that a
bad plan could result in inefficiency for a very, very long time. Long-term distribution plan
is composed largely of substation plan and feeder plan.
Substation plan refers to the plan that determines the supply coverage of each substation;
more specifically, the timing, location and capacity of the substation to be built, based on
long term load forecasting. Feeder plan primarily refers to the plan of number of feeders
with increasing load by year and the shortest path for loss, voltage drop and construction
cost.
When a substation is constructed, distribution lines should be constructed from the
substation, and load transfer also occurs. In other words, substation plan and feeder plan
are not independent of each other; on the contrary they need to be mutually consulted.
Another consideration that should be made when establishing a distribution plan is that the
most efficient alternative should be selected rather than the best solution. For instance,
suppose we found an optimal location for substation by considering various factors,

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

33 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

however in big cities, it is probably impossible to build a distribution substation on that

location.

The purposes of long term distribution planning work are followings;

(a) Distribution substation plan : Construction time, Site, Capacity, Service area of
each S/S
(b) Distribution feeder plan : Necessary feeders by year and substation, the shortest
path, loss and voltage drop control

7.2.2 Procedure of long-term distribution planning

The basics of long term distribution planning is to evaluate present loads, forecast future
demand, and then develop plans for timely construction of substation and distribution lines.
However, a more efficient and scientific work process is following 10 steps.

Step 1 ▣ Newly developed area

Selection of - Residential, industrial, commercial area
Planning Area ▣ One city size or large scale area

▣ Present load data

- Position & Magnitude of each load
Step 2 - Distribution transformer, high voltage customer peak
Assessment of load
Present Loads ▣ Substation data
- Position and Capacity
- Power Tr. & feeder peak load

Step 3
Assign the Loads ▣ GIS or cadastral map
on the Map

Step 4
Modeling of ▣ System modeling on the map
Distribution System

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

34 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

▣ Analysis factors of substations

- Utilization ratio, service area
Step 5
- Position compared with load center
Analysis of
Present System ▣ Analysis factors of feeders
- Number, length, path, voltage drop
- Loss & loss costs of the system

▣ Local economic data

- GRDP by land use
Step 6 - Economic forecasting of Institute
Load Forecasting ▣ Electric power data
- Energy sales, customers number
- M.Tr. & feeder peak load

Step 7
▣ Load density map for 10~15 years
Make the Load
- Determine the load center
Density
- Substation plan for future
Map by Year

Step 8
▣ Peak load by year
Calculation of Peak
- Sum of load density & area
Load
& Needed Substation ▣ Necessary M.Tr. Capacity
Capacity by Year - Operation capacity, standard capacity

▣ Substation position
Step 9 - Service area by substation
Simulate the Optimal - Load center
Substation Position ▣ Feeder number & path
& Feeder Plan - Shortest path
- Loss and voltage drop

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

35 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

Step 10 ▣ Compare the merits and demerits

Determine the - Construction cost, loss, voltage drop, others
Planning ▣ Make budget and report

7.2.3 Effects of long-term distribution planning

The most visible effect of long-term planning is the prevention of new facility
constructions. This is rendered possible by improving the utilization ratio of existing
substations and lines. Other effect is reduced feeder length by optimal substation place,
optimal supply area by substations and optimal feeder route selection. Loss can be reduced
by shorter length, too.
Besides economic benefits, shorter line length translates to lower fault probability and
less number of facilities to maintain means a more efficient maintenance and better city
view.

8. MV Networks and Substation Considerations

A. A. 66/11 or 30/11kV S/S in urban area must supply the electricity to all feeders
directly.
B. All feeders of the urban area shall be composed of a ring system that can be supplied
from two different 66/11 or 30/11kV S/S.
C. All underground feeders originating from 66/11 or 30/11kV S/S in urban area must
be interconnected with other feeders originating from different 66/11 or 30/11kV S/S
at one or more interconnection points.
D. Utilization: The facility utilization of 66/11 or 30/11kV S/S can be maximized up to
50% considering the emergency operation capacity of transformer.
E. All feeder cables originating from 66/11 or 30/11kV S/S shall be 3 × 240 cu or
aluminum XLPE insulated ones. If some feeders are radial lines, 3 × 150 cu or
aluminum XLPE cables can be used.
F. The most important component that decides proper distance between 66/11 and
30/11kV substations is the load density of area that the substation supplies. If the
load density is high, that area may need more substations than low density area to
supply the electricity to the same square area. Accordingly, the distance between
66/11 and 30/11kV S/S will be different from the load density of each supplied area.
Therefore, the power utility is going to consider the substation capacity, the
substation maximum utilization ratio and the load density to decide distance between

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

36 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

66/11 and 30/11kV S/S. Generally, 66/11kV or 30/11kV S/S used in Libya consist of
2 × 20MVA transformers. When the maximum loading of power transformers is
going to become 50% of nameplate rating considering an emergency operation
capacity, the total loading that can be supplied from a substation will become
20MVA. According to load density of an area, we calculated the section that can be
supplied from a substation and accordingly the distance between 66/11 and 30/11kV
S/S. We should consider the fact that the distance between 66/11 or 30/11kV S/S is
not circuit length but geographic length. Distances between 66/11 or 30/11kV S/S
should not exceed the proper distance considering load density in urban area.

< Table 12 > Proper distance between substations per load density
Load Density Proper distances
Main Load Characteristics
(MVA/km2) of substations(km)
8 or higher 1.4 or shorter High Load Density Area
6~8 1.4 ~ 1.5 High - Medium Load Density Area
4~6 1.5 ~ 1.8 Medium Load Density Area
2~4 1.8 ~ 2.2 Low Load Density Area
2 or lower 3.1 or longer City Boundary

G. Distances between 11/0.4kV LV transformers should not exceed the proper distance
considering load density in urban area. The same method used for calculating the
proper distance between 66/11kV or 30/11kV S/S can be applied for calculating the
proper distance between 11/0.4kV LV transformers. The transformer rating used for
calculating the distance between 11/0.4kV LV transformers is 11/0.4kV 1,000kVA
transformer. Therefore, in the case of using another transformer rating except
1,000kVA, we must take into account transformer capacity and adjust the proper
distance between transformers. Also, the maximum loading of distribution
transformers shall be limited up to 100% of nameplate rating. The table below shows
the proper distance between transformers by load density.

< Table 13 > Proper distance between LV transformers per load density
Load Density Proper distances
2 Main Load Characteristics
(MVA/ km ) of substations(m)
8 or higher 310 or shorter High Load Density Area
6~8 310 ~ 360 High - Medium Load Density Area

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

37 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

4~6 360 ~ 440 Medium Load Density Area

2~4 440 ~ 630 Low Load Density Area
2 or lower 630 or longer City Boundary

9. Design Guideline

9.1 Selection of line route

Design engineers should consider the followings to select the distribution line route.
A. The distribution lines should be constructed to secure the high reliability and to
transfer the load easily.
B. Design engineers should construct the distribution lines of which the route passes
through the center of load, if possible, and minimize the voltage drop and the line
length.
C. Design engineers should construct the distribution lines considering the maintenance
and operation of distribution network.
D. Design engineers should construct the distribution lines of which the line bending
and the rise and fall are considered.

9.2 Making the design specifications and drawings

Design engineers should make the design specifications and drawings before
constructing distribution lines.
A. Design engineers should survey the field where the distribution lines are constructed
on to check the geographic conditions, load condition, etc. and gather needed data.
B. Design engineers should make the design drawings and design specifications.
C. Design engineers should construct the distribution lines according to the design
drawings and design specifications.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

38 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

Appendix A : References

IEC 60050 International Electrotechnical Vocabulary

IEC 60038 Standard Voltages
IEC 60694 Common Specifications For High-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear
Standards
IEC 61000-3-6 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits - Section 6:
Assessment of Emission Limits for Distorting Loads in MV and HV
Power Systems - Basic EMC Publication First Edition
KDS 3001 System General
Electrical Author : A S Pabla, 2005
Power Publisher : McGraw-Hill
Distribution

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

39 /40 Version 1.0
 System General

Appendix A : Design samples

Problem 1 :
A new 30/11kV substation is required to be installed. The initial peak load for the
substation is 15 MVA, with a forecasted peak load of 23 MVA within 5 years. A primary
configuration of two ONAN 25 MVA transformers will be installed at the substation. With
this information, now determine the quantity and type of underground 30kV feeders for the
primary substation.

Solution 1 :
In the clause 2.1 of GDS 1400 “Cables” design standard, we see that 30kV network
configuration recommends two feeders be installed for ‘zone 2’ and one feeder
interconnected to another 30/11kV substation for ‘zone 3’. The type and size of
underground cable is 1C×630 mm2 XLPE cable. But for ‘zone 4’ radial feeders the type
and size of underground cable is 1C×400 mm2 XLPE cable.

Problem 2 :
A new 30/11kV substation will be installed. The initial projected peak load for the
substation is 10 MVA, with a forecasted peak load of 17 MVA within 5 years. Determine
the substation configuration and the quantity of feeders required to be installed.

Solution 2 :
In the clause 6.3 of GDS 5400 “Power transformer” design standard, that design
standard recommends that two power transformers each sized at ONAN 25 MVA be
installed at the primary substation for peak load up to 25 MVA. Furthermore in the clause
2.2 of GDS 1400 “Cables” design standard, 11kV feeders are designed to run as open rings
in a ring main unit configuration. Single core 400mm2 XLPE cables shall be used between
the secondary node of 30/11kV main transformer and its switchgear on 11kV side bus bar
in substations (zone1). When the rated capacity of 30/11kV transformers exceeds 20MVA,
a couple of single core 400mm2 cables shall be used for each phase of the transformer. In
other cases, only one cable shall be connected to each phase. Three core 240mm2 XLPE
cables, used as main lines shall be used power lines between 30/11kV substation and RMU
(zone2). Three core 150mm2 XLPE cables can be used in radial lines (zone3). If there is a
possibility that the radial lines would be connected to another 30/11kV substation line due
to future load growth, three core 240mm2 cables can be used. Lastly, three core 150mm2
cables can be used in radial lines.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

40 /40 Version 1.0
 GDG 0200
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Mapping

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Definitions ······································································································1
3. Map ·················································································································1
3.1 Map configuration ···································································································1
3.2 Symbols of distribution facilities·············································································4
3.2.1 Symbols of substations, devices and supporters·············································4
3.2.2 Symbols of conductors and cables ·································································5
3.3 Marking method of distribution facilities on the map··············································6
3.3.1 Making a detailed distribution facilities map ·················································6
3.3.2 Making a route map ·······················································································7
4. Numbering······································································································7
4.1 Bay numbering system ····························································································7
4.2 Nameplate ···············································································································9
4.2.1 Nameplate for substation ···············································································9
4.2.2 Nameplate for other facilities·······································································10

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Symbols of substations, devices and supporters··········································· 4

< Table 2 > Symbols of conductors and cables ······························································· 5
< Table 3 > Meanings of the bay digits ··········································································· 8

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Map constitution of Libya·············································································· 1

[Figure 2] 30km by 30km section map ··········································································· 2
[Figure 3] 6km by 6km section map ··············································································· 2
[Figure 4] 600m by 600m section map ··········································································· 3
[Figure 5] 100m by 100m section map ··········································································· 4
[Figure 6] Marking method of a detailed distribution facilities map ······························· 6
[Figure 7] Marking method of a route map ····································································· 7
[Figure 8] Bay number sample of 30/11kV substation ···················································· 8
[Figure 9] Circuit breaker nameplate sample for feeder·················································· 9
[Figure 10] Circuit breaker nameplate sample for a transformer····································· 9
[Figure 11] Nameplate sample for other bays ······························································· 10
[Figure 12] Nameplate sample for poles ······································································· 10

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ············································································································· 11

v
 Mapping

1. Scope

This standard covers the requirements for the satellite maps which are supplied by the
government. This standard establishes the procedure for the mapping and identification of
the distribution system.

2. Definitions

Map
The satellite map to mark the distribution facilities

3. Map

3.1 Map configuration

The geographical map configuration can represent the geographical information. To use
GIS efficiently the facilities codes match GIS. Because GIS demands geographical
information, the facilities codes should include geographical information. The needed
features of geographical map configuration are to manage the distribution system
efficiently, to grant the geographical meanings to the code and to have the unique code all
over the country. The following figure describes the basic concept of GECOL to make
geographical map to cover the whole Libya. The map is coded from the left to the right and
from the bottom to the upper. According to this method the vertical line is divided into 56
sections 30km wide and the horizontal line is divided into 72 sections 30km high. This
method is popularly used in Libya and basically based on the satellite information.

56

1
5A 13H
[Figure 1] Map constitution of Libya

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 /11 Version 1.0
 Mapping

Through Above-mentioned method, many 30km by 30km rectangular sections are made.
And they are coded like the following map.
12° 240km 14°

7A-55 7B-55 7C-55 7D-55 7E-55 7F-55 7G-55 7H-55

7A-54 7B-54 7C-54 7D-54 7E-54 7F-54 7G-54 7H-54

7A-53 7B-53 7C-53 7D-53 7E-53 7F-53 7G-53 7H-53

7A-52 7B-52 7C-52 7D-52 7E-52 7F-52 7G-52 7H-52

[Figure 2] 30km by 30km section map

One 30km by 30km rectangular section consists of 25 6km by 6km rectangular sections.
The code of each 6km by 6km rectangular section is designated from the upper side to
bottom side. The codes range from one up to 25.

30km

7A-55-1 7A-55-2 7A-55-3 7A-55-4 7A-55-5

7A-55-6 7A-55-7 7A-55-8 7A-55-9 7A-55-10

7A-55-11 7A-55-12 7A-55-13 7A-55-14 7A-55-15

7A-55-16 7A-55-17 7A-55-18 7A-55-19 7A-55-20

7A-55-21 7A-55-22 7A-55-23 7A-55-24 7A-55-25

[Figure 3] 6km by 6km section map

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 /11 Version 1.0
 Mapping

One 6km by 6km rectangular section consists of 100 600m by 600m rectangular sections.
The codes of each 600m by 600m rectangular section are ranged from one up to 100.
6km

7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55-

8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-8 8-9 8-10

7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55-

8-11 8-12 8-13 8-14 8-15 8-16 8-17 8-18 8-19 8-20

7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55-

8-21 8-22 8-23 8-24 8-25 8-26 8-27 8-28 8-29 8-30

7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55-

8-31 8-32 8-33 8-34 8-35 8-36 8-37 8-38 8-39 8-40

7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55-

8-41 8-42 8-43 8-44 8-45 8-46 8-47 8-48 8-49 8-50

7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55-

8-51 8-52 8-53 8-54 8-55 8-56 8-57 8-58 8-59 8-60

7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55-

8-61 8-62 8-63 8-64 8-65 8-66 8-67 8-68 8-69 8-70

7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55-

8-71 8-72 8-73 8-74 8-75 8-76 8-77 8-78 8-79 8-80

7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55-

8-81 8-82 8-83 8-84 8-85 8-86 8-87 8-88 8-89 8-90

7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55-

8-91 8-92 8-93 8-94 8-95 8-96 8-97 8-98 8-99 8-100

[Figure 4] 600m by 600m section map

One 600m by 600m rectangular section consists of 36 100m by 100m rectangular

sections. The codes of each 100m by 100m rectangular section are ranged from one up to
36. This is the last map section.

12° 600m

7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55-

8-47-1 8-47-2 8-47-3 8-47-4 8-47-5 8-47-6

7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55-

8-47-7 8-47-8 8-47-9 8-47-10 8-47-11 8-47-12

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 /11 Version 1.0
 Mapping

7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55-

8-47-13 8-47-14 8-47-15 8-47-16 8-47-17 8-47-18

7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55-

8-47-19 8-47-20 8-47-21 8-47-22 8-47-23 8-47-24

7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55-

8-47-25 8-47-26 8-47-27 8-47-28 8-47-29 8-47-30

7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55- 7A-55-

8-47-31 8-47-32 8-47-33 8-47-34 8-47-35 8-47-36
[Figure 5] 100m by 100m section map

The features of the mapping plan are as follows. The first, the total number of digits is
ranged from 6 digits until 12digits. The second, this method is to use the given satellite
map without change. The third, this method is followed by the national mapping system.
The geographical mapping system should have the next information. The first information
is the geographical location of major distribution facilities. The second one is the type of
major distribution facilities. The third one is the capacity of major distribution facilities.

3.2 Symbols of distribution facilities

3.2.1 Symbols of substations, devices and supporters
The geographical mapping system should use the symbols to understand easily. The
symbols of substations, devices and supporters are as follows.

< Table 1 > Symbols of substations, devices and supporters

Symbol Description
6S 66/11kV Substation
3S 30/11kV Substation
1S 11/0.4kV Substation
SS Switching Substation
PB Pillar Box
FB Fuse Box
AR Automatic Recloser
GS Gas Switch
DS Dropout Switch
CA Capacitor

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 /11 Version 1.0
 Mapping

VR Voltage Regulator
TR Transformer
WP Wood Pole
CP Concrete Pole
TP Tubular Pole
S Steel Post
Steel Tower

3.2.2 Symbols of conductors and cables

The symbols of conductors for overhead distribution lines and cables for underground
distribution lines are as follows.

< Table 2 > Symbols of conductors and cables

Symbol Description
Cu 70 11kV Bare Stranded Copper conductor 70mm2
ACSR 100 11kV Bare Stranded Steel Reinforced Aluminum Conductor 100mm2
AAAC 100 11kV Bare Stranded All Alloy Aluminum Conductor 100mm2
XC1 240 11kV Single-core Stranded Copper Conductor XLPE Insulated Cable 240mm2
XC3 240 11kV Three-core Stranded Copper Conductor XLPE Insulated Cable 240mm2
XA1 240 11kV Single-core Stranded Aluminum Conductor XLPE Insulated Cable 240mm2
XA3 240 11kV Three-core Stranded Aluminum Conductor XLPE Insulated Cable 240mm2
XCC 70 0.4kV XLPE-covered Copper conductor 70mm2
PCC 70 0.4kV PVC-covered Copper conductor 70mm2
XC1 240 0.4kV Single-core Stranded Copper Conductor XLPE Insulated Cable 240mm2
XC4 240 0.4kV Four-core Stranded Copper Conductor XLPE Insulated Cable 240mm2
XA1 240 0.4kV Single-core Stranded Aluminum Conductor XLPE Insulated Cable 240mm2
XA4 240 0.4kV Four-core Stranded Aluminum Conductor XLPE Insulated Cable 240mm2
PC1 240 0.4kV Single-core Stranded Copper Conductor PVC Insulated Cable 240mm2
PC4 240 0.4kV Four-core Stranded Copper Conductor PVC Insulated Cable 240mm2
PA1 240 0.4kV Single-core Stranded Aluminum Conductor PVC Insulated Cable 240mm2
PA4 240 0.4kV Four-core Stranded Aluminum Conductor PVC Insulated Cable 240mm2
ABC 70 0.4kV Aerial Bundled Cable 70mm2
ACSR 160 66kV Bare Stranded Steel Reinforced Aluminum Conductor 160mm2
AAAC240 66kV Bare Stranded All Alloy Aluminum Conductor 240mm2
XC1 240 66kV Single-core Stranded Copper Conductor XLPE Insulated Cable 240mm2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 /11 Version 1.0
 Mapping

XA1 240 66kV Single-core Stranded Aluminum Conductor XLPE Insulated Cable 240mm2
ACSR 160 30kV Bare Stranded Steel Reinforced Aluminum Conductor 160mm2
AAAC240 30kV Bare Stranded All Alloy Aluminum Conductor 240mm2
XC1 240 30kV Single-core Stranded Copper Conductor XLPE Insulated Cable 240mm2
XA1 240 30kV Single-core Stranded Aluminum Conductor XLPE Insulated Cable 240mm2
GW 30 Aluminum-clad Steel Stranded conductor 30mm2

3.3 Marking method of distribution facilities on the map

3.3.1 Making a detailed distribution facilities map
The detailed distribution facilities can be marked on 600m by 600m satellite map as the
following figure. The map should have the information such as facilities type and size, the
length between the facilities, the location, facilities number, the capacity of facilities, etc.
The color of existing system should be black and the color of new system to be installed
should be blue.
Map NO : 7A-55-8-47

1 Cu 25 2 3 200kVA
XCC 35 4 5 6
48m 53m 50m 55m TR 54m 51m 50m 60m
WP11 WP11 WP11 WP11 WP9 WP9 WP9 WP9
(101) (102) (201) (202) WP13 (401) (402) (501) (502)
(301)

7 8 9 10 11 12

XC1 240 * 2
20/25VA X 2 20/25VA X 2
13
3S 14 15 16 17 3S18
(1801)

(1301)
XC3 240
250m (2302)
FB
(2102) (2101) (2201)
PB 1S PB XC3 240
80m
19 XC3 240
20 21
500kVA XC4 150
40m 65m
22 XC4 150 23 24 150m

190m WP9 XC4 150 XC4 240

(2001) (2301) FB
XCC 25 85m
50m
XC4 240
WP9 (2901) PB 1S (3001)
70m (2603) 1,000kVA
25
(2501)
1S PB 26
35m 40m 27 28 29 XC4 240
3070m
(2601) WP9 (2802) (2801) (2901)
XC4 240 500kVA (2602) FB FB PB PB (3002)
80m XCC 25 60m 50m 90m
XC4 150 50m
PB
(3101) 45m WP9 60m WP9 50mWP9 60m WP9 FB (3601)
(3102) (3201) (3202) (3301) XC4 150 55m
31 32 33 34 35 36
FB (3602)

[Figure 6] Marking method of a detailed distribution facilities map

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 /11 Version 1.0
 Mapping

3.3.2 Making a route map

When the design engineer makes a plan the wide and big construction of distribution
facilities of 66kV, 30kV, 11kV, he or she should make a route map. The route of
distribution facilities can be marked on 6km by 6km satellite map as the following figure.
The map should have the information such as conductor type, conductor size, etc. The
color of existing system should be black and the color of new system to be installed should
be blue.
Map NO : 7A-55-8

1 2 GW 58
ACSR3315 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

21 22
220kV 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
GW 58
41 42 43 44 45 46 47ACSR48
250 49 50

51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
GW 58
ACSR 315
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90

91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

[Figure 7] Marking method of a route map

4. Numbering

4.1 Bay numbering system

The purposes of bay numbering system are as follows. The first is to grant substation
bay with the code. The second is to express the type of major distribution facilities. The

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 /11 Version 1.0
 Mapping

third is to use the codes to understand easily. The bay numbering codes are composed of
the following items.
A. The number of digits : 5
B. The meaning of first digit : The voltage of the bay
C. The meaning of second digit : Facility type
D. The meaning of third and fourth digit : Serial number
E. The meaning of fifth digit : Switch type
F. The detailed meanings of the digits are shown in the following table.

< Table 3 > Meanings of the bay digits

1st digit 2nd digit 3rd & 4th digit 5th digit
Voltage Facilities Type Serial Number Switch Type
1 : 11kV 1 : Feeder From 01 to 99 0 : Circuit Breaker
2 : 220kV 2 : Transformer Odd Number : 1 : B.B1 Isolator
3 : 30kV 3 : Bus Section Left Side 2 : B.B2 Isolator
6 : 66kV 4 : Bus Coupler Even Number : 3 : B.B3 Isolator
5 : Generator Right Side 4 : B.B4 Isolator
6 : Reactor 5 : Line Isolator
7 : Capacitor 6 : Earth Isolator
8 : Bus 7 : Reactor Isolator

MAJURI (Medelic) 30kV

UPPER BB3 BB4
LOWER BB1 BB2
31090
31070
31050
31030
31010
32010

33010

34010

33020

32020
31020
31040
31060
31080
31100
31120
20MVA

20MVA

HOSPITAL(2)
HOSPITAL(1)
NEW(34)-(36)-(1)

NEW(34)-(36)-(2)
SPARE
SPARE

SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
BUATNI SF6 (1)

BUATNI SF6 (2)

TR(1) 30-11kV

TR(2) 30-11kV

[Figure 8] Bay number sample of 30/11kV substation

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 /11 Version 1.0
 Mapping

4.2 Nameplate
4.2.1 Nameplate for substation
The next figure is the sample that shows bay numbering system of the 30/11kV
substation. This is the nameplate for circuit breaker to supply the feeder. The material
quality of nameplate is recommended by stainless steel or textile-glass reinforced plastic.
The characters and numbers on the nameplate by are depressed engraving method. The
color of the characters and numbers are recommended in black. These nameplates should
be attached to the front and back side of the bays.

4mm 4mm
4mm 42mm 30mm 30mm 30mm 30mm 30mm

30mm Number 3 1 0 2 0
98mm
Feeder
60mm
Name
ARABIC
4mm

200mm

[Figure 9] Circuit breaker nameplate sample for feeder

This is the nameplate for the circuit breaker to supply 500kVA transformer.

4mm 4mm
4mm 42mm 30mm 30mm 30mm 30mm 30mm

30mm Number 1 2 0 1 0
98mm

60mm Capacity 500KVA

4mm

200mm

[Figure 10] Circuit breaker nameplate sample for a transformer

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 /11 Version 1.0
 Mapping

This is the sample of bus section for 30kV bus.

4mm 4mm
4mm 42mm 30mm 30mm 30mm 30mm 30mm

30mm 38mm
Number 3 3 0 1 0

200mm

[Figure 11] Nameplate sample for other bays

4.2.2 Nameplate for other facilities

This is the sample of pole nameplate.

3mm
10mm

NUMBER
20mm

1 2A - 55
20mm

15mm
100mm

- 20 - 10
20mm

0 - 2601
20mm
10mm

20mm 20mm 20mm 20mm 20mm 20mm

120mm
5mm 5mm

130mm

[Figure 12] Nameplate sample for poles

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 /11 Version 1.0
 Mapping

Appendix A : Reference

KDS 3001 System General

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 /11 Version 1.0
 GDG 0300
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Earthing

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Definitions ······································································································1
3. Earth System and Resistance·······································································3
3.1 The purpose of earth································································································3
3.1.1 System earthing ·····························································································3
3.1.2 Facility earthing ·····························································································4
3.2 Allowance value of the earth resistance···································································4
3.3 Earthing conductor ··································································································5

4. Earthing Method ···························································································5

4.1 Selection of earthing method···················································································5
4.2 The number of earthing rods····················································································6
4.3 The connection of earthing conductor ·····································································7
4.4 Installation of earthing rod ······················································································7

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Allowance value of the earth resistance ······················································· 4

< Table 2 > Selection of bare copper earthing conductor size ········································· 5
< Table 3 > Number of earthing rods according to rough soil resistivity ························ 6

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] System earthing type of 66kV & medium voltage·········································· 4

[Figure 2] Arrangement of earthing rods ········································································ 7
[Figure 3] Earthing rods for a wooden pole or a concrete pole ······································· 8
[Figure 4] Earthing rods for a tubular pole······································································ 8

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ············································································································· 9
B Method of system earthing ···················································································· 10
C Earthing conductor size ························································································· 12
D Measurement of soil resistivity ············································································· 16
E Measurement result of soil resistivity ···································································· 21

v
 Earthing

1. Scope

This standard covers the earthing guideline for the wood pole and the concrete pole
supporting for 66kV, 30kV, 11kV, 0.4kV distribution system.

2. Definitions

Earth or Grounding
The conductive mass of the earth, whose electric potential at any point is conventionally
taken as zero

Earth(grounding) electrode
A conductor or group of conductors in intimate contact with and providing an electrical
connection to earth

Earth(grounding) electrode resistance

The resistance of an earth electrode to earth

Earth(Ground) potential rise(EPR or GPR)

The maximum electrical potential that a substation grounding grid may attain relative to
a distant grounding point assumed to be at the potential of remote earth. This voltage is
equal to the maximum grid current times the grid resistance

Mesh voltage
The maximum touch voltage within a mesh of a ground grid

Neutral conductor
A conductor connected to the neutral point of a system and capable of contributing to
the transmission of electrical energy

Potential gradient
The potential difference per unit length measured in the direction in which the potential
is maximum

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

Touch voltage
The potential difference between a grounded metallic structure and a point on the earth's
surface separated by a distance equal to the normal maximum horizontal reach,
approximately one meter

Transferred voltage
A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage is transferred into or out of the
substation from or to a remote point external to the substation site

Soil Resistivity
A factor such that the conduction-current density is equal to the electric field in the soil
divided by the resistivity

Step voltage
The potential difference between two points on the earth's surface, separated by distance
of one pace, which will be assumed to be one meter on the direction of maximum
potential gradient

Copper bonded earth rod

A steel rod is bonded by copper used for distribution system earthing or distribution
facilities earthing to reduce the earth resistance

Earth grid
A system of grounding electrodes consisting of inter-connected connectors buried in the
earth to provide a common ground for electrical devices and metallic structures

Earth mat
A grounding system formed by a grid of horizontally buried conductors and which
serves to dissipate the earth fault current to earth and also as an equipotential bonding
conductor system

Bonding conductor
A protective conductor providing equipotential bonding

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

3. Earth System and Resistance

3.1 The purpose of earth

The purpose of earthing for distribution facilities is different from the kinds of facilities
to be earthed. The one is the system earthing. This earthing is related to the neutral point of
the Y-connection transformer which should be earthed to the ground. The type of system
earthing largely affects the insulation design of distribution system and facilities, the
operation of the protective relays, and the stability. The other is the facility earthing. Some
distribution facilities should be earthed to the ground. The outer metallic parts of 66kV or
medium voltage devices such as transformers, switches, Circuit breakers, etc. Adequate
earthing is essential to the protection of life and facilities. Any 11kV or higher voltage
metallic facility that could expose the public to a source of dangerous potential should be
earthed.

3.1.1 System earthing

The purposes of the neutral point of Y-connection transformer are as follows.
A. Reduce the insulation level of the distribution devices and lines through preventing
from the phase-ground voltage rise of the sound phase when the earth fault occurs.
B. Prevent from the overvoltage by lightning surge, the arc of earth fault, etc.
C. Make sure of operating the overcurrent ground relay when the earth fault occurs.

The major causes of the unscheduled interruption of the distribution system are the earth
faults. The overvoltage magnitude of the sound phase depends on the value of the system
earthing impedance when the earth fault occurs. The overvoltage of the sound phase can
rise up to 3 times as the large as the nominal voltage when the system earthing
impedance (Zn) is infinite. Securing the proper fault current and the system stability we
will use the impedance (particularly reactance) earthing system because the insulation level
of the system is high enough. The type of system earthing for medium voltage distribution
system is a resistance earthing system which refers to the connection of the neutral of a
distribution transformer through the neutral earthing resistor to the station earth or to the
earth. The maximum phase-earth fault current should be within 1kA to reduce the impact
of the equipment received by the fault current. The minimum phase-earth fault current
should be decided considering the characteristics of protective devices (especially CTs).
The capacity of a resistor should be decided considering the protective devices, the
impedance of the system and the magnitude of phase-earth fault current.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

11kV

11kV
11kV
66kV or 30kV

Resistor

[Figure 1] System earthing type of 66kV & medium voltage

3.1.2 Facility earthing

Facilities earthing should not endanger a person or an animal that suffers fatal electrical
impact on surroundings of faulted facilities while a fault occurs. In case an earth fault
occurs, the potential gradient which is generated by the fault current flowing to the ground
can cause electrical danger to a person or an animal. Therefore, the ground resistance for
distribution facilities should be properly designed and constructed to prevent from these
dangers. Also, the ground resistance should have low resistance enough to flow the fault
current to the ground safely without the damage of distribution facilities.

3.2 Allowance value of the earth resistance

Earth resistance standard value of distribution facilities should keep within the value that
is given in table 1.

< Table 1 > Allowance value of the earth resistance

Voltage Level (kV)
Distribution facilities Remarks
66 30 11 0.4
Overhead ground wire 30Ω 50Ω - - Every pole
Surge arrester for feeders 20Ω 20Ω 20Ω -
Outer metallic parts of devices 10Ω 10Ω 10Ω 100Ω
1) 1)
Cable connection parts 10Ω 10Ω 10Ω -
Legs of steel tower 30Ω 30Ω - -
Steel post - - 10Ω -
Neutral point of overhead
- 10Ω 10Ω - Installation of a
transformer
resistor for 66kV
Neutral point of underground
5Ω 10Ω 10Ω - & 30kV
transformer
Surge arrester for transformers 5Ω 15Ω 15Ω
The neutral line of the last pole
- - - 100Ω Every branch line
of low voltage lines

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

Note :
1) 30kV and 66kV cable connection parts should be earthed by cross bonding type.

The earthing system for each facility should be separated basically. The earthing rods of
the separated earthing systems should be installed at least 3m distant. But, the earthing
system of each facility can be connected to each other in common to save the cost of
earthing system installation in the following restricted conditions.
A. The value of earth resistance should satisfy the most severe allowance resistance
value.
B. If the earth resistance is not less than 1Ω, the earth connections of the substation
such as outer metallic parts of devices, surge arrester, etc. and neutral must be
separated.

3.3 Earthing conductor

The bare copper will be used for the earthing conductor. 0.5 second will be applied as
the operating time of the protective device. The selected earthing conductor size will be as
follows according to the earth fault current.

< Table 2 > Selection of bare copper earthing conductor size

Earthing conductor size[mm2]
Earth fault current[kA] Visible and in
Normal condition
restricted area
5 16 25
10 35 50
12.5 50 70
16 50 50 ⅹ 2
20 70 50 ⅹ 2
25 50 ⅹ 2 70 ⅹ 2
31.5 50 ⅹ 2 70 ⅹ 2

4. Earthing Method

4.1 Selection of earthing method

According to the purpose value of earth resistance and of soil resistivity, the selection of
earthing materials can be changed. The mesh earthing system is suitable for the earthing

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

method for substations considering low earth resistance and the safety of substation
workers by shock voltage. The earthing rod system can be applicable to the other facilities.
On occasion we cannot get the target value because the value of the soil resistivity is too
high. At that time the buried earthing conductor system can be applicable along with the
earthing rod system as a suitable earthing method. But the design engineers can select the
earthing methods considering the soil resistivity and the costs of earthing methods.

4.2 The number of earthing rods

The number of earthing rods should be decided on the basis of the result of analysis and
measurement of soil resistivity. But in case it is difficult to analyze and to measure soil
resistivity, the number of earthing rods can be decided using the following rough soil
resistivity table.

< Table 3 > Number of earthing rods according to rough soil resistivity

Soil Number of earthing rods according to earth resistance

Remarks
resistivity (Ω-m) 10Ω 20Ω 25Ω 30Ω 50Ω
50 or lower 2S3P 2S1P 1S2P 1S2P 1S1P 1S : 1.5[m]
50 ~ 100 3S6P 3S1P 2S3P 2S1P 2S1P
100 ~ 300 - - 4S9P 3S6P 2S3P
300 ~ 500 - - - - 2S7P
500 or higher - - - - -
Note :
1) S means to install the earthing rods in series.
2) P means to install the earthing rods in parallel.

The calculation formula of earth resistance for the earthing rod is given as follows.
ρ 4l
R= (ln − 1)
2πl r
Where
R is the earth resistance in Ω..
ρ is the soil resistivity in Ω-m.
l is the length of the earthing rod in m.
r is the radius of the earthing rod in m.
The calculation formula of composition earth resistance by the earthing rods is given as
follows.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

η
Rc = n
1
∑R
i =1 i

Where
Rc is the composition earth resistance in Ω..

4.3 The connection of earthing conductor

The connection of earthing conductor should be to secure the electrical continuity
between the earthing conductor and the facility to be earthed and to prevent the potential
from occurring. The compressive sleeve connection method is used to connect between the
earthing conductors to secure electrical continuity and mechanical strength. The bolt
connection method is used to connect the earthing conductor to the facility to be earthed.

4.4 Installation of earthing rod

The earthing rod should be buried 0.5m deep from the ground level to prevent a person
from being damaged by shock voltage. It is desirable to install the earthing rods in series in
case two or more earthing rods are needed to get the target of earth resistance. In case it is
difficult to install the earthing rods in series. The earthing rod should be installed 2m
distant between the earthing rods to prevent from electrical interference in case the
earthing rods are installed in parallel.
6 4 8

2m

2m
3 1 2 10
Pole

7 5 9

: Earthing Rod
[Figure 2] Arrangement of earthing rods

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

Sleeve

0.5m
Earthing rod

2m
No distance

[Figure 3] Earthing rods for a wooden pole or a concrete pole

Sleeve

0.5m
Earthing rod

1m 2m

[Figure 4] Earthing rods for a tubular pole

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

Appendix A : References

KDS 3500 Earthing

IEEE std 80-2000 IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding
IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance,
IEEE std 81-1983
and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System
Electrical Installations of Buildings - Part 5-52: Selection and
IEC 60364-5-52 Erection of Electrical Equipment - Wiring Systems
Electrical Installations of Buildings - Part 5-54: Selection and
IEC 60364-5-54 Erection of Electrical Equipment - Earthing Arrangements,
Protective Conductors and Protective Bonding Conductors
Eurocode 1: Basis of design and actions on structures
Part 2.4 Actions on structures – Wind actions

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

Appendix B : Method of system earthing

1. Introduction
Most earthed systems employ some method of earthing the system neutral at one or
more points. These methods can be divided into two general categories: Solid earthing and
impedance earthing. Impedance earthing may be further divided into two categories:
Reactance earthing and resistance earthing. Each method refers to the nature of the external
circuit from system neutral to earth rather than to the degree of earthing. In each case the
impedance of the transformer whose neutral is earthed is in series with the external circuit.
A solidly earthed transformer may or may not furnish effective earthing to the system,
depending on the system source impedance. The neutral point of transformer may be
earthed as the following reasons.
A. Reduce the insulation level of distribution facilities and feeders avoiding the
phase-to-earth voltage rise.
B. Prevent from the overvoltage by the surge.
C. Operate the protective devices immediately and selectively when the earth fault
occurs.

2. Solid Earthing
Solid earthing is to earth the neutral point of transformer directly. This earthing method
reduces the insulation level of distribution facilities and feeders avoiding the phase-to-earth
voltage rise because the voltage of the sound phase rarely rises when the earth fault occurs.
The protective devices operate immediately and selectively because of the large fault
current. But this system makes worse the transient stability of the system because the earth
current is large and bad power factor. The impact of the large fault current shortens the
durability of the distribution facilities.

3. Resistance Earthing
Resistance earthing is to earth the neutral point of transformer through the resistor. This
method can reduce the earth fault current and improve the transient stability of the system.
But the loss occurs on the resistor through the unbalance current. The low resistance
earthing method has the advantage of immediate and selective clearing of the earth fault
current but resistors that the minimum earth fault current be large enough to positively
actuate the applied earth fault relay. High resistance earthing method is a method that can
be applied to existing medium voltage ungrounded systems to obtain the transient
overvoltage protection without the modification expense of adding earth relays to each

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

circuit. But high resistance earthing cannot reduce the phase-to-earth voltage rise enough.

4. Reactance Earthing
Reactance earthing is to earth the neutral point of transformer through the reactor. This
method can also reduce the earth fault current and improve the transient stability of the
system like resistance earthing. The loss doesn’t occur because there is on energy
consumption.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

Appendix C : Earthing conductor size

1. Condition
The earthing conductor should be satisfied with the following conditions.
A. Should not be cut off by the fault current within 5 seconds.
B. Should have the enough mechanical strength.
C. Should have enough resistivity to prevent from the partial potential gradient.
D. Should have the flexibility to ease the work installation.

2. Calculation of earthing conductor size

We can calculate the cross-sectional areas of the earthing conductor by the calculation
formula given in IEC 60364-5-54. The cross-sectional areas of the earthing conductors
shall not be less than the value determined either: by the following formula applicable only
for disconnection times not exceeding 5s:
I 2t
S=
k
Where
S is the cross-sectional area, in mm2;
I is the value (r.m.s) in A of prospective fault current for a fault of negligible impedance,
which can flow through the protective device;
t is the operating time of the protective device for automatic disconnection in s;
k is the factor dependent on the material of the protective conductor, the insulation and
other parts and the initial and the final temperatures.
If application of the formula produces non-standard sizes, conductors of a higher
standard cross-sectional area shall be used.
The factor k is determined from the following formula:

Qc ( β + 20°C ) θ f − θi
k= ln[1 + ]
ρ 20 β + θi

Where
Qc is the volumetric heat capacity of conductor material (J/°C mm3) at 20°C;
β is the reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity at 0°C for the conductor (°C);
ρ20 is the electrical resistivity of conductor material at 20°C (Ω mm);
θi is the initial temperature of conductor (°C);
θf is the final temperature of conductor (°C).

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

<Table C1> Value of parameters for different materials

Qc ( β + 20°C )
β 1) Qc2)
Material ρ 20 (Ω mm) ρ 20
(°C) (J/°C mm3)
( A smm 2 )
Cu 234.5 3.45 × 10-3 16.241 × 10-6 226
Al 228.0 2.50 × 10-3 28.264 × 10-6 148
Note :
1) Values taken from table 1 of IEC 60287-1-1
2) Values taken from table E2 of IEC 60853-2.

Values of k for insulated earthing conductors are as follow in case they are not
incorporated in cables and not bunched with other cables.

<Table C2> Values of k for insulated earthing conductors

Material of Temperature conductor
Conductor Temperature (°C) 1)
Insulated Copper Insulated Aluminum
insulation
Initial Final Values for k ( A smm 2 )
PVC 30 160 143 95
XLPE 30 250 176 116
Rubber 30 220 166 110
Note :
1) Temperature limits for various types of insulation are given in IEC 60724.

Value of k for bare conductors where there is no risk of damage to any neighboring
material by the temperature indicated is follow.

<Table C3> Value of k for bare earthing conductors

Material of Temperature conductor
Temperature (°C)
Copper Aluminum
Condition
Final
Initial Values for k ( A smm 2 )
Cu Al
Visible and in
30 500 300 228 125
restricted area1)
Normal
30 200 200 159 105
Conditions
Note :
1) Visible and in restricted area means the area that the normal persons cannot approach easily
such as the substations.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

3. Selection of earthing conductor size

The earthing conductor should be selected the earthing conductor bigger than the
earthing conductor calculated considering earth fault current and the operating time of the
protective device. These values are selected among the conductor described in the IEC
60364-5-52. The earthing conductor size is calculated in case of PVC and Bare copper
conductor. The selected PVC copper earthing conductor is shown in the following table.

<Table C4> Selection of PVC copper earthing conductors

Operating time of the protective device[Sec]
Earth fault current[kA]
0.1 0.5 1
5 16 25 35
10 25 50 70
12.5 35 70 95
16 50 95 120
20 50 120 150
25 70 150 185
31.5 70 185 240

The selected XLPE copper earthing conductor is shown in the following table.

<Table C5> Selection of XLPE copper earthing conductors

Operating time of the protective device[Sec]
Earth fault current[kA]
0.1 0.5 1
5 16 25 35
10 25 50 70
12.5 25 70 95
16 35 70 95
20 50 95 120
25 50 120 150
31.5 70 150 185

The selected rubber copper earthing conductor is shown in the following table.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

<Table C6> Selection of rubber copper earthing conductors

Operating time of the protective device[Sec]
Earth fault current[kA]
0.1 0.5 1
5 16 25 35
10 25 50 70
12.5 25 70 95
16 35 70 120
20 50 95 150
25 50 120 185
31.5 70 150 240

The selected bare copper earthing conductor for visible and in restricted area is shown in
the following table.

<Table C7> Selection of bare copper earthing conductors for visible and in restricted area
Operating time of the protective device[Sec]
Earth fault current[kA]
0.1 0.5 1
5 16 16 25
10 16 35 50
12.5 25 50 70
16 25 50 95
20 35 70 95
25 35 95 120
31.5 50 120 150

The selected bare copper earthing conductor for normal conditions is shown in the
following table.

<Table C8> Selection of bare copper earthing conductors for normal conditions
Operating time of the protective device[Sec]
Earth fault current[kA]
0.1 0.5 1
5 16 25 35
10 25 50 70
12.5 25 70 95
16 35 95 120
20 50 95 150
25 50 120 185
31.5 70 150 240

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

Appendix D : Measurement of soil resistivity

1. Soil Resistivity Measurement

Substation sites where the soil may possess uniform resistivity throughout the entire area
and to a considerable depth are seldom found. Typically, there are several layers, each
having a different resistivity. Often, lateral changes also occur, but in comparison to the
vertical ones, these changes usually are more gradual. Soil resistivity tests should be made
to determine if there are any important variations of resistivity with depth. The number of
such readings taken should be greater where the variations are large, especially if some
readings are so high as to suggest a possible safety problem. The Wenner four-pin method,
as shown in Figure D1, is the most commonly used technique. In brief, four probes are
driven into the earth along a straight line, at equal distances an apart, driven to a depth b.
The voltage between the two inner (potential) electrodes is then measured and divided by
the current between the two outer (current) electrodes to give a value of resistance R.
I

C1 P1 P2 C2
b
a a a
[Figure D1] Wenner four-pin method

Then,
4πaR
ρa =
2a a
1+ −
a + 4b
2 2
a + b2
2

Where
ρa is the apparent resistivity of the soil in Ω-m.
R is the measured resistance in Ω.
a is the distance between adjacent electrodes in m.
b is the depth of the electrodes in m.
If b is small compared to a, as is the case of probes penetrating the ground only a short
distance, the next formula can be applied to calculate the soil resistivity.
ρ a = 2πaR

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

2. The procedure of Wenner soil resistivity measurement method

2.1 Measurement instruments
The next instruments are needed for measuring the soil resistivity by Wenner method.
- Soil resistivity measuring instrument 1 set (Digital type)
- 4 or 5 Electrodes (Copper or Stainless, 50 ~ 100cm long)
- Measuring cable (2mm2, 50m) 2 sets
- Measuring cable (2mm2, 100m) 2 sets
- Insulation tape, a hammer, a tape measure (100m, 2 sets), etc.

2.2 Measuring procedures

A. Drive the current electrodes (C1, C2) and the potential electrodes (P1, P2) on the
measuring line by a hammer maintaining the equivalent distance (a) between each
electrode.

[Figure D2] Connection diagram

B. Each driven depth is not more than 1 over twentieth of the equivalent distance (a).
C. Connect the measuring cables to each electrode.
D. Operate the soil resistivity measuring instrument set.
E. Fill up the next soil resistivity measurement sheet.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

<Table D1> Soil resistivity measurement sheet

Electrodes Burial depth of
distance [m] electrodes [m] Resistance
NO Remarks
Current Voltage [Ω]
P1P2 C1C2
electrode electrode
R1 0.5 1.5
R2 1 3
R3 2 6
R4 3 9
R5 4 12
R6 5 15
R7 6 18
R8 7 21
R9 8 24
R10 9 27
R11 10 30
R12 15 45
R13 20 60
R14 30 90
R15 40 120
R16 50 150
R17 60 180
R18 70 210
R19 80 240
R20 90 270
R21 100 300
Note :
1) The electrode distance is the distance calculated between the potential electrodes P1 and P2
or between the current electrodes C1 and C2.

F. Repeat the procedures from A to E according to the change of the value of a like the
above sheet.
G. If the site is for the substation, make out the soil resistivity measurement sheet 2 times.
And the measuring line is along the diagonal direction of site.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

3. The procedure of simple soil resistivity measurement method

This measurement method is used for measuring the soil resistivity easily, practically
and timelessly.

3.1 Measurement instruments

The next instruments are needed for measuring the soil resistivity by the simple method.
- Soil resistivity measuring instrument 1 set (Digital type)
- 1 Earth electrode (Copper or Stainless, 100cm long)
- 2 Electrodes (Copper or Stainless, 50 ~ 100cm long)
- Measuring cable (2mm2, 50m) 1 set
- Measuring cable (2mm2, 40m) 1 set
- Insulation tape, a hammer, a tape measure (100m, 1 set), etc.

3.2 Measuring procedures

A. Drive the earth electrode E Lr m long like the next figure.

Lr

[Figure D3] Earth electrode installation diagram

B. Connect the terminals C1 and P1 of the measuring instrument to the installed

electrode.
C. Install the current electrode C at the distant place 30 times as long as the length of the
earth electrode from the earth electrode E. Connect the current electrode C to the terminal
C2 of the measuring instrument with measuring cable.
D. Install the potential electrode P at the distant place 62% of the distance between the E
and the C from the E. Connect the current electrode P to the terminal P2 of the measuring
instrument with measuring cable.
E. Operate the soil resistivity measuring instrument set. And check the measured earth
resistance.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

F. Calculate the soil resistivity from the measured earth resistance by the next equation.

2πLr R
ρa =
8L
ln( r ) − 1
d

Where,
Lr is the length of the earth electrode.
d is the diameter of the earth electrode.

E P C

0.62d

d
[Figure D4] Simple soil resistivity measurement method

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

Appendix E : Measurement result of soil resistivity

Soil Parameter The number of earthing rods

City Site
ρ1 [Ω-m] ρ2 [Ω-m] h [m] 10[Ω] 30[Ω] 50[Ω]
Geralsh S/S 102.21 20.37 2.89 4S1P 1S1P 1S1P
Seragshe S/S 239.04 29.04 2.58 N/A 3S1P 2S1P
Al Marse 153.14 2.04 1.14 4S1P 1S1P 1S1P
Regdalyen 768.43 31.05 3.93 N/A N/A 4S9P
Al Harsha 353.13 81.12 0.99 N/A 4S1P 2S1P
Tripoli Zaouae Sout 271.48 49.87 1.44 N/A 3S1P 2S1P
Zanjor 234.03 23.61 1.18 4S10P 2S1P 1S1P
Al Souanye
245.47 128.34 0.67 N/A 3S1P 2S1P
Downtown
Al Souanye
222.79 52.87 2.7 N/A 3S1P 2S1P
Sout
Gesrbugsare 113.21 26.86 1.47 4S1P 1S1P 1S1P
Sedascayha 496.28 175.27 2.6 N/A N/A 4S1P
Garyen S/S - - - - - -
Garyen
Olladbnyajaop 106.28 891 4.43 N/A 2S1P 1S1P
Al Manshya
26.31 64.94 0.58 1S1P 1S1P 1S1P
Sabha S/S
West Station 10.77 19.36 2.93 1S1P 1S1P 1S1P
Sarez Sup 43.41 5.99 1.55 1S1P 1S1P 1S1P
Sirte Elgarf 49.39 0.21 1.33 1S1P 1S1P 1S1P
Al Toulahe 281.13 88.34 8.05 N/A 4S1P 2S1P
Jdabuahe
Ajdabi 222.61 12.94 2.75 N/A 3S1P 2S1P
Center
ya
Jdabuahe Sout 91.61 8.65 0.82 2S1P 1S1P 1S1P
Industrial Area 167.69 2.95 3.02 4S9P 2S1P 1S1P
Tubruq Mandina
150.95 101.67 0.2 3S1P 2S1P 1S1P
Center
Downtown 216.79 180.66 2.67 N/A 3S1P 2S1P
Darnah
Seaside 41.8 193.41 0.36 3S1P 2S1P 1S1P
Algoba Sup 288.73 442.9 2.09 N/A 4S10P 3S1P
Algoba Algoba New
72.08 112.47 4.41 4S1P 1S1P 1S1P
S/S
Al Albayda Sout 255.86 34.33 1.77 N/A 3S1P 2S1P
Bayda Sosa 181.92 90.61 0.67 4S10P 2S1P 1S1P
Al Al Marj Sout 152.5 82.92 0.7 4S9P 2S1P 1S1P
Marj Downtown 15.44 9.79 0.35 1S1P 1S1P 1S1P
Bengha Training Center 0.84 2.97 12.59 1S1P 1S1P 1S1P
zi Bouatni 154.99 172.99 2.65 N/A 2S1P 1S1P
Misrata Abusnena 214.4 350.48 2.24 N/A 4S1P 2S1P

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 /22 Version 1.0
 Earthing

h Eazeer
184.2 105.52 0.97 N/A 2S1P 1S1P
(Downtown)
Albaza 20.69 5.88 0.3 1S1P 1S1P 1S1P
Zlitan
Montarha 190.29 8.16 11.43 N/A 3S1P 2S1P
Al Al Khums S/S 78.05 31.22 0.49 1S1P 1S1P 1S1P
Khums Farm Area 20.63 14.08 0.29 1S1P 1S1P 1S1P
Belshathe 95.59 6.4 4.63 3S1P 1S1P 1S1P
Tajura
Elgrarat 61.26 11.23 8.54 3S1P 1S1P 1S1P
Note :
1) N/A means the case not to get the target value even though 10 parallel earthing rods.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 /22 Version 1.0
 GDG 0400
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Protection Coordination for Medium Voltage

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ............................................................................................................. 1
2. Definition of Protection Coordination....................................................... 1
3. Objectives of Protection Coordination...................................................... 2
4. Consideration Factors................................................................................. 2
5. When to Review Protection Coordination ................................................ 2
6. Protection Coordination Method............................................................... 3
6.1 Coordination time interval ........................................................................................ 3
6.2 Number of operation ................................................................................................. 3

7. Recloser-to-Sectionalizer Coordination .................................................... 3

7.1 Installation ................................................................................................................ 3
7.2 Coordination principle .............................................................................................. 4

8. Recloser-to-Recloser Coordination............................................................ 5
8.1 Installation ................................................................................................................ 5
8.2 Coordination principle .............................................................................................. 5

9. OCR-to-Recloser Coordination ................................................................. 6

10. OCR-to-OCR Coordination ..................................................................... 6
11. Dead Time of Recloser .............................................................................. 7

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Dead time of recloser .................................................................................... 7

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Definition of protective devices based on location ......................................... 1

[Figure 2] Count to open of sectionalizer......................................................................... 4
[Figure 3] Sectionalizer memory time.............................................................................. 4
[Figure 4] Reclaim time of a recloser............................................................................... 5
[Figure 5] TCC curves illustrating coordination .............................................................. 6

iv
 LIST OF APPENDICES

A References ···································································································· 8
B Example of Fault Current Calculation ··························································· 9

v
 Protection Coordination for Medium Voltage

1. Scope

This standard is applicable to coordination of protective devices such as recloser,

sectionalizer and OCR for 11kV and 30kV distribution lines.

2. Definition of Protection Coordination

Generally, protective devices such as overcurrent relay and recloser are installed in
series more than one on distribution lines. These series devices whose zones of protection
overlap must be coordinated so that the device which is nearest to the fault may operate
before the upstream device next closest to the fault operates. That is, protection
coordination is the selection or setting of protective devices in order to isolate only the
portion of the system where the fault occurs.
When it comes to protection coordination, two conventional definition of protective
devices based on location should be distinguished. The protective device which is installed
on the downstream of the line is called a “protecting device” and the device which is
installed on the upstream of the line is called a “protected device” (sometimes called a
backup device). These definitions are based on the relative location of protective devices.

Protected device Protecting

or Back-up device device

S/S A B

Protecting
C
device

[Figure 1] Definition of protective devices based on location

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 11 Version 1.0
 Protection Coordination for Medium Voltage

3. Objectives of Protection Coordination

The overall objectives of protection coordination are as followings.

(a) To minimize damage to system equipment and circuits
(b) To protect the public and utility personnel from hazards caused by fault
(c) To promote reliability by preventing longer interruptions and minimizing interrupted
customers
(d) To ensure that the minimum unfaulted load is interrupted when the protective devices
isolate a fault or overload
(e) To provide satisfactory protection against overloads on the equipment and interrupt
short circuits as rapidly as possible

4. Consideration Factors

It is very difficult to prescribe exact location for protective devices to be installed and it
is not reasonable, too. But some basic factors shall be considered where to install
protective devices on the distribution lines.
(a) Coordination with other protective devices
(b) If possible, protective devices shall be installed on the downstream of the important
customers
(c) If possible, protective devices shall be installed on the upstream of the frequently
interrupted line

5. When to Review Protection Coordination

The protection coordination for a system shall be reviewed when :

(a) Protective devices are removed, installed or replaced
(b) Source impedance is changed
(c) A substantial amount of new or increased load is added to the system
(d) Conductors of primary lines are replaced by those with different size
(e) The length of primary lines is changed
(f) The operating voltage is changed
(g) The system protection scheme does not appear to be coordinating
(h) The setting value of other protective device is changed

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 11 Version 1.0
 Protection Coordination for Medium Voltage

6. Protection Coordination Method

Protection coordination methods are generally divided into two categories. The first one
is using coordination time intervals and the second one is using the number of operation.

6.1 Coordination time interval

Protective devices are able to be coordinated by coordination time interval and this
method is used when protective device with TCC (Time-current-characteristic) curve are
coordinated. Coordination of overcurrent relays with reclosers on distribution line is the
representative example.
The requirement for coordination is ;
▪ Operation time of protected device > Operation time of protecting device +
Coordination time interval

6.2 Number of operation

The difference between the numbers of operation of protective devices could be used as
a method for protection coordination. Recloser to sectionalizer coordination is the
representative example.
The requirement for coordination is ;
▪ The number of operation of protected device > The number of operation of protecting
device

7. Recloser-to-Sectionalizer Coordination

Protection coordination between recloser and sectionalizer does not depend on TCC
curve coordination but it only depends on the number of operation and reset time of
devices.

7.1 Installation
(a) Because a sectionalizer does not have the ability to interrupt fault current by itself,
the recloser shall be installed as a protected device when the sectionalizer is installed as a
protecting device on distribution line.
(b) The minimum number of count to open of sectionalizer shall be 2 in order to give a
chance for reclosers to remove temporary fault before the sectionalizer’s lockout.
Therefore the number of the sectionalizer which could be installed with the recloser in
series is restricted to up to 2.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 11 Version 1.0
 Protection Coordination for Medium Voltage

7.2 Coordination principle

(a) The sectionalizer shall be set to lock out in one or two less operation than the number
of trip to lockout of backup recloser.

Recloser Sectionalizer Sectionalizer

S/S A B C

Trip to lockout : 4 3 counts 2 counts

[Figure 2] Count to open of sectionalizer

(b) Total accumulated time (Total sum of opening and dead time) of backup recloser
shall be less than memory time of a sectionalizer.

First count Second count Third count

Sectionalizer opens

Memory time
Fault
current
Dead time Dead time
R1 F2 R2 F3 Time

☞ TAT(Total accumulated time)=R1+F2+R2+F3 < Memory time

[Figure 3] Sectionalizer memory time

(c) The pick up current of a recloser shall be lower than the minimum fault current of
section protected by a sectionalizer.
(d) The minimum actuating current of a sectionalizer shall be 80% of the minimum pick
up current of the source-side recloser.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 11 Version 1.0
 Protection Coordination for Medium Voltage

8. Recloser-to-Recloser Coordination

Protection coordination between recloser and recloser depends on TCC(Time-Current-

Characteristic) curve and the number of operation.

8.1 Installation
The maximum number of the recloser which can be installed in series is 3.

8.2 Coordination principle

(a) The pick up current of a recloser shall be greater than the maximum load current
where the recloser is installed.
(b) The pick up current of a recloser shall be less than the minimum fault current of the
protected section by the recloser.
(c) The number of trip to lockout of the protecting recloser is one less than that of the
protective recloser in series.
(d) The minimum number of trip to lockout of a recloser shall be 2 in order to give a
chance to remove temporary fault before lockout.
(e) Reclaim time shall be set to be longer than sum of opening, closing time and dead
time of a recloser.

Reclaim time
Fault
current Load
Dead time Dead time Dead time current
R1 F2 R2 F3 R3 Time

☞ R1+F2+R2+F3+R3 < Reclaim time

[Figure 4] Reclaim time of a recloser

(f) Dead time of protected recloser shall be same as that of protecting recloser.
(g) The operation time interval between two reclosers shall be lager than coordination
time interval.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 11 Version 1.0
 Protection Coordination for Medium Voltage

9. OCR-to-Recloser Coordination

Protection coordination between OCR for protection of distribution line and recloser
depends on TCC(Time-Current-Characteristic) curve.

(a) The pick up current of the OCR shall be greater than the maximum load current
where the recloser is installed.
(b) The pick up current of the OCR shall be lower than the minimum fault current
where the recloser is installed.
(c) The pick up current of the recloser shall be greater than the maximum load current
where the recloser is installed.
(d) The pick up current of the recloser shall be less than the minimum fault current of the
protected section by the recloser.
(e) TCC curves of the OCR and the recloser shall be carefully selected so that protective
devices may be coordinated.

Time

OCR

Recloser Coordination
time interval

Current

[Figure 5] TCC curves illustrating coordination

10. OCR-to-OCR Coordination

Protection coordination between upstream OCR and downstream OCR depends on

TCC(Time-Current-Characteristic) curve.
(a) The pick up current of the OCR shall be greater than the maximum load current of
line protected by the OCR.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 11 Version 1.0
 Protection Coordination for Medium Voltage

(b) The pick up current of the upstream OCR shall be lower than the minimum fault
current where the downstream OCR is installed.
(c) The pick up current of the OCR shall be less than the minimum fault current of the
protected section by the OCR.
(d) TCC curves of the stream and downstream OCR shall be carefully selected so that
protective devices may be coordinated.

11. Dead Time of Recloser

A wide range of dead time (reclosing interval) can be programmed on electronically

controlled reclosers; from 0.1s to 60s.

< Table 1 > Dead time of recloser

Reclosing Minimum value Maximum value Step
0.1s 1s 0.1s
1st
1s 60s 1s
2nd 1s 60s 1s
3rd 1s 60s 1s

(a) Shorter dead time (0.1s or so) provides the best chance of maintaining motor loads
such as industrial supply. Short dead time is frequently desirable for the first reclosing in
the sequence. However there are disadvantages. Short dead time may not allow sufficient
time to clear temporary faults such as a tree limb in contact with a line. Also, ionized gases
from the fault arc may not have dissipated.
(b) The two or five second dead time provides more time for temporary faults to clear and
ionized gases to dissipate, but it increases the possibility of motor loads dropping off.
(c) Longer dead time (10s or 15s) generally are used if the back-up protection is a
mechanical relay controlled breaker. This allows the timing disk on the overcurrent relay
more time to fully reset.
Standard dead times of recloser on 11kV and 30kV lines are 2seconds-2seconds-5seconds,
but dead times can be changeable taking into account fault causes, characteristics of lines
and back- up devices.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 11 Version 1.0
 Protection Coordination for Medium Voltage

Appendix A : References

IEC60255-3 Single input energizing quantity measuring relays with dependent or

independent time
IEC60909-0 Short –circuit currents in three-phase a.c. systems-Calculation of
currents
IEEE Std242 IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of
Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
IEEE C37.60 High voltage switchgear and controlgear – Parr111 : Overhead, pad-
mounted, dry vault and submersible automatic circuit reclosers and fault
interrupters for alternating current systems up to 38kV
IEEE C37.63 IEEE standard requirements for overhead, pad-mounted, dry-vault and
submersible automatic line sectionalizers for AC systems.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 11 Version 1.0
 Protection Coordination for Medium Voltage

Appendix B : Example of Fault Current Calculation

This appendix shows an example of fault current calculation. Nowadays fault current
calculation is done by computer program, but hand calculation could be done for simple
radial distribution line.

1. Fault current equation

Fault currents are expressed by following equations.

a. Three-phase fault current

V
I3 f =
Z1 + Z f

b. Line-to-line fault current

3V
I ll =
Z1 + Z 2 + Z f

c. Line-to-ground fault current

3V
I1 f =
Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f

Where,
V is rms value of voltage to ground at the fault prior to the occurrence of fault,
Z 0 , Z 1 and Z 2 are total zero sequence, positive sequence and negative sequence
impedances viewed from the fault location,
Zf is the fault impedance.

2. Example

220kV 30kV 2km 11kV 4km

1 2 3 4 5

T1 =50MVA T2 =10MVA Fault

[Figure 1] Single line diagram

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 11 Version 1.0
 Protection Coordination for Medium Voltage

□ Calculation conditions(Impedance)

○ Source impedances at 220kV(node 1) : Z1 =0.05+j0.05pu, Z 0 =0.1+j0.15pu

(Base MVA : 100MVA, Base kV : 220kV)

○ T1 (50MVA Transformer) : X=10%

○ 30kV line : Z 1 =0.22+j0.35(Ω/km), Z 0 =0.3+j0.38(Ω/km)

○ T2 (10MVA Transformer) : X=5%

○ 11kV line : Z 1 =0.27+j0.38(Ω/km), Z 0 =0.35+j0.47(Ω/km)

Because source impedance is calculated on 100MVA base, let 100MVA be a base for
system and other values on other than 100MVA base need to be transformed to values on
100MVA base.

Percent transformer impedance is based on the transformer rating. The stated

impedances of T1 and T2 should be converted to impedances on new base.
100
For T1 , Z 1 =j0.1× =j0.2pu
50
100
For T2 , Z 1 =j0.05× =j0.5pu
10

For distribution lines of 30kV and 11kV, impedances are stated in ohms. To get per-unit
values, designate base kV as 30kV and 11kV for each line. Therefore, per-unit impedances
for each line can be calculated as followings.
1000 E 2 1000(30) 2
For 30kV line(node2-node3), Z B = = =9Ω
KVAB 100000
1000 E 2 1000(11) 2
For 11kV line(node4-node5). Z B = = =1.21Ω
KVAB 100000

Total impedances of distribution lines are

For 30kV line(node2-node3), Z 1 =(0.22+j0.35)×2/9 = 0.049+j0.078 pu
Z 0 =(0.30+j0.38)×2/9 = 0.067+j0.084 pu
For 11kV line(node4-node5), Z 1 =(0.27+j0.38)×4/1.21=0.893+j1.256 pu
Z 0 =(0.35+j0.47) ×4/1.21=1.157+j1.554 pu

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 11 Version 1.0
 Protection Coordination for Medium Voltage

Now that the per-unit impedances for all system are calculated, those values can be
rewritten in below table.

Section Z1 , Z 2 Z0
Source-1 0.05+j0.05 0.1+j0.15pu
1-2 j0.2 j0.2
2-3 0.049+j0.078 0.067+j0.084
3-4 j0.5 j0.5
4-5 0.893+j1.256 1.157+j1.554

The impedance viewed from fault location is the sum of impedances of all section. But,
Delta-Wye solidly earthed transformer does not reflect all zero impedances. Zero
impedances of section 3-4 and 4-5 only are taken into consideration when fault current at
node 5 is calculated.
The impedances Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 0 viewed from fault location are
Z 1 = Z 2 =0.992+j2.084 pu = (0.992+j2.084)×1.21=1.200+j2.522 Ω
Z 0 =1.324+j2.488 pu= (1.324+j2.488)×1.21=1.602+j3.010 Ω
Let the fault impedance Zf be 0(bolted fault) and the faulted currents are as followings.

V 11000 / 3
Three-phase fault current I 3 f = = =2,274A
Z1 + Z f 2.7927

3 ×V 11000
Line-to-line fault current I ll = = =1,969A
Z 1 + Z 2 + Z f 2 × 2.7927

3V 3 × 11000 / 3
Line-to-ground fault current I 1 f = = =2,118A
Z 1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f 8.9936

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 11 Version 1.0
 GDG 0500
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Anti Pollution

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Definitions ······································································································1
3. Pollution Evaluation ·····················································································1
3.1 Pollution types ·······································································································1
3.1.1 Active pollution···························································································2
3.1.2 Inert pollution······························································································2
3.2 Pollution severity levels ·························································································3
3.3 Minimum nominal specific creepage distance························································3
3.4 Relation between pollution levels and ESDD/NADD ············································4

4. Decision of Materials by Pollution Levels ··················································5

4.1 Insulator ·················································································································5
4.2 Overhead devices ···································································································6

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Salts characteristics······················································································ 2

< Table 2 > Pollution severity level ················································································ 3
< Table 3 > Minimum nominal specific creepage distance ············································· 4
< Table 4 > Values of ESDD and NSDD according to the pollution level······················· 4
< Table 5 > Insulator type and no. of according to the pollution level ···························· 5
< Table 6 > Insulator type and no. of according to the pollution level ···························· 6

iii
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A Reference ·············································································································· 7
B Pollution collection method ··················································································· 8
C ESDD calculation ·································································································· 9
D NSDD calculation ·································································································· 12

iv
 Anti Pollution

1. Scope

This standard describes the types of the insulators and the insulation parts of distribution
facilities needed according to the pollution level. This standard is applicable to outdoor
ceramic, glass and composite insulators. This standard describes the selection methods of
insulators under polluted conditions. This standard gives how to select the insulators which
should give satisfactory performance under polluted conditions on the basis of
measurement results.

2. Definitions

Salt and dust pollution

The contamination of electric facilities by particles caused by the sea, the desert and
industries

Creepage distance
The surface distance is measured across the surface of the insulator.

Specific creepage distance

The ratio of the surface distance to the each kilovolt (phase to phase) can endure
without breaking the insulation

Equivalent Salt Deposit Density (ESDD)

The amount of salt in the deposit on a given surface of the insulator (metal parts and
assembling materials are not to be included in this surface), divided by the surface area.

Non Soluble material Deposit Density (NSDD)

The weight of non soluble pollutants in the deposit on a given surface of the insulator
(Metallic parts and assembling materials are not to be included in this surface), divided
by the surface area.

3. Pollution Evaluation

3.1 Pollution types

The in-service withstand voltage of insulator strings can be influenced by different types

GECO Oct 7, 2007

1 /12
Version 1.0
 Anti Pollution

of pollution such as active pollution and inert pollution.

3.1.1 Active pollution

This pollution is directly at the origin of leakage currents and resulting phenomena
(arcing activity, flashover) which lead to the reduction of the insulator string withstand
voltage. Active pollution can itself be classified in two types :
- Conductive pollution : metallic deposits, bird droppings, acid rain, salt fog,
- Pollution that needs to dissolve : salt deposit near the sea, salt contained in desert sand,
gypsum coming from the soil or quarries, cement, fly ash, chemical pollution due to
industrial activity or using of fertilizers and treatments in agriculture and so on.
As for conductive pollution, the global conductance of the pollution layer is the principal
element in the severity level. But in the case of soluble salts, the global conductance
depends on the amount of pollution in a dissolved state and therefore on the amount of
water spread on the insulator surface. Two salt characteristics, the solubility and the
dissolving rapidity, are important (see table 1, the classification of salts according to their
solution properties). For example, more a pollution is soluble and fast dissolving, less the
pollution layer needs water (rain, fog, etc.) and time to form a highly conductive layer and
eventually time to lead to the flashover. In the other hand, this type of pollution is
generally easily purged. For a same severity level, the insulator string withstand voltage
can then depend on salt properties and on the wetting process characteristics.

< Table 1 > Salts characteristics

Low dissolving salts High solubility salts
Fast dissolving salts MgCl2, NaCl
Slow dissolving salts MgSO4, Na2SO4, CaSO4 NaNO3, Ca(NO3)2, ZnCl2

3.1.2 Inert pollution

This type of pollution is not conductive but can indirectly influence the withstand
voltage of an insulator string. If the material constituting inert pollution is hydrophilic, as
for example kaolin and tonoko used in artificial pollution tests, water didn’t stay in the
shape of droplets but forms a film. In addition, a thicker water film is retained on the
insulator surface. During wetting periods, more soluble salts are dissolved in a continuous
film of solution and therefore the global conductance is higher. Some laboratory tests show
that for a same amount of active pollution an insulator string withstand voltage can
decrease of 50%, when the inert pollution amount varies from 0.1 mg/cm2 to 30 mg/cm2.

GECO Oct 7, 2007

2 /12
Version 1.0
 Anti Pollution

3.2 Pollution severity levels

Four levels of pollution are qualitatively defined, from light pollution to very heavy
pollution according to IEC Publication 815. The table below gives, for each level of
pollution, an approximate description of some typical corresponding environments. Other
extreme environmental conditions exist which merit further consideration, e.g. snow and
ice in heavy pollution, heavy rain, and arid areas.

< Table 2 > Pollution severity level

Pollution level Examples of typical environments
a. Areas without industries and with low density of houses
equipped with heating plants
b. Areas with low density of industries or houses but subjected to
frequent winds and/or rainfall
I -Light
c. Agricultural areas
d. Mountainous areas
All these areas shall be situated at least 10 km to 20 km from the
sea and shall not be exposed to winds directly from the sea
a. Areas with industries not producing particularly polluting
smoke and/or with average density of houses equipped with
heating plants
II -Medium b. Areas with high density of houses and/or industries but
subjected to frequent winds and/or rainfall
c. Areas exposed to wind from the sea but not too close to the
coast (at least several kilometers distant)
a. Areas with high density of industries and suburbs of large cities
with high density of heating plants producing pollution
III -Heavy
b. Areas close to the sea or in any case exposed to relatively strong
winds from the sea
a. Areas generally of moderate extent, subjected to conductive
dusts and to industrial smoke producing particularly thick
conductive deposits
b. Areas generally of moderate extent, very close to the coast and
IV -Very heavy exposed to sea-spray or to very strong and polluting winds from
the sea
c. Desert areas, characterized by no rain for long periods, exposed
to strong winds carrying sand and salt, and subjected to regular
condensation

3.3 Minimum nominal specific creepage distance

For each level of pollution described in Table 1, the corresponding minimum nominal
specific creepage distance, in mm/kV (phase-to-phase) of the highest voltage for

GECO Oct 7, 2007

3 /12
Version 1.0
 Anti Pollution

equipment, is given in Table 2.

< Table 3 > Minimum nominal specific creepage distance

Pollution level Minimum nominal specific creepage distance (mm/kV)
I -Light 16
II -Medium 20
III -Heavy 25
IV -Very heavy 31
Note :
1) If the minimum nominal specific creepage distance exceeds 31mm/kV, another pollution
level “V-Extra very heavy” can be applied.

3.4 Relation between pollution levels and ESDD/NADD

Table 2 gives typical ESDD/NSDD values for standard cap and pin insulators. These
values are deduced from results of some artificial pollution tests (performed according to
solid layer methods described in IEC publication 507) and from field measurements. Some
insulator characteristics, for example profile, have an important influence on the pollution
quantity deposed on insulators themselves. Therefore, these typical values are only
available for standard glass or porcelain cap and pin insulators. For field measurements and
in order to determine a pollution severity level of a site, the ESDD/NSDD values are
maximum values obtained during a measurement period. The accuracy of the obtained
pollution severity level value depends on the duration of the measurement period and on
the frequency of measurements.

< Table 4 > Values of ESDD and NSDD according to the pollution level
Pollution level ESDD and NSDD (mg/cm2)

I -Light 0.03 < ESDD < 0.06 and NSDD < 0.3

0.1 < ESDD < 0.2 and NSDD < 0.3

II -Medium
or 0.03 < ESDD < 0.06 and 0.3 < NSDD < 3
0.3 < ESDD < 0.6 and NSDD < 0.3
III -Heavy or 0.1 < ESDD < 0.2 and 0.3 < NSDD < 3
or 0.03 < ESDD <0.06 and 3 < NSDD
1<ESDD
IV -Very heavy or 0.3 < ESDD < 0.6 and 0.3 < NSDD < 3
or 0.1 < ESDD < 0.2 and 3 < NSDD

GECO Oct 7, 2007

4 /12
Version 1.0
 Anti Pollution

4. Decision of Materials by Pollution Levels

4.1 Insulator
The number of and types of insulators are as follows according to the pollution levels.

< Table 5 > Insulator type and no. of according to the pollution level
Pollution Number of
Type of Insulator Remarks
Level Insulators
Standard line post 381 × 165 1 30kV
Standard ball & socket 255 × 146, 70kN 4 30kV
Fog ball & socket 280 × 146, 70kN 3 30kV
I
Composite DS-35 1 30kV
Standard ball & socket 255 × 146, 70kN 2 11kV
Standard pin 191 × 146 1 11kV
Standard line post 381 × 165 1 30kV
Standard ball & socket 255 × 146, 70kN 4 30kV
Fog ball & socket 280 × 146, 70kN 3 30kV
II
Composite DS-35 1 30kV
Standard ball & socket 255 × 146, 70kN 2 11kV
Standard pin 191 × 146 1 11kV
Fog line post 432 × 178 1 30kV
Fog ball & socket 280 × 146, 70kN 3 30kV
III Composite DS-46 1 30kV
Fog ball & socket 280 × 146, 70kN 2 11kV
Standard pin 191 × 146 1 11kV
Fog line post 508 × 190 1 30kV
Fog ball & socket 280 × 146, 70kN 4 30kV
IV Composite DS-69 1 30kV
Fog ball & socket 280 × 146, 70kN 2 11kV
Fog pin 229 × 165 1 11kV

GECO Oct 7, 2007

5 /12
Version 1.0
 Anti Pollution

4.2 Overhead devices

The types of Drop Out fused Switches, Surge Arresters and Overhead devices are as
follows according to the pollution levels.

< Table 6 > Insulator type and no. of according to the pollution level
Pollution
Type of Insulator Spec NO. Remarks
Level
Drop Out fused Switch 3491011 11kV
Drop Out fused Switch 3491014 30kV
Surge Arrester 307101 11kV
Surge Arrester 307104 30kV
Load break switch for OH 400A 3415021 11kV
II
Load break switch for OH 400A 3415061 30kV
Load break switch for OH630A 3415063 30kV
Auto Reclosing circuit breaker 400A 3416021 11kV
Auto Reclosing circuit breaker 400A 3416061 30kV
Auto Reclosing circuit breaker 630A 3416063 30kV
Drop Out fused Switch 3491012 11kV
Drop Out fused Switch 3491015 30kV
Surge Arrester 307102 11kV
Surge Arrester 307105 30kV
Load break switch for OH 400A 3415031 11kV
III
Load break switch for OH 400A 3415071 30kV
Load break switch for OH630A 3415073 30kV
Auto Reclosing circuit breaker 400A 3416031 11kV
Auto Reclosing circuit breaker 400A 3416071 30kV
Auto Reclosing circuit breaker 630A 3416073 30kV
Drop Out fused Switch 3491013 11kV
Drop Out fused Switch 3491016 30kV
Surge Arrester 307103 11kV
Surge Arrester 307106 30kV
Load break switch for OH 400A 3415041 11kV
IV
Load break switch for OH 400A 3415081 30kV
Load break switch for OH630A 3415083 30kV
Auto Reclosing circuit breaker 400A 3416041 11kV
Auto Reclosing circuit breaker 400A 3416081 30kV
Auto Reclosing circuit breaker 630A 3416083 30kV

GECO Oct 7, 2007

6 /12
Version 1.0
 Anti Pollution

Appendix A : References

IEC 60815 Guide for the selection of insulators in respect of polluted conditions
IEC 60507 Artificial pollution tests on high-voltage insulators to be used on a.c.
systems
ANSI C29.6 Wet-process – Porcelain Insulators – High-Voltage Pin Type
ANSI C29.7 Wet-process – Porcelain Insulators – High-Voltage Line-Post Type
KDS 3900 Anti-pollution standard

GECO Oct 7, 2007

7 /12
Version 1.0
 Anti Pollution

Appendix B : Pollution collection method

The surfaces of the insulator should not be touched to avoid any loss of pollution.
a. Put on clean surgical gloves.
b. A container, a measuring cylinder, etc. shall be washed well enough to remove
electrolyte prior to the measurement.
c. Distilled water of 100 - 300 cm3 (or more if required) shall be put into labeled
containers and absorbent cotton shall be immersed into the water (other tools such as a
brush or a sponge could be used). Conductivity of the water with the immersed cotton shall
be less than 0.001 S/m.
d. The pollutants shall be wiped off separately from the top and the bottom surfaces of a
cap and pin type insulator with the squeezed cotton. In the case of a long-rod or a post
insulator, pollutants shall usually be collected from a part of the shed as shown in Figure
B1.
e. The cotton with pollutants shall be put back into the labeled containers as shown in
Figure B1. The pollutants should be dissolved into the water by shaking and squeezing the
cotton in the water.
f. Wiping shall be repeated until no further pollutants remain on the insulator surface. If
pollutants remain even after wiping several times, pollutants shall be removed by a spatula,
and be put into the water containing the pollutants.
g. Attention should be taken not to lose the water. That is, the quantity shall not be changed
very much before and after collecting pollutants.

[Figure B1] Wiping of pollutants on the insulator surface

GECO Oct 7, 2007

8 /12
Version 1.0
 Anti Pollution

Appendix C : ESDD calculation

The conductivity and the temperature of the water containing the pollutants shall be
measured. The measurements are made after enough stirring of the water. Short stirring
time, e.g., a few minutes, is required for the high solubility pollutants. The low solubility
pollutants generally require longer stirring time, e.g., 30 - 40 minutes. The conductivity
correction shall be made using the next formula. This calculation is based on Clause 16.2
and Clause 7 of IEC Standard 60507.

σ 20 = σ θ [1 − b(θ − 20)]

Where
θ is the solution temperature (°C)
σ θ is the volume conductivity at temperature of θ °C (S/m).
σ 20 is the volume conductivity at temperature of 20 °C (S/m).
b is the factor depending on temperature of θ , as obtained by the next formula, and
as shown in Figure C1.

b = −3,200 × 10 −8 θ 3 + 1,032 × 10 −5 θ 2 − 8,272 × 10 −4 θ + 3,544 × 10 −2

0.035
temperature θ)
b (Factor depending on

0.03

0.025

0.02

0.015
5 15 25 35
θ (solution temperature), °C

[Figure C1] Value of b

GECO Oct 7, 2007

9 /12
Version 1.0
 Anti Pollution

The ESDD on the insulator surface shall be calculated by the next formulas. This
calculation is based on Clause 16.2 of IEC Standard 60507. The relation between σ20 and
Sa (Salinity, kg/m3) is shown in Figure C2.

Sa = (5.7σ 20 )1.03

ESDD= Sa × V / A

Where
σ 20 is the volume conductivity at temperature of 20 °C (S/m).
ESDD is Equivalent salt deposit density (mg/cm2).
V is the volume of distilled water (cm3).
A is the area of the insulator surface for collecting pollutants (cm2).

1
Sa (kg / m3 )

0.1

0.01

0.001
0.001 0.01 0.1
σ 20 ( S / m)
[Figure C2] Relation between σ20 and Sa

Note :
1) For a close ESDD measurement in the range of 0.001 mg/cm2, it is recommended to use
every low conductivity water, e.g., less than a few 10-4 S/m. Normal distilled/demineralized
water less than 0.001 S/m also can be used for this purpose by subtracting the equivalent salt
amount of the water itself from the measured equivalent salt amount of the water containing
pollutants.

GECO Oct 7, 2007

10 /12
Version 1.0
 Anti Pollution

2) Quantity of the distilled/demineralized water depends on kind and amount of pollutants.

Large quantity of water is recommended for measurements of very heavy pollution or low
solubility pollutants. In practice, 2-10 liters of water per m2 of the cleaned surface can be
used. In order to avoid underestimating the amount of pollutants, the quantity of the water
would be so increased to have the conductivity less than around 0.2 S/m. If very high
conductivity is measured, there might be some doubt of remaining pollutants not dissolved
due to small amount of water.
3) Stirring time before conductivity measurement depends on kind of pollutants. For low
solubility pollutants, conductivity is measured at some interval with time up to about 30 – 40
minutes and is determined when the measured values level off. To dissolve pollutants
quickly, special methods such as boiling method and ultrasonic method can also be used.

GECO Oct 7, 2007

11 /12
Version 1.0
 Anti Pollution

Appendix D : NSDD calculation

The water containing pollutants after measuring ESDD shall be filtered out by using a
funnel and pre-dried and weighed filter paper (grade xxx). The filter paper containing
pollutants shall be dried, and then be weighed as shown in Figure D1.

Filter paper
Filter paper
Residuum
Weighing
Drying
Pollutant
solution

Residuum

[Figure D1] Procedure of measuring NSDD

Note :
1) The quantitative chemical analysis would be made on pollutant solution and residuum after
the measurement to identify chemical components of the pollutants. The analysis results
might be useful for close examination of pollution conditions.

The NSDD shall be calculated by the next formula.

NSDD = 1000(W f − Wi ) / A

Where
NSDD is non-soluble material deposit density (mg/cm2).
Wf is the weight of the filter paper containing pollutants under dry condition (g).
Wi is the initial weight of the filter paper under dry condition (g).
A is the area of the insulator surface for collecting pollutants (cm2).

GECO Oct 7, 2007

12 /12
Version 1.0
 GDG 0600
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Insulation Coordination

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Definitions ······································································································1
3. Outline of Insulation Coordination·····························································8
3.1 Basic concept ··········································································································8
3.2 Power-frequency voltage of distribution system······················································8
3.2.1 Nominal voltage of the system·······································································8
3.2.2 Highest voltage of the system ········································································8
3.2.3 Highest voltage for equipment (Um)·······························································9
3.3 Overvoltages ···········································································································9
3.3.1 Temporary overvoltage ··················································································9
3.3.2 Switching impulse ·························································································9
3.3.3 Lightning impulse ··························································································9
4. Application of Insulation Coordination····················································10
4.1 66kV power system ·······························································································10
4.1.1 The withstand voltage of main facilities ······················································10
4.1.2 Overhead ground wire··················································································10
4.1.3 Surge arrester ······························································································· 11
4.1.4 Line insulation level····················································································· 11
4.2 30kV power system ······························································································· 11
4.2.1 The withstand voltage of main facilities ······················································ 11
4.2.2 Overhead ground wire··················································································12
4.2.3 Surge arrester ·······························································································12
4.2.4 Line insulation level·····················································································13
4.3 11kV power system ·······························································································13
4.3.1 The withstand voltage of main facilities ······················································13
4.3.2 Surge arrester ·······························································································13
4.3.3 Line insulation level·····················································································14
5. Lightning Failure Rate ···············································································14
5.1 Lightning failure rate·····························································································14

ii
5.2 Frequency of flashover for 66kV lines ··································································14

iii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Power-frequency voltage of distribution system ·········································· 9

< Table 2 > Temporary overvoltage ················································································ 9
< Table 3 > Withstand voltage of main facilities for 66kV············································ 10
< Table 4 > Withstand voltage of main facilities for 30kV············································ 11
< Table 5 > Withstand voltage of main facilities for 11kV············································ 13
< Table 6 > Lightning failure rate for substation··························································· 14
< Table 7 > Frequency of flashover for 66kV lines ······················································· 14

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ··············································································································· 15
B Determination of insulation level ········································································· 16
C Lightning impulse for substation ·········································································· 17
D Induced lightning impulse study ·········································································· 42
E Lightning failure rate ···························································································· 60

v
 Insulation Coordination

1. Scope

This standard can help make reasonable insulation coordination system by presenting
insulation coordination and basic insulation design standard of 66kV, 30kV and 11kV
system which should avoid that flashover happens by internal overvoltages of system and
should keep proper reliability about external overvoltages of system.

2. Definitions

Insulation coordination
The selection of the dielectric strength of equipment in relation to the voltages which
can appear on the system for which the equipment is intended and taking into account
the service environment and the characteristics of the available protective devices.
Dielectric strength of the equipment is meant here its rated or its standard insulation
level.

External insulation
The distances in atmospheric air, and the surfaces in contact with atmospheric air of
solid insulation of the equipment which are subject to dielectric stresses and to the
effects of atmospheric and other external conditions, such as pollution, humidity, vermin,
etc External insulation is either weather-protected or non-weather-protected, designed to
operate inside or outside closed shelters respectively.

Internal insulation
The internal solid, liquid, or gaseous parts of the insulation of equipment which are
protected from the effects of atmospheric and other external conditions

Self-restoring insulation
The internal so Insulation which completely recovers its insulating properties after a
disruptive discharge This definition applies only when the discharge is caused by the
application of a test voltage during a dielectric test. However, discharges occurring in
service may cause a self-restoring insulation to lose partially or completely its original
insulating properties.

Non-self-restoring insulation
Insulation which loses its insulating properties, or does not recover them completely,

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

after a disruptive discharge This definition applies only when the discharge is caused by
the application of a test voltage during a dielectric test. However, discharges occurring
in service may cause a self-restoring insulation to lose partially or completely its original
insulating properties.

Insulation configuration terminal

Any of the electrodes between any two of which a voltage that stresses the insulation
can be applied The types of terminal are:
a) Phase terminal, between which and the neutral is applied in service the phase-to
neutral voltage of the system;
b) Neutral terminal, representing, or connected to, the neutral point of the system
(neutral terminal of transformers, etc.);
c) Earth terminal, always solidly connected to earth in service (tank of transformers,
base of disconnectors, structures of towers, ground plane, etc.).

Insulation configuration
The complete geometric configuration of the insulation in service, consisting of the
insulation and of all terminals It includes all elements (insulating and conducting) which
influence its dielectric behavior. The following insulation configurations are identified:
- Three-phase: having three phase terminals, one neutral terminal and one earth terminal.
- Phase-to-earth: a three-phase insulation configuration where two phase terminals are
disregarded and, except in particular cases, the neutral terminal is earthed.
- Phase-to-phase: a three-phase insulation configuration where one phase terminal is
disregarded. In particular cases, the neutral and the earth terminals are also disregarded.
- Longitudinal, having two phase terminals and one earth terminal. The phase terminals
belong to the same phase of a three-phase system temporarily separated into two
independently energized parts (open switching devices). The four terminals belonging to
the other two phases are disregarded or earthed. In particular cases one of the two phase
terminals considered is earthed.

Nominal voltage of a system

A suitable approximate value of voltage used to designate or identify a system

Highest voltage of a system

The highest value of operating voltage which occurs under normal operating conditions
at any time and at any point in the system

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

Highest voltage for equipment (Um)

The highest r.m.s. value of phase-to-phase voltage for which the equipment is designed
in respect of its insulation as well as other characteristics which relate to this voltage in
the relevant equipment Standards

Isolated neutral system

A system where the neutral point is not intentionally connected to earth, except for high
impedance connections for protection or measurement purposes

Solidly earthed neutral system

A system whose neutral point(s) is(are) earthed directly

Impedance earthed (neutral) system

A system whose neutral point(s) is(are) earthed through impedances to limit earth fault
currents

Resonant earthed (neutral) system

A system in which one or more neutral points are connected to earth through reactance
which approximately compensates the capacitive component of a single-phase-to-earth
fault current With resonant earthing of a system, the residual current in the fault is
limited to such an extent that an arcing fault in air is usually self-extinguishing.

Earth fault factor

At a given location of a three-phase system, and for a given system configuration, the
ratio of the highest r.m.s. phase-to-earth power frequency voltage on a healthy phase
during a fault to earth affecting one or more phases at any point on the system to the
r.m.s. phase-to-earth power frequency voltage which would be obtained at the given
location in the absence of any such fault.

Overvoltage
Any voltage between one phase conductor and earth or between phase conductors
having a peak value exceeding the corresponding peak of the highest voltage for
equipment. Unless otherwise clearly indicated, such as for surge arresters, overvoltage
2
values expressed in p.u. shall be referred to Um × . For any insulation configuration,
3
an overvoltage is any voltage across its terminals higher than the peak of the power-

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

frequency voltage existing between them when all phase terminals of the equipment are
energized with the highest voltage for equipment.

Continuous (power frequency) voltage

Power-frequency voltage, considered having constant r.m.s. value, continuously applied
to any pair of terminals of an insulation configuration

Temporary overvoltage
Power frequency overvoltage of relatively long duration The overvoltage may be
undamped or weakly damped. In some cases its frequency may be several times smaller
or higher than power frequency.

Transient overvoltage
Short-duration overvoltage of few milliseconds or less, oscillatory or non-oscillatory,
usually highly damped. Transient overvoltages may be immediately followed by
temporary overvoltages. In such cases the two overvoltages are considered as separate
events. Transient overvoltages are divided into:
- Slow-front overvoltage: Transient overvoltage, usually unidirectional, with time to
peak 20 μS <Tp≤5,000 μS, and tail duration T2≤20 ms.
- Fast-front overvoltage: Transient overvoltage, usually unidirectional, with time to
peak 0.l μS <T1≤ 20 μS, and tail duration T2≤20 μS.
- Very-fast-front overvoltage: Transient overvoltage, usually unidirectional with time
to peak Tf≤ 0.1 μS, total duration <3 ms, and with superimposed oscillations at
frequency 30 kHz < f < 100 MHz.

Combined (temporary, slow-front, fast-front, very-fast-front) overvoltage

Combined overvoltage, consisting of two voltage components simultaneously applied
between each of the two phase terminals of a phase-to-phase (or longitudinal) insulation
and earth It is classified by the component of higher peak value.

The standard short-duration power-frequency voltage

A sinusoidal voltage with frequency between 48 Hz and 62 Hz, and duration of 60 s

The standard switching impulse

An impulse voltage having a time to peak of 250 μS and a time to half-value of 2,500 μS

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

The standard lightning impulse

An impulse voltage having a front time of 1.2 μS and a time to half-value of 50 μS

The standard combined switching impulse

Combined impulse voltage having two components of equal peak value and opposite
polarity The positive component is a standard switching impulse and the negative one is
a switching impulse whose times to peak and half value should not be less than those of
the positive impulse. Both impulses should reach their peak value at the same instant.
The peak value of the combined voltage is, therefore, the sum of the peak values of the
components.

Representative overvoltages (Urp)

Overvoltages assumed to produce the same dielectric effect on the insulation as
overvoltages of a given class occurring in service due to various origins. They consist of
voltages with the standard shape of the class, and may be defined by one value or a set
of values or a frequency distribution of values that characterize the service conditions.
This definition also applies to the continuous power frequency voltage representing the
effect of the service voltage on the insulation.

Overvoltage limiting device

Device which limits the peak values of the overvoltages or their durations or both. They
are classified as preventing devices (e.g., a preinsertion resistor) or as protective devices
(e.g., a surge arrester).

Lightning (or switching) impulse protective level

The maximum permissible peak voltage value on the terminals of a protective device
subjected to lightning (or switching) impulses under specific conditions.

Performance criterion
The basis on which the insulation is selected so as to reduce to an economically and
operationally acceptable level the probability that the resulting voltage stresses imposed
on the equipment will cause damage to equipment insulation or affect continuity of
service. This criterion is usually expressed in terms of an acceptable failure rate (number
of failures per year, years between failures, risk of failure, etc.) of the insulation
configuration.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

Withstand voltage
The value of the test voltage to be applied under specified conditions in a withstand test,
during which a specified number of disruptive discharges is tolerated. The withstand
voltage is designated as:
a) Conventional assumed withstand voltage, when the number of disruptive discharges
tolerated is zero. It is deemed to correspond to a withstand probability Pw = 100 %;
b) Statistical withstand voltage, when the number of disruptive discharges tolerated is
related to a specified withstand probability. In this Standard the specified probability is
Pw = 90 %.
In this Standard, for non-self-restoring insulation are specified conventional assumed
withstand voltages, and for self-restoring insulation are specified statistical withstand
voltages.

Co-ordination withstand voltage (Ucw)

For each class of voltage, the value of the withstand voltage of the insulation
configuration, in actual service conditions, that meets the performance criterion.

Co-ordination factor (Kc)

The factor by which the value of the representative overvoltage must be multiplied in
order to obtain the value of the Co-ordination withstand voltage.

Required withstand voltage (Urw)

The test voltage that the insulation must withstand in a standard withstand test to ensure
that the insulation will meet the performance criterion when subjected to a given class of
overvoltages in actual service conditions and for the whole service duration. The
required withstand voltage has the shape of the Co-ordination withstand voltage, and is
specified with reference to all the conditions of the standard withstand test selected to
verify it.

Atmospheric correction factor (Ka)

The factor to be applied to the co-ordination withstand voltage to account for the
difference between the average atmospheric conditions in service and the standard
reference atmospheric conditions. It applies to external insulation only.

Safety factor (Ks)

The overall factor to be applied to the Co-ordination withstand voltage, after the

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

application of the atmospheric correction factor (if required), to obtain the required
withstand voltage, accounting for all other differences between the conditions in service
and those in the standard withstand test.

Standard withstand voltage (Uw)

The standard value of the test voltage applied in a standard withstand test. it is a rated
value of the insulation and proves that the insulation complies with one or more required
withstand voltages.

Test conversion factor (Kt)

The factor applied to the required withstand voltage, in the case where the standard
withstand voltage is selected of different shape, so as to obtain the lower limit of the
standard withstand test voltage that can be assumed to prove it.

Rated insulation level

A set of standard withstand voltages which characterize the dielectric strength of the
insulation.

Standard insulation level

A rated insulation level, the standard withstand voltages of which are associated to Um

Standard withstand voltage tests

A dielectric test performed in specified conditions to prove that the insulation complies
with a standard withstand voltage. This standard covers:
- Short-duration power-frequency tests;
- Switching impulse tests;
- Lightning impulse tests;
- Combined voltage tests.
The very-fast impulse standard withstand voltage tests should be specified by the
relevant apparatus.

Altitude correction factor

Factor to be applied to the coordination withstand voltage to account for the difference
in dielectric strength between the average pressure corresponding to the altitude in
service and the standard reference pressure

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

Rated withstand voltage

Value of the test voltage, applied in a standard withstand voltage test that proves that the
insulation complies with one or more required withstand voltages. A rated value of the
insulation of equipment

Standard rated withstand voltage

Standard value of the rated withstand voltage as specified in this standard

3. Outline of Insulation Coordination

3.1 Basic concept

Insulation coordination is the techniques used to ensure that the electrical strengths of
the various items of facilities making up the transmission and distribution system and their
associated protective devices are correlated to match the system characteristics and
expected range of voltages. The objective of the analysis and application of its conclusions
are to reduce the probability of system failure and supply interruptions caused by
insulation breakdown to an operationally and economically acceptable level. A proposed
order of priorities for an insulation coordination policy is to ensure safety to public and
operating personnel, to avoid fatal damage to system facilities, to minimize interruption of
supplies to customers and to minimize circuit interruption.

3.2 Power-frequency voltage of distribution system

3.2.1 Nominal voltage of the system
The nominal voltage may not mean the real operation voltage, because of the real-time
variation of operation voltage. In general the nominal voltage means the objective value of
the operation system voltage.

3.2.2 Highest voltage of the system

Voltage of each part of electric power system is always changed by cause of voltage
characteristic of generator, composition of system, fluctuation of load profile, etc. Voltage
of each part of electric power system is always changed by cause of voltage characteristic
of generator, composition of system, subordinate's fluctuation, limit of voltage control etc.
Highest voltage of system is decided by target value of highest r.m.s. value among
operation voltage that appears on each part of electric power system during normal
operation of system.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.2.3 Highest voltage for equipment (Um)

Highest voltage for equipment (Um) is the highest r.m.s. value of phase-to-phase voltage
for which the equipment is designed in respect of its insulation as well as other
characteristics which relate to this voltage in the relevant equipment Standards. The highest
voltage for equipment is the maximum value among power frequency voltages that can be
approved to devices for electric power and applied by the same value as the highest voltage
of system.

< Table 1 > Power-frequency voltage of distribution system

Highest voltage for
Nominal voltage of system Highest voltage of system
equipment
11kV 12kV 12kV
30kV 36kV 36kV
66kV 72.5kV 72.5kV

3.3 Overvoltages
3.3.1 Temporary overvoltage
The temporary overvoltage is the phase-to-earth voltage (r.m.s. value) which is the
higher voltage between sound phases when the 1 phase earth fault happened at specified
location. And its value is the same value as the highest voltage of system considering the
worst case.

< Table 2 > Temporary overvoltage

Nominal voltage of system Temporary overvoltage
11kV 12kV
30kV 36kV
66kV 72.5kV

3.3.2 Switching impulse

Switching impulse is the overvoltage which happens in case of switch close, open and
reclosing. Switching impulse need not to be considered on 66kV, 30kV and 11kV
distribution system according to RangeⅠof IEC 60071-1.

3.3.3 Lightning impulse

Lightning impulse of power system happens by the direct lightning impulse, induced

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

lightning impulse, back flashover, etc. Size of occurred lightning impulse is decided
according to system configuration, structure, scale, peak value and waveform of lightning
stroke current, protection equipment and protection characteristics.

4. Application of Insulation Coordination

Insulation coordination is process for reasonable insulation achievement of electric

power system. The major processes of insulation coordination are as follows.
A. The cause analysis of overvoltage
B. Overvoltage calculation about each part of system considering application of
protection equipment and device
C. Decision for target value of overvoltage
D. Selection of standard withstand voltage

4.1 66kV power system

4.1.1 The withstand voltage of main facilities

< Table 3 > Withstand voltage of main facilities for 66kV

Standard power frequency Standard lightning impulse
Facilities withstand voltage withstand voltage
(r.m.s. value) (peak value)
Transformer 140kV 325kV
Circuit Breaker 140kV 325kV
CT & PT 140kV 325kV
Disconnector 140kV 325kV
Cable 140kV 325kV
Connection devices 140kV 325kV
Underground facilities 140kV 325kV
Note :
1) Refer to RangeⅠof IEC 60071-1.

4.1.2 Overhead ground wire

The shielding angle of the overhead ground wire is within 35° for steel towers and
within 45° for wooden poles supporting system. The overhead ground wire should be
connected to the top of the steel tower completely. The resistance of each leg of steel tower
should be within 30Ω.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

4.1.3 Surge arrester

A. Characteristics
- Rated voltage : 72kV
- Nominal discharge current : 10kA
- Discharge voltage : 216kV(three times as high as the r.m.s value of rated voltage)

B. Installation location
The surge arrester should be installed each phase at the following location.
- The input connection points of the overhead lines
- The power transformer
- Both ends of bus tie CB (In case the length of open bus is within 30m, the surge
arrester may be omitted.
- Both ends of cable lines
- The connection points between the overhead line and the cable line

C. Installation guideline
The surge arrester should be installed as near as at the distribution facilities to be
protected. . The lead conductor of the surge arrester should be installed as short as possible.
The earthing resistance of the surge arrester is 5 Ω or lower for protecting the
transformation facilities and 20 Ω or lower for protecting the line facilities.

4.1.4 Line insulation level

- AC withstand voltage : 72.5kV
- Lightning impulse withstand voltage : 325kV
- Critical flashover voltage : 422kV (1.3times as high as Lightning impulse withstand
voltage)

4.2 30kV power system

4.2.1 The withstand voltage of main facilities

< Table 4 > Withstand voltage of main facilities for 30kV

Standard power frequency Standard lightning impulse
Facilities withstand voltage withstand voltage
(r.m.s. value) (peak value)
Transformer 70kV 170kV
Circuit Breaker 70kV 170kV

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

CT & PT 70kV 170kV

Disconnector 70kV 170kV
Cable 70kV 170kV
Connection devices 70kV 170kV
Underground facilities 70kV 170kV
Note :
1) Refer to RangeⅠof IEC 60071-1.

4.2.2 Overhead ground wire

The shielding angle of the overhead ground wire is within 45° for 30kV distribution
system. The overhead ground wire should be connected to the top of the steel tower
completely. The resistance of each pole should be within 50Ω.

4.2.3 Surge arrester

A. Characteristics
- Rated voltage : 36kV
- Nominal discharge current : 10kA
- Discharge voltage : 108kV(three times as high as the r.m.s value of rated voltage)

B. Installation location
The surge arrester should be installed each phase at the following location.
- The input connection points of the overhead lines
- The power transformer
- Both ends of bus tie CB (In case the length of open bus is within 30m, the surge
arrester may be omitted.
- Both ends of cable lines
- The connection points between the overhead line and the cable line
- Both ends of overhead devices

C. Installation guideline
The surge arrester should be installed as near as at the distribution facilities to be
protected. . The lead conductor of the surge arrester should be installed as short as possible.
The earthing resistance of the surge arrester is 15 Ω or lower for protecting the
transformation facilities and 20 Ω or lower for protecting the line facilities.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

4.2.4 Line insulation level

- AC withstand voltage : 36kV
- Lightning impulse withstand voltage : 170kV
- Critical flashover voltage : 221kV (1.3times as high as Lightning impulse withstand
voltage)

4.3 11kV power system

4.3.1 The withstand voltage of main facilities

< Table 5 > Withstand voltage of main facilities for 11kV

Standard power frequency Standard lightning impulse
Facilities withstand voltage withstand voltage
(r.m.s. value) (peak value)
Transformer 28kV 75kV
Circuit Breaker 28kV 75kV
CT & PT 28kV 75kV
Disconnector 28kV 75kV
Cable 28kV 75kV
Connection devices 28kV 75kV
Underground facilities 28kV 75kV
Note :
1) Refer to RangeⅠof IEC 60071-1.

4.3.2 Surge arrester

A. Characteristics
- Rated voltage : 12kV
- Nominal discharge current : 5kA
- Discharge voltage : 36kV(three times as high as the r.m.s value of rated voltage)

B. Installation location
The surge arrester should be installed each phase at the following location.
- The input connection points of the overhead lines
- The pole-mounted transformer
- Both ends of cable lines
- The connection points between the overhead line and the cable line
- Both ends of overhead devices

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

C. Installation guideline
The surge arrester should be installed as near as at the distribution facilities to be
protected. . The lead conductor of the surge arrester should be installed as short as possible.
The earthing resistance of the surge arrester is 15 Ω or lower for protecting the
transformation facilities and 20 Ω or lower for protecting the line facilities.

4.3.3 Line insulation level

- AC withstand voltage : 12kV
- Lightning impulse withstand voltage : 75kV
- Critical flashover voltage : 98kV (1.3times as high as Lightning impulse withstand
voltage)

5. Lightning Failure Rate

5.1 Lightning failure rate

Lightning failure rates for substation are as follows.

< Table 6 > Lightning failure rate for substation

Substation voltage level Lightning failure rate
66kV 0.00078 [Times/Route/Year]
30kV 0.0014 [Times/Route/Year]
11kV 0.0011 [Times/Route/Year]

5.2 Frequency of flashover for 66kV lines

Frequency of flashover on 66kV lines are as follows.

< Table 7 > Frequency of flashover for 66kV lines

Steel Wooden Direct flashover
Frequency of flashover Back flashover current
tower pole current
Frequency Back flashover 3.558 2.8
Frequency of direct Steel tower : 13.9kA
0.0461 0.026 3.2kA
flashover Wooden pole : 13.9kA
Total 3.604 2.826

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

Appendix A : References

IEC 60038 IEC Standard Voltages Edition 6.2:1983 Consolidated with

Amendments 1:1994 and 2:1997
IEC 60071-1 Insulation Co-Ordination Part 1: Definitions, Principles and Rules
Seventh Edition
IEC 60071-2 Insulation co-ordination - Part 2: Application guide Third Edition
IEC 60099-1 Surge Arresters - Part 1: Non-Linear Resistor Type Gapped Surge
Arresters for a.c. Systems Edition 3.1
IEC 60099-4 Surge Arresters - Part 4: Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters without Gaps
for a.c. Systems Edition 1.2
IEC 60099-5 Surge Arresters - Part 5: Selection and Application Recommendations
Edition 1.1
IEC 60099-7 Surge arresters Part 7: Glossary of terms and definitions from IEC
publications 60099-1, 60099-4, 60099-6, 61643-1, 61643-12, 61643-
21, 61643-311, 61643-321, 61643-331 and 61643-341 First Edition

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

Appendix B : Determination of insulation level

The rated or standard insulation level should be determined by the following flow
chart.

-Origin/Classification of Stressing Voltage Perform System analysis

-Protective Level of Over-voltage Limiter
-Insulation Characteristics
Obtain representative voltage and
overvoltages
-Insulation Characteristics
-Performance Criterion Select Insulation which
-Statistical Distribution* Meets Performance Criterion
-Inaccuracy of Input Data*
* : Combined in Co-ordination Factor
Obtain Co-ordination
Withstand Voltage
-Altitude Correction
-Equipment Test Assembly Apply Factors to Account
-Dispersion in Product**
-Installation Quality** Obtain Required
-Aging**, -Unknowns** Withstand Voltages
** : Combined in Safety Factor
Select Rated Withstand Voltages
-Test Conditions or
-Test Conversion Factor Standard Rated Withstand Voltages
-Standard Withstand Voltages
-Ranges of Highest Voltage for Equipment
Obtain
Rated or Standard Insulation Level
<Figure B1> Flow chart for the determination of rated or standard insulation level

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

Appendix C : Lightning impulse for substation

A1. 66kV Substation

1. Study Model and Conditions
In case of 1 feeder, 1 bus, 1 transformer

Lightning
Overhead Line
TREATED MAST MTr.
END
GIS

GI BUS

<Figure C1> 66kV Substation lightning impulse reviewing model

1.1 System model

1.1.1 Overhead line

2.35m

2.85m
3.2m

2.85m 3.2m

2.95m

10.24m

20m

<Figure C2> 66kV Steel tower model

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

• Configuration : Vertical 2 feeders, 1 overhead ground wire

• Suspension type : steel
- height : 28.75m
- Arm length : 5.7m(Highest and middle), 5.9m(Lowest)
• Conductor : ACSR BEAR(325.6 mm2, 23.45mm)
• Overhead ground wire : ACSR 58mm2

1.1.2 Gas Insulated System(GIS)

25.9

13.6

100

<Figure C3> 66kV GIS model

• Main dimension
- PIPE internal radius : 25.3cm
- PIPE external radius : 25.9cm
- The height of the PIPE center from the ground level : 100cm
- Conductor : Al PIPE(Internal radius : 3.3cm, External radius : 4.5cm)
- The location of conductor center : 13.6cm from the PIPE center
- Conductor arrangement : 120°

1.2 Study conditions

1.2.1 Lightning
• Lightning strike point : The nearest steel tower from the substation
• Lightning current : 1/70μS, 30kA

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

1.2.2 Insulation level

• Insulation level for facilities : 325kV
• Line : CFO 422kV
1.2.3 Earthing resistance
• Steel tower : 30Ω
• Substation : 5Ω

1.2.4 Surge Arrester

• Rated voltage and rated current : 72kV, 10kA
• Characteristics : Discharge voltage 216kV

1.2.5 Length of GIS

• Longitudinal length : 10m
• Length of open GIS Bus : 30m

1.2.6 Margin : 20%(Reviewing voltage : 270kV)

2. Study Cases
2.1 Length of open GIS Bus: 10m, 20m, 25m, 30m, 40m, 50m
2.2 Substation earthing resistance : 0.5~20Ω
2.3 Tower footing resistance : 10~30Ω
2.4 Locations of surge arresters
• Entrance of overhead lines
• Main transformer
• Open end of gas-insulated Bus

3. Analysis Results
3.1 Effect of surge arrester locations
3.1.1 In case of No Surge Arresters
As you see in Figure C4, in case of no surge arresters the lightning impulse of substation
is higher than 1,000kV. Therefore it is impossible to protect the substation without surge
arresters.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

66kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ ENTRANCE and MTR : w ith No Surge Arrester
SA : ENTRANCE(X), MTR(X), BUS END(X)
1.5
[MV]
1.3

1.1

0.9

0.7

0.5

0.3

0.1

-0.1
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 66_30_NO_30M_10M.pl4; x-v ar t) v :ENTRA v :MTRA

<Figure C4> Case with no surge arrester

3.1.2 Case with only Entrance Surge Arresters

66kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ ENTRANCE and MTR : Surge Arrester @ ENTRANCE only
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(X), BUS END(X)
300
[kV]
250

200

150

100

50

-50
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 66_30_A_30M_10M.pl4; x-v ar t) v :ENTRA v :MTRA

<Figure C5> Case with only entrance surge arresters

The lightning impulse of the substation entrance is lower than 260kV, but the lightning
impulse of transformer is about 280kV. Therefore the protection margin 20% cannot be
secured for transformer.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.1.3 Case with only MTr surge arresters

66kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ ENTRANCE and MTR : only w ith MTR Surge Arrester
SA : ENTRANCE(X), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
300
[kV]
250

200

150

100

50

-50
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 66_30_B_30M_10M.pl4; x-v ar t) v :ENTRA v :MTRA

<Figure C6> Case with only MTr surge arresters

The lightning impulse of the transformer is lower than 260kV, but the lightning impulse
of substation entrance is about 290kV. Therefore the protection margin 20% cannot be
secured for substation entrance.

3.1.4 Case with Both Entrance and MTr Surge Arresters

66kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ ENTRANCE and MTR : with Surge Arresters both @ ENTRANCE and MTR
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
300
[kV]
260

220

180

140

100

60

20

-20
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 66_30_AB_30M_10M.pl4; x-v ar t) v :ENTRA v :MTRA

<Figure C7> Case with Surge Arresters at Both Sides

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

The lightning impulses of both substation entrance and the transformer are lower than
240kV. We can protect both enough. The lightning impulses of substation entrance and the
transformer according to the surge arrester location can be shown in <Table C1> and
<Figure C8>.
<Table C1> Surge Arrester Location and Lightning Impulses [kV]
SA Location No SA Entrance M. Tr Both Note

Entrance 1,222.7 259.5 293.7 231.1 Severe Phase

M. Tr 1,227.3 285.3 261.4 224.4 〃

Surge Arrester Location and Impulse

1,400

1,200
Lightning Impulse [kV]

1,000

800
Entrance
MTr
600

400

200

0
No SA Entrance M. Tr Both
SA Location

<Figure C8> Surge arrester locations and impulses

3.2 Effect of length of open GIS Bus

3.2.1 Case with 30m open GIS Bus
The lightning impulse of open GIS Bus is about lower than 260kV in case the length of
open GIS Bus is 30m. Therefore the surge arrester for the Bus may not be installed.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

66kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ BUS END : 30m BUS

SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
300
[kV]
260

220

180

140

100

60

20

-20
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 66_30_AB_30M_10M.pl4; x-v ar t) v :BUSEA v :BUSEB v :BUSEC

<Figure C9> Case with 30m open GIS Bus(without Bus SA)

3.2.2 Case with 50m open GIS Bus

As we can see in <Figure C10>, The lightning impulse of open GIS Bus 50m long is
higher than 300kV. Unless the surge arrester is installed, the enough protection may not be
done. If the surge arrester is installed at the open point of GIS Bus, the lightning impulse
can be restricted up to enough level.
66kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ BUS END : 50m BUS
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(O)
220
[kV]
180

140

100

60

20

-20
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 66_30_ABC_50M_10M.pl4; x-v ar t) v :BUSEA v :BUSEB v :BUSEC

<Figure C11> Case with 50m open GIS Bus(with Bus SA)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

<Table C2> and <Figure C12> show the effect of the length of open GIS Bus.

<Table C2> GIS Bus length and impulse(without Bus surge arrester)
Length [m] 10 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Note

Bus End 240.3 254.7 262.4 255.6 260.1 272.3 281.9 320.5 Severe Phase

GI Bus Length and Bus End Impulse

350

300
Bus End Impulse [kV]

250

200

150

100

50

0
10 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Open Bus Length [m]

<Figure C12> GIS Bus length and impulse(without Bus SA)

3.3 Effect of tower footing resistance

3.3.1 Lightning impulses of substation entrance and transformer
In case the surge arresters are installed at the substation entrance and transformer, the
tower footing resistance has little effect on the lightning impulses of substation entrance
and transformer as in Figure C13.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

66kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ ENTRANCE and MTR : Tow er Footing Resistance 30ohm
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
300
[kV]
260

220

180

140

100

60

20

-20
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 66_30_AB_TWR_30OHM.pl4; x-v ar t) v :ENTRA v :MTRA

<Figure C13> With 30Ω footing resistance

3.3.2 Lightning impulse of open GIS Bus

In case the surge arresters are installed at the substation entrance and transformer and
not installed at open GIS Bus 30m long, the tower footing resistance has little effect on the
lightning impulses of substation entrance and transformer as in Figure C14.
66kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ BUS END : Tow er Footing Resistance 30ohm
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
260
[kV]
220

180

140

100

60

20

-20
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 66_30_AB_TWR_30OHM.pl4; x-v ar t) v :BUSEA v :BUSEB v :BUSEC

<Figure C14> With 30Ω footing resistance

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.4 Effect of Substation earthing resistance

3.4.1 Lightning impulse of substation entrance and the transformer

66kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ ENTRANCE and MTR : S/S Earthing Resistance 10ohm
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
260
[kV]
220

180

140

100

60

20

-20
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 66_30_AB_SS_10OHM.pl4; x-v ar t) v :ENTRA v :MTRA

<Figure C15> With 10Ω substation earthing resistance

66kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ ENTRANCE and MTR : S/S Earthing Resistance 5ohm
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
240
[kV]

188

136

84

32

-20
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 66_30_AB_SS_5OHM.pl4; x-v ar t) v :ENTRA v :MTRA

<Figure C16> With 5Ω substation earthing resistance

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

66kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ ENTRANCE and MTR : S/S Earthing Resistance 1ohm
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
240
[kV]

188

136

84

32

-20
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 66_30_AB_SS_1OHM.pl4; x-v ar t) v :ENTRA v :MTRA

<Figure C17> With 1Ω substation earthing resistance

In case the surge arresters are installed at the substation entrance and the transformer,
the substation earthing resistance has large effect on the lightning impulse of substation
entrance and transformer as you see in Figure C15, C16 and C17. Therefore the substation
earthing resistance should be reduced as low as possible.

3.4.2 Lightning impulse of open GIS Bus

In case the surge arresters are installed at the substation entrance and the transformer,
the substation earthing resistance has large effect on the lightning impulse of substation
entrance and transformer as you see in Figure C18, C19 and C20. Therefore the substation
earthing resistance should be reduced as low as possible.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

66kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ BUS END : S/S Earthing Resistance 10ohm
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
280
[kV]
230

180

130

80

30

-20
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 66_30_AB_SS_10OHM.pl4; x-v ar t) v :BUSEA v :BUSEB v :BUSEC

<Figure C18> With 10Ω substation earthing resistance

66kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ BUS END : S/S Earthing Resistance 5ohm
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
260
[kV]
220

180

140

100

60

20

-20
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 66_30_AB_SS_5OHM.pl4; x-v ar t) v :BUSEA v :BUSEB v :BUSEC

<Figure C19> With 5Ω substation earthing resistance

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

28 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

66kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ BUS END : S/S Earthing Resistance 1ohm
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
260

[kV]

198

136

74

12

-50
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 66_30_AB_SS_1OHM.pl4; x-v ar t) v :BUSEA v :BUSEB v :BUSEC

<Figure C20> With 1Ω substation earthing resistance

<Table C3> and <Figure C21> show the lightning impulses of substation entrance,
transformer and open GIS Bus according to the substation earthing resistance.
<Table C3> Substation earthing resistance and lightning impulses [kV]
Earthing Resistance 0.5 Ω 1 Ω 2 Ω 3 Ω 4 Ω 5 Ω 10 Ω 15 Ω 20 Ω
Entrance 207.5 210.1 215 220 225.1 230.1 255.1 279.8 305.6
M.Tr 202.4 204.8 209.7 214.5 219.4 224.4 249.5 275.2 301.4
Bus End 245.4 246.5 248.8 251 253.3 255.6 266.9 291.4 318.9

S/S Earthing Resistance and Impulses

350

300

250
Lightning Impulse[kV]

200 Entrance
M. Tr
150 Bus End

100

50

0
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 10 15 20
S/S Earthing Resistance [Ohm]

<Figure C21> S/S Earthing Resistance and Impulses

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

29 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

A2. 30kV Substation

1. Study Model and Conditions
In case of 1 feeder, 1 bus, 1 transformer

Lightning
Overhead Line
TREATED MAST MTr.
END
GIS

GI BUS

<Figure C22> 30kV Substation lightning impulse reviewing model

1.1 System model

1.1.1 Overhead line
GW
Phase

1m
10.37m
0.47m

9m
1.37m

<Figure C23> 30kV pole model

• Configuration : Horizontal 1 feeder, 1 overhead ground wire

• Support
- Wooden pole : Intermediate pole
- Height : 10.37m
- Cross-arm length : 2.74m
• Conductor : ACSR 100 mm2
• Overhead ground wire : ACSR 30 mm2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

30 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

1.1.2 GIS

20.9cm

12cm

100cm

<Figure C24> 30kV GIS model

• Main dimension
- PIPE internal radius : 20cm
- PIPE external radius : 20.6cm
- The height of the PIPE center from the ground level : 100cm
- Conductor : Al PIPE(Internal radius : 3.3cm, External radius : 4.5cm)
- The location of conductor center : 12 ㎝ from the PIPE center
- Conductor arrangement : 120°

1.2 Study conditions

1.2.1 Lightning
• Lightning strike point : The nearest pole from the substation
• Lightning current : 1/70μS, 20kA

1.2.2 Insulation level

• Insulation level for facilities : 170kV
• Line : CFO 221kV

1.2.3 Earthing resistance

• Pole : 50Ω
• Substation : 15Ω

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

31 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

1.2.4 Surge arrester

• Rated voltage and rated current : 36kV, 10kA
• Characteristics : Discharge voltage 108kV

1.2.5 Length of GIS

• Longitudinal Length : 10m
• Length of Open GI BUS : 30m

1.2.6 Margin : 20%(Reviewing voltage : 140kV)

2. Study Cases
2.1 Length of open GI BUS : 10~40m
2.2 Substation earthing resistance : 10~30Ω
2.3 Pole earthing resistance : 25, 50, 100Ω
2.4 Locations of surge arresters
• Entrance of overhead lines
• Main transformer
• Open end of Gas-insulated Bus

3. Analyses Results
3.1 Effect of surge arrester locations
3.1.1 Case with no surge arresters
30kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ ENTRANCE and MTR : w ith No Surge Arrester
SA : ENTRANCE(X), MTR(X), BUS END(X)
1.2
[MV]
1.0

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2

0.0

-0.2
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 33_20_NOSA_30M_10M.pl4; x-v ar t) v :ENTRB v :MTRB

<Figure C25> Case with no surge arresters

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

32 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

As you see in Figure C25, In case of no surge arresters the lightning impulse of
substation is higher than 1,000kV. Therefore it is impossible to protect the substation
without surge arresters.

3.1.2 Case with only entrance surge arresters

30kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ ENTRANCE and MTR : w ith Surge Arrester @ ENTRANCE only
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(X), BUS END(X)
160
[kV]
130

100

70

40

10

-20
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 33_20_A_SS_10OHM.pl4; x-v ar t) v :ENTRA v :MTRA

<Figure C26> Case with only entrance surge arresters

Both of the lightning impulses of the substation entrance and transformer are higher than
140kV. Therefore the protection margin 20% cannot be secured for transformer.

3.1.3 Case with only MTr surge arresters

30kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ ENTRANCE and MTR : w ith Surge Arrester @ MTR only
SA : ENTRANCE(X), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
180

[kV]

140

100

60

20

-20
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 33_20_B_30M_10M.pl4; x-v ar t) v :ENTRB v :MTRA

<Figure C27> Case with only MTr surge arresters

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

33 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

Both of the lightning impulses of the substation entrance and transformer are higher than
140kV. Therefore the protection margin 20% cannot be secured for transformer.

3.1.4 Case with both entrance and MTr surge arresters

30kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ ENTRANCE and MTR : w ith Surge Arrester @ ENTRANCE & MTR
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
120
[kV]
100

80

60

40

20

-20
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 33_20_AB_30M_10M.pl4; x-v ar t) v :ENTRA v :MTRA

<Figure C28> Case with surge arresters at both sides

The lightning impulses of both substation entrance and the transformer are lower than
140kV. We can protect both enough. The lightning impulses of substation entrance and the
transformer according to the surge arrester location can be shown in Table C4 and Figure
C29.
<Table C4> Surge arrester location and lightning impulses [kV]
SA Location No SA Entrance M. Tr Both

Entrance 1,131 126.2 164.8 113.2

M. Tr 1,120 129.3 145.7 112.1

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

34 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

Surge Arrester Location and Impulse

1,200

1,000
Lightning Impulse [kV]

800

Entrance
600
MTr

400

200

0
No SA Entrance M. Tr Both
SA Location

<Figure C29> Surge arrester locations and impulses

3.2 Effect of length of open GIS Bus

3.2.1 Case with 25m open GIS Bus
The lightning impulse of open GIS Bus is about lower than 130kV in case the length of
open GIS Bus is 25m. Therefore the surge arrester for the Bus may not be installed.
30kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ BUS END : 25m OPEN BUS
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
140
[kV]
110

80

50

20

-10

-40
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 33_20_AB_25M_10M.pl4; x-v ar t) v :BUSEA v :BUSEB v :BUSEC

<Figure C30> Case with 25m open GIS Bus(without Bus SA)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

35 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.2.2 Case with over 25m open GIS Bus

30kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ BUS END : 30m OPEN BUS
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
150
[kV]
125

100

75

50

25

-25
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 33_20_AB_30M_10M.pl4; x-v ar t) v :BUSEA v :BUSEB v :BUSEC

<Figure C31> Case with 30m open GIS Bus(without Bus SA)

30kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ BUS END : 35m OPEN BUS

SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
150
[kV]
125

100

75

50

25

-25
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 33_20_AB_35M_10M.pl4; x-v ar t) v :BUSEA v :BUSEB v :BUSEC

<Figure C32> Case with 35m open GIS Bus(without Bus SA)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

36 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

30kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ BUS END : 40m OPEN BUS

SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
150
[kV]
125

100

75

50

25

-25
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 33_20_AB_40M_10M.pl4; x-v ar t) v :BUSEA v :BUSEB v :BUSEC

<Figure C33> Case with 40m open GIS Bus(without Bus SA)

30kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ BUS END : 30m OPEN BUS

SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(O)
120
[kV]
100

80

60

40

20

-20

-40
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 33_20_ABC_30M_10M.pl4; x-v ar t) v :BUSEA v :BUSEB v :BUSEC

<Figure C34> Case with 30m open GIS Bus(with Bus SA)

In case the length of open GIS Bus is 30m long, the lightning impulse of open GIS Bus
is higher than 140kV. Unless the surge arrester is installed, the enough protection may not

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

37 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

be done. If the surge arrester is installed at the open point of GIS Bus, the lightning
impulse can be restricted up to enough level. Table C5 and Figure C35 show the effect of
the length of open GIS Bus.

<Table C5> GIS Bus length and impulse(without Bus surge arrester) [kV]
Length [m] 10 20 25 30 35 40
Bus end 114.2 119.3 129.9 145 137.5 139.3

GI Bu s L e ngth and Bu s E nd Impu l s e

160

140

120
Bus End Impulse [kV]

100

80

60

40

20

0
10 20 25 30 35 40
Open Bus Length [m]

<Figure C35> GIS Bus length and impulse(without Bus SA)

3.3 Effect of Pole Earthing Resistance

3.3.1 Lightning impulses of substation entrance and transformer
In case the surge arresters are installed at the substation entrance and transformer, the
tower footing resistance has little effect on the lightning impulses of substation entrance
and transformer as in Figure C36.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

38 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

30kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ ENTRANCE and MTR : Pole Earthing Resistance 50ohm
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
120
[kV]
100

80

60

40

20

-20
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 33_20_AB_POLE_50OHM.pl4; x-v ar t) v :ENTRA v :MTRA

<Figure C36> With 50Ω pole earthing resistance

3.3.2 Lightning impulse of open GIS Bus

In case the surge arresters are installed at the substation entrance and transformer and
not installed at open GIS Bus 30m long, the tower footing resistance has little effect on the
lightning impulses of substation entrance and transformer as in Figure C37.

30kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ OPEN BUS END : Pole Earthing Resistance 50ohm
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
150
[kV]
125

100

75

50

25

-25
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 33_20_AB_POLE_50OHM.pl4; x-v ar t) v :BUSEA v :BUSEB v :BUSEC

<Figure C37> With 50Ω pole earthing resistance

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

39 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.4 Effect of Substation Earthing Resistance

3.4.1 Lightning impulse of substation entrance and the transformer
30kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ ENTRANCE and MTR : S/S Earthing Resistance 10ohm
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
120
[kV]
100

80

60

40

20

-20
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 33_20_AB_30M_10M.pl4; x-v ar t) v :ENTRA v :MTRA

<Figure C38> With 10Ω substation earthing resistance

30kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ ENTRANCE and MTR : S/S Earthing Resistance 20ohm
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
160
[kV]
130

100

70

40

10

-20
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 33_20_AB_SS_20OHM.pl4; x-v ar t) v :ENTRA v :MTRA

<Figure C39> With 20Ω substation earthing resistance

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

40 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

30kV GIS Lightning Impulse @ ENTRANCE and MTR : S/S Earthing Resistance 30ohm
SA : ENTRANCE(O), MTR(O), BUS END(X)
180

[kV]

140

100

60

20

-20
0 1 2 3 4 [us] 5
(f ile 33_20_AB_SS_30OHM.pl4; x-v ar t) v :ENTRA v :MTRA

<Figure C40> With 30Ω substation earthing resistance

In case the surge arresters are installed at the substation entrance and the transformer,
the substation earthing resistance has large effect on the lightning impulse of substation
entrance and transformer as you see in Figure C385, C39 and C40. Therefore the
substation earthing resistance should be reduced as low as possible. Table C6 and Figure
C41 show the lightning impulses of substation entrance, transformer and open GIS Bus
according to the substation earthing resistance.
<Table C6> Substation earthing resistance and lightning impulses [kV]
Earthing Resistance 10 Ω 15 Ω 20 Ω 25 Ω 30 Ω
Entrance 113 131.4 142.3 152.7 162.9
M.Tr 111.8 130.3 141.3 151.7 162
Bus End 145 144.8 150 157.2 166.3

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

41 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

S /S Earthing R esistance and Impulses

180

160

140
Lightning Impulse[kV]

120

100 Entrance
M. Tr
80 Bus End

60

40

20

0
10 15 20 25 30
S/S Earthing Resistance [O hm]

<Figure C41> Substation earthing resistance and impulses

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

42 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

Appendix D : Induced lightning impulse study

Comparisons are made between the voltages of the closest phase from the lightning
point of which the voltage will be the highest of the circuit. For the comparison, lightning
currents, lightning distances and footing resistances of tower are treated as variables. In the
following figures showing induced lightning impulses, the leading waveforms are of the
phase of the closest span from the lightning point where the impulses will be the highest
along the line, while the lagging waveforms are of the same phase which is a few spans
away from the closest span. For the case reduction from the countless study cases,
reasonably severe cases were studied, and the cases considered are as follows;

A. Height of Phase Conductor

There is a tendency that higher conductors show higher induced lightning impulses, and
only the highest phase conductor of the line was considered for this study.

B. Thickness of Ground Wire

Thinner ground wire will cause higher impulses on phase conductors, and the thinnest
ground wire among variable sizes permissible was considered for the comparison.

C. Height of Ground Wire

Higher ground wire will cause lower induced impulses on phases. In this study, only the
standard configurations were examined for convenience sake.

D. Position of Phase Conductor

Nearer conductor from the lightning point generates higher impulses on phase
conductors, and the phase that is on the closer point of the highest arm was considered.

E. Crest Value of Lightning Current

Induced lightning impulses on phases are proportional to the current crest, and several
steps of crest levels were considered. The impulses from intermediate crest values may be
obtained by linear fitting.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

43 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

F. Waveform of Lightning Current

Higher rate of rise(steep) of lightning current will cause higher induced impulses on
phases, and as 2 ㎲ of wavefront is considered as reasonably severe for induced lightning
impulse study, and 2 ㎲ of wavefront was considered for the comparison.

G. Lightning Distance
High structures near overhead distribution lines may attract lightning hence generate
impulses along the line. Trees, buildings, antenna towers, poles, hills, etc. may act as
path for lightning. In many cases, even transmission towers can be very good target for
ground strokes, and we have to pay much attention to close transmission lines which run
parallel to distribution lines. Observing many paralleling towered power lines along
distribution lines, lightning distance was taken as variables for the induced lightning study.
In the comparing tables, grey areas will be safe from flashover with CFO of 1.3 times the
system insulation level(422kV for 66kV system, 220kV for 30kV system and 98kV for
11kV system), while transparent areas need higher CFO values for safety.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

44 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

D1. 66kV System

1. Model
Span 350m GW

Phase

Dip
Mean
Height

Footing Resistance
RT
<Figure D1> 66kV overhead line configuration

Lightning
Lightning Point Current I

Lightning
d Distance
Tower Tower Phase

Matched GW Matched
End End

Span 350m Phase

<Figure D2> 66kV line model for induced lightning

2. Study Cases
• Conductor Co-ordinates : Figure D2
- Phases : (±2.85, 19.73), (±2.85, 16.53), (±2.95, 13.33)
- GW : (0, 22.38)
• Conductors : Phases(Bear, 325.6 mm2), GW(ACSR, 58 mm2)
• Waveform of lightning current : 2/70μS
• Variables : Lightning current/distance, footing resistance
• Measured points ;
a. Closest span from the lightning point
b. Span separated 4-spans(1,400m) away from point 'a'

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

45 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3. Study Cases and Results

3.1 With lightning current 40kA

<Figure D3> 40kA/50m/30Ω <Figure D4> 40kA/75m/30Ω

<Figure D5> 40kA/100m/30Ω <Figure D6> 40kA/125m/30Ω

<Table D1> Comparisons of induced lightning (I=40kA) [kV]

Lightning Distance d[m]
Notes
50 75 100 125 150
50 271.039 225.948 194.140 170.527 152.590
with GW
40 268.122 223.512 192.051 168.701 150.971
Footing
30 265.023 220.922 189.830 166.761 149.252 Figure D3~6
Resistance
[Ω] 20 261.726 218.167 187.466 164.696 147.422
10 258.214 215.230 184.945 162.494 145.473

800

700

600

500 d=50m
Voltage [kV]

d=75m
400 d=100m
d=125m
300 d=150m

200

100

0
1 2 3 4 5
Footing Resistance(x10 [ohms])

<Figure D7> Case with 40kA lightning

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

46 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.2 With lightning current 60kA

<Figure D8> 60kA/50m/30Ω <Figure D9> 60kA/75m/30Ω

<Figure D10> 60kA/100m/30Ω <Figure D11> 60kA/125m/30Ω

<Table D2> Comparisons of induced lightning (I=60kA) [kV]

Lightning Distance d[m]
Notes
50 75 100 125 150
50 406.559 338.922 291.210 255.790 228.885
with GW
40 402.183 335.267 288.076 253.052 226.457
Footing
30 397.534 331.383 284.745 250.141 223.877 Figure D8~11
Resistance
[Ω] 20 392.589 327.250 281.199 247.044 221.133
10 387.321 322.845 277.418 243.741 218.209

800

700

600

500
Voltage [kV]

d=50m
d=75m
400 d=100m
d=125m
300 d=150m

200

100

0
1 2 3 4 5
Footing Resistance(x10 [ohms])

<Figure D12> Case with 60kA lightning

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

47 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.3 With lightning current 80kA

<Figure D13> 80kA/50m/30Ω <Figure D14> 80kA/75m/30Ω

<Figure D15> 80kA/100m/30Ω <Figure D16> 80kA/125m/30Ω

<Table D3>. Comparisons of induced lightning (I=80kA) [kV]

Lightning Distance d[m]
Notes
50 75 100 125 150
with GW 50 542.078 451.896 388.280 341.054 305.179
Footing 40 536.244 447.023 384.101 337.402 301.942
30 530.045 441.845 379.659 333.522 298.503 Figure D13~16
Resistance
20 523.452 436.334 374.932 329.391 294.844
[Ω] 10 516.428 430.460 369.891 324.988 290.946

800

700

600

500
Voltage [kV]

d=50m
d=75m
400 d=100m
d=125m
300 d=150m

200

100

0
1 2 3 4 5
Footing Resistance(x10 [ohms])

<Figure D17> Case with 80kA lightning

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

48 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.4 With lightning current 100kA

<Figure D18> 100kA/50m/30Ω <Figure D19> 100kA/75m/30Ω

<Figure D20> 100kA/100m/30Ω <Figure D21> 100kA/125m/30Ω

<Table D4> Comparisons of induced lightning (I=100kA) [kV]

Lightning Distance d[m]
Notes
50 75 100 125 150
50 677.598 564.870 485.350 426.317 381.474
with GW
Footing 40 670.304 558.779 480.126 421.753 377.428
Resistance 30 662.556 552.306 474.574 416.902 373.129 Figure D18~21
[Ω] 20 654.315 545.417 468.665 411.739 368.556
10 645.535 538.075 462.364 406.235 363.682

800

700

600

500
Voltage [kV]

d=50m
d=75m
400 d=100m
d=125m
300 d=150m

200

100

0
1 2 3 4 5
Footing Resistance(x10 [ohms])

<Figure D22> Case with 100kA lightning

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

49 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

D2. 30kV System

1. Model
Span 70m GW
Phase
GW

Phase
Crossarm

Mean
Pole Height

Footing Resistance
RT
<Figure D23> 30kV overhead line configuration

Lightning
Lightning Point Current I

Lightning
d Distance
Crossarm Crossarm
Phase
Matched Matched
End Pole Pole GW End
Phase
Span 70m
<Figure D24> 30kV line model for induced lightning

2. Study Cases
• Conductor co-ordinates : Figure D24
- Phases : (1.37, 8.0), (0.47, 8.0), (-1.37, 8.0)
- GW : (0, 10.05)
• Conductors : Phases(ACSR, 100 mm2), GW(ACSR, 30 mm2)
• Waveform of lightning current : 2/70μS
• Variables : Lightning current/distance, footing resistance
• Measured points ;
a. Closest span from the lightning point
b. Span separated 3-spans(210m) away from point 'a'

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

50 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3. Study Cases and Results

3.1 With lightning current 40kA

<Figure D25> 40kA/50m/30Ω <Figure D26> 40kA/75m/30Ω

<Figure D27> 40kA/100m/30Ω <Figure D28> 40kA/125m/30Ω

<Table D5> Comparisons of induced lightning (I=40kA) [kV]
Lightning Distance d[m]
Notes
40 60 80 100 125
50 118.642 97.908 84.076 73.839 64.310
with GW
40 117.878 97.333 83.620 73.465 64.009
Footing
30 116.963 96.666 83.103 73.047 63.679 Figure D25~28
Resistance
[Ω] 20 115.835 95.874 82.507 72.577 63.316
10 114.393 94.909 81.809 72.044 62.917

400

350

300

250
Voltage [kV]

d=40m
d=60m
200 d=80m
d=100m
150 d=125m

100

50

0
1 2 3 4 5
Footing Resistance(x10 [ohms])

<Figure D29> Case with 40kA lightning

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

51 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.2 With lightning current 60kA

<Figure D30> 60kA/50m/30Ω <Figure D31> 60kA/75m/30Ω

<Figure D32> 60kA/100m/30Ω <Figure D33> 60kA/125m/30Ω

<Table D6> Comparisons of induced lightning (I=60kA) [kV]

Lightning Distance d[m]
Notes
40 60 80 100 125
50 177.963 146.862 126.115 110.759 96.465
with GW
40 176.816 146.000 125.430 110.197 96.013
Footing
30 175.445 144.999 124.654 109.571 95.518 Figure D30~33
Resistance
[Ω] 20 173.753 143.811 123.760 108.865 94.973
10 171.590 142.363 122.713 108.066 94.376

400

350

300

250
Voltage [kV]

d=40m
d=60m
200 d=80m
d=100m
150 d=125m

100

50

0
1 2 3 4 5
Footing Resistance(x10 [ohms])

<Figure D34> Case with 60kA lightning

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

52 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.3 With lightning current 80kA

<Figure D35> 80kA/50m/30Ω <Figure D36> 80kA/75m/30Ω

<Figure D37> 80kA/100m/30Ω <Figure D38> 80kA/125m/30Ω

<Table D7>. Comparisons of induced lightning (I=80kA) [kV]

Lightning Distance d[m]
Notes
40 60 80 100 125
50 253.439 209.161 179.711 157.981 137.787
with GW
40 251.377 207.365 178.119 156.552 136.524
Footing
30 249.172 205.446 176.416 155.024 135.174 Figure D35~38
Resistance
[Ω] 20 246.809 203.388 174.591 153.385 133.726
10 244.271 201.177 172.630 151.625 132.171

400

350

300

250
Voltage [kV]

d=40m
d=60m
200 d=80m
d=100m
150 d=125m

100

50

0
1 2 3 4 5
Footing Resistance(x10 [ohms])

<Figure D39> Case with 80kA lightning

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

53 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.4 With lightning current 100kA

<Figure D40> 100kA/50m/30Ω <Figure D41> 100kA/75m/30Ω

<Figure D42> 100kA/100m/30Ω <Figure D43> 100kA/125m/30Ω

<Table D8> Comparisons of induced lightning (I=100kA) [kV]

Lightning Distance d[m]
Notes
40 60 80 100 125
50 316.799 261.451 224.639 197.477 172.234
with GW
40 314.221 259.207 222.648 195.690 170.656
Footing
Resistance 30 311.465 256.807 220.520 193.780 168.967 Figure D40~43
[Ω] 20 308.511 254.235 218.239 191.732 167.158
10 305.338 251.472 215.787 189.531 165.214

400

350

300

250
Voltage [kV]

d=40m
d=60m
200 d=80m
d=100m
150 d=125m

100

50

0
1 2 3 4 5
Footing Resistance(x10 [ohms])

<Figure D44> Case with 100kA lightning

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

54 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

D3. 11kV System

1. Model
Span 50m Phase
Phase

Phases
Crossarm
Mean
Pole Height

<Figure D45> 11kV overhead line configuration

Lightning
Lightning Point Current I

Lightning
d Distance
Crossarm Crossarm

Matched Phase Matched

End Pole Pole (GW) End
Phase
Span 50m
<Figure D46> 11kV line model for induced lightning

2. Study Cases
• Conductor Co-ordinates : Figure D46
- Phases : (0.8, 8.5), (0.0, 8.87), (-0.8, 8.5)
• Conductors : Phases(ACSR, 100 mm2)
• Waveform of lightning current : 2/70μS
• Variables : lightning current/distance
• Comparisons : Installation of overhead ground wire
• Measured points ;
a. Closest span from the lightning point
b. Span separated 3-spans(150m) away from point 'a'

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

55 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3. Study Results
3.1 With lightning current 20kA

<Figure D47> 20kA/40m <Figure D48> 20kA/60m

<Figure D49> 20kA/80m <Figure D50> 20kA/100m

<Table D9> Comparisons of induced lightning (I=20kA) [kV]

Lightning Distance d[m]
Notes
40 60 80 100 125
without GW 271.039 225.948194.140170.527 152.590 Figure D47~50

400

350

300

250
Voltage [kV]

d=40m
d=60m
200 d=80m
d=100m
150 d=125m

100

50

0
1 2 3 4 5 6
Footing Resistance(x10 [ohms]), 6 : No GW

<Figure D51> Case with 20kA lightning

In case the lightning as large as 20kA strikes within 50m from 11kV lines, the induced
lightning impulse is lower than 75kV and there is no flashover.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

56 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.2 With lightning current 40kA

<Figure D52> 40kA/40m <Figure D53> 40kA/60m

<Figure D54> 40kA/80m <Figure D55> 40kA/100m

<Table D10> Comparisons of induced lightning (I=40kA) [kV]

Lightning Distance d[m]
Notes
40 60 80 100 125
without GW 164.977 136.981 117.785 103.777 90.420 Figure D52~55

400

350

300

250
Voltage [kV]

d=40m
d=60m
200 d=80m
d=100m
150 d=125m

100

50

0
1 2 3 4 5 6
Footing Resistance(x10 [ohms]), 6 : No GW

<Figure D56> Case with 40kA lightning

In case the lightning as large as 40kA strikes within 130m from 11kV lines, the induced
lightning impulse is higher than 90kV and the probability of flashover or earth fault
increases.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

57 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.3 With lightning current 60kA

<Figure D57> 60kA/40m <Figure D58> 60kA/60m

<Figure D59> 60kA/80m <Figure D60> 60kA/100m

<Table D11> Comparisons of induced lightning (I=60kA) [kV]

Lightning Distance d[m]
Notes
40 60 80 100 125
without GW 247.465 205.472 176.677 155.665 135.630 Figure D57~60

400

350

300

250
Voltage [kV]

d=40m
d=60m
200 d=80m
d=100m
150 d=125m

100

50

0
1 2 3 4 5 6
Footing Resistance(x10 [oms]), 6 : No GW

<Figure D61> Case with 60kA lightning

In case the lightning as large as 60kA strikes within 100m from 11kV lines, the induced
lightning impulse is higher than 90kV and the probability of flashover or earth fault
increases.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

58 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.4 With lightning current 80kA

<Figure D62> 80kA/40m <Figure D63> 80kA/60m

<Figure D64> 80kA/80m <Figure D65> 80kA/100m

<Table D12> Comparisons of induced lightning (I=80kA) [kV]

Lightning Distance d[m]
Notes
40 60 80 100 125
without GW 329.954 273.962 235.570 207.553 180.840 Figure D62~65

400

350

300

250
Voltage [kV]

d=40m
d=60m
200 d=80m
d=100m
150 d=125m

100

50

0
1 2 3 4 5 6
Footing Resistance(x10 [ohms]), 6 : No GW

<Figure D66> Case with 80kA lightning

In case the lightning as large as 80kA strikes within 130m from 11kV lines, the induced
lightning impulse is higher than 90kV and the probability of flashover or earth fault
increases.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

59 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.5 With lightning current 100kA

<Figure D67> 100kA/40m <Figure D68> 100kA/60m

<Figure D69> 100kA/80m <Figure D70> 100kA/100m

<Table D12> Comparisons of induced lightning (I=100kA) [kV]

Lightning Distance d[m]
Notes
40 60 80 100 125
without GW 412.442 342.453 294.462 259.441 226.050 Figure D67~70

450

400

350

300
Voltage [kV]

d=40m
250 d=60m
d=80m
200 d=100m
d=125m
150

100

50

0
1 2 3 4 5 6
Footing Resistance(x10 [ohms]), 6 : No GW

<Figure D71> Case with 100kA lightning

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

60 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

Appendix E : Lightning failure rate

1. Theory

1.1 Probability of lightning current P (i )

The probability of lightning current (peak value) is different from the region or location.
It is difficult to get the data for Libya unless the weather agency has those data. Therefore
we are going to use the next formula given J.G. Anderson that is famous in the world.
1
P (i ) =
i
1 + ( ) 2.6
31
Where,
P(i ) : The probability that the lightning current is bigger than i.
For the similar distribution line(the average height of the overhead ground wire h=25m)
in Japan of which IKL is 35, the density of ground lightning of Japan is 12.3. The lightning
time of distribution line in Japan is 43 on the 100km line with these conditions. The IKL of
Libya is 10 or below. Therefore the lightning density Nt of Libya is expressed by the
following formula.
h IKL
N t = 12.3 × × = 3.4 ~ 4.02 [times/100km/year]
25 30 ~ 35

Considering the worst case, the lightning density of distribution line is 4.0 for the 66kV
lines in Libya.

2. Lightning Fault Rate of Substations

2.1 66kV substation

The lightning protection of 66kV substation is to prevent the lightning current lower
than 30kA from striking the overhead ground wire on the nearest steel tower from the
66kV substation. The lightning failure rate of 66kV substation can be calculated by the
probability of the lightning current higher than 30kA.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

61 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

2.1.1 Range of lightning

The lightning near the nearest steel tower from the 66kV substation usually strikes the
top of the steel tower. But the range of lightning is considered up the 75m (total distance
150m) from the top of the steel tower to both directions for the safety.

2.1.2 Lightning failure rate of 66kV substation

The lightning failure rate of 66kV substation is the probability that the lightning current
higher than 30kA strikes the overhead ground wire included in the range of lightning
(150m). Therefore the lightning failure rate of 66kV substation Pfail can be calculated by

the following formula.

P 150m
Pfail = 30 × 4 × = 0.0078 [times/100km/year]
1 100km

2.2 30kV substation

The lightning protection of 30kV substation is to prevent the lightning current lower
than 20kA from striking the overhead ground wire on the nearest steel tower from the
66kV substation. The lightning failure rate of 30kV substation can be calculated by the
probability of the lightning current higher than 20kA.

2.2.1 Range of lightning

The lightning near the nearest steel tower from the 30kV substation usually strikes the
top of the steel tower. But the range of lightning is considered up the 35m(total distance
70m) from the top of the steel tower to both directions for the safety.

2.2.2 Lightning failure rate of 30kV substation

The lightning failure rate of 30kV substation is the probability that the lightning current
higher than 20kA strikes the overhead ground wire included in the range of lightning

(70m). Therefore the lightning failure rate of 30kV substation Pfail can be calculated by

the following formula.

P20 10.37 70m

Pfail = × 4× × = 0.0014 [times/100km/year]
1 25 100km

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

62 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

2.3 11kV substation

2.3.1 Range of lightning
The lightning near the nearest steel tower from the 11kV substation usually strikes the
top of the steel tower. But the range of lightning is considered up the 25m(total distance
50m) from the top of the steel tower to both directions for the safety.

2.2.2 Lightning failure rate of 11kV substation

The lightning failure rate of 10kV substation is the probability that the lightning current
higher than 15kA strikes the overhead ground wire included in the range of lightning
(50m). Therefore the lightning failure rate of 11kV substation Pfail can be calculated by

the following formula.

P15 9.8 50m

Pfail = × 4× × = 0.0011 [times/100km/year]
1 25 100km

3. Frequency of Flashover of 66kV Lines

There are two kinds of flashover of 66kV lines. The one is the case that the back
flashover happens by the rise of steel tower potential when the overhead ground wire
shields the lightning. The other is the case that the flashover happens by the rise of phase
conductor potential when the overhead ground wire doesn't shield the small lightning
current.

3.1 Back flashover

3.1.1 Back flashover current
The back flashover current changes according as the type of support (steel tower or
wood pole) and the resistance of the overhead ground wire change.

3.1.2 Frequency of back flashover

The surge current which is less than 12.5kA cannot be shielded by the overhead ground
wire for steel tower (shielding angle 35°, vertical 2 lines). Also, the surge current which is
less than 11.6kA cannot be shielded by the overhead ground wire for wooden pole
(shielding angle 45°, horizontal 1 line).

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

63 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.2 Flashover according to shielding failure

3.2.1 Armstrong-Whitehead's Theory

0.8
rs = 6.72 I 0 ≒ rsg

Where,
rs is striking distance with no shielding failure in m.
rsg is earth striking distance with no shielding failure in m.
I 0 is lightning current in kA.

Z0 × Zc
Vl = I 0 ×
Z c + 2Z 0

Where,
Vl is voltage on the conductor by the lightning current in kV.
Z c is conductor surge impedance in Ω.
Z 0 is lightning path impedance in Ω.

This figure shows the conception of Striking distance theory of A-W.

Lightning Current I'

Range of GW Stroke for I

(Shielding Success) * No Range of Shielding Failure fo

Range of
Range of
Ground Stroke for I'
Ground Stroke for I'

r' s

Range of GW Stroke for

(Shielding Success)
r' s
Lightning Current I
(I << I')
r' sg
rs
GW Range of Phase Stroke for
(Shielding Failure)
Range of
Ground Stroke for I rs Phases

rsg

<Figure E1> Striking distance theory of A-W

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

64 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.2.2 Shielding failure current on the lines

The shielding failure current on the lines can be calculated by the following formula.

2
rs − (rs − H gw ) 2 = a
2
rs − (rs − H ph ) 2 = b
a = b + 2.85

Where,
H gw is the height of ground wire in m.
H ph is the height of highest phase conductor in m.
a is the distance from the attached point of ground wire to the point to be protected in m.
b is the distance from the attached point of the highest phase conductor to the point to
be protected in m.
A

F E

Hgw : Height of GW
Hph : Height of Highest/Outmost Ph
B
rs : Striking Distance with No Shielding

rs-Hgw rs
D

rs
rsg = rs
N a G GW

M
b P
Phase
Hgw
Hph

2.85m
O
<Figure E2> Critical striking distance for complete shielding

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

65 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

A. Steel tower
When the shielding angle of a steel tower is 35°, the shielding failure angle is calculated
using above-mentioned formulae.
H gw = 23.75 [m]
H ph = 19.7 [m]
rs = 51.1 [m]
Shielding failure current I 0 = 12.5 [kA]
That is, the lightning current lower than 12.5 kA can strike the highest phase conductor
by the shielding failure.

B. Wooden pole
When the shielding angle of a wooden pole is 45°, the shielding failure angle is
calculated using above-mentioned formulae.
H gw = 15.45 [m]
H ph = 12.6 [m]
rs = 47.7 [m]
Shielding failure current I 0 = 11.6 [kA]
That is, the lightning current lower than 11.6 kA can strike the highest phase conductor
by the shielding failure.

3.2.3 Flashover current by the shielding failure

If the conductor surge impedance is 400Ω and the lightning path impedance is 400Ω, the
flashover current of the phase of which voltage is higher than 422kV (Critical flashover
voltage) by the shielding failure is higher than 3.2kA. That is, if the lightning current
higher than 3.2kA strikes the phase conductor by the shielding failure directly, the
flashover can occur.
The flashover lightning current ranges from 3.2kA to 12.5kA by the shielding failure on
the steel tower with shielding angle 35°. Also the flashover lightning current ranges from
3.2kA to 11.6kA by the shielding failure on the wooden pole with shielding angle 45°. The
back flashover lightning current by the shielding success depends on the height of supports
and earthing resistance of the ground wire. Also, the lightning current higher than the back
flashover current strikes the ground wire, the back flashover occurs.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

66 /67 Version 1.0
 Insulation Coordination

3.3 Frequency of flashover of 66kV lines

The next table shows the frequency of flashover of 66kV lines. The earthing resistance
of the ground wire is applied as the value of 30 Ω.
<Table E1> Frequency of flashover of 66kV lines
Steel Wooden Direct flashover
Items Back flashover current
tower pole current
Lightning density of 66kV
4 3.15 [Times/100km/Year]
lines
Shielding success minimum
12.5kA 11.6kA It depends on the height of the support
current
Frequency Back flashover 3.558 2.8
Frequency of direct Steel tower : 13.9kA
0.0461 0.026 3.2kA
flashover Wooden pole : 13.9kA
Frequency of flashover 3.604 2.826

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

67 /67 Version 1.0
 GDG 0700
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Distribution Transformers

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Load Estimation ····························································································1
2.1 Demand factor & load density ···············································································1
2.2 Simultaneity factor·································································································2
2.3 Load factor·············································································································3
3. Distribution Transformer Ratings ······························································4
4. Pole Mounted Distribution Transformers ·················································4
4.1 Single pole mounted transformers··········································································5
4.2 H-pole mounted transformers·················································································6
4.3 Primary side of transformers ··················································································7
4.4 Secondary side of transformers ··············································································9
4.5 Transformer connections······················································································11
4.5.1 Single-phase transformers ·········································································11
4.5.2 Three-phase transformers ··········································································11
5. Ground Mounted Distribution Transformers ·········································12
5.1 Primary side of transformers ················································································12
5.2 Secondary side of transformers ············································································13
5.3 Layout of distribution substations ········································································15
6. Earthing········································································································16
7. Transformer Loading ·················································································17
7.1 Initial and maximum loading ···············································································17
7.2 Optimum loading ·································································································18
8. Ventilation Area ··························································································18
9. Phase Balancing···························································································19
10. Insulation of Transformer Windings······················································19
11. Ring Main Units (RMU)···········································································19
11.1 Faulted circuit indicators (FCI) ··········································································21

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Demand factor ····························································································· 1

< Table 2 > Recommendation of load density································································· 2
< Table 3 > Recommendation of simultaneity factor ······················································ 3
< Table 4 > Recommendation of load factor··································································· 3
< Table 5 > Standard ratings of distribution transformers··············································· 4
< Table 6 > Rated tap voltage ························································································· 8
< Table 7 > Characteristics of surge arrestors ································································· 8
< Table 8 > Limit values for HV fuse links type K ························································· 8
< Table 9 > Rated current of C.O.S fuse links ································································ 9
< Table 10 > Secondary conductor of single-phase transformers···································· 9
< Table 11 > Secondary conductor of three-phase transformers ··································· 10
< Table 12 > Current carrying capacity of covered copper conductors ························· 10
< Table 13 > MCCB rating of pole-mounted transformers ··········································· 10
< Table 14 > Time-current characteristic of MCCB ····················································· 11
< Table 15 > C.T ratio and LV fuse link rating····························································· 13
< Table 16 > Rating of HV current limiting fuse links·················································· 13
< Table 17 > LV cable size of ground-mounted transformers······································· 14
< Table 18 > Basic rating of MCCB ············································································· 14
< Table 19 > Number of main and branch MCCB ························································ 14
< Table 20 > Minimum clearance in substations··························································· 15
< Table 21 > Maximum earth resistance ······································································· 16
< Table 22 > Minimum separation of earthing electrodes············································· 17
< Table 23 > Initial, maximum loading········································································· 17
< Table 24 > Maximum operation hour of overloading TR ·········································· 17
< Table 25 > Optimum loading····················································································· 18
< Table 26 > Minimum area of ventilation openings ···················································· 18

iii
< Table 27 > Type of winding insulation······································································ 19
< Table 28 > Rated current of RMU ············································································· 20
< Table 29 > Eight distinct trip values ·········································································· 21

iv
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] One single-phase mounted transformers ························································ 5

[Figure 2] Three single-phase mounted transformers······················································ 6
[Figure 3] H-pole mounted transformers········································································· 7
[Figure 4] Configuration of single-phase transformers ················································· 11
[Figure 5] Configuration of three-phase transformers··················································· 12
[Figure 6] Outline drawing of ground mounted transformers ······································· 15
[Figure 7] Typical layout of distribution substations ···················································· 16
[Figure 8] Typical configuration of MV/LV distribution substation ····························· 20

v
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ·············································································································· 22
B Faulted circuit indicators (FCI) ·············································································· 23
C Load and no load losses ·························································································· 24
D Sound level of transformers ···················································································· 26
E Examples of circular demand for deciding Tr rating ·············································· 27
F Examples of load estimation by applying load density ·········································· 29
G Example of deciding transformer ratings ································································ 31
H Optimum loading for transformers ········································································· 36
I Ventilation area ····································································································· 37

vi
 Distribution Transformers

1. Scope

This standard specifies the general requirements for the selection and application of
pole-mounted and ground-mounted distribution transformers and associated components
covering transformer sizes up to and including 2000kVA. The standard also covers the
loading limits of transformers including optimum loading and ventilation in distribution
substations.

2. Load Estimation

2.1 Demand factor & load density

Circuit design is based on primary load estimates of the installations. The circuit demand
is calculated by multiplying the installed load with suitable demand factor and divided by
suitable diversity factor, the below formula may be applied to existing lines.

Circuit demand (kVA) = installed load (kW) ¯ demand factor / (diversity factor¯cosθ)

Demand factor is the ratio of the maximum demand of a system to the total connected
load of the system. The demand factor is most often used in association with a consumer’s
services rather than to a complete distribution system.

Maximum demand of the system

Demand factor = (normally ≤1)
Total connected load

Below table is the demand factor of each customer.

< Table 1 > Demand factor
Category Demand factor
Nominal areas1) 0.5
Commercial & Shopping areas 0.7
Motors, Air conditioners & Water heaters 1.0
1)
Note : Nominal areas include villas, flats and public houses.

If enough information for a huge housing scheme is not available, load density which is
the power consumption per unit of area may be helpful to forecast load in the near future.
The following formula is the recommendation of load density with added electricity

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

demand for forecasting the total load of electric consumption.

Load estimation (VA) = load density (VA/m2) ¯covered areas (m2)

The figures in the table below may be used as a guide only to typical load densities.
Higher load densities may apply for some types of buildings and occupancies. More
measurement and discussion on the matter of load density is necessary to minimize the
costs involved in future re-arrangement of supply.
< Table 2 > Recommendation of load density
Type of occupancy Load density (VA/m2)
Flats, Public houses 90
Villas 100

2.2 Simultaneity factor

Diversity factor is the ratio of the sum of the maximum power demands of the
consumers or the sub-division of any system to the maximum demand of the whole of the
system under consideration. Therefore diversity factor or simultaneity factor is given by :

Diversity factor =
∑ d (normally ≥ 1 ), Simultaneity factor =
1
D D.F
Where:

∑d is the sum of the maximum demands of the sub-system or consumers

D is the maximum demand of the whole of the system or the consumers under
consideration.

Stated in the form the diversity factor is a number greater than unity. For convenience,
the simultaneity factor (S.F), which is the inverse of the diversity factor may be used. The
accumulated simultaneity factor decreases as the number of consumer increases. But it is
not easy to find out accurately how much S.F decreases as consumers increase.
Considering the decreasing ratio of villas’ accumulated S.F, it is recommended that the
first S.F of five consumers be taken as 0.753, and the next S.F of another five consumers
be 0.630, which is 83.6% of the first one, and the third one be 0.577, which is 91.7% of the
second one. Therefore, the table below is the recommendation of simultaneity factor for
flats, villas and public houses.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

< Table 3 > Recommendation of simultaneity factor

No. of consumers Simultaneity factor No. of consumers Simultaneity factor
2~5 0.753 31 ~ 35 0.493
6 ~ 10 0.630 36 ~ 40 0.471
11 ~ 15 0.577 41 ~ 45 0.450
16 ~ 20 0.547 46 ~ 50 0.429
21 ~ 25 0.541 51 and more 0.410
26 ~ 30 0.516 - -

2.3 Load factor

Load factor is the ratio of the average load over a designated period of time to the
maximum load occurring in that period as shown below formula.

Average load over designated period of time

Load factor = (normally ≤1)
Maximum load occurring in that period

The average and the peak demand loads shall be expressed in the same units to make the
expression dimensionless. Fundamentally, the load factor indicates the degree to which the
peak load is sustained during the period. Utilities are generally interested in increasing load
factors on their systems. A high load factor indicates high usage of the system’s equipment
and is a measure of efficiency. High load factor customers are normally very desirable
from a utility’s point of view. Below table is the load factor of each load type measured for
one week.
< Table 4 > Recommendation of load factor
Load type Load factor Remark
· 250 m2 : 0.32 / 450 m2 : 0.41
Villa 0.40
· 600 m2 : 0.47
Public house 0.41 · 150 m2 : 0.37 / 300 m2 : 0.45
Flat 0.36 · 160 m2 : 0.36 / 205 m2 : 0.37
Commercial shop 0.54 · Range : 0.30 ~ 0.81
Mosque 0.34 · Range : 0.18 ~ 0.57
GECOL office 0.52 · Range : 0.36 ~ 0.64

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

3. Distribution Transformer Ratings

Distribution transformers shall be suitably sized to supply the maximum demand of the
loads connected. Therefore transformer ratings shall be determined by both maximum
demand and load profile varying according to customer type, temperature and holiday
seasons. The possibility of future additional load requirements shall be also taken into
account before deciding suitable transformer ratings. There are two types of distribution
transformers currently used at GECOL, such as 11/0.4kV or 30/0.4kV pole-mounted and
ground-mounted transformers. The transformers shall be located at the load center as far as
possible to minimize the cost and the secondary line length.
The single-phase ratings of pole-mounted transformers, which are usually used to supply
relatively small amounts of power to residential areas, shall be 25, 50, 75 and 100kVA.
The three-phase ratings of pole-mounted transformers shall be 50, 75, 100, 200 and
300kVA. The typical ground-mounted transformer ratings shall consist of three-phase 300,
500, 750 and 1000, 1500, 2000kVA. The table below lists standard ratings of distribution
transformers.
< Table 5 > Standard ratings of distribution transformers
Transformer rating (kVA)
Transformer type
Single-phase Three-phase
Pole-mounted 25, 50, 75, 100 50, 75, 100, 200, 300
Ground-mounted - 300, 500, 750, 1000, 1500, 2000

In cases where the residences are large, and as a consequence the capacity requirements
are high, the designers shall take into account all possible future extension and therefore
may install three phase pole-mounted transformers to meet the future demand instead of
single-phase ones or install much higher rating capacity of transformers than designed
rating capacity of ones. The winding configuration used for distribution transformers shall
be a Dyn 11 connection, which has a delta HV winding with a star-connected secondary
winding.

4. Pole Mounted Distribution Transformers

Usually pole mounted transformers are used to supply rural consumers from HV
overhead distribution lines, and are not to be installed on corner poles. An oil-immersed
transformer type shall be applied to all kinds of pole mounted transformers, and three

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

phase oil-immersed transformers shall be equipped with an insulating preservation system

such as oil conservator mounted above the transformer tank.
The location of the transformers shall allow easy access, not only for personnel but for
equipment handling and the maneuvering of heavy vehicles, and no other equipment shall
be mounted on the same pole with a transformer.

4.1 Single pole mounted transformers

One single-phase or three single-phase transformers shall be installed on single pole
structures with a minimum height of 5 m above the ground in order to make the
transformers inaccessible, reducing the risk of injury to animals and people and
minimizing vandalism. The one single pole structure and dimension of one single-phase,
three single-phase transformers in mm shall respectively be as shown below.
1800
100 400
200

400
700

1000

75kV

300
200

Panel 5000
4000

3000

[Figure 1] One single-phase mounted transformers

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

1800

700

1000

75kV 75kV

300
200
200
200
5000
Panel
4000

[Figure 2] Three single-phase mounted transformers

4.2 H-pole mounted transformers

Three-phase transformers shall be installed on H-pole structures with a minimum height
of 5 m above the ground, and shall not exceed 300 kVA power rating. The H-pole structure
and dimension in mm shall be as shown below.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

2400
500 400 800 800
150

700

1000

Panel 5000

3000

500

[Figure 3] H-pole mounted transformers

4.3 Primary side of transformers

The HV winding of distribution transformers shall have 5 tapping positions. They are
principal tapping and ± 2.5% and ± 5%. Tap changing shall be carried out with the
transformer off circuit by means of an externally operated self-positioning tapping switch.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

< Table 6 > Rated tap voltage

Rated voltage Rated tap voltage (V)

(V) -5% -2.5% +2.5% +5%
11,000 10,450 10,725 11,275 11,550

Hard drawn bare stranded copper wires with the minimum size of 16 mm2 and surge
arrestors shall be installed on each primary phase conductor feeding the overhead
transformers protected. The lead length of surge arrestors which are protecting
transformers from lightning surges by carrying the charge to the ground shall be kept as
short as practicable to the HV terminals of transformers. Other related criteria of surge
arrestors shall comply with a design standard for surge arrestors. Unless otherwise
specified the following surge arrestor ratings shall be used.
< Table 7 > Characteristics of surge arrestors
Nominal voltage Rated voltage MCOV1) Nominal discharge current2)
(kV) (kV) (kV) (kA)
11 12 10 2.5
30 36 30 5.0
1)
Note : MCOV stands for maximum continuous operating voltage
2)
This value will be fixed after a design standard for surge arrestor is made.

The minimum spacing between the center of cross arm for line insulators and the center
of cross arm for surge arrestor shall be 750 mm. Cut out fused switch (or Drop out fused
switch) shall be mounted on the primary side of transformers and connected to the primary
supply line for the protection from the fault current. For the protection of transformers on
the HV side, fast acting fuse links type K with characteristics outlined below table shall be
used.
< Table 8 > Limit values for HV fuse links type K
Fusing current (A)
Rated current
300 s 10 s 0.1 s
(A)
Min Max Min Max Min Max
3 6 7.2 7.2 10 36 45
4 8 9.6 9.6 14.4 48 60
5 10 12 12 18 60 72
6.3 12.0 14.4 13.5 20.5 72 86

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

8 15 18 18 27 97 116
10 19.5 23.4 22.4 34 128 154
12.5 25 30 29.5 44 166 199
16 31.0 37.2 37.0 55 215 258
20 39 47 48 71 273 328
25 50 60 60 90 350 420
31.5 63 76 77.5 115 447 546

The rated current of fuse links shall be at least twice the transformer primary current.
The below table lists the rated current of C.O.S fuse links.
< Table 9 > Rated current of C.O.S fuse links

Rating capacity Primary current (A) Rated current of fuse links (A)
(kVA) 11kV 30 kV 11kV 30 kV
25 2.3 0.8 5 2
Single 50 4.6 1.7 10 4
Phase 75 6.8 2.5 16 6.3
100 9.1 3.3 20 8
50 2.6 1.0 6.3 3
75 3.9 1.4 10 3
Three
100 5.3 1.9 12.5 5
Phase
200 10.5 3.9 25 10
300 15.8 5.8 31.5 12.5

4.4 Secondary side of transformers

LV conductors between the single or three-phase transformer LV bushings and the LV
distribution boxes shall be connected with XLPE or PVC insulated copper conductor and
shall have a minimum size as specified in table below. The secondary neutral lines of
transformers shall be connected to the common neutral lines of low voltage lines.
< Table 10 > Secondary conductor of single-phase transformers

Rating capacity Secondary current LV conductor size (mm2)

(kVA) (A) XLPE PVC
25 109 1C×25 1C×50
50 217 1C ×70 1C×120

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

75 326 1C ×150 2×1C×150

100 435 1C ×240 2×1C×150

< Table 11 > Secondary conductor of three-phase transformers

Rating capacity Secondary current LV conductor size (mm2)

(kVA) (A) XLPE PVC
50 72 4C×25 3.5C×50
75 108 3.5C×50 3.5C×70
100 144 3.5C×95 3.5C×150
200 289 3.5C×240 4×2×1C×150
300 433 4×1C×240 4×2×1C×150

The table below is the current carrying capacity of 0.4kV covered copper conductors
which are installed on the secondary side of overhead transformers.
< Table 12 > Current carrying capacity of covered copper conductors
Current carrying capacity (A)
Cross section area
Single-core conductors Multi-core conductors
(mm2)
XLPE PVC XLPE PVC
25 132 92 104 71
35 164 115 129 89
50 201 139 157 108
70 260 180 201 139
95 318 220 244 168
120 372 257 283 195
150 432 297 327 226
240 589 403 441 305

MCCB distribution boxes shall be installed on the secondary side of transformers to

interrupt fault currents and to provide overload protection. Below table lists the rated
current of MCCB for each transformer.
< Table 13 > MCCB rating of pole-mounted transformers
Rating capacity Secondary current (A) MCCB rating (A)
(kVA) Single-phase Three-phase Single-phase Three-phase
25 109 - 100 -

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

50 217 72 200 80
75 326 108 315 100
100 435 144 400 160
200 - 289 - 315
300 - 433 - 400

When at the end of the conventional time the value of current is immediately raised to
1.3 times the MCCB rating, tripping shall then occur in less than later. Conventional values
for inverse time-delay operation are given in table below.
< Table 14 > Time-current characteristic of MCCB
Conventional non-tripping Conventional time
Conventional tripping current
current (Hour)
1.05 * MCCB rating 1.3 * MCCB rating 2

4.5 Transformer connections

4.5.1 Single-phase transformers
Single-phase transformers are manufactured with two primary and two secondary
bushings to obtain one secondary voltages. They are often used to supply power for
residential lighting, air-conditioning and heating needs, etc. The secondary winding of
single-phase transformers is rated at 230 volts. Figure below is the configuration of single-
phase transformers.
A1
P1 11000
B1 11000
11000
C1

N2
230
A2
S1
B2
C2
[Figure 4] Configuration of single-phase transformers

4.5.2 Three-phase transformers

Three-phase transformers are manufactured with three primary and four secondary

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

bushings in order to obtain two (230/400V) secondary voltages. They are often used to
supply power for not only lighting loads, but also motor loads such as pumps, fans with the
connection of delta or wye configurations. A delta (Δ) – wye (Y) transformer has its
primary winding connected in a delta and its secondary winding connected in a wye. The
below figure is the configuration of three-phase transformers.
In a delta connection, the three conductors shall be connected end to end in a triangle or
delta shape. Δ connections can enjoy a higher level of reliability (if one winding fails open,
the other two can still maintain full line voltage to the load).

P1
A1
P2 11000
B1 11000
P3 11000
C1

N2
230
A2
S1 400 400
B2
S2 400
C2
S3
[Figure 5] Configuration of three-phase transformers

5. Ground Mounted Distribution Transformers

For three-phase service greater than 400 amps if possible, transformer houses shall be
provided for the installation of ground mounted transformers and the transformers shall be
three phase, oil-immersed ones which are equipped with oil conservator. The range of
transformer ratings shall be from 300kVA to 2000kVA. The transformer houses shall
consist of one RMU and one or two transformers and one LV panel consisting of MCCB.
When safety is of importance, dry-type transformers can be installed in large office
buildings, or any building where the transformers are to be located indoors.

5.1 Primary side of transformers

The primary side of ground mounted transformers shall be connected to the outgoing
tee-off circuit of RMU with three cores up to 240mm2 copper XLPE cables. The tee-off

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

circuit shall be protected by circuit breakers which are equipped with three current
transformers and three LV fuses or three HV current limiting fuses. The LV fuses shall
allow the circuit breakers to be tripped in the event of a fault. Therefore, combination of
C.T ratio’s and LV fuse rating’s can enable a wide range of transformer capacities to be
protected. The example of C.T ratio and LV fuse link rating by transformer ratings is
shown in the table below.
< Table 15 > C.T ratio and LV fuse link rating
Rated current of
Transformer rating Primary current (A)
C.T Ratio LV fuse links (A)
(kVA)
11kV 30kV 11Kv 30 kV
300 15.7 5.8 50/5 4 2
500 26.2 9.6 50/5 6.3 2
750 39.4 14.4 100/5 4 2
1000 52.5 19.2 100/5 6.3 2
1500 78.7 28.9 150/5 6.3 2
2000 105 38.5 150/5 8 3

The rating of HV current limiting fuse links shall be at least twice the transformer primary
current. The below table is the rating of HV current limiting fuse links.
< Table 16 > Rating of HV current limiting fuse links
Rating of HV
Transformer rating Primary current (A)
CL fuse links (A)
(kVA)
11kV 30kV 11kV 30 kV
300 15.7 5.8 31.5 12.5
500 26.2 9.6 63 20
750 39.4 14.4 80 31.5
1000 52.5 19.2 125 40
1500 78.7 28.9 160 63
2000 105.0 38.5 250 80

5.2 Secondary side of transformers

The secondary side of transformers shall be connected to the LV panel with single core
400mm2 XLPE copper cables. With the consideration of single core 400mm2 cable current

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

rating, the table below is the number of 400mm2 cables per phase to install based on the
size of distribution transformers.
< Table 17 > LV cable size of ground-mounted transformers
Transformer rating Secondary current Cable size (mm2)
(kVA) (A) Phase line(s) Neutral line(s)
300 433 1C×400 1C×400
500 722 2×1C×400 1C×400
750 1083 2×1C×400 1C×400
1000 1443 3×1C×400 2×1C×400
3×1C×400 2×1C×400
1500 2165
and 2×1C×400 and 1C×400
2000 2887 2×3×1C×400 2×2×1C×400

One main and a few branches adjustable MCCB shall be installed in a LV panel. The
suitable number of branch circuits shall be determined from the total loads and transformer
ratings, and installing around 4 to 6 branch circuits may be suitable for each transformer.
The ratings of main MCCB shall be both 1600A and 800A, and the rating of branch
MCCB shall be 400A.
< Table 18 > Basic rating of MCCB
Category Main MCCB Branch MCCB No. of branch circuits
MCCB rating 800A, 1600A 400A 4~6

The table below is the necessary number of main and branch MCCB, which is
dependant upon a transformer rating.
< Table 19 > Number of main and branch MCCB

Transformer rating MCCB rating (A)

(kVA) Main Branch
300 1×400 1×400
500 1×800 2×400
750 1×1600 4×400
1000 1×1600 4×400 or 6×400
1500 1×1600 and 1×800 4×400 and 2×400
2000 2×1×1600 2×4×400

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

Ground mounted Transformers shall be provided with three sidewall mounted high
voltage bushings and four low voltage bushings shown in below figure.

(a) Front view (b) Plan view

[Figure 6] Outline drawing of ground mounted transformers

5.3 Layout of distribution substations

To ensure the safety of operators and adequate access for installation and maintenance
activities, substations shall be arranged to achieve the following general clearances.
< Table 20 > Minimum clearance in substations
Minimum clearance
Category
(mm)
o Between equipment and wall or trench 900
o In front of equipment that must be operated or maintained
1500
o Between equipment

The bottom of the open trench shall be free from stones. The minimum depth of trench
shall be 900 mm, and the minimum width shall be 1200 mm. After bringing these cables in,
the cable service entrances shall be sealed to prevent water from entering the substation.
The below figure shows a typical layout recommended for indoor distribution substations.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

(unit : mm)

Transformer

900 RMU 1500 1500 LV panel 900

1500 mm
Branch circuits

[Figure 7] Typical layout of distribution substations

6. Earthing

Both low voltage neutral points of transformers and neutrals of outgoing low voltage
cables shall be earthed together with the maximum earth resistance of 25 Ω for pole
mounted transformers, 10 Ω for ground mounted transformers. The earthing system for
each facility should be separated basically. But, if it is difficult to get enough earth
resistance in the area of high soil resistivity, the whole earthing system of each facility can
be connected together to meet the earthing standard. The earthing electrode for the neutral
point of transformers and other facilities such as transformer tanks, surge arresters and
MCCB, etc can be used in common when one of their earthing resistances is not more than
1 Ω. The following table is the maximum earth resistance of each facility.
< Table 21 > Maximum earth resistance
Distribution facility Maximum earth resistance (Ω)
All tanks of transformers, RMU 10
Neutral point of pole mounted transformers 25
Neutral point of ground mounted transformers 10
Surge arresters 15
MCCB 100

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

The top of each earthing electrode shall be buried at least 0.5 m under ground surface,
and each electrode shall be separated by a minimum of 2 m when more than two electrodes
are buried in series. The minimum separation of earthing electrodes between different
groups shall be 3 m.
< Table 22 > Minimum separation of earthing electrodes
Earthing electrode Same group Different group
Minimum separation 2m 3m

Compressive sleeve connections shall be used to connect the earthing conductors of

surge arresters or transformers to the earthing conductor of buried electrodes. Bolted
connections shall be used to connect the earthing conductor to the exposed conductive part
of each facility. The details of transformer earthing shall be referred to the design standard
for earthing.

7. Transformer Loading

7.1 Initial and maximum loading

The initial loading for new transformers shall be kept within 50% of the nameplate
ratings and the transformer loading can be much lower than 50% if there is a very high
possibility of future additional load requirements. The maximum loading shall be limited
up to 100% of the nameplate ratings.
< Table 23 > Initial, maximum loading
Loading limit
Category
Initial Maximum
% of nameplate 50 % 100 %

In case of the overloading operation for emergency such as load transfer, the maximum
duration of overloading transformers shall be kept in accordance with the below table in
order not to encroach upon the normal life expectancy of the transformers.
< Table 24 > Maximum operation hour of overloading TR
Overloading rate 110 % 130 % 140 % 160 %
Hours 8 4 2 1
Note. The condition of ambient temperature shown in above table is 30°C. When the ambient
temperature increases, the maximum duration of overloading will decrease.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

When the utilization ratio of existing transformer is soon expected to reach the loading
limit, replacing a lager transformer or installing another new transformer to separate or
transfer loads shall be considered before overloading transformers.

7.2 Optimum loading

The following table is the optimum loading of three-phase oil-immersed ground
mounted transformers in order to minimize the total losses of transformers. The details of
optimum loading can be referred to appendix H.
< Table 25 > Optimum loading
Transformer rating 50 kVA 75 ~ 2000 kVA
Optimum loading 76 % 72 %

8. Ventilation Area

Sufficient cooling of the distribution transformers can be achieved by means of

ventilation openings in the transformer houses that are designed considering transformer
rating, losses and climatic conditions. The relevant formula for calculating ventilation area
and details can be referred to appendix I. The minimum ventilation area for 11/0.4 kV oil-
immersed ground transformers is as follows.
< Table 26 > Minimum area of ventilation openings
(unit : m2)

Transformer rating Total loss of TR H(=3m) H(=4m)

(kVA) (kW)
S S' S S'

300 5.45 0.566 0.623 0.491 0.540

500 8.22 0.854 0.940 0.740 0.814
750 11,31 1.175 1.292 1.017 1.119
1000 14.02 1.456 1.602 1.261 1.387
1500 18.96 1.970 2.167 1.706 1.877
2000 22.67 2.355 2.591 2.040 2.244
Note. S is the sectional area of incoming-air opening and S' is the sectional area of outgoing-air
opening.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

9. Phase Balancing

Three-phase power systems in a 400/230 volt shall be designed so that each phase line
carries approximately the same amount of load as the other two lines. In comparison with
three phase customers which are assumed to have their load evenly balanced across all
three phases, the number of single phase customers shall be balanced over the three phases
of each feeder.
This phase balancing shall be considered in order to reduce neutral current to zero and
prevent overheat and overloading of transformer coils or conductors. Badly unbalanced
phases will result in frequent tripping of protective devices and may damage equipment.
It is recommended that the phase amps on rural feeders shall be measured or recorded
monthly or a minimum of once every year. If some phase currents are heavily unbalanced,
then the utility shall re-balance the phases by re-connecting some of the single-phase load
from the heavily loaded phases to the lightly loaded phases.

10. Insulation of Transformer Windings

When it comes to insulating method of transformer windings, there are two basic classes
such as oil-immersed and dry-type method. The mineral oil-immersed transformers are the
most common used ones which are installed most commercial, industrial places. Three-
phase oil-immersed pole mounted and ground mounted transformers shall be fitted with oil
conservators.
The dry-type transformers can be installed in high apartment blocks, hotels and
commercial buildings or anywhere that safe power is important considerations because
they can minimize environmental contamination and fire hazard when exposed to fire risk
with low flammability and self extinguishing in a short time.
< Table 27 > Type of winding insulation
Winding insulation Oil-immersed method Dry-type method
Application Most common places Hotels, apartment. etc

11. Ring Main Units (RMU)

The purpose of ring circuit is to minimize the number of customers affected by the
faulted section of ring circuits. Once the faulted circuit has been located, it can be isolated
and earthed, via the ring main units, to allow safe repair work. In the mean time the
normally open point can be closed to re-energize the maximum possible number of

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

customers.
A transformer house shall normally consist three main parts, such as ring main unit,
transformer and LV panel that contains one main and four to six branch molded case
circuit breakers (MCCB). Below figure illustrates schematically the proper connections of
MV/LV distribution substation.

[Figure 8] Typical configuration of MV/LV distribution substation

Ring main units consist of extensible or non-extensible fixed switchgear that is generally
used to couple a distribution transformer to HV distribution systems. The requirement for
extensible or non-extensible RMU is dependent upon GECOL requirements. Generally, the
extensible RMU shall be recommended if there is need to install another transformer in the
near future due to future load growth. If there is no need to install new transformers in the
future, installing a non-extensible RMU can be suitable.
The RMU which is insulated with SF6 gas shall be operated at the rated voltage of 12kV
and consist of two load break switches and one tee-off circuit breaker for protecting
transformers. The cable termination of RMU shall be suitable to receive three core cables
of sizes up to 240mm2. The rated currents of RMU load break switches shall be 630A with
the consideration of interconnecting distribution lines. The rated current of tee-off circuit
breaker shall be 200A.
< Table 28 > Rated current of RMU
Category Load break switch Tee-off CB
Rated current (A) 630 200

Each load break switch is a fully certified fault making, load breaking device and is

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

housed within the SF6 enclosure. The switches shall be operated into one of three positions,
‘ON’, ‘OFF’, ‘EARTH’.

11.1 Faulted circuit indicators (FCI)

Faulted circuit indicators shall reset automatically upon restoration of system power or
after a predetermined time period, such as 2 or 4 hours and be fitted to each incoming cable
of RMU to quickly identify the location of faulted equipment and to reduce outage time,
operating costs and improve customer service. By locating the last tripped faulted circuit
indicator and the first un-tripped indicator; repair crew can isolate the fault to a specific
segment of the circuit. By switching out the faulted segment, power can be restored to the
balance of the circuit while the faulted segment is repaired.
The trip setting on a fault indicator shall be above the maximum load current on the
circuit, and high enough to allow normal fluctuations of the load. The trip setting shall also
be lower than the minimum expected fault current. A trip setting of 400 Amp for 200 Amp
circuits or 800 Amp for 400 Amp circuits will guarantee enough sensitivity to indicate
permanent faults accurately.
As shown in below table, the FCI shall assume one of eight distinct tri p value based on
sampled circuit load.
< Table 29 > Eight distinct trip values
Load current range Trip value
10 Amps < I < 25 Amps 50 Amps
25 Amps < I < 50 Amps 100 Amps
50 Amps < I < 100 Amps 200 Amps
100 Amps < I < 200Amps 400 Amps
200 Amps < I < 300Amps 600 Amps
300 Amps < I < 400 Amps 800 Amps
400 Amps < I < 500 Amps 1000 Amps
500 Amps < I 1200 Amps

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

Appendix A: References

BS 6436 Ground mounted distribution transformers for cable box or unit

substation connection
BS 7735 Guide to loading of oil-immersed power transformers
IEC 60076-1 Power transformers
IEC 60354 Loading guide for oil-immersed power transformers
IEC 60905 Loading guide for dry-type power transformers
IEEE C57.12.26 IEEE standard for pad-mounted, compartmental-type, self-cooled,
three-phase distribution transformers for use with separable insulated
high-voltage connectors
IEEE C57.91 Guideline for loading mineral oil-immersed transformers
IEEE std 80-
IEEE guide for safety in AC substation grounding
2000

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

Appendix B: Faulted circuit indicators (FCI)

The fault detecting and location is an important function of the faulted circuit indicators.
FCI have been used for over fifty years on transmission and distribution circuits to quickly
identify the location of faulted equipment. Faulted circuit indicators reduce outage time,
reduce operating costs, and improve customer service. During most fault conditions, a
large magnitude of fault current is present on the system from the source to the point of the
fault.

FCI installed at various points on the system, sense this condition and acknowledge by
means of investigate the disturbance look for fault indicators to lead them to the problem.
By locating the last tripped faulted circuit indicator and the first un-tripped indicator; the
maintenance men can isolate the fault to a specific segment of the circuit. By switching out
the faulted segment, power can be restored to the balance of the circuit while the faulted
segment is repaired. The following is an illustration of a typical URD loop circuit to
illustrate the basic fault indicator theory.

Fuse
Blown

FCI Tripped FCI Tripped FCI Tripped FCI

Fault Not Tripped

Fuse

Open point

[Figure1] Typical diagram of URD loop circuit

In addition to URD circuits, the faulted circuit indicators are being used on overhead
circuits to improve outage time, reliability and to locate transient problems. Other names
for faulted circuit indicators include, ground fault indicators, earth fault indicators and fault
indicators.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

Appendix C : Load and no load losses

Transformer losses are produced by the electrical current flowing in the coils and the
magnetic field alternating in the core. The losses associated with the coils are called the
load losses, while the losses produced in the core are called no-load losses. Load losses
vary according to the loading on the transformer. They include heat losses and eddy
currents in the primary and secondary conductors of the transformer.
No-load losses are caused by the magnetizing current needed to energize the core of the
transformer, and do no vary according to the loading on the transformer. They are constant
and occur 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, regardless of the load. Load loss and no-load
loss of all transformers shall not exceed the values of table below, and tolerance shall not
exceed +15% of load loss, +15% of no-load loss and +10% of total loss.

1. Pole mounted oil-immersed transformers

1.1 Single-phase transformers
< Table 1 > Load and no-load loss of single phase transformers
11/0.4kV 30/0.4kV
Transformer rating
(kVA) Load loss No load loss Load loss No load loss
(W) (W) (W) (W)
25 440 90 600 90
50 820 145 1,120 170
75 1,250 200 1,550 220
100 1,590 245 1,795 250

1.2 Three-phase transformers

< Table 2 > Load and no-load loss of pole mounted transformers
11/0.4kV 30/0.4kV
Transformer rating
(kVA) Load loss No load loss Load loss No load loss
(W) (W) (W) (W)
50 1,250 210 1,350 270
75 1,710 265 1,800 320
100 2,150 320 2,250 370
200 3,600 520 3,700 550
300 4,730 720 5,100 735

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

2. Ground mounted three-phase transformers

2.1 Oil-immersed transformers
< Table 3 > Load and no-load loss of oil-immersed transformers
11/0.4kV 30/0.4kV
Transformer rating
(kVA) Load loss No load loss Load loss No load loss
(W) (W) (W) (W)
300 4,730 720 5,100 735
500 7,150 1,070 7,700 1,080
750 9,845 1,460 13,500 1,470
1000 12,200 1,815 18,600 1,800
1500 16,500 2,460 22,300 3,535
2000 19,700 2,965 25,400 3,040

2.2 Dry-type transformers

< Table 4 > Load and no-load loss of dry-type transformers
11/0.4kV 30/0.4kV
Transformer rating
(kVA) Load loss No load loss Load loss No load loss
(W) (W) (W) (W)
300 4,275 1,155 4,575 1,500
500 6,315 1,650 8,525 2,000
750 8,590 2,040 11,230 2,585
1000 10,520 2,430 13,530 3,000
1500 14,430 3,275 18,905 3,860
2000 18,700 4,425 23,430 4,700

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

Appendix D : Sound level of transformers

All transformers shall be designed and manufactured to reduce noise and vibration to
accept level. The average surface sound level of transformers shall not exceed the
following values.

1. 30,11/0.4kV Pole mounted oil-immersed transformers

< Table 1 > Sound level of pole mounted transformers
Transformer rating Maximum sound level (DB)
(kVA) Single-phase Three-phase
25 48 -
50 48 48
75 51 51
100 51 51
200 - 55
300 - 55

2. 30,11/0.4kV Three phase ground mounted transformers

< Table 2 > Sound level of ground mounted transformers
Transformer rating Maximum sound level (DB)
(kVA) Oil-immersed (11/30kV) Dry-type (11/30kV)
300 55/55 58/59
500 56/56 60/61
750 57/57 64/65
1000 58/58 64/65
1500 60/60 65/66
2000 61/61 66/67

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

Appendix E : Examples of circular demand for deciding Tr rating

1. Example one

There are five villas which need electricity supply. The total load installed of each
consumer including motors or air conditioners is as follows.
< Table 1 > Installed load of each villa
Installed load (kW)
Villa Motors or air
Lamps & TV etc Sum (kW)
conditioners
1st Villa 14 2 16
2nd Villa 8.3 3 11.3
3rd Villa 9.3 2.5 11.8
4th Villa 12 3 15
5th Villa 13.4 2.5 15.9
Total 57 13 70

If the simultaneity factor of distribution transformer below table 2 is applied, simultaneity

factor of five villas is 0.753.
< Table 2 > Recommendation of simultaneity factor

No. of consumers Simultaneity factor No. of consumers Simultaneity factor

2~5 0.753 31~35 0.493

6~10 0.630 36~40 0.471
11~15 0.577 41~45 0.450
16~20 0.547 46~50 0.429
21~25 0.541 51 and more 0.410
26~30 0.516 - -

The demand factor of lamps & TV etc is 0.5 and one of motors or air conditioners is 0.63
according to distribution transformer GDS table 1. The value of cosθ is usually 0.9. The
circuit demand of five villas is as follows.

Circuit demand (kVA) = installed load (kW) ¯ demand factor / (diversity factor¯cosθ)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

Thus,

kVA =
{57kW × 0.5 + 13kW × 0.63}× 0.753 = 30.7kVA
0.9

Therefore, the total circuit demand is 30.7 kVA and the initial loading limit of new
transformers is recommended to keep within 50% of its rating.

kVA = 30.7 kVA × 2 = 61.4kVA

The necessary capacity of a new transformer is 75 kVA. If there is a very high possibility
of future additional load requirements, a higher transformer rating can be chosen.

2. Example two

If other 10 villas are constructed near the new transformer, and the total load installed of
10 villas is as follows.
< Table 3 > Installed load of each villa
Installed load (kW)
Villa Motors or air
Lamps & TV etc Sum (kW)
conditioners
1~5 68 13 81
6~10 60 14 74

The simultaneity factor of first 5 villas is 0.630, and the simultaneity factor of second 5
villas is 0.577. The circuit demand of new 10 villas is as follows.

(68 × 0.5 + 13 × 0.63) × 0.630 (60kW × 0.5 + 14 × 0.63) × 0.577

kVA = + = 54.4kVA
0.9 0.9

The total installed load of 15 villas is 85.13 kVA (=30.7 kVA +54.4 kVA), the existing
transformer rating is lower than 85.13 kVA. Therefore a new transformer shall be installed,
Then a new 200 kVA transformer may be properly constructed.

If the total load of new villas is 35 kVA and the total load of 15 villas is 65.7 kVA
(=30.7+35), the existing transformer can be used because its rating is more than 65.7 kVA.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

28 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

Appendix F : Examples of load estimation by applying load density

1. Example one

The load estimation can be made by using the below formula to forecast the total load of
electric consumption.

Load estimation (VA) = load density (VA/m2) ¯covered areas (m2)

There is a 3-floors flat building with 5 consumers, each having 205 m2 covered area. The
load density of each flat consumer is 90 VA/m2 as shown in table 1.
< Table 1 > Recommendation of load density
Types of occupancy Load density (VA/m2)
Flats & public houses 90
Villas 100

The total installed load for the 5 consumers with the consideration of 0.753 S.F is :

205(m 2 ) × 90(VA / m 2 ) + {4 × 205(m 2 ) × 90(VA / m 2 ) × 0.753} = 74kVA

If the initial utilization ratio of transformer should be kept about 50% of its rated capacity
and considering the future growth of electric consumption, A 200 kVA transformer is
suitable for the required capacity to supply power.

When a new villa building with 5 consumers, each having 160 m2 covered area, is built in
the same district. The total installed load for the new flat including S.F is :

5 × 160(m 2 ) × 100(VA / m 2 ) × 0.630 = 50.4kVA

The required capacity including the new villa is :

74kVA + 50.4kVA = 128.4kVA

Therefore, the total utilization ratio of the transformer for 10 consumers will be
approximately 64.2% :

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

29 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

2. Example two

There is a three 4-floors flats with 10 consumers, each having 205 m2 covered area. The
total installed load is :

205 × 90 + (4 × 205 × 90 × 0.753) + (5 × 205 × 90 × 0.630) = 132kVA

If the initial utilization ratio of a transformer should be kept around 50% of its rated
capacity, A 200 kVA transformer which initial loading is 66%, is suitable for the required
capacity to supply power.

When new 10 public houses, each having 160 m2 covered area, is built in the same district.
The total installed load for the new flat excluding S.F is :

(5 × 160 × 90 × 0.577) + (5 × 160 × 90 × 0.547) = 80.9kVA

Therefore, the total installed load is 212.9 kVA (=132+80.9) and the total utilization ratio
of the transformer for 20 consumers will be approximately 106%.

Here the 200 kVA transformer would be overloaded if the new 10 public houses are
connected to the existing transformer. Therefore, a new 200 kVA transformer shall be
installed for supplying the new 10 consumers.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

30 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

Appendix G : Example of deciding transformer ratings and sites

A new town is planed to construct near downtown and the town will consist of 40 public
houses with each 150 m2, 10 villas with each 250 m2, one mosque with 1000 m2 area and 3
commercial shops with each 40 m2, 38 street lighting poles as below.

40 m2
40 public houses
40 m2 Commercial
with each 150 m2 area
shops
40 m2

10 villas with each One mosque

250 m2 area with 1000 m2 area

[ Figure 1] New town composition

1. Load estimation of 40 public houses

The load density of one public house is 90 (VA/m2), Therefore the assuming consumption
of each group and total are shown in table 1.
< Table 1 > Assuming consumption of public houses
Number Assuming consumption
Simultaneity factor
of consumers (kVA)
1 1 13.5
2~5 0.753 40.7
6~10 0.630 42.7
11~15 0.577 38.9
16~20 0.547 36.9
21~25 0.541 36.5

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

31 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

26~30 0.516 34.8

31~35 0.493 33.3
36~40 0.471 31.8
Total 309

2. Load estimation of 10 villas

The load density of one public house is 100 (VA/m2), Therefore the assuming
consumption of each group and total are shown in table 2.
< Table 2 > Assuming consumption of villas
No. of consumers Simultaneity factor Assuming consumption (kVA)
1 1 25.0
2~5 0.753 75.3
6~10 0.630 78.8
Total 179.1

3. Load estimation of one mosque

The load density of one mosque can be around 40 (VA/m2) from the result of
measurement. Therefore the assuming consumption of one mosque is as follows.

1000(m 2 ) × 40(VA / m 2 ) / 1000 = 40(kVA)

4. Load estimation of three commercial shops

The load density of one commercial shop can is around 120 (VA/m2) from the result of
measurement, Therefore the assuming consumption of three shops is as follows.

3 × 40(m 2 ) × 120(VA / m 2 ) / 1000 = 14.4(kVA)

5. Load estimation of 38 street lighting poles

The 2¯250W high pressure sodium lamps will be installed on each street lighting pole,
Therefore the assuming consumption of 38 street lighting poles is as follows.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

32 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

2 × 250(W ) × 38 /(0.9 × 1000) = 21.1(kVA)

6. Total assuming consumption of new town

The total assuming consumption of new town is shown table 3.

< Table 3 > Load estimation of each load
Load estimation Load estimation
Load type Load type
(kVA) (kVA)
40 Public houses 309 3 Commercial shops 14.4
10 Villas 179.1 38 Street lighting 21.1
1 Mosque 40 Total 564.0

Therefore, with the consideration of both initial loading of transformers and future growth,
installing one three-phase 1000 k VA transformer can be proper.

7. MCCB ratings

The necessary MCCB ratings for main, branch and their layout in LV panel are
respectively as follows.
< Table 4 > MCCB ratings
MCCB Main MCCB Branch MCCB
Rating (A) 1¯1600 4¯400 or 6¯400

1600 A

400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A

Public houses Others If necessary

[Figure 2] Lay out of LV panel

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

33 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

8. Decision of load center

The below figure is the related diagram of supplying lines.

40 m2
40 public houses
40 m2 Commercial
with each 150 m2 area
shops
i1 40 m2
i2

40 m

i '2 i '1 0
10 villas with each One mosque
250 m2 area with 1000 m2 area

[Figure 3] Diagram of supplying lines

If N’-0-N is the main line section of radial system and one point of the section is an
assumed point zero, X calculated through the following formula becomes the distance from
the assumed zero point to the load center.

(l1i1 + l 2 i2 + ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ + l n in ) − (l '1i '1 + l ' 2 i ' 2 + ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ + l ' n i ' n )

X=
i0 + (i1 + i2 + ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ + in ) + (i '1 + i ' 2 + ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ + i ' n )

Where,
X is the distance from assumed zero point to load center (m)
i0 is the current on assumed zero point (A)
i1, i2, ···, in is currents on each load point along the secondary line in a positive direction
from zero point (A)
i’1, i’2, ···, i’n is the currents on each load point along the secondary line in a negative
direction from zero point (A)
l1, l2, ···, ln is the distance of i1, i2, ···, in from zero point (m)
l’1, l’2, ···, l’n is the distance of i’1, i’2, ···, i’n from zero point (m)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

34 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

l '2 l2
N’ l '1 l1 N

0
i '2 i '1 i0 X i1 i2

i0 i1 i2 i’1 i’2
Current (A)
6.4 25.4 409 52 241
i0 l1 l2 l’1 l’2
Distance (m)
0 136 192 120 176

i1l1 + i2 l 2 − (i '1l '1 + i ' 2 l ' 2 )

X=
i0 + i1 + i2 + i '1 + i ' 2
25.4 × 136 + 409 × 192 − (58.4 × 120 + 241 × 176)
= = 45.8 (m)
6.4 + 25.4 + 409 + 52 + 241

Therefore, the load center is 45.8 m away from i0 and the 1000 kVA transformer shall be
installed near the commercial shops.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

35 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

Appendix H : Optimum loading for transformers

Each transformer has no-load and load loss and the total loss can be minimized by
operating transformers with optimum loading. The no-load loss is fixed and the load loss
can be changed to the connected loads. The total loss of transformers is as follows.

WL = WNo-load + WLoad = WNo-load + Lload × UR 2 × H (W)

Where,
WL is the total loss of transformers (W)
WNo-load is the no-load loss of transformers (W)
WLoad is the load loss of transformers (W)
kW ( peak )
UR2 is the utilization ratio (%) , UR = × 100 , P.F(=0.95)
kVA × P.F
H is the loss factor (=0.288)

The following table is the optimum loading of three-phase oil-immersed ground mounted
transformers according peak demand.
< Table 1 > Optimum loading
Demand(MW)
50 100 500 1,000 5,000 over
Rating (kVA)
50 76% 76% 76% 76% 76% 76%
75 72% 73% 73% 73% 73% 73%
100 72% 72% 72% 72% 72% 72%
200 70% 72% 72% 71% 71% 71%
300 75% 73% 72% 73% 72% 72%
500 68% 70% 72% 72% 72% 72%
750 71% 72% 72% 71% 72% 72%
1000 65% 68% 72% 72% 72% 72%
1500 78% 71% 73% 72% 71% 72%
2000 66% 65% 70% 72% 72% 72%

Therefore, the optimum loading of transformers is around 72% of their ratings.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

36 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

Appendix I : Ventilation area

Ventilation is achieved by means of natural air. Sufficient cooling of the distribution

transformers is achieved by means of ventilation openings in the transformer house that are
designed considering transformer rating, losses and climatic conditions.
The below formula is the necessary area of suck and exhaust outlet in distribution
transformer houses.

0.18 × P
S= (m2) and S ' = 1.1 × S (m2)
H

Where,
P is the sum of the no-load losses and the full-load losses (kW)
S is the sectional area of the incoming-air orifice (m2)
S' is the sectional are of the outgoing-air orifice (m2)
H is height (center to center) of the outgoing air orifice above the incoming-air orifice (m)

S'

[Figure 1] Natural ventilation

Therefore, the minimum area of ventilation openings for 0.4/11 kV oil-immersed ground
transformers is as follows.

< Table 1 > Minimum ventilation area of oil-immersed transformers

(unit : m2)

Transformer rating Total loss of TR H(=3m) H(=4m)

(kVA) (kW)
S S' S S'

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

37 / 38
Version 1.0
 Distribution Transformers

300 5.45 0.566 0.623 0.491 0.540

500 8.22 0.854 0.940 0.740 0.814
750 11,31 1.175 1.292 1.017 1.119
1000 14.02 1.456 1.602 1.261 1.387
1500 18.96 1.970 2.167 1.706 1.877
2000 22.67 2.355 2.591 2.040 2.244

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

38 / 38
Version 1.0
 GDG 0800
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Service Drop

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Definitions ······································································································1
3. Underground Service Drop ··········································································1
3.1 Fuse box configuration····························································································1
3.2 Current carrying capacity of cable···········································································2
3.3 The Decision of the size of fuse-link and service drop ············································4
3.3.1 The Decision of the size of fuse-link at 1.2K·m/W ········································4
3.3.2 The Decision of the size of fuse-link at 2.0K·m/W ········································5
3.3.3 The Decision of the size of fuse-link at 2.7K·m/W ········································6
3.3.4 The Decision of the size of cable ···································································7
3.4 The installation········································································································7
3.4.1 Cable rising conduit size ················································································7
3.4.2 The type of service drop according to the customer type ·······························7
4. Overhead Service Drop ··············································································10
4.1 Conductor type ······································································································10
4.2 Installation············································································································· 11
4.2.1 Overhead conductor case ·············································································12
4.2.2 Overhead cable case·····················································································12
4.2.3 Overhead T-wall rack case ···········································································12

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Current carrying capacity of cables······························································ 3

< Table 2 > Capacity of fuses·························································································· 4
< Table 3 > Fuse-link size at 1.2K·m/W·········································································· 5
< Table 4 > Fuse-link size at 2.0K·m/W·········································································· 5
< Table 5 > Fuse-link size at 2.7K·m/W·········································································· 6
< Table 6 > Cable rising conduit size ·············································································· 7
< Table 7 > Current carrying capacity for overhead conductor ····································· 11
< Table 8 > Current carrying capacity for underground cable ······································· 11

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Fuse box single line diagram·········································································· 2

[Figure 2] Configuration of fuse boxes and 0.4kV cables ··············································· 2
[Figure 3] One story customer house with fence····························································· 8
[Figure 4] One story customer house without fence························································ 8
[Figure 5] Three story customer house with fence in the future ······································ 9
[Figure 6] Three story customer house without fence in the future ································· 9
[Figure 7] Customers with fence and road crossing from the pole ································ 10
[Figure 8] Customers with fence from the pole····························································· 10
[Figure 9] Overhead conductor case ············································································· 12
[Figure 10] Overhead cable case··················································································· 12
[Figure 11] T-wall rack case·························································································· 12

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ············································································································· 13

v
 Service Drop

1. Scope

This standard describes the service drop for overhead lines and underground lines. This
standard includes the sizes of the service drop cables and types of the service drop cables.

2. Definitions

Service drop
The low voltage conductor or cable used for supplying the customer from the low
voltage lines to the customer building

Fuse box
The box is used for supplying the customer and includes the fuses for customer.

Cable rising conduit

The conduit is used for cables from the ground to the electric meters to prevent from
pilferages and human shock by touching the cable.

Current carrying capacity

The maximum allowable current to flow through the cables or overhead conductors
continuously

Service drop cross-arm

The cross-arm is installed the building of customers to sustain the tension of the service
drop.

3. Underground Service Drop

3.1 Fuse box configuration

In an underground region the underground service drops are usually derived from the
fuse boxes. A fuse box includes 2 fuses for each phase.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 /13 Version 1.0
 Service Drop

: Fuse

Pillar box or
Fuse box
fuse box

[Figure 1] Fuse box single line diagram

A pillar box has MCCBs from 4 and 6. The fuse boxes can be gone out from one among
the MCCBs of a pillar box. The limit outgoing number of fuses from one MCCB is 8 fuse
boxes. But the number of fuses depends on the total load which fuse boxes should supply
to. 3.5C×95mm2 cables, used as the branch lines of 0.4kV networks, shall be laid between
the pillar box and a fuse box or the fuse boxes. The configuration of fuse boxes and of
0.4kV cables are as follows.

: MCCB
Spare
: FUSE
Pillar
Box
3.5C×95mm2

[Figure 2] Configuration of fuse boxes and 0.4kV cables

3.2 Current carrying capacity of cable

We can use the same table in “Cables design standards” for he current carrying capacity
of service drop cable. The below cable ratings are based on having on other cables in the
trench and average soil thermal resistivity of 1.2 K·m/W, 2.0 K·m/W and 2.7 K·m/W. The
cable sizes are given in table 1.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 /13 Version 1.0
 Service Drop

< Table 1 > Current carrying capacity of cables

Current carrying capacity (A)
Cable type
XLPE (Copper) PVC (Copper)
(mm2)
1.2K·m/W 2.0K·m/W 2.7K·m/W 1.2K·m/W 2.0K·m/W 2.7K·m/W

2C×10 79 64 55 59 47 41

2C×16 103 83 72 75 61 52

2C×25 131 106 91 97 78 67

4C×10 66 53 46 48 39 34

4C×16 86 69 60 62 50 43

4C×25 110 88 76 80 64 56

3.5C×35 133 107 92 96 77 67

3.5C×50 156 126 109 114 91 79

3.5C×70 193 156 135 141 113 98

3.5C×95 229 184 159 167 134 116

3.5C×120 261 210 181 189 154 131

3.5C×150 294 237 205 214 172 149

3.5C×185 330 266 230 240 193 167

3.5C×240 381 307 265 276 222 192

Note :
1) Ambient air temperature : 50°C
2) Ground temperature : 25°C
3) Conductor temperature : 90°C for XLPE
4) Conductor temperature : 70°C for PVC
5) To know the soil thermal resistivity according to the regions, refer to Appendix D (Soil
thermal resistivity (STR)) of Design standard for “Cables”.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 /13 Version 1.0
 Service Drop

3.3 The Decision of the size of fuse-link and service drop

The capacity of fuse-links is as follows according to the size of fuse-holder.

< Table 2 > Capacity of fuses

Size of Size of Size of
Rated current Rated current Rated current
fuse- fuse- fuse-
of fuse-link of fuse-link of fuse-link
holder holder holder
16 A
20 A
25 A
32 A
40 A
50 A
63 A
Size 00 Size 1 Size 2
80 A 80 A
(160 A) (250 A) (400 A)
100 A 100 A
125 A 125 A
160 A 160 A
200 A 200 A
250 A 250 A
315 A
400 A

The rated capacity of fuses depends on the total current of each service drop, and shall
not be greater than 90% of the cable current-carrying capacity. Its capacity shall be more
than 1.2 times the total current of service drop and shall not exceed 1.5 times the total
current of service drop. In case of no exact size of fuse, design engineers should select the
closest upper capacity of fuse.

3.3.1 The Decision of the size of fuse-link at 1.2K·m/W

The relationship of the current carrying of cable, rated current of fuse-link and
maximum load current of service drop is expressed in the next table at 1.2K·m/W of the
soil thermal resistivity.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 /13 Version 1.0
 Service Drop

< Table 3 > Fuse-link size at 1.2K·m/W

XLPE (Copper) PVC (Copper)

Cable type Maximum Rated Current Maximum Rated Current

(mm2) load current of carrying load current of carrying
current fuse-link capacity current fuse-link capacity
(A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
2C×10 52 63 79 41 50 59
2C×16 66 80 103 52 63 75
2C×25 83 100 131 66 80 97
4C×10 41 50 66 33 40 48
4C×16 52 63 86 41 50 62
4C×25 66 80 110 52 63 80
3.5C×35 83 100 133 66 80 96
3.5C×50 104 125 156 83 100 114
3.5C×70 133 160 193 104 125 141
3.5C×95 166 200 229 104 125 167
3.5C×120 166 200 261 133 160 189
3.5C×150 208 250 294 133 160 214
3.5C×185 208 250 330 166 200 240
3.5C×240 262 315 381 166 200 276

3.3.2 The Decision of the size of fuse-link at 2.0K·m/W

The relationship of the current carrying of cable, rated current of fuse-link and
maximum load current of service drop is expressed in the next table at 2.0K·m/W of the
soil thermal resistivity.

< Table 4 > Fuse-link size at 2.0K·m/W

XLPE (Copper) PVC (Copper)
Cable type Maximum Rated Current Maximum Rated Current
(mm2) load current of carrying load current of carrying
current fuse-link capacity current fuse-link capacity
(A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
2C×10 41 50 64 33 40 47
2C×16 52 63 83 41 50 61
2C×25 66 80 106 52 63 78
4C×10 33 40 53 26 32 39

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 /13 Version 1.0
 Service Drop

4C×16 41 50 69 33 40 50
4C×25 52 63 88 41 50 64
3.5C×35 66 80 107 52 63 77
3.5C×50 83 100 126 66 80 91
3.5C×70 104 125 156 83 100 113
3.5C×95 133 160 184 83 100 134
3.5C×120 133 160 210 104 125 154
3.5C×150 166 200 237 104 125 172
3.5C×185 166 200 266 133 160 193
3.5C×240 208 250 307 133 160 222

3.3.3 The Decision of the size of fuse-link at 2.7K·m/W

The relationship of the current carrying of cable, rated current of fuse-link and
maximum load current of service drop is expressed in the next table at 2.7K·m/W of the
soil thermal resistivity.

< Table 5 > Fuse-link size at 2.7K·m/W

XLPE (Copper) PVC (Copper)

Cable type Maximum Rated Current Maximum Rated Current

(mm2) load current of carrying load current of carrying
current fuse-link capacity current fuse-link capacity
(A) (A) (A) (A) (A) (A)
2C×10 33 40 55 26 32 41
2C×16 52 63 72 33 40 52
2C×25 66 80 91 41 50 67
4C×10 33 40 46 20 25 34
4C×16 41 50 60 26 32 43
4C×25 52 63 76 41 50 56
3.5C×35 66 80 92 41 50 67
3.5C×50 66 80 109 52 63 79
3.5C×70 83 100 135 66 80 98
3.5C×95 104 125 159 83 100 116
3.5C×120 133 160 181 83 100 131
3.5C×150 133 160 205 104 125 149
3.5C×185 166 200 230 104 125 167
3.5C×240 166 200 265 133 160 192

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 /13 Version 1.0
 Service Drop

3.3.4 The Decision of the size of cable

In general the service drop should be come out from the fuse box. But the service drop
can be come out from the pillar box and the distribution transformer itself according to the
capacity of customer. Design engineers decide the size of service drop which covers 200%
of the customer initial current considering the increase of customer load as a general rule.
And design engineers should the voltage drop on the service drop. Permissible voltage
drop on the service drop is within 2%.

3.4 The installation

3.4.1 Cable rising conduit size
In case the electric meters and fuse boxes are installed on the wall or fence of the
customer structures, the cable should rise through the cable rising conduit from the ground
to the electric meters and fuse boxes up to 1.2m ground level. The connections of cables
must not be inside the cable rising conduit. The exposed part of cables must not be from
the cable rising conduit to the electric meter or the fuse box.

< Table 6 > Cable rising conduit size

Nominal cross- Conduit inner diameter (mm)
sectional area 2C 3.5C or 4C
(mm2) XLPE PVC XLPE PVC
16 or smaller 40 40 40 40
25 40 40 50 50
35 50 50 50 50
50 50 50 50 50
70 50 50 60 60
95 50 50 60 60
120 60 60 75 75
150 60 60 75 75
185 75 75 75 75
240 75 75 100 100

The cable from the fuse box to the electric meter must be installed underground. The
cable must not have any exposed part or connection point from the fuse box to the electric
meter to prevent the pilferage and to secure the human.

3.4.2 The type of service drop according to the customer type

To supply the customers with various types, the service drop types should be changed.
The electric meter boxes should be installed 1.2m from the ground level. The service drop

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 /13 Version 1.0
 Service Drop

should be installed more than 0.5m deep. As first type, it is the case that customer house is
one story building with fence. Design engineers can install the single phase 2Cⅹ16mm2 or
2Cⅹ25mm2 as a service drop cable.

Fence Fence Fence Fence Fence Fence

Fence Fence Fence Fence Fence Fence

Fence Fence Fence Fence Fence Fence

Fence Fence Fence Fence Fence Fence

: Pillar box : Fuse box : Electric : Low voltage line : Service drop

[Figure 3] One story customer house with fence

As second type, it is the case that customer house is one story building without fence.
Design engineers can install the single phase 2Cⅹ16mm2 or 2Cⅹ25mm2 as a service drop
cable.

Wall Wall Wall Wall Wall Wall

Wall Wall Wall Wall Wall Wall

Wall Wall Wall Wall Wall Wall

Wall Wall Wall Wall Wall Wall

: Pillar box : Fuse box : Electric meter : Low voltage line : Service drop
[Figure 4] One story customer house without fence

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 /13 Version 1.0
 Service Drop

As third type, it is the case that customer house is one story building with fence. But it is
possible to increase the stories up to 3 in the future. Design engineers can install three
phase 4Cⅹ16mm2 or 4Cⅹ25mm2 as a service drop cable to prepare the load increase in
the future.

Fence Fence Fence Fence Fence Fence

Fence Fence Fence Fence Fence Fence

Fence Fence Fence Fence Fence Fence

Fence Fence Fence Fence Fence Fence

: Pillar box : Fuse box : Electric meter : Low voltage : Service drop

[Figure 5] Three story customer house with fence in the future

As fourth type, it is the case that customer house is one story building without fence. But
it is possible to increase the stories up to 3 in the future. Design engineers can install three
phase 4Cⅹ16mm2 or 4Cⅹ25mm2 as a service drop cable to prepare the load increase in
the future.

Wall Wall Wall Wall Wall Wall

Wall Wall Wall Wall Wall Wall

Wall Wall Wall Wall Wall Wall

Wall Wall Wall Wall Wall Wall

: Pillar box : Fuse box : Electric meter : Low voltage : Service drop
[Figure 6] Three story customer house without fence in the future

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 /13 Version 1.0
 Service Drop

As fifth type, it is the case customer houses with fence and road crossing from the pole.

: Fuse

Electric
meter
Conduit 1.2m
Road

Underground

[Figure 7] Customers with fence and road crossing from the pole

As sixth type, it is the case customer houses with fence from the pole.

: Fuse

Underground cable

Fence

Electric
meter
Conduit

[Figure 8] Customers with fence from the pole

4. Overhead Service Drop

4.1 Conductor type

Both 0.4kV copper cables and 0.4kV PVC copper conductor can be used as a low
voltage overhead service drop conductor. The nominal cross-sectional area of cables and
conductors is greater than 10 mm2. The overhead service drop must not be exposed nor
connected from the pole to the connection point of customer.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 /13 Version 1.0
 Service Drop

< Table 7 > Current carrying capacity for overhead conductor

Conductor Current carrying capacity for Current carrying capacity for
2
Size (mm ) XLPE (Copper) (A) PVC (Copper) (A)
10 75 53
16 101 72
25 132 92
35 164 115
50 201 139
70 260 180
95 318 220
Note :
1) Ambient air temperature : 50°C
2) Conductor temperature : 90°C for XLPE
3) Conductor temperature : 70°C for PVC

< Table 8 > Current carrying capacity for underground cable

Current carrying capacity for Current carrying capacity for
Cable size
XLPE (Copper) (A) PVC (Copper) (A)
(mm2)
2C 4C 2C 4C
10 66 58 45 40
16 88 79 60 54
25 113 98 80 68
Note :
1) Ambient air temperature : 50°C
2) Conductor temperature : 90°C for XLPE
3) Conductor temperature : 70°C for PVC

4.2 Installation
Design engineers should install the service drop cross-arm on the building of the
customer strongly. Insulated copper connections between low voltage lines and service
drops shall be made by joint method after stripping the insulation material and shall be
taped. The span of the service drop is not longer than 50m. Design engineers should install
the service drop higher than 3.5m (In case of road crossing : 4m) from the ground. In case
of using overhead conductor as a service drop, design engineers should install the service
drop on the pole by two one-wire D-racks for single phase customers and four-wire D-
racks for three phase customers.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 /13 Version 1.0
 Service Drop

4.2.1 Overhead conductor case

Overhead conductor

1.2m

[Figure 9] Overhead conductor case

4.2.2 Overhead cable case

In case of using an overhead cable as a service drop, design engineers should install the
service drop on the pole by a one-wire D-rack for customers.

Overhead cable

1.2m

[Figure 10] Overhead cable case

4.2.3 Overhead T-wall rack case

[Figure 11] T-wall rack case

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 /13 Version 1.0
 Service Drop

Appendix A : References

IEC 60502-1 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated
voltages from 1kV up to 30kV, Part 1 : Cables for rated voltage from
1kV up to 3kV
IEC 60028 International standard of resistance for copper
IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables
IEC 60364 Electrical installation of building
NESC Part 2 Safety Rules for the Installation and Maintenance of Overhead
Electric Supply and Communication Lines
Sec. 23 Clearances
KDS 3700 Service drop

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 /13 Version 1.0
 GDG 0900
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Watt Hour Meters

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Low Voltage Meters·······················································································1
2.1 Selection of Meters··································································································1
2.2 Choice of meter boxes ·····························································································3
2.3 Single meter boxes ··································································································3
2.4 Assembly meter boxes·····························································································4
3. Medium Voltage Meters ···············································································5
4. Meter Installation··························································································6
5. RCCB (Residual Current operated Circuit Breaker) ······························7

ii
 LIST OF TABLES
< Table 1 > Accuracy class of meters·············································································· 1
< Table 2 > Metering type of low voltage ······································································· 1
< Table 3 > Rated current of meters ················································································ 2
< Table 4 > Choice of meter boxes ················································································· 3
< Table 5 > Size of entry holes························································································ 3
< Table 6 > Size of meter boxes······················································································ 4
< Table 7 > Recommended clearance of meters······························································ 5
< Table 8 > Accuracy class & burden of CT, VT ···························································· 6
< Table 9 > Minimum conductor size of CT/VT secondary wires··································· 6
< Table 10 > Mounting height & clearance of meter boxes············································· 7
< Table 11 > Rated current of RCCB ·············································································· 8
< Table 12 > Tripping time of RCCB·············································································· 9

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Wiring diagram of direct connection meters ·················································· 1

[Figure 2] Wiring diagram of CT operated meters ·························································· 2
[Figure 3] Interior diagram of single meter boxes··························································· 3
[Figure 4] Circuit diagram in an assembly meter box ····················································· 4
[Figure 5] Wiring diagram of CT & VT operated meters ················································ 5
[Figure 6] Installation of metering equipment································································· 7
[Figure 7] Typical circuit diagram of residual current-operated circuit-breaker·············· 8

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ················································································································ 10
B Wiring diagrams of meters ······················································································ 11
C Analysis of wrong wirings for mechanical meters ·················································· 16
D Layout of assembly meter boxes ············································································· 38

v
 Watt Hour Meters

1. Scope

This standard specifies the basic requirements for the installation of watt hour meters
and related equipment such as CT, VT, RCCB and metering box.

2. Low Voltage Meters

2.1 Selection of Meters

The standard accuracy of meters shall be 1.0 accuracy class for directly connected
meters and 0.5 for transformer-operated meters. If necessary, AMR meters can be installed
with 0.5 or 0.2 accuracy class.
< Table 1 > Accuracy class of meters
Type of meters Direct connection Transformer-operated AMR
Accuracy class 1.0 0.5 0.5 or 0.2

For a low voltage service up to and including 120 amperes, directly connected meters
shall be provided and installed, but for a service over 120 amps current transformer meters
shall be installed.
< Table 2 > Metering type of low voltage
Metering type Direct connection Through CT
Service Up to 120 amps Over 120 amps

The below figure is the wiring diagram of direct connection meters.

1S 2S 2L 1L
Line
1
Load
2

(a) Single phase 2-wire (b) Three phase 4-wire

[Figure 1] Wiring diagram of direct connection meters

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

The next figure is the wiring diagram of CT operated meters.

1S P1 P2 1L
1S P1 2S P2 3S P3 P0 3L 2L 1L

1S 1L
1
2S 2L
1S 1L 2
1 Main 3 3S 3L Load
Main Load
2 4

(a) Single phase 2-wire (b) Three phase 4-wire

[Figure 2] Wiring diagram of CT operated meters

The rated current of meters shall be dependant upon the contract power of customers.
The below table is the relationship between contract power and rated current of meters.
< Table 3 > Rated current of meters
Single phase (230V) Three phase (230/400V)
Rated current of
Contract Contract meters (A)
Current (A) Current (A)
power (kW) power (kW)
8 39 25 40 40(10)*
16 77 50 80 80(20)
24 116 75 120 120(30)
- - 93 149 150/5
- - 125 200 200/5
- - 187 300 300/5
- - 312 500 500/5
- - 623 999 1000/5
- - 935 1500 1500/5
Note. 1. * is the basic current of meters.
2. The above table is based on 90% of power factor.
3. When a maximum load current is less than 1.2 times the primary current of existing

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

current transformer after connecting another load, the existing CT can be continuously used.

2.2 Choice of meter boxes

When the number of meters installed at the same place is less than three, each single
meter box shall be installed if possible. When over three meters need to be installed at the
same place, installing one assembly meter box will be preferable.
< Table 4 > Choice of meter boxes
Number of meters Up to 3 meters Over 3 meters
Meter box Single meter box Assembly meter box

2.3 Single meter boxes

Each meter box, shown in figure 3 shall be so structured to easily and securely
accommodate one meter, and RCCB which is installed on the load side of meter. For all
new meter installations, the minimum clearance of 20 mm shall be maintained around all
sides of installed metering equipment.

WHM

Holes for Holes for

incoming RCCB outgoing

[Figure 3] Interior diagram of single meter boxes

Two cables or wire entry holes for incoming and outgoing shall be on the bottom of the
single meter boxes. The hole diameter of bottom connected-type meters shall comply with
the following table.
< Table 5 > Size of entry holes
Category Single phase meter Three phase meter
Hole diameter (mm) 30 40

The meter box shall be equipped with locking and sealing device to prevent access to the

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

meter. The sealing shall not be removed without authorization from GECOL. The size of
meter box shall not exceed as shown in table 6.
< Table 6 > Size of meter boxes
Maximum length (mm)
Category
Width Height Depth
Single phase meter 155 200 140
Three phases meter 250 310 155
Note. The tolerance of the dimension shall not exceed ±5 %.

2.4 Assembly meter boxes

Meters for all customers in a multiple occupancy building shall be grouped at the
common access position and installed in the suitable assembly meter box at each dwelling.
For installation of more than three meters, the assembly meter box shall be installed and
the service entrance conductors shall enter the bottom of the meter box. The size of
assembly meter boxes will depend on the number of services to be metered, and the
number of meters installed in one assembly meter box shall not exceed 24 meters.

c W

WHM WHM H WHM WHM

a b a

WHM WHM WHM WHM

R S T N

[Figure 4] Circuit diagram in an assembly meter box

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

For each meter in an assembly box, the minimum clearance of 20 mm shall be

maintained around all sides of installed metering equipment. The below table is the
recommended clearance of meters in the assembly box.
< Table 7 > Recommended clearance of meters
Approx meter size (mm)
Clearance (mm)
Single phase Three phase
a b c d e W H W H
20 30 30 30 50 155 200 250 310

3. Medium Voltage Meters

The customer’s installation supplied by medium voltage shall be connected to the

GECOL distribution system that there is always means of control and isolation between the
customer’s installation and GECOL’s system.
The rated secondary voltages for line to line voltage transformers shall be 110 V, and
voltage transformers shall be connected on the line side of the current transformers as
shown figure 5. The current transformers shall be installed on each phase with one 5-amp
secondary winding.

1S P1 2S P2 3S P3 P0 3L 2L 1L

1 1
1
2 2
2
3 3
3
4

(a) Three phase 3-wire (b) Three phase 4-wire

[Figure 5] Wiring diagram of CT & VT operated meters

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

Voltage transformers shall be class 0.5 with a minimum burden of 25VA and current
transformers shall be class 0.5 with a minimum burden of 5VA.
< Table 8 > Accuracy class & burden of CT, VT
Instrument transformer Accuracy class Minimum burden (VA)
CT 0.5 5
VT 0.5 25

Stranded multi-core cables shall be installed between the CT/VT terminals and the
metering panel. The minimum conductor size of CT and VT secondary wiring shall be 2.5
mm2. The secondary wires of CT and VT shall be kept as short as possible to reduce cable
losses loading their secondary terminals, and the maximum route length of secondary wires
shall not exceed 60 m for CT, 85m for VT.
< Table 9 > Minimum conductor size of CT/VT secondary wires
Instrument transformer Minimum size (mm2) Maximum length (m)
CT 2.5 60
VT 2.5 85

Normally only one high voltage connection shall be permitted per customer. A
protection system shall be provided that isolates the customer’s installation, in the event of
a fault, without affecting the GECOL’s distribution system.

4. Meter Installation

Meters for single occupancy buildings and multiple occupancy buildings shall be located
on the outside wall of the building, and in a location approved by GECOL which is easily
accessible to the GECOL meter personnel for the purpose of changing, testing and reading
them. A meter box shall be an outdoor waterproof type because it is usually installed
outside of houses or buildings.
When existing service with indoor meter locations is upgraded or extensively re-wired,
the metering equipment shall be relocated to the outside of the building if possible and
energized after re-arrangements. In this case the meter location, whether inside or outside,
shall be acceptable to the GECOL. Indoor meters shall be located in a dry and clean area
that is accessible to GECOL meter personnel at all times, and a clear space of at least 300
mm between the indoor meter and the door shall be required.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

Meter boxes shall be installed at a height not less than 1.2 m nor more than 1.8 m from
the bottom of the meter boxes to ground level. The meter box shall be at least 60 cm away
from the gas meter or gas pipe. It shall be mounted level on the horizontal and vertical
planes. The raceway run shall be as short as practical.
All meter boxes shall be secured with one or more security seals placed by GECOL.

* F.B : fuse box

F.B

Mounting height
: 1.2 m ~ 1.8 m

[Figure 6] Installation of metering equipment

In large multiple occupancy buildings such as in apartment buildings, office buildings,

industrial complexes, meters shall be conveniently grouped and located in a single
common area approved by GECOL. Passageways and working space around electrical
equipment shall not be used for storage and shall be kept free from obstruction.
Adequate clearance with a minimum working space of 1 m shall be provided and
maintained in front of the box to allow the box doors to be fully opened, and to allow the
removal and installation of the meters.
< Table 10 > Mounting height & clearance of meter boxes
Mounting height Right-of-way
1.2 m ~ 1.8 1m

5. RCCB (Residual Current operated Circuit Breaker)

RCCB shall be installed on the load side of meters as shown in below figure in order to
protect against fire hazards due to a persistent earth fault current and electric shock. etc.
When a test button is actuated, the RCCB shall respond and trip the assigned control
gear by way of an auxiliary switch. The test button shall be actuated occasionally in order
to test the RCCB. Clearances between RCCB and cable or meter box shall be not less than

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

20 mm. The figure below is the typical circuit diagram of residual current-operated circuit-
breaker

WHM

L N
Trip coil

Fault detector
coil

Current balance
transformer Test button

Test resistor
RCCB

L N

Load (s)

[Figure 7] Typical circuit diagram of residual current-operated circuit-breaker

Its rated current shall be the same amount of load current connected to RCCB. The rated
current of RCCB is shown in below table. The rated residual operating current shall be 30
mA.
< Table 11 > Rated current of RCCB
Rated current of Rated current of Conductor size Rated residual operating
meter (A) RCCB (A) (mm2) current (mA)
40(10) 40 10
80(20) 80 16 30
120(30) 125 25

The RCCB shall trip within a time range from 0.04 seconds to 0.3 seconds. The tripping
time is shown in table 12.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

< Table 12 > Tripping time of RCCB

Residual current (IΔn) IΔn 2IΔn 5IΔn 10IΔn
Maximum tripping time (s) 0.3 0.15 0.04 0.04

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

Appendix A : References

IEC 60044-1 Instrument transformers – Part 1 : Current transformers

IEC 60044-2 Instrument transformers – Part 2 : Inductive voltage transformers
IEC 60755 General measurements for residual current-operated protective devices
IEC 61008-1 Residual current operated circuit-breakers without integral over
current protection for household and similar uses – General rules
IEC 62052-11 Electricity metering equipment (ac) – General requirements, tests and
test conditions – Part 11 : Metering equipment
IEC 62053-11 Electricity metering equipment (ac) – Particular requirement – Part
11 : Electromechanical meters for active energy (classes 0.5, 1 and 2)
IEC 62053-61 Electricity metering equipment (ac) – Particular requirements – Part
11 : Electromechanical meters for active energy

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

Appendix B : Wiring diagrams of meters

1. Single phase 2-wire

1S 2S 2L 1L

1
Line Load
2

(a) Direct connection with meter

1S P1 P2 1L

1S 1L
1
Line Load
2

(b) Connection to CT

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

1S P1 P2 1L

P1 P2
1S 1L
1
Line Load
2

(c) Connection to VT and CT

2. Three phase 3-wire

1S 2S 3S 3L 2L 1L

1
Line 2 Load
3

(a) Direct connection with meter

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

1 S P1 P3 3 S 3 L P2 1 L

1S 1L
1
Line 2 Load
3S 3L
3

(b) Connection to CT

1 S P1 P3 3 S 3 L P2 1 L

P2
P1 P3 1 1L
S
1
Line 2 Load
3S 3L
3

(c) Connection to CT and VT

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

3. Three phase 4-wire

1S 2S 3S 0S 0L 3L 2L 1L

1
Line 2 Load
3
0

(a) Direct connection with meter

1 S P1 2 S P2 3 S P3 P4 3 L 2 L 1 L

1S 1L
1
2 2S 2L
Line 3 Load
3S 3L
0

(b) Connection to CT

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

1S P1 2S P2 3S P3 P4 3L 2L 1L

P1 P2 P3 P4
1S 1L
1 2L
2
Line 3 2S Load
3S 3L
0

(c) Connection to CT and VT

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

Appendix C : Analysis of wrong wirings for mechanical meters

1. VT wrong wirings
■ Type 1 : Cross-wiring between P1 and P0 ► Measured only 2/3 of normal wiring

A) Wrong wiring diagram

E E E

A A A

1S 2S 3S

U V U V U V 1S 2S 3S

PT CT
U V U V U V

1
2
3
0

B) Vector analysis

E31 E3
I3
Φ
θ3
‫ے‬θ1 = 180° – Φ
Φ
-E1 E1 ‫ے‬θ2 = 30° – Φ
θ2 I1 ‫ے‬θ3 = 30° + Φ
θ1
Φ
I2
E21 E2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

○ At W1 stator, potential coil : -E1 energized

○ At W2 stator, potential coil : E2 – E1 = E21 energized
○ At W3 stator, potential coil : E3 – E1 = E31 energized

C) Power calculation in the condition of wrong wiring

○ W1 = -E1¯I1¯COS θ1
○ W2 = E21¯I2¯COS θ2
○ W3 = E31¯I3¯ COS θ3
○ W=W1 + W2 + W3

If both current and voltage are in three phase parallel,

○ E1 = E2 = E3 = E
○ E21 = E31 = 3 E = V
○ I1 = I2 = I3 = I
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3
= -E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ + 3 E ¯ I ¯ COS (30-Φ) + 3 E ¯ I ¯ COS (30+Φ)
= -E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ + 3 /2 ¯ E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ + 3 /2 ¯ E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ
= -E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ + 3E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ
= 2E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ

Therefore, only 2/3 of normal wiring power of 3¯E¯I¯COSΦ is measured.

D) Similar wrong wiring types

○ P2 and P0 cross-wired
○ P3 and P0 cross-wired

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

■ Type 2 : Cross-wiring between P1 and P2 ► No measured

A) Wrong wiring diagram

E E E

A A A

1S 2S 3S

U V U V U V 1S 2S 3S

PT CT
U V U V U V

1
2
3
0

B) Vector analysis

E3
I3
θ3
Φ
‫ے‬θ1 = 120° – Φ = [180° – (60° + Φ)]
Φ E1 ‫ے‬θ2 = 30° – Φ = [180° – (60° – Φ)]
θ1 I1
θ2 ‫ے‬θ3 = Φ
Φ
I2

E2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

○ At W1 stator, potential coil : E2 energized

○ At W2 stator, potential coil : E1 energized
○ At W3 stator, potential coil : E3 energized

C) Power calculation in the condition of wrong wiring

○ W1 = E2 ¯ I1 ¯ COS θ1 = E2 ¯ I1 ¯ COS (120 – Φ)
○ W2 = E1 ¯ I2 ¯ COS θ2 = E1 ¯ I2 ¯ COS (120 + Φ)
○ W3 = E3 ¯ I3 ¯ COS θ3
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3

If both current and voltage are in three phase parallel,

○ E1 = E2 = E3 = E
○ I1 = I2 = I3 = I
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3
= E ¯ I ¯ [COS (120 – Φ) + COS (120 + Φ) + COS Φ]
= E ¯ I ¯ [COS Φ – COS Φ]
=0

If both current and voltage are in three-phase parallel, theoretically the meter shall
not revolve but stop. But in practice, the meter will stop or revolve in reverse or
revolve in the proper direction.

D) Similar wrong wiring types

○ P1and P3 cross-wired
○ P2 and P3 cross-wired

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

■ Type 3 : wrong wiring of P1 into P2, P2 into P3, P3 into P1 ► Refer to the next table

A) Wrong wiring diagram

E E E

A A A

1S 2S 3S

U V U V U V 1S 2S 3S

PT CT
U V U V U V

1
2
3
0

B) Vector analysis

E3
I3
Φ

‫ے‬θ1 = 240° – Φ = [180° + (60° – Φ)]

θ2
Φ E1 ‫ے‬θ2 = 240° – Φ
θ1 I1 ‫ے‬θ3 = 240° – Φ
Φ θ3
I2

E2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

○ At W1 stator, potential coil : E3 energized

○ At W2 stator, potential coil : E1 energized
○ At W3 stator, potential coil : E2 energized

C) Power calculation in the condition of wrong wiring

○ W1 = E3 ¯ I1 ¯ COS θ1 = E3 ¯ I1 ¯ COS (120 + Φ)
○ W2 = E1 ¯ I2 ¯ COS θ2 = E1 ¯ I2 ¯ COS (120 + Φ)
○ W3 = E2 ¯ I3 ¯ COS θ3
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3

If both current and voltage are in three phase parallel,

○ E1 = E2 = E3 = E
○ I1 = I2 = I3 = I
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3
= E ¯ I ¯ [COS (120 + Φ) + COS (120 + Φ) + COS (120 + Φ)]
= 3E ¯ I ¯ COS (120 + Φ)
= -3/2E ¯ I ¯ (COS Φ + 3 SIN Φ)

If the current and voltage of each phase is in parallel, the meter would revolve in reverse
according to load factor. Calculation of COS Φ + 3 SIN Φ for various power factors is
shown below table.

Power factor COS Φ 3 SIN Φ COS Φ + 3 SIN Φ Metered data

5° 0.996 0.151 1.147 - 1.7205
10° 0.984 0.300 1.284 - 1.926
15° 0.965 0.448 1.413 - 2.1195
20° 0.939 0.592 1.531 - 2.2965
30° 0.866 0.866 1.732 - 2.598
60° 0.500 1.5 2.0 - 3.0

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

■ Type 4 : wrong wiring of P1 into P3, P2 into P1, P3 into P2 ► Refer to below table

A) Wrong wiring diagram

E E E

A A A

1S 2S 3S

U V U V U V 1S 2S 3S

PT CT
U V U V U V

1
2
3
0

B) Vector analysis

E3
I3

Φ
θ3 ‫ے‬θ1 = 120° –Φ =180° – (60° + Φ)
θ2 Φ E1 ‫ے‬θ2 = 120° – Φ
θ1 I1 ‫ے‬θ3 = 120° – Φ
Φ
I2

E2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

○ At W1 stator, potential coil : E2 energized

○ At W2 stator, potential coil : E3 energized
○ At W3 stator, potential coil : E1 energized

C) Power calculation in the condition of wrong wiring

○ W1 = E2 ¯ I1 ¯ COS θ1 = E2 ¯ I1 ¯ COS (120 – Φ)
○ W2 = E3 ¯ I2 ¯ COS θ2 = E3 ¯ I2 ¯ COS (120 – Φ)
○ W3 = E1 ¯ I3 ¯ COS θ3 = E1 ¯ I3 ¯ COS (120 – Φ)
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3

If both current and voltage of each phase are in three phase parallel,

○ E1 = E2 = E3 = E
○ I1 = I2 = I3 = I
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3
= 3E ¯ I ¯ COS (120 – Φ)
= 3/2E ¯ I ¯ ( 3 SIN Φ – COS Φ)

If the current and voltage of each phase is in parallel, the meter would revolve in reverse
according to load factor. Calculation of 3 SIN Φ – COS Φ for various power factors is
shown below table.

Power factor COS Φ 3 SIN Φ 3 SIN Φ – COS Φ Metered data

5° 0.996 0.151 - 0.845 - 1.2675
10° 0.984 0.300 - 0.684 - 1.026
15° 0.965 0.448 - 0.517 - 0. 7755
20° 0.939 0.592 - 0.347 - 0.5205
30° 0.866 0.866 0 0
60° 0.500 1.5 1.0 1.5

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

■ Type 5 : P1 and P2 cross-wired, P3 and P0 cross wired ► 1/3 reverse rotation

A) Wrong wiring diagram

E E E

A A A

1S 2S 3S

U V U V U V 1S 2S 3S

PT CT
U V U V U V

1
2
3
0

B) Vector analysis

E3
I3
Φ

θ3
‫ے‬θ1 = 90° – Φ
Φ E1
θ2 ‫ے‬θ2 = 90° + Φ
I1
θ1 ‫ے‬θ3 = 180° – Φ
Φ
I2
E13
E2 -E3

E23

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

○ At W1 stator, potential coil : E2 - E3 = E23 energized

○ At W2 stator, potential coil : E1 - E3 = E13 energized
○ At W3 stator, potential coil : -E3 energized

C) Power calculation in the condition of wrong wiring

○ W1 = E23 ¯ I1 ¯ COS θ1 = E23 ¯ I1 ¯ COS (90 – Φ)
○ W2 = E13 ¯ I2 ¯ COS θ2 = E13 ¯ I2 ¯ COS (90 + Φ)
○ W3 = -E3 ¯ I3 ¯ COS θ3 = E3 ¯ I3 ¯ COS (180 – Φ)
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3

If both current and voltage of each phase are in three phase parallel,

○ E1 = E2 = E3 = E
○ I1 = I2 = I3 = I
○ E23 = E13 = 3 E = V
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3
= 3E ¯ I ¯ COS (90 – Φ) + 3 ¯ I ¯ COS (90 + Φ) + E ¯ I ¯ COS (180 – Φ)
= 3 E ¯ I ¯ SIN Φ – 3 E ¯ I ¯ SIN Φ – E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ
= -E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

2. CT wrong wirings
■ Type 6 : 1S and 2S cross-wired ► No measured

A) Wrong wiring diagram

E E E

A A A

P1 P2 P3 P0

P1 P2 P3 P0

U V U V U V
PT CT
U V U V U V

1
2
3
0

B) Vector analysis

E3
I3
θ3
Φ
‫ے‬θ1 = 120° + Φ = [180° – (60° – Φ)]
Φ E1 ‫ے‬θ2 = 120° - Φ = [180° – (60° + Φ)]
θ1 I1
θ2 ‫ے‬θ3 = Φ
Φ
I2

E2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

○ At W1 stator, I2 flows and E1 is energized

○ At W2 stator, I1 flows and E2 is energized
○ At W3 stator, I3 flows and E3 is energized

C) Power calculation in the condition of wrong wiring

○ W1 = E2 ¯ I2 ¯ COS θ1 = E1 ¯ I2 ¯ COS (120 + Φ)
○ W2 = E2 ¯ I1 ¯ COS θ2 = E2 ¯ I1 ¯ COS (120 – Φ)
○ W3 = E3 ¯ I3 ¯ COS Φ 3
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3

If both current and voltage of each phase are in three phase parallel,

○ E1 = E2 = E3 = E
○ I1 = I2 = I3 = I
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3
= E ¯ I ¯ COS (120 + Φ) + E ¯ I ¯ COS (120 – Φ) + E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ
= E ¯ I ¯ (-1/2 COS Φ – 1/2 COS Φ + COS Φ)
=0

If both current and voltage of each phase are in parallel, the meter stops rotating
regardless of power factor.

D) Similar wrong wiring types

○ 1S and 3S cross-wired
○ 2S and 3S cross-wired

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

■ Type 7 : 1S and 1L cross-wired ► Measured only 1/3 of normally wired meter

A) Wrong wiring diagram

E E E

A A A

P1 P2 P3 P0

P1 P2 P3 P0

U V U V U V
PT CT
U V U V U V

1
2
3
0

B) Vector analysis

E3
I3
θ3
Φ
-I1 ‫ے‬θ1 = 180° + Φ
Φ E1 ‫ے‬θ2 = Φ
θ1 I1 ‫ے‬θ3 = Φ
Φ
I2 θ2

E2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

28 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

○ At W1 stator, -I1 flows and E1 is energized

○ At W2 stator, I2 flows and E2 is energized
○ At W3 stator, I3 flows and E3 is energized

C) Power calculation in the condition of wrong wiring

○ W1 = E1 ¯ -I1 ¯ COS θ1 = -E1 ¯ I1 ¯ COS Φ
○ W2 = E2 ¯ I2¯ COS θ2 = E2 ¯ I2 ¯ COS Φ
○ W3 = E3 ¯ I3 ¯ COS θ3 = E3¯ I3 ¯ COS Φ
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3

If both current and voltage of each phase are in three phase parallel,

○ E1 = E2 = E3 = E
○ I1 = I2 = I3 = I
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3
= -E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ + E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ + E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ
= E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ

If both current and voltage of each phase are in parallel, the meter is measured only
1/3 of normally wired meter.

D) Similar wrong wiring types

○ 2S and 2L cross-wired
○ 3S and 3L cross-wired

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

29 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

■ Type 8 : 1S and 2S, 3S and 3L cross-wired ► 2/3 Reverse rotation of normally wired
meter

A) Wrong wiring diagram

E E E

A A A

P1 P2 P3 P0

P1 P2 P3 P0

U V U V U V
PT CT
U V U V U V

1
2
3
0

B) Vector analysis

E3
I3

Φ
‫ے‬θ1 = 120° + Φ = 180° – (60° – Φ)
θ3 E1 ‫ے‬θ2 = 120° + Φ = 180° – (60° + Φ)
Φ
θ1
θ2 I1 ‫ے‬θ3 = 180° – Φ
Φ
I2
-I3
E2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

30 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

○ At W1 stator, I2 flows and E1 is energized

○ At W2 stator, I1 flows and E2 is energized
○ At W3 stator, -I3 flows and E3 is energized

C) Power calculation in the condition of wrong wiring

○ W1 = E1 ¯ I2 ¯ COS θ1 = E1 ¯ I2 ¯ COS (120 + Φ)
○ W2 = E2 ¯ I1¯ COS θ2 = E2 ¯ I1 ¯ COS (120 – Φ)
○ W3 = E3 ¯ -I3 ¯ COS θ3 = E3¯ I3 ¯ COS (180 – Φ)
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3

If both current and voltage of each phase are in three phase parallel,

○ E1 = E2 = E3 = E
○ I1 = I2 = I3 = I
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3
= E ¯ I ¯ [COS (120 + Φ) + COS (120 – Φ) + COS (180 – Φ)]
= -1/2 E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ – 1/2 E¯ I ¯ COS Φ – E¯ I ¯ COS Φ
= - 2E¯ I ¯ COS Φ

If both current and voltage of each phase are in parallel, the meter rotates at 2/3
speed in the reverse direction.

D) Similar wrong wiring types

○ 2S and 3S, 1S and 1L cross-wired
○ 1S and 3S, 2S and 2L cross-wired

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

31 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

■ Type 9 : 1S into 2S, 2S into 3S and 3S into 1S cross-wired ► Rotation in the right or
reverse direction depending on power factor

A) Wrong wiring diagram

E E E

A A A

P1 P2 P3 P0

P1 P2 P3 P0

U V U V U V
PT CT
U V U V U V

1
2
3
0

B) Vector analysis

E3
I3

Φ
θ1 ‫ے‬θ1 = 120° – Φ = 180° – (60° + Φ)
θ3 E1 ‫ے‬θ2 = 120° – Φ
Φ
θ2 I1 ‫ے‬θ3 = 120° – Φ
Φ
I2

E2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

32 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

○ At W1 stator, I3 flows and E1 is energized

○ At W2 stator, I1 flows and E2 is energized
○ At W3 stator, I2 flows and E3 is energized

C) Power calculation in the condition of wrong wiring

○ W1 = E1 ¯ I3 ¯ COS θ1 = E1 ¯ I3 ¯ COS (120 – Φ)
○ W2 = E2 ¯ I1¯ COS θ2 = E2 ¯ I1 ¯ COS (120 – Φ)
○ W3 = E3 ¯ I2 ¯ COS θ3 = E3¯ I2 ¯ COS (120 – Φ)
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3

If both current and voltage of each phase are in three phase parallel,

○ E1 = E2 = E3 = E
○ I1 = I2 = I3 = I
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3
= 3E ¯ I ¯ COS [120 – Φ)]
= 3E ¯ I ¯ (COS 120¯COS Φ – SIN 120 ¯ SIN Φ)
= 3E ¯ I ¯ (-1/2 COS Φ + 3 /2 SIN Φ)
= -3/2E ¯ I ¯ (COS Φ – 3 SIN Φ)

If both current and voltage of each phase are in parallel, the meter rotates in the right
or reverse direction depending on the value ( 3 SIN Φ – COS Φ), which in turn
depends on load factor. Rotation (right or reverse direction) status is shown in table of
type 4.

D) Similar wrong wiring type

○ P1 into P3, P2 into P1 and P3 into P2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

33 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

■ Type 10 : 1S into 2S, 2S into 3S and 3S into 1L cross-wired ► Rotation in the right or
reverse direction depending on power factor

A) Wrong wiring diagram

E E E

A A A

P1 P2 P3 P0

P1 P2 P3 P0

U V U V U V
PT CT
U V U V U V

1
2
3
0

B) Vector analysis

E3
I3

Φ
‫ے‬θ1 = 60° + Φ
θ3 E1 ‫ے‬θ2 = 120° – Φ = 180° – (60° + Φ)
θ1 Φ
θ2 I1 ‫ے‬θ3 = 120° – Φ
Φ
I2
-I3
E2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

34 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

○ At W1 stator, -I3 flows and E1 is energized

○ At W2 stator, I1 flows and E2 is energized
○ At W3 stator, I2 flows and E3 is energized

C) Power calculation in the condition of wrong wiring

○ W1 = E1 ¯ (-I3) ¯ COS (60 + Φ) = E1 ¯ I3 ¯ COS (60 + Φ)
○ W2 = E2 ¯ I1¯ COS [180 – (60 +Φ)]
○ W3 = E3 ¯ I2 ¯ COS [180 – (60 +Φ)]
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3

If both current and voltage of each phase are in phase parallel,

○ E1 = E2 = E3 = E
○ I1 = I2 = I3 = I
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3
= E ¯ I ¯ [COS (60 + Φ) + 2 ¯ COS (180 – (60 + Φ)]
= E ¯ I ¯ [COS (60 + Φ) – 2 ¯ COS (60 + Φ)]
= 1/2E ¯ I ¯ (COS Φ – 3 SIN Φ)

If both current and voltage of each phase are in parallel, the meter rotates in the right
or reverse direction depending on the value (COS Φ – 3 SIN Φ), which in turn
depends on power factor.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

35 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

■ Type 11 : 1S and 1L cross-wired, P1 and P0 cross-wired ► 1/3 over measured

A) Wrong wiring diagram

E E E

A A A

P1 P2 P3 P0

P1 P2 P3 P0

U V U V U V
PT CT
U V U V U V

1
2
3
0

B) Vector analysis

E31 E3
I3
Φ
θ3
-I1 ‫ے‬θ1 = Φ
θ1 Φ E1
-E1 ‫ے‬θ2 = 30° – Φ
θ2 I1 ‫ے‬θ3 = 30° + Φ
Φ
I2
E21 E2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

36 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

○ At W1 stator, current coil : -I1 flows and -E1 is energized

○ At W2 stator, current coil : I2 flows and E21 is energized
○ At W3 stator, current coil : I3 flows and E31 is energized

C) Power calculation in the condition of wrong wiring

○ W1 = E1 ¯ I1¯ COS θ1 = E1 ¯ I1 ¯ COS Φ
○ W2 = E21 ¯ I2¯ COS θ2 = E21 ¯ I2 ¯ COS (30 – Φ)
○ W3 = E31 ¯ I3 ¯ COS θ3 = E31¯ I3 ¯ COS (30 + Φ)
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3

If both current and voltage of each phase are in three phase parallel,

○ E1 = E2 = E3 = E
○ I1 = I2 = I3 = I
○ W = W1 + W2 + W3
= E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ + 3 E ¯ I ¯ COS (30 – Φ) + 3 E ¯ I ¯ COS (30 + Φ)
= E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ + 3 E ¯ I ¯ [COS (30 – Φ) + COS (30 + Φ)]
= E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ + 3 E ¯ I ¯ ( 3 COS Φ)
= 4E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ

If both current and voltage of each phase are in parallel, the measurement amount is
greater than normal amount of 3E ¯ I ¯ COS Φ (i.e. normal wiring). However the
measurement amount may be smaller than normal wiring due to load imbalance.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

37 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

Appendix D : Layout of assembly meter boxes

1. In case of 4 meters

2. In case of 8 meters

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

38 / 39 Version 1.0
 Watt Hour Meters

3. In case of 16 meters

4. In case of 24 meters

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

39 / 39 Version 1.0
 GDO 1000
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Support

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Definitions ······································································································1
3. Type ·················································································································1
3.1 Wood pole ···············································································································1
3.2 Concrete pole ··········································································································2
3.3 Steel post ·················································································································2
3.4 Steel tower···············································································································3

4. Location ··········································································································3
4.1 Preferred location ····································································································3
4.2 Avoidable location···································································································3

5. Foundation ·····································································································4
5.1 Burial depth·············································································································4
5.2 Burial depth increasing according to the soil characteristics ···································4
5.3 Burial depth at specific regions ···············································································5
5.3.1 Inclined region ·······························································································5
5.3.2 Rocky region··································································································6
5.4 Anchor log and anchor block···················································································6
5.4.1 Installation of the anchor log and anchor block··············································7
5.4.2 Omission of the anchor block ········································································7
5.5 Installation direction of the anchor log or block ······················································8
5.5.1 Straight line····································································································8
5.5.2 Angle lines ·····································································································8
6. Bending Moment ···························································································8
6.1 30kV overhead lines································································································8
6.2 11kV overhead lines ································································································9
6.2.1 ACSR conductor ····························································································9

ii
 6.2.2 Bare Copper conductor ················································································10
6.3 0.4kV overhead lines ·····························································································10
6.4 Recommendation of pole span ··············································································10

7. Overhead devices·························································································11

iii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Characteristics of wood poles ······································································ 2

< Table 2 > Normal burial depth of wood poles and Mr ················································· 4
< Table 3 > Burial depth according to the soil characteristics ········································· 4
< Table 4 > Maximum bending moment of 30kV overhead lines ··································· 9
< Table 5 > Maximum bending moment of 11kV ACSR conductor································ 9
< Table 6 > Maximum bending moment of 11kV Bare copper conductor····················· 10
< Table 7 > Maximum bending moment of 0.4kV PVC Copper conductor ·················· 10
< Table 8 > Ruling span ································································································ 11
< Table 9 > Kind of overhead devices··········································································· 11

iv
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] The burial depth at an inclined area ······························································· 5

[Figure 2] Foundation at a rocky region·········································································· 6
[Figure 3] Anchor log for 13m or 16m support ······························································· 6
[Figure 4] Anchor log for 11m or shorter support ··························································· 7
[Figure 5] Anchor concrete block for overhead line························································ 7
[Figure 6] Installation direction of anchor log or block for straight line ························· 8
[Figure 7] Installation direction of anchor log or block for angle line····························· 8

v
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A Reference ·············································································································· 13
B Maximum wind span ···························································································· 14
C Design data for the strength of poles ···································································· 16
D Mechanical load on distribution facilities ······························································ 17
E Bending moment for 30kV ACSR 160mm2 on 13m S-pole ································· 20
F Bending moment for 30kV ACSR 100mm2 on 13m S-pole ································· 21
G Bending moment for 30kV ACSR 63mm2 on 13m S-pole ··································· 22
H Bending moment for 30kV ACSR 40mm2 on 13m S-pole ··································· 23
I Bending moment for 11kV ACSR 100mm2 on 11m M-pole ································ 24
J Bending moment for 11kV ACSR 63mm2 on 11m M-pole ··································· 25
K Bending moment for 11kV ACSR 40mm2 on 11m M-pole ··································· 26
L Bending moment for 11kV Bare Cu 70mm2 on 11m M-pole ································ 27
M Bending moment for 11kV Bare Cu 50mm2 on 11m M-pole ································· 28
N Bending moment for 11kV Bare Cu 35mm2 on 11m M-pole ································· 29
O Bending moment for 0.4kV PVC Cu 70mm2on 9m M-pole ································· 30
P Bending moment for 0.4kV PVC Cu 50mm2 on 9m M-pole ································· 31
Q Bending moment for 0.4kV PVC Cu 35mm2 on 9m M-pole ································· 32
R Bending moment for 0.4kV PVC Cu 25mm2 on 9m M-pole ································· 33
S Bending moment for 0.4kV PVC Cu 16mm2 on 9m M-pole ································· 34

vi
 Support

1. Scope

This standard describes the supporter composing the overhead lines. The poles are
usually used as a supporter. Sometimes the steel post, steel tower and other supporters can
be installed.

2. Definitions

Supporter
The structure purposes to support the overhead distribution lines such as a wood pole, a
concrete pole, a steel post, a steel tower and the others can support the distribution
facilities.

Wood pole
The pole is made of the wood.

Concrete pole
The pole is made of the iron reinforced concrete.

Steel post
The structure is made of the steel materials. The bases are composed of 4 steel legs
based on one concrete foundation.

Steel tower
The structure is made of the steel materials. The bases are composed of 4 steel legs
based on 4 foundations respectively.

3. Type

3.1 Wood pole

We will generally use a wood pole as a supporter for the 30kV, 11kV and 0.4kV
overhead lines. The types of wood pole are a light, medium, stout pole. We will use the
wood pole of which length is 9m, 11m, 13m and 16m. The characteristics of wood poles
shall be described in the table 1 as follows.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

< Table 1 > Characteristics of wood poles

Diameter Load per
Nominal Diameter at top (mm) Ultimate
at 1.5m millimeter of
Class length load
from butt deflection
(m) Minimum Maximum end (mm) (kN)
(N/mm)
9 125 150 180 4.46 3.6
10 125 160 185 4.23 2.6
Light
11 125 160 195 4.40 2.3
13 130 170 210 4.46 1.6
9 150 180 220 8.15 7.8
10 150 185 230 8.13 5.9
Medium 11 150 190 240 8.18 5.0
13 160 200 260 8.46 3.7
16 170 215 305 10.23 3.1
9 190 240 275 15.91 19.2
10 190 245 285 15.47 14.3
Stout 11 190 250 295 15.24 11.8
13 195 255 320 15.73 8.3
16 200 265 365 17.35 6.2
Note :
1) The tolerance of the length shall not exceed 1 %.
2) The tolerance of the diameter at the butt end shall not exceed 10 %.
3) Ultimate load means the load at 0.6 m from top of the wood pole.
4) Load per millimeter of deflection means the load at point of application of load.

Holes needed to install the fittings and others should be drilled in the field.

3.2 Concrete pole

Design engineers can replace the wood pole by the concrete pole which has the same
length and strength equivalent to those of wood pole.

3.3 Steel post

But sometimes a wood or a concrete pole cannot withstand the load or secure the
required clearance. At that time we can use other supporter as a 30kV, 11kV and 0.4kV
overhead line supporter to get the strength or the clearance. First of all, we can consider
using the steel post as a supporter. Steel post can be used at the location where a wood or a

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

concrete pole cannot withstand the mechanical load such as a crossing valley.

3.4 Steel tower

Steel tower can be used at the location where other supporters cannot withstand the load
and cannot get the required clearance.

4. Location

We will have to select the best location for pole erection. The followings describe the
preferred location and avoidable location.

4.1 Preferred location

To maintain the distribution facilities efficiently the proper decision of pole erection
location is very important. Preferred locations to be installed are as follow;
■ Accessible by manlift equipment
■ Next to property corners
■ Minimize the visual impact on the surrounding area
■ Meet the clearances from the ‘clearance standard’
■ Maintain the ruling span between poles, if possible.
■ Ease to expand the lateral line and install the guy.

4.2 Avoidable location

To secure the distribution facilities settling the pole at the next location should be
avoided. Avoidable locations to be installed are as follow;
■ On the outside of a road curve
■ Close to buildings or structures where conductors would violate the horizontal
clearances specified in the ‘clearance standard’
■ Directly behind fire hydrants
■ Limiting the access and use of a piece of property or building
■ Within sidewalks
■ Obscuring oncoming traffic at intersections and driveways
■ Known for a history of vehicular accidents
■ In an area that includes a significant amount of underground utilities
■ Places that are weak and worried over the collapse

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

5. Foundation

5.1 Burial depth

Design engineers should set up the poles to withstand the mechanical load on the poles
by the wind pressure or unbalance bending moment. The normal burial depths of pole and
Resistance moment of poles (Mr) are as follows.

< Table 2 > Normal burial depth of wood poles and Mr

Nominal Burial Mr (Resistance moment of poles) (kN-m)
length (m) depth (m) Light Medium Stout
9 1.5 12.32 22.50 43.94
10 1.7 13.08 25.07 47.78
11 1.8 15.14 28.20 52.44
13 2.2 18.23 34.58 64.41
16 2.7 - 53.58 91.60
Note :
1) The normal burial depth is more than 1/6 of the pole length.

5.2 Burial depth increasing according to the soil characteristics

The other factor affecting the burial depth of pole is the nature of soil. The strength of
the soil can be changed according to the material consisting of the soil. In case the kind of
the soil is hard and rigid, 1/6 of pole length suffices for the burial depth of pole. But if the
soil is soft, 1/6 of pole length doesn’t suffice for the burial depth of pole. In that case we
should increase the burial depth.

< Table 3 > Burial depth according to the soil characteristics

Kind of The strength Burial depth
Class 4 Remarks
soil of soil (㎏/m ) (m)
Soil combined and mixed with
A Hard 4.0×106 Normal depth a lot of gravel, large pebbles,
and general soil
Soil combined and mixed with
6
B Normal 3.0×10 Normal depth sand, small pebbles, and
general soil
Normal depth
C Sand 2.0×106 Sand without general soil
+ 20cm
Normal depth Soft loam, clay including a lot
D Soft 0.8×106
+ 50cm of moisture, humus, silt, etc

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Note :
1) Hard soil means dry and stiff soil can be usually seen in the mountainous area.
2) Normal soil means general soil can be easily seen near the urban area.
3) Sand soft consists of sand that is not mixed with general soil. The side soil of rural roadway
and the soil of wild land are included.
4) Soft soil means the wet and fragile soil.

5.3 Burial depth at specific regions

It is possible to set up the pole at an unstable region. In that case, we should strengthen
the pole setting. One of the useful methods increases the burial depth of the wood pole. If
the poles are installed at an inclined area such as a slant of the road, we should increase. If
the burial depth is not enough to secure the normal depth at a specific region such as the
rocky area, we should strengthen the foundation as follows.

5.3.1 Inclined region

1.0m

A
30cm

A
Normal
burial depth
Normal
burial depth

[Figure 1] The burial depth at an inclined area

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

5.3.2 Rocky region

d d d
3 3
3
d
6

d 2d
2 3

d d
12 12
d: Normal burial depth
[Figure 2] Foundation at a rocky region

5.4 Anchor log and anchor block

We will generally use an anchor wood log or anchor concrete block for a wood pole. The
top surface of an anchor log should be buried by 0.5m. If the tension of the line is high or
the ground is weak, design engineers can increase the number of the anchor log. The
drawings of the anchor log and anchor block are as follows.

1.0m 1.0m

20cm
. Min. Dia
25cm Max. Dia

Hole

[Figure 3] Anchor log for 13m or 16m support

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

0.75m 0.75m

20cm
. Min. Dia
25cm Max. Dia

Hole

[Figure 4] Anchor log for 11m or shorter support

100mm

60°

300mm

[Figure 5] Anchor concrete block for overhead line

5.4.1 Installation of the anchor log and anchor block

We will generally use an anchor wood log for 30kV or 11kV overhead lines in rural area
to install easily. It is too difficulty to install the anchor log in downtown or suburb area
because of other underground facilities such as gas pipes, water supply facilities, sewerage
facilities and road conditions such as an asphalt road, a sidewalk. In those areas we can
install the anchor concrete blocks which are shorter than the anchor wood log. For 0.4kV
distribution lines the anchor blocks can be usually installed because of the narrow road
condition of residential area.

5.4.2 Omission of the anchor block

In case the soil class is A or B and the ground level is composed of a concrete or an
asphalt and it is too difficulty to install the anchor block, design engineers can omit the
anchor block for 0.4kV distribution poles.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

5.5 Installation direction of the anchor log or block

The anchor log or block should be installed like the next drawings.

5.5.1 Straight line

Valley Road

[Figure 6] Installation direction of anchor log or block for straight line

5.5.2 Angle lines

: Pole : Anchor log or block

[Figure 7] Installation direction of anchor log or block for angle line

We should install the anchor log or block in the same direction against the direction
which is imposed on by the bending moment. Sometimes we can install two anchor logs to
strengthen the stability of the important pole such as the express way road cross which is
wide and important.

6. Bending Moment

6.1 30kV overhead lines

To pole should be selected considering the bending moment on the pole itself, conductor,
insulators and crossarm by external force such as wind load and unbalance bending
moment. The wind load is changed according to the loaded area, height and span.
Therefore the shape of the structure and attached facilities and the conductor size, The next
table shows the maximum bending moment on the 13m length wood stout pole that wood
pole can withstand. The applied conductors are AAAC(All Aluminum Alloy Conductor)
240 ㎟ and ACSR(Steel Reinforced Aluminum Conductor) for the phase and

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

ACSR(Aluminum Clad Steel Reinforced) 30 ㎟ for earth wire. The resistance moment of
13m length wood stout pole is the value of the <Table 2>. The maximum span is applied
by 90m considering the vertical clearance. The results are as follows.

< Table 4 > Maximum bending moment of 30kV overhead lines

Conductor Maximum Maximum bending moment (kN-m)
Pole class
Size (mm2) Span (m) (M = Mp + Mw + Mc + Mi + Mu)
AAAC 240 70 62.15
ACSR 160 80 62.15
Stout (Mr =
ACSR 100 90 57.80
64.41 kN-m)
ACSR 63 90 51.42
ACSR 40 90 46.33
Note :
1) Mr refers to resistance moment of red wood pole in BS 1990(1984).
2) M means bending moment by external force according to the span between poles.
3) Mp means bending moment on the pole.
4) Mw means bending moment on the conductor.
5) Mc means bending moment on the cross-arm.
6) Mi means bending moment on the insulator string.
7) Mu means unbalance bending moment by the angle difference between both side load on the
pole in case of below 10 degree angle.

6.2 11kV overhead lines

6.2.1 ACSR conductor
The next table shows the maximum bending moment on the 11m length wood medium
pole that wood pole can withstand. The applied conductors are ACSR(Steel Reinforced
Aluminum Conductor) for the phase. The resistance moment of 11m length wood medium
pole is the value of the <Table 2>. The maximum span is applied by 80m considering the
vertical clearance. The results are as follows.

< Table 5 > Maximum bending moment of 11kV ACSR conductor

ACSR Size Maximum M (kN-m) (M = Mp + Mw + Mc +
Pole class
(mm2) Span (m) Mi + Mu)
100 50 27.88
Medium (Mr =
63 60 27.02
28.20 kN-m)
40 80 27.78

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

6.2.2 Bare Copper conductor

The next table shows the maximum bending moment on the 11m length wood medium
pole that wood pole can withstand. The applied conductors are bare stranded Copper
conductor for the phase. The resistance moment of 11m length wood medium pole is the
value of the <Table 2>. The maximum span is applied by 80m considering the vertical
clearance. The results are as follows.

< Table 6 > Maximum bending moment of 11kV bare copper conductor
Bare Cu Size Maximum M (kN-m) (M = Mp + Mw + Mc +
Pole class
(mm2) Span (m) Mi + Mu)
70 65 28.00
Medium (Mr =
50 75 27.60
28.20 kN-m)
35 80 25.64

6.3 0.4kV overhead lines

The next table shows the maximum bending moment on the 9m length wood medium
pole that wood pole can withstand. The applied conductors are PVC copper conductor for
the phase. The resistance moment of 9m length wood medium pole is the value of the
<Table 2>. The maximum span is applied by 80m considering the vertical clearance. The
results are as follows.

< Table 7 > Maximum bending moment of 0.4kV PVC Copper conductor
PVC Cu Size Maximum M (kN-m) (M = Mp + Mw + Mc +
Pole class
(mm2) Span (m) Mi + Mu)
70 50 21.17
50 60 22.07
Medium (Mr =
35 70 22.48
22.50 kN-m)
25 80 21.36
16 80 17.92

6.4 Recommendation of pole span

According to the technical calculation, the maximum spans between poles are different
from the voltage level, the pole class and conductor type. But Considering the safety the
most of utilities in the world use the normal span shorter than the maximum span.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Therefore design engineers should carefully decide the pole span. The ruling span is as
follows.

< Table 8 > Ruling span

Voltage level (kV) Conductor type (mm2) Pole class Ruling Span (m)

AAAC 240 60
30 Stout 13m
ACSR 40, 63, 100, 160 70
ACSR 100 Medium 11m 40
11 ACSR 63, 40 Medium 11m 50
Bare Cu Medium 11m 55
PVC Cu 70 Medium 9m 40
0.4
PVC Cu 50, 35, 25, 16 Medium 9m 50

The ruling span is normally maintained span when design engineers can design the
overhead lines. Unless the route of the overhead lines is extending the low load density
area, the designer can extend the span between poles. Because 0.4kV overhead lines supply
the electricity to the customers directly, designer can reduce or increase the span between
poles to supply the electricity to the customer efficiently. The applied pole class and length
is for a normal condition. If there are some problems such as the vertical clearance and
mechanical strength, designer should consider those and can change the pole class and
length.

7. Overhead devices
For the system protection and supplying the electricity to the customers various
overhead devices should be installed on the distribution lines. The installed overhead
devices are as follows.

< Table 9 > Kind of overhead devices

Nominal
Type Pole type Installed location
voltage (㎸)

Transformer 30/0.4 13m H Stout Supplying point

SF6 Gas 13m Single
30 A third and two third of load at least
switch Stout
Voltage
30 13m H Stout Voltage upgrading point
regulator

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

13m Single
Capacitor 30 Needed Point
Stout
13m Single
Recloser 30 Needed Point
Stout
13m Single
Sectionalizer 30 Needed Point
Stout
Drop out 13m H Stout The source side of transformer or
30
switch or Single branch lines
13m Single
Cable rising 30 Cable rising point
Stout
13m H Stout
Surge arrester 30 All overhead devices
or Single
Transformer 11/0.4 11m H Stout Supplying point
SF6 Gas 11m Single
11 A third and two third of load at least
switch Stout
Voltage
11 11m H Stout Voltage upgrading point
regulator
11m Single
Capacitor 11 Below Power factor 0.9
Stout
11m Single
Recloser 11 Needed Point
Stout
11m Single
Sectionalizer 11 Needed Point
Stout
Drop out 11m H Stout The source side of transformer or
11
switch or Single branch lines
11m Single
Cable rising 11 Cable rising point
Stout
11m H Stout
Surge arrester 11 All overhead devices
or Single

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix A : References

BS 1990 Wood poles for overhead power and telecommunication lines

Part 1 : 1984 Specification for softwood poles
KDS 3100 Support
KDS 4900 Technical calculation
4901 The calculation of mechanical load on the pole
BS DD ENV Eurocode 1: Basis of design and actions on structures
1991-2-4
Part 2.4 Actions on structures – Wind actions

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix B : Maximum wind speed

(unit : m/s)
Station
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Name
AGEDABIA 17.0 19.0 21.6 19.5 18.0 17.0 15.4 17.5 13.9 18.5 20.6 19.5

ALKOMES 20.6 23.2 20.6 18.0 17.0 14.9 11.8 11.3 14.4 12.9 15.4 20.6

ALMARJ 20.6 20.6 16.5 23.2 15.4 12.9 12.9 11.3 18.0 20.6 20.6 20.6

AZZAHRA 15.4 13.9 12.9 15.4 15.4 12.9 11.8 8.7 9.3 9.3 10.3 12.9
BENI
19.5 20.6 18.0 20.6 20.6 14.9 15.4 18.0 15.4 14.4 17.0 15.4
WALEED
BENINA 21.6 25.7 25.7 20.6 25.7 18.0 16.5 15.4 19.5 17.0 23.2 30.9

BIEDA 15.4 18.0 13.4 15.4 12.9 10.8 13.4 11.3 12.3 12.9 15.4 12.9

BO. NJEEM 18.5 18.0 20.6 20.6 18.0 19.5 12.9 17.0 20.6 13.4 15.4 20.6

DERNA 30.9 25.7 25.7 23.7 23.2 23.2 18.5 18.5 20.6 23.2 25.7 28.3

ELKUFRA 19.5 20.6 21.1 21.1 30.9 21.6 20.1 15.9 15.4 19.5 15.4 19.5

ESSPEEA 16.5 15.4 12.9 15.4 15.4 10.3 9.3 17.5 19.5 15.4 15.4 13.4

FATAIAH 16.5 18.5 20.6 20.6 15.4 16.5 18.0 13.4 17.0 15.4 18.0 18.0

GARIAN 18.0 20.6 25.7 25.7 20.6 15.4 18.0 18.0 20.6 15.4 19.5 23.2
GASSER
9.3 10.3 12.9 8.2 7.7 6.2 6.2 5.1 7.7 7.7 7.7 9.3
KHEIHAR
GHADAME
19.5 21.6 22.6 25.7 24.7 25.7 19.5 18.0 18.0 19.0 18.5 22.6
S
GHARIAT 19.5 23.2 21.6 25.7 25.7 20.6 18.5 15.4 20.6 19.5 18.0 20.6

GHAT 15.4 20.6 25.7 36.0 30.9 23.2 18.0 14.9 18.0 20.6 15.4 15.4
HADBA
15.4 21.6 15.9 13.4 12.9 10.3 10.3 9.3 12.9 11.3 12.9 18.0
KHADRA
HON 24.7 21.6 21.1 23.2 21.6 32.4 16.5 17.0 18.5 20.6 20.1 21.1

JAGHBOUB 20.6 23.7 20.6 20.6 19.5 18.0 23.2 15.4 15.4 18.5 15.4 18.5

JALO 23.2 20.1 27.8 39.1 27.8 16.5 18.5 15.4 17.0 17.0 15.4 18.5

MISURATA 23.2 23.2 25.7 22.1 18.0 14.4 14.4 12.9 15.4 18.5 18.0 34.0

MIZDA 16.5 18.5 30.9 25.7 12.9 13.4 11.8 15.4 12.9 15.4 15.4 18.0

MORZZG 15.4 17.0 18.0 18.5 17.0 15.4 13.4 11.3 15.4 11.3 13.9 12.9

NALUT 20.6 25.7 28.3 22.6 25.7 18.5 15.4 19.5 18.5 18.0 25.7 30.9
NASSER
25.7 26.8 29.8 25.7 25.7 30.9 18.5 18.0 18.5 23.2 23.2 30.9
AIRPORT
OBARI 11.8 14.4 15.4 15.4 18.0 18.0 10.3 15.4 11.3 11.3 11.3 13.4

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

ROJBAN 19.0 15.9 18.0 16.5 20.6 18.0 17.0 17.0 18.0 20.6 16.5 15.4

SABRATA 19.5 23.2 20.6 20.6 20.6 18.0 20.6 18.0 23.2 18.0 18.0 18.0

SEBHA 18.5 20.6 24.7 22.6 23.2 23.2 21.6 16.5 20.6 20.6 15.4 18.5

SHAHAT 27.3 25.7 28.8 24.2 28.3 21.6 18.0 14.4 18.0 20.1 23.2 25.7

SIRT 20.6 20.6 23.2 20.6 23.2 20.1 12.9 14.9 18.0 18.5 20.6 21.6

SORMAN 12.9 18.5 15.4 14.4 12.9 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.3 16.5 15.9 23.7

SUANEE 7.7 10.3 18.0 15.4 18.0 12.9 11.3 11.3 12.3 15.4 10.3 10.3
TAJURA
12.9 11.8 10.3 18.0 14.4 10.3 10.3 13.4 10.8 9.8 13.9 11.8
AGRI
TAJURA
18.0 20.6 19.0 16.5 14.4 12.3 11.3 11.8 14.4 15.9 21.6 22.1
MARINE
TAZERBO 15.4 13.4 18.0 15.4 18.0 14.4 9.8 10.8 10.8 15.4 11.3 11.3

TRAGGEN 14.4 12.9 16.5 16.5 17.0 15.4 11.3 12.9 15.4 12.9 11.8 15.4
TRIPOLI
18.0 18.0 18.5 20.6 18.0 15.4 15.9 11.3 18.0 15.4 20.6 13.9
AIRPORT
TRIPOLI
31.9 32.4 46.3 23.7 22.6 24.7 17.5 18.5 23.7 22.1 24.7 26.2
CITY
TRIPOLI
28.8 33.4 33.4 23.2 19.0 19.5 15.4 16.5 18.0 18.0 18.0 24.2
SEAPORT
YEFRAN 18.5 31.9 23.2 20.6 21.1 20.6 18.5 12.9 18.0 15.4 20.6 16.5

ZAWIA 18.5 18.0 19.5 15.4 15.4 15.4 15.4 12.9 15.4 12.9 15.4 20.6

ZINTAN 18.5 24.7 19.5 23.2 23.2 18.0 17.0 23.2 18.0 20.6 19.5 23.2

ZUARA 25.7 23.2 20.6 20.6 21.6 16.5 17.0 17.0 18.0 20.6 33.4 23.2

Maximum 31.9 33.4 46.3 39.1 30.9 32.4 23.2 23.2 23.7 23.2 33.4 34.0

Note : The maximum wind speeds at 3 weather offices exceed 35m/s three times.
1) Jalo weather station : 39.1 m/s in April 1972.
2) Tripoli city weather station : 46.3 m/s in March 1973.
3) Ghat weather station : 36.0 m/s in April 1991.

Above maximum wind speed data are the results measured for a few decades. Therefore
we should consider the above maximum wind speed data to calculate the wind load on the
distribution lines. In most regions the maximum wind speed is less than 35 m/s. But in
some regions the maximum wind speed is more than 35 m/s. The frequency of wind speed
exceeding 35 m/s is 3. As a result, 35 m/s will be applied to all regions except Jalo, Tripoli
city and Ghat by the maximum wind speed to design the distribution lines more efficiently.
Design engineers should perform a technical calculation for the specific regions and
strengthen the distribution lines by the results of the technical calculation.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix C : Design data for the strength of poles

Pole Nominal Depth Section modulus(Z) Ultimate bending Mr(fZ / SF)

Class length (m) (m) (mm3) moment(fZ) (N-m) (kN-m)

9 1.5 2,041,728 109,845 43.94

10 1.7 2,220,435 119,459 47.78

Stout 11 1.8 2,436,740 131,097 52.44

13 2.2 2,993,181 161,033 64.41

16 2.7 4,256,321 228,990 91.60

9 1.5 1,045,365 56,241 22.50

10 1.7 1,165,134 62,684 25.07

Medium 11 1.8 1,310,219 70,490 28.20

13 2.2 1,606,897 86,451 34.58

16 2.7 2,489,747 133,948 53.58

The loads imposed on the poles are assumed to be applied 0.6m from the top of the pole
and are based on ‘mean ultimate bending stress 53.8 N/mm2’ for redwood pole. The
ultimate loads F calculated according to simple bending theory and assuming a rigidly
supported cantilever correspond to the mean ultimate strength of unsupported poles of the
specified sizes. They are based on the strength at the critical cross section which occurs at
the groundline. The value of the safety factor is usually 2.5 for a wood pole. Ultimate load
F (in N) is given by the expression:
fZ
F=
SF
Where
f is the ultimate bending stress (in N/ mm2);
Z is the section modulus (in mm3) at the critical section of diameter dc and is given by
πdc 3
32
SF is the safety factor.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix D : Mechanical load on distribution facilities

The kind of mechanical loads on the distribution facilities is the wind load, unbalance load,
the linear mass of the facilities, etc. According to the direction of load, we can roughly
divide into vertical load, perpendicular horizontal load and longitude horizontal load. In
general it is too much to consider the vertical load strength of wood pole. In mechanical
designing, we usually only consider the horizontal load. The most important load imposing
on the distribution facilities is the wind load. The wind load imposing on the distribution
facilities is affected by the shape of distribution facilities and a loaded area. The wind
pressure can be calculated by the next equation.
1
p= ρV 2 C
2
Where
p means the wind pressure (in kN/m2).
ρ means the air density (in kg·sec2/m4). The value of ρ is 0.125 at 760mmHg air pressure.
V means the maximum wind speed (in m/s). The value of V is 35m/s.
C means the wind pressure coefficient. The value is known by the experiment.
Conductor : 1
Round type Support : 0.8
Crossarm : 1.6
Insulator : 1.4

The wind load can be expressed by the next equation.

P = pA
Where
P means the wind load (in kN)
p means the wind pressure (in kN/m2).
A means the load area (in m2).

Therefore the wind pressures are as follows.

Facilities Wood pole(Wp) Wire(Ww) Insulator(Wi) Crossarm(Wc)
Wind pressure
2 0.5880 0.7448 1.0388 1.1956
(kN/m )
Note : The applied maximum wind speed is 35 m/s.

The bending moment imposed on the pole by the wind load can be calculated by the next

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

equation.
D 0 H 2 KH 3
Mp = Wp ( − ) (in kN-m)
2000 3
Where
Mp means the bending moment imposed on the wood pole by the wind load (in kN-m);
Wp means the wind pressure per unit area on the wood pole (in kN/m2)
D0 means the diameter of pole at the ground line (in mm).
H means the distance from the ground line to the top of the pole (in m).
K means the slope factor.
D 0 − dc
K=
1000 H
Where
dc means the diameter of pole at the top (in mm).

The bending moment imposed on wire by the wind load can be calculated by the next
equation.

Mw = SWw(
∑ dh ) (in kN-m)
1000

Where
Mw means the bending moment imposed on the wire by the wind load (in kN-m);
S means the span between poles (in m).
Ww means the wind pressure per unit area on the wire (in kN/m2)
d means the diameter of the wire (in mm).
h means the distance from the ground line to the point of application of the load (in m).

The bending moment imposed on insulator by the wind load can be calculated by the next
equation.

Mi = Wi ∑ Aih (in kN-m)

Where
Mi means the bending moment imposed on the insulator string by the wind load (in kN-m);
Wi means the wind pressure per unit area on the insulator string (in kN/m2)
Ai means the loaded area of the insulator (in m2)
h means the distance from the ground line to the point of application of the load (in m).

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

The bending moment imposed on insulator by the wind load can be calculated by the next
equation.

Mc = Wc ∑ Ach (in kN-m)

Where
Mc means the bending moment imposed on the crossarm by the wind load (in kN-m);
Wc means the wind pressure per unit area on the crossarm (in kN/m2)
Ac means the loaded area of the crossarm (in m2)
h means the distance from the ground line to the point of application of the load (in m).

The resultant bending moment imposed on the conductor at the angle pole can be
calculated by the next equation.

Mu = ∑ Tuh (in kN-m)

Where
Mu means the resultant bending moment imposed on the conductor at the angle pole (in
kN-m);
Tu means the resultant tension imposed on the conductor at the angle pole (in kN)
h means the distance from the ground line to the point of application of the load (in m).

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix E : Bending moment for 30kV ACSR 160mm2 on 13m S-pole

M (kN-m)
Mu (kN-m) Mi (kN-m)
Span Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
Type 10° angle on insulator
(m) [Mp + Mw + on Poles on wire
Unbalance strings
Mi +Mu]
50 40.22 6.91 21.26
55 42.53 7.09 23.38
60 44.89 7.32 25.51
65 47.28 7.59 27.64
70 49.70 7.88 29.76
Post 75 52.03 8.08 8.03 31.89 4.03
80 54.38 8.31 34.01
85 56.76 8.56 36.14
90 59.14 8.82 38.26
95 61.46 9.01 40.39
100 63.79 9.22 42.52
50 48.38 6.91 20.61
55 50.62 7.09 22.67
60 52.92 7.32 24.73
65 55.25 7.59 26.80
70 57.60 7.88 28.86
Ten-
75 59.86 8.08 8.03 30.92 12.83
sion
80 62.15 8.31 32.98
85 64.46 8.56 35.04
90 66.78 8.82 37.10
95 67.21 9.01 39.16
100 69.48 9.22 41.22

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix F : Bending moment for 30kV ACSR 100 mm2 on 13m S-pole

M (kN-m)
Mu (kN-m) Mi (kN-m)
Span Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
Type 10° angle on insulator
(m) [Mp + Mw + on Poles on wire
Unbalance strings
Mi +Mu]
50 34.66 5.40 17.21
55 36.52 5.54 18.93
60 38.42 5.72 20.65
65 40.36 5.93 22.37
70 42.30 6.16 24.09
Post 75 44.18 6.31 8.03 25.81 4.03
80 46.08 6.49 27.53
85 47.99 6.69 29.25
90 49.92 6.89 30.97
95 51.79 7.04 32.69
100 53.67 7.20 34.41
50 42.95 5.40 16.69
55 44.76 5.54 18.36
60 46.61 5.72 20.03
65 48.49 5.93 21.70
70 50.39 6.16 23.37
Ten
75 52.21 6.31 8.03 25.04 12.83
sion
80 54.06 6.49 26.71
85 55.92 6.69 28.37
90 57.80 6.89 30.04
95 59.61 7.04 31.71
100 61.44 7.20 33.38

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix G : Bending moment for 30kV ACSR 63 mm2 on 13m S-pole

M (kN-m)
Mu (kN-m) Mi (kN-m)
Span Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
Type 10° angle on insulator
(m) [Mp + Mw + on Poles on wire
Unbalance strings
Mi +Mu]
50 30.72 4.37 14.30
55 32.27 4.48 15.73
60 33.84 4.63 17.16
65 35.44 4.80 18.59
70 37.06 4.99 20.02
Post 75 38.62 5.11 8.03 21.44 4.03
80 40.19 5.26 22.87
85 41.78 5.41 24.30
90 43.37 5.58 25.73
95 44.92 5.70 27.16
100 46.48 5.83 28.59
50 39.11 4.37 13.88
55 40.61 4.48 15.26
60 42.14 4.63 16.65
65 43.70 4.80 18.04
70 45.27 4.99 19.43
Ten
75 46.79 5.11 8.03 20.81 12.83
sion
80 48.32 5.26 22.20
85 49.86 5.41 23.59
90 51.42 5.58 24.98
95 52.92 5.70 26.36
100 54.44 5.83 27.75

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix H : Bending moment for 30kV ACSR 40 mm2 on 13m S-pole

M (kN-m)
Mu (kN-m) Mi (kN-m)
Span Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
Type 10° angle on insulator
(m) [Mp + Mw + on Poles on wire
Unbalance strings
Mi +Mu]
50 27.59 3.59 11.95
55 28.88 3.68 13.14
60 30.20 3.80 14.34
65 31.53 3.94 15.53
70 32.88 4.09 16.73
Post 75 34.18 4.20 8.03 17.92 4.03
80 35.49 4.32 19.12
85 36.82 4.44 20.31
90 38.15 4.58 21.51
95 39.44 4.68 22.70
100 40.74 4.79 23.90
50 36.05 3.59 11.60
55 37.30 3.68 12.76
60 38.59 3.80 13.92
65 39.89 3.94 15.08
70 41.20 4.09 16.24
Ten
75 42.46 4.20 8.03 17.40 12.83
sion
80 43.74 4.32 18.57
85 45.03 4.44 19.73
90 46.33 4.58 20.89
95 47.59 4.68 22.05
100 48.85 4.79 23.21

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix I : Bending moment for 11kV ACSR 100 mm2 on 11m M-pole

M (kN-m)
Mu (kN-m) Mi (kN-m)
Span Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
Type 10° angle on insulator
(m) [Mp + Mw + on Poles on wire
Unbalance strimg
Mi +Mu]
30 16.43 1.66 8.65
35 18.13 1.92 10.09
40 19.83 2.18 11.53
45 21.53 2.43 12.97
50 23.22 2.69 14.42
Post 55 24.88 2.91 4.46 15.86 1.66
60 26.54 3.13 17.30
65 28.21 3.35 18.74
70 29.87 3.57 20.18
75 31.50 3.76 21.62
80 33.13 3.94 23.06
30 21.27 1.66 8.37
35 22.92 1.92 9.77
40 24.58 2.18 11.16
45 26.23 2.43 12.56
50 27.88 2.69 13.95
Ten
55 29.49 2.91 4.46 15.35 6.78
sion
60 31.11 3.13 16.74
65 32.72 3.35 18.14
70 34.34 3.57 19.53
75 35.92 3.76 20.93
80 37.51 3.94 22.32

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix J : Bending moment for 11kV ACSR 63 mm2 on 11m M-pole

M (kN-m)
Mu (kN-m) Mi (kN-m)
Span Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
Type 10° angle on insulator
(m) [Mp + Mw + on Poles on wire
Unbalance strings
Mi +Mu]
30 14.31 1.29 6.89
35 15.65 1.49 8.04
40 17.00 1.69 9.19
45 18.35 1.89 10.34
50 19.70 2.09 11.49
Post 55 21.02 2.26 4.46 12.64 1.66
60 22.34 2.43 13.79
65 23.66 2.60 14.94
70 24.98 2.78 16.09
75 26.27 2.92 17.24
80 27.57 3.07 18.38
30 19.20 1.29 6.67
35 20.52 1.49 7.79
40 21.83 1.69 8.90
45 23.14 1.89 10.01
50 24.45 2.09 11.12
Ten
55 25.73 2.26 4.46 12.23 6.78
sion
60 27.02 2.43 13.35
65 28.30 2.60 14.46
70 29.58 2.78 15.57
75 30.84 2.92 16.68
80 32.10 3.07 17.79

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix K : Bending moment for 11kV ACSR 63 mm2 on 11m M-pole

M (kN-m)
Mu (kN-m) Mi (kN-m)
Span Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
Type 10° angle on insulator
(m) [Mp + Mw + on Poles on wire
Unbalance strings
Mi +Mu]
30 12.61 1.01 5.48
35 13.68 1.17 6.39
40 14.75 1.32 7.30
45 15.81 1.48 8.22
50 16.88 1.64 9.13
Post 55 17.93 1.77 4.46 10.04 1.66
60 18.98 1.90 10.96
65 20.02 2.04 11.87
70 21.07 2.17 12.78
75 22.10 2.28 13.69
80 23.12 2.40 14.61
30 17.55 1.01 5.30
35 18.59 1.17 6.19
40 19.63 1.32 7.07
45 20.67 1.48 7.95
50 21.71 1.64 8.84
Ten
55 22.73 1.77 4.46 9.72 6.78
sion
60 23.74 1.90 10.60
65 24.76 2.04 11.49
70 25.78 2.17 12.37
75 26.78 2.28 13.26
80 27.78 2.40 14.14

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix L : Bending moment for 11kV Bare Cu 70 mm2 on 11m M-pole

M (kN-m)
Mu (kN-m) Mi (kN-m)
Span Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
Type 10° angle on insulator
(m) [Mp + Mw + on Poles on wire
Unbalance strings
Mi +Mu]
30 14.17 1.47 6.58
35 15.49 1.70 7.68
40 16.82 1.93 8.77
45 18.14 2.15 9.87
50 19.47 2.38 10.97
Post 55 20.76 2.57 4.46 12.06 1.66
60 22.05 2.77 13.16
65 23.34 2.96 14.26
70 24.63 3.16 15.36
75 25.89 3.32 16.45
80 27.16 3.49 17.55
30 19.08 1.47 6.37
35 20.37 1.70 7.43
40 21.66 1.93 8.49
45 22.94 2.15 9.55
50 24.23 2.38 10.62
Ten
55 25.49 2.57 4.46 11.68 6.78
sion
60 26.74 2.77 12.74
65 28.00 2.96 13.80
70 29.26 3.16 14.86
75 30.48 3.32 15.92
80 31.71 3.49 16.99

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix M : Bending moment for 11kV Bare Cu 50 mm2 on 11m M-pole

M (kN-m)
Mu (kN-m) Mi (kN-m)
Span Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
Type 10° angle on insulator
(m) [Mp + Mw + on Poles on wire
Unbalance strings
Mi +Mu]
30 12.96 1.20 5.64
35 14.08 1.39 6.58
40 15.21 1.57 7.52
45 16.34 1.76 8.46
Post 50 17.46 1.94 9.40
55 18.56 2.10 4.46 10.34 1.66
60 19.66 2.26 11.28
65 20.76 2.42 12.22
70 21.86 2.58 13.16
75 22.93 2.71 14.10
80 24.01 2.85 15.04
30 17.90 1.20 5.46
35 18.99 1.39 6.37
40 20.09 1.57 7.28
45 21.18 1.76 8.19
50 22.28 1.94 9.10
Ten
55 23.35 2.10 4.46 10.01 6.78
sion
60 24.41 2.26 10.92
65 25.48 2.42 11.83
70 26.55 2.58 12.74
75 27.60 2.71 13.65
80 28.64 2.85 14.56

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

28 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix N : Bending moment for 11kV Bare Cu 35 mm2 on 11m M-pole

M (kN-m)
Mu (kN-m) Mi (kN-m)
Span Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
Type 10° angle on insulator
(m) [Mp + Mw + on Poles on wire
Unbalance strings
Mi +Mu]
30 11.78 0.96 4.70
35 12.71 1.11 5.48
40 13.64 1.25 6.27
45 14.57 1.40 7.05
Post 50 15.50 1.55 7.83
55 16.41 1.68 4.46 8.62 1.66
60 17.32 1.80 9.40
65 18.23 1.93 10.18
70 19.14 2.06 10.97
75 20.03 2.17 11.75
80 20.93 2.27 12.53
30 16.75 0.96 4.55
35 17.65 1.11 5.31
40 18.56 1.25 6.07
45 19.46 1.40 6.82
50 20.37 1.55 7.58
Ten
55 21.26 1.68 4.46 8.34 6.78
sion
60 22.14 1.80 9.10
65 23.03 1.93 9.86
70 23.91 2.06 10.62
75 24.78 2.17 11.37
80 25.64 2.27 12.13

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

29 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix O : Bending moment for 0.4kV PVC Cu 70 mm2 on 9m M-pole

Mu (kN-m)
Span M (kN-m) Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
Type 10° angle
(m) [Mp + Mw + Mi +Mu] on Poles on wire
Unbalance

30 13.92 2.31 8.74

35 15.73 2.67 10.19
40 17.54 3.03 11.65
45 19.36 3.38 13.11
Post 50 21.17 3.74 14.56
55 22.93 4.04 2.87 16.02
60 24.69 4.35 17.47
65 26.45 4.65 18.93
70 28.22 4.96 20.39
75 29.93 5.22 21.84
80 31.65 5.49 23.30
30 6.79 1.73 2.18
35 7.42 2.00 2.55
40 8.05 2.27 2.91
45 8.68 2.54 3.28
50 9.31 2.81 3.64
Ten
55 9.90 3.03 2.87 4.00
sion
60 10.50 3.26 4.37
65 11.09 3.49 4.73
70 11.69 3.72 5.10
75 12.24 3.92 5.46
80 12.81 4.11 5.82

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

30 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix P : Bending moment for 0.4kV PVC Cu 50 mm2 on 9m M-pole

Mu (kN-m)
Span M (kN-m) Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
Type 10° angle
(m) [Mp + Mw + Mi +Mu] on Poles on wire
Unbalance

30 12.59 1.97 7.75

35 14.18 2.27 9.04
40 15.78 2.57 10.34
45 17.37 2.88 11.63
Post 50 18.97 3.18 12.92
55 20.52 3.44 2.87 14.21
60 22.07 3.70 15.50
65 23.62 3.96 16.80
70 25.18 4.22 18.09
75 26.69 4.44 19.38
80 28.20 4.67 20.67
30 12.09 1.48 7.75
35 13.61 1.70 9.04
40 15.13 1.93 10.34
45 16.65 2.16 11.63
50 18.17 2.39 12.92
Ten
55 19.66 2.58 2.87 14.21
sion
60 21.14 2.77 15.50
65 22.63 2.97 16.80
70 24.12 3.17 18.09
75 25.58 3.33 19.38
80 27.04 3.50 20.67

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

31 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix Q : Bending moment for 0.4kV PVC Cu 35 mm2 on 9m M-pole

Mu (kN-m)
Span M (kN-m) Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
Type 10° angle
(m) [Mp + Mw + Mi +Mu] on Poles on wire
Unbalance

30 10.97 1.60 6.50

35 12.31 1.85 7.59
40 13.64 2.10 8.67
45 14.97 2.35 9.76
Post 50 16.30 2.59 10.84
55 17.59 2.80 2.87 11.92
60 18.89 3.02 13.01
65 20.19 3.23 14.09
70 21.48 3.44 15.17
75 22.75 3.62 16.26
80 24.01 3.80 17.34
30 10.57 1.20 6.50
35 11.84 1.39 7.59
40 13.11 1.57 8.67
45 14.38 1.76 9.76
50 15.65 1.95 10.84
Ten
55 16.89 2.10 2.87 11.92
sion
60 18.14 2.26 13.01
65 19.38 2.42 14.09
70 20.62 2.58 15.17
75 21.84 2.72 16.26
80 23.06 2.85 17.34

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

32 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix R : Bending moment for 0.4kV PVC Cu 25 mm2 on 9m M-pole

Mu (kN-m)
Span M (kN-m) Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
Type 10° angle
(m) [Mp + Mw + Mi +Mu] on Poles on wire
Unbalance

30 9.96 1.37 5.72

35 11.12 1.59 6.67
40 12.28 1.80 7.62
45 13.45 2.01 8.57
Post 50 14.61 2.22 9.53
55 15.75 2.40 2.87 10.48
60 16.88 2.58 11.43
65 18.01 2.76 12.38
70 19.15 2.95 13.34
75 20.26 3.10 14.29
80 21.36 3.26 15.24
30 5.33 1.03 1.43
35 5.72 1.19 1.67
40 6.12 1.35 1.91
45 6.52 1.51 2.14
50 6.91 1.67 2.38
Ten
55 7.29 1.80 2.87 2.62
sion
60 7.66 1.94 2.86
65 8.04 2.07 3.10
70 8.41 2.21 3.33
75 8.76 2.33 3.57
80 9.12 2.44 3.81

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

33 /34 Version 1.0
 Support

Appendix S : Bending moment for 0.4kV PVC Cu 16 mm2 on 9m M-pole

Mu (kN-m)
Span M (kN-m) Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
Type 10° angle
(m) [Mp + Mw + Mi +Mu] on Poles on wire
Unbalance

30 8.63 1.10 4.66

35 9.58 1.27 5.44
40 10.53 1.44 6.22
45 11.47 1.61 7.00
Post 50 12.42 1.78 7.77
55 13.34 1.93 2.87 8.55
60 14.27 2.07 9.33
65 15.19 2.22 10.11
70 16.11 2.36 10.88
75 17.01 2.49 11.66
80 17.92 2.61 12.44
30 4.86 0.83 1.17
35 5.18 0.95 1.36
40 5.50 1.08 1.55
45 5.82 1.21 1.75
50 6.15 1.34 1.94
Ten
55 6.45 1.44 2.87 2.14
sion
60 6.75 1.55 2.33
65 7.06 1.66 2.53
70 7.36 1.77 2.72
75 7.65 1.87 2.92
80 7.94 1.96 3.11

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

34 /34 Version 1.0
 GDO 1100
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Guy & Strut

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Definitions ······································································································1
3. Type of Guy ····································································································2
3.1 Ground guy ·············································································································2
3.1.1 Ground guy composed of one wire ································································2
3.1.2 Ground guy composed of two wires·······························································3
3.2 Horizontal guy·········································································································4
3.3 Sharing guy ·············································································································4

4. Pole to be Installed ························································································5

4.1 Longitudinal and transverse couple guys·································································5
4.1.1 Longitudinal couple guys···············································································5
4.1.2 Transverse couple guys ··················································································6
4.2 Unbalance load compensation ·················································································6

5. Anchor Block··································································································6
6. Clearance········································································································7
7. Guy Wire ········································································································7
8. Strut·················································································································8

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Characteristics of the Zinc coated steel wire ················································ 7
< Table 2 > Maximum mechanical load of guy wire······················································· 7
< Table 3 > Characteristics of strut poles ········································································ 8

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Ground guy composed of one wire ································································ 2

[Figure 2] Ground guy composed of two wires······························································· 3
[Figure 3] Horizontal guy ······························································································· 4
[Figure 4] Sharing guy···································································································· 4
[Figure 5] Location of longitudinal and transverse couple guys ····································· 5
[Figure 6] Longitudinal couple guys··············································································· 5
[Figure 7] Transverse couple guys ·················································································· 6
[Figure 8] Strut ··············································································································· 9

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ············································································································· 10
B Calculation formula of the maximum load of guy ·············································· 11
C Calculation formula of the strength of the strut ····················································· 12
D The strength of the strut according to the angle ···················································· 13
E The Needed guy wire for overhead lines ······························································ 14

v
 Guy & Strut

1. Scope

This standard describes the guy & strut is one of the overhead line facilities. Sometimes
guys or struts can be installed on the overhead lines to reinforce the poles, increase the
safety of the overhead lines and to balance the unbalance load, etc.

2. Definitions

Guy
Steel wire is attached to the pole to reinforce the overhead lines.

Ground guy
The one end of the guy wire is attached to the pole and the other end of the guy wire is
buried deep under the ground.

Horizontal guy
The one end of the guy wire is attached to the pole and the other end of the guy wire is
attached to the guy pole.

Guy pole
The pole is to support the horizontal guy.

Sharing guy
The one end of the guy wire is attached to the pole and the other end of the guy wire is
attached to the other pole.

Longitudinal couple guys

The two ground guys are installed at the same direction of the overhead lines.

Transverse couple guys

The two ground guys are installed at the right angle direction of the overhead lines.

Strut
The wool or concrete pole is attached to the pole to reinforce the overhead lines.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 /14 Version 1.0
 Guy & Strut

3. Type of Guy

3.1 Ground guy

The ground guy is generally used to strengthen the overhead lines. The length L between
the crossarm and the end of guy wire attached to the pole is more than 400 ㎜ for 30kV
overhead lines and 200 ㎜ for 11 or 0.4kV overhead lines. The angle between the guy
wire and the pole is 30°, 45° and 60°.

3.1.1 Ground guy composed of one wire

L
1800 mm
L = 400 mm (30kV)
L = 200 mm (11 or 0.4kV)

θ : 30°, 45°, 60°

θ

1500 mm

[Figure 1] Ground guy composed of one wire

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 /14 Version 1.0
 Guy & Strut

3.1.2 Ground guy composed of two wires

In case one wire ground guy cannot withstand the unbalance load, design engineers can
use two wires ground guy to strengthen the guy.

L
L = 400 mm (30kV) 1800 mm
L = 200 mm (11 or 0.4kV)

θ : 30°, 45°, 60°

1500 mm

[Figure 2] Ground guy composed of two wires

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 /14 Version 1.0
 Guy & Strut

3.2 Horizontal guy

The horizontal guy can be installed at the location which it is difficult to install the
ground guy such as downtown area and road intersection. The length of guy pole is 11m or
13m for 30kV, 10m for 11kV and 9m for 0.4kV overhead lines.

1800 mm

L = 400 mm (30kV)
L = 200 mm (11 or 0.4kV)
θ
θ : 30°, 45°, 60°

1500 mm

[Figure 3] Horizontal guy

3.3 Sharing guy

Design engineers can replace the guy pole by the other pole.

L L

1800 mm

L = 400 mm (30kV)
L = 200 mm (11 or 0.4kV)

[Figure 4] Sharing guy

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 /14 Version 1.0
 Guy & Strut

4. Pole to be Installed

Design engineers should install the guy to prevent the support of the overhead lines from
falling, breaking and slanting. Design engineers should install the guy at the next locations.

4.1 Longitudinal and transverse couple guys

Design engineers should install the longitudinal couple guys or the transverse couple
guys for straight lines except downtown and suburb area.

[Figure 5] Location of longitudinal and transverse couple guys

4.1.1 Longitudinal couple guys

In case the line is straight, the longitudinal couple guys should be installed in the same
direction of the line every 10 spans. The poles, which the longitudinal couple guys are to
install at, should be tension poles.

L
1800 mm

L = 1000 mm (30kV)
L = 600 mm (11 or 0.4kV)

30° 30°

1500 mm

[Figure 6] Longitudinal couple guys

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 /14 Version 1.0
 Guy & Strut

4.1.2 Transverse couple guys

In case the line is straight, the transverse couple guys should be installed in the same
direction of the line every 5 spans.

L
1800 mm

L = 1000 mm (30kV)
L = 600 mm (11 or 0.4kV)

30° 30°

1500 mm

[Figure 7] Transverse couple guys

4.2 Unbalance load compensation

Design engineers should install the guy the pole imposed the unbalance load to
compensate the unbalance load. The location which the guy is installed at is as follows.
■ Dead end pole
■ Dead end corner pole
■ Branch pole
■ The pole which is imposed by unbalance load by the difference of span
■ Long span pole

5. Anchor Block

The anchor block which is installed at the guy the anchor concrete block which is the
same used for the pole. The burial depth of anchor block is 1.5m or more.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 /14 Version 1.0
 Guy & Strut

6. Clearance

The clearance between the phase conductors and guy wire should be 400mm or more for
30kV overhead lines and 200mm or more 11 or 0.4kV overhead lines respectively except
longitudinal couple guys and transverse couple guys. The vertical clearance of the
horizontal guy and sharing guy is 6m or more.

7. Guy Wire

We will use the Zinc coated steel wire for guy wire. The characteristics of the Zinc
coated steel wire is listed in the following table.

< Table 1 > Characteristics of the Zinc coated steel wire

Nominal Number of Diameter (mm) Linear Rated
Code cross-section stranding mass strength
(mm2) wires Wire Conductor (kg/km) (kN)
4 27.1 7 2.22 6.66 213.3 39.3
6.3 42.7 7 2.79 8.36 335.9 60.2
10 67.8 7 3.51 10.53 533.2 93.5
12.5 84.7 7 3.93 11.78 666.5 116.9
16 108.4 7 4.44 13.32 853.1 199.7

The guy can be installed by 30°, 45° and 60°. The maximum mechanical load which the
guy wire can withstand is as follows.

< Table 2 > Maximum mechanical load of guy wire

Nominal Rated Maximum resistance load according
Safety
Code cross-section strength to the guy angle (kN)
2 factor
(mm ) (kN) 30° 45° 60°
4 27.1 39.3 13.1 18.53 22.69
6.3 42.7 60.2 20.07 28.38 34.76
10 67.8 93.5 1.5 31.17 44.08 53.98
12.5 84.7 116.9 38.97 55.11 67.49
16 108.4 199.7 66.57 94.14 115.3
Note :
1) Guy angle means the angle between the guy wire and the pole.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 /14 Version 1.0
 Guy & Strut

8. Strut

Design engineers should install the strut pole at the location which the guy cannot be
installed. The characteristics of strut poles are as follows.

< Table 3 > Characteristics of strut poles

Diameter
Nominal Diameter at top (mm) Effective
at 1.5m Crippling
Class length diameter
from butt load (kN)
(m) Minimum Maximum end (mm) (mm)

9 125 150 180 145.5 32.8

10 125 160 185 146.6 26.3
Light
11 125 160 195 149.8 22.9
13 130 170 210 157.1 18.9
9 150 180 220 176.1 70.3
10 150 185 230 178.9 58.2
Medium 11 150 190 240 181.9 49.9
13 160 200 260 193.9 43.9
16 170 215 305 214.1 41.1
9 190 240 275 221.7 176.6
10 190 245 285 224.3 143.9
Stout 11 190 250 295 227.2 121.4
13 195 255 320 237.4 98.7
16 200 265 365 253.9 81.2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 /14 Version 1.0
 Guy & Strut

30°

1000mm

[Figure 8] Strut

The strut should be buried at least 1m. The angle between the overhead line pole and the
strut is 30° more or less.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 /14 Version 1.0
 Guy & Strut

Appendix A : References

BS 1990 Wood poles for overhead power and telecommunication lines

Part 1 : 1984 Specification for softwood poles
KDS 3100 Support
KDS 4900 Technical calculation
4901 The calculation of mechanical load on the pole
BS DD ENV Eurocode 1: Basis of design and actions on structures
1991-2-4
Part 2.4 Actions on structures – Wind actions

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 /14 Version 1.0
 Guy & Strut

Appendix B : The calculation formula of the maximum load of guy

ΣT

θ
h
h0

The mechanical load Tg (in N) which the guy should withstand can be given by the next
expression.
F (∑ Th − Mr + Mp )
Tg =
h0 sin θ
Where
Tg means the mechanical load imposed on the guy wire. (in N);
F is safety factor of the guy whose value is usually 1.5.
T means the mechanical load on the dead end pole.
Mr means the resistance bending moment of the pole.
Mp means the bending moment on the pole by wind pressure.
h means the distance from the ground to the load application point.
h0 means the distance from the ground to the point which the guy is attached to.
θ means the angle between the pole and the guy wire.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 /14 Version 1.0
 Guy & Strut

Appendix C : The calculation formula of the strength of the strut

Where struts are used, the ability of the pole to resist the crippling loads due to the vertical
component of the forces in the struts should be considered. The ultimate crippling loads are
calculated from the Euler formula. The crippling loads Fc (in N) are given by the
expression.

0.00411de 4
Fc =
l2
Where
l is the effective length, which is taken as the length between the top of the pole and the
ground lines (in m).
de is the effective diameter (in mm), given by the expression.

( L − D + 0.9)(db − dt )
de = dt +
3( L − 1.5)
Where
L is the full length (in m).
D is the depth of planting (in m).
dt is the top diameter (in mm).
db is the diameter at 1.5m from the butt end (in mm).

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 /14 Version 1.0
 Guy & Strut

Appendix D : The strength of the strut according to the angle

Maximum resistance load according to

Crippling
Pole Nominal Safety the guy angle (kN)
load
Class length (m) factor
(kN) 30° 45° 60°

9 32.8 10.93 15.46 18.94

10 26.3 8.77 12.4 15.18

Light 1.5
11 22.9 7.63 10.8 13.22

13 18.9 6.3 8.91 10.91

9 70.3 23.43 33.14 40.59

10 58.2 19.4 27.44 33.6

Medium 11 49.9 1.5 16.63 23.52 28.81

13 43.9 14.63 20.69 25.35

16 41.1 13.7 19.37 23.73

9 176.6 58.87 83.25 101.96

10 143.9 47.97 67.84 83.08

Stout 11 121.4 1.5 40.47 57.23 70.09

13 98.7 32.9 46.53 56.98

16 81.2 27.07 38.28 46.88

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 /14 Version 1.0
 Guy & Strut

Appendix E : The Needed guy wire for overhead lines

Distance Needed
Guy Guy
Conductor Size No. of from the bending
height strength Code
type (mm2) conductors ground moment
(m) (kN)
(m) (kN-m)
ACSR 160 3 9 8.60
ACSR 30 1 10.8 8.60
Sum 132.67 8.60 15.43 6.3(30°)
30kV 100 3 9 8.60
ACSR 30 1 10.8 8.60
Sum 87.85 8.60 10.22 4(30°)
63 3 9 8.60
ACSR 30 1 10.8 8.60
Sum 58.15 8.60 6.76 4(30°)
40 3 9 8.60
ACSR 30 1 10.8 8.60
Sum 36.01 8.60 4.19 4(30°)
ACSR 100 3 9.05 92.45 8.85 10.45 4(30°)
11kV 63 3 9.05 55.01 8.85 6.22 4(30°)
40 3 9.05 35.18 8.85 3.98 4(30°)
Bare Cu 70 3 9.05 92.18 8.85 10.42 4(30°)
11kV 50 3 9.05 63.68 8.85 7.20 4(30°)
35 3 9.05 40.88 8.85 4.62 4(30°)
25 3 9.05 27.02 8.85 3.05 4(30°)
16 3 12.05 26.87 8.85 3.04 4(30°)
PVC Cu 70 4 7.35 126.21 8.85 14.26 6.3(30°)
0.4kV 50 4 7.35 83.29 8.85 9.41 4(30°)
35 4 7.35 60.33 8.85 6.82 4(30°)
25 4 7.35 45.33 8.85 5.12 4(30°)
16 4 7.35 29.77 8.85 3.36 4(30°)
Note :
1) This table is calculated under the ruling span. Design engineers should review this table in
case of an abnormal condition.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 /14 Version 1.0
 GDO 1200
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Overhead Distribution Conductors

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Standard Types and Sizes ·············································································1
2.1 Standard types ·········································································································1
2.1.1 Low voltage ···································································································1
2.1.2 Medium voltage ·····························································································1
2.2 Standard sizes··········································································································1
3. Selection of Conductor··················································································2
3.1 Viewpoint of lines ···································································································2
3.2 Viewpoint of corrosion resistance············································································2
4. Current Carrying Capacity ·········································································3
4.1 Covered copper conductor for low voltage······························································3
4.2 Bare conductors for medium voltage·······································································4
5. Neutral Conductor Size for Low Voltage Line ··········································5
6. Arrangement of Low Voltage Conductors ·················································5
7. Sag ···················································································································6
8. Connection······································································································6
8.1 Prohibition of connection ························································································6
8.2 Connection of aluminum conductors·······································································7
8.2.1 Compression sleeve ·······················································································7
8.2.2 Compression connector··················································································7
8.3 Connection of bare copper conductors ····································································8
8.4 Connection of covered copper conductors for LV ···················································8
9. Tying in Conductors······················································································8
10. Low Voltage Aerial Bundled Cable ·························································10
10.1 Application ··········································································································10
10.2 CCC of aerial bundled cable················································································ 11
10.3 Connection of LV ABC ······················································································· 11

ii
11. Guard mesh ································································································11
11.1 Horizontal and vertical wire ················································································12
11.2 Crossarm ·············································································································12
11.3 Clearance to ground·····························································································13

iii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Standard types of conductors ······································································· 1

< Table 2 > Standard sizes of conductors········································································ 1
< Table 3 > Regional standard size ················································································· 2
< Table 4 > CCC of covered copper conductors ····························································· 3
< Table 5 > CCC of bare copper conductors ··································································· 4
< Table 6 > CCC of ACSR······························································································ 4
< Table 7 > Neutral conductor size for LV line ······························································· 5
< Table 8 > Sag of conductors························································································· 6
< Table 9 > Tie wire size······························································································· 10
< Table 10 > CCC of ABC ···························································································· 11

iv
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Arrangement of LV conductors ······································································ 5

[Figure 2] Compression sleeve ······················································································· 7
[Figure 3] Compression connector·················································································· 7
[Figure 4] Connection of bare copper conductors ··························································· 8
[Figure 5] Tying method ································································································· 9
[Figure 6] Plain figure of guard mesh ··········································································· 12
[Figure 7] Front view of guard mesh ············································································ 13

v
 LIST OF APPENDICES

A References ··············································································································14
B Calculation of CCC for MV conductors ······························································ 15
C Calculation of CCC for LV conductors ······························································· 20
D Reactance of Conductor ······················································································ 23
E Calculation of Voltage Drop ················································································· 26
F Conductor Table ··································································································· 30

vi
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

1. Scope

This standard covers information on overhead conductors for medium voltage and low
voltage and describes the fundamentals of designing overhead conductors.

2. Standard Types and Sizes

2.1 Standard types

Bare conductors are used as overhead distribution conductors for medium voltage, and
covered conductors are used as low voltage conductors. The material of conductor is
copper or aluminum. The standard types according to voltage level are listed in table 1.

< Table 1 > Standard types of conductors

Voltage level Conductor type Material
0.4kV Covered conductor Copper
11kV Bare conductor Copper, Aluminum
30kV Bare conductor Aluminum

2.1.1 Low voltage

Covered copper conductors are used as low voltage conductors and insulation material is
PVC (Polyvinyl chloride) or XLPE (Cross-linked polyethylene). Conductors are stranded
because of flexibility requirements for conductors.
2.1.2 Medium voltage
Bare conductors are used as medium voltage conductors and all types of conductors are
stranded. As for aluminum conductor, ACSR (Aluminum conductor steel reinforced) is
used and it consists of a central core of steel surrounded by layers of aluminum strands.

2.2 Standard sizes

The standard sizes of conductors for low and medium voltage lines are listed in table 2.
< Table 2 > Standard sizes of conductors
Voltage level Material Size (mm2) Remarks
0.4kV Copper 25, 35, 50, 70, 95 PVC or XLPE insulation
Copper 35, 50, 70 Bare
11kV
Aluminum 40, 63, 100 ACSR
30kV Aluminum 40, 63, 100, 160 ACSR

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

3. Selection of Conductor

The optimum types and sizes of conductors for overhead distribution lines are selected
in view of following factors;
(a) Current carrying capacity
(b) Anticipated load growth
(c) Allowable voltage drop
(d) Breakdown strength
(e) Economical efficiency
(f) Climatic conditions

3.1 Viewpoint of lines

Although above factors are the criteria for selecting appropriate sizes of conductors
which shall be installed, from the viewpoint of lines standard sizes of conductors can be
applicable. The largest conductors will be for the main lines, the lines that have the most
loads and the lines connected to adjacent feeder. Smaller conductors are for spurs and
radial loads where the loads are less than those of the main lines.
< Table 3 > Regional standard size

Region Voltage Size(mm2)

- Main lines Copper 70

11kV
- The lines that has the most loads Aluminum 100
- The lines connected to another feeder 30kV Aluminum 160

- Spurs Copper 35, 50

11kV
- The lines that feed relatively low load density area Aluminum 40, 63
- The lines that feed radial loads 30kV Aluminum 40, 63, 100

3.2 Viewpoint of corrosion resistance

Corrosion resistance to chemical material shall be taken into consideration when
designer decides which type of conductor material shall be selected for 11kV lines.
Generally, copper is more susceptible to sulfur than aluminum is, but copper resists saline
solutions more than aluminum. Therefore, copper conductor has advantage over aluminum
conductor in seashore area, but aluminum conductor has advantage over copper conductor
in industrial area where conductor is more exposed to oxidizing acid. The material of
conductor for 11kV shall be carefully selected in respect of corrosion resistance.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

4. Current Carrying Capacity

The current carrying capacity (CCC) of a conductor is the maximum steady-state current
and depends on type of conductor, electrical resistance, the maximum allowable conductor
temperature and ambient temperature. This clause gives information on CCC of each
conductor and appendix B and C show calculation example of CCC.

4.1 Covered copper conductor for low voltage

The following relevant conditions are input data to calculate current carrying capacity of
covered copper conductor.
(a) Ambient air temperature : 50°C
(b) Maximum allowable conductor temperature
▪ PVC insulation : 70°C
▪ XLPE insulation : 90°C

< Table 4 > CCC of covered copper conductors

Maximum
Nominal Approximated Current
DC
Size Number diameter mass per carrying
Insulation resistance
(mm2) of wires of conductor unit length capacity
at 20°C
(mm) (kg/km) (A)
(Ω/km)

25 7 6.30 249 0.7563 92

35 7 7.50 346 0.5337 115

50 PVC 19 9.00 484 0.3819 139

70 19 10.5 650 0.2806 180

95 19 12.5 909 0.1980 220

25 7 6.30 267 0.7563 132

35 7 7.50 368 0.5337 164

50 XLPE 19 9.00 511 0.3819 201

70 19 10.5 682 0.2806 260

95 19 12.5 948 0.1980 318

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

4.2 Bare conductors for medium voltage

The following relevant conditions are input data to calculate current carrying capacity of
bare copper conductor and ACSR for medium voltage.
(a) Ambient air temperature : 50°C
(b) Maximum allowable conductor temperature : 80°C
(c) Wind speed : 1.0m/s
(d) Intensity of solar radiation : 1120W/m2

< Table 5 > CCC of bare copper conductors

Maximum
Nominal Nominal Nominal Current
DC
Size Number diameter diameter mass per carrying
resistance
(mm2) of wires of wire of conductor unit length capacity
at 20°C
(mm) (mm) (kg/km) (A)
(Ω/km)

35 7 2.50 7.50 308.0 0.5337 199

50 19 1.80 9.00 435.8 0.3819 246

70 19 2.10 10.50 593.2 0.2806 299

< Table 6 > CCC of ACSR

Nominal
Maximum
Number diameter Nominal Nominal Current
DC
Size of wires of wire diameter mass per carrying
resistance
(mm2) (mm) of conductor unit length capacity
at 20°C
(mm) (kg/km) (A)
Al St Al St (Ω/km)

40 6 1 2.91 2.91 8.74 161.5 0.7174 177

63 6 1 3.66 3.66 11.00 254.4 0.4555 237

100 6 1 4.61 4.61 13.80 403.8 0.2869 317

160 26 7 2.80 2.18 17.70 644.9 0.1805 427

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

5. Neutral Conductor Size for Low Voltage Line

The neutral conductor size of single phase circuit is same as the size of phase conductor.
For three phase circuit, the neutral conductor size is equal to or less than that of phase
conductor according to cross section area of phase conductor. Below table shows the size
neutral conductor corresponding to that of phase conductor.
< Table 7 > Neutral conductor size for LV line
Neutral conductor size(mm2)
2
Phase conductor size(mm )
Single phase circuit Three phase circuit

25 25 25

35 35 25

50 50 35

70 70 50

95 95 70

6. Arrangement of Low Voltage Conductors

When low voltage lines are constructed, low voltage conductors are arranged so that
neutral conductor is nearest to ground.

Phase conductors

Neutral conductor

[Figure 1] Arrangement of LV conductors

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

7. Sag

If the sag of conductor is too small, the tensile strength of conductor becomes larger and
the stability of conductor could be lessened. But if the sag of conductor is too large, the
clearance to ground of conductor becomes smaller and the height of support shall be
increased. Thus, the moderate sag of conductor is important. Below table shows relevant
sag of conductors which shall be maintained under the ambient temperature 25°C with no
wind.
< Table 8 > Sag of conductors
Ruling
Voltage(kV) Conductor(mm2) Pole Sag(m)
span(m)
30 ACSR 40, 63, 100, 160 Stout 13m 70 1.2
ACSR 100 Medium 11m 40 0.4
11 ACSR 63, 40 Medium 11m 50 0.6
Bare copper 35, 50, 70 Medium 11m 55 0.7
Covered copper 70, 90 Medium 9m 40 0.6
0.4
Covered copper 50, 35, 25 Medium 9m 50 0.8

When conductors are erected in winter season, the sag of conductors could be smaller
than above figures in table and when the conductors are erected in summer season with the
temperature above 25°C, the sag of conductors shall be increased.

8. Connection

When making connections, the electrical resistance of connector shall not be higher than
that of conductor and tensile strength of any connector shall not be smaller than that of
conductor. The material of connector shall be non-corrosive and shall not adversely affect
conductors and conductor connections shall be kept to a minimum if possible.

8.1 Prohibition of connection

Following cases are when conductors are prohibited from being connected in the mid
span.
(a) Crossing the river or highway
(b) Crossing over power distribution line
(c) Connection of different size of conductor
(d) Connection of different type of conductor

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

8.2 Connection of aluminum conductors

One of the most important things when connecting aluminum conductors is the use of
compound. After cleaning the oxide film from aluminum, a compound must immediately
be applied to prevent the oxide from reforming and moisture from entering. Compression
sleeves or connectors shall be used for connection and compression is obtained by use of
hydraulic pressure.

8.2.1 Compression sleeve

Compression sleeves are used where the tension is exerted, for example in the middle of
the line. The mechanical strength of compression sleeve shall be enough to withstand
tensile strength of conductors. There shall not be more than one compression sleeve per
conductor in any span.

Compression sleeve

Conductor

[Figure 2] Compression sleeve

8.2.2 Compression connector

Compression connector is used where the tension is not exerted, for example at the
jumper of conductor or divergence from a main conductor.
Main line

Branch line Compression connector

[Figure 3] Compression connector

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

8.3 Connection of bare copper conductors

Bare copper connection also shall be made after oxide film is cleared by brush. In case
there is tension, connections shall be made by joint method. In case there is no tension,
bolted connector shall be used as well as joint method.

(a) Joint connection

(b) Bolted connector

[Figure 4] Connection of bare copper conductors

8.4 Connection of covered copper conductors for LV

Insulated copper connections for low voltage connections shall be made by joint
method after stripping the insulation material and shall be taped.

9. Tying in Conductors

Tie wire is needed for attaching conductors to pin-type insulators. There are three tying
method; top tie, side tie and dead-end tie. When medium voltage distribution line is
straight, the conductors are tied on the top of the insulators and when the line has
horizontal angle, the conductors are tied on the side of insulators. For side tie, the
conductors are installed in the opposite direction of tension.
For low voltage conductors, side tie and dead-end tie methods are used. In case the
conductors are not dead ended, conductors are tied only on the side of insulators
independent of line angle.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

(a)Side tie

(b) Side tie for straight

(c) Top tie

(d) Top tie for double arms

(e) Dead-end tie

[Figure 5] Tying method

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

The material of tie wire shall be the same as that of conductor which is tied. That is,
aluminum tie wire is used in tying aluminum conductors and copper tie wire is used in
tying copper conductors. Especially, preformed aluminum tie wire is used for ACSR of
medium voltage and tie wire size for bare copper conductor and covered copper conductor
is specified in the below table.

< Table 9 > Tie wire size

Conductor Tie wire

Type Size(mm2) Type Size(mm2)

Bare copper 35, 50, 70 Bare copper 10.0

Covered copper 25, 35, 50, 70, 95 Covered copper 4.0

The used tie wire is forbidden from reusing. Always new tie wire shall be used in tying
in conductors.
When the conductor is aluminum, armor rod at each insulator shall be covered over the
conductors to provide physical protection against rubbing or pitting. But, when the jumper
conductors are tied on the conductor, the armor rods are not necessary because the jumper
conductors do not go through tension forces.

10. Low Voltage Aerial Bundled Cable

Low voltage aerial bundled cable consists of four single-core cables and each cable is
twisted. The phase of cable is identified by ribs such as one rib, two ribs and three ribs and
neutral core is plain without any ribs.

10.1 Application
The preferred applications of ABC(Aerial bundled cable) are as followings.
(a) To reduce tree trimming
(b) To reduce interruption by tree contact
(c) Urban area where streetscape is required
(d) Prevent the bush fire caused by bare conductors
(e) Areas where reliability and safety are required

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

10.2 CCC of aerial bundled cable

The following relevant conditions are input data to calculate current carrying capacity
of LV aerial bundled cable.
(a) Ambient air temperature : 50°C
(b) Maximum allowable conductor temperature : XLPE 90°C

< Table 10 > CCC of ABC

Maximum Approximated Maximum Current

Size Number diameter of mass per resistance carrying
Insulation
(mm2) of wires conductor unit length at 20°C capacity
(mm) (kg/km) (Ω/km) (A)

25 7 6.10 400 1.2 84

35 7 7.20 520 0.868 105

50 XLPE 7 8.40 700 0.320 130

70 19 10.10 960 0.253 168

95 19 11.90 1,350 0.206 207

10.3 Connection of LV ABC

Connection of low voltage aerial bundled cable in the mid span shall not be allowed and
connections shall be made on the pole. Low voltage aerial bundled cable connection shall
be made by means of insulation piercing connector. Care shall be taken when insulation
piercing connector is installed. Cable shall be positioned correctly and screw until the
contact blades pierce the insulation and reliably contact the conductors.

11. Guard mesh

When bare conductors for medium voltage cross over the crowded road or crowded area
such as downtown, guard mesh can be installed underneath the overhead lines. Guard mesh
protects pedestrians from electric shock caused by broken conductors. It also prevents
pedestrians with fishing gear from touching conductors etc.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

11.1 Horizontal and vertical wire

27.1 mm2 zinc-coated steel stranded conductor is used as a wire for guard mesh. Guard
mesh consists of horizontal wires and vertical wires. The number of horizontal wire is 5
and the distance between vertical wires shall be less than 1.5m. The distances between
vertical wires are 0.55m for 11kV and 0.9m for 30kV.

11.2 Crossarm
2,400mm crossarm for guard mesh is used for 11kV overhead lines and 4,000mm
crossarm for guard mesh is used for 30kV overhead lines. Crossarm for guard mesh of
11kV shall be installed between 600mm and 1,000mm below the crossarm for distribution
conductors. For 30kV lines, crossarm for guard mesh shall be installed between 1,000mm
and 1,500mm below the crossarm for distribution conductors.

Less than 1.5m Horizontal wire

0.55m

0.55m

0.55m

0.55m

Vertical wire
(a) 11kV

Less than 1.5m

0.9m

0.9m

0.9m

0.9m

(b) 30kV

[Figure 6] Plain figure of guard mesh

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

Conductor Conductor
crossarm crossarm
1,800mm 3,000mm

600mm~
1,000mm~
1,000mm
1,500mm

2,400mm 4,000mm
Guard mesh Guard mesh
crossarm crossarm

(a) 11kV (b) 30kV

[Figure 7] Front view of guard mesh

11.3 Clearance to ground

The clearances from guard mesh to ground are same as clearances from LV conductor to
ground therefore, the clearances are in accordance with clearance standard (GDO 1500).

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

Appendix A : References

IEC TR61597 Overhead electrical conductors-Calculation methods for stranded

bare conductors
IEC60287-1-1 Current ration equations(100% load factor) and calculation losses
IEC60228 Conductors of insulated cables
IEC61089 Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded conductors
IEC60364-5-52 Selection and erection of electrical equipment-wiring systems
IEEE Std 738 IEEE standard for calculating the current-temperature relationship of
bare overhead conductors
IEEE C2 National Electrical Safety Code
BS7884 Copper and copper-cadmium stranded conductors for overhead
conductors for overhead electric traction and power transmission
systems

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

Appendix B : Calculation of CCC for MV Conductors

Current carrying capacity(CCC) of a conductor is the maximum steady-state current

inducing a given temperature rise in the conductor for given ambient conditions. When the
temperature of the conductor rises to the point where heat output equals heat input, the
temperature remains steady and the current for such condition is the CCC for that
temperature under the stated conditions. By solving heat balance equation, CCC of a
conductor can be obtained.

1. Heat balance equation

Pj + Psol = Prad + Pconv

where
Pj is the heat generated by Joule effect
Psol is the solar heat gain by solar
Prad is the heat loss by radiation of the conductor
Pconv is the convection heat loss

Radiation heat loss Solar heat gain

Convection heat loss Heat generated by Joule effect

There are some methods of calculating each component of heat balance equation but this
standard is accordance with IEC TR61597.

1.1 Joule effect

Power losses, Pj, due to Joule effect are given by equation :
Pj= RTI2
where
RT : Electrical resistance of conductor at a temperature T(Ω/m)
I : Conductor current(A)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

1.2 Solar heat gain

Solar heat gain, Psol (W/m), is given by equation :
Psol =γDSi
where
γ : Solar radiation absorption coefficient
D : Conductor diameter (m)
Si : Intensity of solar radiation (W/m2)

1.3 Radiated heat loss

Heat loss by radiation, Prad(W), is given by equation :
Prad = sπDKe(T24 – T14 )
where
s : Stefan-Boltzman constant (5.67×10-8Wm-2K-4)
D : Conductor diameter(m)
Ke : Emissivity coefficient in respect of black body
T1 : Ambient temperature(K)
T2 : Final equilibrium temperature(K)

1.4 Convection heat loss

Only forced convection heat loss, Pconv (W), is taken into account and is given by
equation :
Pconv = λNu(T2 - T1)π
where
λ : Thermal conductivity of the air film in contact with the conductor, assumed constant
and equal to 0.02585Wm-1K-1
Nu : Nusselt number, given by equation
Nu = 0.65Re0.2 + 0.23Re0.61
The Reynols number given by equation
Re = 1.644×109vD[T1 + 0.5(T2 - T1)]-1.78
v : Wind speed(m/s)
D : Conductor diameter(m)
T1 : Ambient temperature(K)
T2 : Final equilibrium temperature(K)

1.5 Calculation of current carrying capacity

From heat balance equation, the current carrying capacity can be calculated by

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

Prad + Pconv − Psol

I=
RT

2. Calculation of direct current resistance

The DC resistance of a conductor increases linearly with the temperature according to
the following equation :
RT2 = RT1× [(t + T2) / (t + T1)] = RT1 [1+α (T2 – T1)]
where
RT1 : DC resistance at temperature T1
RTI : DC resistance at temperature T2
t : Constant determined from a function of temperature
α : Temperature coefficient of electrical resistance at temperature resistance at
temperature T1 , here, α = 1/(t +T1)

Generally, the DC resistance of a conductor is given at temperature 20°C. The value of α

at 20°C is given in below table.

Conductor t α (20°C)
Annealed Copper of 100% 234.5 0.00393
Hard drawn copper of 97% 241 0.00383
Hard drawn Aluminum of 61% 228 0.00403

3. Calculation of alternating current resistance

The AC resistance of the conductor is higher than the DC resistance mainly because of
the skin effect and the proximity effect.
The AC resistance of conductor is given by formula

Rac = Rdc ( 1+ y s + y p )

where
y s : Skin effect factor

y p : Proximity effect factor

Skin effect factor is given by

xs4
ys =
192 + 0.8 xs4

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

where
2 8πf
xs = × 10 −7 k s
Rdc

Experimental value for k s is as following.

(a) Round, stranded : k s = 1
(b) Hollow, helical stranded :
D − D i D + 2 Di 2
ks = ( )( )
D + Di D + D
Where
Di is the inside diameter of the conductor (mm)
D is the outside diameter of the conductor (mm)

As for proximity factor, because the distance between conductors is long compared to
conductor diameter, ordinarily can be ignored.
For conductors having steel wires in the core (ACSR), the magnetic flux in the core
varies with the current. Although this magnetic field has an effect on some single layer
conductors, the values of AC resistance for single layer ACSR resistance have been
calculated without this influence.

4. Example
Let’s calculate CCC of bare copper conductor 70mm2.

Some data which are needed to calculate CCC of conductors are as following.
▪ Ambient temperature T1 : 50°C
▪ Intensity of solar radiation Si : 1120W/m2
▪ Wine speed v : 1m/s
▪ Maximum allowable conductor temperature T2 : 80°C
▪ Solar radiation absorption coefficient γ : 0.5
▪ Emissivity coefficient in respect of black body Ke : 0.6
▪ Conductor diameter of copper conductor 70mm2 : 0.0105m
▪ Maximum DC resistance of copper conductor 70mm2 at 20°C RT1: 0.2806 Ω/km
(a) Solar heat gain
Psol = γDSi = 0.5×0.0105×1120 = 5.88 W/m
(b) Radiated heat loss
Prad = sπDKe(T24 – T14 ) = 5.67×10-8×π×0.0105×0.6× (804 – 504 ) = 5.21026 W/m

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

(c) Convection heat loss

Re = 1.644×109vD[T1 + 0.5(T2 - T1)]-1.78
= 1.644×109 ×1×0.0105× [323+0.5× (353-323)]-1.78 = 544.02566
Nu = 0.65Re0.2 + 0.23Re0.61 = 0.65×544.025660.2 + 0.23×544.025660.61 = 13.01750
Hence,
Pconv = λNu(T2 - T1) π = 0.02585×13.0175×(353-323) × π = 31.71460 W/m
(d) DC Resistance
DC resistance at temperature 80°C shall be calculated by formula and the value of α for
hard drawn copper of 97% IACS is 0.00383.
RT2 = RT1× [(t + T2) / (t + T1)] = RT1 [1+α (T2 – T1)]
Rdc(80) = 0.2806×[1+0.00383× (353 – 293)] = 0.3450812 Ω/km
(e) AC resistance
For round and stranded conductors k s = 1,
Hence,
8πf
×10 7 k s = 8×π×50 ×10-7×1 / 0.3450812= 0.000364156
2
xs =
Rdc (80 )
x s = 0.019082875
4
xs 0.0190828754
ys = = = 6.90675×10-7
192 + 0.8 xs
4
192 + 0.019082875 4

Because proximity effect is ignored, y p = 0

The AC resistance of conductor at 80°C is given by

Rac(80) = Rdc(80) ( 1+ y s + y p )=0.3450812×(1+6.90675×10-7 ) = 0.3450812 Ω/km

DC resistance is almost same as AC resistance because of the size of conductor is small

i.e. skin effect has little effect on the increase of resistance.
(f) Current Carrying Capacity
The CCC of bare copper conductor 70mm2 is calculated by below formula.

Prad + Pconv - Psol 5.21026 + 31.71460 - 5.88

I= = = 299 A
Rac (80 ) 0.3450812 × 10-3

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

Appendix C : Calculation of CCC for LV conductors

Current Carrying Capacity of insulated overhead conductor for LV can be calculated in

accordance with IEC60364-5-52. IEC60364-5-52 provides CCC of insulated conductors on
insulators depending on insulation material at reference ambient temperature 30°C.

1. Maximum operation temperature for types of insulation

The current to be carried by any conductor for sustained periods during normal
operation shall be such that the appropriate temperature limit specified in below table is not
exceeded.

Type of insulation Temperature limit

Polyvinyl-chloride(PVC) 70°C at conductor

Cross-linked polyethylene(XLPE) 90°C at conductor

2. CCC at reference ambient temperature 30°C

Current carrying capacities of flat vertical spaced and three loaded copper conductors at
reference ambient temperature 30°C are listed in below table according to insulation
material.

Insulation Size(mm2) CCC(A) at 30°C

25 130
35 162
PVC 50 197
70 254
95 311
25 161
35 201
XLPE 50 246
70 318
95 389

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

3. Correction factor for ambient air temperature other than 30°C

Current carrying capacities in clause 2 assume the ambient temperature 30°C. Where the
ambient temperature differs from reference ambient temperature, the appropriate correction
factor given below table shall be applied to the values of current carrying capacities.

Insulation
Ambient temperature(°C)
PVC XLPE
10 1.22 1.15
15 1.17 1.12
20 1.12 1.08
25 1.06 1.04
35 0.94 0.96
40 0.87 0.91
45 0.79 0.87
50 0.71 0.82
55 0.61 0.76
60 0.50 0.71

4. Calculation of CCC for low voltage conductors

Current carrying capacities for low voltage conductors are calculated by applying
correction factor of ambient temperature 50°C.
▪ CCC at 50°C = CCC at 30°C× Correction factor of 50°C

Insulation Size(mm2) CCC(A) at 50°C.

25 92
35 115
PVC 50 139
70 180
95 220
25 132
35 164
XLPE 50 201
70 260
95 318

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

5. CCC of low voltage ABC

Current carrying capacity of low voltage ABC can be calculated in the same manner as
is explained above. The difference is the arrangement of conductors and. Current carrying
capacities of three loaded conductors with trefoil arrangement at reference ambient
temperature 30°C and ambient temperature 50°C are listed in below table.

Insulation Size(mm2) CCC(A) at 30°C CCC(A) at 50°C

25 103 84
35 129 105
XLPE 50 159 130
70 206 168
95 253 207

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

Appendix D : Reactance of Conductor

1. Reactance
The inductive reactance is given by
X = 2πfL (Ω/m)
The inductance is
D
L = 2 × 10 -7 ln eq (H/m)
Ds
Where,
Deq is GMD(Geometric mean distance)
Ds is GMR(Geometric mean radius)

2. GMD

GMD is given by Deq = 3 D12 D23 D31

Where D12 , D23 and D31 are the distances between conductors

Conductor 1

D12 D23

Conductor 2 Conductor 3
D31

a. 0.4kV
The distance between adjacent conductors is 200mm.

200mm 200mm

Deq = 3 D12 D23 D31 = 3 0.2 × 0.2 × 0.4 =0.2519m

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

b. 11kV
The distance between adjacent conductors is 800mm.

800mm 800mm

Deq = 3 D12 D23 D31 = 3 0.8 × 0.8 × 1.6 =1.0079m

c. 30kV
The distances between adjacent conductors are 900mm and 1,840mm.

1840mm 900mm

Deq = 3 D12 D23 D31 = 3 1.84 × 0.9 × 2.74 =1.6555m

3. GMR
GMR is given by Ds =0.5DKg
Where,
D is diameter of conductor
Kg is layer factor
Layer factor Kg is listed in below table.

Copper or Aluminum conductor ACSR

No. of
No. of wire Kg No. of wire(Al/steel) No. of layer(Al) Kg
layer
Solid - 6/1 1 0.7680
0.7256
7 1 26/7 2 0.8116
0.7577
19 2 45/7 3 0.7939
0.7678
37 3 54/7 3 0.8099
0.7788
61 4 72/7 4 0.7889

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

4. Calculation example
70 mm2 copper conductor is to be installed for overhead 11kV line and the distance
between adjacent conductors is 800mm. What is the reactance of the line when line length
is 2km.

Sol)
To calculate the reactance, GMR and GMD should be known.

GMR of the line is Deq = 3 D12 D23 D31 = 3 0.8 × 0.8 × 1.6 =1.0079m

Layer factor of 70 mm2 copper conductor is 0.726.

Ds =0.5DKg =0.5ⅹ0.0105ⅹ0.758=0.003975m
D
X = 2πfL= 2π × 50 × 2 × 10 -7 ln eq × 103 = 0.3477(Ω /km)
Ds
The reactance of the line is 0.3477ⅹ2=0.6954 Ω

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

Appendix E : Calculation of Voltage Drop

Because it is very difficult to know the line current, it is almost impossible to calculate
voltage drop correctly. Therefore the calculation of voltage drop provided here is
approximate and in order to know the voltage drop exactly, measurement of voltage is
needed.

1. When the loads are concentrated at the end of the line

S/S
I Load

(a) Single phase two wire

Vd = 2 I ( R cosθ + X sin θ ) L

(b) Balanced three phase

Vd = I ( R cosθ + X sin θ ) L

where
Vd : Voltage drop (V)
I : Line current (A)
R : Resistance of line (Ω/km)
X : Impedance of line (Ω/km)
θ : Power factor
L : Line length (km)

2. When the loads are uniformly distributed along the line

I
S/S

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

(a) Single phase two wire

Vd = I ( R cosθ + X sin θ ) L = i ( R cosθ + X sin θ ) L2

(b) Balanced three phase

Vd = I ( R cosθ + X sin θ ) L / 2 = i ( R cosθ + X sin θ ) L2 / 2

where
I : Source current (A)
I
i= : Current per km (A/km)
L

3. When the loads are non-uniformly distributed along the line

ln
l3
l2
l1
S/S
…

i1 cosθ1 i2 cosθ 2 i3 cosθ3 i n cos θ n

(a) Single phase two wire

Vd = 2{i1 ( R cosθ1 + X sin θ1 )l1 + i2 ( R cosθ 2 + X sin θ 2 ) + .... + in ( R cosθ n + X sin θ n )}

(b) Balanced three phase

Vd = i1 ( R cosθ1 + X sin θ1 )l1 + i2 ( R cosθ 2 + X sin θ 2 ) + .... + in ( R cosθ n + X sin θ n )

4. Example 1
The load is located at the end of three phase 11kV line and the value of each component
is as followings. What’s the amount of voltage drop?
L : 2km, R : 0.5Ω/km, X : 0.2Ω/km, cos θ : 0.8, I : 100A

Because power factor is 0.8, sin θ = 1 - cosθ 2 = 1 - 0.82 = 0.6

If we calculate the voltage drop,

Vd = I ( R cosθ + X sin θ ) L =100ⅹ(0.5ⅹ0.8+0.2ⅹ0.6)ⅹ2 = 104V

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

5. Example 2
When the loads are fed under the following conditions, calculate voltage drop.

‰ The customers are fed by 3 phase with 400/230V.

‰ Each load consumes 13kVA and power factor is 0.9.
‰ The distance between two loads (L) is 12m and total length of line is 120m.
☞ Refer to appendix F(Conductor table) for the resistance and reactance.

12m 12m
12m

I I1 I2 I3 I8 I9 I10

······

L1 L2 L3 L8 L9 L10

[Load diagram]

The current flowing into each load is I1 = I2 = … = I10 = 13 /( 3 × 0.4) =18.7A.

The current I flowing from source is 187A. To carry 187A, CCC of conductor should be
more than 187A.

187A 168.3A 149.6A 130.9A 37.4A 18.7A

18.7A 18.7A 18.7A 18.7A 18.7A 18.7A

······

L1 L2 L3 L8 L9

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

28 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

a) XLPE covered conductor

If low voltage conductor is XLPE covered conductor, the minimum size of conductor is
50mm2. Let the conductor be 50mm2 XLPE covered copper conductor and 50mm2 XLPE
covered copper conductor has R=0.3819[Ω/km] and X=0.2703[Ω/km].Because cos θ =0.9,

sin θ = 1 − cos θ 2 =0.436

Voltage drop is calculated as following.

Vd = ∑I ( R cos θ + X sin θ )L = 187(0.3819ⅹ0.9+0.2703ⅹ0.436)ⅹ12/1000+

168.3(0.3819ⅹ0.9+0.2703ⅹ0.436)ⅹ12/1000+ ……
18.7((0.3819ⅹ0.9+0.2703ⅹ0.436)ⅹ12/1000
= 5.70V

The voltage drop is 5.70V(5.7/230ⅹ100=2.48%).

At the end of line, phase to ground voltage is 230-5.7=224.3V

b) PVC covered conductor

If low voltage conductor is PVC covered conductor, the minimum size of conductor is
950mm2 with R=0.1980[Ω/km] and X=0.2497[Ω/km].

Vd = ∑I ( R cos θ + X sin θ )L = 187(0.1980ⅹ0.9+0.2497ⅹ0.436)ⅹ12/1000+

168.3(0.1980ⅹ0.9+0.2497ⅹ0.436)ⅹ12/1000+ ……
18.7((0.1980ⅹ0.9+0.2497ⅹ0.436)ⅹ12/1000
= 3.54V

The voltage drop is 3.54V(3.54/230=1.54%).

At the end of line, phase to ground voltage is 230-3.54=226.46V

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

29 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

Appendix F : Conductor Table

1. 0.4kV
a. PVC covered copper conductor

Size(mm2) 25 35 50 70 95

Diameter(mm) 6.30 7.50 9.00 10.5 12.5

DC resistance at 20°C
0.7563 0.5337 0.3819 0.2806 0.1980
(Ω/km)
AC resistance at 70°C
0.9011 0.6359 0.4550 0.3443 0.2359
(Ω/km)

Reactance(Ω/km)(1) 0.2954 0.2845 0.2703 0.2606 0.2497

Voltage drop(mV/A/m)(2) 0.9398 0.6964 0.5274 0.4145 0.3212

CCC(A) 92 115 139 180 220

b. XLPE covered copper conductor

Size(mm2) 25 35 50 70 95

Diameter(mm) 6.30 7.50 9.00 10.5 12.5

DC resistance at 20°C
0.7563 0.5337 0.3819 0.2806 0.1980
(Ω/km)
AC resistance at 90°C
0.9590 0.6768 0.4843 0.3558 0.2511
(Ω/km)

Reactance(Ω/km)(1) 0.2954 0.2845 0.2703 0.2606 0.2497

Voltage drop(mV/A/m) (2) 0.9920 0.7331 0.5537 0.4339 0.3348

CCC(A) 132 164 201 260 318

* (1) Distance between two adjacent conductors is 200mm.

* (2) Power factor is 0.9

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

30 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

2. 11kV

Copper ACSR
Size(mm2)
35 50 70 40 63 100

Diameter(mm) 7.50 9.00 10.50 8.74 11.00 13.80

DC resistance at 20°C
0.5337 0.3819 0.2806 0.7174 0.4555 0.2869
(Ω/km)
AC resistance at 80°C
0.6563 0.4697 0.3451 0.8909 0.5657 0.3564
(Ω/km)

Reactance(Ω/km) 0.3716 0.3574 0.3477 0.3584 0.3440 0.3297

Single circuit 0.8674 0.6055 0.4369 0.6837 0.5319 0.4369

R0
(Ω/km)
Double circuit 1.0174 0.7555 0.5869 0.8337 0.6819 0.5806

Single circuit 1.6451 1.6306 1.6164 1.6582 1.6441 1.6344

X0
(Ω/km)
Double circuit 2.8859 2.8714 2.8572 2.8990 2.8849 2.8752

Voltage drop(mV/A/m) 0.7193 0.5463 0.4309 0.9581 0.6591 0.3457

CCC(A) 199 246 299 177 237 317

□ Calculation assumption
▪ Physical geometry of 11kV lines

800mm 800mm 800mm 800mm 1,000mm

(a) Single circuit (b) Double circuit

▪ Soil Resistivity : 100 Ωm

▪ Power factor : 0.9

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

31 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

3. 30kV on pole

(a) ACSR

Size(mm2) 40 63 100 160

Diameter(mm) 8.74 11.00 13.80 17.70

DC resistance at 20°C
0.7174 0.4555 0.2869 0.1805
(Ω/km)
AC resistance at 80°C
0.8909 0.5657 0.3564 0.2244
(Ω/km)

Reactance(Ω/km) 0.3896 0.3752 0.3609 0.3418

R0 (Ω/km) 0.9969 0.7350 0.5664 0.4599

X0 (Ω/km) 1.5073 1.4929 1.4786 1.4595

Voltage drop(mV/A/m) 0.9717 0.6727 0.4781 0.3510

CCC(A) 177 237 317 427

□ Calculation assumption
▪ Physical geometry of 30kV lines

GW

1,690mm

1,840mm 900mm

▪ Soil Resistivity : 100 Ωm

▪ Power factor : 0.9

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

32 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

(b) AAAC

Size(mm2) 40 63 100 160 240

Diameter(mm) 8.68 10.9 13.9 17.9 20.3

DC resistance at 20°C
0.1758 0.4545 0.2877 0.1798 0.1389
(Ω/km)
AC resistance at 80°C
0.8705 0.5528 0.3500 0.2190 0.1694
(Ω/km)

Reactance(Ω/km) 0.3936 0.3793 0.3613 0.3465 0.3363

R0 (Ω/km) 0.8658 0.6045 0.4377 0.3298 0.2889

X0 (Ω/km) 1.5867 1.5724 1.5545 0.5386 1.5295

Voltage drop(mV/A/m) 0.9551 0.6629 0.4725 0.3482 0.2991

CCC(A) 179 239 320 432 510

□ Calculation assumption
▪ Physical geometry of 30kV lines

GW

1,690mm

1,840mm 900mm

▪ Ground wire : Aluminum Clad Steel Wire 30mm2

▪ Soil Resistivity : 100 Ωm
▪ Power factor : 0.9

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

33 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

4. 30kV on tower

(a) ACSR

Size(mm2) 40 63 100 160

Diameter(mm) 8.74 11.00 13.80 17.70

DC resistance at 20°C
0.7174 0.4555 0.2869 0.1805
(Ω/km)
AC resistance at 80°C
0.8909 0.5657 0.3564 0.2244
(Ω/km)

Reactance(Ω/km) 0.4456 0.4311 0.4169 0.3977

R0 (Ω/km) 1.1812 0.9193 0.7507 06443

X0 (Ω/km) 2.2922 2.2778 2.2635 2.2444

Voltage drop(mV/A/m) 0.9961 0.6971 0.5025 0.3754

CCC(A) 177 237 317 427

□ Calculation assumption
▪ Physical geometry of 30kV lines

GW
3,100mm

5,700mm

5,700mm

5,900mm

▪ Ground wire : Aluminum Clad Steel Wire 30mm2

▪ Soil Resistivity : 100 Ωm
▪ Power factor : 0.9

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

34 / 35 Version 1.0
 Overhead Distribution Conductors

(b) AAAC

Size(mm2) 40 63 100 160 240

Diameter(mm) 8.68 10.9 13.9 17.6 20.3

DC resistance at 20°C
0.1758 0.4545 0.2877 0.1798 0.1389
(Ω/km)
AC resistance at 80°C
0.8705 0.5528 0.3500 0.2190 0.1694
(Ω/km)

Reactance(Ω/km) 0.4496 0.4352 0.4172 0.4024 0.3923

R0 (Ω/km) 1.1797 0.9184 0.7516 0.6437 0.6028

X0 (Ω/km) 2.2961 2.2812 2.2638 2.2479 2.2389

Voltage drop(mV/A/m) 0.9795 0.6873 0.4969 0.3725 0.3235

CCC(A) 179 239 320 432 510

□ Calculation assumption
▪ Physical geometry of 30kV lines

GW
3,100mm

5,700mm

5,700mm

5,900mm

▪ Ground wire : Aluminum Clad Steel Wire 30mm2

▪ Soil Resistivity : 100 Ωm
▪ Power factor : 0.9

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

35 / 35 Version 1.0
 GDO 1300
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Assembly

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Crossarm ········································································································1
2.1 Type·························································································································1
2.2 Installation···············································································································1
2.2.1 11kV distribution lines···················································································1
2.2.2 30kV distribution lines···················································································2
2.3 Brace ·······················································································································2
3. Assembly Type according to Line Angle·····················································3
3.1 Standard assembly types··························································································3
3.2 Number of crossarm and brace ················································································6
3.3 Direction of crossarm ······························································································6
4. Straight Lines·································································································6
5. Sectioning Pole Assembly ·············································································7
6. Insulator ·········································································································8
6.1 11kV························································································································8
6.1.1 Pin insulator···································································································8
6.1.2 Suspension insulator ······················································································8
6.2 30kV························································································································8
6.2.1 Line post insulator ·························································································8
6.2.2 Suspension insulator ······················································································8
6.3 Suspension insulator assembly order·······································································8
7. Rack ················································································································9
7.1 Type·························································································································9
7.2 Installation···············································································································9
7.2.1 T-wall crossarm······························································································9
7.2.2 D-iron rack and swan neck hook····································································9
8. Installation of Rack ·····················································································10
9. Pole top construction of ABC·····································································13

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Crossarm assembly type ·············································································· 3

< Table 2 > Assembly types according to angle diagram ················································ 5
< Table 3 > Number of crossarm and brace ···································································· 6
< Table 4 > Direction of crossarm according to horizontal angle···································· 6

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Spacing between crossarms for 11kV ···························································· 1

[Figure 2] Spacing between crossarms for 30kV ···························································· 2
[Figure 3] Installation of braces ······················································································ 2
[Figure 4] Horizontal angle of line·················································································· 3
[Figure 5] Standard crossarm assembly types of 11kV ··················································· 4
[Figure 6] Angle diagram of crossarm assembly····························································· 5
[Figure 7] Straight line···································································································· 7
[Figure 8] Vertical angle ································································································· 7
[Figure 9] Installation of T-wall crossarm on the wall····················································· 9
[Figure 10] Minimum spacing between racks on the pole············································· 10

iv
 LIST OF APPENDICES

A References ···································································································· 14
B Crossarm assembly of 11kV ·········································································· 15
C Pole top drawings of LV ABC ······································································ 27
D Design example in terms of assembly type ·················································· 32

v
 Assembly

1. Scope

This standard applies to overhead distribution line assembly ranging from low voltage
0.4kV to medium voltage 11kV and 30kV.

2. Crossarm

2.1 Type
L-type crossarm is used for assembly of both 11kV and 30kV distribution lines and the
material of crossarm is steel. The standard length of L-type crossarm for 11kV is 1,800mm
and for 30kV is 3,000mm.

2.2 Installation
2.2.1 11kV distribution lines
The upper crossarm of 11kV line assembly shall be installed 200mm below the top of
pole and the minimum spacing between centerline of upper crossarm and centerline of
lower crossarm shall be 700mm. Crossarm is attached on pole using fixing bolt and fixing
bolt shall be inserted in the opposite direction of crossarm which is to be attached on pole
and screwed enough to fix the crossarm on pole tightly.

200mm

700mm

[Figure 1] Spacing between crossarms for 11kV

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

2.2.2 30kV distribution lines

The upper crossarm of 30kV line assembly shall be installed 1,800mm below the top of
pole and the minimum spacing between centerline of upper crossarm and centerline of
lower crossarm shall be 1,000mm.

1,800mm

1,000mm

[Figure 2] Spacing between crossarms for 30kV

2.3 Brace
Crossarm shall be supported by braces to support expected loads including line
personnel working on them. Every crossarm which is installed on pole for wiring
conductor should be supported by braces and the angle between pole and brace is 45°.

45°

[Figure 3] Installation of braces

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

3. Assembly Type according to Line Angle

3.1 Standard assembly types

The standard types of crossarm assembly shall be divided into four categories depending
on the horizontal angle of distribution lines. Each assembly type is designated as type A,
type B, type C and type D and such assembly types are listed in table 1.
Crossarm assembly type A indicates that the support is intermediate pole and the number
of crossarm is one and the horizontal angle of the line is not more than 10°. When the
support is intermediate pole and the number of crossarm is two, the crossarm assembly
type of pole becomes type B. The horizontal angle of type B is different between 11kV
lines and 30kV lines. When horizontal angle of 11kV line is over 10° and is not more than
20°, the crossarm assembly becomes type B. But the horizontal angle of type B for 30kV
crossarm assembly is between 10° and 15°. Figure 5 shows standard crossarm assembly
type of 11kV.

Horizontal angle

[Figure 4] Horizontal angle of line

< Table 1 > Crossarm assembly type

Voltage Support Horizontal angle Crossarm Assembly type

Not more than 10° Single crossarm Type A

Intermediate
Not more than 20° Double crossarms Type B
11kV
Not more than 30° Double crossarms Type C
Sectioning
Over 30° Double crossarms Type D

Not more than 10° Single crossarm Type A

Intermediate
Not more than 15° Double crossarms Type B
30kV
Not more than 30° Double crossarms Type C
Sectioning
Over 30° Double crossarms Type D

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

(a) Type A (b) Type B

(c) Type C (d) Type D

[Figure 5] Standard crossarm assembly types of 11kV

Designer can decide crossarm assembly type using angle diagram of crossarm assembly.
Figure 6 shows angle diagram of crossarm assembly for 11kV and 30kV distribution lines.
Assuming that 11kV distribution lines are constructed and poles are erected, the assembly
type of pole 2 is decided by the region where pole 3 is located.

region 4 region 4

180° region 3
30°
20° region 2
10° region 1

Pole 1 Pole 2

(a) 11kV

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

region Ⅳ region Ⅳ

180° region Ⅲ
30° region Ⅱ
15°
10° region Ⅰ

Pole 1 Pole 2

(b) 30kV

[Figure 6] Angle diagram of crossarm assembly

If pole 3 is installed in region 2, horizontal angle deviation from pole 2 to pole 3 is

between 10° and 20°. Therefore, pole 2 becomes intermediate pole with double crossarms
i.e. crossarm assembly of pole 2 is type B.
Because the range of horizontal angle which decides assembly type B and C is different
between 11kV and 30kV, designer should be careful to choose assembly type according to
voltage level.

< Table 2 > Assembly types according to angle diagram

Region Assembly type
Voltage Horizontal line angle
(Location of pole 3) of pole 2
1 0° ~ up to 10° Type A
2 Exceeding 10° up to 20° Type B
11kV
3 Exceeding 20° up to 30° Type C
4 Exceeding 30° up to 180° Type D

Ⅰ 0° ~ up to 10° Type A
Ⅱ Exceeding 10° up to 15° Type B
30kV
Ⅲ Exceeding 15° up to 30° Type C
Ⅳ Exceeding 30° up to 180° Type D

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

3.2 Number of crossarm and brace

Table 1 shows that type A has single crossarm but the others have double crossarms. The
number of crossarm and brace used for each assembly type is listed in the following table.

< Table 3 > Number of crossarm and brace

Assembly type No. of crossarm No. of brace
Type A 1 2
Type B 2 4
Type C 2 4
Type D 4 8

3.3 Direction of crossarm

The direction of crossarm which is installed shall be different according to the horizontal
line angle. If horizontal angle of line is 0°, crossarm shall be installed at right angle to the
line. Crossarms are installed at half the horizontal angle when the line is exceeding 0° and
is not more than 30°. If horizontal angle is over 30°, upper and lower crossarms are
installed at right angle to each conductor.

< Table 4 > Direction of crossarm according to horizontal angle

Line angle Direction of crossarm Assembly type

0° Right angle to the line A

Exceeding 0° up to 30° Half the line angle A, B, C

Exceeding 30° Right angle to each conductor D

4. Straight Lines

As for straight lines (when intermediate poles are consecutively constructed because
horizontal angles on poles are not more than 20° for 11kV lines and 15° for 30kV lines),
sectioning poles are installed every 10 intermediate poles to enhance stability of facilities.
Figure 4 shows that number 1 and 11 pole are sectioning poles even though those poles
have horizontal angle below critical horizontal angles (20° for 11kV lines and 15° for 30kV
lines) which decide whether the poles are intermediate or sectioning poles.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

1 2 3 10 11

Sectioning pole Intermediate pole Sectioning pole

[Figure 7] Straight line

5. Sectioning Pole Assembly

When conductors are supported by pole as followings, the pole shall be sectioning pole
irrespective of horizontal angle.
(a) When the conductor size changes on pole
(b) When the conductor type changes on pole
(c) When horizontal angle of 11kV line is over 20°
(d) When horizontal angle of 30kV line is over 15°
(e) When overhead recloser or load break switchgear is installed
(f) When the conductors are dead ended
(g) Every tenth pole when the distribution line is straight
(h) When vertical angle of line is over 15°

Vertical angle

[Figure 8] Vertical angle

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

6. Insulator

6.1 11kV
6.1.1 Pin insulator
General type pin insulator is used to support 11kV conductor, but for use in areas
characterized by very heavy pollution levels, it may be necessary for fog type pin insulator
to be installed. As for pollution level, refer to GDS 1100 anti-pollution design standard.

6.1.2 Suspension insulator

Standard suspension insulator is ball and socket type which has dimension of
255mm(diameter)ⅹ146mm(spacing) and mechanical failing load of 70kN. It is a rule that
2 suspension insulators per phase on each side are installed on sectioning pole. But in
heavily polluted area, the number of suspension insulator shall be increased. The number
of suspension insulator which would be increased can be decided by pollution level of the
construction site. As for selection of insulator in respect of polluted conditions, refer to
Anti-pollution design standard (GDG0500).

6.2 30kV
6.2.1 Line post insulator
General type line post insulator is used to support 30kV conductor, but for use in areas
characterized by very heavy pollution levels, it may be necessary for fog type line post
insulator to be installed. As for pollution level, refer to GDS 1100 anti-pollution design
standard.

6.2.2 Suspension insulator

Standard suspension insulator is ball and socket type which has dimension of
255mm(diameter)ⅹ146mm(spacing) and mechanical failing load of 70kN. It is a rule that
the minimum number of suspension insulator per phase installed on each side is 3. But in
heavily polluted area, the number of suspension insulator shall be increased. The number
of suspension insulator which would be increased can be decided by pollution level of the
construction site. As for selection of insulator in respect of polluted conditions, refer to
Anti-pollution design standard (GDG0500).

6.3 Suspension insulator assembly order

Conductors are supported by appropriate fitting material and insulators on sectioning
pole and the assembly order is as following.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

‰ Crossarm – Anchor shackle – Ball eye - Suspension insulator – Socket eye –

Deadend clamp - Conductor

7. Rack

7.1 Type
Low voltage line is vertically arranged whereas medium voltage line is horizontally
arranged. Rack is used to support low voltage conductor on pole or on the wall vertically.
There are three kinds of rack for LV lines.
(a) T-wall crossarm
(b) Swan neck hook
(c) D-iron rack

7.2 Installation
7.2.1 T-wall crossarm
Because T-wall crossarm shall be installed not on the pole but on the wall, it shall be
installed carefully not to damage the wall and to maintain minimum clearance from ground
to conductor or from top of the building to conductor. The spool type insulators are
installed on T-wall crossarm.

[Figure 9] Installation of T-wall crossarm on the wall

7.2.2 D-iron rack and swan neck hook

D-iron rack and swan neck hook shall be installed at least 150mm below the top of pole.
Here, 150mm is the distance from the top of the pole to centerline of insulator which is
closest to the top of pole. The minimum spacing is 200mm which is the distance between
centerlines of each D-iron rack and between each low voltage pin insulator of swan neck
hook.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

150mm 150mm
200mm 200mm

200mm 200mm

200mm 200mm

[Figure 10] Minimum spacing between racks on the pole

8. Installation of Rack
When hook-type racks or one wire D-racks are installed on the pole, the installation
method shall be as followings.

a. When horizontal line angle is not more than 30°

D-iron rack Swan neck hook

Tension
Tension

Not more than 30°

Not more than 30°

Racks are installed in the direction of Racks are installed in the direction of
resultant tension. resultant tension.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

b. When horizontal line angle exceeds 30°

D-iron rack Hook-type rack

Over 30°
Over 30°

Racks are installed in the direction of Racks are installed in the direction of
each conductor. each conductor.

c. When conductors are jointed on the pole with horizontal angle not more than 30°

D-iron rack Swan neck hook

Not more Not more

than 30° than 30°

1 2

No.2 Racks are installed in the opposite Racks are installed in the direction of
direction of No. 1 racks. each conductor.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

d. When conductors are jointed on the pole with horizontal angle over 30°

D-iron rack Swan neck hook

Over 30° Over 30°

Racks are installed in the direction of Racks are installed in the direction of
each conductor. each conductor.

e. When conductors branch off on the pole not more than 30°

D-iron rack Swan neck hook

Not more
than 30°
Not more than 30°

Racks are installed at right angle of Racks are installed in the direction of
main line. branched off conductor.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

f. When conductors branch off at the pole over 30°

D-iron rack Swan neck hook

Over 30° Over 30°

Racks are installed in the direction of Racks are installed in the direction of
branched off conductors. branched off conductors.

9. Pole top construction of ABC

Low voltage aerial bundled cables are installed by means of low voltage aerial bundled
cable fittings (Spec. No. : 12140) and pole top drawings of LV ABC are in appendix C.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

Appendix A : References

IEC 60120 Characteristics of insulator unit of cap and pin type

IEC 60815 Guide for the selection of insulators in respect of polluted
conditions
IEEE C2 National Electrical Safety Code
ENA C(b)1-2006 Guidelines for design and maintenance of overhead distribution
and transmission lines

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

Appendix B : Crossarm Assembly of 11kV Line

1. Horizontal angle 0° ~ 10°

1800mm

1 400mm 400mm 100mm

200mm

400mm

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material . Spec. No Quantity

1 Pin type insulator 14211 3 3 Wood pole 10110 1
2 L-type crossarm 12200 1

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

2. Horizontal angle l0° ~ 20°

200mm
2

400mm

1800mm

2
1

100mm 400mm 400mm

No Material Spec. No. Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 Pin type insulator 14211 6 3 Wood pole 10110 1
2 L-type crossarm 12200 2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

3. Horizontal angle 20° ~ 30°

1800mm

300mm 400mm
1
200mm

4 2

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 Pin type insulator 14211 1 3 Wood pole 10110 1
2 L-type crossarm 12200 2 4 Suspension insulator 14001 12

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

‰ Ball-socket type insulator assembly order

1 2 3 4 5

6 7

1.L-type crossarm(14211) – 2.Anchor shackle(12020) – 3.Ball eye(12021) – 4.Suspension

insulator(14001) – 5.Socket eye(12028) – 6.Deadend clamp(12031) – 7.Conductor(16100)

4. Horizontal angle 30° ~ 60°

2
1

200mm 300mm 400mm

900mm

1800mm

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 Pin type insulator 14211 2 3 Suspension insulator 14001 12
2 L-type crossarm 12200 4

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

5. Horizontal angle 60° ~ 90°

1800mm
1
2
500mm 400mm
200mm

700mm

100mm
200mm

2
300mm

1
4

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 Pin type insulator 14211 2 3 Wood pole 10110 1
2 L-type crossarm 12200 4 4 Suspension insulator 14001 12

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

6. Sectioning pole with horizontal angle below 30°

1800mm

200mm 300mm 400mm 1

200mm

4 2

2
4

No Material Spec. No. Quantity No Material Spec. No. Quantity

1 Pin type insulator 14211 1 3 Wood pole 10110 1
2 L-type crossarm 12200 2 4 Suspension insulator 14001 12

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

7. Branch off at the intermediate pole

1800mm

400mm 400mm 1
100mm

200mm

700mm
2

100mm

No Material .Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 Pin type insulator 14211 4 3 Wood pole 10110 1
2 L-type crossarm 12200 3 4 Suspension insulator 14001 6

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

8. Branch off at the sectioning pole

1800mm

300mm 400mm 1 200mm

200mm

700mm
2

200mm 1

2
4

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 Pin type insulator 14211 2 3 Wood pole 1 3
2 L-type crossarm 12200 4 4 Suspension insulator 14001 18

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

9. Double circuit line

a. Intermediate pole (11kV-11kV)

1800mm

400mm 400mm 100mm

200mm

1000mm
2

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 Pin type insulator 14211 6 3 Wood pole 10110 1
2 L-type crossarm 12200 2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

b. Sectioning pole(11kV-11kV)

1800mm

400mm 300mm
200mm
1

200mm

4
1000mm

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 Pin type insulator 14211 2 3 Wood pole 10110 1
2 L-type crossarm 12200 2 4 Suspension insulator 14001 24

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

c. Angular pole(11kV-11kV)

1800mm

200mm
400mm 300mm

200mm

700mm

100mm
1 2 700mm
4

700mm

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 Pin type insulator 14211 4 3 Wood pole 10110 1
2 L-type crossarm 12200 8 4 Suspension insulator 14001 24

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

d. 11kV-0.4kV

1800mm

100mm
400mm 400mm
1

200mm

400mm

1500mm

4
200mm

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 Pin type insulator 14211 3 3 Wood pole 10110 1
2 L-type crossarm 12200 1 4 Spool insulator 14131 4

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

Appendix C : Pole top drawing of LV ABC

1. Intermediate pole with 0° ~ 25° line deviation

1 150mm

1
4

25° Max

2 4

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 Wood pole 10110 1 3 Hook bracket 12140 1
2 LV ABC 18139 - 4 Suspension clamp 12140 1

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

2. Intermediate pole with 25° ~ 50° line deviation

150mm
1

2 1

2 3

50° Max

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 Wood pole 10110 1 4 Yoke bracket 12140 1
2 LV ABC 18139 - 5 Suspension clamp 12140 2
3 Hook bracket 12140 1

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

28 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

3. Sectioning pole with 0° ~ 30° line deviation

150mm
3

1
3

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 Wood pole 10110 1 3 Termination bracket 12140 2
2 LV ABC 18139 - 4 Strain clamp 12140 2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

29 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

4. Sectioning pole with 30° ~ 90° line deviation

1
150mm 3

2
100mm

3
1

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 Wood pole 10110 1 3 Termination bracket 12140 2
2 LV ABC 18139 - 4 Strain clamp 12140 2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

30 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

5. Terminal pole

3
1
150mm

2
3 1

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 Wood pole 10110 1 3 Termination bracket 12140 1
2 LV ABC 18139 - 4 Strain clamp 12140 1

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

31 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

Appendix D : Design example in terms of assembly type

11kV single line(70mm2 copper conductor) is going to be constructed to supply

electricity for new customer and the route of line is shown in below figure. Number 0 pole
is existing pole and from number 1 to 8 pole will be installed, what is the crossarm
assembly type of each pole which will be installed and what is the number of standard type
insulator, crossarm and crossarm brace?

25°
- Vertical angle of line : 0°
7 8
- Pollution level : light
5 18° 6
60°
15°
4
3

0 1 2 35°

[Route of 11kV line]

The assembly types are divided into 4 and are listed in below table and figure of each
assembly type is shown.

Pole Horizontal angle Crossarm Assembly type

Not more than 10° Single crossarm Type A
Intermediate
Not more than 20° Double crossarms Type B
Not more than 30° Double crossarms Type C
Sectioning
Over 30° Double crossarms Type D

(a) Type A (b) Type B (c) Type C (d) Type D

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

32 / 33 Version 1.0
 Assembly

Because the horizontal angles of number 2 and 6 pole are over 30°, assembly types are
D. Because number 4 and 5 pole have an angle over 10°, assembly types correspond to
type B. Assembly type of number 7 pole of which line angle is 25° correspond to type C.
Number 8 is the last pole and it becomes sectioning pole and it’s type is kind of C, but the
number of insulator is different from standard assembly type C. The other poles have 0°
and assembly types are type A.
In terms of pollution level, because the pollution level is light, the number of standard
type suspension insulator need not to be more than 2. (Refer to anti-pollution standard)
Below table shows assembly type and the number of insulator, crossarm and crossarm
brace.
Assembly Suspension Pin Crossarm
Pole No. Crossarm
type insulator insulator brace
1 A 0 3 1 2
2 D 12 2 4 8
3 A 0 3 1 2
4 B 0 6 2 4
5 B 0 6 2 4
6 D 12 2 4 8
7 C 12 1 2 4
8 C 6 0 2 4
Total 42 23 18 36

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

33 / 33 Version 1.0
 GDO 1400
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ............................................................................................................. 1
2. Definitions .................................................................................................... 1
3. Automatic Circuit Recloser ........................................................................ 1
3.1 Preferred line for installation .................................................................................... 2
3.2 Physical location of sectionalizing devices .............................................................. 2
3.3 Application factors .................................................................................................... 2
3.4 Ratings ...................................................................................................................... 3
3.5 Installation height ..................................................................................................... 3
3.6 Operation sequence................................................................................................... 3
3.7 Surge Arrester ........................................................................................................... 5
3.8 Earthing..................................................................................................................... 5
3.9 Control cabinet.......................................................................................................... 5
3.10 Auxiliary power supply........................................................................................... 6

4. Automatic Circuit Sectionalizer................................................................. 6

4.1 Application factors .................................................................................................... 6
4.2 Ratings ...................................................................................................................... 6
4.3 Operation sequence................................................................................................... 7
4.4 Installation height ..................................................................................................... 7
4.5 Surge arrester ............................................................................................................ 7
4.6 Earthing..................................................................................................................... 7
4.7 Control cabinet.......................................................................................................... 7

5. Load Break Switch ...................................................................................... 9

5.1 Installation location................................................................................................... 9
5.2 Application factors .................................................................................................... 9
5.3 Ratings ...................................................................................................................... 9

ii
 5.4 Installation height ................................................................................................... 10
5.5 Surge arrester .......................................................................................................... 10
5.6 Earthing................................................................................................................... 10

6. Shunt Power Capacitor............................................................................. 10

6.1 Application factors .................................................................................................. 10
6.1.1. Rated voltage................................................................................................ 10
6.1.2. Maximum permissible voltage ..................................................................... 11
6.1.3. Maximum permissible current ..................................................................... 11
6.2 Locating capacitors ................................................................................................. 11
6.3 Installation height ................................................................................................... 11
6.4 Earthing................................................................................................................... 12
6.5 Protective devices ................................................................................................... 12

7. Step Voltage Regulator.............................................................................. 13

7.1 Application factor ................................................................................................... 13
7.2 Where to apply........................................................................................................ 13
7.2.1. On existing feeders with voltage drop problems.......................................... 13
7.2.2. On important branch lines ............................................................................ 14
7.2.3. To serve a remotely located load.................................................................. 14
7.3 Bypass switch ......................................................................................................... 15
7.4 Surge arrester .......................................................................................................... 15
7.5 Earthing................................................................................................................... 15

iii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Ratings of reclosers for medium voltage....................................................... 3

< Table 2 > Ratings of sectionalizers................................................................................ 7
< Table 3 > Ratings of load break switch ......................................................................... 9
< Table 4 > Admissible voltage levels of capacitor.........................................................11
< Table 5 > Ratings of fuse link ..................................................................................... 12
< Table 6 > Ratings of bypass switch ............................................................................. 15

iv
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Operation sequence of recloser ....................................................................... 4

[Figure 2] Installation example of control cabinet ........................................................... 5
[Figure 3] Operation of sectionalizer ............................................................................... 8
[Figure 4] SVR on existing feeder.................................................................................. 13
[Figure 5] SVR on important branch line....................................................................... 14
[Figure 6] SVR to serve a remotely located load ........................................................... 14

v
 LIST OF APPENDICES

A References ······································································································· 16
B Overhead devices assembly ············································································ 17
C Power factor correction ··················································································· 25
D Example ··········································································································· 27

vi
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

1. Scope

This standard applies to overhead distribution devices such as automatic circuit recloser,
automatic circuit sectionalizer, load break switch, shunt power capacitor and step voltage
regulator for 11kV and 30kV.

2. Definitions

Switching device
A device designed to make or break the current in one or more electric circuits.
Breaking current
The current in a pole of a switching device or in a fuse at the instant of initiation of the
arc during a breaking process.
Making current
The value of the major loop of the current in a pole of a switch during the transient
period following the initiation of current during a making operation.
Auto-reclosing
The operating sequence of a mechanical switching device whereby, following its
opening, it closes automatically after a predetermined time.
Dead time
Time between the instant that the current is interrupted by the automatic circuit recloser
and the instant the contacts of the automatic circuit recloser close as a result of
automatic reclose operation.
Reclaim time
The time that must elapses after a successful auto-reclose of a recloser, in order that
another auto-reclosing sequence can be initiated.
Operation sequence
A succession of specified operations with specified time intervals.

3. Automatic Circuit Recloser

An automatic circuit recloser (hereinafter referred as a recloser) is a self-controlled

device with the necessary circuit intelligence to sense overcurrents, to time and interrupt
the overcurrents, and to reclose automatically to re-energize the line. If the fault should be
permanent, the recloser will lock out after a preset number of operations and thus isolate
the faulted section from the main part of the system.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

3.1 Preferred line for installation

The recloser shall be installed on preferred line in terms of several factors.
(a) Load density : High load density line > Low load density line
(b) Customers : Line which feeds more important customers > Line which feeds less
important customers
(c) Interruptions : Frequently interrupted line > Uninterrupted line
(d) Line length : Longer line > shorter line

3.2 Physical location of sectionalizing devices

Many things should be considered when determining the best physical location for
sectionalizing devices such as reclosers, automatic circuit sectionalizers and load break
switches. Choose physical locations that are accessible to field personnel and that allow
safe operation of the devices.
The location should :
(a) Have adequate room for a service truck to park and operate the device.
(b) Allow a person driving down the road to see whether a protective device has
operated, or if a switch is open or closed, without having to turn off the main road.
(c) Avoid locations along a road that have sharp curves and narrow shoulders.
(d) Not require a lengthy time to access, such as a field, in a swamp, behind a locked
gate for which workers may not have a key, etc.
(e) Take advantage of existing double-deadended to reduce the installation expense.
(f) Avoid poles where much of the available pole space is occupied by other equipment.

3.3 Application factors

Below factors must be considered for proper application of reclosers to be installed on
the distribution line.
(a) System voltage
The system voltage will be known and the recloser must have a voltage rating equal
to or greater than nominal system voltage.
(b) Maximum load current
The rated normal current of the recloser must be equal to or greater than the
maximum load current anticipated for the circuit.
(c) Maximum fault current
The maximum fault current will be known or can be calculated. The short circuit
breaking current of the recloser must be equal to or greater than the maximum
available fault current.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

(d) Minimum fault current

The minimum fault current might occur at the end of the line section to be protected
must be checked to determine that the recloser will sense and interrupt this current.
(e) Coordination with other protective devices
Coordination with other protective devices becomes important after the first four
application factors are satisfied. Proper selection of time delays and sequences is
vital to ensure that any temporary interruption or longer outage due to faults is
restricted to the smallest possible section of the system.

3.4 Ratings
Three phase reclosers to be installed on overhead distribution lines have ratings which
are listed in table 1.

< Table 1 > Ratings of reclosers for medium voltage

Recloser
Nominal system
voltage(kV) Rated voltage Rated short circuit Rated normal
(kV) breaking current(kA) current(A)

11 12 12.5 400

30 36 16 630

3.5 Installation height

The minimum height from ground to bottom of recloser shall be 5m.

3.6 Operation sequence

Most faults on overhead distribution systems are likely to be temporary in nature and
last only a few cycles to a few seconds at the most. Reclosers, with their trip and reclose
capability, eliminate prolonged outages on distribution systems due to temporary faults or
transient overcurrent conditions. To accomplish these functions, recloser has trips to
lockout sequence. Recloser can be set for different operation sequences and the number of
trips to lockout is selectable between 1 and 4. Assuming that the number of trip to lockout
is 4, operation sequence of recloser is described in [Figure] 1.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

Fault current
ⓐ ⓒ ⓔ ⓖ

Load current

Fault ⓑ ⓓ ⓕ ⓗ
initiated Lockout

Dead time(Reclosing interval)

Time

ⓐ If the fault occurs, the recloser senses the fault and trips.

ⓑ After first dead time, the recloser closes.

ⓒ If the fault is not eliminated at first reclosing operation, the recloser trips
i
ⓓ After second dead time, the recloser closes again.

ⓔ If the fault is not eliminated at first reclosing operation, the recloser trips

ⓕ After third dead time, the recloser closes once more.

ⓖ, ⓗ If the fault is not eliminated, the recloser trips to lockout.

※ If the fault is eliminated during operation sequence of recloser,

operation sequence resets after reclaim time elapses and operation
sequence starts newly.

[Figure 1] Operation sequence of recloser

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

3.7 Surge Arrester

Surge arresters shall be installed on both source side and load side of recloser to protect
the recloser from surge. For more information refer to GDG0600 (Insulation coordination).

3.8 Earthing
The enclosures of recloser shall be earthed by earthing wire and the enclosure of control
cabinet shall be connected to earthing wire too. For more information refer to GDG0300
(Earthing).

3.9 Control cabinet

Control cabinet shall be installed on the pole to control the recloser on site. When
control cabinet is installed, below considerations should be taken into.
(a) The height from ground to bottom of control cabinet shall not be less than 3.5m to
prevent pedestrians from unauthorized operation or being injured by collision.
(b) When the recloser is installed on the pole beside road, the control cabinet shall be
installed on the position to prevent from car collision.

Control Control
cabinet cabinet

Road
Road

(a)(a)
× ○ (b) ○

[Figure 2] Installation example of control cabinet

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

3.10 Auxiliary power supply

When reclosers need external auxiliary power supply instead of internal primary
batteries, power source is supplied from low voltage distribution line connected to external
distribution transformer. The power shall be supplied by the source side transformer of
recloser so that external power may not be lost in case of interruptions.

4. Automatic Circuit Sectionalizer

An automatic circuit sectionalizer (hereinafter referred as a sectionalizer) is a

protective device that automatically isolates faulted sections of line from a distribution
system. A sectionalizer is normally applied in conjunction with a backup recloser or
breaker.

4.1 Application factors

(a) System voltage
The system voltage will be known and the sectionalizer must have a voltage rating
equal to or greater than nominal system voltage.
(b) Maximum load current
The rated normal current of the sectionalizer should be equal to or greater than the
maximum load current anticipated for the circuit.
(c) Maximum fault current
The maximum fault current will be known or can be calculated, and rated short-time
withstand current of the sectionalizer must be equal to or greater than the maximum
available fault current.
(d) Coordination with other protective devices
Coordination with other protective devices is an important factor. At this point, trips
to lockout of the backup device and memory time of the sectionalizer become prime
considerations.

4.2 Ratings
Three phase sectionalizers to be installed on overhead distribution lines have ratings
which are listed in table 1.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

< Table 2 > Ratings of sectionalizers

Sectionalizer
Nominal system
voltage(kV) Rated voltage Rated short-time Rated normal
(kV) withstand current(kA) current(A)
11 12 12.5 400

30 36 16 630

4.3 Operation sequence

A sectionalizer does not have any fault-interrupting capability of its own. Rather, it
counts the operations of the backup device during fault conditions and after a preset
number of current-interrupting operations and while the backup device is open, the
sectionalizer opens to isolate the faulted section of the line. Assuming that the recloser has
4 trips to lockout, the sectionalizer should be set to lock out in one less operation than the
backup device, recloser. When the permanent fault occurs at the load side of the
sectionalizer, the operation sequence of the sectionalizer is described in [Figure 3].

4.4 Installation height

The minimum height from ground to bottom of recloser shall be 5m.

4.5 Surge arrester

Surge arresters shall be installed on both source side and load side of sectionalizer to
protect from surge. For more information, refer to GDG0600 (Insulation coordination).

4.6 Earthing
The enclosures of sectionalizer shall be earthed by earthing wire and the enclosure of
control cabinet shall be connected to earthing wire too. For more information, refer to
GDG0300 (Earthing).

4.7 Control cabinet

When control cabinet is installed, below considerations should be taken into account.
(a) The height from ground to bottom of control cabinet shall not be less than 3.5m to
prevent pedestrians from unauthorized operation.
(b) When the recloser is installed on the pole beside road, the control cabinet shall be
installed to prevent from car collision.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

Recloser Sectionalizer

S/S

Permanent fault

Fault current Second count

ⓐ ⓒ ⓔ

Load current ⓓ ⓕ
ⓑ

Fault
initiated
First sectionalizer count Third count

ⓐ If the fault occurs, the recloser senses the fault and trips.

ⓑ The Sectionalizer senses no current and counts first time.

ⓒ If the fault is not eliminated, the recloser trips again.

ⓓ The Sectionalizer senses no current and counts second time.

ⓔ If the fault is not eliminated, the recloser trips again.

ⓕ The sectionalizer senses no current and count third time. At third

count, the sectionalizer opens and eliminates faulted section, as a
result the recloser successfully recloses.

※ If the fault is temporary and is eliminated during first or second trip

of recloser, the sectionalizer doesn’t operate.

[Figure 3] Operation of sectionalizer

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

5. Load Break Switch

A load break switch is installed on overhead distribution line to switch on and off load
current and it does not have an ability to interrupt the fault current.

5.1 Installation location

(a) Interconnection point with other distribution feeder
(b) Main line sectionalizing point
(c) Where frequent switch on and off occurs
(d) Where branch line tees off main line
(e) When overhead line meets underground line

5.2 Application factors

The following factors should be considered when applying the load break switch.
(a) System voltage
The system voltage will be known and the load break switch must have a voltage
rating equal to or greater than nominal system voltage
(b) Maximum load current
The rated normal current of the load break switch should be equal to or greater than
the maximum load current anticipated for the circuit.
(c) Maximum fault current
The maximum fault current will be known or can be calculated, and rated short-time
withstand current of the load break switch should be equal to or greater than the
maximum fault current.

5.3 Ratings
The ratings of the load break switch are listed in table 3.

< Table 3 > Ratings of load break switch

Load break switch

Nominal system
voltage(kV) Rated voltage Rated short-time Rated normal
(kV) withstand current(kA) current(A)
11 12 12.5 400

30 36 16 630

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

5.4 Installation height

The minimum height from ground to bottom of recloser shall be 5m.

5.5 Surge arrester

Surge arresters shall be installed on both source side and load side of the load break
switch to protect from surge. For more information, refer to GDG0600 (Insulation
coordination).

5.6 Earthing
The enclosures of the load break switch shall be earthed by earthing wire. For more
information, refer to GDG0300 (Earthing).

6. Shunt Power Capacitor

Shunt power capacitors provide some benefits to distribution system performance. The
benefits shunt power capacitors provide are as followings.
(a) Increased system capacity
The addition of shunt power capacitors reduce the kilovoltampere loading on the
system, thereby releasing capacity that can be used to supply future load increases.
(b) Reduced system power loss
The installation of shunt power capacitors can reduce current flow through the
system from the point of the capacitor back to the generation. Since power losses are
proportional to the square of the current, a reduction of current flow results in a
much greater reduction of power losses.
(c) Voltage control
Applying capacitors to a system will result in a voltage rise in the system from the
point of installation back to the generation. In a system with lagging power factor,
this occurs because capacitors may reduce the amount of reactive current carried in
the system, thus decreasing the amount of resistive and reactive voltage drop in the
system.

6.1 Application factors

6.1.1. Rated voltage

The rated voltage of the capacitor should be not less than the maximum operating
voltage of the network to which the capacitor is to be connected.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

6.1.2. Maximum permissible voltage

Capacitor unit shall be suitable for operation at voltage levels according to table 1.

< Table 4 > Admissible voltage levels of capacitor

Maximum permissible voltage Maximum duration

1.00×UN Continuous

1.10×UN 8H in every 24H

1.15×UN 30 Min in every 24H

1.20×UN 5Min

1.30×UN 1Min
※ UN : Rated voltage of a capacitor

6.1.3. Maximum permissible current

Capacitor units shall be suitable for continuous operation at an r.m.s. current of 1.3 times
current that occurs at rated voltage and rated frequency. Depending on the actual
capacitance value, which may be a maximum of 1.1 times rated capacitance, the maximum
current can reach 1.43 times rated current of capacitor.

6.2 Locating capacitors

To obtain the optimum benefit of shunt power capacitor applications on the distribution
system, the capacitors should be located where they produce the maximum loss reduction,
provide the maximum voltage benefits, and are as close to the load as possible. When this
is not practical, “rules of thumb” have been utilized for locating capacitors.
(a) For uniformly distributed loads, the capacitor should be placed two-thirds of the
distance from the substation.
(b) For uniformly decreasing distributed loads, the capacitor should be placed one-half
of the distance from the substation.
(c) For maximum voltage rise, the capacitor should be placed near the end of the line.

6.3 Installation height

The minimum height from ground to bottom of recloser shall be 5m.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

6.4 Earthing
The enclosures of the load break switch shall be earthed by earthing wire. For more
information, refer to GDG0300 (Earthing).

6.5 Protective devices

(a) Surge arrester
Surge arrester shall be installed to protect capacitor from surge on the primary side of
capacitor. For more information, refer to GDG0600 (Insulation coordination).
(b) Expulsion fuse cutout
For fuseless type capacitor, expulsion fuse cutout shall be installed on the primary
side of the capacitor and rated current of fuse link for each capacity of capacitor is as
following.

< Table 5 > Ratings of fuse link

Nominal system 3-Phase Bank
Rated current of fuse link(A)
voltage(kV) capacitor capacity(kVAR)

150 10

300 20

11 450 31.5

600 40

900 63

150 3

300 8

30 450 10

600 16

900 20

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

7. Step Voltage Regulator

There are several ways to control steady state voltage of the distribution line. Installing a
step voltage regulator (herein after referred as SVR) is one of several alternatives to solve
voltage drop problem. SVR regulates voltage from 10% above to 10% below line voltage.

7.1 Application factor

Two factors are necessary to select a step voltage regulator.
(a) System voltage
Rated voltage of SVR shall be equal to or higher than nominal system voltage.
(b) Maximum load current
Rated current of SVR shall be equal to or higher than the maximum load current at the
place than SVR is going to be installed.

7.2 Where to apply

7.2.1. On existing feeders with voltage drop problems
This is a common application of SVR. They are installed before the point the voltage
drop problem starts under heavy load conditions. By installing SVR, the voltage could be
boosted, therefore voltage drop problem on existing feeder could be solved.
SVR1 SVR2
OLTC

Load1 Load2 Load3 Load4 Load5

Maximum
Voltage

Nominal
Voltage

Minimum
voltage

[Figure 4] SVR on existing feeder

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

7.2.2. On important branch lines

OLTC
(1) (2)
SVR

Load A Load B

[Figure 5] SVR on important branch line

Important branch lines from a main feeder can be effectively controlled with SVR. This
is not possible with a single on-load-tap-changing transformer for the following reason. If
branch (1) is short and branch (2) is long, the transformer has to be set for maximum boost
to support Load B’s voltage. Load A will experience an undesirable overvoltage. The
solution is to install SVR on branch line (2). Now, the transformer tap can be set to a lower
value and the overvoltage can be avoided.

7.2.3. To serve a remotely located load

SVR
OLTC

Load1 Load2 Load3

Maximum
Voltage
Nominal
Voltage

Minimum
voltage

[Figure 6] SVR to serve a remotely located load

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

Dispersed, remotely located loads present another problem. Even though remotely
located customers experience voltage drop, the construction of a new substation might cost
too much. These types of loads can be economically served by extending the existing
feeder and installing voltage regulators to correct the voltage drop in the extension.

7.3 Bypass switch

Bypass switch shall be installed to disconnect SVR from the line when SVR needs to be
inspected closely or replaced. The ratings of bypass switch are listed in below table.

< Table 6 > Ratings of bypass switch

Bypass switch
Nominal system
voltage(kV) Rated voltage Rated short-time Rated normal
(kV) withstand current(kA) current(A)
11 12 12.5 400

30 36 16 630

7.4 Surge arrester

Surge arrester shall be installed on both source side and load side of SVR to protect from
surge. For more information, refer to GDG0600 (Insulation coordination).

7.5 Earthing
The enclosures of SVR shall be earthed by earthing wire and the enclosure of control
cabinet shall be connected to earthing wire too. For more information, refer to GDG0300
(Earthing).

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

Appendix A : References

IEC60059 IEC standard current ratings

IEC60265-1 High voltage switches - Part 1 : Switches for rated voltage above 1kV
and less than 52kV
IEC60282-2 High voltage fuses – Part2 : Expulsion fuses
IEC60549 High voltage fuses for the external protection of shunt power capacitor
IEC60871-1 Shunt capacitor for a.c. power systems having a rated voltage above
1000V – Part1 : General-Performance, testing and rating- Safety
requirements-Guide for installation and operation
IEC60871-3 Shunt capacitor for a.c. power systems having a rated voltage above
1000V - Part3 : Protection of shunt capacitors and shunt capacitor banks
IEEE Std18 IEEE standards for shunt power capacitors
IEEE C37.60 High voltage switchgear and controlgear – Parr111 : Overhead, pad-
mounted, dry vault and submersible automatic circuit reclosers and fault
interrupters for alternating current systems up to 38kV
IEEE C37.63 IEEE standard requirements for overhead, pad-mounted, dry-vault and
submersible automatic line sectionalizers for AC systems.
IEEE C57.15 IEEE standard requirements, terminology and test code for step voltage
regulators

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

Appendix B : Overhead Device Assembly

1. Automatic circuit recloser

1800mm

200mm 150mm 150mm 400mm 150mm 2

200mm
1

400mm
700mm
4

700mm
100mm

a. Front view

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

1 4

200mm

3 400mm
2 700mm

400mm
700mm

b. Profile view

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 L-type crossarm 12200 3 4 Surge arrester 30710 6
2 Suspension insulator 14001 12 5 Recloser 34160 1
3 Pin type insulator 14211 3 6 Wood pole 10110 1

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

2. Automatic circuit sectionalizer

1800mm

200mm 150mm 150mm 400mm 150mm 2

200mm
1

400mm
700mm
4

700mm
100mm

a. Front view

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

1 4

200mm

400mm
2 700mm

3 400mm
700mm

b. Profile view

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 L-type crossarm 12200 3 4 Surge arrester 30710 6
2 Suspension insulator 14001 12 5 Sectionalizer 34170 1
3 Pin type insulator 14211 3 6 Wood pole 10110 1

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

3. Load break switch

1800mm

200mm 150mm 400mm 150mm 150mm

3

200mm
1

400mm

2
700mm

a. Front view

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

1 3

200mm

400mm
700mm
2

b. Profile view

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 L-type crossarm 12200 2 4 Load break switch 34150 1
2 Suspension insulator 14001 12 5 Wood pole 10110 1
3 Surge arrester 30710 6

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

4. Capacitor

2 200mm

400mm
3

700mm
1

700mm
4

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 L-type crossarm 12200 2 4 DOS 34910 3
2 Pin type insulator 14211 3 5 Capacitor bank 48112 1
3 Surge arrester 30710 3 6 Wood pole 10110 1

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

5. Step voltage regulator

1 2

No Material Spec. No Quantity No Material Spec. No Quantity

1 Composite insulator 14002 3 5 Bypass switch 34190 3
2 Pin type insulator 14211 6 6 U-type crossarm 12007 2
3 Surge arrester 30710 3 7 Wood pole 10110 4
4 L-type crossarm 12200 2 8 SVR 26225 3

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

Appendix C : Power Factor Correction

To calculate the capacitive kVAR necessary to correct a new, higher factor, one must
subtract the inductive kVAR of the new power factor from the old power factor, The
difference is the amount of capacitive kVAR to be added to the system. The following
formula is a convenient way of doing this :
kVAR=kW[tan(cos -1 PFold)– tan(cos -1 PFnew)]
where
kW is the system kilowatt load
kVAR is the amount of capacitive kilovar to be added

Below table is a chart that may be used in place of this formula. Simply find the column
corresponding to the existing system power factor and the row corresponding to the
corrected new power factor. The number located where these intersect should be multiplied
by the system kilowatt load to the total capacitive kilovar necessary to correct to the new
power factor.

< Table > Power factor correction kilowatt multipliers

Corrected power

0.85 0.86 0.87 0.88 0.89 0.90 0.91 0.92 0.93 0.94 0.95 0.96 0.97 0.98 0.99

0.71 0.372 0.399 0.425 0.452 0.480 0.508 0.536 0.566 0.597 0.629 0.663 0.700 0.741 0.789 0.849
0.72 0.344 0.371 0.397 0.424 0.452 0.480 0.508 0.538 0.569 0.601 0.635 0.672 0.713 0.761 0.821
0.73 0.316 0.343 0.369 0.396 0.424 0.452 0.480 0.510 0.541 0.573 0.607 0.644 0.685 0.733 0.793
0.74 0.289 0.316 0.342 0.369 0.397 0.425 0.453 0.483 0.514 0.546 0.580 0.617 0.658 0.706 0.766
0.75 0.262 0.289 0.315 0.342 0.370 0.398 0.426 0.456 0.487 0.519 0.553 0.590 0.631 0.679 0.739
0.76 0.235 0.262 0.288 0.315 0.343 0.371 0.399 0.429 0.460 0.492 0.526 0.563 0.604 0.652 0.712
0.77 0.209 0.236 0.262 0.289 0.317 0.345 0.373 0.403 0.434 0.466 0.500 0.537 0.578 0.626 0.685
0.78 0.182 0.209 0.235 0.262 0.290 0.318 0.346 0.376 0.407 0.439 0.473 0.510 0.551 0.599 0.659
0.79 0.156 0.183 0.209 0.236 0.264 0.292 0.320 0.350 0.381 0.413 0.447 0.484 0.525 0.573 0.633
0.80 0.130 0.157 0.183 0.210 0.238 0.266 0.294 0.324 0.355 0.387 0.421 0.458 0.499 0.547 0.609
0.81 0.104 0.131 0.157 0.184 0.212 0.240 0.268 0.298 0.329 0.361 0.395 0.432 0.473 0.521 0.581
0.82 0.078 0.105 0.131 0.158 0.186 0.214 0.242 0.272 0.303 0.335 0.369 0.406 0.447 0.495 0.555
0.83 0.052 0.079 0.105 0.132 0.160 0.188 0.216 0.246 0.277 0.309 0.343 0.380 0.421 0.469 0.529
0.84 0.026 0.053 0.079 0.106 0.134 0.162 0.190 0.220 0.251 0.283 0.317 0.354 0.395 0.443 0.503
0.85 0.027 0.053 0.080 0.108 0.136 0.164 0.194 0.225 0.257 0.291 0.328 0.369 0.417 0.477
0.86 0.026 0.053 0.081 0.109 0.137 0.167 0.198 0.230 0.264 0.301 0.342 0.390 0.450
0.87 0.027 0.055 0.083 0.111 0.141 0.172 0.204 0.238 0.275 0.316 0.364 0.424
0.88 0.028 0.056 0.084 0.114 0.145 0.177 0.211 0.248 0.289 0.337 0.397
0.89 0.028 0.056 0.086 0.117 0.149 0.183 0.220 0.261 0.309 0.369
0.90 0.028 0.058 0.089 0.121 0.155 0.192 0.233 0.281 0.341
0.91 0.030 0.061 0.093 0.127 0.164 0.205 0.253 0.313
0.92 0.031 0.063 0.097 0.134 0.175 0.223 0.283
0.93 0.032 0.066 0.103 0.144 0.192 0.252
0.94 0.034 0.071 0.112 0.160 0.220
0.95 0.037 0.079 0.126 0.186
0.96 0.041 0.089 0.149
0.97 0.048 0.108
0.98 0.060
0.99

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

For example, if the power factor of 11kV line with 1,100kW and power factor is 0.85 is
to be enhanced to new power factor 0.9, what size of capacitor should be installed?

Because new power factor is 0.9 and old power factor is 0.85, row value is 0.9 and
column value is 0.85. Therefore, power factor correction kilowatt multiplier i.e. the
intersected number is 0.136.
Capacitive kVAR which is needed to correct power factor is calculated by the below
formula.

kVAR=kWⅹ Power factor correction kilowatt multipliers

=1100ⅹ0.136
=149.6

150kVAR capacitor can correct power factor from 0.85 to 0.9.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 / 27 Version 1.0
 Overhead Devices for Medium Voltage

Appendix D : Example

One 11kV line supplies 1,600kW power and the power factor of the line is 0.8. If
300kVAR capacitor bank is installed on the line, how much is the power factor after
installation.

When the power factor is 0.8, cos θ = 0.8 sin θ = 0.6

P=1,600kW
S1=1600/0.8=2000kVA
Q1 = S1ⅹ sin θ =1,200kVAR

1600kW

Q1=1200kVAR
S1=2000kVA

If the 300kVAR(Q) capacitor bank is installed on the line,

1600kW

S2=1836kVA
Q2=900kVAR

S1=2000kVA
Q=300kVAR

Therefore corrected power factor is cos θ =1600/1836=0.87

By installing 300kVA capacitor, power factor is corrected to 0.87.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 / 27 Version 1.0
 GDO 1500
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Clearance

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ............................................................................................................. 1
2. Definitions .................................................................................................... 1
3. Conductor to Ground Clearance ............................................................... 2
3.1. Roadway .................................................................................................................. 2
3.2. Pedestrian way ......................................................................................................... 3
3.3. Other land accessible by vehicle.............................................................................. 4
4. Conductor to Structure Clearance............................................................. 4
4.1. Roofs readily accessible to persons ......................................................................... 4
4.2. Roofs, projection not readily accessible to persons ................................................. 5
4.3. Windows, verandas and balconies readily accessible to persons............................. 6
4.4. Walls not readily accessible to persons.................................................................... 6
4.5. Street light pole and traffic light pole ...................................................................... 7
4.6. Radio and TV antennas ............................................................................................ 8
4.7. Swimming area ........................................................................................................ 8
4.8. Railroad.................................................................................................................... 8
5. Support to Other Objects ........................................................................... 9
5.1. Railroad.................................................................................................................... 9
5.2. Fire hydrant.............................................................................................................. 9
6. Low Voltage Line Installed on the Wall .................................................. 10
7. Conductor to Tree Clearance ................................................................... 10
8. Different Level Conductor on Same Support......................................... 11
9. Conductor to Conductor on Different Supports .................................... 12
9.1. Horizontal clearance .............................................................................................. 12
9.2. Vertical clearance ................................................................................................... 13
10. Conductor to Communication Line....................................................... 14
11. Deflection.................................................................................................. 15

ii
12. Clearance of 66kV lines .......................................................................... 17
12.1. Vertical clearance ................................................................................................. 17
12.2. Horizontal clearance ............................................................................................ 17

iii
 LIST OF TABLES
< Table 1 > Vertical clearance above roadway ................................................................. 2
< Table 2 > Vertical clearance above pedestrian way....................................................... 3
< Table 3 > Vertical clearance above other land............................................................... 4
< Table 4 > Vertical clearance above roofs readily accessible ......................................... 4
< Table 5 > Vertical clearance above roofs, projection not readily accessible ................. 5
< Table 6 > Clearance from windows, verandas, balconies readily accessible ................ 6
< Table 7 > Horizontal clearance from walls readily accessible ...................................... 6
< Table 8 > Clearance from street light and traffic light .................................................. 7
< Table 9 > Clearance from antennas ............................................................................... 8
< Table 10 > Vertical clearance of low voltage line installed on the wall ...................... 10
< Table 11 > Clearance from tree ................................................................................... 10
< Table 12 > Horizontal clearance between different supports ...................................... 12
< Table 13 > Vertical clearance between different supports........................................... 13
< Table 14 > Conductor to communication line clearance ............................................. 14
< Table 15 > Horizontal deflection................................................................................. 15
< Table 16 > Vertical deflection...................................................................................... 16

iv
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Clearance diagram for building ....................................................................... 1

[Figure 2] Transitional clearance...................................................................................... 2
[Figure 3] Vertical clearance above roadway ................................................................... 3
[Figure 4] Vertical clearance above pedestrian way ......................................................... 3
[Figure 5] Vertical clearance above roofs readily accessible ........................................... 5
[Figure 6] Vertical clearance above roofs not readily accessible ..................................... 5
[Figure 7] Horizontal clearance from windows readily accessible .................................. 6
[Figure 8] Horizontal clearance from walls not readily accessible .................................. 7
[Figure 9] Clearance from street light .............................................................................. 7
[Figure 10] Clearance from antennas ............................................................................... 8
[Figure 11] Clearance from railroad ................................................................................. 9
[Figure 12] Clearance from fire hydrant........................................................................... 9
[Figure 13] Vertical clearance of low voltage line installed on the wall ........................ 10
[Figure 14] Clearance from trees.....................................................................................11
[Figure 15] Clearance between 11kV and 0.4kV conductor ...........................................11
[Figure 16] Horizontal clearance between different supports ........................................ 13
[Figure 17] Vertical clearance between different supports ............................................. 14

v
 LIST OF APPENDICES

A References ······································································································· 17
B Clearance Envelope ························································································ 18
C Design Example ······························································································ 20

vi
 Clearance

1. Scope

This standard applies to overhead distribution line clearance ranging from low voltage
0.4kV to 66kV. The clearance of 66kV transmission lines are provided in clause 12.

2. Definitions

Clearance is the distance that should be maintained from conductor to ground or

structures such as house etc. Horizontal clearance is the distance maintained horizontally
and vertical clearance is the distance maintained vertically. Transitional clearance applies
when there is a transition from a vertical clearance to a horizontal clearance. Unless
otherwise stated, all clearances are distance from surface to surface and minimum
clearances that should be maintained.

T T
V

H H

V V T
T

H H

Regions where Controlling

conductors are prohibited clearance

V Vertical

H Horizontal

T Transitional

[Figure 1] Clearance diagram for building

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

The transitional clearance is a radius that extends from the edge of a structure. This
radius is equal to the horizontal or vertical clearance that has the greatest dimension. In
other words, transitional clearance becomes vertical clearance if vertical clearance is
greater than horizontal clearance and transitional clearance becomes horizontal clearance if
horizontal clearance is greater than vertical clearance.

T V
V
T

H Building
H Building

Transitional = Horizontal Transitional = Vertical

(a) if H > V (b) if V > H

[Figure 2] Transitional clearance

3. Conductor to Ground Clearance

3.1. Roadway
When conductors cross roadway, the clearances are as follows.

< Table 1 > Vertical clearance above roadway

Voltage Crossing clearance(m)
0.4kV 6.0
11kV 6.5
30kV 6.5

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

Clearance

Roadway

[Figure 3] Vertical clearance above roadway

3.2. Pedestrian way

Vertical clearances over spaces and ways accessible to pedestrians are listed in below
table.

< Table 2 > Vertical clearance above pedestrian way

Voltage Clearance(m)
0.4kV 4.0
11kV 4.5
30kV 4.5

Pedestrian way

Clearance

Roadway

[Figure 4] Vertical clearance above pedestrian way

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

3.3. Other land accessible by vehicle

Vertical clearance for land(other than roadway) accessible by vehicle is as follows. This
includes alley, orchards, farmlands, pasture etc.

< Table 3 > Vertical clearance above other land

Voltage Clearance(m)
0.4kV 4.5
11kV 5.0
30kV 5.0

4. Conductor to Structure Clearance

Clause 4 is applicable to medium voltage line and low voltage line except low voltage
line installed on the wall using T-wall crossarms. As for low voltage line installed on the
wall using the T-wall crossarms, refer to clause 6.

4.1. Roofs readily accessible to persons

A roof is readily accessible to persons if it can be casually accessed through a doorway,
window and stairway by a person on foot who neither exerts extraordinary physical effort
nor employs special tools or devices to gain entry. The clearances from conductors to roofs
readily accessible to persons are listed in table.

< Table 4 > Vertical clearance above roofs readily accessible

Voltage Vertical clearance(m)

0.4kV 3.0[2.5] *

11kV 3.5

30kV 3.5
* From now on, [ ] indicates the clearance value only for low voltage aerial bundled cable. For
example, when we see the above table the vertical clearance for 0.4kV is 3.0[2.5]m. Then the
clearance for low voltage ABC is 2.5m and the insulated conductor other than LV ABC is 3.0m.
If the clearance for LV ABC is not specified, the clearance for low voltage line is only one. It
means the clearances for LV ABC and other insulated conductors are same.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

11 or 30kV
0.4kV
3.5m 3.0[2.5]m

[Figure 5] Vertical clearance above roofs readily accessible

4.2. Roofs, projection not readily accessible to persons

< Table 5 > Vertical clearance above roofs, projection not readily accessible
Voltage Vertical clearance(m)
0.4kV 2.5[1.5]
11kV 3.0
30kV 3.0
11kV or 30kV
0.4kV
3.0m 2.5[1.5]m

[Figure 6] Vertical clearance above roofs not readily accessible

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

4.3. Windows, verandas and balconies readily accessible to persons

Horizontal clearance from windows, verandas and balconies readily accessible to
conductors are listed in table 8.

< Table 6 > Clearance from windows, verandas, balconies readily accessible

Voltage Horizontal clearance(m)

0.4kV 1.5[0.5]

11kV 2.0

30kV 2.0

0.4kV

1.5[0.5]m

2.0m
11kV or 30kV

[Figure 7] Horizontal clearance from windows readily accessible

4.4. Walls not readily accessible to persons

Horizontal clearance from walls not readily accessible to conductors is listed in table 9.

< Table 7 > Horizontal clearance from walls readily accessible

Voltage Horizontal clearance(m)

0.4kV 1.0[0.3]

11kV 1.5

30kV 1.5

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

0.4kV
1.0[0.3]m

1.5m
11kV or 30kV

[Figure 8] Horizontal clearance from walls not readily accessible

4.5. Street light pole and traffic light pole

The clearances from street light pole and traffic light pole in any direction are as follows.

< Table 8 > Clearance from street light and traffic light

Voltage Vertical clearance(m) Horizontal clearance(m)

0.4kV 0.5[0.3] 0.5[0.3]

11kV 1.0 1.0

30kV 1.0 1.0

0.4kV 0.5[0.3]m

11kV or 30kV 1.0m

[Figure 9] Clearance from street light

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

4.6. Radio and TV antennas

< Table 9 > Clearance from antennas

Voltage Horizontal clearance Vertical clearance(m)

0.4kV 1.0[0.5] 1.0[0.5]

11kV 1.5 2.5

30kV 1.5 2.5

11kV or 30kV
2.5m
0.4kV
1.0[0.5]m
1.0[0.5]m

1.5m

[Figure 10] Clearance from antennas

4.7. Swimming area

Conductors shall not pass over swimming area and the horizontal clearance from in any
direction from conductor, support or any part of equipment attached on support shall not be
less than 7m.

4.8. Railroad
Overhead conductor crossing over rail road shall be avoided if possible. When it is
inevitable to cross the railroad, the minimum clearance over rail road is 7m.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

Conductor

7m

[Figure 11] Clearance from railroad

5. Support to Other Objects

5.1. Railroad
Where railroad are parallel to support, all portions of supporting structures shall have
horizontal clearance not less than 3.5m from the nearest track.

5.2. Fire hydrant

The support shall be installed away from fire hydrant not less than 1m.

1m

[Figure 12] Clearance from fire hydrant

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

6. Low Voltage Line Installed on the Wall

This clearance applies to low voltage line installed on the wall using T-wall crossarms.
< Table 10 > Vertical clearance of low voltage line installed on the wall

Structure Vertical clearance(m)

Ground 2.5

Top of the building readily accessible 0.5[0.3]

Top of the building not readily accessible 0.2

0.5[0.3]m or
0.2m
0.4kV

2.5m

[Figure 13] Vertical clearance of low voltage line installed on the wall

7. Conductor to Tree Clearance

The clearances in all direction from tree are listed in below table.

< Table 11 > Clearance from tree

Clearance(m)
Voltage
X Y T
0.4kV 0.5[0.3] 0.5[0.3] 0.5[0.3]
11kV 1.0 1.0 1.0
30kV 1.0 1.0 1.0

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

X : Clearance from trees growing from the side of the line

Y : Clearance from trees growing underneath the line
T : Clearance from tree overhangs

X X

Conductor
Y

[Figure 14] Clearance from trees

8. Different Level Conductor on Same Support

The clearance from 11kV conductor to 0.4kV conductor on the same pole shall be not
less than 1.5m.

1.5m

[Figure 15] Clearance between 11kV and 0.4kV conductor

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

9. Conductor to Conductor on Different Supports

Clearances from conductors that originate from different supports are listed below. The
minimum clearance of conductors will be determined by the characteristics of a clearance
envelope around each conductor.

Closest allowable position of conductor No. 2

V V

H
H V H
Conductor No. 1
Conductor No. 1
Conductor No. 1

if H>V if H=V if H<V

[Figure 15] Clearance envelope

9.1. Horizontal clearance

The horizontal clearance between crossing or adjacent conductors carried on different
supporting structures shall be no less than 1.5m.

< Table 12 > Horizontal clearance between different supports

Conductor 1 Conductor 2 Clearance(m)
0.4kV 1.5
0.4kV 11kV 1.5
30kV 1.5
11kV 1.5
11kV
30kV 1.5
30kV 30kV 1.5

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

Clearance

Conductor 1
Conductor 2

[Figure 16] Horizontal clearance between different supports

9.2. Vertical clearance

The vertical clearance between any crossing or adjacent conductors carried on different
supporting structures shall be not less than shown in below table.

< Table 13 > Vertical clearance between different supports

Lower conductor Upper conductor Clearance(m)

0.4kV 0.5

0.4kV 11kV 0.5

30kV 0.5

11kV 1.0
11kV
30kV 1.0

30kV 30kV 1.0

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

Upper conductors

Vertical clearance

Lower conductors

[Figure 17] Vertical clearance between different supports

10. Conductor to Communication Line

It is a rule not to install both power conductor and communication line on electric pole,
but when it is inevitable to use the same pole, the clearance shall be as following.

< Table 14 > Conductor to communication line clearance

Voltage Clearance(m)

0.4kV (including service drop) 0.75

11kV, 30kV 1.5

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

11. Deflection

Horizontal deflection and vertical deflection are calculated assuming that wind velocity
is 18m/s (mean value of maximum wind velocity) and the wind is acting perpendicular to
the conductor. Also, sag of conductor is based on GDS0500 (Overhead conductor for
medium voltage) clause 7.

< Table 15 > Horizontal deflection

unit:m

Voltage Conductor Span length(m)

(kV) (mm2) 30 40 50 55 60 70
ACSR 40 0.11 0.19 0.30 0.36 0.43 0.58
ACSR 63 0.09 0.17 0.26 0.32 0.38 0.52
30
ACSR 100 0.08 0.15 0.23 0.28 0.33 0.46
ACSR 160 0.07 0.12 0.19 0.23 0.28 0.38
Copper 35 0.09 0.16 0.25 0.31 0.38 0.50
Copper 50 0.08 0.14 0.22 0.27 0.32 0.43
Copper 70 0.07 0.12 0.19 0.23 0.28 0.38
11
ACSR 40 0.16 0.28 0.44 0.54 0.64 0.87
ACSR 63 0.14 0.25 0.39 0.48 0.57 0.77
ACSR 100 0.13 0.23 0.36 0.43 0.51 0.70
XLPE 25 0.17 0.30 0.46 0.56 0.66 0.90
XLPE 35 0.14 0.25 0.40 0.48 0.58 0.78
XLPE 50 0.13 0.23 0.35 0.43 0.51 0.69
XLPE 70 0.13 0.23 0.36 0.43 0.52 0.70
XLPE 90 0.11 0.19 0.30 0.37 0.43 0.59
0.4
PVC 25 0.16 0.28 0.44 0.53 0.63 0.86
PVC 35 0.14 0.24 0.38 0.46 0.55 0.75
PVC 50 0.12 0.22 0.34 0.41 0.49 0.67
PVC 70 0.12 0.22 0.34 0.42 0.50 0.67
PVC 90 0.10 0.18 0.29 0.35 0.42 0.60

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

< Table 16 > Vertical deflection

unit:m

Voltage Conductor Span length(m)

(kV) (mm2) 30 40 50 55 60 70
ACSR 40 0.05 0.08 0.13 0.16 0.19 0.25
ACSR 63 0.04 0.06 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.19
30
ACSR 100 0.03 0.05 0.07 0.09 0.10 0.14
ACSR 160 0.02 0.03 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.10
Copper 35 0.12 0.21 0.32 0.39 0.46 0.63
Copper 50 0.13 0.23 0.36 0.43 0.51 0.70
Copper 70 0.14 0.25 0.38 0.46 0.55 0.75
11
ACSR 40 0.07 0.12 0.20 0.24 0.28 0.38
ACSR 63 0.05 0.09 0.14 0.18 0.21 0.29

ACSR 100 0.04 0.07 0.11 0.13 0.16 0.22

XLPE 25 0.05 0.09 0.14 0.18 0.21 0.28

XLPE 35 0.04 0.07 0.10 0.13 0.15 0.21

XLPE 50 0.03 0.05 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.16

XLPE 70 0.03 0.05 0.07 0.09 0.10 0.14

XLPE 90 0.02 0.03 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.10

0.4
PVC 25 0.05 0.08 0.13 0.16 0.19 0.26

PVC 35 0.03 0.06 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.19

PVC 50 0.03 0.05 0.08 0.09 0.11 0.15

PVC 70 0.02 0.04 0.07 0.08 0.10 0.13

PVC 90 0.02 0.03 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.09

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

12. Clearance of 66kV lines

12.1. Vertical clearance

Vertical clearances to ground, railways etc shall be in accordance with criteria specified
in the following standard. But, it is not allowed for the conductors to cross over building
such as house, office and flat. The following minimum clearances shall be maintained
under any circumstances.

• Normal ground 8m
• Main roads 12 m
• Secondary roads 10 m
• Railways
- from the rail plane 16 m
- from the components of electric traction system 3m
• Wadi 12 m
• Power and Telecommunications lines 3m
• Trees 4.5 m

12.2. Horizontal clearance

The minimum horizontal clearance from the outer conductors to buildings shall be 10 m
with conductors in vertical position. The minimum horizontal clearance from the center of
tower to the nearest part of major water pipelines, gas pipelines and railways shall be 60m,
unless otherwise specified by the owner of these installations.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

Appendix A : References

IEEE C2 National Electrical Safety Code

ENA C(b)1-2006 Guidelines for design and maintenance of overhead distribution
and transmission lines

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

Appendix B : Clearance envelope

1. Clearance envelope when horizontal clearance is greater than vertical clearance

H V H

Legend
V
H H : Conductor
H : Horizontal clearance
V
V : Vertical clearance

2. Clearance envelope for 11kV lines

Clearance envelope

V V
H H=1.5m

V V=1.0m

11kV line 11kV line

(a) When two 11kV lines go along

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

V=1.0m V=1.0m

H=1.5m H=1.5m

(b) When one 11kv line crosses over the other 11kV line

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

Appendix C : Design Example

Suppose that wood poles are installed to wire low voltage conductors (3 phase 4 wire)
which cross road way and conditions of construction site and wiring are as followings.
▪ The width of road way : 35m
▪ Span length : 40m
▪ Type of conductor : Covered copper conductor 70mm2
▪ Sag of conductor : 0.6m
▪ Soil type where poles are erected : D class
Is it possible to erect 9m poles or 10m poles?

a. 9m poles
The burial depth of 9m pole is 1.5m but because poles are erected on D class type soil,
the burial depth should be increased by 0.5m. As a result, the burial depth is 2m.(refer to
support design standard). And the distance from the top of the pole and the lowest
conductor is 0.75m (refer to GDS0600.Assembly).

0.75m
0.6m

9m pole 9m pole
5.65m

Road way
2m

The minimum clearance maintained between conductor to road way is 6m but the
distance from conductor to road way becomes 5.65m. Therefore, 9m wood poles should
not be installed.

b. 10m pole
In case of 10m pole, the burial depth on D class soil is 2.3m(1.7m+0.5m).

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 22 Version 1.0
 Clearance

0.75m
0.6m

10m pole 10m pole

6.35m

Road way
2.3m

The distance 6.35 from conductor to road way satisfies minimum clearance 6m.
Therefore, 10m poles can be installed on this site.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 22 Version 1.0
 GDU 2000
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Cables

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Network Configurations···············································································1
2.1 66kV, 30kV Network configuration·········································································1
2.2 11kV Network configuration ···················································································2
2.3 0.4kV Network configuration··················································································3
2.4 Aluminum armors····································································································4
3. Bending Radii ································································································5
4. Cable Terminations ·······················································································6
5. Cable Joints····································································································7
6. Current Carrying Capacity of Cables ························································8
6.1 Single or Three-core XLPE insulated cables from 11kV to 66kV ···························8
6.1.1 Methods of installation ··················································································8
6.1.2 Installation conditions····················································································9
6.1.3 In case of 1.2 K·m/W ·····················································································9
6.1.4 In case of 2.0 K·m/W ···················································································10
6.1.5 In case of 2.7 K·m/W ···················································································10
6.1.6 Correction factors of laying depths ······························································ 11
6.2 0.4kV three core PVC or XLPE insulated cables···················································12
6.2.1 Installation conditions··················································································12
6.2.2 In case of 1.2 K·m/W ···················································································12
6.2.3 In case of 2.0 K·m/W ···················································································12
6.2.4 In case of 2.7 K·m/W ···················································································13

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > 66kV, 30kV Standard cable types································································· 1

< Table 2 > 11kV Standard cable types ··········································································· 2
< Table 3 > 0.4kV Standard cable types·········································································· 3
< Table 4 > Maximum voltage drop················································································ 4
< Table 5 > Merits and demerits of Al wire and tape ······················································ 4
< Table 6 > Minimum internal bending radii ·································································· 5
< Table 7 > Detailed minimum internal bending radii····················································· 6
< Table 8 > Current carrying capacity of 1.2 K·m/W ···················································· 10
< Table 9 > Current carrying capacity of 2.0 K·m/W ···················································· 10
< Table 10 > Current carrying capacity of 2.7 K·m/W ·················································· 11
< Table 11 > Correction factors of laying depths for direct buried cables ····················· 11
< Table 12 > Correction factors of laying depths for cables in ducts····························· 11
< Table 13 > Current carrying capacity of 1.2 K·m/W ·················································· 12
< Table 14 > Current carrying capacity of 2.0 K·m/W ·················································· 13
< Table 15 > Current carrying capacity of 2.7 K·m/W ·················································· 13

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Configuration of 66kV, 30kV underground lines············································ 2

[Figure 2] Configuration of 11kV underground lines······················································ 3
[Figure 3] Configuration of 0.4kV underground lines····················································· 4
[Figure 4] Diagram of bending radius············································································· 5
[Figure 5] Heat shrink end caps & Protective pipes ························································ 7
[Figure 6] Transition joint for XLPE and Paper cables ··················································· 8
[Figure 7] Single core cables buried direct······································································ 8
[Figure 8] Single core cables in ducts ············································································· 9
[Figure 9] Three core cables ··························································································· 9

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ··············································································································· 15
B Permissible current rating of cables ········································································ 16
C Permissible short-circuit current ············································································ 25
D DC, AC Resistance, reactance and zero sequence impedance. etc ························ 29
E Example of maximum LV length circuits ······························································· 38
F Example of low voltage design standard ································································· 39
G Designation code for power cables ········································································· 40
H Soil thermal resistivity (STR) ················································································· 42
I Transition joint for 11kV 3 core XLPE/Paper cables ············································· 44

v
 Cables

1. Scope

This standard specifies the basic requirements for the installation of 0.4kV, 11kV, 30kV
and 66kV cables, such as standard cable types of each voltage level and current carrying
capacity of each cable, and related equipment. It also covers technical calculations for
XLPE, PVC cables such as DC, AC resistance, reactance and impedance, etc.

2. Network Configurations

All kinds of 11kV, 30kV and 66kV cables shall be insulated with XLPE material and all
low voltage cables shall be insulated XLPE or PVC material. Both copper and aluminum
conductors can be used for the main or branch lines. But copper conductors shall be surely
used between the secondary node of 220/66kV, 220/30kV and 30/11kV main transformers
and its switchgear on 66kV, 30kV and 11kV side bus bar or the secondary node of circuit
breakers. The following is the network configuration of each voltage level.

2.1 66kV, 30kV Network configuration

When deciding the cable sizes, designers shall deeply consider the current carrying
capacity of cables, load transfer in emergency case and the load increases in the future.
Single core 500mm2 or 630mm2 XLPE cables shall be used between the secondary node
of 220/30 kV (or 220/66 kV) main transformer and its switchgear on 30kV (or 66kV) side
bus bar in substations (zone1), and also used for transmission lines between 220/30kV (or
220/66 kV) substation and 30/11kV (or 66/11kV) substation (zone2). When 30/11kV (or
66/11kV) substations need to be looped, single core 500mm2 or 630mm2 XLPE cables
shall be applied to the looped lines (zone3).
In case of radial lines which are not scheduled to connect with other transmission lines
in the future, single core XLPE 400mm2 cables can be used (zone4). But if there is a
possibility that the terminal substation would be connected to another 30/11kV (or
66/11kV) substation in the near future, single core 630mm2 cables shall be used in stead of
single core 400mm2 cables. The size and type of 66kV, 30kV cables are summarized in the
following table.
< Table 1 > 66kV, 30kV Standard cable types
Core and cross section Insulation Armor Application
3×1C×500 or 630 mm2 XLPE Aluminum wire Zone1, 2 and 3
2
3×1C×400 mm XLPE Aluminum wire Zone 4

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

: On
220/66,30kV 220/66,30kV
MTR MTR : Off
zone1
Another 66, 30kV Side 66, 30kV Side
Another
S/S Bus Bar Bus Bar S/S
zone 2

zone 4 zone 3

66, 30/11kV 66, 30/11kV 66, 30/11kV 66, 30/11kV

MTR MTR MTR MTR

[Figure 1] Configuration of 66kV, 30kV underground lines

2.2 11kV Network configuration

11kV feeders are designed to run as open rings in a ring main unit configuration. Single
core 400mm2 XLPE cables shall be used between the secondary node of 30/11kV (or
66/11kV) main transformer and its switchgear on 11kV side bus bar in substations (zone1).
When the rated capacity of 30/11kV (or 66/11kV) transformers exceeds 10MVA, for
instance 20MVA, a couple of single core 400mm2 cables shall be used for each phase of
the transformer. In other cases, only one cable shall be connected to each phase.
Three core 240mm2 XLPE cables, used as main lines shall be used power lines between
30/11kV substation and RMU (zone2). Three core 150mm2 XLPE cables can be used in
radial lines (zone3). If there is a possibility that the radial lines would be connected to
another 30/11kV substation line due to future load growth, three core 240mm2 cables can
be used. Therefore, three core 240mm2 cables shall be used in the looped lines of 11kV
network, and three core 150mm2 cables can be used in radial lines. The size and type of
11kV cables are summarized in the following table.

< Table 2 > 11kV Standard cable types

Core and cross section Insulation Armor Application
3×1C×400 mm2 XLPE Aluminum wire Zone 1
3C×240 mm2 XLPE Steel tape Zone 2
3C×150 mm2 XLPE Steel tape Zone 3

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

66,30/11kV 66,30/11kV : On
S/S S/S
: Off
zone 1
11kV Side
Bus Bar

RMU RMU RMU

zone 3 zone 2

11/0.4kV 11/0.4kV 11/0.4kV

S/S S/S S/S

[Figure 2] Configuration of 11kV underground lines

When important customers, such as hospitals, government facilities are supplied with
power, two different distribution lines shall supply power to them, if more power security
is needed, power shall be supplied to them from two different circuits of substations and a
mobile generator can be installed within the premises if necessary.

2.3 0.4kV Network configuration

Single core 400mm2 XLPE cables shall be used between the secondary node of
11/0.4kV main transformer and its LV distribution panel in 11/0.4kV substations (zone1).
Three core 240mm2 XLPE or PVC cables, used as the main lines of 0.4kV networks shall
be laid between a distribution panel and a pillar box (zone 2), and between pillar boxes
(zone 3). 3.5C×95mm2 cables, used as the branch lines of 0.4kV networks shall be laid
between the pillar box and a fuse box, and between fuse boxes.
But designers shall consider load requirements, possibility of future load growth and the
structure methods of underground lines before deciding cable sizes. Therefore the cable
size can be different from the size of standard cables with the consideration of needed load
currents in the future. Both XLPE and PVC material can be used to insulate the 0.4kV
cables. The size and type of 0.4kV cables are summarized in the following table.

< Table 3 > 0.4kV Standard cable types

Core and cross section Insulation Armor Application
3×1C×400 mm2 XLPE Aluminum wire Zone1
3.5C×240 mm2 XLPE or PVC Steel wire Zone 2, 3 (main lines)
3.5C×95 mm2 XLPE or PVC Steel wire Zone 4 (branch lines)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

: On
11/0.4kV 11/0.4kV : Off
S/S S/S
zone 1

Pillar Pillar Pillar Pillar

Box Box zone 3 Box Box

zone 2
zone 4

Fuse
Another Box Another
S/S S/S

[Figure 3] Configuration of 0.4kV underground lines

The maximum voltage drop from LV panel in distribution substations to pillar box
recommended shall be 4% and 2% from pillar box to fuse box.
< Table 4 > Maximum voltage drop
Maximum voltage drop
LV panel ~ pillar box Pillar box ~ fuse box
4% 2%

2.4 Aluminum armors

For single core cables in a.c circuits, if a magnetic material such as steel is used, it
causes high induced currents in armor. These result in high electrical armor losses. So
magnetic armor on single-core cables is seldom possible to use and non magnetic material
such as aluminum should be used and the losses are then much lower. Wire rather than tape
is generally adopted to secure adequate mechanical protection. Therefore, aluminum wire
is the normal choice for single core cables. The following table is the detailed merits and
demerits of each aluminum tape and wire.
< Table 5 > Merits and demerits of Al wire and tape
Armor Merit Demerit
• increase longitudinal reinforcement
Aluminum • better protection against mechanical
• more expensive than AL tape
wire damage
• better compatibility with over-

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

sheathing layer
• provide effective conductance of
earth fault currents
Aluminum • lower level of protection and
• cheaper than AL wire
tape effective conductance than wire

3. Bending Radii

For safety installation without damaging electrical and physical properties to

underground cables, the internal bending radius of cables being laid shall not be less than
the cable manufacture’s specification. The figure below shows how the minimum bending
radius relates to the surface of the cable on the inside of the bending.

Overall diameter of cable

Cable
Bending radius

[Figure 4] Diagram of bending radius

When selecting an approved conduit bend, the ‘during installation’ minimum internal
bending radius in the table below can be used to calculate the minimum conduit bend
radius. Nominal minimum internal bending radii are provided in the following table.
< Table 6 > Minimum internal bending radii
Minimum bending radius
Cable type
During installation After installation
Armored cables 25 D 15 D
Unarmored cables 17 D 10 D
Note : D is the overall diameter of the cables in mm.

When cables are buried direct, armored cables shall be used to prevent them from

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

mechanical damages, if there is low possibility of mechanical damages or cables are buried
in ducts, unarmored cables can be installed.
The detailed minimum internal bending radii of each armored cable are provided in the
following table.
< Table 7 > Detailed minimum internal bending radii
Minimum bending radius (mm)
Cable type During installation After installation
XLPE PVC XLPE PVC
4C×16 mm2 528 580 317 348
3.5C×35 mm2 688 725 413 435
3.5C×95 mm2 985 1045 591 627
0.4 kV
3.5C×150 mm2 1220 1268 732 761
3.5C×240 mm2 1493 1588 896 953
1C×400 mm2 945 980 567 588
3C×150 mm2 1910 - 1146 -
11 kV 3C×240 mm2 2155 - 1293 -
1C×400 mm2 1325 - 795 -
3C×240 mm2 2593 - 1556 -
30 kV 1C×400 mm2 1640 - 984 -
1C×630 mm2 1800 - 1080 -
1C×400 mm2 1750 - 1050 -
66 kV 1C×500 mm2 1840 - 1104 -
1C×630 mm2 1948 - 1169 -

4. Cable Terminations

All cables shall be protected against moisture ingress at all times, including while being
laid, regardless of site and/or weather conditions. Unless jointing work is planned to take
place immediately after cutting a cable, the cut ends shall be protected against moisture
ingress once the cut is made. No cable shall be installed, whether direct buried or in a duct,
before it is protected against moisture ingress. Protection against moisture ingress shall be
effected by the use of suitable heat shrink end caps or any other products approved by
GECOL for that purpose. When cables are to be installed in cable risers, the cables from
underground to overhead shall be covered with some protective pipes with the minimum
covering of 3 m from the ground shown in figure 5.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

3m

(a) Heat shrink end caps (b) Protective pipes

[Figure 5] Heat shrink end caps & Protective pipes

5. Cable Joints

Where a cable section can’t be laid in one continuous length and joints are necessary,
these joints shall be positioned in accessible locations clear of any obstructions that have
the potential of making jointing difficult or impossible and be readily accessible for future
repairs. Joints on cables shall not be positioned under carriageways, driveways, or other
areas of costly reinstatement. In streets, the normal location for joints is in the road
shoulder, and joints shall not be located in the carriageway of roads.
Straight through joints shall be enclosed within jointing sleeves and the conductors shall
be connected by means of compression joints. Installed core connectors shall maintain the
load and short circuit current carrying capacity of the jointed cores. The cable cores shall
not be bent tighter than the minimum internal bending radius during the jointing process.
The completed joint and the first 500 mm of each associated cable shall be straight when
set in position, if possible.
The joint kit contents and the prepared cable ends shall be kept free of foreign matter,
and shall not be damaged during the jointing process. For jointing cables, heat shrinkable
connectors, pre molded connectors and other adaptable connectors approved by GECOL
can be used. The completed joint if direct buried, shall be surrounded in clean sand up to a
depth of 100 mm above the joint, and should be allowed to cool down before applying
mechanical load to it.
The connector material shall match the conductor material on which they are used ; ie
for copper cables the connectors shall be copper, and for aluminum cables the connectors
shall be aluminum. For transition joints for copper and aluminum conductor, the
connectors shall be of the bi-metal type. For size transition joints which mean to connect
two different cable sizes, the compression connectors shall match both the transition sizes

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

of cables and the conductor materials. For transition joints for XLPE and Paper cables,
suitable compression connectors shall be used shown in below figure and the detailed
components can be referred from Appendix I.

XLPE cable Paper cable

[Figure 6] Transition joint for XLPE and Paper cables

6. Current Carrying Capacity of Cables

6.1 Single or Three-core XLPE insulated cables from 11kV to 66kV

6.1.1 Methods of installation
Current ratings are tabulated for cables installed in the following conditions.

6.1.1.1 Single core cables buried direct

Current ratings are given for cables buried direct in the ground at a depth of 0.8 m under
the following conditions. The cable depth is measured to the cable axis or center of the
trefoil group.
a) three cables in trefoil formation touching throughout their length
b) three cables in horizontal flat formation with a clearance of one cable diameter, De.

(a) Trefoil formation (b) Flat formation

[Figure 7] Single core cables buried direct

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

6.1.1.2 Single core cables in ducts

Current ratings are given for cables in ducts buried at a depth of 0.8 m with one cable
per duct as follows :
a) three cables in trefoil ducts touching throughout their length
b) three cables in horizontal flat formation, ducts touching throughout their length.

(a) Trefoil formation (b) Flat formation

[Figure 8] Single core cables in ducts

6.1.1.3 Three core cables

Current ratings are given for three core cables installed under the following conditions.
a) single cable buried direct in the ground at a depth of 0.8 m
b) single cable in a buried duct having dimensions calculated in the same manner as for
the single core cables in ducts. The depth of burial of the duct is 0.8 m.

Depth

(a) Direct burial (b) In-ducts

[Figure 9] Three core cables

6.1.2 Installation conditions

(a) Maximum conductor temperature : 90°C
(b) Ambient air temperature : 50°C
(c) Ground temperature : 25°C
(d) Depth of laying : 0.8 m with direct burial or in ducts
(e) Soil thermal resistivity : 1.2 / 2.0 / 2.7 K·m/W

6.1.3 In case of 1.2 K·m/W

The below cable ratings are based on average soil resistivity of 1.2 K·m/W. The current
carrying capacity of cables may be different from environmental conditions such as
ambient air or ground temperature and depth of laying.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

< Table 8 > Current carrying capacity of 1.2 K·m/W

Current carrying capacity (A)
2
Cable type (mm ) Direct buried In ducts
Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum
3C×150 280 218 242 189
11kV 3C×240 363 285 317 249
1C×400 525 418 485 389
3C×240 363 285 317 249
30kV 1C×400 525 418 485 389
1C×630 811 679 737 620
1C×400 539 430 499 400
66kV 1C×500 743 616 675 562
1C×630 834 699 757 638

6.1.4 In case of 2.0 K·m/W

The below cable ratings are based on average soil resistivity of 2.0 K·m/W. The current
carrying capacity of cables may be different from environmental conditions, such as
ambient air or ground temperature and depth of laying.
< Table 9 > Current carrying capacity of 2.0 K·m/W
Current carrying capacity (A)
Cable type (mm2) Direct buried In ducts
Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum
3C×150 235 183 217 169
11kV 3C×240 305 239 283 223
1C×400 409 326 405 324
3C×240 305 239 283 223
30kV 1C×400 409 326 405 324
1C×630 619 518 613 516
1C×400 420 335 416 333
66kV 1C×500 567 470 561 467
1C×630 636 534 630 530

6.1.5 In case of 2.7 K·m/W

The below cable ratings are based on average soil resistivity of 2.7 K·m/W. The current

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

carrying capacity of cables may be different from environmental conditions, such as

ambient air or ground temperature and depth of laying.
< Table 10 > Current carrying capacity of 2.7 K·m/W
Current carrying capacity (A)
2
Cable type (mm ) Direct buried In ducts
Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum
3C×150 209 163 198 155
11kV 3C×240 271 213 259 203
1C×400 353 281 360 288
3C×240 299 234 259 203
30kV 1C×400 353 281 360 288
1C×630 541 453 544 458
1C×400 363 289 369 296
66kV 1C×500 496 410 498 415
1C×630 556 466 559 471

6.1.6 Correction factors of laying depths

< Table 11 > Correction factors of laying depths for direct buried cables
Single-core cables
Depth of laying
Conductor size (mm2) Three-core cables
(m) 2 2
≤185 mm >185 mm
0.6 1.02 1.04 1.03
0.8 1.00 1.00 1.00
1.0 0.98 0.97 0.98
1.25 0.96 0.95 0.96

< Table 12 > Correction factors of laying depths for cables in ducts
Single-core cables
Depth of laying
Conductor size (mm2) Three-core cables
(m) 2 2
≤185 mm >185 mm
0.6 1.02 1.03 1.02
0.8 1.00 1.00 1.00
1.0 0.98 0.97 0.99
1.25 0.96 0.95 0.97

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

6.2 0.4kV three core PVC or XLPE insulated cables

6.2.1 Installation conditions
(a) Maximum conductor temperature : 90°C
(b) Ambient air temperature : 50°C
(c) Ground temperature : 25°C
(d) Depth of laying : 0.8m with direct burial
(e) Thermal resistivity of soil : 1.2 / 2.0 / 2.7 K·m/W

6.2.2 In case of 1.2 K·m/W

The below cable ratings are based on average soil resistivity of 1.2 K·m/W. The current
carrying capacity of cables may be different from environmental conditions, such as
ambient air or ground temperature, depth of laying and way of laying.
< Table 13 > Current carrying capacity of 1.2 K·m/W
Current carrying capacity (A)
Cable type
XLPE PVC
(mm2)
Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum
4C×2.5 32 24 22 17
4C×16 86 66 62 48
4C×25 110 85 80 61
3.5C×35 133 102 96 74
3.5C×50 156 122 114 87
3.5C×70 193 150 141 109
3.5C×95 229 178 167 128
3.5C×120 261 202 189 146
3.5C×150 294 228 214 166
3.5C×185 330 256 240 186
3.5C×240 381 295 276 214
1C×400 580 452 418 326

6.2.3 In case of 2.0 K·m/W

The below cable ratings are based on average soil resistivity of 2.0 K·m/W. The current
carrying capacity of cables may be different from environmental conditions, such as
ambient air or ground temperature, depth of laying and way of laying.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

< Table 14 > Current carrying capacity of 2.0 K·m/W

Current carrying capacity (A)
Cable type
XLPE PVC
(mm2)
Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum
4C×2.5 25 19 18 14
4C×16 69 53 50 39
4C×25 88 68 64 49
3.5C×35 107 82 77 60
3.5C×50 126 98 91 70
3.5C×70 156 121 113 88
3.5C×95 184 143 134 103
3.5C×120 210 163 154 118
3.5C×150 237 183 172 133
3.5C×185 266 206 193 150
3.5C×240 307 238 222 172
1C×400 467 364 336 262

6.2.4 In case of 2.7 K·m/W

The below cable ratings are based on average soil resistivity of 2.7 K·m/W. The current
carrying capacity of cables may be different from environmental conditions, such as
ambient air or ground temperature, depth of laying and way of laying.
< Table 15 > Current carrying capacity of 2.7 K·m/W
Current carrying capacity (A)
Cable type
XLPE PVC
(mm2)
Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum
4C×2.5 22 17 16 12
4C×16 60 46 43 34
4C×25 76 59 56 43
3.5C×35 92 71 67 52
3.5C×50 109 85 79 61
3.5C×70 135 104 98 76
3.5C×95 159 124 116 89
3.5C×120 181 141 131 102
3.5C×150 205 159 149 115

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

3.5C×185 230 178 167 130

3.5C×240 265 206 192 149
1C×400 404 315 290 227

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

Appendix A : References

IEC 60028 International standard of resistance for copper

IEC 60287 Calculation of the current rating
1-1 Current rating equations (100% load factor) and calculation of losses
– General
2-1 Thermal resistance – Calculation of thermal resistance
IEC 60364-5-52 Selection and erection of electrical equipment – Wiring systems
including roundabouts
IEC 60502-2 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated
Voltages from 6 kV up to 30 kV
IEEE Std
IEEE guide for safety in AC substation grouding
80-2000
IEEE Std
IEEE guide for soil thermal resistivity measurements
442-1981
NS 130 Network Standard of Energy Australia
Specification for laying of underground cables up to 22 kV

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

Appendix B : Permissible current rating of cables (IEC 60287)

1. Installation conditions

(a) Maximum conductor temperature : 90°C

(b) Ambient air temperature : 30°C
(c) Ambient ground temperature : 20°C
(d) Depth of laying : 0.8 m
(e) Soil thermal resistivity : 1.2 K·m/W

2. Permissible current rating of 30kV single core copper 630mm2 XLPE cable

The permissible current rating is obtained as follows :

Δθ − Wd [0.5T1 + n(T2 + T3 + T4 )]
I= (A)
RT1 + nR (1 + λ1 )T2 + nR (1 + λ1 )(T3 + T4 )

Where :
I is the permissible current flowing in one conductor (A)
Δθ is the conductor temperature rise of conductor above ambient temperature (K)
R is the alternating current resistance per unit length of the conductor at maximum
operating temperature (Ω/m)
Wd is the dielectric loss per unit length for the insulation surrounding the conductor (W/m)
T1 is the thermal resistance per unit length between conductor and sheath (K.m/W)
T2 is the thermal resistance per unit length of the bedding between sheath and armor (K.m/W)
T3 is the thermal resistance per unit length of the external serving (K.m/W)
T4 is the thermal resistance per unit length between the cable surface and the surrounding
medium (K.m/W)
n is the number of load-carrying conductors in the cable, taken as one
λ1 is the ratio of losses in the metal sheath to total losses in all conductors in that cable

3. AC resistance of conductor (R)

The AC resistance per unit length of the conductor at its maximum operating temperature
(90°C) is given by the following formula.

R = R ' (1 + y s + y p )

Where :
R is the current resistance of conductor at maximum operating temperature (Ω/m)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

R' is the DC resistance of conductor at maximum operating temperature (Ω/m)

ys is the skin effect factor
yp is the proximity effect factor

3.1 DC resistance of conductor (R′)

The DC resistance per unit length of the conductor at its maximum operating temperature
θ is given by :

R ' = R 0 [1 + α 20 (θ − 20)]

Where :
R0 is the DC resistance of the conductor at 20℃ (Ω/m) : the value of R0 can be derived
directly from the following table.
< Table 1 > DC resistance of conductor (R0)
Nominal cross-sectional area Maximum DC resistance of conductor at 20°C (Ω/m)
(mm2) Copper Aluminum
-4
150 1.24×10 2.06×10-4
240 7.54×10-5 1.25×10-4
400 4.70×10-5 7.78×10-5
630 2.83×10-5 4.69×10-5
α 20 is the constant mass temperature coefficient at 20°C per Kelvin
< Table 2 > Electrical resistivities (ρ) and temperature coefficient (α20)
Resistivity (ρ) at 20°C Temperature coefficient(α20)
Material
(Ω·m) at 20 °C
a) Conductors
Copper 1.7241×10-8 3.93×10-3
Aluminum 2.8264×10-8 4.03×10-3
b) Sheath and armor
Lead or lead alloy 21.8×10-8 4.0×10-3
Steel 13.8×10-8 4.5×10-3
Bronze 3.5×10-8 3.0×10-3
Aluminum 2.84×10-8 4.03×10-3

θ is the maximum operating temperature in degree Celsius (°C) : 90°C

Therefore,
[ ]
R ' = 2.83 ×10 −5 1 + 3.93 ×10 −3 (90 − 20) = 3.609 × 10 −5 (Ω/m)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

3.2 Skin effect factor (ys)

The skin effect factor ys is given by :
4
xs
ys = 4
192 + 0.8 x s

Where :
2 8πf −7
xs = 10 × k s
R'
f is the supply frequency in hertz : 50 (Hz)
Values for ks are given in table 3.
< Table 3 > Experimental values for the coefficients ks and kp
Type of conductor ks kp
Copper 1.0 1.0
Aluminum 1.0 1.0

Therefore,
2 8 × 3.14 × 50
xs = −5
× 10 −7 × 1 = 3.482
3.609 × 10
4
x4 3.482 2
ys = = = 0.06012
192 + 0.8 x s
4
192 + 0.8 × 3.482 2

3.3 Proximity effect factor (yp)

The proximity effect factor is given by :
⎡ ⎤
4 2
⎢ 2
⎥
xp ⎛ dc ⎞ ⎢ ⎛ dc ⎞ 1.18 ⎥
yp = 4
⎜ ⎟ ⎢0.312⎜ ⎟ + 4 ⎥
192 + 0.8 x p ⎝ s ⎠ ⎢ ⎝ s ⎠ xp
+ 0.27 ⎥
⎢ 192 + 0.8 x p
4 ⎥
⎣ ⎦
Where :
2 8πf −7
xp = 10 × k p
R'
dc is the diameter of conductor (mm) : 28.7 (mm)
s is the distance between conductor axes (mm) : 69.30 (mm)
kp can be derived from table 3
Therefore,

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

2 8 × 3.14 × 50
xp = −5
× 10 −7 × 1.0 = 3.482
3.609 × 10
⎡ ⎤
3.482 2
⎛ 28.7 ⎞ ⎢2
⎛ 28.7 ⎞
2
1.18 ⎥
yp = ⎜ ⎟ ⎢ 0.312 × ⎜ ⎟ + ⎥
192 + 0.8 × 3.482 2 ⎝ 69.3 ⎠ ⎢ ⎝ 69.3 ⎠ 3.482 2
+ 0.27 ⎥
⎢⎣ 192 + 0.8 × 3.482 2 ⎥⎦
= 0.03741

R = R ' (1 + y s + y p ) = 3.609 × 10 −5 (1 + 0.06012 + 0.03741) = 3.960 ×10 −5 (Ω/m)

4. Dielectric losses (Wd)

The dielectric loss per unit length in each phase is given by :

Wd = ω × C × U 0 × tan δ (W/m)
2

Where :
ω is the 2πf (1/s)
C is the capacitance per unit length (F/m)
U0 is the voltage to earth (V) and the dielectric loss shall be taken into account for values
of U0 equal to or greater than 127 kV
Values of tanδ, the loss factor of the insulation at power frequency and operating
temperature, are given in table 4.
< Table 4 > Relative permittivity (ε) and loss factors (tan δ)
Type of XLPE cable ε tan δ
Up to and including 18/30 kV cables 2.5 0.004
Greater than 18/30 kV cables 2.5 0.001

The capacitance for circular conductors is given by :

ε
C= 10 −9 (F/m)
⎛D ⎞
18 ln⎜⎜ i ⎟⎟
⎝ dc ⎠
Where :
ε is the relative permittivity of the insulation and values of ε are given in table 4 : 2.5
Di is the external diameter of the insulation, excluding screen (mm) : 47.8 (mm)
dc is the diameter of conductor, including screen (mm) : 30.3 (mm)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

2 .5
Therefore, C = × 10 −9 = 3.047 ×10 −10 (F/m)
⎛ 47.8 ⎞
18 × ln⎜ ⎟
⎝ 30.3 ⎠

Wd = 2 × 3.14 × 50 × 3.047 ×10 −10 ×127000 2 × 0.004 = 6.175 (W/m)

5. Loss factor for metallic sheath (λ1)

The power loss in the metallic sheath or screen (λ1) consists of losses caused by circulating
currents (λ1′) and eddy currents (λ1′′),
thus :

λ1 = λ1 ' + λ1"

5.1 Circulating current losses (λ1′)

The loss factor is given by :
Rs 1
λ1' = × 2
R ⎛R ⎞
1+ ⎜ s ⎟
⎝X ⎠
Where :
Rs is the resistance of sheath or screen per unit length of cable

40 × ρ s [1 + α s (Ts − 20)]
Rs = × 10 5 (Ω/m)
[
π Ds − ( Ds − 2t s )
2 2
]
Where :
ρs is the sheath resistivity at 20°C (see table 2) (Ω.m) : 3.5×10-8 Ω · m
αs is the sheath temperature coefficient (see table 2) : 0.003
Ts is the temperature of sheath (°C)
- copper sheath : 75°C, aluminum sheath : 50°C
Ds is the external diameter of sheath (mm) : 53.9 mm
ts is the thickness of sheath (mm) : 1.35 mm
Therefore :
40 × 3.5 × 10 −8 × [1 + 0.003 × (75 − 20)]
Rs = × 10 5 = 1.830 × 10 −4 (Ω/m)
[
π 53.9 − (53.9 − 2 × 1.35)
2 2
]
⎛ 2s ⎞
and X = 2ω × 10 −7 × ln⎜ ⎟ (Ω/m)
⎝d ⎠
Where :

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

s is the distance between conductor axes (mm) : 69.30 mm

d is the mean diameter of the sheath (mm) : 52.55 mm
Therefore :
⎛ 2 × 69.3 ⎞
X = 2 × 2π × 50 × 10 −7 × ln⎜ −5
⎟ = 6.094 × 10 (Ω /m)
⎝ 52 .55 ⎠

1.830 × 10 −4 1
λ1' = × 2
= 0.461
R ⎛ 1.830 ×10 −4 ⎞
1 + ⎜⎜ ⎟
−5 ⎟
⎝ 6.094 ×10 ⎠

5.2 Eddy-current losses (λ1′′)

For single-core cables with sheaths bonded at a single point or cross-bonded, the eddy-
current loss factor is given by :

Rs ⎡ ( β 1t s ) 4 ⎤
λ1" = g λ
⎢ s 0 (1 + Λ 1 + Δ 2 ) + ⎥
R ⎣ 12 × 1012 ⎦

Where :
Rs is the resistance of sheath or screen per unit length
gs is the coefficient of eddy-current losses
1.74
⎛t ⎞
g s = 1 + ⎜⎜ s ⎟⎟ ( β1 DS 10 −3 − 1.6) = 1.007
⎝ Ds ⎠

4πω
β1 = = 106.205
10 7 ρ S

Formulae for λ0, Δ1 and Δ 2 are given below :

2
⎛ m2 ⎞ ⎛ d ⎞ ω
λ0 = 3 × ⎜⎜ ⎟×
2 ⎟ ⎜ ⎟ = 0.012 , m= 10 −7 = 0.172
⎝ 1 + m ⎠ ⎝ 2s ⎠ RS

( 0.92 m +1.66 )
⎛d ⎞
Δ1 = (1.14 × m 2.45
+ 0.33) × ⎜ ⎟ = 5.255 × 10 −2 , Δ2 = 0
⎝ 2s ⎠

Therefore :

1.83 ×10 −4 ⎡ (106.205 × 1.35) 4 ⎤

λ1" = ⎢1 . 007 × 0 . 012 × (1 + 0 . 052 ) + ⎥ = 0.061
3.96 × 10 −5 ⎣ 12 × 1012 ⎦

λ1 = λ1' + λ1" = 0.461 + 0.061 = 0.522

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

6. Thermal resistance (T1, T2, T3 and T4)

6.1 Thermal resistance between conductor and sheath (T1)

The thermal resistance between one conductor and the sheath T1 is given by :

ρ T ⎛ 2 × t1 ⎞
T1 = ln⎜1 + ⎟ (K·m/W)
2π ⎜⎝ d c ⎟⎠

Where :
ρ T is the thermal resistivity of insulation (K·m/W) and given in table 5
- XLPE : 3.5 K·m/W, PVC : 5.0 K·m/W
dc is the diameter of conductor, excluding screen (mm)
t1 is the thickness of insulation between conductor and sheath including both screens (mm)

Therefore :
3.5 ⎛ 2 × 11.25 ⎞
T1 = ln⎜1 + ⎟ = 0.322 (K·m/W)
2 × 3.14 ⎝ 28.7 ⎠

6.2 Thermal resistance between sheath and armor (T2)

The thermal resistance between sheath and armor T2 is given by :

1 ⎛ 2 × t2 ⎞
T2 = ρ T ln⎜⎜1 + ⎟⎟ (K·m/W)
2π ⎝ Ds ⎠

Where :
t2 is the thickness of the bedding or separation (mm)
Ds is the external diameter of sheath (mm)

Therefore :
3.5 ⎛ 2 ×1.7 ⎞
T2 = ln⎜1 + ⎟ = 0.048 (K·m/W)
2 × 3.14 ⎝ 54.5 ⎠

6.3 Thermal resistance of external serving (T3)

The thermal resistance of external serving T3 is given by :
1 ⎛ 2×t ⎞
T3 = ρ T ln⎜1 + ' 3 ⎟ (K·m/W)
2π ⎝ Da ⎠
Where :
ρT is the thermal resistivity of external serving (PVC) (K·m/W)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

< Table 5 > Thermal resisitivity of materials (ρT)

PVC
Material XLPE
Up to 35kV cables Greater than 35kV cables
Thermal resistivity
3.5 5.0 6.0
(K·m/W)
t3 is the thickness of serving (mm)
- 30kV cables : 3.2 mm, 66kV cables : 3.4 mm from GES
D′a is the external diameter of the armor (mm)

Therefore :
1 ⎛ 2 × 3.2 ⎞
T3 = × 5.0 × ln⎜1 + ⎟ = 0.077 (K·m/W)
2 × 3.14 ⎝ 62.9 ⎠

6.4 External thermal resistance of surrounding medium (T4)

The external thermal resistance T4 is given by :
1.5
T4 = ρ T [ln(2u ) − 0.630] (K·m/W)
π
Where :
ρT is the thermal resistivity of soil (K·m/W)
2 L 2 × 119.3
u= = = 3.443
De 69.3
Where :
L is the distance from the surface of the ground to the center of trefoil group (mm)
De is the external diameter of one cable (mm)

Therefore :
1.5
T4 = × 1.2 × [ln(2 × 3.443) − 0.630] = 0.745 (K·m/W)
3.14

In conclusion, the permissible current rating (I) is given by :

Δθ − Wd [0.5T1 + n(T2 + T3 + T4 )]
I=
RT1 + nR(1 + λ1 )T2 + nR(1 + λ1 )(T3 + T4 )

Δθ − Wd [0.5T1 + n(T2 + T3 + T4 )]
=
R{T1 + n(1 + λ1 )T2 + n(1 + λ1 )(T3 + T4 )}

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

70 − 6.175 × [(0.5 × 0.322) + 0.048 + 0.077 + 0.745]

=
3.96 × 10 −5 {0.322 + (1 + 0.522) × 0.048 + (1 + 0.522)(0.077 + 0.933)}

= 988 (A)

If other conditions are the same and only the value of soil thermal resistivity is changed,
the permissible current ratings are given in table 6.
< Table 6 > Permissible current ratings
Permissible current ratings (A)
30kV single core 630mm2 Soil thermal resistivity (K·m/W)
1.2 2.0 2.7
Copper 988 798 691
Conductor
Aluminum 825 669 580

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

Appendix C : Permissible short-circuit current (IEC 60949)

1. General

The method of calculating the short-circuit rating of any current carrying component of a
cable has generally been based on the assumption that the heat is retained inside the current
carrying component for the duration of short-circuit (i.e. adiabatic heating). However, there
is some heat transfer into the adjacent materials during short-circuit and advantage can be
taken of this.

2. Permissible short-circuit current

The permissible short-circuit current is given by :

I = ε × I AD
Where :
I = permissible short-circuit current
I AD = short-circuit current calculated on an adiabatic basis
ε = factor to allow for heat loss into the adjacent components
For adiabatic calculations ε = 1

3. Calculation of adiabatic short-circuit current

The general form of the adiabatic temperature rise formula which is applicable to any
initial temperature is :

⎛θ f + β ⎞
I 2 AD × t = K 2 × S 2 × ln⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ θi + β ⎠

Where :
I AD = short-circuit current calculated on an adiabatic basis (A)
t = duration of short-circuit (1 sec)
K = constant ( As 1 / 2 / mm 2 ) : see table 1

σ c ( β + 20) × 10 −12
K=
ρ 20

S = nominal cross-section area (mm2)

θ f = final temperature (°C)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

θ i = initial temperature (°C)

β = reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistance of the current carrying component
at 0 °C (K) : see table 1
σc = volumetric specific heat of the current carrying component at 20 °C (J/K.m3): see
table 1

ρ 20 = electrical resistivity of the current carrying component at 20 °C (Ω.m) : see table 1

< Table 1 > Related constants of I AD

Conductor K ( As 1 / 2 / mm 2 ) β (K) σ c (J/K.m3) ρ 20 (Ω.m)

Copper 226 234.5 3.45 × 10 6 1.7241 × 10 −8

Aluminum 148 228 2.5 × 10 6 2.8264 × 10 −8

Therefore :

⎛θ f + β ⎞ 250 + 234.5 ⎞
I AD = K 2 S 2 ln⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ / t = 226 2 × 630 2 × ln⎛⎜ ⎟ /1
⎝ θi + β ⎠ ⎝ 90 + 234.5 ⎠

= 90.142 (KA)

4. Calculation of non-adiabatic factor

t ⎛t⎞
ε = 1+ X +Y⎜ ⎟
S ⎝S⎠

Where :
X and Y are given in table 2.
< Table 2 > Constant of X and Y
Constants for copper Constants for aluminum
Insulation
X Y X Y
PVC ≤ 3kV 0.29 0.06 0.40 0.08
>3 kV 0.27 0.05 0.37 0.07
XLPE 0.41 0.12 0.57 0.16

Therefore :

1 ⎛ 1 ⎞
ε = 1 + 0.41 × + 0.12 × ⎜ ⎟ = 1.008
630 ⎝ 630 ⎠

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

I = 1.008 × 90.142 = 90.9 (KA)

5. Examples of maximum permissible short-circuit currents

Every cable below shall withstand up to each permissible short-circuit current for 1 second.
< Table 3 > Permissible short-circuit current of XLPE cables
Conductor size (mm2) 240 400 630
Short circuit current Copper 34.3 57.2 90.9
(kA) Aluminum 22.6 37.6 59.2

The following two figures are permissible short circuit current for copper and aluminum
conductor with XLPE cables.

[Figure 1] Permissible short-circuit current of copper cables

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

[Figure 2] Permissible short-circuit current of aluminum cables

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

28 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

Appendix D : DC, AC Resistance, reactance and voltage drop. Etc

1. AC resistance of conductor (R)

The AC resistance per unit length of the conductor at its maximum operating temperature
is given by the following formula.

R = R ' (1 + y s + y p )

Where :
R is the AC resistance of conductor at maximum operating temperature (Ω/m)
R' is the DC resistance of conductor at maximum operating temperature (Ω/m)
ys is the skin effect factor
yp is the proximity effect factor

1.1 DC resistance of conductor (R′)

The DC resistance per unit length of the conductor at its maximum operating temperature
θ is given by :

R ' = R 0 [1 + α 20 (θ − 20)]

Where :
R0 is the DC resistance of the conductor at 20℃ (Ω/m) : the value of R0 can be derived
directly from the following table.
< Table 1 > DC resistance of conductor (R0)
Nominal cross-sectional area Maximum DC resistance of conductor at 20°C (mΩ/m)
(mm2) Copper Aluminum
16 1.150 1.910
35 0.524 0.868
95 0.193 0.320
150 0.124 0.206
240 0.075 0.125
400 0.047 0.078
500 0.037 0.061
630 0.028 0.047

α 20 is the constant mass temperature coefficient at 20°C per Kelvin

< Table 2 > Temperature coefficient (α20)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

29 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

Conductor Temperature coefficient(α20) at 20 °C

Copper 3.93×10-3
Aluminum 4.03×10-3

θ is the maximum operating temperature in degree Celsius

< Table 3 > Maximum operating temperature ( θ )
XLPE PVC
90°C 70°C

Therefore, DC resistance for each cable is given in table 4.

< Table 4 > DC Resistance at 90°C and 70°C
DC Resistance (mΩ/m)
Cable type XLPE at 90°C PVC at 70°C
Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum
4C¯16 mm2 1.466 2.435 1.376 2.295
3.5C¯35 mm2 0.668 1.113 0.627 1.043
3.5C¯95 mm2 0.246 0.410 0.231 0.385
0.4kV
3.5C¯150 mm2 0.158 0.264 0.148 0.248
3.5C¯240 mm2 0.096 0.160 0.090 0.150
1C¯400 mm2 0.060 0.100 0.056 0.093
3C¯150 mm2 0.158 0.264 - -
2
11kV 3C¯240 mm 0.096 0.160 - -
2
1C¯400 mm 0.060 0.100 - -
2
3C¯240 mm 0.096 0.160
2
30kV 1C¯400 mm 0.060 0.100 - -
2
1C¯630 mm 0.036 0.060 - -
2
1C¯400 mm 0.060 0.100 - -
2
66kV 1C¯500 mm 0.047 0.078 - -
2
1C¯630 mm 0.036 0.060 - -

1.2 Skin effect factor (ys)

The skin effect factor ys is given by :
4
xs
ys = 4
192 + 0.8 x s

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

30 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

Where :
2 8πf −7
xs = 10 × k s
R'
f is the supply frequency in hertz : 50 (Hz)
Values for ks are given in table 5.
< Table 5 > Experimental values for the coefficients ks and kp
Type of conductor ks kp
Copper 1.0 1.0
Aluminum 1.0 1.0

1.3 Proximity effect factor (yp)

The proximity effect factor is given by :
⎡ ⎤
4 2
⎢ 2
⎥
xp ⎛ dc ⎞ ⎢ ⎛ dc ⎞ 1.18 ⎥
yp = 4
⎜ ⎟ ⎢0.312⎜ ⎟ + 4 ⎥
192 + 0.8 x p ⎝ s ⎠ ⎢ ⎝ s ⎠ xp
+ 0.27 ⎥
⎢ 192 + 0.8 x p
4 ⎥
⎣ ⎦
Where :
2 8πf −7
xp = 10 × k p
R'
dc is the diameter of conductor (mm)
s is the distance between conductor axes (mm)
kp can be derived from table 5
< Table 6 > Diameter of conductor (dc) and distance between conductor axes (s)

Diameter of Distance between conductor axes

Cable type conductor (mm)
(mm) XLPE PVC
4C¯16 mm2 4.7 6.1 6.7
3.5C¯35 mm2 6.9 8.7 9.3
3.5C¯95 mm2 11.4 13.6 14.6
0.4kV
3.5C¯150 mm2 14.4 17.2 18.0
3.5C¯240 mm2 18.3 21.7 22.7
1C¯400 mm2 23.2 37.8 39.2
11kV 3C¯150 mm2 14.4 26.6 -
3C¯240 mm2 18.3 30.5 -

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

31 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

1C¯400 mm2 23.2 53.0 -

3C¯240 mm2 18.3 37.5
2
30kV 1C¯400 mm 23.2 65.6 -
2
1C¯630 mm 30.2 72.0 -
2
1C¯400 mm 23.2 70.0 -
2
66kV 1C¯500 mm 26.4 73.6
2
1C¯630 mm 30.2 77.9

Therefore, AC resistance for each cable is given in follow table.

< Table 7 > AC Resistance at 90°C and 70°C of cables
AC Resistance (mΩ/m)
Cable type XLPE at 90°C PVC at 70°C
Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum
4C¯16 mm2 1.467 2.449 1.376 2.295
3.5C¯35 mm2 0.669 1.113 0.627 1.043
3.5C¯95 mm2 0.248 4.111 0.232 0.385
0.4kV
3.5C¯150 mm2 0.160 0.265 0.151 0.249
3.5C¯240 mm2 0.100 0.162 0.094 0.151
1C¯400 mm2 0.063 0.102 0.060 0.096
3C¯150 mm2 0.159 0.265 - -
11kV 3C¯240 mm2 0.098 0.162 - -
1C¯400 mm2 0.062 0.101 - -
3C¯240 mm2 0.098 0.161
30kV 1C¯400 mm2 0.062 0.101 - -
1C¯630 mm2 0.040 0.062 - -
2
1C¯400 mm 0.062 0.101 - -
2
66kV 1C¯500 mm 0.050 0.079
2
1C¯630 mm 0.039 0.062 - -

2. Reactance (X)

The reactance X of each core of a 3-core cable or three single-core cables is obtained from
the formula.
X = 2π × f × L × 10 −6 (Ω/m)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

32 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

Where :
f is frequency (Hz) and L is inductance (mH/km)

2.1 Inductance (L)

The inductance L per core of 3-core cable or of three single-core cables comprises two
parts, the self-inductance of the conductor and the mutual inductance with other cores. It is
given by :
2s
L = K + 0.2 × log e (mH/km)
dc
Where :
K is a constant relating to the conductor formation
< Table 8 > Typical values for constant K for different conductors
Nominal cross-sectional area (mm2) 16, 35 95, 150 240 400, 630
K value 0.0642 0.0554 0.0528 0.0514

s is the distance between conductor axes (mm) and can be derived from table 6
dc is the diameter of conductor (mm) and can be also derived from table 6

For multi-core cables the inductance obtained from the above formula shall be multiplied
by 1.02 if the conductors are circular.
Therefore the reactance of each cable is given the below table.
< Table 9 > Reactance of cables
Reactance (mΩ/m)
Cable type
XLPE PVC
2
4C¯16 mm 0.082 0.088
3.5C¯35 mm2 0.080 0.084
3.5C¯95 mm2 0.074 0.078
0.4kV
3.5C¯150 mm2 0.074 0.077
3.5C¯240 mm2 0.072 0.075
1C¯400 mm2 0.090 0.093
3C¯150 mm2 0.102 -
11kV 3C¯240 mm2 0.094 -
1C¯400 mm2 0.112 -
30kV 3C¯240 mm2 0.107
1C¯400 mm2 0.125 -

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

33 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

1C¯630 mm2 0.114 -

1C¯400 mm2 0.129 -
2
66kV 1C¯500 mm 0.124
2
1C¯630 mm 0.119 -

3. Voltage drop (mV/A/m)

The voltage drop between lines is obtained from the following formula.

Voltage drop = 3 × ( R cosθ + X sin θ ) (V/A/m)

Where :
R is AC resistance (Ω/m) and X is reactance (Ω/m).

Therefore the voltage drop of each cable is given in table 10.

< Table 10 > Voltage drop between lines
Voltage drop (mV/A/m)
Cable type XLPE PVC
Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum
2
4C¯16 mm 2.3480 3.8790 2.2110 3.6440
2
3.5C¯35 mm 1.1030 1.7950 1.0420 1.6894
3.5C¯95 mm2 0.4413 0.6963 0.4210 0.6595
0.4kV
3.5C¯150 mm2 0.3054 0.4693 0.2924 0.4456
3.5C¯240 mm2 0.2099 0.3078 0.2028 0.2920
1C¯400 mm2 0.1670 0.2271 0.1631 0.2191
3C¯150 mm2 0.3250 0.4895 - -
11kV 3C¯240 mm2 0.2243 0.3229 - -
1C¯400 mm2 0.1814 0.2421 - -
3C¯240 mm2 0.2336 0.3318
30kV 1C¯400 mm2 0.1910 0.2518 - -
1C¯630 mm2 0.1481 0.1836 - -
1C¯400 mm2 0.1939 0.2548 - -
66kV 1C¯500 mm2 0.1712 0.2171
1C¯630 mm2 0.1515 0.1871 - -
In case of cosθ = 0.9, sinθ = 0.436

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

34 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

4. Positive (Z1) and negative (Z2) sequence impedance

The positive and negative sequence impedance of each cable is given in table 11.
< Table 11 > Positive (=negative) sequence impedance
Positive or Negative sequence impedance
Cable type R1 + j X1 or R2 + j X2 (mΩ /m)
Copper Aluminum
2
3C¯150 mm 0.159 + j 0.102 0.265 + j 0.102
2
11kV 3C¯240 mm 0.098 + j 0.094 0.162 + j 0.094
2
1C¯400 mm 0.062 + j 0.112 0.101 + j 0.112
2
3C¯240 mm 0.098 + j 0.107 0.161 + j 0.107
2
30kV 1C¯400 mm 0.062 + j 0.125 0.101 + j 0.125
1C¯630 mm2 0.040 + j 0.114 0.062 + j 0.114
1C¯400 mm2 0.062 + j 0.129 0.101 + j 0.129
66kV 1C¯500 mm2 0.050 + j 0.124 0.079 + j 0.124
1C¯630 mm2 0.039 + j 0.119 0.062 + j 0.119

5. Zero sequence impedance (Z0)

The zero sequence impedance of each cable is given in table 12.
< Table 12 > Zero sequence impedance
Zero sequence impedance R0+jX0 (mΩ /m)
Cable type
Copper Aluminum
3C¯150 mm2 1.6833 + j 0.0592 2.0000 + j 0.0592
11kV 3C¯240 mm2 1.3549 + j 0.0601 1.5447 + j 0.0601
1C¯400 mm2 0.3691 + j 0.0565 0.4080 + j 0.0565
3C¯240 mm2 1.1516 + j 0.0591 1.3405 + j 0.0591
30kV 1C¯400 mm2 0.3540 + j 0.0700 0.3540 + j 0.0700
1C¯630 mm2 0.2587 + j 0.0614 0.2815 + j 0.0614
1C¯400 mm2 0.2943 + j 0.0747 0.3334 + j 0.0747
66kV 1C¯500 mm2 0.2654 + j 0.0699 0.2949 + j 0.0699
1C¯630 mm2 0.2429 + j 0.0666 0.2657 + j 0.0666

6. Dimensions
The dimension of each cable is given in table 13.
< Table 13 > Outside diameter of cables

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

35 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

Approximate outside diameter (mm)

Cable type
XLPE PVC
4C¯16 mm2 21.1 23.2
3.5C¯35 mm2 27.5 29
3.5C¯95 mm2 39.4 41.8
0.4kV
3.5C¯150 mm2 48.8 50.7
3.5C¯240 mm2 59.7 63.5
1C¯400 mm2 37.8 39.2
3C¯150 mm2 76.4 -
11kV 3C¯240 mm2 86.2 -
1C¯400 mm2 53.0 -
3C¯240 mm2 103.7 -
2
30kV 1C¯400 mm 65.6 -
2
1C¯630 mm 72.0 -
2
1C¯400 mm 70.0 -
2
66kV 1C¯500 mm 73.6 -
2
1C¯630 mm 77.9 -

7. Weights
The weight of each cable is given in table 14.
< Table 14 > Cable weights
Approximate weight (kg/m)
Cable type Copper Aluminum
XLPE PVC XLPE PVC
4C¯16 mm2 1.34 1.60 0.94 1.20
3.5Ca¯35 mm2 2.42 2.60 1.61 1.78
3.5C¯95 mm2 5.25 5.60 3.15 3.51
0.4kV
3.5C¯150 mm2 7.96 8.25 4.69 5.20
2
3.5C¯240 mm 11.77 12.36 6.79 7.39
2
1C¯400 mm 4.57 4.78 2.14 2.35
2
3C¯150 mm 9.05 - 6.46 -
2
11kV 3C¯240 mm 13.24 - 9.14 -
1C¯400 mm2 5.91 - 3.52 -

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

36 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

3C¯240 mm2 15.89 - 11.66 -

30kV 1C¯400 mm2 7.19 - 4.77 -
1C¯630 mm2 9.63 - 5.88 -
1C¯400 mm2 7.65 - 5.21 -
66kV 1C¯500 mm2 8.69 5.73
1C¯630 mm2 10.74 - 6.94 -

a
Size of reduced neutral conductor
Phase conductor (mm2) 35 95 150 240
Neutral conductor (mm2) 16 50 70 120

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

37 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

Appendix E : Example of maximum LV length circuits

1. In case of full load operation with 0.4kV XPLE cables

LV panel in
Pillar box Fuse box
Sub-stations
Voltage drop : 4% Voltage drop : 2%
1 2 3

The cable installed between 1 and 2 section is 0.4kV 3.5C¯240 mm2 XLPE insulated
copper one with the voltage drop of 0.2099 (mV/A/m). The maximum circuit length of LV
cable from LV panel to pillar box is 200 m in order to maintain a voltage drop of 4% or
less, the maximum circuit length from pillar box to fuse box is 79 m. Below table shows
the maximum circuit lengths of each cable in case of full load operation.
< Table 1 > Maximum length of 0.4k V XLPE cables
Cable type Full load Voltage drop Maximum
Section
Size Conductor (A) (mV/A/m) length (m)
Co 381 0.2099 200
1~2 3.5C¯240mm2
Al 295 0.3078 176
Co 229 0.4413 79
2~3 3.5C¯95mm2
Al 178 0.6963 64

2. In case of full load operation with 0.4kV PVC cables

If PVC insulated cables are applied in stead of XPLE cables, the maximum lengths of each
cable are as follows.
< Table 2 > Maximum length of 0.4k V PVC cables
Cable type Full load Voltage drop Maximum
Section
Size Conductor (A) (mV/A/m) length (m)
Co 276 0.2028 284
1~2 3.5C¯240mm2
Al 214 0.2920 256
Co 167 0.4210 113
2~3 3.5C¯95mm2
Al 128 0.6595 94

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

38 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

Appendix F : Example of low voltage design standard

The following is an example showing the application of the low voltage design guidelines
using the loading guidelines and providing a design that minimizes costs.

Problem :
A new building will be installed and be supplied with underground 0.4 kV PVC copper
cables. The cables will be buried directly to the building. The building will require a
separate distribution substation. The estimated peak demand of the building is 200 kW.
Determine the recommended LV cable size. Assume the voltage drop is not a concern for
this service.

Solution :
200 kW (peak demand)
Peak amps = = 320 A
3 × 0.4kv × cosθ (0.9)

The estimated peak amps is 320 A with a power factor of 0.9. As shown in below table, the
table recommends an ampacity of 276 A for 3.5C×240 mm2.

< Table 1 > Current carrying capacity of 0.4 kV cables

Current carrying capacity (A)
Cable type
XLPE PVC
(mm2)
Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum
3.5C×240 381 295 276 214

Therefore, the number of sets for the 3.5C×240 mm2 PVC copper cables is two.
320
= 1.16
276

If, an XLPE copper cable is buried directly in stead of PVC one, the number of sets is one.
320
= 0.84
381

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

39 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

Appendix G : Designation code for power cables (DIN VDE 0271/0276)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ¯ 9 10 11

1. Identification of designation
N DIN VDE standard
(N) similar to DIN VDE standard

2. Conductor material
A aluminum conductor
- copper conductor

3. Insulating materials
Y PVC
2X cross-linked PE(XLPE)
- impregnated paper

4. Concentric conductor (screen)

C concentric conductor of copper
CW concentric conductor of copper in waveconal formation
CE concentric conductor of copper over each individual core
S screen of copper wires
SE screen of copper wires over each individual core
H conductive layers
(F) longitudinally water-proof screen

5. Armoring
B steel tape armoring
F armor of galvanized flat steel wires
G counter helix of galvanized steel tape
R armor of galvanized round steel wires
? galvanized aluminum wires

6. Sheath material
A over sheath made of fibrous material
K lead sheath
KL aluminum sheath

7. Protective conductor
J with protective conductor
O without protective conductor

8. Number of cores

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

40 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

9. Conductor cross section in mm2

10. Conductor type

r… circular conductor ..m stranded conductor
s… sector conductor ..h hollow circular conductor
o… oval conductor /v compact conductor
..e.. circular, solid conductor

11. Rating voltage

0.6/1kV, 8.7/15kV, 18/30kV, 36/66

< Example >

NA2XS2Y 1¯35 RM/16 0.6/1 kV

Single core XLPE-insulated cable with PE-sheath according to standard, circular, stranded
aluminum conductor with nominal cross-section 35mm2, covered with copper-screen
16mm2 and rating voltage (Uo/U) 0.6/1 kV

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

41 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

Appendix H : Soil thermal resistivity (STR)

1. Measured results of soil thermal resistivity

< Table 1 > Results of STR

STR
No Day City Place °C Remarks
(K·m / W)
1 Janzor 38.0 ~ 40.1 1.17 80cm depth

2 July 15, Tripoli Janzor 40.2 ~ 42.5 1.19 50cm depth

3 2006 (1.2) Swany 41.5 ~ 42.1 0.77

4 Haddba 41.1 ~ 42.8 0.95

5 July 16, Brown MT Banyaakuob 41.1 ~ 44.0 1.70 Construction

6 2006 (1.7) Down 39.5 ~ 41.0 0.93 40cm depth

7 Hawari 50.0 ~ 56.5 3.29 Rocky area

8 Fouhat 49.8 ~ 54.5 2.50 Small soil

July 23, Benghazi
9 Aboattne 48.1 ~ 53.4 2.96 Half small soil
2006 (3.3)
10 Sidihusain 46.2 ~ 51.5 2.38 Small soil

11 Juliena 43.0 ~ 47.2 2.36 Small soil

12 Albayda Center 39.9 ~ 43.2 1.69 1.2 m depth

13 (2.1) North 40.5 ~ 44.7 2.11 Rocky area

14 North 41.0 ~ 46.2 2.50 Soft soil

July 24, Algobaa
15 South 46.0 ~ 53.7 3.33 Just backfill
2006 (2.5)
16 South 36.4 ~ 40.0 1.82 Rocky 1.2 m

17 Darnah East 41.1 ~ 46.2 2.61 Rocky area

18 (2.6) Center 44.4 ~ 48.6 2.08 Soft soil

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

42 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

STR
No Day City Place °C Remarks
(K·m / W)
19 West 41.8 ~ 47.5 2.70 Soft, dry
July 25, Tubruq
20 East 40.2 ~ 42.1 1.01 Near sea
2006 (2.7)
21 East 44.4 ~ 48.9 2.34 Soft, dry

22 July 26, Ajdabiya North 50.5 ~ 54.7 1.94 Rocky area

23 2006 (1.9) Center 47.3 ~ 49.9 1.80 A little sand

24 Center 45.5 ~ 46.8 0.73 Soft sand

July 27, Surt
25 Center 34.0 ~ 35.2 0.54 Some water
2006 (0.9)
26 Center 38.0 ~ 40.1 0.87 Soft sand

27 South 42.9 ~ 45.3 1.52 Soft sand

July 28,
28 Center 45.8 ~ 49.5 2.03 60cm depth
2006 Sebha
29 Center 42.8 ~ 44.3 0.93 100cm depth
2.0
30 July 29, East 45.0 ~ 46.6 0.81 Soft soil

31 2006 East 44.5 ~ 47.4 1.57 Rocky soil

2. Standards for soil thermal resistivity

With the consideration of site measuring for 10 cities, it is recommended that soil
thermal resistivity be divided into three categories as below table, such as coastal,
desert and mountain areas respectively. The STR of other unmeasured cities shall be
determined, after carefully considering the soil and weather conditions of measured
cities.
< Table 2 > Recommended STR standards for cities
Soil thermal resistivity
(K·m / W) City Remarks

1.2 Tripoli, Surt Coastal area

Brown MT, Albayda, Ajdabiya
2.0 and Sebha Desert area

2.7 Benghazi, Algobaa, Darnah, Tubruq Mountain area

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

43 / 44 Version 1.0
 Cables

Appendix I : Transition joint for 11kV 3 core XLPE/Paper cables

The below figure is one of heat shrinkable transition joint kits suitable for 11kV 3 core
XLPE and Paper cables.

XLPE cable Paper cable

< Table 1 > Component of transition joint for XLPE/Paper cables

No. Descriptions No. Description
1 Inline connector 17 Constant force spring clamp
2 Stress relif mastic 18 Jubilee clamps
3 H.S. oil barrier sleeve 19 H.S. outer jackting tubing
4 H.S. conducting tubing 20 Plumbing metal
5 High permittivity void filler 21 PVC outer sheath
6 H.S. conducting breakout 22 Armor
Stress relif mastic cut end of
7 23 Inner sheath
XLPE conducting tubing
8 H.S. stress control tubing 24 XLPE insulation
9 H.S. insulation tubing 25 Conductor
10 H.S. screened tubing 26 Semi con layer
11 H.S. compression tubing 27 Paper insulation cover
12 Metallic protection case 28 Paper belting
13 H.S. adhesive lined side sleeve 29 Lead sheath
14 Insulating wedge EPDM 30 Steel armor
15 Tinned copper mesh tape 31 Jute impregnated outer sheath
16 Tinned copper earth braid -

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

44 / 44 Version 1.0
 GDU 2100
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Underground Lines

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Trench ·············································································································1
2.1 Depth of trench········································································································1
2.2 Depth of laying cables ·····························································································2
2.3 Width of trench········································································································2
2.4 Segregation··············································································································3
3. Types of Installation ······················································································3
3.1 Direct burial ············································································································3
3.2 In-ducts ···················································································································4
3.2.1 Calculation of conduit size·············································································5
3.2.2 Standard conduit sizes····················································································5
4. Cable Pulling··································································································6
4.1 Cable configuration in conduits···············································································6
4.2 Weight correction factor (K) ····················································································7
4.3 Sidewall bearing pressure (SWBP) ··········································································8
4.4 Jam ratio (J) ············································································································9
4.5 Pulling tension·······································································································10
4.5.1 Allowable pulling tension (P) ······································································10
4.5.2 Calculation of pulling tension ······································································10
5. Backfill and Testing of Conduits ·······························································11
6. Cable Markers ·····························································································12
7. Pillar Boxes···································································································12
8. Sheath Bonding Methods ···········································································13
8.1 Sheath induced voltages ························································································13
8.1.1 Flat arrangement single circuit·····································································13
8.1.2 Trefoil arrangement single circuit ································································14
8.2 Type of sheath bonding··························································································15
8.2.1 Single-point bonding····················································································15
8.2.2 Solid bonding·······························································································15

ii
 8.2.3 Cross bonding ······························································································16
8.3 Characteristics of each bonding method ································································17
9. Sheath Circulating Currents······································································17
9.1 Circulating currents and permissible current rating ···············································18
9.2 GECOL Case·········································································································18
9.2.1 In case of full load (800A) ···········································································19
9.2.2 In case of half load (400A) ··········································································20

iii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Minimum depth of trench ············································································ 1

< Table 2 > Minimum depth of cables ············································································ 2
< Table 3 > Minimum width of trench ············································································ 2
< Table 4 > Minimum spacing of cables ········································································· 3
< Table 5 > Depth of bedding materials ·········································································· 4
< Table 6 > Protective material for underground lines ···················································· 4
< Table 7 > Application of conduits ················································································ 5
< Table 8 > Conduit selection ························································································· 5
< Table 9 > Standard conduit sizes·················································································· 6
< Table 10 > Example of ratio D/d·················································································· 7
< Table 11 > Equation of weight correction factor ·························································· 8
< Table 12 > Example of weight correction factor ·························································· 8
< Table 13 > Equation of sidewall bearing pressure························································ 9
< Table 14 > Maximum sidewall bearing pressure·························································· 9
< Table 15 > Maximum pulling tension ········································································ 10
< Table 16 > Value of e fθ ···························································································· 11
< Table 17 > Kind of test stick ······················································································ 11
< Table 18 > Minimum cable size in pillar box····························································· 13
< Table 19 > Sheath induced voltages in flat arrangement ············································ 14
< Table 20 > Sheath induced voltages in trefoil arrangement········································ 14
< Table 21 > Characteristics of bonding methods ························································· 17
< Table 22 > Rate of length imbalance·········································································· 19
< Table 23 > Circulating current of 400 A and 800 A···················································· 20

iv
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Internal diagram of trench·············································································· 1

[Figure 2] Burial configuration of direct burial······························································· 3
[Figure 3] Burial configuration in ducts·········································································· 5
[Figure 4] Geometric positions in conduit ······································································ 6
[Figure 5] Sidewall bearing pressure ·············································································· 8
[Figure 6] Cable markers ······························································································ 12
[Figure 7] Configuration of pillar box··········································································· 12
[Figure 8] Sheath induced voltage ················································································ 13
[Figure 9] Single point bonding ···················································································· 15
[Figure 10] Solid bonding····························································································· 16
[Figure 11] Cross bonding ···························································································· 16
[Figure 12] Diagram of circulating currents·································································· 17
[Figure 13] Ratio of circulating currents to load currents·············································· 19

v
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ··········································································································· 21
B Example of calculating pulling tension ······························································· 22
C Cable trench drawings ························································································· 24
 Underground Lines

1. Scope

This standard specifies the general requirements for installation of medium and low
voltage underground lines and related equipment including pillar box, conduit.

2. Trench

The trench size usually depends on number and type of cables, number of conduits,
location of trench (i.e. footway or roadway) and any shared trenching arrangements.

2.1 Depth of trench

In order to minimize inconvenience to the public, trenches shall not be left open longer
than necessary. Sections of trench shall be excavated in the order in which they are to have
cables installed. The slope of digging trenches shall be kept from 1:0.1 to 0.5.
(Unit : mm)
Ground

Concrete plate, warning tape

500
300
100

100
Backfill with clean sand
Backfill with excavated
material
50

100 200
[Figure 1] Internal diagram of trench
Trenches for direct burial and in ducts shall be excavated to such depth but not less than
specified in table 1.
< Table 1 > Minimum depth of trench
Minimum depth (mm)
Cable types and
One layer Three layers
Installation method
Footways Roadways Footways Roadways
Direct burial 650 850 950 1150
0.4kV cable
In ducts 700 900 1150 1350

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

Direct burial 950 1150 1300 1500

11kV cable
In ducts 1050 1250 1650 1850
30, 66kV Direct burial 1200 1450 1750 1950
cable In ducts 1350 1550 2050 2250

Trenches shall be backfilled in layers and each layer shall be rammed. The bottom of
trenches shall be rammed to provide a flat firm bedding with the minimum depth of 50 mm
clean sand.

2.2 Depth of laying cables

Cables shall be buried at a sufficient depth to avoid being damaged by any disturbance
of the ground reasonably likely to occur. Therefore each cable shall be installed with the
minimum depth of the following table.
< Table 2 > Minimum depth of cables
Minimum depth of cables (mm)
Cable type
Under footways Under roadways
0.4kV cables 500 700
11kV cables 800 1000
30kV, 66kV cables 1000 1200
Note. The depth means distances from ground surface to upper-most surface of cable.

2.3 Width of trench

The individual conduits or circuits should be separated by a minimum of 100 mm.
Therefore trenches for direct burial and in ducts shall be excavated to such width but not
less than specified in table 3.
< Table 3 > Minimum width of trench
Cable type and Minimum width (mm)
Installation method One line Three lines
Direct burial 500 800
0.4kV cables
In ducts 550 1000
Direct burial 500 900
11kV cables
In ducts 600 1200
30kV, 66kV Direct burial 600 1100
cables In ducts 700 1400
Note : When 30kV, 66kV single core cables are buried direct, they are laid in trefoil formation.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

2.4 Segregation
Trenches may be shared with other underground lines such as water, sewage, gas
pipelines, telecommunication lines and the like. A minimum spacing of 300 mm shall be
required between power cables and other lines, except gas pipes with a minimum spacing
of 600 mm. Medium and low voltage cables shall be separated as much as practical in the
trench, preferably at least 300 mm apart.
< Table 4 > Minimum spacing of cables
11, 30 & 66kV 0.4kV Gas pipe Telephone line and others
Category
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
11, 30 & 66kV 100 300 600 300
0.4kV 300 100 600 300

3. Types of Installation

3.1 Direct burial

Direct burial shall be applied to the following places and the cables shall be laid directly
into a trench bedded in clean sand.
a) Where more installations are not expected in the future
b) Places which can be easily excavated in the future

The trench shall be completed with a smooth and level bottom, with no protruding rocks.
And it shall be partially filled with clean sand with a minimum depth of 50 mm between
the cable and the bottom of the trench before laying cables. All 0.4kV and 11kV cables
shall be laid in flat configuration, and 30kV and 66kV single-core cables shall be laid in
trefoil configuration.

(unit : mm)

200 100 100 200 200 100 100 200

(a) 0.4kV & 11kV cables (b) 30kV and 66kV cables
[Figure 2] Burial configuration of direct burial

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

After placement of the cables, any rocks or similar hard material that may have fallen into
the trench shall be removed. Clean sand shall be poured up to 100 mm above the top cable
or conduit, and then excavated material shall be poured up to 300 mm above the top cable
or conduit.
< Table 5 > Depth of bedding materials
Backfill material Clean sand Excavated material
Up to 100 mm From 100 to 300 mm
Depth
above top cable or conduit above top cable or conduit

The next step is that concrete plates shall be installed for 11kV, 30kV and 66kV cables
above the excavated material and warning tapes shall be installed for 0.4kV cables. The
protective material shall be centered over that cable or conduit. The clearance between
concrete plates or warning tapes and the upper layer of cables or conduits shall be kept at
least 300 mm.
< Table 6 > Protective material for underground lines
Voltage 0.4kV 11, 30 and 66kV Minimum clearance
Protective material Warning tapes Concrete plates 300 mm

In case of combined installations such as 0.4kV and 11kV cables, the clearance between
concrete plates and 11kV cables can be reduced up to 100 mm. Finally the trench shall be
backfilled to the surface with excavated material which shall be free of sharp rocks, and be
compacted. Direct burial has the advantage that heat is transferred more efficiently into the
soil than in ducted systems, thus maximizing permissible current carrying capacity of
cables. But it has the disadvantage that cables may be replaced by excavating the routes.
This method can be a little expensive in established areas.

3.2 In-ducts
In-duct allows easily for replacement of faulty cables, and facilitates construction in
cramped locations. In-duct shall be applied to the following places.
a) In all places where the cable route passes through across roads or concrete footpaths
b) In any place where it believes that future access may be restricted

Trenching and backfilling for ducted systems shall be carried out in a similar manner to
direct buried systems as descried above. Waveform pipes shall be installed at straight or
bending runs. And steel pipes shall be installed at roadway or driveway crossings.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

< Table 7 > Application of conduits

Conduit type Application area
Waveform pipes Straight or bending runs
Steel pipes Roadway or driveway crossings

A ducted cable run shall be designed to ensure that allowable cable tension is not
exceeded during construction. Namely conduits runs shall be as straight as practicable to
minimize pulling tensions. Conduits entering concrete pits shall be cut flush and carefully
rounded internally to prevent edges damaging the cable. Where spare conduits need to be
installed for future uses, they shall be capped to prevent ingress of foreign material such as
water or soil. But it has the disadvantage that the current carrying capacity of cable is de-
rated in comparison to direct burial.

(a) 0.4kV & 11kV cables (b) 30kV and 66kV cables
[Figure 3] Burial configuration in ducts

3.2.1 Calculation of conduit size

Formulas for calculating the minimum inside diameter of conduits are given below.
< Table 8 > Conduit selection
Number of cables per conduit Calculation formula
One 3-core cable D ≥ 1.3 × d and D ≥ d + 30mm
Three single-core cables (2.16 × d ) + 30 ≤ D ≤ 2.85 × d or D ≥ 3.15 × d
Note, D : minimum inside diameter of conduits
d : individual outside diameter of cables

3.2.2 Standard conduit sizes

When installing three or more parallel cables in the same conduit, ratios of 2.86 to 3.14
(ratio of inside diameter conduit to one outside diameter cable) shall be avoided to
minimize potential jamming, if possible. This does not apply to twisted assemblies
(triplexed, quadruplexede, etc) in normal installations. But this caution shall be considered

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

when multiple bends occur in the same conduit or long, difficult pulls are anticipated. The
internal diameter of conduits is generally 100 mm for low voltage and 150 mm or 200 mm
for medium voltage cables.

< Table 9 > Standard conduit sizes

Cables type (mm2) Conduit size (mm)
4C¯16 ~ 3.5C¯95 75
0.4kV 3.5C¯150, 240 100
3¯1C¯400 150
3C¯150, 240 150
11kV
3¯1C¯400mm2 175
30kV 3¯1C¯400, 630 200
66kV 3¯1C¯400, 630 200

4. Cable Pulling

Designers shall think that preventing from damaging cables during the pulling process
by paying attention to installation parameters and correctly sizing bends. The cables shall
be drawn smoothly into position with a minimum of stops and at a maximum speed of
12~15 m/min. The cable drum shall be placed so that the cable is pulled from the top of the
drum. On completion of a cable pulling operation, all cable ends shall be inspected for
damage. The length of cable laid shall be extended to compensate for damaged cable ends.

4.1 Cable configuration in conduits

Each cable’s geometric position has a unique effect on the amount of frictional force, or
drag, the conductors endure during the pulling. In addition, the position affects the weight
correction factor (K). By using the ratio of the conduit inside diameter (D) to the cable
outside diameter (d), designer can find what geometric position he can expect to see.

(A) (B) (C) (D)

[Figure 4] Geometric positions in conduit

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

Although the position of one cable is easy to predict (figure A), other positions are not as
obvious :
• Triangular position (figure B) : This position may occurs when three single-conductor
cables are pulled into a conduit where the D/d ratio is less than 2.5
• Cradled position (figure C) : This position may occur when three single-conductor
cables are pulled into a conduit where the D/d ratio is 2.5 or greater
• Diamond position (figure D) : This position may occur when four single cables are
pulled into a conduit where the D/d ratio is less than 3.0

To determine how the conductors will sit in the conduit, refer to the following table.
< Table 10 > Example of ratio D/d
Ratio of D/d
Cable size Outside diameter
Inside diameter of conduit (D)
(mm2) of cable (d)
100 mm 150 mm 175 mm 200 mm
11kV 1C¯400 53 mm 1.9 2.8 3.3 3.8
30kV 1C¯400 65.6 mm 1.5 2.3 2.7 3.0
30kV 1C¯630 72 mm 1.4 2.1 2.4 2.7

When 30kV three single-core 630mm2 cables are pulled through a 175 mm conduit, use
the ratio D/d to find how the single conductors will sit in the conduit. In this case, this ratio
is :
D 175mm
= = 2.4
d 72mm
Because this ratio results in a number less than 2.5, the individual cables will sit in a
triangular configuration in the conduit. If the three single-core 630mm2 cables are pulled
through a 200 mm conduit, the ration is :
D 200mm
= = 2.7
d 72mm
Because this ratio results in a number greater than 2.5, the individual cables will sit in a
cradle configuration in the conduit.

4.2 Weight correction factor (K)

Weight correction factor (K) is important because when two or more cables are pulled
into a conduit, the force developed between the cables and the conduit always increases the
sum of the individual cable weights. Therefore weight correction factor shall be considered
when calculating pulling tension. The equations below for determining weight correction

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

factor for specific installations are based on the inside diameter of the conduit and the
outside diameter of the cable.
< Table 11 > Equation of weight correction factor
No of cables Position Equation of weight correction factor
1 Single K=1
3 Cradled K = 1 + {(4/3)¯[d÷(D-d)]2}
3 Triangular K = 1÷{1-[d÷(D-d)]2}1/2
4 Diamond K = 1+{2¯[d÷(D-d)]2}
Note, D : inside diameter of conduit, d : outside diameter of cable.

The following table is the example of weight correction factor. In general, the K of
cradle configuration is higher than that of triangular configuration.
< Table 12 > Example of weight correction factor
Weight correction factor (K)
Configuration of
30kV Cable type Inside diameter of conduit (D)
cable
150 mm 175 mm 200 mm
Cradled 1.805 1.479 1.318
1C 400mm2¯3
Triangular 1.589 1.250 1.146
Cradled 2.148 1.678 1.426
1C 630mm2¯3
Triangular 2.684 1.405 1.212

4.3 Sidewall bearing pressure (SWBP)

Tension

SWB

[Figure 5] Sidewall bearing pressure

Sidewall bearing pressure is the radial force exerted on a cable being pulled around a
conduit bend or sheave. Excessive SWBP can crush a cable and is, therefore, one of the
most restrictive factors in installations having bends or high tensions. It can be reduced by

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

increasing the radius of the bends.

< Table 13 > Equation of sidewall bearing pressure
No of cables Position SWBP equation
1 Single SWBP = T÷R
3 Cradled SWBP = [(3K-2)¯T] ÷ 3R
3 Triangular SWBP = (K¯T) ÷ 2R
4 Diamond SWBP = (K-1)¯(T÷R)
Where, T : calculated pulling tension, R : radius of bend (inside radius)
K : weight correction factor

When the bending radius increases, the SWBP decreases. In addition, Each equation
defines the specific conductor in each conductor position that will experience the
maximum crushing force.
• Cradled position : center conductor
• Triangular position : bottom two conductors
• Diamond position : bottommost conductor

The maximum sidewall bearing pressure exerted on a conduit shall not exceed 2450
[N/m]. For example, when a cable having a maximum pulling tension of 5000 N that is
being pulled around a bend having a radius of 2 m, the SWBP is 5000 N / 2m = 2500
[N/m] and it exceeds the maximum SWBP. Therefore increasing a bend radius shall be
considered.
< Table 14 > Maximum sidewall bearing pressure
Over sheath type PVC Chloroprene
Maximum sidewall pressure (N/m) 2450 5000

4.4 Jam ratio (J)

When designing the size of a conduit, the possibility of cables jamming or wedging shall
be always considered. This usually occurs when three or more individual cables are lying
side by side in a single plane. As the cables are pulled through a bend, the curvature of the
bend tends to squeeze the cables together. But when one or two conductor cables and
multi-conductor cable are pulled around a bend, the possibility of cable jamming will be
very low.
D
Jam ration (J) =
d

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

Where, D : inside diameter of conduit (mm)

d : outside diameter of cable (mm)

Use the above formula to determine the likelihood of jamming. The possibility of
jamming is low when J is less than 2.85, and it is high when J is between 2.86 and 3.14.
Therefore the jam ratio of 2.86 to 3.14 shall be kept away.

4.5 Pulling tension

4.5.1 Allowable pulling tension (P)
When cables are pulled by a pulling eye or pulling grip, pulling tension on cables shall
not exceed the following pulling tensions.
< Table 15 > Maximum pulling tension
Pulling eye
Pulling grip
Copper conductor Aluminum conductor
70( N / mm 2 ) × A × n × a 40( N / mm 2 ) × A × n × a 5000( N / m) × L
Where, A : area of cable (mm2), n : number of cables installed simultaneously
a : coefficient of decrease for simultaneous installation
(1.0 for less than 2 cables, 2/3 for 3 cables and 0.6 for 4 cables)
L : connection length between pulling grip and cable (m)

When pulling single core cables, additional care shall be required to prevent twisting of
the cores, which can add to stress at bends. The cores shall be fed smoothly into the run
from multiple drums so placed and handled that the cores do not cross prior to entry. The
tension in each core shall be maintained as close as practicable to each other.

4.5.2 Calculation of pulling tension

The estimated pulling tension of one cable in a straight section of conduit can be
calculated from the following formula that does not consider changes in elevation.

Tout = Tin + ( L × W × f × K × 9.8)

Where, Tout = pulling tension out of the bend (N)

Tin = accumulated pulling tension going into the bend (N)
L = length of straight run cable to be pulled in meter (m)
W = total weight of cable in kg per meter (kg/m)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

f = coefficient of friction (usually taken as 0.5 )

K = weight correction factor

To calculate the tension out of a bend, the following formula can be used.

Tout = Tin × e ( f ×θ )

Where, Tout = pulling tension out of the bend (N)

Tin = accumulated pulling tension going into the bend (N)
f = coefficient of friction (usually taken as 0.5 )
θ = angle of bend (°)
e = natural log base
Bend multiplier ( e fθ ) is given the following table. f is taken as 0.5.
< Table 16 > Value of e fθ
Angle of bend 15° 30° 45° 60° 75° 90°
e fθ 1.14 1.30 1.48 1.69 1.94 2.19

5. Backfill and Testing of Conduits

Cable ducts shall be backfilled by using thermally stable backfill material. After laying
out all cables, clean sand shall be placed up to 100 mm above the top cables or ducts, and
carefully rammed by human power because the backfilling depth with clean sand is
considered to be enough for protecting underground cables. The next step is that concrete
blocks for 30kV, 11kV cables or warning tapes for 0.4kV cables in order to indicate the
presence of the cables, shall be laid at a depth of 300 mm above the top of the cables or
ducts and excavated materials shall be backfilled up to the surface. When reusing the
excavated materials for backfilling, good care shall be taken not to include sharp material
causing damages to cables.
After installation and backfilling of a bank of conduits, all new conduits shall be
thoroughly cleaned and an approved test stick of diameter 10 mm less than the internal
diameter of the conduit and 400 mm in length shall be pulled by hand through every
conduit in both directions to ensure their integrity.

< Table 17 > Kind of test stick

Inside diameter of conduit (mm) 75 100 150 175 200
Outside diameter of test stick (mm) 65 90 140 165 190

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

6. Cable Markers

The location of underground lines shall be marked with cable markers. The cable
markers shall be placed at each change of direction, roadway crossing, and along the route
of the cable at intervals not exceeding 25 m. In case of roadway crossing, they shall be
positioned at both sides of their crossing. They also shall be made by engraving or other
approved means with the letter of GECOL and ‫آﺎﺑﻞ آﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬.

‫آﺎﺑﻞ آﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬ ‫آﺎﺑﻞ آﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬ ‫آﺎﺑﻞ آﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬

[Figure 6] Cable markers

7. Pillar Boxes

A main MCCB shall be installed in the first node of pillar boxes, and four branch
MCCB or if necessary, six ones shall be installed in the second node of pillar boxes. The
rated capacity of MCCB depends on the total current of e ach branch line, and shall not be
greater than the cable current-carrying capacity. Its capacity shall be more than 1.25 times
the total current of branch lines and shall not exceed two times the total current of branch
lines. The minimum cable size is given in following table. Single phase customers shall be
evenly connected across all three phases for load balance.

11/0.4kV 11/0.4kV : On
TR TR
: Off

Pillar Pillar Pillar Pillar

Box Box Box Box

Another TR Another TR

[Figure 7] Configuration of pillar box

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

< Table 18 > Minimum cable size in pillar box

Category Rated capacity (A) Cable size (mm2)
Main MCCB 315 3.5C×240
80 4C×35
100 3.5C×50
Branch MCCB
160 3.5C×95
200 3.5C×120

8. Sheath Bonding Methods

8.1 Sheath induced voltages

All alternating-current-carrying conductors create an external magnetic field, which
induces voltages (Vs) to all other nearby conductors that are linked by its field. For
achieving a high transportation capacity of cables and preventing cable damages, cable
sheaths shall be grounded in at least one point along the cable circuit.

Conductor
Ic V S = X m × L × I c [V]
Sheath
L Xm : mutual impedance (Ω/m)
L : length of cable (m)
Ic : load current (A)
Vs

[Figure 8] Sheath induced voltage

8.1.1 Flat arrangement single circuit

Sheath induced voltages in flat arrangement are obtained from the following formula.

⎛ 1 S 3 4S ⎞
• Va = j 2ω × I c × ⎜⎜ − log e + j log e ⎟⎟ × 10 −7 [V/m]
⎝ 2 d 2 d ⎠

⎛ 2S ⎞
• Vb = j 2ω × I c × ⎜ log e −7
⎟ × 10 [V/m]
⎝ d ⎠

⎛ 1 S 3 4S ⎞
• Vc = j 2ω × I c × ⎜⎜ − log e − j log e ⎟ × 10 −7 [V/m]
⎟
⎝ 2 d 2 d ⎠
Where, S : spacing between phases (mm), d : mean sheath diameter (mm)
I c : load current (A), ω = 2πf

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

In case of S =174.7 mm, d = 59.8 mm and Ic = 400 and 800 A, f = 50 Hz

Therefore, sheath induced voltages of half and full load current are given the following
table.
< Table 19 > Sheath induced voltages in flat arrangement
Load Length
200 m 300 m 400 m 500 m
current Voltage(v)
Va, Vc 11 17 22 28
400 A
Vb 9 13 18 22
Va, Vc 22 33 44 55
800 A
Vb 17 27 35 44

8.1.2 Trefoil arrangement single circuit

Sheath each induced voltages in trefoil arrangement is obtained from the following
formula.

⎛ 1 3⎞
⎟ × log e ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟ × 10 −7 [V/m]
2S
• Va = j 2ω × I c × ⎜⎜ − + j
⎝ 2 2 ⎟⎠ ⎝ d ⎠

⎛ 2S ⎞
• Vb = j 2ω × I c × ⎜ log e ⎟ × 10 −7 [V/m]
⎝ d ⎠

⎛ 1 3⎞
⎟ × log e ⎛⎜ ⎞⎟ × 10 −7 [V/m]
2S
• Va = j 2ω × I c × ⎜⎜ − − j ⎟
⎝ 2 2 ⎠ ⎝ d ⎠

Therefore, sheath induced voltages of half and full load current are given the following
table.
< Table 20 > Sheath induced voltages in trefoil arrangement
Load Length
200 m 300 m 400 m 500 m
current Voltage(v)
400 A Va,= Vb =Vc 9 13 18 22
800 A Va,= Vb =Vc 17 27 35 44
Note. Sheath induced voltage by arrangement : flat > vertical > trefoil

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

8.2 Type of sheath bonding

8.2.1 Single-point bonding
Single-point bonding is the simplest form of sheath bonding where one side sheaths of
the three cables are connected together and they are grounded at one point along the cable
length, typically at one of the two terminals or at the middle of the cables.
Because there is no closed sheath circuit, current does not flow longitudinally along the
sheaths, so no sheath circulating current loss occurs. In a single-point bonding system, the
considerable heating effect of circulating currents in the sheaths can be avoided, but high
voltage can be induced along the length of cable, especially for long distance cables. The
induced voltage shall not exceed 100 V.

IJ IJ IJ
AA
상

B
B상

C
C상

ℓ1 ℓ2

ℓ1 ℓ2

[Figure 9] Single point bonding

Particular care shall be taken to insulate and provide surge protection at the end of the
sheaths to avoid danger from the induced voltages. The single-point bonding shall be
suitable for short cable lengths, such as outgoing cables from substations.

8.2.2 Solid bonding

One way to eliminate the induced voltage up to about zero [V] is to bond the sheath at
both ends of the cable circuit shown in following figure. The disadvantage of this bonding
method is that the considerable heat caused by the circulating currents in the cable sheaths
reduces the current carrying capacity of the cable circuit. Therefore, this bonding is not
suitable for any cable lengths, except submarine cables.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

NJ NJ NJ
AA
상

BB
상

CC
상

ℓ1 ℓ2

Δ E Δ E

0 ℓ1 ℓ2

[Figure 10] Solid bonding

8.2.3 Cross bonding

Cross bonding consists essentially in sectionalizing the sheaths into three minor sections
and cross connecting them so as to approximately neutralize the total induced voltage in
three consecutive sections.
NJ IJ IJ NJ
A I
i i

B
i

C
i i
ℓ1 ℓ2 ℓ3

시 IJ IJ
V스
유
기
전
압
[V ]
NJ NJ

L1 L 2
L 3

구 간 길 이 [m ]

[Figure 11] Cross bonding

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

The sheaths are then grounded at the beginning and end of each major section. This
bonding shall be suitable for long cable lengths. According to our study and field test, each
length of minor sections shall be constantly kept between 300 m and 400 m in order to
limit induced voltages and circulating currents.

8.3 Characteristics of each bonding method

When each bonding method is applied to any lines, it is needed to examine thoroughly
the below table and determine which method is better for underground lines. Especially,
when cross bonding is applied to long cable lengths, it shall be very important to install
each minor section at same intervals in order to limit sheath induced voltages. For instance,
when it comes to cable arrangements such as flat, vertical and trefoil one, the trefoil
arrangement is the best way to make induced voltages the lowest because its equivalent
distance is almost the same.
< Table 21 > Characteristics of bonding methods
Bonding Merit Demerit Application sites
Outgoing cables
Single-point Low circulating current High induced voltage from substations
Solid Low induced voltage High circulating current Submarine cables
Reduce induced voltage, Sheath loss happens Long-distance
Cross Return circuit for when length between cables
fault currents sections imbalances

9. Sheath Circulating Currents

NJ EA IJ IJ NJ
A I
is is

EB
B
is

EC
C
is is

ℓ1 ℓ2 ℓ3

[Figure 12] Diagram of circulating currents

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

Circulating currents are generated in a metallic layer of one single cables when that
cable’s insulated conductor is carrying load current (I) and that metallic layer is bonded to
ground at both ends. If it is metal and grounded both ends, there will be a current induced
into it. The magnitude of this circulating current depends on the load current in the
conductor and the resistance of the loop formed by this layer and the ground path.
Circulating currents (is) are given by :

jX m × I × (l1 + a 2 l 2 + al3 )
Isa = , Isb = a 2 × i sa , Isc = a × i sa
( Rs + jX s ) × (l1 + l 2 + l3 )

Where,
1 3
a=− + j , Rs + jX s : sheath impedance (Ω/m)
2 2
Xm : mutual impedance between conductor-sheath (Ω/m]
I : load current of cable conductor (A)
i sa , i sb , i sc : circulating currents running through sheaths (A)
l1 , l 2 , l3 : length of minor sections (m)

9.1 Circulating currents and permissible current rating

According to the below equation of permissible current rating, current carrying capacity
of cables is inverse proportion to the ratio of sheath loss (λ1) which is proportion to
circulating currents. Therefore circulating currents can reduce the current carrying capacity
of cables, especially when they become more than 20 % of load currents. So circulating
currents in sheaths shall be limited up to 20 % by decreasing the rate of imbalance length
between minor sections up to 30%.

⎡1 ⎤
Δθ − Wc ⎢ T1 + n(T2 + T3 + T4 )⎥
Permissible current rating ( I ) = ⎣2 ⎦
R[T1 + n(1 + λ1 )T2 + n(1 + λ1 + λ 2 )(T3 + T4 )]

9.2 GECOL Case

With our cable system simulator developed in 2001, we diversely calculate the sheath
circulating currents of cables installed in a trefoil arrangement by changing the length of a
minor section. The cable size applied is 30kV single-core XLPE 630 mm2 .

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

9.2.1 In case of full load (800A)

< Table 22 > Rate of length imbalance
Major section Major section
Imbalance Imbalance
Length between joints (m) Rate Length between joints (m) Rate
(%) (%)
Minor(1) Minor(2) Minor(3) Minor(1) Minor(2) Minor(3)

100 300 300 38.0 500 300 300 24.2

Over 20%
150 300 300 26.6 550 300 300 28.9
Of
200 300 300 16.6 600 300 300 33.3
Circulating
250 300 300 7.84 650 300 300 37.3 Load
300 300 300 0.0 700 300 300 41.0
350 300 300 7.07 750 300 300 44.4
400 300 300 13.3 800 300 300 47.6
450 300 300 19.0 - - - -
Where, Rate of length imbalance : ( @ / AVEminor ) × 100 (%)
@ : [( minor1 - AVEminor) + (minor2 - AVEminor) + (minor3 - AVEminor)] / 3
AVEminor : ( minor1 + minor2 + minor3 ) / 3

According to the below figure, when the rate of length imbalance is high, due to the
rising of mutual impedance, the ratio of circulating currents to load currents will increase
and then current carrying capacity will decrease.
70
60
50
40
Circulating 30
Load 20
(%) 10
0
-38 -27 -17 -8 0 7 13 19 24 29 33 37 41 44 48
Rate of length imbalance (%)
Rate of length imbalance (%)

[Figure 13] Ratio of circulating currents to load currents

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

9.2.2 In case of half load (400A)

According to the following table, Circulating currents in half load circuit are correctly
half of circulating currents in full load circuits if other conditions are equal.
< Table 23 > Circulating current of 400 A and 800 A
Length between joint Circulating current
Circulating /
(m) (A)
load currents
Minor Minor Minor Half load Full load
(%)
(1) (2) (3) (400A) (800A)
100 300 300 103 206 25.8
150 300 300 72 144 18.1
200 300 300 45.2 90.4 11.3
250 300 300 21.3 42.6 5.3
300 300 300 0 0 0
350 300 300 19 38 4.8
400 300 300 36.2 72.4 9.0
450 300 300 51.6 103.2 12.9
500 300 300 65.7 131.4 16.4
550 300 300 78.6 157.2 19.6
600 300 300 90.4 180.8 22.6
650 300 300 101.2 202.4 25.3
700 300 300 111.2 222.4 27.8
750 300 300 120.5 241 30.1
800 300 300 129.1 258.2 32.3

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

Appendix A : References

IEC 60423 Conduits for electrical purpose

IEC 60981 Extra-heavy duty rigid steel conduits for electrical installations
ANSI / IEEE IEEE guide for the application of sheath-bonding methods for
Std 575-1988 Single-core cables and the calculation of induced voltages and
Currents in cable sheaths
International Journal of Emerging Electric Power Systems
Characteristics and reduction of sheath circulating currents in
Underground power cable systems
BS 6031 Code of practice for earthworks
BS 6701 Code of practice for installation of apparatus intended for connection
To certain telecommunication systems
BS 7197 Specification for performance of bonds for electric power cable
Termination and joints for system voltages up to 36㎸
BS 8000 Workmanship on building sites
KS C 8321 Molded case circuit breakers
Part 1 Code of practice for excavation and filling
NS 130 Specification for laying of underground cables up to 22 kV

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

Appendix B : Example of calculating pulling tension

Three 30kV single core 630mm2 XLPE cables are to be installed in a 200 mm PVC conduit.
Unit weight of cable is 8.4 kg/m, and coefficient of friction (f) between cable and duct is
0.5.

④
30 m
20 m ⑤
30° (θ2)
90° ③
(θ1)
30 m
40 m

① ②

1. Cable configuration in raceways

Individual conductors may be sitting in a cradle configuration in the duct, because D / d =
200 mm / 72 mm = 2.8 is greater than 2.5.

2. Weight correction factor (K)

⎧⎪ 4 ⎡ d ⎤ 2 ⎫⎪ ⎧⎪ 4 ⎡ 72 ⎤ 2 ⎫⎪
K = 1+ ⎨ × ⎢ ⎬ = 1+ ⎨ × ⎢ ⎬ = 1.440
⎪⎩ 3 ⎣ D − d ⎥⎦ ⎪⎭ ⎪⎩ 3 ⎣ 200 − 72 ⎥⎦ ⎪⎭

3. Pulling tension (T)

T12 = LWfK = 40m × (3 × 8.4kg / m) × 0.5 × 1.440 = 726kgf = 7112 [N]
According to table 12, when θ 1 is 90°, e fθ 1 is 2.19

T23 = T12 × e fθ 1 = 7112 N × 2.19 = 15576 [N]

According to table 12, when θ 2 is 30°, e fθ 2 is 1.30

T34 = T23 × e fθ 2 = 15576 N × 1.30 = 20249 [N]

T45 = T34 + LWfK = 20249 N + {30m × (3 × 8.4kg / m) × 0.5 × 1.44 × 9.8} = 25583 [N]

4. Sidewall bearing tension (SWBP)

• Between 2 and 3 section

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

- bending radius (R1) : 2π × R1 × 90 / 360 = 30m, R1 = 19.1 [m]

(3K − 2) × T23 (3 × 1.44 − 2) × 15576
- SWBP1 = = = 671 [N/m]
3R1 3 × 19.1
• Between 3 and 4 section
- bending radius radius (R2) : 2π × R2 × 30 / 360 = 20m, R2 = 38.2 [m]
(3K − 2) × T34 (3 × 1.44 − 2) × 20249
- SWBP2 = = = 410 [N/m]
3R2 3 × 38.2

Since both SWBP1 and SWBP2 < 2450 N/m, no need to extend bending radius.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

Appendix C : Cable trench drawings

In case that all cables below are buried in conduits, the external diameter of each conduit is
as follows.
< Table 1 > Dimension of conduit
Cable size (mm2) Internal diameter (mm) External diameter (mm)
0.4 kV 3.5C¯240 100 ± 4.0 130 ± 4.0
11 kV 3C¯240 150 ± 4.0 188 ± 4.0
30, 60 kV 1C¯630 200 ± 4.0 260 ± 4.0

1. 0.4 kV Cables
( unit : mm)

Warning tapes Warning tapes

500 700
300 300

1150 1350

(a) In Footways (b) In Roadways

2. 11 kV Cables
( unit : mm)

Concrete blocks Concrete blocks

800 1000
300 300

1650 1850

(a) In Footways (b) In Roadways

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

3. 30 kV or 66 kV Cables

( unit : mm)

Concrete blocks Concrete blocks

1000 1200
300 300

2050 2250

(a) In Footways (b) In Roadways

4. Combined 0.4 kV and 11kV Cables

( unit : mm)

Warning tapes Warning tapes

500 700
300 300

850 100 1050 100

1100 1300
Concrete blocks : Concrete blocks :

(a) In Footways (b) In Roadways

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 / 26 Version 1.0
 Underground Lines

5. Combined 11kV and 30kV (or 66kV) Cables

( unit : mm)

Warning tapes Warning tapes

800 1000
300 300

1200 100 1400 100

1550 1750
Concrete blocks : Concrete blocks :

(a) In Footways (b) In Roadways

6. Combined 0.4kV, 11kV and 30kV (or 66kV) Cables

( unit : mm)

Warning tape Warning tape

500 700
300 300

850 100 1050 100

1050 50 1250 50

1400 1600
Concrete blocks : Concrete blocks :

(a) In Footways (b) In Roadways

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 / 26 Version 1.0
 GDU 2200
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Switching Stations

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Switching Station Sites··················································································1
3. 11kV Bus Bars & Bays··················································································1
4. AC Auxiliary power·······················································································2
5. Batteries··········································································································3
5.1 General considerations ····························································································3
5.2 Load classifications ·································································································4
5.3 Number of cells ·······································································································4
6. Battery Chargers ···························································································5
7. Instrument Transformers·············································································6
7.1 Current transformers································································································6
7.1.1 Accuracy rating and rated burden···································································6
7.1.2 CT connections between 11 kV feeder and switching station·························6
7.1.3 CT connections between switching station and transformer···························7
7.2 Voltage transformers································································································7
7.3 Control cables··········································································································8
7.3.1 Secondary circuits of CT ···············································································8
7.3.2 Secondary circuits of VT ···············································································8
7.3.3 DC control circuits·························································································9
7.3.4 AC control circuits ·························································································9
8. Relays ············································································································10
9. Objectives of Switching Stations ·······························································11
9.1 Lists of important customers ················································································· 11
9.2 Double-way supplying power················································································ 11
9.3 Merits and demerits of switching station ·······························································12

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Rating of bus bar, bays and number of bays················································· 2
< Table 2 > Example of load classification ····································································· 3
< Table 3 > Cell and battery voltage ··············································································· 3
< Table 4 > Allowable system voltage ············································································ 5
< Table 5 > Accuracy & burden of CT············································································ 6
< Table 6 > Accuracy & burden of VT············································································ 8
< Table 7 > Maximum length of CT secondary circuits ·················································· 8
< Table 8 > Maximum length of VT secondary circuits ·················································· 9
< Table 9 > Maximum length of DC control circuits ······················································ 9
< Table 10 > Maximum length of AC control circuits··················································· 10
< Table 11 > Protection of 11kV feeders······································································· 10
< Table 12 > Merits and demerits of switching station & RMU···································· 12

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Configuration of 11kV underground lines······················································ 1

[Figure 2] CT connections between 11 kV feeder and switching station························· 7
[Figure 3] CT connections between switching station and transformer··························· 7
[Figure 4] Single line diagram for protective relays······················································ 11
[Figure 5] Schematic diagram of double-way power supply········································· 12
[Figure 6] Two one-side extendable RMUs ·································································· 13

iv
 Switching Stations

1. Scope

This standard specifies the general requirements for AC · DC power, batteries,

instrument transformers and other things related to switching stations.

2. Switching Station Sites

It is essential to locate switching stations in areas that are well drained and clear of
underground and overhead obstructions. Sites shall not be located near rivers, creeks,
natural or man made watercourses.
Also the switching station shall be located the center of load as far as possible in order to
minimize capital costs and secondary line length. In all cases, the switching station shall be
connected into the 11kV network by use of a circuit breaker from two different primary 66,
30/11kV substations. Below figure is the configuration of switching stations.

66, 30/11kV 66, 30/11kV : On

S/S S/S
: Off

11kV Side Switching 11kV Side

Bus Bar Station Bus Bar

11/0.4kV 11/0.4kV
S/S S/S

Customers

RMU RMU RMU RMU

11/0.4kV 11/0.4kV 11/0.4kV 11/0.4kV

S/S S/S S/S S/S

[Figure 1] Configuration of 11kV underground lines

3. 11kV Bus Bars & Bays

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 /14 Version 1.0
 Switching Stations

The switchgear shall have continuous three phases electrolytic copper bus bars silver-
plated extending full length of switchboard. The bus bars shall be of adequate mechanical
strength and of uniform cross section having continuous current rating of 630 amps. They
shall be so arranged and supported that the permissible clearance is maintained under all
service conditions including short circuits. The bus bars shall be arranged in such a way
that they can be extended at the free ends without difficulty.
Usually it shall consist of at least 7 bays. One of them is for bus section switch which
shall be operated with a normally open point. Two of them are for incoming feeders from
two different substations and other two or more are outgoing feeders and their ratings of
bays shall be at least 400 A. The rest 2 bays are for 11/0.4 kV transformers which shall be
connected to important customers with double-way supplying power and their ratings of
bays shall be 200 A.
< Table 1 > Rating of bus bar, bays and number of bays
Ratings (A)
Min No.
Bus bar, bus section, bays
of bays Bays for outgoing for Tr
For incoming
7 630 400 200

4. AC Auxiliary power

AC power is a basic and important facility for charging batteries, equipment operation
and control in a switching station. The auxiliary power shall be supplied from the low
voltage panel of one 11 kV distribution transformer in a switching station.
The capacity of auxiliary power shall be selected as the enough capacity to supply all
branch circuits. Formulation for it is as followings.

S = A + α 1 B + α 2 C (kVA)

Where, S : auxiliary power

A : continuousness loads
B : continuance loads α1 : 0.5 ~ 0.75
C : intermittence loads α 2 : 0.25 ~ 0.4

The following table is the example of load classification in a switching station

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 /14 Version 1.0
 Switching Stations

< Table 2 > Example of load classification

Degree of importance State of using
Kinds of loads
Importance General A B C D
○ ○
Operation
Control

○ ○
Charger
○ ○
Communication

○ ○
Lighting

General lighting
○ ○
Indoor lighting

Motor for water supply and ○ ○

Appurtenant

draining
Fire extinguishing ○ ○
Ventilation fan ○ ○
Ventilation system ○ ○
Temporariness

Construction work ○ ○

Note. A : continuousness, B : continuance, C : intermittence & D : temporariness

5. Batteries

5.1 General considerations

The nominal voltage of single cell shall be 1.2 V and the nominal voltage of the battery
sets shall be 110 V.
< Table 3 > Cell and battery voltage
Category Nominal voltage
Single sell 1.2 V
Battery set 110 V

The duty cycle imposed on the battery by any of the conditions described here will
depend on the dc system design and the requirements of the installation. The battery shall
supply the dc power requirement when the following conditions occur:

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 /14 Version 1.0
 Switching Stations

a) The load on the dc system exceeds the maximum output of the battery charger
b) The output of the battery charger is interrupted
c) The ac power is lost

5.2 Load classifications

The individual dc loads supplied by the battery during the duty cycle may be classified
as continuous or non continuous. Continuous loads are energized throughout the duty cycle.
These loads are those normally carried by the battery charger and those initiated at the
inception of the duty cycle. Typical continuous loads are
a) Lighting, continuously operating motors
b) Converters or inverters
c) Indicating lights, continuously energized coils
d) Annunciator loads, communication systems

Non-continuous loads are energized only during a portion of the duty cycle. These loads
may switch on at any time within the duty cycle and may be on for a set length of time, be
removed automatically or by operator action, or continue to the end of the duty cycle.
Typical non-continuous loads are
a) Emergency pump motors
b) Critical ventilation system motors
c) Fire protection systems
d) Switchgear operations
e) Motor starting currents

The lists of typical loads are not a full catalog of the dc loads at any particular
installation. Loads applied to the battery are normally types as constant power or constant
current. However, for sizing purpose, loads are treated a constant power or constant current.
The designer shall review each system carefully to be sure all possible loads and their
variations are included.

5.3 Number of cells

The maximum and minimum allowable voltages which are shown in following table
determine the number of cells in the battery. It has been common practice to use 9-10, 18-
20, 36-40, 92-100 or 184-200 cells for system voltages of 12, 24, 48, 125 or 250 V
respectively. In some cases, it may be desirable to vary from this practice to match the
battery more closely to system voltage limitations.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 /14 Version 1.0
 Switching Stations

< Table 4 > Allowable system voltage

Category Maximum Minimum
Allowable system voltage(V) 90 V 132 V

Nickel-cadmium batteries shall be used for dc power supply and the nominal voltage for
the nickel-cadmium is 1.2 V. The manufactures of nickel-cadmium batteries shall provide
charging recommendations for each batter type.
When the battery voltage is not allowed to exceed a given maximum system voltage, the
number of cells shall be limited by the manufacture’s recommended cell voltage required
for satisfactory charging. The below explains the formula of necessary cell numbers.

maximum allowable system voltage

Number of cells =
cell voltage required for satisfactory charging

The minimum battery voltage equals the minimum system voltage plus any voltage drop
between the battery terminals and the load. The minimum battery voltage is then used to
calculate the allowable minimum cell voltage shown in following formula.

minimum battery voltage

Mimumum cell voltage = (V)
number of cells

A battery shall be replaced when its actual performance drops to 80% of its rated
performance because there is little life to be gained by allowing operation beyond this
point, and the rated capacity of the battery shall be kept at least 125% of the load expected
at the end of its service life. The details of battery guideline can be referred to the design
standard for battery and charger.

6. Battery Chargers

Battery chargers shall be used to convert ac to dc to charge station batteries and to

supply power to dc loads during normal operation. The battery chargers shall be sized in
accordance with the following formula.
1.1× Ah
I 1 = Lc + (A)
T
Where,
I1 is the minimum required charger rated output (A)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 /14 Version 1.0
 Switching Stations

Lc is the continuous dc load including future load growth

1.1 is the constant that compensates for the battery losses
Ah is the discharge from the battery measured in ampere-hours
T is the time to recharge the battery to approximately 95% of capacity in hours (10 hr)

7. Instrument Transformers

7.1 Current transformers

Current transformers are instrument transformers that are used to supply a reduced value
of current to meters, protective relays and other instruments. CT’s provide isolation from
the high voltage primary, permit grounding of the secondary for safety, and step-down the
magnitude of the measured current to a value that can be safely handled by the instrument.
The secondary current rating of CT shall normally be 5 A which matches the standard 5 A
full-scale current rating of switchboard indicating devices, power metering equipment, and
protective relays.

7.1.1 Accuracy rating and rated burden

The class of accuracy shall be 5P10 for protection and 1.0 for metering purpose. Rated
burden shall be 15 VA on the secondary. The total burden connected to each current
transformer shall not exceed the rated burden of CT. The rated burden shall be selected
from the below table, and include the burden imposed by the connecting loads.
< Table 5 > Accuracy & burden of CT
Category Protective CT Measuring CT
Accuracy ratings 5P10 1.0
Rated burden (VA) 5, 10, 15, 30

7.1.2 CT connections between 11 kV feeder and switching station

The secondary of a current transformer shall always have a burden connected because an
open circuited secondary can result in the development of a dangerously-high secondary
voltage. Energized but unused CT’s shall be kept short-circuited.
The metering and protective CT shall be installed between 11 kV feeder and switching
station. The 3 phase connections shall be constituted as Y connection and the common
point of CT shall be the bus side of switching stations as shown in below figure.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 /14 Version 1.0
 Switching Stations

11 kV Feeder

Measuring CT
Protective CT

Switching station

Protective CT
Measuring CT

11 kV Feeder
[Figure 2] CT connections between 11 kV feeder and switching station

7.1.3 CT connections between switching station and transformer

The 3 separate CT’s shall be applicable to the feeder protection which comes from each
bay of switching stations. The 3 phase connections shall be constituted as Y connection and
the common point shall be bus side of switching stations.
Switching station

11 kV 11 kV
Feeder Feeder

Protective CT

Measuring CT

Customer

[Figure 3] CT connections between switching station and transformer

7.2 Voltage transformers

The rated secondary voltage for line to line VT shall be 110V, and for line to earth VT

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 /14 Version 1.0
 Switching Stations

shall be 110/ 3 . Measuring VTs shall be installed between 11kV feeder and switching
station.
The class of accuracy shall be 1.0 for measuring VT. The total burden connected to each
current transformer shall not exceed the rated burden of VT. The rated burden shall be
selected from the below table.
< Table 6 > Accuracy & burden of VT
Category Measuring VT
Accuracy ratings 1.0
Rated burden (VA) 50, 100, 200

7.3 Control cables

7.3.1 Secondary circuits of CT
The secondary circuits of CT shall be done with 0.4 kV PVC insulated cables with
minimum size of 4 mm2 stranded copper conductors considering the mechanical solidity.
Also, cross-section area of each CT circuit shall be selected to satisfy as below formula,
and shall be chosen according to the maximum length of circuit as shown in table 7.

CT burden ≥ Meter and Relay burden + Control cable burden

< Table 7 > Maximum length of CT secondary circuits

Cable burden ( VA) Maximum length (m)
Cable size (mm2) 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
4 43 86 130 173 216 260 303
6 64 129 194 259 324 389 454
10 109 218 327 437 546 655 765
16 173 347 521 695 869 - -
25 275 550 825 - - - -
35 381 763 - - - - -

7.3.2 Secondary circuits of VT

The secondary circuits of VT shall be done with 0.4 kV PVC insulated cables with
minimum size of 4 mm2 stranded copper conductors considering the mechanical solidity.
Also, cross-section area of each VT circuit shall be selected to satisfy as below formula,
and shall be chosen according to the maximum length of circuit as shown in table 8.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 /14 Version 1.0
 Switching Stations

VT burden ≥ Meter and Relay burden + Control cable burden

< Table 8 > Maximum length of VT secondary circuits

Cable burden ( VA) Maximum length (m)
Cable size (mm2) 50 100 150 200 250 300 500
2.5 326 163 108 81 65 54 32
4 524 262 174 131 104 87 52
6 785 392 261 196 157 130 78
10 - 661 440 330 264 220 132
16 - - 701 526 420 350 210
25 - - - 832 665 554 332

7.3.3 DC control circuits

The cross-sectional area of each DC control circuits shall be not less than 4 mm2,
however, if there is no problem in the mechanical solidity, 2.5 mm2 can be applicable.
Generally, the maximum voltage drop in DC control circuits is not more than 10%.
Therefore, the cross-sectional area of each DC control circuit shall be selected as shown in
following table according to maximum one way length limits of DC control circuits.
< Table 9 > Maximum length of DC control circuits
DC Cable size (mm2) Maximum length (m)
power Control current (A) 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50
1 742 - - - - - - -
5 148 238 357 601 - - - -
10 74 119 178 300 478 756 - -
20 37 59 89 150 239 378 524 -
30 24 39 59 100 159 252 349 473
110 V
50 - 23 35 60 95 151 209 284
75 - - 23 40 63 100 139 189
100 - - - - 47 75 104 142
125 - - - - - 60 83 113
150 - - - - - - 69 94

7.3.4 AC control circuits

Cross-sectional area of each AC control circuits shall be not less than 4 mm2. However,
if there is no problem in the mechanical solidity, 2.5 mm2 can be applicable. Generally, the

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 /14 Version 1.0
 Switching Stations

maximum voltage drop in AC control circuits shall be not more than 10%. Therefore, the
cross-sectional area of each AC control circuit shall be selected as shown in following table
according to maximum one way length limits of AC control circuits.
< Table 10 > Maximum length of AC control circuits
Cable size [㎟] Maximum length
AC power [V]
Control current [A] 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50
5 310 498 746 - - - - -
10 155 249 373 628 - - - -
20 77 124 186 314 500 790 - -
30 - 83 124 209 333 527 731 -
Single-phase
40 - - 93 157 250 395 548 742
230 (V)
50 - - - 125 200 316 438 594
60 - - - 104 166 263 365 495
70 - - - - 142 225 313 424
80 - - - - 125 197 274 371
5 632
10 311 500 749
20 155 250 374 630
30 166 249 420 669
Three-phase
40 187 315 502 794
400 (V)
50 252 401 635 881
60 210 334 529 734 994
70 286 453 629 852
80 251 397 550 745

8. Relays

To detect the fault and cause the circuit breakers to operate when the current flowing
through feeders exceeds the maximum allowable current, protection relay systems for
11kV feeders shall be arranged both OCR and OCGR as shown in below table.
< Table 11 > Protection of 11kV feeders
Protection object Protective relay
Phase to phase Phase to ground
11kV feeder
OCR OCGR

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 /14 Version 1.0
 Switching Stations

The protection relays shall be rated for operation on 110V secondary voltage and 5A
secondary current. Therefore, the protection relay systems shall be applied as shown in
below, and a detailed connection about each protective relay shall comply with the
manufacture’s specification.
Switching station

51 51N 51 51N 51 51N

51 51N 51 51N

Customer

[Figure 4] Single line diagram for protective relays

9. Objectives of Switching Stations

For a high security of failure, the switching stations shall supply electric power to
important customers, such as hospitals, government facilities and hotels with alternative
source, and cover at least three outgoing feeders, and cut off both the fault current of
feeders and transformers. Due to the short distance between 66, 30kV S/S and switching
station, sometimes it can not cut off fault current well. They near a city shall allow the city
to switch between different feeders if one feeder goes offline. The below are the detailed
lists of important customers.

9.1 Lists of important customers

• Hospital, manufacturing, research facility and broadcasting station
• Government facilities such as city hall, museum and palace
• University, telephone, communication company and big commercial store
• Other places which GECOL decides

9.2 Double-way supplying power

Switching stations with single bus bar usually consists of 7 bays, namely one open-
circuited bus section switch, two incoming feeders, two outgoing feeders and 2 feeder

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 /14 Version 1.0
 Switching Stations

supplying for 11/0.4kv substations.

The switching station shall be connected by two different substations and a main circuit
shall have separate independent feeder be laid down for the important customers with a
separate transformer which supplies only the important customers, and if necessary, an
alternative feeder can supply power to other customer while just connected to the
important customers.
The main and alternative feeder shall be connected by an automatic transfer switch
(ATS). ATS automatically switches from a main to a standby power supply to feed a
common load in the event of loss of the selected main supply source. Upon restoration of
the mains supply, the standby contactor automatically drops out and the mains supply
contactor re-closes the mains feeder to the common load. It shall be capable of automatic
and manual operation. The figure 5 shows the schematic diagram of double-way power
supply.

66,30/11 Interlocking 66,30/11 : On

S/S S/S : Off

11/0.4kV 11/0.4kV
S/S S/S
Without feeding other customers With feeding other customers

ATS : automatic transfer switch

Important
Customers

[Figure 5] Schematic diagram of double-way power supply

9.3 Merits and demerits of switching station

Comparing with RMU, the switching station has its own merits and demerits.
< Table 12 > Merits and demerits of switching station & RMU
Category Switching station RMU
• reduce the interrupted area by • low cost compared with switching
Merits
operating circuit breaker station system

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 /14 Version 1.0
 Switching Stations

• cut off fault current of feeder, but • extend feeder and interconnect
not perfect between feeders easily
• high cost compared with the
• impossible to cut off fault current
combination of RMUs
Demerits • impossible to reduce interrupted
• difficult to set relays for the
area
protective coordination

Comparing with merits and demerits of each facility, the combination of two one-sides
extendable RMUs will be able to cope with the role of the switching station. Therefore
designers shall deeply consider whether switching stations are constructed or not for new
installation.

Busbar Busbar

66,30/11kV Outgoing Interconnection Outgoing 66,30/11kV

S/S feeder feeder S/S

[Figure 6] Two one-side extendable RMUs

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 /14 Version 1.0
 Switching Stations

Appendix A : References

IEC 60044-1 Instrument transformers – part 1 : current transformers

IEC 60044-2 Instrument transformers – part 2 : inductive voltage transformers
IEC 62271- High voltage switches for rated voltage above 1 kV and up to 52 kV
103
IEEE Std 946 IEEE recommended practice for the design of DC auxiliary power
systems for generating stations
IEEE Std 1115 IEEE recommended practice for sizing nickel-cadmium batteries for
stationary applications
IEEE Std. IEEE standard for metal-clad switchgear
C37.20.2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 /14 Version 1.0
 GD3 3000
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

30kV Overhead Lines

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Definitions ······································································································1
3. Support ···········································································································1
3.1 Type·························································································································1
3.2 Location ··················································································································2
3.2.1 Preferred location···························································································2
3.2.2 Avoidable location ·························································································2
3.3 Span between poles ·································································································3
3.3.1 Bending moment····························································································3
3.3.2 Clearance ·······································································································4
3.3.3 Recommendation of pole span ·······································································4
3.4 Burial depth·············································································································4
3.4.1 Burial depth according to the soil characteristics ···········································4
3.4.2 Reinforcing burial depth ················································································5
3.5 Anchor log···············································································································6

4. Guy & Strut····································································································8

4.1 Strength ···················································································································8
4.2 Location ··················································································································8
4.3 Guy wire··················································································································9
4.4 Strut·······················································································································10

5. Conductor·····································································································12
6. Assembly ·······································································································12
6.1 Cross-arm ··············································································································12
6.2 Insulator ················································································································13

7. Overhead devices·························································································13
8. Earthing········································································································14

ii
8.1 Allowance value of the earth resistance·································································14
8.2 Earthing conductor ································································································15

iii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Characteristics of wood poles ······································································ 1

< Table 2 > Maximum bending moment ········································································· 3
< Table 3 > Vertical clearance························································································· 4
< Table 4 > Burial depth according to the soil characteristics ········································· 4
< Table 5 > Characteristics of the Zinc coated steel wire ················································ 9
< Table 6 > Maximum mechanical load of guy wire····················································· 10
< Table 7 > Characteristics of strut poles ······································································ 10
< Table 8 > Maximum mechanical load of strut···························································· 11
< Table 9 > Characteristics of ACSR conductor···························································· 12
< Table 10 > Characteristics of Aluminum clad steel wire 30 mm2 ······························· 12
< Table 11 > Number of cross-arms ·············································································· 12
< Table 12 > Characteristics of insulators ····································································· 13
< Table 13 > Number of insulators················································································ 13
< Table 14 > Kind of overhead devices········································································· 14
< Table 15 > Allowance value of the earth resistance ··················································· 14
< Table 16 > Selection of bare copper earthing conductor size ····································· 15

iv
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] The burial depth at an inclined area ······························································· 5

[Figure 2] Foundation at a rocky region·········································································· 6
[Figure 3] Anchor log ····································································································· 6
[Figure 4] Anchor concrete block for overhead line························································ 7
[Figure 5] Installation direction of anchor log ································································ 7
[Figure 6] Guy installation······························································································ 8
[Figure 7] Longitudinal couple guys and Transverse couple guys ·································· 8
[Figure 8] Ground guy ···································································································· 9
[Figure 9] Strut ············································································································· 11

v
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ·············································································································· 16
B Maximum wind span ···························································································· 17
C Characteristics of wood pole ················································································ 19
D Design data for the strength of poles ···································································· 20
F Mechanical load on distribution facilities ······························································ 21
E Bending moment by external force ······································································· 23
G Vertical clearance above the ground ······································································ 24
H Calculation formula of the maximum load of guy ··············································· 25
I Calculation formula of the strength of the strut ····················································· 26
J The Needed guy wire for overhead lines ······························································ 27
K Assembly ··············································································································· 28
L Technical calculation of Voltage drop ···································································· 52
M In case of using AAAC 240 mm2 ·········································································· 54
N In case of Tripoli city (Maximum wind speed : 46.3m/s) ····································· 55
O In case of Jalo city (Maximum wind speed : 39.1m/s) ········································· 56
P In case of Ghat city (Maximum wind speed : 36.0m/s) ········································ 57
Q Steel post ·············································································································· 58
R Design sample ········································································································ 59

vi
 30kV Overhead Lines

1. Scope

This standard describes the fundamentals of designing 30kV overhead lines. This
standard covers supporters, conductors, insulators, and others needed to construct 30kV
overhead lines.

2. Definitions

Longitudinal load
Horizontal mechanical load in line with the line direction

Transverse load
Horizontal mechanical load perpendicular to the line direction

Vertical load
The vertical mechanical force applied to a pole

Bending moment
The external force applied to a pole horizontally above its groundline. These moments
are created by:
■ Wind on pole, conductors and equipment
■ The tension of conductors when there is an angle

3. Support

3.1 Type
We will generally use a 13m length wood pole as a supporter for the 30kV overhead
lines. The characteristics of 13m length wood poles shall be described in the table 1 as
follows.

< Table 1 > Characteristics of wood poles

Diameter at top (mm) Diameter Load per
Nominal Ultimate
at 1.5m millimeter of
Class length load
from butt deflection
(m) Minimum Maximum (kN)
end (mm) (N/mm)

Stout 13 195 255 320 15.73 8.3

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Note :
1) The tolerance of the length shall not exceed 1 %.
2) The tolerance of the diameter at the butt end shall not exceed 10 %.
3) Ultimate load means the load at 0.6 m from top of the wood pole.
4) Load per millimeter of deflection means the load at point of application of load.

Holes needed to install the fittings and others should be drilled in the field. Generally we
use 13m length wood pole as a supporter for 30kV overhead lines. But sometimes 13m
wood pole cannot withstand the load or secure the required clearance. At that time we can
use other supporter as a 30kV overhead line supporter to get the strength or the clearance.
■ Steel post
- Steel post can be used in the location where 13m length wood pole cannot
withstand the mechanical load.
- The location where 13m length wood pole cannot get the required clearance such
as a crossing valley.
■ Steel tower : The location where wood pole and steel post cannot withstand the load
and cannot get the required clearance.

3.2 Location
We will have to select the best location for pole erection. The followings describe the
preferred location and avoidable location.

3.2.1 Preferred location

To maintain the distribution facilities efficiently the proper decision of pole erection
location is very important. Preferred locations to be installed are as follow;
■ Accessible by manlift equipment
■ Next to property corners
■ Minimize the visual impact on the surrounding area
■ Meet the clearances from the ‘clearance standard’
■ Maintain the ruling span between poles, if possible.
■ Ease to expand the lateral line and install the guy.

3.2.2 Avoidable location

To secure the distribution facilities settling the pole at the next location should be
avoided. Avoidable locations to be installed are as follow;
■ On the outside of a road curve

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

■ Close to buildings or structures where conductors would violate the horizontal

clearances specified in the ‘clearance standard’
■ Directly behind fire hydrants
■ Limiting the access and use of a piece of property or building
■ Within sidewalks
■ Obscuring oncoming traffic at intersections and driveways
■ Known for a history of vehicular accidents
■ In an area that includes a significant amount of underground utilities
■ Places that are weak and worried over the collapse

3.3 Span between poles

3.3.1 Bending moment
The span between poles is affected by bending moment by external force such as wind
load and unbalance bending moment, the sag, etc. The next table shows the maximum
bending moment on the 13m length wood pole that wood pole can withstand. The applied
conductors are ACSR(Steel Reinforced Aluminum Conductor) for the phase and
ACSR(Aluminum Clad Steel Reinforced) 30mm2 for earth wire. The results are as follows.

< Table 2 > Maximum bending moment

ACSR Size Span Mr (kN-m) Resistance Maximum bending moment (kN-m)
(mm2) (m) moment of poles (M = Mp + Mw + Mc + Mi + Mu)
160 80 62.15
100 90 57.80
64.41
63 90 51.42
40 90 46.33
Note :
1) Mr refers to resistance moment of red wood pole in BS 1990(1984).
2) M means bending moment by external force according to the span between poles.
3) Mp means bending moment on the pole.
4) Mw means bending moment on the conductor.
5) Mc means bending moment on the cross-arm.
6) Mi means bending moment on the insulator string.
7) Mu means unbalance bending moment by the angle difference between both side load on the
pole in case of below 10 degree angle.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

3.3.2 Clearance
If we consider from the clearance point of view, the maximum span of the dead end
corner type insulator pole is 75m. In that case, the vertical clearance above the ground is
enough.

< Table 3 > Vertical clearance

Span Upper Insulator Sag Ground Burial Needed
Type
(m) (m) (m) (m) clearance (m) depth (m) height (m)
Dead end
75 2.8 0 1.4 6.5 2.2 12.9
corner
Note :
1) Refer to Appendix K (D).

The minimum clearance between phases is more than 900mm. The minimum clearance
between cross-arms at the angle pole is more than 1,000mm.

3.3.3 Recommendation of pole span

According to the technical calculation, the maximum span between poles can be 75m.
But considering the safety factor, the most of utilities in the world use the normal span
shorter than the maximum span. In case GECOL use ACSR conductor, we recommend
70m span as the normal span between poles of 30kV overhead lines.

3.4 Burial depth

3.4.1 Burial depth according to the soil characteristics
The burial depth of pole are various according to the utilities. KEPCO uses more than
1/6 of pole length as a burial depth for normal soil. For 13m pole length the depth is more
than 2.2m. But some utilities adopt the less burial depth of pole. The other factor affecting
the burial depth of pole is the nature of soil. The strength of the soil can be changed
according to the material consisting of the soil. In case the kind of the soil is hard and rigid,
1/6 of pole length suffices for the burial depth of pole. But if the soil is soft, 1/6 of pole
length doesn’t suffice for the burial depth of pole. In that case we should increase the burial
depth.

< Table 4 > Burial depth according to the soil characteristics

Kind of The strength Burial
Class Remarks
soil of soil (kg/m4) depth (m)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Soil combined and mixed with a lot of

A Hard 4.0×106 2.2
gravel, large pebbles, and general soil
Soil combined and mixed with sand,
B Normal 3.0×106 2.2
small pebbles, and general soil

C Sand 2.0×106 2.4 Sand without general soil

Soft loam, clay including a lot of

D Soft 0.8×106 2.7
moisture, humus, silt, etc
Note :
1) Hard soil means dry and stiff soil can be usually seen in the mountainous area.
2) Normal soil means general soil can be easily seen near the urban area.
3) Sand soft consists of sand that is not mixed with general soil. The side soil of rural roadway
and the soil of wild land are included.
4) Soft soil means the wet and fragile soil.

3.4.2 Reinforcing burial depth

It is possible to set up the pole at an inclined region. Because the ground is unstable in
that case, we should strengthen the pole setting. One of the useful methods increases the
burial depth of wood pole. If the poles are installed at an inclined area such as a slant of the
road, we should increase the burial depth as follows.

1.0m

A
30cm

A
Normal
burial depth
Normal
burial depth

[Figure 1] The burial depth at an inclined area

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

d d d
3 3
3
d
6

d 2d
2 3

d d
12 12
d: Normal burial depth
[Figure 2] Foundation at a rocky region

3.5 Anchor log

We will generally use an anchor wood log or anchor concrete block for a wood pole. The
top surface of an anchor log should be buried by 0.5m. If the tension of the line is high or
the ground is weak, design engineers can increase the number of the anchor log. The
drawings of the anchor log and anchor block are as follows.

1.0m 1.0m

20cm Min. Dia.

25cm Max. Dia.

Hole

[Figure 3] Anchor log

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

We will generally use an anchor wood log for 30kV overhead lines in rural area to install
easily. It is too difficulty to install the anchor log in downtown or suburb area because of
other underground facilities such as gas pipes, water supply facilities, sewerage facilities
and road conditions such as an asphalt road, a sidewalk. In those areas we can install the
anchor concrete blocks which are shorter than the anchor wood log.

100mm

60°

300mm

[Figure 4] Anchor concrete block for overhead line

We should install the anchor log in the same direction against the direction which is
imposed on by the bending moment. Sometimes we can install two anchor logs to
strengthen the stability of the important pole such as the express way road cross which is
wide and important. The anchor log should be installed like the next drawings.
For straight lines

Valley Road

For angle and deadend corner lines

: Pole : Anchor log

[Figure 5] Installation direction of anchor log

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

4. Guy & Strut

4.1 Strength
The guy should be installed to strengthen the resistance moment of poles, enlarge the
safety of overhead lines and balance the unbalance load. But the load burden of the guy
should be lower than 50% of total wind pressure load on the pole. More than 50% load of
the whole wind pressure load should be imposed to the supporter.

4.2 Location
In case the line is straight, the longitudinal couple guys should be installed in the same
direction of the line every 10 spans. Also the transverse couple guys should be installed in
the vertical direction of the line every 5 spans.

[Figure 6] Guy installation

L=1000mm (30kV) L
L
L=600mm (11 or 0.4kV) 1800mm
1800mm

L=1000mm (30kV)
L=600mm (11 or 0.4kV)
30° 30°
30° 30°

1500mm 1500mm

[Figure 7] Longitudinal couple guys and Transverse couple guys

The guy should be installed at the poles which are imposed to the unbalance load such as
angle poles, branch poles and dead end poles to withstand the unbalance load. The guy
should be installed at the place which is imposed to the composition of unbalance load and
is below 40cm from the phase cross-arm.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

L
L=400mm(30kV) 1800mm
L=200mm(11 or 0.4kV)
L=400mm (30kV)
1800mm L θ : 30° , 45° , 60°
L=200mm (11 or 0.4kV)
θ : 30° , 45° , 60°

θ
θ

1500mm 1500mm

[Figure 8] Ground guy

4.3 Guy wire

We will use the Zinc coated steel wire for guy wire. The characteristics of the Zinc
coated steel wire is listed in the following table.

< Table 5 > Characteristics of the Zinc coated steel wire

Nominal Number of Diameter (mm) Linear Rated
Code cross-section stranding mass strength
(mm2) wires Wire Conductor (kg/km) (kN)

4 27.1 7 2.22 6.66 213.3 39.3

6.3 42.7 7 2.79 8.36 335.9 60.2

10 67.8 7 3.51 10.53 533.2 93.5

12.5 84.7 7 3.93 11.78 666.5 116.9

16 108.4 7 4.44 13.32 853.1 199.7

The guy can be installed by 30°, 45° and 60°. The maximum mechanical load which the
guy wire can withstand is as follows.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

< Table 6 > Maximum mechanical load of guy wire

Maximum resistance load according
Nominal Rated
Safety to the guy angle (kN)
Code cross-section strength
factor
(mm2) (kN) 30° 45° 60°

4 27.1 39.3 13.1 18.53 22.69

6.3 42.7 60.2 20.07 28.38 34.76

10 67.8 93.5 1.5 31.17 44.08 53.98

12.5 84.7 116.9 38.97 55.11 67.49

16 108.4 199.7 66.57 94.14 115.3

Note :
1) Guy angle means the angle between the guy conductor and the pole.
2) Code 4 can be used for guy conductors of transverse couple guys and longitudinal couple
guys.

4.4 Strut
Design engineers should install the strut pole at the location which the guy cannot be
installed. The characteristics of strut poles are as follows.

< Table 7 > Characteristics of strut poles

Diameter
Nominal Diameter at top (mm) Effective
at 1.5m Crippling
Class length diameter
from butt load (kN)
(m) Minimum Maximum end (mm) (mm)

Medium 11 150 190 240 181.9 49.9

Medium 13 160 200 260 193.9 43.9

Medium 16 170 215 305 214.1 41.1

Stout 11 190 250 295 227.2 121.4

Stout 13 195 255 320 237.4 98.7

Stout 16 200 265 365 253.9 81.2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

The strut can be installed by 30°, 45° and 60°. The maximum mechanical load which the
strut wire can withstand is as follows.

< Table 8 > Maximum mechanical load of strut

Nominal Effective Rated
Safety Maximum resistance load at
Class length diameter strength
factor 30° of the guy angle (kN)
(m) (mm) (kN)
Medium 11 181.9 49.9 9.98

Medium 13 193.9 43.9 8.78

Medium 16 214.1 41.1 8.22

2.5
Stout 11 227.2 121.4 24.28

Stout 13 237.4 98.7 19.74

Stout 16 253.9 81.2 16.24

30°

1000mm

[Figure 9] Strut

The strut should be buried at least 1m. The angle between the overhead line pole and the
strut is 30° more or less.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

5. Conductor

We will use the bare stranded steel reinforced aluminum conductor(ACSR) for rated
voltage up to 30/66㎸ and an Aluminum clad steel wire for a an overhead earth wire in the
overhead power line. The characteristics of ACSR conductor is listed in the following table.

< Table 9 > Characteristics of ACSR conductor

Number of Conductor
Size Nominal cross-sectional area (mm2)
stranding wires diameter
(mm2)
Al. St. Total Al. St. (mm)
160 160 26.1 186 26 7 17.7
100 100 16.7 117 6 1 13.8
63 63 10.5 73.5 6 1 11.0
40 40 6.67 46.7 6 1 8.74

We will install ACSR 160mm2 for the main lines. The others are installed for the branch
lines according to the amount of loads. The characteristics of Aluminum clad steel wire 30
mm2 is also listed in the following table.
< Table 10 > Characteristics of Aluminum clad steel wire 30 mm2
Nominal cross- Diameter (mm)
Size Number of
2 sectional area
(mm ) stranding wires Wire Conductor
(mm2)
30 30 7 2.34 7.01

6. Assembly

6.1 Cross-arm
The L-type steel cross-arm is usually used for 30kV overhead line. The size of phase
cross-arm is 100mm wide, 100mm high and 3,000mm long. The cross-arm should be
installed 1.8m below from the top of the pole. The distance between cross-arms for the
angle pole is more than 1m. The cross-arm should be installed at the opposite direction of
the mechanical load. According to the line angle the number of cross-arms is as follows.

< Table 11 > Number of cross-arms

Single line Double line
Kind of insulators Ball & socket insulator
post post
Angle 10° or below 10° ~ 15° 15° ~ 30° Larger than 30°
Number of cross-arm 1 2 2 4

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

6.2 Insulator
We will usually use the line post insulator for the intermediate pole and the ball & socket
insulator for the tension, angle and dead end pole. The used insulators are as follows.

< Table 12 > Characteristics of insulators

Dimension
Nominal Minimum nominal
Insulator type (Height × Diameter,
voltage (㎸) creepage distance (mm)
Length)
Standard Line post 30 381 × 165 737
Fog Line post 30 508 × 190 1,143
Standard ball & socket 30 255 × 146 295
Fog ball & socket 30 280 × 146 440
Composite (DS-35) 30 525 ± 60 730
Composite (DS-46) 30 590 ± 50 950
Composite (DS-69) 45 750 ± 75 1450

Specific insulator creepage distance is determined by the pollution level of the region in
which the insulators are installed. IEC 60815 describe minimum nominal specific creepage
distance according to the pollution level. Therefore we should arrange the number and type
of insulators from the pollution level of the region. Considering the one insulator failure
condition, we will add one insulator to the number of the insulators per. From the pollution
level the number of the ball & socket type insulators is as follows.

< Table 13 > Number of insulators

The number of ball & socket type insulators according to
minimum nominal specific creepage distance
Insulator type
16 mm/kV 20 mm/kV 25 mm/kV 31 mm/kV
(Light) (Medium) (Heavy) (Very heavy)
Standard ball & socket 3 4 4 5
Fog ball & socket 3 3 3 4

7. Overhead devices

For the system protection and supplying the electricity to the customers various
overhead devices should be installed on the distribution lines. The installed overhead
devices are as follows.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

< Table 14 > Kind of overhead devices

Nominal
Type Pole type Installed location
voltage (kV)
3 phases
30/0.4 13m H Supplying point
Transformer
Single phase
30/0.4 13m Single Supplying point
Transformer
Load break switch 30 13m Single A third and two third of load at least
Voltage regulator 30 13m H Voltage upgrading point
Capacitor 30 13m Single Below Power factor 0.9
Recloser 30 13m Single Needed Point
Sectionalizer 30 13m Single Needed Point
Drop out switch 30 13m H or Single The transformer or branch lines
Cable rising 30 13m Single Cable rising point
Surge arrester 30 13m H or Single All overhead devices

8. Earthing

8.1 Allowance value of the earth resistance

The earthing system for each facility should be separated basically. But, if it is difficult
to get enough earth resistance in high soil resistivity area, the earthing system of each
facility can be connected to each other in common to save the cost of earthing system
installation. The restricted conditions are as follows.
A. The value of earth resistance should satisfy the most severe standard value.
B. If the earth resistance is not less than 1Ω, the earthing electrodes for neutral point
and the others such as outer metallic parts of devices, surge arrester, etc. should be
installed separately.
C. The earthing rods of the separated earthing systems should be installed at least 3m
distant.

< Table 15 > Allowance value of the earth resistance

Earth Earth
Distribution facilities Distribution facilities
resistance resistance
Overhead ground wire 50Ω1) Cable connection parts 10Ω
Surge arrester for feeders 20Ω Overhead transformer 10Ω
Outer metallic parts of
10Ω Surge arrester for transformers 15Ω
devices
Note :
1) The earth resistance of every pole should be earthed not more than 50Ω.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

8.2 Earthing conductor

The bare copper will be used for the earthing conductor. 0.5 second will be applied as
the operating time of the protective device. The selected earthing conductor size will be as
follows according to the earth fault current.

< Table 16 > Selection of bare copper earthing conductor size

Earth fault Earthing conductor Earth fault Earthing conductor
current[kA] size current[kA] size
5 25 mm2 20 50 mm2 ⅹ 2
10 50 mm2 25 70 mm2 ⅹ 2
12.5 70 mm2 31.5 70 mm2 ⅹ 2
16 50 mm2 ⅹ 2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix A : References

BS 1990 Wood poles for overhead power and telecommunication lines

Part 1 : 1984
Specification for softwood poles
KDS 3100 Support
KDS 3200 Assembly
KDS 3250 Guy & Brace
KDS 3300 Conductor
KDS 4900 Technical calculation
4901 The calculation of mechanical load on the pole
4902 The calculation of conductor sag
4904 The calculation of voltage drop
NESC Part 2Safety Rules for the Installation and Maintenance of Overhead
Electric Supply and Communication Lines
Sec. 23 Clearances
BS DD ENV Eurocode 1: Basis of design and actions on structures
1991-2-4
Part 2.4 Actions on structures – Wind actions
IEC 60815 Guide for the selection of insulators in respect of polluted conditions
IEC 61089 Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded conductors
ANSI C29.7 Wet-process – Porcelain Insulators – High-Voltage Line-Post Type

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix B : Maximum wind speed

(unit : m/s)
Station
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Name
AGEDABIA 17.0 19.0 21.6 19.5 18.0 17.0 15.4 17.5 13.9 18.5 20.6 19.5

ALKOMES 20.6 23.2 20.6 18.0 17.0 14.9 11.8 11.3 14.4 12.9 15.4 20.6

ALMARJ 20.6 20.6 16.5 23.2 15.4 12.9 12.9 11.3 18.0 20.6 20.6 20.6

AZZAHRA 15.4 13.9 12.9 15.4 15.4 12.9 11.8 8.7 9.3 9.3 10.3 12.9
BENI
19.5 20.6 18.0 20.6 20.6 14.9 15.4 18.0 15.4 14.4 17.0 15.4
WALEED
BENINA 21.6 25.7 25.7 20.6 25.7 18.0 16.5 15.4 19.5 17.0 23.2 30.9

BIEDA 15.4 18.0 13.4 15.4 12.9 10.8 13.4 11.3 12.3 12.9 15.4 12.9

BO. NJEEM 18.5 18.0 20.6 20.6 18.0 19.5 12.9 17.0 20.6 13.4 15.4 20.6

DERNA 30.9 25.7 25.7 23.7 23.2 23.2 18.5 18.5 20.6 23.2 25.7 28.3

ELKUFRA 19.5 20.6 21.1 21.1 30.9 21.6 20.1 15.9 15.4 19.5 15.4 19.5

ESSPEEA 16.5 15.4 12.9 15.4 15.4 10.3 9.3 17.5 19.5 15.4 15.4 13.4

FATAIAH 16.5 18.5 20.6 20.6 15.4 16.5 18.0 13.4 17.0 15.4 18.0 18.0

GARIAN 18.0 20.6 25.7 25.7 20.6 15.4 18.0 18.0 20.6 15.4 19.5 23.2
GASSER
9.3 10.3 12.9 8.2 7.7 6.2 6.2 5.1 7.7 7.7 7.7 9.3
KHEIHAR
GHADAME
19.5 21.6 22.6 25.7 24.7 25.7 19.5 18.0 18.0 19.0 18.5 22.6
S
GHARIAT 19.5 23.2 21.6 25.7 25.7 20.6 18.5 15.4 20.6 19.5 18.0 20.6

GHAT 15.4 20.6 25.7 36.0 30.9 23.2 18.0 14.9 18.0 20.6 15.4 15.4
HADBA
15.4 21.6 15.9 13.4 12.9 10.3 10.3 9.3 12.9 11.3 12.9 18.0
KHADRA
HON 24.7 21.6 21.1 23.2 21.6 32.4 16.5 17.0 18.5 20.6 20.1 21.1

JAGHBOUB 20.6 23.7 20.6 20.6 19.5 18.0 23.2 15.4 15.4 18.5 15.4 18.5

JALO 23.2 20.1 27.8 39.1 27.8 16.5 18.5 15.4 17.0 17.0 15.4 18.5

MISURATA 23.2 23.2 25.7 22.1 18.0 14.4 14.4 12.9 15.4 18.5 18.0 34.0

MIZDA 16.5 18.5 30.9 25.7 12.9 13.4 11.8 15.4 12.9 15.4 15.4 18.0

MORZZG 15.4 17.0 18.0 18.5 17.0 15.4 13.4 11.3 15.4 11.3 13.9 12.9

NALUT 20.6 25.7 28.3 22.6 25.7 18.5 15.4 19.5 18.5 18.0 25.7 30.9
NASSER
25.7 26.8 29.8 25.7 25.7 30.9 18.5 18.0 18.5 23.2 23.2 30.9
AIRPORT
OBARI 11.8 14.4 15.4 15.4 18.0 18.0 10.3 15.4 11.3 11.3 11.3 13.4

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

ROJBAN 19.0 15.9 18.0 16.5 20.6 18.0 17.0 17.0 18.0 20.6 16.5 15.4

SABRATA 19.5 23.2 20.6 20.6 20.6 18.0 20.6 18.0 23.2 18.0 18.0 18.0

SEBHA 18.5 20.6 24.7 22.6 23.2 23.2 21.6 16.5 20.6 20.6 15.4 18.5

SHAHAT 27.3 25.7 28.8 24.2 28.3 21.6 18.0 14.4 18.0 20.1 23.2 25.7

SIRT 20.6 20.6 23.2 20.6 23.2 20.1 12.9 14.9 18.0 18.5 20.6 21.6

SORMAN 12.9 18.5 15.4 14.4 12.9 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.3 16.5 15.9 23.7

SUANEE 7.7 10.3 18.0 15.4 18.0 12.9 11.3 11.3 12.3 15.4 10.3 10.3
TAJURA
12.9 11.8 10.3 18.0 14.4 10.3 10.3 13.4 10.8 9.8 13.9 11.8
AGRI
TAJURA
18.0 20.6 19.0 16.5 14.4 12.3 11.3 11.8 14.4 15.9 21.6 22.1
MARINE
TAZERBO 15.4 13.4 18.0 15.4 18.0 14.4 9.8 10.8 10.8 15.4 11.3 11.3

TRAGGEN 14.4 12.9 16.5 16.5 17.0 15.4 11.3 12.9 15.4 12.9 11.8 15.4
TRIPOLI
18.0 18.0 18.5 20.6 18.0 15.4 15.9 11.3 18.0 15.4 20.6 13.9
AIRPORT
TRIPOLI
31.9 32.4 46.3 23.7 22.6 24.7 17.5 18.5 23.7 22.1 24.7 26.2
CITY
TRIPOLI
28.8 33.4 33.4 23.2 19.0 19.5 15.4 16.5 18.0 18.0 18.0 24.2
SEAPORT
YEFRAN 18.5 31.9 23.2 20.6 21.1 20.6 18.5 12.9 18.0 15.4 20.6 16.5

ZAWIA 18.5 18.0 19.5 15.4 15.4 15.4 15.4 12.9 15.4 12.9 15.4 20.6

ZINTAN 18.5 24.7 19.5 23.2 23.2 18.0 17.0 23.2 18.0 20.6 19.5 23.2

ZUARA 25.7 23.2 20.6 20.6 21.6 16.5 17.0 17.0 18.0 20.6 33.4 23.2

Maximum 31.9 33.4 46.3 39.1 30.9 32.4 23.2 23.2 23.7 23.2 33.4 34.0

Note : The maximum wind speeds at 3 weather offices exceed 35m/s three times.
1) Jalo weather station : 39.1 m/s in April 1972.
2) Tripoli city weather station : 46.3 m/s in March 1973.
3) Ghat weather station : 36.0 m/s in April 1991.

Above maximum wind speed data are the results measured for a few decades. Therefore
we should consider the above maximum wind speed data to calculate the wind load on the
distribution lines. In most regions the maximum wind speed is less than 35 m/s. But in
some regions the maximum wind speed is more than 35 m/s. The frequency of wind speed
exceeding 35 m/s is 3. As a result, 35 m/s will be applied to all regions except Jalo, Tripoli
city and Ghat by the maximum wind speed to design the distribution lines more efficiently.
Design engineers should perform a technical calculation for the specific regions and
strengthen the distribution lines by the results of the technical calculation.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix C : Characteristics of wood pole

Nominal Diameter at top Minimum diameter Minimum

Pole Depth
length at 1.5m from butt diameter at the
class (m) Min Max Average
(m) end (mm) ground (mm)
(mm) (mm) (mm)
9 1.5 190 240 215.0 275 275.0

10 1.7 190 245 217.5 285 282.8

11 1.8 190 250 220.0 295 291.7

13 2.2 195 255 225.0 320 312.4

14 2.4 195 255 225.0 335 324.9

15 2.5 195 260 227.5 350 338.5

Stout
16 2.7 200 265 232.5 365 351.3

17 2.9 200 265 232.5 375 359.2

18 3.0 200 265 232.5 390 372.7

20 3.4 200 265 232.5 415 392.9

22 3.7 200 265 232.5 435 409.8
24 4.0 200 265 232.5 470 440.0
Note : The characteristics of wood pole are based on the characteristics of redwood in BS
1990 : part1 : 1984.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix D : Design data for the strength of poles

Pole Nominal Depth Section modulus(Z) Ultimate bending Mr(fZ / SF)

Class length (m) (m) (mm3) moment(fZ) (N-m) (kN-m)

9 1.5 2,041,728 109,845 43.94

10 1.7 2,220,435 119,459 47.78

11 1.8 2,436,740 131,097 52.44

13 2.2 2,993,181 161,033 64.41

14 2.4 3,367,046 181,147 72.46

15 2.5 3,807,816 204,860 81.94

Stout
16 2.7 4,256,321 228,990 91.60

17 2.9 4,549,974 244,789 97.92

18 3.0 5,082,508 273,439 109.38

20 3.4 5,954,509 320,353 128.14

22 3.7 6,756,406 363,495 145.40

24 4.0 8,362,920 449,925 179.97

The loads imposed on the poles are assumed to be applied 0.6m from the top of the pole
and are based on ‘mean ultimate bending stress 53.8 N/mm2’ for redwood pole. The
Maximum resistance moment Mr is calculated according to simple bending theory and
assuming a rigidly supported cantilever correspond to the mean ultimate strength of
unsupported poles of the specified sizes. They are based on the strength at the critical cross
section which occurs at the groundline. The value of the safety factor is usually 2.5 for a
wood pole. Maximum resistance moment Mr (in kN-m) is given by the expression:
fZ
Mr =
SF
Where
f is the ultimate bending stress (in N/ mm2);
Z is the section modulus (in mm3) at the critical section of diameter dc and is given by
πdc 3
32
SF is the safety factor.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix E : Mechanical load on distribution facilities

The kind of mechanical loads on the distribution facilities is the wind load, unbalance load,
the linear mass of the facilities, etc. According to the direction of load, we can roughly
divide into vertical load, perpendicular horizontal load and longitude horizontal load. In
general it is too much to consider the vertical load strength of wood pole. In mechanical
designing, we usually only consider the horizontal load. The most important load imposing
on the distribution facilities is the wind load. The wind load imposing on the distribution
facilities is affected by the shape of distribution facilities and a loaded area. The wind
pressure can be calculated by the next equation.
1
p= ρV 2 C
2
Where
p means the wind pressure (in kN/㎡).
ρ means the air density (in kg·sec2/m4). The value of ρ is 0.125 at 760mmHg air pressure.
V means the maximum wind speed (in m/s). The value of V is 35m/s.
C means the wind pressure coefficient. The value is known by the experiment.
Conductor : 1
Round type Support : 0.8
Crossarm : 1.6
Insulator : 1.4

The wind load can be expressed by the next equation.

P = pA
Where
P means the wind load (in kN)
p means the wind pressure (in kN/m2).
A means the load area (in ㎡).

Therefore the wind pressures are as follows.

Facilities Wood pole(Wp) Wire(Ww) Insulator(Wi) Crossarm(Wc)
Wind pressure
0.5880 0.7448 1.0388 1.1956
(kN/m2)
Note : The applied maximum wind speed is 35 m/s.

The bending moment imposed on the pole by the wind load can be calculated by the next

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

equation.
D 0 H 2 KH 3
Mp = Wp ( − ) (in kN-m)
2000 3
Where
Mp means the bending moment imposed on the wood pole by the wind load (in kN-m);
Wp means the wind pressure per unit area on the wood pole (in kN/㎡)
D0 means the diameter of pole at the ground line (in mm).
H means the distance from the ground line to the top of the pole (in m).
K means the slope factor.
D 0 − dc
K=
1000 H
Where
dc means the diameter of pole at the top (in mm).

The bending moment imposed on wire by the wind load can be calculated by the next
equation.

Mw = SWw(
∑ dh ) (in kN-m)
1000

Where
Mw means the bending moment imposed on the wire by the wind load (in kN-m);
S means the span between poles (in m).
Ww means the wind pressure per unit area on the wire (in kN/m2)
d means the diameter of the wire (in mm).
h means the distance from the ground line to the point of application of the load (in m).

The bending moment imposed on insulator by the wind load can be calculated by the next
equation.

Mi = Wi ∑ Aih (in kN-m)

Where
Mi means the bending moment imposed on the insulator string by the wind load (in kN-m);
Wi means the wind pressure per unit area on the insulator string (in kN/m2)
Ai means the loaded area of the insulator (in m2)
h means the distance from the ground line to the point of application of the load (in m).

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

The bending moment imposed on insulator by the wind load can be calculated by the next
equation.

Mc = Wc ∑ Ach (in kN-m)

Where
Mc means the bending moment imposed on the crossarm by the wind load (in kN-m);
Wc means the wind pressure per unit area on the crossarm (in kN/m2)
Ac means the loaded area of the crossarm (in m2)
h means the distance from the ground line to the point of application of the load (in m).

The resultant bending moment imposed on the conductor at the angle pole can be
calculated by the next equation.

Mu = ∑ Tuh (in kN-m)

Where
Mu means the resultant bending moment imposed on the conductor at the angle pole (in
kN-m);
Tu means the resultant tension imposed on the conductor at the angle pole (in kN)
h means the distance from the ground line to the point of application of the load (in m).

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix F : Bending moment by external force

M (kN-m)
Mu (kN-m) Mi (kN-m)
Span Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
Type 10° angle on insulator
(m) [Mp + Mw + on Poles on wire
Unbalance strimg
Mi +Mu]
50 40.22 6.91 21.26
55 42.53 7.09 23.38
60 44.89 7.32 25.51
65 47.28 7.59 27.64
70 49.70 7.88 29.76
Post 75 52.03 8.08 8.03 31.89 4.03
80 54.38 8.31 34.01
85 56.76 8.56 36.14
90 59.14 8.82 38.26
95 61.46 9.01 40.39
100 63.79 9.22 42.52
50 48.38 6.91 20.61
55 50.62 7.09 22.67
60 52.92 7.32 24.73
65 55.25 7.59 26.80
70 57.60 7.88 28.86
Ten
75 59.86 8.08 8.03 30.92 12.83
sion
80 62.15 8.31 32.98
85 64.46 8.56 35.04
90 66.78 8.82 37.10
95 67.21 9.01 39.16
100 69.48 9.22 41.22

In case of tension pole, the maximum bending moment which can be loaded to 13m length
stout wood pole loads in 85m span. In this case, the wind direction is perpendicular to the
line and the maximum angle of poles is 10°.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix G : Vertical clearance above the ground

(unit : m)
E
A B C D A+B+C+D+E
Type Span(m) Burial
Upper Insulator Sag Ground Need height
depth
50 0.6 2.2 11.1
55 0.8 2.2 11.3
60 0.9 2.2 11.4
65 1.1 2.2 11.6
70 1.2 2.2 11.7
Tension 75 1.8 0 1.4 6.5 2.2 11.9
80 1.6 2.2 12.1
85 1.8 2.2 12.3
90 2.0 2.2 12.5
95 2.3 2.2 12.8
100 2.5 2.2 13.0
50 0.6 2.2 12.1
55 0.8 2.2 12.3
60 0.9 2.2 12.4
65 1.1 2.2 12.6
70 1.2 2.2 12.7
Dead
end 75 2.8 0 1.4 6.5 2.2 12.9
corner
80 1.6 2.2 13.1
85 1.8 2.2 13.3
90 2.0 2.2 13.5
95 2.3 2.2 13.8
100 2.5 2.2 14.0

In case of dead end corner pole, the maximum span of 13m pole which can be extended to
75m. The sag is much related with the unbalance tension of the dead end pole and the dead
end corner pole. The smaller decreases the sag, the more increases the tension imposed on
the pole. Therefore design engineers should design so that the distribution lines can
maintain the proper sag.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix H : The calculation formula of the maximum load of ground

guy

L=1000mm (30kV) ΣT
L=600mm (11 or 0.4kV)
1800mm

θ h
h0

The mechanical load Tg (in N) which the guy should withstand can be given by the next
expression.
F (∑ Th − Mr + Mp )
Tg =
h0 sin θ
Where
Tg means the mechanical load imposed on the guy wire. (in N);
F is safety factor of the guy whose value is usually 1.5.
T means the mechanical load on the dead end pole.
Mr means the resistance bending moment of the pole.
Mp means the bending moment on the pole by wind pressure.
h means the distance from the ground to the load application point.
h0 means the distance from the ground to the point which the guy is attached to.
θ means the angle between the pole and the guy wire.
.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix I : The calculation formula of the strength of the strut

Where struts are used, the ability of the pole to resist the crippling loads due to the vertical
component of the forces in the struts should be considered. The ultimate crippling loads are
calculated from the Euler formula. The crippling loads Fc (in N) are given by the
expression.

0.00411de 4
Fc =
l2
Where
l is the effective length, which is taken as the length between the top of the pole and the
ground lines (in m).
de is the effective diameter (in mm), given by the expression.

( L − D + 0.9)(db − dt )
de = dt +
3( L − 1.5)
Where
L is the full length (in m).
D is the depth of planting (in m).
dt is the top diameter (in mm).
db is the diameter at 1.5m from the butt end (in mm).

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix J : The Needed guy wire for overhead lines

A. Dead end pole

Needed
Distance Guy Guy
Conductor Size No. of bending
from the height strength Code
type (mm2) conductors moment
ground (m) (m) (kN-m)
(kN-m)
ACSR 160 3 9 8.60
ACSR 30 1 10.8 8.60 15.43 6.3(30°)
Sum 132.67 8.60
ACSR 100 3 9 8.60
ACSR 30 1 10.8 8.60 10.22 4(30°)
Sum 87.85 8.60
ACSR 63 3 9 8.60
ACSR 30 1 10.8 8.60 6.76 4(30°)
Sum 58.15 8.60
ACSR 40 3 9 8.60
ACSR 30 1 10.8 8.60 4.19 4(30°)
Sum 36.01 8.60
Note :
1) This table is calculated under the ruling span.
2) The value of the basic sag applied to 70m ruling span is 1.2m.

B. Dead end corner pole

Distance Needed guy strength (kN-m) by angle
Conductor Size No. of
from the
type (mm2) conductors 30° 45° 60° 90°
ground (m)
ACSR 160 3 9
7.99 11.81 15.43 21.82
ACSR 30 1 10.8
ACSR 100 3 9
5.29 7.82 10.22 14.45
ACSR 30 1 10.8
ACSR 63 3 9
3.50 5.18 6.76 9.56
ACSR 30 1 10.8
ACSR 40 3 9
2.17 3.20 4.19 5.92
ACSR 30 1 10.8

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

28 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix K : Assembly

A. Zero to 10 degree angle post pole

11

10

300 275

300
9

1800 4

3000

1370 1370

130 470 900 130

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

29 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

- Quantities of materials for Zero to 10 degree angle post pole

Detailed Specification Qua

No Description Unit
Item Number ntity
1 Support Stout Wood Pole 13M 1011034 EA 1.0
2 Anchor log Wood Log 2M 1081050 EA 1.0
Steel Reinforced Aluminum
3 ACSR 160 1630062 M 214.2
Conductor 160 mm2
Armor rod for ACSR 160 mm2
4 Armor rod 1203638 EA 3.0
1,000mm
Crossarm single set
5 Crossarm 1230010 EA 1.0
100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000
6 Line Post Line Post Insulator 381ⅹ165 1432120 EA 3.0
7 Insulator pin Insulator Pin for Line Post, 92mm 1231210 EA 3.0
1200537 or
8 Tie Wire Tie Wire for Aluminum 5.0mm M 7.8
1200538
9 ACSR 30 Aluminum Clad Steel Wire 30 mm2 1650053 M 71.4
Earth wire Earth wire support set
10 1236610 EA 1.0
support 50ⅹ50ⅹ4ⅹ600
1233710 or
11 PG clamp Parallel groove clamp PG-1 1233720 or EA 1.0
1233730

* All materials are calculated and selected in condition of pollution level 2.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

30 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

B. 10 to 15 degree angle post pole

11

10
300 275
9

300
1800
4

5
3

3000

1370 1370

130 470 900 130

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

31 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

- Quantities of materials for 10 to 15 degree angle post pole

Detailed Specification Qua

No Description Unit
Item Number ntity

1 Support Stout Wood Pole 13M 1011034 EA 1.0

2 Anchor log Wood Log 2M 1081050 EA 1.0
Steel Reinforced Aluminum
3 ACSR 160 1630062 M 214.2
Conductor 160 mm2
Armor rod for ACSR 160 mm2
4 Armor rod 1203638 EA 3.0
1,000mm
Crossarm double set
5 Crossarm 1230020 EA 1.0
100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000
6 Line Post Line Post Insulator 381 ⅹ 165 1432120 EA 6.0
7 Insulator pin Insulator Pin for Line Post, 92mm 1231210 EA 6.0
1200537 or
8 Tie Wire Tie Wire for Aluminum 5.0mm M 15.6
1200538
9 ACSR 30 Aluminum Clad Steel Wire 30 mm2 1650053 M 71.4
Earth wire Earth wire support set
10 1236610 EA 1.0
support 50ⅹ50ⅹ4ⅹ600
1233710 or
11 PG clamp Parallel groove clamp PG-1 1233720 or EA 1.0
1233730

* All materials are calculated and selected in condition of pollution level 2.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

32 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

C. 15 to 30 degree angle tension pole

15

300 275

300 3
6
1800 9

16 14

470 730

300 1200 1200 300

3000

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

33 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

- Quantities of materials for 15 to 30 degree angle tension pole

Detailed Specification Qua

No Description Unit
Item Number ntity

1 Support Stout Wood Pole 13M 1011034 EA 1.0

2 Anchor log Wood Log 2M 1081050 EA 1.0
Steel Reinforced Aluminum
3 ACSR 160 1630062 M 214.2
Conductor 160 mm2
Armor rod for ACSR 160 mm2
4 Armor rod 1203638 EA 1.0
1,000mm
Crossarm double set
5 Crossarm 1230020 EA 1.0
100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000
6 Line Post Line Post Insulator 381ⅹ165 1432120 EA 1.0
7 Insulator pin Insulator Pin for Line Post, 92mm 1231210 EA 1.0
1200537 or
8 Tie Wire Tie Wire for Aluminum 5.0mm M 2.6
1200538
Ball &
Socket 1400010 or
9 Ball & Socket 255ⅹ146, 70kN EA 24.0
(Standard) 1400110
Insulator
Deadend
10 clamp for Deadend clamp, 70kN 1203110 EA 6.0
conductor
11 Socket eye Socket eye, 70kN 1202810 EA 6.0
12 Ball eye Ball eye, 70kN 1202110 EA 6.0
Anchor
13 Anchor shackle, 70kN 1202010 EA 6.0
shackle
14 ACSR 30 Aluminum Clad Steel Wire 30 mm2 1650053 M 71.4
Earth wire Earth wire support set
15 1236610 EA 2.0
support 50ⅹ50ⅹ4ⅹ600
Deadend
16 clamp for Deadend clamp, 40kN 1236700 EA 2.0
earth wire
* All materials are calculated and selected in condition of pollution level 2.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

34 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

D. 30 or more degree dead end corner pole

17

300 275

300

16
1800
9
5
6

1000

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

35 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

- Quantities of materials for 30 or more degree dead end corner pole

Specification Qua
No Detailed Item Description Unit
Number ntity
1 Support Stout Wood Pole 13M 1011034 EA 1.0
2 Anchor log Wood Log 2M 1081050 EA 1.0
Steel Reinforced Aluminum
3 ACSR 160 1630062 M 214.2
Conductor 160 mm2
Armor rod for ACSR 160 mm2
4 Armor rod 1203638 EA 3.0
1,000mm
Crossarm double set
5 Crossarm 1230020 EA 2.0
100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000
6 Line Post Line Post Insulator 381ⅹ165 1432120 EA 3.0
7 Insulator pin Insulator Pin for Line Post, 92mm 1231210 EA 3.0
1200537 or
8 Tie Wire Tie Wire for Aluminum 5.0mm M 7.8
1200538
Ball & Socket
1400010 or
9 (Standard) Ball & Socket 255ⅹ146, 70kN EA 24.0
1400110
Insulator
Deadend clamp
10 Deadend clamp, 70kN 1203110 EA 6.0
for conductor
11 Socket eye Socket eye, 70kN 1202810 EA 6.0
12 Ball eye Ball eye, 70kN 1202110 EA 6.0
13 Anchor shackle Anchor shackle, 70kN 1202010 EA 6.0
Compression Compression connector for ACSR
14 1233840 EA 3.0
connector 160 mm2
15 ACSR 30 Aluminum Clad Steel Wire 30 mm2 1650053 M 71.4
Earth wire Earth wire support set
16 1236610 EA 2.0
support 50ⅹ50ⅹ4ⅹ600
Deadend clamp
17 Deadend clamp, 40kN 1236700 EA 2.0
for earth wire
Zinc coated
18 Zinc coated steel wire Code 6.3 1660052 M 12.0
steel wire
19 Guy Insulator Guy insulator GSW 6.3 1405100 EA 1.0
20 Guy grip Guy grip code 6.3 1207253 EA 1.0
1207108 or
21 Guy band Two direction guy band, 40kN 1207110 or EA 1.0
1207112
22 Anchor rod Anchor rod Ф 19ⅹ2440, 40kN 1207010 EA 1.0
23 Concrete block Concrete block 300ⅹ100 1083030 EA 1.0
* All materials are calculated and selected in condition of pollution level 2.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

36 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

E. Branch pole

16

300 275

300 15

1800 5
8
4

1000

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

37 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

- Quantities of materials for Branch pole

Specification Qua
No Detailed Item Description Unit
Number ntity
1 Support Stout Wood Pole 13M 1011034 EA 1.0
2 Anchor log Wood Log 2M 1081050 EA 1.0
Steel Reinforced Aluminum
3 ACSR 160 1630062 M 214.2
Conductor 160 mm2
Crossarm double set
4 Crossarm 1230020 EA 2.0
100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000
5 Line Post Line Post Insulator 381ⅹ165 1432120 EA 2.0
6 Insulator pin Insulator Pin for Line Post, 92mm 1231210 EA 2.0
1200537 or
7 Tie Wire Tie Wire for Aluminum 5.0mm M 5.2
1200538
Ball & Socket
1400010 or
8 (Standard) Ball & Socket 255ⅹ146, 70kN EA 36.0
1400110
Insulator
Deadend clamp
9 Deadend clamp, 70kN 1203110 EA 9.0
for conductor
10 Socket eye Socket eye, 70kN 1202810 EA 9.0
11 Ball eye Ball eye, 70kN 1202110 EA 9.0
12 Anchor shackle Anchor shackle, 70kN 1202010 EA 9.0
Compression Compression connector for ACSR
13 1233840 EA 3.0
connector 160 mm2
14 ACSR 30 Aluminum Clad Steel Wire 30 mm2 1650053 M 71.4
Earth wire Earth wire support set
15 1236610 EA 3.0
support 50ⅹ50ⅹ4ⅹ600
Deadend clamp
16 Deadend clamp, 40kN 1236700 EA 3.0
for earth wire
Zinc coated
17 Zinc coated steel wire Code 6.3 1660052 M 12.0
steel wire
18 Guy Insulator Guy insulator GSW 6.3 1405100 EA 1.0
19 Guy grip Guy grip code 6.3 1207253 EA 1.0
1207108 or
20 Guy band Two direction guy band, 40kN 1207110 or EA 1.0
1207112
21 Anchor rod Anchor rod Ф 19ⅹ2440, 40kN 1207010 EA 1.0
22 Concrete block Concrete block 300ⅹ100 1083030 EA 1.0
* All materials are calculated and selected in condition of pollution level 2.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

38 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

F. Transformer pole for 3 phases

300

6 9
1800

1000 1000
4
15 1200
14

1800

17

8
19

21

1200

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

39 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

- Quantities of materials for 3 phase Transformer pole

Specification Qua
No Detailed Item Description Unit
Number ntity
1 Support Stout Wood Pole 13M 1011034 EA 2.0
2 Anchor log Wood Log 2M 1081050 EA 2.0
Steel Reinforced Aluminum
3 ACSR 160 1630062 M 214.2
Conductor 160 mm2
Crossarm double set
4 Crossarm 1230020 EA 1.0
100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000
Crossarm single set
5 Crossarm 1230010 EA 2.0
100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000
6 Line Post Line Post Insulator 381ⅹ165 1432120 EA 3.0
7 Insulator pin Insulator Pin for Line Post, 92mm 1231210 EA 3.0
1200537 or
8 Tie Wire Tie Wire for Aluminum 5.0mm M 7.8
1200538
Ball & Socket
1400010 or
9 (Standard) Ball & Socket 255ⅹ146, 70kN EA 24.0
1400110
Insulator
Deadend clamp
10 Deadend clamp, 70kN 1203110 EA 6.0
for conductor
11 Socket eye Socket eye, 70kN 1202810 EA 6.0
12 Ball eye Ball eye, 70kN 1202110 EA 6.0
13 Anchor shackle Anchor shackle, 70kN 1202010 EA 6.0
14 Surge arrester Surge arrester 30kV for 10kA 3071045 EA 3.0
15 Fuse folder Fuse folder of Fused Cutout 36kV 3491014 EA 3.0
Fuse link of Fused Cutout 36kV, K or
16 Fuse link 34910##* EA 3.0
T type
Overhead Transformer 30/0.4kV, 3
17 Transformer 223112#* EA 1.0
phases
18 Support fittings Support fittings for transformer 1200810 EA 1.0
Distribution Low voltage overhead distribution
19 34770##* EA 1.0
box box
20 ACSR 30 Aluminum Clad Steel Wire 30 mm2 1650053 M 71.4
Crossarm double set
21 Crossarm 1230020 EA 1.0
100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000
Deadend clamp
22 Deadend clamp, 40kN 1236700 EA 2.0
for earth wire
* All materials are calculated and selected in condition of pollution level 2.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

40 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

G. Transformer pole for single phase

300

1800 5

8
4
1200

1800

11

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

41 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

- Quantities of materials for single phase Transformer pole

Specification Qua
No Detailed Item Description Unit
Number ntity
1 Support Stout Wood Pole 13M 1011034 EA 2.0
2 Anchor log Wood Log 2M 1081050 EA 2.0
Steel Reinforced Aluminum
3 ACSR 160 1630062 M 214.2
Conductor 160 mm2
Crossarm single set
4 Crossarm 1230010 EA 2.0
100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000
5 Line Post Line Post Insulator 381ⅹ165 1432120 EA 3.0
6 Insulator pin Insulator Pin for Line Post, 92mm 1231210 EA 3.0
1200537 or
7 Tie Wire Tie Wire for Aluminum 5.0mm M 7.8
1200538
8 Surge arrester Surge arrester 30kV for 10kA 3071045 EA 2.0
9 Fuse folder Fuse folder of Fused Cutout 36kV 3491014 EA 2.0
Fuse link of Fused Cutout 36kV, K or
10 Fuse link 34910##* EA 2.0
T type
Overhead Transformer 30/0.4kV,
11 Transformer 223182#* EA 1.0
single phase
Distribution Low voltage overhead distribution
12 34770##* EA 1.0
box box
13 ACSR 30 Aluminum Clad Steel Wire 30 mm2 1650053 M 71.4
Earth wire Earth wire support set
14 1236610 EA 1.0
support 50ⅹ50ⅹ4ⅹ600
1233710 or
15 PG clamp Parallel groove clamp PG-1 1233720 or EA 1.0
1233730
* All materials are calculated and selected in condition of pollution level 2.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

42 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

H. Cable rising pole

300

4 6 9
1800

14

1000 1000
15 1200

5
1800

19

17

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

43 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

- Quantities of materials for Cable rising pole

Detailed Specification Qua

No Description Unit
Item Number ntity
1 Support Stout Wood Pole 13M 1011034 EA 2.0
2 Anchor log Wood Log 2M 1081050 EA 2.0
Steel Reinforced Aluminum Conductor
3 ACSR 160 1630062 M 214.2
160 mm2
Crossarm double set
4 Crossarm 1230020 EA 1.0
100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000
5 Crossarm Crossarm single set 100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000 1230010 EA 2.0
6 Line Post Line Post Insulator 381ⅹ165 1432120 EA 3.0
Insulator
7 Insulator Pin for Line Post, 92mm 1231210 EA 3.0
pin
1200537 or
8 Tie Wire Tie Wire for Aluminum 5.0mm M 7.8
1200538
Ball &
Socket 1400010 or
9 Ball & Socket 255ⅹ146, 70kN EA 24.0
(Standard) 1400110
Insulator
Deadend
10 clamp for Deadend clamp, 70kN 1203110 EA 6.0
conductor
11 Socket eye Socket eye, 70kN 1202810 EA 6.0
12 Ball eye Ball eye, 70kN 1202110 EA 6.0
Anchor
13 Anchor shackle, 70kN 1202010 EA 6.0
shackle
Surge
14 Surge arrester 30kV for 10kA 3071045 EA 3.0
arrester
15 Fuse folder Fuse folder of Fused Cutout 36kV 3491014 EA 3.0
Fuse link of Fused Cutout 36kV, K or T
16 Fuse link 34910##* EA 3.0
type
Cable
Cable rising conduit for underground
17 rising 20111#0* EA 4.0
cable on the pole
conduit
18 ACSR 30 Aluminum Clad Steel Wire 30 mm2 1650053 M 71.4
19 Crossarm Crossarm single set 100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000 1230010 EA 1.0
Deadend
20 clamp for Deadend clamp, 40kN 1236700 EA 2.0
earth wire
* All materials are calculated and selected in condition of pollution level 2.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

44 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

I. Load break switch

10
3 1800

1800

11

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

45 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

- Quantities of materials for Load break Switch pole

Detailed Specification Qua

No Description Unit
Item Number ntity

1 Support Stout Wood Pole 13M 1011034 EA 1.0

2 Anchor log Wood Log 2M 1081050 EA 1.0
Steel Reinforced Aluminum
3 ACSR 160 1630062 M 214.2
Conductor 160 mm2
Crossarm double set
4 Crossarm 1230020 EA 1.0
100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000
Ball &
Socket 1400010 or
5 Ball & Socket 255ⅹ146, 70kN EA 24.0
(Standard) 1400110
Insulator
Deadend
6 clamp for Deadend clamp, 70kN 1203110 EA 6.0
conductor
7 Socket eye Socket eye, 70kN 1202810 EA 6.0
8 Ball eye Ball eye, 70kN 1202110 EA 6.0
Anchor
9 Anchor shackle, 70kN 1202010 EA 6.0
shackle
Surge
10 Surge arrester 30kV for 10kA 3071045 EA 6.0
arrester
Load break
11 Load break Switch set 3415061 EA 1.0
Switch
12 ACSR 30 Aluminum Clad Steel Wire 30 mm2 1650053 M 71.4
Earth wire Earth wire support set
13 1236610 EA 2.0
support 50ⅹ50ⅹ4ⅹ600
Deadend
14 clamp for Deadend clamp, 40kN 1236700 EA 2.0
earth wire
* All materials are calculated and selected in condition of pollution level 2.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

46 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

J. Capacitor

300

300
6
1800

9
5 1800

1800
10

15

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

47 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

- Quantities of materials for Capacitor pole

Detailed Specification Qua

No Description Unit
Item Number ntity

1 Support Stout Wood Pole 13M 1011034 EA 1.0

2 Anchor log Wood Log 2M 1081050 EA 1.0
Steel Reinforced Aluminum Conductor
3 ACSR 160 1630062 M 214.2
160 mm2
4 Armor rod Armor rod for ACSR 160 mm2 1,000mm 1203638 EA 3.0
5 Crossarm Crossarm single set 100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000 1230010 EA 2.0
6 Line Post Line Post Insulator 381ⅹ165 1432120 EA 3.0
Insulator
7 Insulator Pin for Line Post, 92mm 1231210 EA 3.0
pin
1200537 or
8 Tie Wire Tie Wire for Aluminum 5.0mm M 7.8
1200538
Surge
9 Surge arrester 30kV for 10kA 3071045 EA 6.0
arrester
10 Fuse folder Fuse folder of Fused Cutout 36kV 3491014 EA 3.0
Fuse link of Fused Cutout 36kV, K or T
11 Fuse link 34910##* EA 3.0
type
12 ACSR 30 Aluminum Clad Steel Wire 30 mm2 1650053 M 71.4
Earth wire
13 Earth wire support set 50ⅹ50ⅹ4ⅹ600 1236610 EA 2.0
support
1233710 or
14 PG clamp Parallel groove clamp PG-1 1233720 or EA 1.0
1233730
Capacitor
15 Capacitor bank set 36kV 481130# EA 1.0
bank
* All materials are calculated and selected in condition of pollution level 2.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

48 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

K. Voltage regulator

5 11

15

16 1200

7
300

2000

17

18

1 3 1

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

49 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

- Quantities of materials for Voltage regulator pole

Detailed Specification Qua

No Description Unit
Item Number ntity

1 Support Stout Wood Pole 13M 1011034 EA 2.0

2 Anchor log Wood Log 2M 1081050 EA 2.0
3 Support Stout Wood Pole 11M 1011033 EA 2.0
4 Anchor log Wood Log 1.5M 1081030 EA 2.0
Steel Reinforced Aluminum Conductor
5 ACSR 160 1630062 M 214.2
160 mm2
6 Armor rod Armor rod for ACSR 160 mm2 1,000mm 1203638 EA 6.0
7 Crossarm Crossarm single set 100ⅹ50ⅹ6ⅹ5000 1200710 EA 2.0
8 Line Post Line Post Insulator 381ⅹ165 1432120 EA 6.0
Insulator
9 Insulator Pin for Line Post, 92mm 1231210 EA 6.0
pin
1200537 or
10 Tie Wire Tie Wire for Aluminum 5.0mm M 15.6
1200538
Composite
11 Composite Insulator DS-35, 70kN 1400220 EA 3.0
Insulator
Deadend
12 clamp for Deadend clamp, 70kN 1203110 EA 6.0
conductor
13 Socket eye Socket eye, 70kN 1202810 EA 3.0
14 Ball eye Ball eye, 70kN 1202110 EA 3.0
Surge
15 Surge arrester 30kV for 10kA 3071045 EA 6.0
arrester
Bypass
16 Regulator bypass switch 3419061 EA 3.0
switch
Voltage
17 Voltage regulator, 30kV 26335##* EA 3.0
regulator
Support
18 Support fittings for regulator 1200820 EA 1.0
fittings
19 ACSR 30 Aluminum Clad Steel Wire 30 mm2 1650053 M 71.4
Earth wire
20 Earth wire support set 50ⅹ50ⅹ4ⅹ600 1236610 EA 2.0
support
1233710 or
21 PG clamp Parallel groove clamp PG-1 1233720 or EA 2.0
1233730
* All materials are calculated and selected in condition of pollution level 2.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

50 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

L. Steel post
300

1800

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

51 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix L : Technical calculation of voltage drop

It is actually impossible to calculate the accurate voltage drop of an overhead line

because the currents on the lines vary according as the load changes. So this calculation of
voltage drop is not real but ideal, we have to measure the real currents to know the exact
values of current. The resistance of ACSR 160 mm2 R is 0.1805 (in Ω/km) which is given
by IEC 61089. And we can get the reactance X by the next equation.

X = ωL = 2πfL = 2π × 50 × 1.1 × 10 −3 = 0.3456 (in Ω/km)

Where
L means the inductance of ACSR 160 mm2.

The inductance of ACSR 160 mm2 L can be expressed by the next equation.
D 1726
L = 0.2 Ln = 0.2 Ln = 1.1 (in mH/km)
R 7.16
Where
D means the geometric mean distance between ACSR 160 mm2 3phase conductors.
R means the geometric mean radius of ACSR 160 mm2.

The geometric mean distance between ACSR 160 mm2 3phase conductors D can be
expressed by the next equation.

D = 3 DAB × DAC × DBC = 1370 × 1370 × 2740 = 1,726 (in mm)

Where
DAB means the distance between A phase conductor and B phase conductor.
DAC means the distance between A phase conductor and C phase conductor.
DBC means the distance between B phase conductor and C phase conductor.

The geometric mean radius R can be calculated by the next equation.

17.7
R = kr = 0.809 × ( ) = 7.16 (in mm)
2
Where
k means GMR coefficient. The k value of ACSR 160 mm2 which consists of 7 steel wires
and 26 aluminum wires is 0.809.
r means the radius of the circumscribed circle of the strand conductor.
The voltage drop equation can be expressed by the next equation.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

52 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Vd = I × L × Z
Where
Vd means the voltage drop (in V).
I means the current (in A).
L means the length of distribution lines (in km).
Z means the equivalent impedance of the lines (in Ω/km).

Z = R × Cosθ + X × Sinθ = R × Cosθ + X × 1 − Cos 2θ = 0.1805 × 0.9 + 0.3456 × 1 − 0.9 2

= 0.3131
Where
Cosθ means the power factor. The value of the power factor is applied by 0.9.

% voltage drop equation can be expressed by the next equation.

VS − VL
ε= × 100 %
VL
Where
VS means the voltage of the source.
VL means the voltage of the load.

In case we calculate the 10% voltage drop length, the examples are as follows.

Example 1 : All loads are concentrated at the end of the feeder. Assume the current I is
200A.
Vd 1732
L= = = 27.7 (in km)
IZ 200 × 0.3131

Example 2 : loads are uniformly distributed at the distributed line. Assume the current I is
200A.
2Vd 2 × 1732
L= = = 55.3 (in km)
IZ 200 × 0.3131

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

53 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix M : In case of using AAAC 240 mm2

A. Characteristics of AAAC 240 mm2
The characteristics of AAAC(All Aluminum Alloy Conductor) 240 mm2 is listed in the
following table.
< Table M1 > Characteristics of AAAC 240 mm2
Nominal cross-sectional Minimum
Size
Conductor area (mm2) Linear mass
breaking
diameter (mm2) (kg/km)
Al. St. Total load (kN0

240 20.3 242.54 - 242.54 670 67.74

B. Bending moment
The next table shows the maximum bending moment on the 13m length wood pole that
wood pole can withstand in case of AAAC240 mm2 for the phase and ACSR(Aluminum
Clad Steel Reinforced) 30 mm2 for earth wire.
< Table M2 > Maximum bending moment
M (kN-m)
Structure Mr (kN-m) Resistance
Span(m) (M = Mp + Mw + Mc + Mi
Type moment of poles
+ Mu)
Tension 70 64.41 62.15

The detailed maximum bending moment on the 13m length wood pole is as follows.
< Table M3 > Detailed maximum bending moment
M (kN-m)
Mu (kN-m) Mp Mw Mi (kN-m)
Span Unbalance Mc (kN-m)
10° angle (kN-m) (kN-m) on insulator
(m) [Mp + Mw + on crossarm
Unbalance on Poles on wire strimg
Mi +Mu]

70 62.15 8.77 8.03 32.52 4.20 12.83

According to the technical calculation, the maximum span between poles can be 70m. But
Considering the safety factor, the most of utilities in the world use the normal span shorter
than the maximum span. In case GECOL use ACSR 160 mm2 as a conductor we
recommend 60m span as the normal span between poles of 30kV overhead lines

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

54 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix N : In case of Tripoli city (Maximum wind speed : 46.3m/s)

Design engineers shouldn’t uniformly apply this design standard to the regions of which
maximum wind speed is more than 35 m/s. design engineers should calculate the technical
options of those regions respectively. This appendix is the example of Tripoli city of which
maximum wind speed is 46.3m/s that was recorded at the Tripoli city weather station in
March, 1973.
The next table shows the maximum bending moment on the 13m length wood pole that
wood pole can withstand in case of ACSR 160 mm2 for the phase and ACSR(Aluminum
Clad Steel Reinforced) 30 mm2 for earth wire.
< Table N1 > Maximum bending moment

Structure Span Mr (kN-m) Resistance M (kN-m)

Type (m) moment of poles (M = Mp + Mw + Mc + Mi + Mu)

Tension 45 80.52 79.82

Note : The safety factor of 13m length wood pole is applied by 2.0, because the maximum
resistance moment of 13m poles is not enough for this region.

The detailed maximum bending moment on the 13m length wood pole is as follows.
< Table N2 > Detailed maximum bending moment
M (kN-m)
Mu (kN-m) Mi (kN-m)
Span Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
10° angle on insulator
(m) [Mp + Mw + on Poles on wire
Unbalance strimg
Mi +Mu]

45 79.82 10.85 14.05 32.46 22.46

According to the technical calculation, the maximum span between poles can be 45m. But
considering the safety factor the ruling span of 30kV ACSR 160 mm2 overhead lines is
recommended by 40m.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

55 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix O : In case of Jalo city (Maximum wind speed : 39.1m/s)

Design engineers shouldn’t uniformly apply this design standard to the regions of which
maximum wind speed is more than 35 m/s. design engineers should calculate the technical
options of those regions respectively. This appendix is the example of Jalo city of which
maximum wind speed is 39.1m/s that was recorded at the Jalo city weather station in April,
1972.
The next table shows the maximum bending moment on the 13m length wood pole that
wood pole can withstand in case of ACSR 160 mm2 for the phase and ACSR(Aluminum
Clad Steel Reinforced) 30 mm2 for earth wire.
< Table O1 > Maximum bending moment

Structure Span Mr (kN-m) Resistance M (kN-m)

Type (m) moment of poles (M = Mp + Mw + Mc + Mi + Mu)

Tension 55 64.41 62.89

The detailed maximum bending moment on the 13m length wood pole is as follows.
< Table O2 > Detailed maximum bending moment
M (kN-m)
Mu (kN-m) Mi (kN-m)
Span Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
10° angle on insulator
(m) [Mp + Mw + on Poles on wire
Unbalance strimg
Mi +Mu]

55 62.89 8.55 10.02 28.30 16.01

According to the technical calculation, the maximum span between poles can be 55m. But
considering the safety factor the ruling span of 30kV ACSR 160 mm2 overhead lines is
recommended by 50m.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

56 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix P : In case of Ghat city (Maximum wind speed : 36.0m/s)

Design engineers shouldn’t uniformly apply this design standard to the regions of which
maximum wind speed is more than 35 m/s. design engineers should calculate the technical
options of those regions respectively. This appendix is the example of Ghat city of which
maximum wind speed is 36.0m/s that was recorded at the Ghat city weather station in April,
1991.
The next table shows the maximum bending moment on the 13m length wood pole that
wood pole can withstand in case of ACSR 160 mm2 for the phase and ACSR(Aluminum
Clad Steel Reinforced) 30 mm2 for earth wire.
< Table P1 > Maximum bending moment

Structure Span Mr (kN-m) Resistance M (kN-m)

Type (m) moment of poles (M = Mp + Mw + Mc + Mi + Mu)

Tension 755 64.41 63.25

The detailed maximum bending moment on the 13m length wood pole is as follows.
< Table P1 > Detailed maximum bending moment
M (kN-m)
Mu (kN-m) Mi (kN-m)
Span Unbalance Mp (kN-m) Mw (kN-m)
10° angle on insulator
(m) [Mp + Mw + on Poles on wire
Unbalance strimg
Mi +Mu]

75 63.25 8.47 8.49 32.71 13.58

According to the technical calculation, the maximum span between poles can be 75m. But
considering the safety factor the ruling span of 30kV ACSR 160 mm2 overhead lines is
recommended by 70m.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

57 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix Q : Steel post

Design engineers can use the steel post for tension position of overhead lines instead of the
stout pole strengthened by the guys. Design engineers should calculate the transverse load
and the longitudinal load imposed on the steel post. The detailed calculation of the
mechanical bending moment follows the design standard of steel tower. The considering
loads are as follows.
A. The transverse load
■ The wind load imposed on the members of framework
■ The wind load imposed on the conductors
■ The wind load imposed on the insulators

B. The longitudinal load

■ The wind load imposed on the members of framework
■ The unbalance load
■ The wind load imposed on the insulators

If design engineers calculate the mechanical load for steel post at tension position, design
engineers should design the installation of the steel post to withstand 1/3 of the total rated
strength of the conductor. Of course design engineers can install the longitudinal couple
guys and the transverse couple guys to strengthen the overhead lines. For dead end corner
steel post design engineers can install the ground guy. The detailed guy strengthening
method follows the design standard of guy & strut.

The foundation of the steel post is the concrete base. The detailed foundation method
follows the design standard of steel tower foundation.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

58 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Appendix R : Design sample

Problem :
The new 30kV overhead lines will be installed. The length of feeder is 10km. On the last
pole the 500kVA 30/0.4kV transformer will be installed. Determine the support type,
conductor type, etc.

Solution :
1. Making the route map
The route of distribution facilities can be marked on 6km by 6km satellite map as the
following figure. The route map should have the information such as conductor type,
conductor size, etc. The color of existing system should be black and the color of new
system to be installed should be blue.

Map NO : 7A-55-3 Map NO : 7A-55-4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

21 22
220kV
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

41 42 43 44 45 46 47
GW 30
48 49 50 41 42 43 GW 3044 45 46 47 48 49 50
ACSR 160 ACSR 160

51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70

71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90

91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

2. Making the detailed distribution facilities map

The detailed distribution facilities can be marked on 600m by 600m satellite map as the
following figure. The map should have the information such as facilities type and size, the
length between the facilities, the location, facilities number, the capacity of facilities, etc.
The color of existing system should be black and the color of new system to be installed
should be blue.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

59 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Map NO : 7A-55-3-22 Map NO : 7A-55-3-23

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12
220kV
70m
13 14 15
WP13
16
70m
17 18 13 14 15 16 17 18
(1501) GW 30
WP13 70m ACSR 160
19 20 21 22
(2201)
WP13 70m
23 24 19 20 21 22 23 24
(2202)
WP13 70m
25 26 27 28 29
(2901)
WP13
30 25 26 27 28 29 30
70m
(2902) GW 30
WP13 70m ACSR 160
31 32 33 34 35 36 31 32 33 34 35 36
(3601)
WP13 70m
(3602)

Map NO : 7A-55-3-33 Map NO : 7A-55-3-34

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
WP13 70m
(101)
WP13 70m
(201)
WP13 70m
7 (801)
WP13
8 70m
9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12
(802)
GW 30
WP13 70m
13 14 15
(1501)
WP13
16
ACSR
70m
160
17 18 13 14 15 16 17 18
(1502)
WP13 70m
19 20 21 22
(2201)
WP13 70m
23 24 19 20 21 22 23 24
(2202)
WP13
25 26 27 28(2901) 29 30 25 26 27 28 29 30
70m

WP13 70m
(2902) GW 30
WP13 70m ACSR 160
31 32 33 34 35 (3601)
36
WP13
31
70m 32 33 34 35 36
(3602)

Map NO : 7A-55-3-44 Map NO : 7A-55-3-45

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
WP13 70m
(101)
WP13 70m
(201)
WP13 70m
7 (801)
8
WP13
9
70m
10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12
(802)
GW 30
WP13 70m
13 14 15
(1501)
WP13
16
ACSR
70m
160
17 18 13 14 15 16 17 18
(1502)
GW 30
ACSR 160
WP13 70m
19 20 21(2201) WP13
22 23
70m
24 19
70m 20 21 22 23 24
(2202)
WP13
25 26 27 28 29 30 25 26 27 28 29 30
70m
(2901)
WP13 70m
(2902)
WP13 70m
31 32 33 34 35 (3601)
36
WP13
31 32 33 34 35 36
(3602)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

60 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Map NO : 7A-55-3- Map NO : 7A-55-3-56

WP13 70m
1
(101) 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
WP13 70m
(201)
WP13 70m
7 (801)
8
WP13 70m
9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12
(802)
GW 30
WP13 70m
13 14 (1501) 15
WP13
16
ACSR 160
17 18 13 14 15 16 17 18
70m
(1502)
WP13 70m
19 20 21 (2201)
22
WP13 70m
23 24 19 20 21 22 23 24
(2202)
WP13 70m GW 30
25 26 27 28 29
(2901)
WP13
30 25 26 27 28
ACSR 160 29 30
70m
(2902)
WP13 70m WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13
(3101) (3201) (3202) (3301)(3401) (3501) (3502) (3601)
31 32 33 34 35 36 31 32 33 3470m 70m
35 3670m
(3601)
WP13 70m 70m 70m 70m 70m 70m
(3602)

Map NO : 7A-55-3- Map NO : 7A-55-3-58

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 17 18 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 20 21 22 23 24 19 20 21 22 23 24
GW 30 GW 30
25 26 27 28
ACSR 160 29 30 25 26 27 28
ACSR 160 29 30
WP13 WP13 WP13
WP13 (3202) (3601)
(3501)
WP13 (3102) WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13
(3101) (3201) (3301) (3401) (3402) (3601) (3602) (3101) (3201) (3301) (3401) (3501) (3502)
31
70m
32 70m 33
70m 70m
34
70m 70m
3570m 70m
36 31 70m 32
70m 70m 33 70m 34
70m 70m 35
70m 70m 36

Map NO : 7A-55-3-59 Map NO : 7A-55-3-60

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 17 18 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 20 21 22 23 24 19 20 21 22 23 24
GW 30 GW 30
25 26 27 28
ACSR 160 29 30 25 26 27 28
ACSR 160 29 30
WP13 WP13
WP13 (3402)
(3302) WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 (3101)
WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13
(3101) (3102) (3201) (3301) (3401) (3501) (3502) (3601) (3201) (3202) (3301) (3401) (3501) (3601) (3601)
31
70m 70m
3270m 33
70m
34 70m 35
70m 70m
36
70m
31 70m
70m 70m
32 70m
3370m 34
70m
35 70m 36
70m 70m

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

61 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Map NO : 7A-55-4-51 Map NO : 7A-55-4-52

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 17 18 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 20 21 22 23 24 19 20 21 22 23 24
GW 30 GW 30
25 26 27 28
ACSR 160 29 30 25 26 27 28
ACSR 160 29 30
WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13
(3201) (3502) (3301) (3602)
WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13
(3101) (3202) (3301) (3401) (3501) (3601) (3101) (3102) (320) (3401) (3402) (3501) (3601)
31
70m 70m
32
70m
33
70m 70m
3470m 70m
35 70m
3670m 31
70m
32 70m 33
70m 70m
34
70m 70m
3570m 70m
36

Map NO : 7A-55-4-53 Map NO : 7A-55-4-54

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 17 18 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 20 21 22 23 24 19 20 21 22 23 24
GW 30 GW 30
25 26 27 28
ACSR 160 29 30 25 26 27 28
ACSR 160 29 30
WP13 WP13 WP13
(3401) (3102) (3501)
WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13
(3101) (3201) (3202) (3301) (3501) (3502) (3601) (3101) (3201) (3301) (3302) (3401) (3502) (3602)
31
70m 70m
32
70m
33 70m 34
70m 70m
35
70m 70m
36 31
70m 70m
3270m 33
70m
34 70m 35
70m 70m
36
70m

Map NO : 7A-55-4-55 Map NO : 7A-55-4-56

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 17 18 13 14 15 16 17 18

19 20 21 22 23 24 19 20 21 22 23 24
GW 30 GW 30
25 26 27 28
ACSR 160 29 30 25 26 27 28
ACSR 160 29 30
WP13 WP13 WP13
(3301) (3602) (3401)
WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13
(3101) (3201) (3202) (3401) (3402) (3501) (3601) (3101) (3201) (3202) (3301) (3501) (3502) (3601)
3170m 70m
32 70m
3370m 34
70m
35 70m 36
70m 70m 31 70m 32
70m
33
70m 70m
3470m 35
70m 70m
3670m

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

62 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Map NO : 7A-55-4-57

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 17 18

19 20 21 22 23 24
GW 30
25 26ACSR27
160 28 29 30
WP13
(3201) WP13
WP13 WP13 WP13 WP13
(3101) (3202) (3301) (3401) (3402)
3170m 32
70m 70m 70m33 70m 34
60m 35 36
200kVA
TR

3. Quantities of materials
After determining the route and making a detailed distribution facilities map, design
engineers shall make legends of materials to know the needed quantities of materials. We
will apply to the pollution level II and ruling span 70m.

< Table P1 > Detailed maximum bending moment

Pole Guy
Type Location Type Location
Straight pole 128 each Transverse couple guys 14 each
Tension pole 13 each Longitudinal couple guys 13 each
Angle pole 1 each Ground guy 3 each
H type transformer pole 1 each

3.1 Quantities of materials for the 30kV straight poles

Detailed Specification
Description Unit Quantity
Item Number
Support Stout Wood Pole 13M 1011034 EA 128.0
Anchor log Wood Log 2M 1081050 EA 128.0
Steel Reinforced Aluminum
ACSR 160 1630062 M 27417.6
Conductor 160 mm2
Armor rod for ACSR 160 mm2
Armor rod 1203638 EA 384.0
1,000mm

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

63 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Cross-arm single set

Cross-arm 1230010 EA 128.0
100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000
Line Post Line Post Insulator 381ⅹ165 1432120 EA 384.0
Insulator Pin for Line Post,
Insulator pin 1231210 EA 384.0
92mm
1200537 or
Tie Wire Tie Wire for Aluminum 5.0mm M 998.4
1200538
Aluminum Clad Steel Wire 30
ACSR 30 1650053 M 9139.2
mm2
Earth wire Earth wire support set
1236610 EA 128.0
support 50ⅹ50ⅹ4ⅹ600
1233710 or
PG clamp Parallel groove clamp PG-1 1233720 or EA 128.0
1233730

3.2 Quantities of materials for the 30kV tension poles

Specification
Detailed Item Description Unit Quantity
Number
Support Stout Wood Pole 13M 1011034 EA 13.0
Anchor log Wood Log 2M 1081050 EA 13.0
Steel Reinforced Aluminum
ACSR 160 1630062 M 2784.6
Conductor 160 mm2
Armor rod for ACSR 160
Armor rod 1203638 EA 13.0
mm2 1,000mm
Cross-arm double set
Cross-arm 1230020 EA 13.0
100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000
Line Post Line Post Insulator 381ⅹ165 1432120 EA 13.0
Insulator Pin for Line Post,
Insulator pin 1231210 EA 13.0
92mm
Tie Wire for Aluminum 1200537 or
Tie Wire M 33.8
5.0mm 1200538
Ball & Socket
Ball & Socket 255ⅹ146, 1400010 or
(Standard) EA 312.0
70kN 1400110
Insulator
Dead-end
clamp for Dead-end clamp, 70kN 1203110 EA 78.0
conductor
Socket eye Socket eye, 70kN 1202810 EA 78.0
Ball eye Ball eye, 70kN 1202110 EA 78.0
Anchor
Anchor shackle, 70kN 1202010 EA 78.0
shackle

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

64 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Compression Compression connector for

1233840 EA 39.0
connector ACSR 160 mm2
Aluminum Clad Steel Wire
ACSR 30 1650053 M 928.2
30 mm2
Earth wire Earth wire support set
1236610 EA 26.0
support 50ⅹ50ⅹ4ⅹ600
Dead-end
clamp for Dead-end clamp, 40kN 1236700 EA 26.0
earth wire

3.3 Quantities of materials for the 30kV dead end corner pole

Specification
Detailed Item Description Unit Quantity
Number
Support Stout Wood Pole 13M 1011034 EA 1.0
Anchor log Wood Log 2M 1081050 EA 1.0
Steel Reinforced Aluminum
ACSR 160 1630062 M 214.2
Conductor 160 mm2
Armor rod for ACSR 160
Armor rod 1203638 EA 3.0
mm2 1,000mm
Cross-arm double set
Cross-arm 1230020 EA 2.0
100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000
Line Post Line Post Insulator 381ⅹ165 1432120 EA 3.0
Insulator Pin for Line Post,
Insulator pin 1231210 EA 3.0
92mm
Tie Wire for Aluminum 1200537 or
Tie Wire M 7.8
5.0mm 1200538
Ball & Socket
Ball & Socket 255ⅹ146, 1400010 or
(Standard) EA 24.0
70kN 1400110
Insulator
Dead-end
clamp for Dead-end clamp, 70kN 1203110 EA 6.0
conductor
Socket eye Socket eye, 70kN 1202810 EA 6.0
Ball eye Ball eye, 70kN 1202110 EA 6.0
Anchor
Anchor shackle, 70kN 1202010 EA 6.0
shackle
Compression Compression connector for
1233840 EA 3.0
connector ACSR 160 mm2
Aluminum Clad Steel Wire
ACSR 30 1650053 M 71.4
30 mm2
Earth wire Earth wire support set
1236610 EA 2.0
support 50ⅹ50ⅹ4ⅹ600

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

65 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Dead-end
clamp for Dead-end clamp, 40kN 1236700 EA 2.0
earth wire
Zinc coated Zinc coated steel wire Code
1660052 M 12.0
steel wire 6.3
Guy Insulator Guy insulator GSW 6.3 1405100 EA 1.0
Guy grip Guy grip code 6.3 1207253 EA 1.0
1207108 or
Two direction guy band,
Guy band 1207110 or EA 1.0
40kN
1207112
Anchor rod Ф 19ⅹ2440,
Anchor rod 1207010 EA 1.0
40kN
Concrete
Concrete block 300ⅹ100 1083030 EA 1.0
block

3.4 Quantities of materials for the 30kV H type transformer pole

Specification
Detailed Item Description Unit Quantity
Number
Support Stout Wood Pole 13M 1011034 EA 2.0
Anchor log Wood Log 2M 1081050 EA 2.0
Steel Reinforced Aluminum
ACSR 160 1630062 M 183.6
Conductor 160 mm2
Cross-arm double set
Cross-arm 1230020 EA 1.0
100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000
Cross-arm single set
Cross-arm 1230010 EA 2.0
100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000
Ball & Socket
Ball & Socket 255ⅹ146, 1400010 or
(Standard) EA 12.0
70kN 1400110
Insulator
Dead-end
clamp for Dead-end clamp, 70kN 1203110 EA 3.0
conductor
Socket eye Socket eye, 70kN 1202810 EA 3.0
Ball eye Ball eye, 70kN 1202110 EA 3.0
Anchor
Anchor shackle, 70kN 1202010 EA 3.0
shackle
Surge arrester 30kV for
Surge arrester 3071045 EA 3.0
10kA
Fuse folder of Fused Cutout
Fuse folder
36kV
3491014 EA 3.0
Fuse link of Fused Cutout
Fuse link
36kV, K or T type
3491038 EA 3.0

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

66 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Overhead Transformer
Transformer 2231127 EA 1.0
30/0.4kV, 3 phases
Support Support fittings for
1200810 EA 1.0
fittings transformer
Distribution Low voltage overhead
3477067 EA 1.0
box distribution box
Aluminum Clad Steel Wire
ACSR 30 1650053 M 61.2
30 mm2
Cross-arm double set
Cross-arm 1230020 EA 1.0
100ⅹ100ⅹ10ⅹ3000
Dead-end
clamp for Dead-end clamp, 40kN 1236700 EA 1.0
earth wire
Zinc coated
Zinc coated steel wire Code 4 1660051 M 24.0
steel wire
Guy Insulator Guy insulator GSW 4 1405100 EA 2.0
Guy grip Guy grip code 4 1207251 EA 2.0
1207108 or
Two direction guy band,
Guy band 1207110 or EA 2.0
40kN
1207112
Anchor rod Ф 19ⅹ2440,
Anchor rod 1207010 EA 2.0
40kN
Concrete
Concrete block 300ⅹ100 1083030 EA 2.0
block

3.5 Total quantities of materials for the transverse guys

Specification
Detailed Item Description Unit Quantity
Number
Zinc coated
Zinc coated steel wire Code 4 1660051 M 648.0
steel wire
Guy Insulator Guy insulator GSW 4 1405100 EA 54.0
guy grip Guy grip code 4 1207251 EA 54.0
1207108 or
guy band Two direction guy band 1207110 or EA 14.0
1207112
Anchor rod Ф 19 ⅹ 2440,
anchor rod 1207010 EA 54.0
40kN
Concrete
Concrete block 300 ⅹ 100 1083030 EA 54.0
block

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

67 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

3.6 Total quantities of materials for the transverse guys

Specification
Detailed Item Description Unit Quantity
Number
Zinc coated
Zinc coated steel wire Code 4 1660051 M 312.0
steel wire
Guy Insulator Guy insulator GSW 4 1405100 EA 26.0
Guy grip Guy grip code 4 1207251 EA 26.0
1207128 or
Four direction guy band,
Guy band 1207130 or EA 13.0
40kN
1207132
Anchor rod Ф 19 ⅹ 2440,
Anchor rod 1207010 EA 26.0
40kN
Concrete Concrete anchor block 300
1083030 EA 26.0
block ⅹ 100

3.7 Total quantities of materials for the 30kV 10km long

Specificatio
Detailed Item Description Unit Quantity
n Number
Support Stout Wood Pole 13M 1001304 EA 144.0
Anchor block Wood Log 2M 1081050 EA 144.0
Steel Reinforced Aluminum
ACSR 160 1630062 M 30600.0
Conductor 160 mm2
Armor rod for ACSR 160 mm2
Armor rod 1203638 EA 400.0
1,000mm
Cross-arm single set 100 ⅹ
Cross-arm 1230010 EA 130.0
100 ⅹ 10 ⅹ 3000
Cross-arm double set 100 ⅹ
Cross-arm 1230020 EA 17.0
100 ⅹ 10 ⅹ 3000
Line Post Line Post Insulator 381 ⅹ 165 1432120 EA 400.0
Insulator Pin for Line Post,
Insulator pin 1231210 EA 400.0
92mm
Preformed insulator tie wire, 1200537 or
Insulator tie EA 1040.0
Aluminum 1200538
Ball & Socket
Ball & Socket 255 ⅹ 146, 1400010 or
(Standard) EA 348.0
70kN 1400110
Insulator
Dead-end
clamp for Dead-end clamp, 70kN 1203110 EA 87.0
conductor

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

68 /69 Version 1.0
 30kV Overhead Lines

Socket eye Socket eye, 70kN 1202810 EA 87.0

Ball eye Ball eye, 70kN 1202110 EA 87.0
Anchor
Anchor shackle, 70kN 1202010 EA 87.0
shackle
Compression Compression connector for
1233840 EA 42.0
connector ACSR 160 mm2
Surge arrester Surge arrester 30kV for 10kA 3071045 EA 3.0
Fuse folder Fuse folder of Fused Cutout 36kV 3491014 EA 3.0
Fuse link of Fused Cutout 36kV,
Fuse link
K or T type
3491038 EA 3.0
Overhead Transformer
Transformer 2231127 EA 1.0
30/0.4kV, 3 phases
Support
Support fittings for transformer 1200810 EA 1.0
fittings
Distribution Low voltage overhead
3477067 EA 1.0
box distribution box
Aluminum Clad Steel Wire 30
ACSR 30 1650053 M 10200.0
mm2
Earth wire Earth wire support set 50 ⅹ 50
1236610 EA 156.0
support ⅹ 4 ⅹ 600
1233710 or
PG clamp Parallel groove clamp PG-1 1233720 or EA 128.0
1233730
Dead-end
clamp for Dead-end clamp, 40kN 1236700 EA 29.0
earth wire
Zinc coated
Zinc coated steel wire Code 6.3 1660052 M 12.0
steel wire
Guy Insulator Guy insulator GSW 6.3 1405100 EA 1.0
Guy grip Guy grip code 6.3 1207253 EA 1.0
1207108 or
Guy band Two direction guy band, 40kN 1207110 or EA 17.0
1207112
Anchor rod Ф 19 ⅹ 2440,
Anchor rod 1207010 EA 83.0
40kN
Concrete Concrete anchor block 300 ⅹ
1083030 EA 83.0
block 100
Zinc coated
Zinc coated steel wire Code 4 1660051 M 984.0
steel wire
Guy Insulator Guy insulator GSW 4 1405100 EA 82.0
Guy grip Guy grip code 4 1207251 EA 82.0
1207128 or
Guy band Four direction guy band, 40kN 1207130 or EA 13.0
1207132

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

69 /69 Version 1.0
 GDA 4000
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Emergency Generator

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Definitions ······································································································1
3. Components of an Emergency Generator Set ···········································1
3.1 Prime mover ············································································································1
3.1.1 Diesel engines································································································2
3.1.2 Diesel fuel system··························································································2
3.1.3 Diesel cooling system ····················································································2
3.1.4 Starting system·······························································································2
3.1.5 Governor/speed control··················································································2
3.1.6 Air intake system ···························································································3
3.1.7 Exhaust system ······························································································3
3.2 Generators and Exciters···························································································3
3.3 Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) ···········································································4
3.4 Foundations ·············································································································4
3.5 Safety protection ·····································································································4
3.6 Safety protection ·····································································································5

4. Capacity of an Emergency Generator ························································5

4.1 Emergency power consumption···············································································5
4.2 Decision of the emergency generator’s capacity······················································5
4.2.1 Total needed emergency load·········································································5
4.2.2 Calculation method to decide the capacity of the emergency generator ·········6
4.3 Rated capacity of the emergency generator ·····························································7

5. Installation······································································································8
5.1 Customer to be installed ··························································································8
5.2 Installation location ·································································································8
5.3 ATS sequence ··········································································································8

6. Mobile generator ·························································································10

ii
6.1 Connection ············································································································10
6.2 Earthing and bonding ····························································································10
6.3 Installing a mobile generator ·················································································10
6.4 Electrical protection system···················································································10

iii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Rated capacity of low voltage generators····················································· 7

iv
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Connection diagram of ATS ··········································································· 9

[Figure 2] Sequence diagram of ATS ·············································································· 9

v
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ············································································································ 11
B Calculation sample of the emergency generator capacity ··································· 12

vi
 Emergency Generator

1. Scope

This standard describes the emergency generator which supplies the electricity to the
customers for the interruption of the main supplying distribution line. The emergency
generator can be installed for the important customer. This standard covers the installation
location of the emergency generator set and the connection between the emergency set and
other accessory.

2. Definitions

Emergency power
An independent reserve source of electric energy which, upon failure or outage of the
normal source, automatically provides reliable electric power within a specified time

Prime mover
A prime mover is an engine that converts hydraulic, chemical, or thermal energy to
mechanical energy with the output being either straight-line or rotary motion.

Electric Generator
A generator is a device to produce the electricity through converting mechanical energy
provided by a prime mover into electrical energy.

Automatic Transfer Switch

Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) is a switch to transfer critical electrical load circuits
from the normal source of power to the emergency power source during actual or
threatened power failure.

3. Components of an Emergency Generator Set

Rotary mechanical energy is used to drive rotary generators to produce electrical energy.
Auxiliary electrical generators are today usually driven by either diesel engine or gas
turbine. GECOL will use the diesel engine. These are available in wide ranges of
characteristics and power rating, have relatively high thermal efficiency and can be easily
started. Their speed can be closely regulated to maintain frequency 50Hz.

3.1 Prime mover

The prime mover is composed of the next parts such as diesel engines, diesel fuel system,

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 /13 Version 1.0
 Emergency Generator

diesel cooling system, lubrication system, starting system, governor/speed control, air
intake system, and exhaust system.

3.1.1 Diesel engines

Diesel engines have many advantages such as proven dependability for sustained
operation at rated load, efficiency, adaptability for wide range of liquid fuels, and
controlled fuel injection.

3.1.2 Diesel fuel system

The diesel engine should be directly supplied from a fuel tank located inside the diesel
generator unit or a separated tank. The net volume of the tank shall be sufficient for
operating the diesel generator unit at least 5 hours at 75% output without refilling. The fuel
oil system should be designed for operation on diesel oil. The tank should be fitted with a
vent pipe and thoroughly protected against rain water and dust intake.

3.1.3 Diesel cooling system

Diesel engines are designed to be air cooled. Cooling is used to prevent the cylinder
walls, the head, the exhaust manifold, and the lube oil from overheating. An air-cooled
system depends on an engine driven fan to blow ambient air over the fluted or finned
surfaces of the cylinder head and through a radiator type oil cooler, and over the exhaust
manifold. The exterior surfaces must be kept free of dirt or corrosion. The oil must be kept
free of sludge to secure adequate cooling. The ventilator fan shall be protected with safety-
guard wire mesh. Rotation balancing of the fan is essential.

3.1.4 Starting system

The starting system for diesel engines must perform as follows for automatic start-up
when primary electric power fails: compress the air in the combustion chambers and
deliver fuel for combustion. To do this, the starting system must rotate (crank) the engine
at a speed sufficient to raise the cylinder air charge to the fuel igniting temperature. The
generator set should be started by means of an electrical starting motor with 24V DC
driving the diesel engine’s flywheel. The starter motor for the engine should be automatic
type to be controlled by the automatic starting and stopping system.

3.1.5 Governor/speed control

A diesel engine used in an emergency generator must have a governor to regulate and
control engine speed. Since an automatic governor functions only with a change in speed,

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 /13 Version 1.0
 Emergency Generator

constant engine speed may not be totally possible and “hunting” can occur due to over-
correction. The governor’s sensitivity is determined by the minimum change in speed of
the prime mover which will cause a change in governor setting; its speed regulation is the
difference in generator speeds at full-load and no-load divided by the arithmetical mean of
the two speeds. Refer to the glossary for descriptions of governor characteristics.

3.1.6 Air intake system

Approximately 15 pounds of air is required to burn one pound of fuel. Intake air carries
dust particles, water vapor and other foreign material. Since these materials can damage
moving parts within the engine, filtration of the intake air is necessary. An air intake
system must collect, filter, and distribute the required air to the engine cylinders. This must
be accomplished with a minimum expenditure of energy. The objective of air filtration is
the reduction of engine component wear.

3.1.7 Exhaust system

The exhaust system consists of the engine exhaust manifold and includes piping,
expansion joints, silencers, and exhaust pipe. Also the system may include exhaust waste
heat recovery equipment. The purpose of the system is to remove exhaust gas from engine
cylinders to the atmosphere. The engine should be provided with a suitable exhaust system
capable of carrying exhaust gases from the engine and dissipate them to the atmosphere as
quickly and silently as possible. The exhaust system should incorporate an efficient
residential type silencer of the absorption-type capable of reducing the exhaust noises of
the engine to an acceptable level. A silencer should be supplied together with the generator.
The exhaust system should be suitable for connection of external pipe or duct to outlet the
exhaust gas to outside of building when the diesel generator unit is installed inside a room.

3.2 Generators and Exciters

Mechanical energy provided by a prime mover is converted into electrical energy by the
generator. The prime mover rotates the generator rotor causing magnetic lines of force to
be cut by electrical conductors. Electrical energy is thereby produced by electromagnetic
induction. The ratio of output energy generated by input energy is expressed as a
percentage and always shows a loss in efficiency. A generator consists of a number of
conducting coils and a magnetic field. The coils are called the armature. Relative motion
between the coils and magnetic field induces voltage in the coils. This action is called
electromotive force. An alternating current (AC) generator needs a separate direct current
(DC) source to feed the magnetic field. The required DC is provided by an external source

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 /13 Version 1.0
 Emergency Generator

called an exciter. Usually, the exciter is a small DC generator that is driven by the
generator rotor. The exciter may be mounted on the rotor shaft or rotated by belt-drive.
Some generating systems use a static, solid-state exciter to provide DC. A voltage
regulator controls the induced voltage by regulating the strength of the electromagnetic
field established by the exciter. Frequency is controlled by the speed at which the prime
mover rotates the rotor.

3.3 Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS)

When normal power is restored, the transfer switches either automatically retransfer
their load circuits to the normal supply or may be transferred manually. Voltage and
frequency-sensing relays are provided to monitor each phase of the normal supply. The
relays initiate load transfer when there is a change in voltage or frequency in any phase
outside of predetermined limits. Additionally, the relays initiate retransfer of the load to the
normal source as soon as voltage is restored in all the phases beyond the predetermined
pick-up value of the relay. A transfer switch obtains its operating current from the source
to which the load is being transferred.

3.4 Foundations
A generator and its prime mover should be set on a single, uniform foundation to reduce
alignment problems. The foundation should be in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations for proper support of equipment and dampening of vibrations.
Foundation, prime mover, and generator should be mechanically isolated from the building
floor and structure to eliminate transmission of vibrations. All mechanical and electrical
connections should allow for vibration isolation.

3.5 Safety protection

Generators, prime movers, switchboards, and associated switching equipment should
always be protected from the environment. Many emergency generators are designed for
exterior use and have their own weatherproof covering. All parts of the equipment shall be
covered with safety protection devices to guarantee that persons are not exposed to danger
at any time. The design of the covers shall be designed so as not to affect the system in
operation. The following parts shall be covered:
· Rotation parts like flywheels, vibration dampers, v-belts and v-belt pulleys
· Fan for cooling system
· Radiant heated parts and pipes
· Any additional parts which could be damaged or can be dangerous to the employees

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 /13 Version 1.0
 Emergency Generator

without protection.
The emergency generators should be installed outdoor without fence or ceiling to ease
the operation of cooling system. Usually chain falls and ceilings aren’t installed for the
emergency generator. But, in case chain falls are needed to prevent persons from
approaching and ceilings are needed to avoid the rain for the emergency generator installed
outside customer premise, chain falls and ceilings may be installed. The emergency
generators require adequate ceiling height to permit installation.

3.6 Safety protection

Solid earthing system will be adopted for emergency generators. The solid earthing
system may permit the maximum ground fault current from the generator to exceed the
maximum 3-phase fault current which the generator can deliver and for which its windings
are braced. This situation occurs when the reactance of the generator is large in comparison
to the system reactance. The current created by a phase-to-ground fault occurring close to
the generator will usually exceed the 3-phase bolted fault current. Solid grounding is
mainly used in low voltage emergency generator. Solid grounding has the lowest initial
cost of all grounding methods. The earthing resistance for system earthing and metallic
parts of diesel generator unit should have a resistance of 10 ohms or less.

4. Capacity of an Emergency Generator

4.1 Emergency power consumption

The critical uses of electric power at a customer demand an emergency source of power
whenever an outage occurs. Selection of the capacity of an emergency generator is based
on the mission of the particular customer and its anticipated power consumption rate
during an emergency. Emergency generators must provide adequate power for critical
loads of a building or a limited group of buildings, heating plants, utility pumping plant,
communication centers, or other such installations where interruption of normal service
would be serious enough to justify installation of an emergency power generator.

4.2 Decision of the emergency generator’s capacity

4.2.1 Total needed emergency load
The designer should install the emergency generator which has enough capacity to
supply the total needed emergency load. Besides, the emergency generator must endure the
maximum transient voltage drop by the induction motors of the load and the starting
current of motors. In case the characteristics of the emergency load are the harmonics, the

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 /13 Version 1.0
 Emergency Generator

designer must especially take the harmonics characteristics of the emergency load into
account when the designer decides the emergency generator’s capacity. Also the
emergency load facilities should be selected by the electric engineer who knows the
customer facilities very well. The followings are the methods to decide the capacity of the
emergency generator.
· Fire prevention equipment (Fire pump and control board etc.)
· UPS and Battery facilities
· The emergency light facilities (Interior or outdoor lighting facilities)
· Ventilation facilities (Ventilation fan, air purge)
· Gas exhaust facilities
· The facilities to prevent from abnormal pressure and temperature rise (cooling water
pump, agitator)
· The aeronautical light facilities
· Other important facilities for safety

4.2.2 Calculation method to decide the capacity of the emergency generator

Capacity of emergency generator is decided by the biggest capacity among calculation
results by the following methods.
A. PG1 : Capacity of emergency generator needed to start the emergency load in steady
state.

PG1 =
∑W L

Cosθ G

Where,
PG1 means capacity of emergency generator in kVA.

∑W L means the sum of load in kW.

Cosθ G means the power factor of emergency generator.

B. PG2 : Capacity of emergency generator considering the permissible voltage drop

when an electric motor that has maximum starting capacity starts.
1 − ΔE
PG 2 = × X d′ × QL
ΔE
Where,
PG2 means capacity of emergency generator in kVA.
ΔE means the permissible voltage drop rate.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 /13 Version 1.0
 Emergency Generator

X d′ means direct-axis transient reactance of the emergency generator.

QL means starting capacity of an electric motor that has maximum starting capacity.

C. PG3 : Capacity of emergency generator needed to start an electric motor that has
maximum starting current among the electric motors lastly.

PG3 =
∑W B + (QL × Cosθ Q )
K × Cosθ G

Where,
PG3 means capacity of emergency generator in kVA.

∑W B means the sum of base load in kW.

QL means starting capacity of an electric motor that has maximum starting capacity.

Cosθ Q means starting power factor of an electric motor that has maximum starting

capacity.
K means overload capacity of the diesel engine (=1.1).
Cosθ G means the power factor of emergency generator.

4.3 Rated capacity of the emergency generator

The designer must select the rated capacity of the emergency generator more capable
than the calculated capacity. If there is the rated capacity of the emergency generator with
a 95% capacity of the calculated emergency generator’ capacity, the designer can choose it.
The rated capacities of the diesel engine generators are as follows.

< Table 1 > Rated capacity of low voltage generators

Rated Capacity (50Hz) Cable Size

kW (Power
kVA Phase Neutral
factor = 0.8)
63 50 3 core 35 mm2ⅹ1
94 75 3 core 35 mm2ⅹ1
125 100 3 core 95 mm2ⅹ1
188 150 3 core 150 mm2ⅹ1
250 200 3 core 240 mm2ⅹ1

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 /13 Version 1.0
 Emergency Generator

313 250 3 core 240 mm2ⅹ1

375 300 1 core 400 mm2ⅹ3ⅹ1 1 core 400 mm2ⅹ1
500 400 1 core 400 mm2ⅹ3ⅹ1 1 core 400 mm2ⅹ1
625 500 3 core 240 mm2ⅹ2
1000 800 1 core 400 mm2ⅹ3ⅹ2 1 core 400 mm2ⅹ1
1250 1000 1 core 400 mm2ⅹ3ⅹ2 1 core 400 mm2ⅹ1
1875 1500 1 core 400 mm2ⅹ3ⅹ4 1 core 400 mm2ⅹ2
2500 2000 1 core 400 mm2ⅹ3ⅹ5 1 core 400 mm2ⅹ3

5. Installation

5.1 Customer to be installed

The designer can install the emergency generator for the important customers, whose
interruptions have a big effect to the public, to supply the electricity during the interruption
of main line. The important customers to install the emergency generators are as follows.
a. Governmental offices to affect the security of the public
b. Public hospitals
c. Broadcast
d. Newspaper
e. Airport
f. Important Military camp
g. Other important offices or facilities authorized by GECOL

5.2 Installation location

Considering points to select the locations of the emergency generators are as follows.
a. Close to the supplying distribution panel for economic circuit constitution and
preventing from the voltage drop.
b. Easy water supply and drain, cooling water and diesel fuel supply
c. Easy coming in and out of equipment
d. Easy ventilation
Easy entrance of engineers

5.3 ATS sequence

During actual or threatened power failure, transfer switches are actuated to transfer

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 /13 Version 1.0
 Emergency Generator

critical electrical load circuits from the normal source of power to the emergency power
generator.

Source
Gen ACB ACB

Emergency Load

[Figure 1] Connection diagram of ATS

Automatic transfer switches have electrically held contactors with a command load bus.
The switches are electrically interlocked so that a neutral position is not possible under
normal electrical operation. Additionally, the load circuits cannot be connected to normal
and emergency sources simultaneously.

T1 T2 27 47 ATS ATS
(Sour (Gen)
AC220V
(Source) ce)
T1 47 27
AC220V
(Gen)

27 T1 47 T2 Source Gen R R

27 : Undervoltage relay
47 : Phase sequence voltage relay
[Figure 2] Sequence diagram of ATS

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 /13 Version 1.0
 Emergency Generator

6. Mobile generator

6.1 Connection
Mobile generators are used to maintain the voltage within prescribed limits on the LV
network during emergency and maintenance periods, provide temporary supply to isolated
sections of the distribution network and supply load which cannot be held in LV parallel. A
mobile generator can be connected directly to a customer’s installation or the overhead low
voltage lines or the underground low voltage lines via portable connecting equipment. The
connecting equipment shall be connected via fuses rated to match the rating of the low
voltage lines. The contacts of the portable connecting equipment shall be shielded and
positioned to be inaccessible to the general public for overhead lines. For an underground
LV network, connection may be made via suitable stub tails bolted.

6.2 Earthing and bonding

The mobile generator should have the following parts electrically bonded together to
form the mobile generator frame bonding system: the engine frame, the generator frame,
all exposed metal enclosing electrical equipment or wiring, the “earth” terminal of all
socket outlets, any residual current device, and the main frame terminal. Refer to
‘Earthing’ design standard.

6.3 Installing a mobile generator

The location for installing of a mobile generator should be such as to cause as little
inconvenience as possible to local residents, the general public, and GECOL personnel
working nearby. The cables used to connect a mobile generator shall be rated to at least
match the rated output of the mobile generator. Cables shall be suitably supported and
protected from mechanical damage on the ground, up poles, and as they enter substations
and switchboards, etc. Suitable measures shall be taken to ensure that cables do not pose a
trip-hazard to the public or GECOL personnel.

6.4 Electrical protection system

As a minimum a mobile generator should be fitted with over-current and short circuit
protection (circuit breaker). Mobile generators should be fitted with protection systems that
isolate the mobile generator in case of the output frequency going beyond the prescribed
limits. Where a residual current device (RCCB) is fitted, the connection between the frame
and the winding neutral or star point is necessary to permit correct operation of the device.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 /13 Version 1.0
 Emergency Generator

Appendix A : References

ARMY TM 5- OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR OF AUXILIARY

685 NAVY GENERATORS of Joint Departments of the Army and the Navy In
NAVFAC USA
MO-912
NEGA C 201 The calculation method for the customer generator facilities
KEEH-11 Emergency generating facilities

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 /13 Version 1.0
 Emergency Generator

Appendix B : Calculation sample of the emergency generator capacity

Problem :
The design engineer wants to install an emergency generator for breakdown of the
transformer that supplies the electric power for an important customer. Calculate the
capacity of an emergency generator, when the following table shows the emergency loads
of customer.

Load characteristics
Output
Load type Facility type Power Input Input
(kW) Efficiency
factor (kVA) (kW)
Lights, Heaters 205 1.0 1.0 205 205
Air-conditioning system
128 0.8 0.92 174 139.2
and Heating system
Inverters 60 0.8 0.9 83 66.4
UPS 38.5 0.85 0.9 50 42.5
Normal
loads Batteries and Chargers 6 0.8 0.83 9 6.4
Water pump 1 11 0.86 0.87 15 12.9
Water pump 2 95 0.86 0.87 60 51.6
Drainage system 45 0.85 0.9 125 106.3
Sum 721 630.3
Pump 3 75 0.9 0.927 90 81
Pump 4 75 0.9 0.927 90 81
Temporary
loads Auxiliary pump and
45 0.86 0.87 60 51.6
motor operated valve
Sum 240 213.6
Total sum 961 843.9

Calculation conditions
a. All electric motors start by a direct starting method.
b. All electric motors connected to the emergency electrical system do not start
simultaneously.
c. Also, all emergency loads (normal loads and temporary loads) except the pump 4
load among target loads that are supplied by an emergency generator are operated
steadily. And the pump 4 starts at last.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 /13 Version 1.0
 Emergency Generator

Solution :
Capacity of emergency generator is decided by the biggest capacity among calculation
results by the following methods.
A. PG1 : Capacity of emergency generator needed to start the emergency load in steady
state.

PG1 =
∑W L
=
843.9
= 1054.9 kVA
Cosθ G 0.8

B. PG2 : Capacity of emergency generator considering the permissible voltage drop

when an electric motor that has maximum starting capacity starts.
1 − ΔE 1 − 0.25
PG 2 = × X d′ × QL = × 0.25 × (90 × 6.5) = 438.8 kVA
ΔE 0.25
Where,
ΔE is applied the value of 0.25 generally.
X d′ is applied the value of 0.25 generally.
QL is applied the value of 6.5 times of starting capacity of an electric motor that has
maximum starting capacity.

C. PG3 : Capacity of emergency generator needed to start an electric motor that has
maximum starting current among the electric motors lastly.

PG3 =
∑W B + (QL × Cosθ Q )
=
(843.9 − 81) + [(90 × 6.5) × 0.3]
=
938.4
= 1066.4 kVA
K × Cosθ G 1.1× 0.8 1.1× 0.8

Where,

Cosθ Q is applied the value of 0.3 generally.

Therefore, the PG3 is the biggest value. According to the table 1, the rated capacity of
this emergency generator is 1,250 kVA.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 /13 Version 1.0
 GDA 4100
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Street Lighting

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Definitions ······································································································1
3. Lighting Columns··························································································3
3.1 Typical forms of columns ························································································3
3.2 Locations of columns ······························································································3
3.3 Base of columns ······································································································4
3.4 Projection and tilt angle···························································································5
3.5 Earthing and fuses ···································································································5
3.6 Conduits ··················································································································6

4. Mounting Height ···························································································6

4.1 General····················································································································6
4.2 6 M mounting height or less than ············································································7
4.3 8 M mounting height ·······························································································7
4.4 10 M mounting height ·····························································································7
4.5 12 M mounting height ·····························································································7
4.6 18 M mounting height or more than ········································································8

5. Lighting Arrangement ··················································································8

5.1 Straight roads ··········································································································8
5.2 Single-level road junctions ······················································································9
5.2.1 T junction·······································································································9
5.2.2 Staggered junction ·······················································································10
5.2.3 Cross roads ··································································································10
5.2.4 Y junction ···································································································· 11
5.3 Bridges ··················································································································12
5.4 Pedestrian crossings ······························································································12
5.5 Park and garden areas····························································································14

ii
 5.5.1 Typical forms of columns·············································································14
5.5.2 Mounting height and base of columns ·························································14
5.5.3 Lamps and lighting levels ············································································15
6. Spacing from Lumen Method····································································15
6.1 Mounting height and spacing by luminaires ··························································16
6.2 Maximum spacing between lighting poles·····························································17

7. Lighting Sources ··························································································18

7.1 Lamps····················································································································18
7.2 Lighting levels·······································································································18
7.3 Lighting control methods ······················································································19

8. Maintenance and Operating times····························································19

8.1 Maintenance ··········································································································19
8.2 Hours of operation·································································································20

9. Distribution Boxes ·······················································································20

9.1 Locations of distribution boxes ·············································································20
9.2 Circuit breakers ·····································································································21
9.3 Size and installation of cables ···············································································22
9.4 Segregation············································································································23

10. High Mast Lighting (HML) ·····································································23

10.1 High mast location ······························································································23
10.2 Lighting sources ··································································································23

iii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Minimum clearance ····················································································· 3

< Table 2 > Concrete base······························································································· 4
< Table 3 > Length of projection····················································································· 5
< Table 4 > Method of pole arrangement ········································································ 8
< Table 5 > Height and concrete base of poles······························································ 15
< Table 6 > Standard lamps and lighting levels····························································· 15
< Table 7 > Relationship between mounting height and spacing··································· 17
< Table 8 > Maximum spacing between lighting poles ················································· 17
< Table 9 > Characteristics of lamps ············································································· 18
< Table 10 > Lighting levels ························································································· 19
< Table 11 > Maintenance factors ················································································· 19
< Table 12 > Operating times························································································ 20
< Table 13 > Rated capacity of MCCB & RCCB·························································· 21
< Table 14 > Maximum number of lamps ····································································· 21
< Table 15 > Minimum size of cables ··········································································· 22
< Table 16 > Minimum cable spacing from other services············································ 23
< Table 17 > Characteristics of lamps for high mast lighting········································ 24

iv
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Typical forms of street lighting ······································································ 3

[Figure 2] Base of lighting columns················································································ 5
[Figure 3 ] Geometry in elevation of street lighting ························································ 6
[Figure 4] T junction······································································································· 9
[Figure 5] Staggered junction ······················································································· 10
[Figure 6] Cross roads··································································································· 11
[Figure 7] Y junctions ··································································································· 11
[Figure 8] Typical layout at T junction with pedestrian crossing··································· 12
[Figure 9] Typical layout at crossroads with pedestrian crossing ·································· 13
[Figure 10] Staggered arrangement adjacent at pedestrian crossing······························ 13
[Figure 11] Opposite arrangement adjacent at pedestrian crossing ······························· 14
[Figure 12] Typical forms of park or garden lighting ···················································· 14
[Figure 13] Roadway luminaire classifications ····························································· 16
[Figure 14] Typical form of distribution boxes ····························································· 20
[Figure 15] Internal diagram of distribution boxes························································ 22

v
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ············································································································ 25
B Example of calculating design spacing ································································ 26
C Utilization factor of lamps ···················································································· 27
D Calculation of concrete base load ········································································· 29
E Communication network for controlling street lighting ········································ 33

vi
 Street Lighting

1. Scope

This standard specifies the general requirements for lighting columns, mounting height,
arrangement, spacing, lighting sources and distribution boxes of street lighting. It also
covers the type of cable and feeder lengths recommended for the street lighting distribution.

2. Definitions

Arrangement
The pattern according to which luminaires are sited in plan for instance staggered,
opposite, single side and twin central.

Average illuminance (Eave)

The mean illuminance in a horizontal plane at ground level over a specified area, derived
in a specified manner.

Color rendering
The ability of lighting sources to represent colors in object. The relative measure of this
ability is color rendering index, or CRI which rates lighting sources on a scale of 0 to
100. the higher the CRI, the more vibrant or close to natural the colors of objects appear.

Full cut off luminaire

A classification applied to a luminaire, which, when installed at the specified design
attitude gives zero intensity at and above the horizontal.

Glare
The Condition of vision in which there is discomfort or reduction of ability to see, or
both, caused by an unsuitable distribution or range of luminance, or to extreme contrast
in the field of vision.

Illuminance (E) = F/A

The luminous flux arriving at a surface divided by the area of the illuminated surface,
measured in lx : 1 lx = 1 lumen/m2.

Illuminance uniformity
The ratio of minimum illuminance to average or maximum illuminance. The closer this

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

figure is to 1, the more even the illuminance.

Luminance (B) = I/A

The physical quantity corresponding to the brightness of a surface (e.g. a lamp, luminaire,
sky or reflecting material) in a specified direction. It is the luminous intensity of the
surface divided by that area, measured in units of cd/ m2.

Luminouns flux (F)

The total lamp light in all directions, measured in unit of lumen.

Luminouns intensity (I)

The concentration of luminous flux emitted in a specified direction, measured in unit of cd.

Maintenance factor (M)

The estimation of how lighting conditions will deteriorate through use. Some factors are
dust and dirt inside luminaire surface, aging of light bulbs emitting less light and
depreciation of the reflection of road surface.

Minimum illuminance (Emin)

The minimum measured lighting level recorded in the measurement area, the
measurements taken at ground level in the horizontal plane.

Projection
The distance measured horizontally from the centre of a bracket-mounted luminaire, to
the centre of the column or pole.

Overhang
The distance measured horizontally between the photometric centre of a luminaire and
the adjacent edge of a carriageway. The distance is taken to be positive if the luminaires
are in front of the edge and negative if they are behind the edge.
Note. For installation purposes, the centre of a lamp or lamps may be regarded as the
photometric centre of a luminaire.

Set back
The shortest distance from the forward face of a column to the edge of a carriageway.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

Tilt angle
The angle by which the axis of the fixing spigot entry is tilted above the horizontal when
the luminaire is installed.

3. Lighting Columns

3.1 Typical forms of columns

Figure 1 shows the exterior appearances of typical street lighting with one and two arms.
The one arm columns may be installed for lighting sidewalks.

(a) One arm (b) Two arms

[Figure 1] Typical forms of street lighting

3.2 Locations of columns

All public lighting columns shall be set back from the edge of the carriageway to the
roadside face of the column, a minimum clearance of 800 mm. The minimum clearances
according to the design speed of the road are given below. The designer shall consider that
the set back of columns allow the free passage of blind persons, perambulators and
wheelchairs on the footway.
< Table 1 > Minimum clearance

Design speed (km/h) Clearance (m)

50 0.8

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

Absolute minimum 1.0

80
Recommended minimum 1.5
100 1.5

120 1.5

3.3 Base of columns

Where the column base is set up for rag bolted mounting, the mounting base shall
consist of a cast concrete base, and the base shall provide four M24 galvanized bolts evenly
set out on a 350 mm pitch circle for fixing and aligning the columns. It is recommended
that the planting depth of the column in the ground shall be as shown in table 2.
< Table 2 > Concrete base
Base dimensions in mm
Type of pole Mounting height
(A×B×H)
4 m, 5 m, 6 m 400×600×1,000
8m 400×800×1,100
One arm
10 m 400×800×1,200
12 m 500×1,000×1,300
4 m, 5 m, 6 m 400×600×1,100
8m 400×800×1,200
Two arms
10 m 500×1,000×1,300
12 m 500×1,000×1,300

B
100mm 100mm

The door opening (b¯c) shall be a minimum of 600 mm high × 115 mm wide and the
bottom of the door opening (a) shall be located between 500 mm and 700 mm above

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

ground level. The designer can verify the suitability of these depths for the site conditions,
and can arrange for other depths in the ground where necessary. The minimum depth of
underground cables (f) shall be 500 mm according to GDU 2100. In addition, the height
above ground of any portion of the anchor bolts (d) or foundation shall not exceed 50 mm
in order to prevent the bottom of a vehicle from snagging the foundation or base.

a
Concrete
d
Min 0.5m
f e Electrical electrode

[Figure 2] Base of lighting columns

3.4 Projection and tilt angle

The length of projection shall be equal to, or less than, a quarter of mounting height.
< Table 3 > Length of projection
Nominal height (m) Projection (m)
4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 0.75 /1.25 / 2 / 3
When the angle of tilt is larger, a uniformity ratio is increasing. Otherwise discomfort
glare is increasing because strong light comes into driver’s eyes. So the angle of tilt shall
be kept from 15° to 30°.

3.5 Earthing and fuses

All metal parts of columns shall be earthed with a minimum size of 16mm2 stranded
bare copper cables. The earthing electrode shall be connected to each streetlight pole with a
minimum depth of 0.5 m below ground level, and shall be separated from each streetlight
pole with a minimum of 2 m. The maximum earth resistance shall not exceed 100 Ω.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

The rated current of fuses shall be at least twice the normal full load current of the
maximum number of lights to be simultaneously switched. The ampere rating of the fuse
which is installed in each column shall be not less than a 10 amp fuse to ensure protection
against electric shock and over current.

3.6 Conduits
The basic method of laying cables shall be a direct burial. Sometimes, conduits shall be
required in roadway crossings and also be installed in footpaths where access roads,
driveways and footpath crossings are 2.5 m and over in width. Conduits shall be not less
than 40 mm internal diameter, and be laid as nearly perpendicular to the street as
practicable. They shall be excavated to a minimum depth of 500 mm from finished ground
level and a 100 mm bed of clean sand shall be spread along the base of the trench prior to
laying the cable and a PVC duct shall be laid in the trench. Marker tape shall be 150 mm
wide colored yellow and printed along its entire length in 100 mm high black lettering with
the legend “Caution – Street Lighting Cable below”.

4. Mounting Height

4.1 General

Tilt angle

Overhang

Set-back Width of carriageway

Edge of
carriage way

[Figure 3 ] Geometry in elevation of street lighting

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

When a mounting height is generally higher, a glare is decreasing and overall quality of
surrounding circumstances is improving, but a capital cost is higher and overall efficiency
is lower. The same mounting height shall be kept not only in the same width of roadways,
but also at road junctions. As far as possible, mounting heights shall be kept at or below the
height of adjacent buildings. This is particularly important in conservation areas. Therefore,
before a mounting height is determined, luminance distribution, overall lighting effect and
economic efficacy shall be considered and compared.

4.2 6 M mounting height or less than

6 M or less than shall be installed at some locations as follows :
■ the majority of side streets or alleys, or
■ lighting for public gardens and parking lots to make people feel safe.

4.3 8 M mounting height

8 M shall be installed at some locations as follows :
■ urban traffic route where, owing to the multiplicity of road junctions, no reduction
in the number of lighting points is to be gained by the use of a higher mounting
height, or
■ traffic routes where higher mounting heights would be out of scale with the adjacent
buildings, or
■ relatively narrow roads such as local alleys and access roads to residential areas in
which a mounting height between 10 M or 12 M and 5 M or 6 M is desirable.

4.4 10 M mounting height

10 M shall be installed at some locations as follows :
■ the majority of urban traffic routes, or
■ lighting for traffic routes in which a mounting height of 12 M would be an
undesirable appearance, or
■ lighting for wide heavily used routes where a large number of intersection, bends,
etc, could lead to a short spacing making the use of 12 M mounting height
uneconomical.

4.5 12 M mounting height

12 M shall be installed at the location of wide or heavily used routes where advantage
can be taken of a longer spacing of luminaires.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

4.6 18 M mounting height or more than

High mast lighting poles shall be installed at large-scale area such as airports, dockyards,
large industrial areas, sports areas and road intersections.

5. Lighting Arrangement

Poles for two and three lane roads shall be installed in the way of staggered or single
side arrangement for reasons of economy. For more than four lane roads, poles shall be
installed in the way of opposite or twin central arrangement or both.
< Table 4 > Method of pole arrangement

Number of lanes 2 ~ 3 lanes 4 lanes and more than

Arrangement Staggered or single side Opposite or twin central

5.1 Straight roads

■ Staggered arrangement
Kerb

Spacing

■ Single side arrangement

Kerb

Spacing

■ Opposite arrangement
Kerb

Spacing

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

■ Twin central arrangement on dual roadways

Kerb
Spacing

5.2 Single-level road junctions

The lighting at a junction shall be related to the need of drivers approaching the junction
to see vehicles approaching from other directions. The illuminance, on the carriageway,
throughout a junction shall be not less than the illuminance provided on the main roads
leading to the junction.

5.2.1 T junction
To achieve the required luminance on the T junction, typical lighting positions shall be
as shown in figure 4.
A

B C

Approximately 1/3 S
1/2 S

Approximately
1/2 S D

[Figure 4] T junction

Luminaire A on the major road shall be sited in line with centre line of the approach
lanes of the minor road to reveal the end of the minor road to traffic approaching along it
and to reveal pedestrians crossing its mouth.
Luminaire B on the major road shall be sited at not more than the design spacing for the
major road from luminaire A and preferably at a distance from the kerb of the minor road
of about one-half of the same design spacing along the major road. This luminaire reveals
turning movements to traffic in the major road (approaching from the right in figure 4).
Luminaire C on the major road shall be sited at a distance from the kerb of the minor

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

road approximately equal to one-third of the design spacing for the major road and
preferably not greater than 12m along the major road. This luminaire reveals both the
junction with the minor road to traffic in the major (approaching from the left in figure 4)
and a vehicle waiting in the mouth of the minor road.
Luminaire D on the minor road shall be sited on the nearside for traffic leaving the
major road at a distance from the kerb of the major road of about one-half of the design
space for the major road along the major road. This luminaire reveals the traffic conditions
in the mouth of the minor road to traffic entering from the major road.

5.2.2 Staggered junction

Two T junctions (1) and (2) on opposite sides of the major road, as shown in figure 5
shall be considered independently in the first instance. If they are closer together, i.e. less
than about 40 m apart, compromise positions may be chosen for luminaire B or C in figure
5 but care shall be taken not to reduce the standard of lighting.

D2
Approximately 1/2 S

1/3 S

A1 B2

(1) (2)
B1 C1 C2 A2

1/3 S 1/3 S
Approximately 1/2 S

Approximately 1/2 S
D1

[Figure 5] Staggered junction

5.2.3 Cross roads

Typical light positions for a cross roads are shown in figure 6. On each road, there shall
be a luminaire A on the nearside for traffic leaving the junction at a distance from the kerb
of the cross roads approximately equal to one-third of the design spacing for the major
road. These four luminaires shall be of the same type and mounted at the same height. This
distance may have to be reduced if the cross roads are wide or if there is a pedestrian
crossing. Luminaire A serve to reveal crossing and turning traffic. The next luminaire B, on

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

each road, on the offside for traffic leaving the junction, shall be at not more than two-
thirds of the design spacing for the major road, from luminaire A.

B2

1/3 S A2

A1 B3

B1
A3
A4
Not greater than 2/3 S

B4

[Figure 6] Cross roads

5.2.4 Y junction

Approx 1/2 S
Approx 1/3 S C
C
D Less
Less than S
than S
A D A
Approx 1/3 S
Approx 1/3 S
Approx 1/3 S
3/4 S
B
B

(a) (b)
[Figure 7] Y junctions

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

For a Y junction, the general arrangement of the luminaire in the major road shall be
continued across the junction, but with the spacing shortened to site the luminaire where
they are needed and to increase the amount of light in the vicinity of the junction.
Typical positions for a staggered arrangement are shown in figures 7 (a) and 7 (b) for the
minor road on the right and left respectively. These luminaires serve to reveal the junction
in much the same way as for T junctions described in 5.2.1. The amount of light on the
junctions shall be not less than that along any of the approach roads; this may be achieved
by arranging these four luminaires somewhat closer than the design spacing for the major
road.
Luminaire A shall be conspicuous and shall emit adequate light to reveal road layout and
traffic movement along the minor road. Luminaire B, C and D shall provide no less light
than those on any of the approach roads; their positions are more critical than that of
luminaire A.

5.3 Bridges
When street lighting is installed at bridges, staggered arrangements can produce an
irregular appearance when seen obliquely. The appearance of opposite arrangements is
preferred particularly as this may make possible a lower mounting height. A central
arrangement appears as a regularly spaced array of columns from any viewpoint and needs
fewer columns than an opposite arrangement. All luminaires shall be at the same mounting
height at bridges. And rag bolt mounted columns shall be used.

5.4 Pedestrian crossings

Pedestrian crossing

[Figure 8] Typical layout at T junction with pedestrian crossing

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

Pedestrian crossing

[Figure 9] Typical layout at crossroads with pedestrian crossing

At crossings in the immediate vicinity of junction, the arrangement shall be on the
principles shown in figures 8 and 9, although individual junction dimension will vary
widely.
Lighting is most effective in revealing pedestrians using the crossing when it is
symmetrical from both directions along the road. The lighting, therefore, shall be so
arranged that the crossing is at the mid-point of a span. This may involve the use of one
span of shorter spacing than that calculated. Particularly, a column shall not be placed
adjacent to a pedestrian crossing.
In a staggered arrangement, the optimum is to provide two columns at equal distances of
not more than 10m from the centre of the crossing. The column on the right-hand side of
the road shall be beyond the crossing as seen by an approaching driver (see figure 10).

Pedestrian crossing

Equal distances of
not more than 10 m

[Figure 10] Staggered arrangement adjacent at pedestrian crossing

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

In an opposite arrangement, there shall be tow pairs of columns at equal distances of not
more than 15 m from the centre of the crossing. These distances shall be measured parallel
to the centre line of the road in the usual way and for very wide roads they may need to be
reduced (see figure 11).

Pedestrian crossing

Equal distances of
not more than 15 m

[Figure 11] Opposite arrangement adjacent at pedestrian crossing

5.5 Park and garden areas

5.5.1 Typical forms of columns
The following figures are some of typical forms of columns installed in park and garden
areas.

(a) One-arm (b) Two-arms

[Figure 12] Typical forms of park or garden lighting

5.5.2 Mounting height and base of columns

In case of new installations in parks, it is recommended that the height of lighting poles
shall be 4m, 5m and 6m. The base of columns shall be made from concrete and the sizes of
base are shown in table 5.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

< Table 5 > Height and concrete base of poles

Base dimension in mm
Type of pole Mounting height
(A×B×H)
4m 300×600×600
One or two arms 5m 400×700×800
6m 400×800×1,000

B
100mm 100mm

5.5.3 Lamps and lighting levels

When lighting poles in park or garden places are installed, installing metal halide lamps
are better than using high pressure sodium lamps because of their high color rendering
index (white light), and the capacity of lamps shall be 250 watt and less in order to prevent
glare. To be pedestrian safety and good night view, the lighting levels shall be not less than
15 lx in accordance with the recommendations given in table 6.
< Table 6 > Standard lamps and lighting levels
Capacity Lighting levels
Type of lamps
(W) Eave (lx) Emin (lx)
High pressure sodium
250 and less 30 15
Metal halide

For crime prevention and pedestrian safety, color rendering can help in crime detection
by permitting better identification of objects and people and this shall be taken into account
when choosing a lighting source.

6. Spacing from Lumen Method

For day-to-day installation design, spacing shall be determined from the following

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

lumen method.
F×U×N×M = E×A

Where :
F is the total luminous flux of the lamp as quoted by the manufacturer (in lm).
U is the utilization factor which takes into account the efficiency of the light and the
light losses as quoted by the manufacturer.
N is the total number of lamps.
M is the maintenance factor which is the product of the lamp flux maintenance
factor and the luminaire maintenance factor. Values for the latter are given in
table 8.
E is the maintained average illuminance on street (in lx).
A is the surface area of street to be illuminated (in m2).
Note :
1) An average utilization factor (U) could be 0.35 to 0.50.
2) The utilization factor and maintenance factor shall be obtained from the manu-
facturer’s supplied photometric data.

6.1 Mounting height and spacing by luminaires

Luminaires are classified as cutoff, semi-cutoff, and non-cutoff, and are shown in figure
13. Luminaire classifications are descriptive of the position of the bulb in the socket.

(a) Cutoff (b) Semi-cutoff (c) Non-cutoff

[Figure 13] Roadway luminaire classifications

Cutoff control shall be used for partial interchange lighting and rural intersections due to
the ability to reduce glare. Semi-cutoff control shall be typically used for standard road
lighting. Adequate glare control is obtained with reasonable spacing. Non-cutoff control

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

shall be used in areas with a lot of background light. Non-cutoff luminaires shall not be
used at lower mounting heights because of glare.
When mounting height is comparatively high from width of roadway, spacing can be a
little longer by applying the second row of staggered and opposite & twin central
arrangement.
< Table 7 > Relationship between mounting height and spacing
Cut-off type Semi cutoff type
Arrangement
Height (H) Spacing (S) Height (H) Spacing (S)

≥ 1.0W ≤ 3.0H ≥ 1.1W ≤ 3.5H

Staggered
≥ 1.5W ≤ 3.5H ≥ 1.7W ≤ 4.0H

Single side ≥ 0.7W ≤ 3.0H ≥ 0.8W ≤ 3.5H

Opposite & ≥ 0.5W ≤ 3.0H ≥ 0.6W ≤ 3.5H

Twin central
≥ 0.7W ≤ 3.5H ≥ 0.8W ≤ 4.0H
Note : W = width of roadway (m), H = mounting height (m)

6.2 Maximum spacing between lighting poles

The following table shows maximum spacing recommended between mounting height
and width of roadway. When the spacing exceeds 48 m, it is desirable that a mounting
height shall be higher.
< Table 8 > Maximum spacing between lighting poles
(unit : m)
Width of road 6~7m 9 ~ 10.5 m 12 ~ 14 m
Mounting
Height luminaire Semi Semi Semi
Cut-off Cut-off Cut-off
arrangement cutoff cutoff cutoff

Single side 24 28 - - - -
8M Staggered 24 28 - - - -
Opposite - - 28 28 - -
Single side 30 35 - - - -
10 M Staggered 30 35 30 35 - -
Opposite - - 35 40 30 35
12 M Single side 42 48 36 42 - -

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

Staggered - - 36 42 36 42
Opposite - - 42 48 42 48
Note : The road width of 6~7 m means 2 driving lanes, 9~10.5 m for 3 driving lanes and
12~14 m for 4 driving lanes without a central reserve.

7. Lighting Sources

7.1 Lamps
The high pressure sodium lamps have a longer life, poor color rendering giving yellow
light comparing to metal-halide lamps. The metal-halide lamps offer energy efficacy of
around 80(lm/W) with excellent color rendering giving white light. Therefore, the
preferred sources, on grounds of efficacy and life, are high pressure sodium lamps and
metal-halide lamps. For main roads or some important places, metal-halide lamps can be
preferable, and for other cases, mercury vapor and high pressure sodium lamps can be used.
Power factor shall be corrected to a value greater than 0.9.
< Table 9 > Characteristics of lamps
Capacity Luminous Efficacy Color rendering Average life
Type of lamp
(W) flux(lm) (lm/W) index(Ra) (Hr)
125 5,800 46 50 24,000
Mercury vapor 250 11,000 44 50 24,000
400 22,600 57 50 24,000
150 16,000 107 22~30 24,000
High pressure
250 28,000 112 22~30 24,000
sodium
400 51,000 128 22~30 24,000
150 11,500 77 65 6,000
Metal halide 250 20,800 83 70 6,000
400 35,000 88 70 15,000
Note : Each value of lamps may differ slightly from one manufacture to another.

7.2 Lighting levels

In commercial and leisure areas, the provision of good lighting can add to the general
amenity and so encourage people to visit and make use of the facilities.
To be visually satisfactory for drivers and pedestrians, the lighting levels for the general
traffic situations shall be in accordance with the recommendations given in table 10.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

< Table 10 > Lighting levels

Eave Emin Uniformity ratios
Application area
( lx ) ( lx ) Emax : Emin Eave : Emin
Express & Main street 30 15 3:1 2.5 : 1
Suburban shopping street 25 10 5:1 3:1
Subsidiary street 25 10 5:1 3:1
Other streets 15 5 10 : 1 5:1

7.3 Lighting control methods

There are three types of lighting control methods such as timer control, photocell control
and wireless remote control. Most of main streets shall be controlled by the wireless
remote control system which consists of a central controller and a receiver installed at a
distribution box, if necessary a pole receiver. In case of controlling the range of streetlights,
for instances by each branch circuit or column, the way of controlling each branch circuit
must be more economical, suitable than controlling each column. In rural areas, a timer
control or photocell control shall be applied as a control way of street lighting.

8. Maintenance and Operating times

8.1 Maintenance
It is essential that cleaning and lamp replacement routines shall be regularly carried out
to maintain suitable conditions. Maintenance program shall include lamp replacement,
luminaire cleaning, renewal of failed parts, checking of gaskets and night inspections.
The values of the luminaire maintenance factor given in table 11 are typical and take
into account the environmental pollution and the frequency of cleaning. The reduction in
lamp output with age is allowed for by multiplying the initial luminous flux of the lamp by
the appropriate lamp flux maintenance factor.
< Table 11 > Maintenance factors

Cleaning intervals Pollution category

(months) High Medium Low
12 0.53 0.62 0.82
18 0.48 0.58 0.80
24 0.45 0.56 0.79
36 0.42 0.53 0.78

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

Note :
1) High pollution occurs in the centre of large urban areas and in heavy industrial areas.
2) Medium pollution occurs in semi-urban, residential and light industrial areas.
3) Low pollution occurs in rural areas.

8.2 Hours of operation

Street lighting is required during all the hours of darkness, independently of traffic flow,
and shall normally be in full operation from about 10 min after sunset to about 20 min
prior to sunrise in any controlling way. The practice of extinguishing certain luminaire
when the traffic flow is small does not fulfill the lighting needs of vehicular traffic and
may increase the likelihood of collision with columns.
< Table 12 > Operating times
Category Switch on Switch off

Operating time 10 min after sunset 20 min prior to sunrise

9. Distribution Boxes

9.1 Locations of distribution boxes

Receiver Receiver
Watt-hour c Watt-hour c
meter meter

b b

Steel pole
a Concrete a

(a) (b)
[Figure 14] Typical form of distribution boxes

Distribution boxes shall be of sheet steel construction, galvanized after fabrication, of

weatherproof construction and shall be large enough to afford easy access to the control

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

equipment. All fixings, hinges and locks shall be of non-ferrous metal. They shall be
provided with a concrete foundation, be free standing with necessary ducts for incoming
and outgoing cables and distribution boxes shall not be sited in indentations in landscaping
features where water is likely to collect, or in position vulnerable to impact from vehicles
and shall normally be positioned a minimum of 800 mm from the edge of carriageways.
The bottom of the door (a) shall be located between 700 and 1200 mm above finished
ground level and the door (b¯c) shall be a minimum of 900 mm high × 600 mm wide. The
size of distribution boxes can be changed from some situations. The door shall be
prevented from being opened by unauthorized persons, by the use of fasteners requiring a
specific tool to gain access to the fuses ad terminations. Earthing electrodes with a
minimum depth of 0.5 m shall be installed at every distribution box with the maximum
earth resistance of 100 Ω.

9.2 Circuit breakers

MCCB (molded case circuit breaker) shall be used as a primary circuit breaker, and the
rated current shall be not less than 100 A. And the rated current of secondary circuit
breaker, such as RCCB (Residual Current operated Circuit Breaker) shall not be less than
32A.
< Table 13 > Rated capacity of MCCB & RCCB
Category Primary CB (MCCB) Secondary CB (RCCB)
Rated current 100 A 32A

When such a secondary breaker is installed, the number of lamps within one RCCB shall
not exceed 9 for 400 W lamps or 15 for 250 W lamps.
< Table 14 > Maximum number of lamps
Category 250W lamp 400W lamp
Maximum number of lamps 15 9

The rated capacity of magnetic contactors shall be not less than 30A. The number of
branch circuits per distribution box shall not exceed six. Therefore, the distribution box
shall have expansion space for breakers or magnetic contactors when they need to be
installed. Maximum cable length from the distribution box to the last street light shall not
exceed 600 m to ensure voltage drops.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

9.3 Size and installation of cables

Voltage drop from the point of supply to the furthest street lighting shall not exceed
10 %. The incoming cable for the main breaker of distribution boxes shall be a minimum
size of 3.5C ×35 mm2 PVC copper cables or equivalent, and the outgoing cable for a group
of streetlights shall be a minimum size of 2C or 4C ×16 mm2 PVC copper cables or
equivalent. The cable for internal wiring of columns shall be a minimum size of 2C × 2.5
mm2 PVC copper wires. Street lighting loads shall be balanced over the three phases.
Therefore, lighting designers shall indicate on the street lighting plan the phase to which
each luminaire is to be connected.
< Table 15 > Minimum size of cables
Type of cable Incoming cable Outgoing cable Internal wiring

Cable size 35 mm2 16 mm2 2.5 mm2

R S T N

MCCB 4P

MC 4P
30 A

[Figure 15] Internal diagram of distribution boxes

All underground supplying cables shall be laid directly, except they run beneath roadway

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

or pathway crossings. In that case, cables shall be laid in duct and ducts shall be installed
as nearly perpendicular to the street as practical and terminate one meter behind the kerb
(on the footpath side) on each side of the road.

9.4 Segregation
The cables for street lighting shall be separated from other services with a minimum
spacing shown in table 16.
< Table 16 > Minimum cable spacing from other services
Telephone line
Category 0.4kV cables 11kV cables and over Gas pipe
and others
Spacing (mm) 300 100 600 300

10. High Mast Lighting (HML)

10.1 High mast location

High mast lighting consists of several luminaires mounted on a single luminaire support.
This type of system shall be installed at the locations that need large-area illumination,
such as parking lots, interchanges and air-ports in order to provide the greatest degree of
roadside safety and night visions. Usually there are two kinds of poles, such as stationary
and automatically elevated HML. It is recommended that the automatically elevated HML
be installed due to the easy maintenance of replacing broken lamps.
The 18 m, 20 m and 25 m height of HML are recommended, but its height can be
changed due to the conditions of installation areas. An earthing electrode shall be installed
at each high-mast lighting poles. Each high mast lighting pole has a minimum of 6 anchor
bolts in a concrete base.
HML shall not be placed in narrow medians if possible. HML placed within the clear
zone shall need protection such as guardrail. The height above ground of any portion of the
anchor bolts or foundation shall not exceed 100 mm in order to prevent the bottom of a
vehicle from snagging the foundation or base.
After reviewing the number of luminaires per mast and potential mast locations,
designers shall contact manufactures of high mast lighting to see their assistance in
determining exact luminaires selection and final mast location.

10.2 Lighting sources

High pressure sodium lamps shall be typically, because HPS lamps provide excellent
luminous efficacy, good lumen-maintenance, long life, and very acceptable color. If the

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

designers want to better night visions, metal halide lamps shall be considered to be used.
1000 Watts are suitable for the capacity of lamps. The tilt angle shall be kept from 15° to
30° to prevent glare.
< Table 17 > Characteristics of lamps for high mast lighting

Capacity Luminous Efficacy Color rendering Average life

Type of lamp
(W) flux(lm) (lm/W) index(Ra) (Hr)
High pressure
1,000 140,000 140 22 24,000
sodium

Metal halide 1,000 108,000 108 65 11,000

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

Appendix A : References

BS 5489 Road lighting

Part 1 Guide to the general principles
Part 2 Code of practice for lighting for traffic routes
Part 4 Code of practice for lighting for single-level road junctions
including roundabouts
Part 6 Code of practice for lighting for brides and elevated roads
Part 9 Code of practice for lighting for urban centres and public amenity areas
BS 7654 Single-phase street lighting fuses(cut-outs) for low-voltage public
electricity distribution systems
NS 0119 Specification for street lighting design and installation
KS C 8010 Luminaires for road lighting
KS C 8321 Molded case circuit breakers
IEC 60598 Luminaies
Part 1 General requirements and tests
Part 2-3 Particular requirements luminaires for road and street lighting

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

Appendix B : Example of calculating design spacing

Spacing ?

There are four driving lanes in urban area. Conditions needing to decide design spacing
between poles are as follows.
1) The width of each lane : 3 m.
2) Characteristics of lamps installed : 400 W High pressure sodium lamp(46,000 lm).
3) Cleaning intervals : 24 months
4) Desired lighting level : 30 lx
5) Utilization of lamp : 0.35

To calculate design spacing, use the below equation

F×U×N×M = E×A

The luminous flux of 400W high pressure sodium lamps is 46,000 lm and the number of
lamps for opposite arrangement is 2 (if staggered or single side arrangement is applied, N
is 1). The surface area of 4 lanes is multiplied design spacing by 12 m ( = 4 lanes ¯ 3 m)
and maintained factor is 0.45 by applying table 11.
Therefore the design spacing can be calculated from the following equation :

F × U × N × M 46,000(lm) × 0.35 × 2 × 0.45

Spacing = = = 40(m)
E × 12(m) 30(lx) × 12(m)

Therefore, the street lighting in this road shall be installed at 40 m intervals.

If 250W high pressure sodium lamps (25000 lm) are applied, the spacing shall be
decreased to 22 m.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

Appendix C : Utilization factor of lamps (U)

The utilization factor of lamps is the ratio of luminous flux which is arrived to the road
from the full luminous flux of lamp. It is calculated by using the curse sign of utilization
factor which is different from each lamp.

U = U1 + U2

Where, U1 (Utilization factor for road side) = 0.29

W1 Width of road 9
U1 = = = = 0 .9
H Mounting height 10

U2 (Utilization factor for foot-way side) = 0.06

W2 Width of footway 1
U2 = = = = 0 .1
H Mounting height 10

U1, U2 can be obtained from the below curve sign by applying both 0.9 and 0.1.
Therefore, U = U1 + U2 = 0.29 + 0.06 = 0.35

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

0.50

0.45
컷오프형
Cut off
0.40
U1
0.35
Semi컷오프형
세미 cutoff
0.30

0.25

0.20

0.15

0.10
W2
H 0.05
3.0 2.0 1.0
1.0 2.0 3.0
W1
0.05
H
0.10

0.15

컷오프형
Cut off 0.20
U2
0.25

세미
Semi컷오프형
cutoff 0.30

[Figure1] Example of curve sign of utilization

Note. When it comes to actual design, it needs to refer to the utilization factor of relevant
lamps.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

28 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

Appendix D : Calculation of concrete base load

1. Conditions of design
1.1 Wind load
Category Circular Octagonal Tetragonal Luminaire
Wind load(kg/m2) 48.8 61.0 90.3 55.8

1.2 Yield point of rolled steel material : 2,400 kg/m2

2. Area of wind pressure

2.1 Arm
W = AA1 and AA2

: AA1 = 0.11 m × 0.4 m = 0.044 m2

: AA2 = (0.075 m +0.31 m) / 2 × 0.525 m × 0.69 + 0.075 m × 1.5 = 0.182 m2

Where,
AA1 is the area of arm post, and AA2 is the area of arm

2.2 Lighting pole (10M)

H = (0.11m+0.22m) / 2 × 9.3 m = 1.53 m2

2.3 Luminaire
AL = 0.28 m2

3. Horizontal load
3.1 Arm (HA)
W = HA1 and HA2

: HA1 = 61.0 kg / m2 × 0.044 ㎡ = 2.68 kg

: HA2 = 90.3 kg/ m2 × 0.182 = 16.46 kg

3.2 Lighting pole (HP)

HP = 61.0 kg/ m2 × 1.53 = 93.6 kg

3.3 Luminaire (HL)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

29 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

HL =55.8 kg/ m2 × 0.28 m2 = 15.62 kg

4. Vertical load
4.1 Weight of arm (WA)
WA = 2 m × unit length of arm (15.95m) = 31.9 kg

4.2 Weight of luminaire (WL)

WL = 7 kg

5. Cross section and factor of cross section

5.1 Cross section
A = 0.828 × ( D 2 − d 2 ) = 22.98 cm2

• D2 : outside diameter of pole (22 cm)

• d2 : inside diameter of pole (21.36 cm)

5.2 Factor of cross section

Z = 0.109 × ( D 4 − d 4 ) = 129.28 cm2

6. Summary
6.1 Horizontal load
Category HL HA1 HA2 HP
Load (kg) 31.25 2.68 32.91 93.6

6.2 Vertical load

Category WL WA
Load (kg) 14.0 31.9

6.3 Height of horizontal and vertical load

Category Horizontal load Vertical load
HL HA1 HA2 HP WL WA
Height (cm) 1000 954 915 465 200 100

7. Strength
7.1 Horizontal moment
Horizontal load (kg) × height of horizontal load (cm)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

30 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

• 31.25 kg × 1,000 cm = 31,250 (kg·cm)

• 2.68 kg × 954 cm = 2,557 (kg·cm)
• 32.91 kg × 915 cm = 30,113 (kg·cm)
• 93.60 kg × 465 cm = 43,524 (kg·cm)
• total = 107,443 (kg·cm) = 1.074 (t · m)

7.2 Horizontal moment

Vertical load (kg) × height of vertical load (cm)

• 14.00 kg × 200 cm = 2,800 (kg·cm)

• 2.68 kg × 954 cm = 3,190 (kg·cm)
• total = 5,990 (kg·cm)

∴ M f = 107443 2 + 5990 2 = 107,615 (kg·cm)

8. Conditions of soil
Kind of ground A B C D
Effective angle of soil θ (°) 30 20 10 0
Weight of soil γ (t/m3) 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3
Permissible pressure Bottom of base plate qa 30 20 10 5
bearing power Flank of base plate qfa 20 15 7.5 3.7
2
(t/m ) Flank of main base qsa 15 10 5 2.5
Proof stress Bottom of base plate q 60 40 20 10
of pressure Flank of base plate qf 40 30 15 7.5
(t/m2) Flank of main base qs 30 20 10 5

Where,
A : ground which has very high resistance with very low level of underground water
Ex : mountain area, areas of field and farm
B : ground which has a little high resistance with low level of underground water
Ex : areas of weak field
C : ground which has low resistance with high level of underground water
Ex : areas of normal paddy field
D : ground which has no resistance with very high level of underground water

9. Permissible pressure bearing power of concrete base

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

31 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

MR1 ≥ M and q a ≥
∑W
A
0.4 m

M
h/2 = 0.6 m
h =1.2 m
B

qsa
qa

0.8 m

Where,
MR1 : resistance moment for flank of main plate (t·m)
B × q sa × h 2 0.6 × 10 × 1.2 2
MR1 = = = 1.440 (t·m)
6 6
B : width of main base (m)
h : height of concrete base (m)
M : yielding moment at the half depth of base (t·m)
∑W : total vertical load on the concrete base (t)

∑W = M f + ( HL + HA1 + HA2 + HP ) × 120 = 126,869 kg·cm = 1.269 t

A : floor space of concrete base (㎡) = 1 m2

M = M f + ∑ ( HL + HA1 + HA2 + HP ) × H / 2 = 1.076 + 0.160 × 1.2 / 2 = 1.171 (t·m)

Therefore,
MR1 (= 1.440 t·m) ≥ M (=1.171 t·m)

q a (= 20) ≥
∑W (= 1.269)
A

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

32 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

Appendix E : Communication network for controlling street lighting

1) Types of wireless remote control systems

a) Control of each distribution box by branch circuit
 One-way control
- Giving only an on/off signal to the receiver of each distribution box which is connected
to some street lighting in order to turn on/off street lamps by branch circuit line.
 Two-way control
- Giving not only an on/off signal to the receiver of each distribution box, but also
receiving the individual information of distribution boxes by branch circuit line which is
grouped with about 10~15 street lightings to check the present condition of individual
distribution boxes.
b) Control of each street lighting (two-way control)
- Giving not only an on/off signal to the receiver of each street lighting, but also
receiving the information of individual street lighting to check the present state such as its
position, leakage current and number of accumulated days since lamps are installed etc.

2) System configuration
a) Control of each distribution box (one-way and two-way control)

One-way
Repeater

Two-way

Control center
Street lighting

☞ One-way : When a control center gives an on/off signal to the receiver of each
distribution box which is composed of, a few breakers, the breakers turn on and off group
lightings which are connected to each breaker.
☞ Two-way : A control center can not only turn on and off group lightings just like the

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

33 / 34 Version 1.0
 Street Lighting

one-way control, but also receive and check the collective information of group lightings.
b) Control of each street lighting

Control Center

Server
Distribution Box Lighting

Database

Report
Gateway
Modem

☞ By communicating with each lighting, a control center can not only turn it on and off,
but also receive and check useful information from them such as their positions, leakage
current and year of installation.

3) Merits and demerits of each control system

Category Control of Distribution boxes Control of street lightings
* Economical investment * Possible to check and control
Merits * Control some lamps connected each street lighting
by branch circuit * Easy to find out faulty points

* Impossible to control each street * Huge initial investment

Demerits
lighting * More than 10 times expensive

* Central controller
* Central controller
Components * Distribution box controller
* Distribution box controller
* Lamp post controller

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

34 / 34 Version 1.0
 GDA 4200
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Customer Specification

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Definitions ······································································································1
3. General ···········································································································1
3.1 Disconnection of supply ··························································································1
3.2 Earthing···················································································································2

4. Equipotential Bonding··················································································2
4.1 Main equipotential bonding·····················································································2
4.2 Supplementary equipotential bonding ·····································································2

5. TN Systems·····································································································3
5.1 Introduction·············································································································3
5.2 Fault between a phase conductor and a protective conductor ··································3
5.3 Conventional disconnection time ············································································5
5.4 Fault between a phase conductor and earth ·····························································6

6. TT Systems ·····································································································7
6.1 Introduction·············································································································7
6.2 Protective devices····································································································8

7. IT Systems ······································································································9
7.1 Introduction·············································································································9
7.2 Fault conditions·····································································································10
7.3 Protective devices·································································································· 11

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Maximum disconnecting times for TN systems ··········································· 5

< Table 2 > Maximum disconnecting times in IT systems (second fault) ····················· 11

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Fault loop configuration of TN systems ························································· 4

[Figure 2] Fault loop configuration of TT systems·························································· 7
[Figure 3] Fault current path configuration of IT systems(first fault)···························· 10
[Figure 4] Fault current path configuration of IT systems(second fault) ······················· 11

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ············································································································· 12

v
 Customer Specification

1. Scope

This design standard describes the customer specification which can protect customers.
Automatic disconnection of supply is required where a risk of harmful patho-physiological
effects in a person could arise, when a fault occurs, due to the value and duration of the
touch voltage. This measure of protection necessitates co-ordination of the type of system
earthing and the characteristics of protective conductors and protective devices.

2. Definitions

TN systems
As a kind of earthing system, all exposed-conductive-parts of the installation shall be
connected to the earthed point of the power system by protective conductors which shall
be earthed at or near each relevant transformer or generator.

TT systems
As a kind of earthing system, all exposed-conductive-parts collectively protected by the
same protective device shall be connected, together with the protective conductors, to an
earth electrode common to all those parts.

IT systems
As a kind of earthing system, the installation shall be insulated from earth or connected
to earth through a sufficiently high impedance.

Residual current protective device

As a kind of protective devices, this device can detect the residual current by the ZCT or
3CT and cut off the fault current.

3. General

3.1 Disconnection of supply

A protective device shall automatically disconnect the supply to the circuit or equipment
for which the device provides protection against indirect contact so that, in the event of a
fault between a live part and an exposed conductive part or a protective conductor in the
circuit or equipment, a prospective touch voltage exceeding 50 V a.c. r.m.s. or 120 V
ripple-free d.c. does not persist for a time sufficient to cause a risk of harmful

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 /12 Version 1.0
 Customer Specification

physiological effect in a person in contact with simultaneously accessible conductive parts.

3.2 Earthing
Exposed-conductive-parts shall be connected to a protective conductor under the
specific conditions for each type of system earthing. Simultaneously accessible exposed-
conductive-parts shall be connected to the same earthing system individually, in groups or
collectively.

4. Equipotential Bonding

4.1 Main equipotential bonding

The purpose of equipotential bonding is to reduce the touch voltage between the
conductive parts of the systems and accessible exposed conductive parts of the installation.
In each building the following conductive parts shall be connected to the main
equipotential bonding:

• Main protective conductor;

• Main earthing conductor or main earthing terminal;
• Pipes supplying services within the building, e.g. gas, water;
• Structural metallic parts, central heating and air-conditioning systems, if applicable.

Such conductive parts originating outside the building shall be bonded as close as
practicable to their point of entry within the building. The main equipotential bonding shall
be made to any metallic sheath of telecommunication cables. However, the consent of the
owners or operators of these cables shall be obtained.

4.2 Supplementary equipotential bonding

If the conditions for automatic disconnection stated in section 4.1 cannot be fulfilled in
an installation or part of an installation, a local bonding known as supplementary
equipotential bonding shall be applied.

A. The use of supplementary equipotential bonding does not exclude the need to
disconnect the supply for other reasons, for example protection against fire,
thermal stresses in equipment, etc.
B. Supplementary equipotential bonding may involve the entire installation, a part of
the installation, an item of apparatus or a location.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 /12 Version 1.0
 Customer Specification

Supplementary equipotential bonding shall include all simultaneously accessible

exposed-conductive-parts of fixed equipment and extraneous conductive parts including,
where practicable, the main metallic reinforcement of constructional reinforced concrete.
The equipotential system shall be connected to the protective conductors of all equipment
including those of socket-outlets. Where doubt exists regarding the effectiveness of
supplementary equipotential bonding it shall be confirmed that the resistance R between
simultaneously accessible exposed-conductive-parts and extraneous conductive parts
fulfills the following condition:

50
R≤
Ia

Where
Ia is the operating current, in amperes, of the protective device:
• for residual current devices, In
• for overcurrent devices, the 5 s operating current.

5. TN Systems

5.1 Introduction
All exposed-conductive-parts of the installation shall be connected to the earthed point
of the power system by protective conductors which shall be earthed at or near each
relevant transformer or generator. Generally the earthed point of the power system will be
the neutral point. In fixed installations a single conductor may serve both as a protective
conductor and neutral conductor (PEN conductor) provided that the requirements of 546.2
of IEC 60364-5-54 are satisfied. The PEN conductor shall not be isolated or switched.

5.2 Fault between a phase conductor and a protective conductor

The characteristics of protective devices and the circuit impedances shall be such that, if
a fault of negligible impedance occurs anywhere in the installation between a phase
conductor and a protective conductor or exposed conductive part, automatic disconnection
of the supply will occur within the specified time, the following condition fulfilling this
requirement:

ZS × Ia ≤ UO

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 /12 Version 1.0
 Customer Specification

Where
• ZS is the impedance, in ohms, of the fault loop comprising the source, the live
conductor up to the point of the fault and the protective conductor between the point of the
fault and the source;
• Ia is the current, in amperes, causing the automatic operation of the disconnecting
protective device within the time stated in table 1 as a function of the nominal voltage UO,
or under the condition stated in section 6.3, within a conventional time not exceeding 5 s;
• UO is the nominal a.c. r.m.s. voltage, in volts, to earth.

In L1
L2
L3
PEN
I n z PEN In

M
ln
ZL UC

RS US Uf
B C

RB RA
E

[Figure 1] Fault loop configuration of TN systems

Where
• L1, L2, L3 are phase conductors.
• PEN is a protective conductor and neutral conductor.
• M is exposed metallic parts.
• Ia is the current, in amperes, causing the automatic operation of the disconnecting
protective device.
• RA is the sum of the resistance, in ohms, of the earth electrode and the protective
conductor for the exposed conductive parts.
• RB is the earth electrode resistance, in ohms, of power system.
• UC is the contact voltage, in volts.
• ZL is the human impedance, in ohms.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 /12 Version 1.0
 Customer Specification

• Ut is the assumed touching voltage, in volts.

• US is the voltage drop, in volts, which exceeds through RS.
• E is the earth.
• Uf is the fault voltage, in volts.
• RS is the resistance, in ohms, between conductive parts connected to human accessible
surface or the main equipotential bonding.
• C is conductive parts connected to the protective conductor and the main earth terminal.
• B is the main equipotential bonding.

< Table 1 > Maximum disconnecting times for TN systems

UO * (V) Disconnection time (S)
120 0.8
230 0.4
277 0.4
400 0.2
> 400 0.1
* Values based on IEC 60038
Note :
1) For voltages which are within the tolerance band stated in IEC 60038, the disconnecting
time appropriate to the nominal voltage applies.
2) For intermediate values of voltage, the next higher value in the above table is to be used.

The maximum disconnecting times stated in table 1 are deemed to satisfy for final
circuits which supply, through socket-outlets or directly without socket-outlets, class I
hand-held equipment or portable equipment.

5.3 Conventional disconnection time

A conventional disconnecting time not exceeding 5 s is permitted for distribution
circuits. A disconnecting time exceeding that required by table 1 but not exceeding 5 s is
permitted for a final circuit supplying stationary equipment only, provided that, where
other final circuits which require disconnecting times according to table 1 are connected to
the distribution board, or distribution circuit supplying that final circuit, one of the
following conditions is fulfilled:
a) The impedance, in ohms, of the protective conductor between the distribution board
and the point at which the protective conductor is connected to the main equipotential
bonding does not exceed

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 /12 Version 1.0
 Customer Specification

50
Zs (Ω)
Uo

or
b) There is equipotential bonding at the distribution board which involves the same
types of extraneous conductive parts as the main equipotential bonding and which
complies with the requirements for main equipotential bonding.

If the conditions of section 6.2 and this section cannot be fulfilled by using overcurrent
protective devices, supplementary equipotential bonding in accordance with section 5.2
shall be applied. Alternatively, protection shall be provided by means of a residual current
protective device.

5.4 Fault between a phase conductor and earth

In exceptional cases where a fault may occur between a phase conductor and earth, for
example in the use of overhead lines, the following condition shall be fulfilled in order that
the protective conductor and the exposed-conductive-parts connected to it do not reach a
voltage to earth exceeding a conventional value of 50 V:

RB 50
≤
R E 50 − U o

Where
• RB is the earth electrode resistance, in ohms, of all earth electrodes in parallel;
• RE is the minimum contact resistance with earth, in ohms, of extraneous conductive
parts not connected to a protective conductor, through which a fault between phase and
earth may occur;
• UO is the nominal a.c. r.m.s. voltage to earth, in volts.

In TN systems, use of the following protective devices is recognized:

• Overcurrent protective devices;
• Residual current protective devices;

Except that

• A residual current protective device shall not be used in TN-C systems;

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 /12 Version 1.0
 Customer Specification

• Where a residual current protective device is used in a TN-C-S system, a PEN

conductor shall not be used on the load side. The connection of the protective conductor to
the PEN conductor shall be made on the source side of the residual current protective
device.

6. TT Systems

6.1 Introduction
All exposed-conductive-parts collectively protected by the same protective device shall
be connected, together with the protective conductors, to an earth electrode common to all
those parts. Where several protective devices are utilized in series, this requirement applies
separately to all the exposed-conductive-parts protected by each device. The neutral point
or, if it does not exist, a phase conductor of each generator station or transformer station
shall be earthed. The following condition shall be fulfilled:

RA ⅹ Ia ≤ 50 V

Where
• RA is the sum of the resistance, in ohms, of the earth electrode and the protective
conductor for the exposed conductive parts;
• Ia is the current, in amperes, causing the automatic operation of the protective device.

Ia L1
L2
L3
N
Ia

ZL UC
Ia
UL
RS US Uf
B C

Ia
T

RB RA
E Ia

[Figure 2] Fault loop configuration of TT systems

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 /12 Version 1.0
 Customer Specification

Where
• L1, L2, L3 are phase conductors.
• N is a neutral conductor.
• M is exposed metallic parts.
• Ia is the current, in amperes, causing the automatic operation of the disconnecting
protective device.
• RB is the earth electrode resistance, in ohms, of power system.
• UC is the contact voltage, in volts.
• ZL is the human impedance, in ohms.
• Ut is the assumed touching voltage, in volts.
• US is the voltage drop, in volts, which exceeds through RS.
• E is the earth.
• Uf is the fault voltage, in volts.
• RS is the resistance, in ohms, between conductive parts connected to human accessible
surface or the main equipotential bonding.
• C is conductive parts connected to the protective conductor and the main earth terminal.
• B is the main equipotential bonding.

When the protective device is a residual current protective device, Ia is the rated residual
operating current In. For the purpose of discrimination, S-type residual current protective
devices (see IEC 61008-1 and IEC 61009-1) may be used in series with general type
residual current protective devices. To provide discrimination with S-type residual current
protective devices, an operating time not exceeding 1 s is permitted in distribution circuits.
When the protective device is an overcurrent protective device, it shall be either
• a device with an inverse time characteristic and Ia shall be the current, in amperes,
causing automatic operation within 5 s, or
• a device with an instantaneous tripping characteristic and Ia shall be the minimum
current, in amperes, causing instantaneous tripping.

6.2 Protective devices

If the condition of section 7.1 cannot be fulfilled, supplementary equipotential bonding
in accordance with section 5.2 shall be applied.
In TT systems, use of the following devices is recognized:
• Residual current protective devices;
• Overcurrent protective devices

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 /12 Version 1.0
 Customer Specification

Overcurrent protective devices are only applicable for protection against indirect contact
in TT systems where a very low value of RA exists. The use of fault-voltage operated
protective devices is not excluded for special applications where the above-mentioned
protective devices cannot be used.

7. IT Systems

7.1 Introduction
In IT systems the installation shall be insulated from earth or connected to earth through
a sufficiently high impedance. This connection may be made either at the neutral point of
the system or at an artificial neutral point. The latter may be connected directly to earth if
the resulting zero-sequence impedance is sufficiently high. Where no neutral point exists a
phase conductor may be connected to earth through an impedance.
The fault current is then low in the event of a single fault to an exposed conductive part
or to earth and disconnection is not imperative provided the condition is fulfilled. Measures
shall be taken, however, to avoid risk of harmful patho-physiological effects on a person in
contact with simultaneously accessible conductive parts in the event of two faults existing
simultaneously.
No live conductor of the installation shall be directly connected to earth. To reduce
overvoltage or to damp voltage oscillation, it may be necessary to provide earthing through
impedances or artificial neutral points, and the characteristics of these should be
appropriate to the requirements of the installation.
Exposed-conductive-parts shall be earthed individually, in groups or collectively. In
large buildings, such as high rise buildings, the direct connection of protective conductors
to an earth electrode is not possible for practical reasons. Earthing of exposed-conductive-
parts may be achieved by bonding between protective conductors, exposed-conductive-
parts and extraneous-conductive-parts. The following condition shall be fulfilled:

RA ⅹ Id ≤ 50 V

Where
RA is the resistance, in ohms, of the earth electrode for exposed-conductive-parts;
Id is the fault current, in amperes, of the first fault of negligible impedance between a
phase conductor and an exposed conductive part. The value of Id takes account of leakage
currents and the total earthing impedance of the electrical installation.
In cases where an IT system is used for reasons of continuity of supply, an insulation
monitoring device shall be provided to indicate the occurrence of a first fault from a live

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 /12 Version 1.0
 Customer Specification

part to exposed-conductive-parts or to earth. This device shall initiate an audible and/or

visual signal. If there are both audible and visible signals, it is permissible for the audible
signal to be cancelled, but the visual alarm shall continue as long as the fault persists. It is
recommended that a first fault be eliminated with the shortest practicable delay.

R
S
T
Id
R

Id1 UB 50V Ik
Insulation
monitoring Id2
device RE
Rd=Id1+Id2
RA 50V/IAd RA 50V/IAd

[Figure 3] Fault current path configuration of IT systems(first fault)

7.2 Fault conditions

After the occurrence of a first fault, conditions for disconnection of supply in the event
of a second fault shall be as follows, whether all exposed-conductive-parts are
interconnected by a protective conductor (collectively earthed) or are earthed in groups or
individually:
a) where exposed-conductive-parts are earthed in groups or individually, conditions for
protection are given in section 7 as for TT systems, except that the second paragraph of
section 7.1 does not apply;
b) Where exposed-conductive-parts are interconnected by a protective conductor
collectively earthed, the conditions of a TN system apply subject to the following
conditions. The following conditions shall be fulfilled where the neutral is not distributed:

3 ×U O
ZS ≤
2I a

or where the neutral is distributed:

UO
Z′S ≤
2I a
Where
UO is the nominal a.c. r.m.s. voltage, in volts, between phase and neutral;
U is the nominal a.c. r.m.s. voltage, in volts, between phases;

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 /12 Version 1.0
 Customer Specification

Zs is the impedance, in ohms, of the fault loop comprising the phase conductor and the
protective conductor of the circuit; Z′s is the impedance, in ohms, of the fault loop
comprising the neutral conductor and the protective conductor of the circuit; Ia is the
operating current in amperes of the protection device in the disconnecting time t specified
in table 2 when applicable, or within 5 s for all other circuits when this time is allowed.

R
S
T
PE
R

RA First fault Second fault

[Figure 4] Fault current path configuration of IT systems(second fault)

< Table 2 > Maximum disconnecting times in IT systems (second fault)

Installation nominal Disconnection time (s)
voltage Uo /U(V) Neutral not distributed Neutral distributed
120-240 0.8 5
230/400 0.4 0.8
400/690 0.2 0.4
580/1,000 0.1 0.2
Note :
1) For voltages which are within the tolerance band stated in IEC 60038, the disconnecting
time appropriate to the nominal voltage applies.
2) For intermediate values of voltage, the next higher value in the table is to be used.

7.3 Protective devices

In IT systems use of the following monitoring and protective devices is recognized: 
• Insulation monitoring devices;
• Overcurrent protective devices;
• Residual current protective devices.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 /12 Version 1.0
 Customer Specification

Appendix A : References

IEC 60364-4-41 Electrical installation of building

Part 4-41: Protection for safety – Protection against electric shock

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 /12 Version 1.0
 GDS 5000
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Substation Type

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. General ···········································································································1
2.1 Overview·················································································································1
2.2 Kinds of type ···········································································································1
3. Characteristics by Types ··············································································2
3.1 Outdoor AIS type ····································································································2
3.2 Outdoor GIS type ····································································································3
3.3 Indoor GIS type·······································································································3
4. Review of Required Area··············································································4
4.1 Overview·················································································································4
4.2 Arrangement of equipment ······················································································4
4.3 Site conditions·········································································································5
5. Comparative Analysis by Types···································································6
5.1 Economical efficiency ·····························································································6
5.2 Reliability················································································································7
5.3 Maintenance condition ····························································································9
5.4 Environmental harmony ························································································10
6. Result of Review ··························································································10
6.1 Required area ········································································································10
6.2 Economical efficiency ···························································································10
6.3 Reliability··············································································································10
6.4 Maintenance condition ··························································································10
6.5 Environmental harmony ························································································10
7. Selection of Substation Types·····································································11
7.1 Conclusion ············································································································ 11
7.2 Selection of substation type··················································································· 11
7.2.1 Primary side································································································· 11
7.2.2 Secondary side ····························································································· 11
7.2.3 Power transformer························································································ 11
7.2.4 Summary of substation types ·······································································12

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Result of calculation ···················································································· 5

< Table 2 > Relative cost of major equipment (based on KEPCO) ································· 7
< Table 3 > Summary of comparative analysis by substation types ································ 7
< Table 4 > Conclusion of review between AIS type and GIS type······························· 11
< Table 5 > Summary of substation types ····································································· 12

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

< Figure 1 > Comparison of fault factors by substation types········································· 8

< Figure 2 > Improved reliability···················································································· 9

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ············································································································ 13
B Application of other countries ············································································· 14

v
 Substation Type

1. Scope

This standard is applicable to selection of substation type to apply the new 66kV &
30kV substation. Also, all matters in the substation construction such as the economical
efficiency, reliability, maintenance condition and environmental harmony are reviewed to
construct the most reliable and economical substation

2. General

2.1 Overview
Substation types are classified as air insulated type, gas insulated type and hybrid type
according to the insulation method, and as outdoor type and indoor type according to
placement of major equipment. Mixing two classification methods, substations can be
classified as outdoor AIS (Air insulated switch-gear), outdoor GIS (Gas insulated switch-
gear), and indoor GIS

Also, the appropriate type should be decided after consideration of economical

efficiency, reliability, maintenance conditions and environmental conditions. Therefore,
this review observes general characteristics of substation types and compares consideration
factors for the selection of substation type

So that the most suitable type for the new 66kV, 30kV substations, which will play an
important role in the electric power system, are selected

2.2 Kinds of type

a) Outdoor AIS
The buses and associated equipment such as transformers, circuit breakers,
disconnecting switches and so forth are exposed to air and connected together by means
of an aluminum tube or ACSR (Aluminum conduct steel reinforced) with insulators
installed in supporting structures. The buses may be multi-tiered or spread out at one
level

b) Outdoor GIS
The buses and associated equipment such as circuit breakers, disconnecting switches
and so forth in the GIS type substation are housed in pipe-type enclosures insulated by
SF6 gas. The GIS type can be classified into two types.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 15 Version 1.0
 Substation Type

▪ Outdoor hybrid GIS

The hybrid GIS type where power transformers, circuit breakers and transmission
lines are connected together by means of an AL (aluminum) Tube or an ACSR and
some of the live parts are exposed to air
▪ Outdoor full GIS
The full GIS type which has no live exposed parts on its premises except at the outlet
section. Full GIS type substations can be built very compactly, but the construction
cost is very high and installment of equipment is difficult

c) Indoor GIS
All equipment such as transformers, circuit breakers, disconnecting switches and so
forth, is installed in an exclusive building. Most of the features are equal with outdoor
GIS types. The biggest difference is that all equipment is protected completely from
contamination by salt spray, dust and moisture, and the substation size is most compact.

d) Indoor AIS
The buses and associated equipment such as transformers, circuit breakers,
disconnecting switches and so forth are connected together by means of an aluminum
tube or ACSR (Aluminum conduct steel reinforced) with insulators installed in
supporting structures. This type is similar with outdoor AIS type. However it needed an
exclusive building to accommodate the all facilities

e) Underground GIS
All of the features of underground GIS type equal with indoor GIS type. But the
biggest difference is that all equipment is installed in underground. Nowadays, this
type is adopting on the flourishing street of urban area, shopping street, school and
hospital area that is difficult to secure the construction land

3. Characteristics by Types
In this section, outdoor AIS, outdoor GIS and indoor GIS type shall be compared
because those are the typical substation types using in the world widely

3.1 Outdoor AIS type

In outdoor AIS type, advantages and disadvantages shall be classifying as shown
▪ It requires a large area to secure clearance, phase to phase and phase to ground for air
insulation

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 15 Version 1.0
 Substation Type

▪ Reliability decreases because most of the equipment is exposed to air, and they are
easily contaminated by salt spray, dust, moisture and so forth
▪ When maintenance or scheduled outages at ordinary times occur concerns about
accidents such as electric shock are high
▪ There may be noise pollution by the operation of equipment, such as the CB and DS.
High steel structures and large areas are disadvantageous to the surrounding
environment
▪ Cost of materials is not high because it does not use a special insulation medium
▪ However, this type is adopted in places where there are no problems with site
development, land is inexpensive, there are no severe problems with contamination
and a special harmony with the surroundings need not be considered because the
material cost is more economical compared to the GIS type.

3.2 Outdoor GIS type

In outdoor GIS type, advantages and disadvantages shall be classifying as shown.
However, full GIS type substation cost is very high and installation of equipment is
difficult, therefore, this section deal with a hybrid GIS type instead of the full GIS type
▪ The GIS type can greatly reduce the required switchyard area in comparison with the
AIS type because the buses and associated equipment are housed in pipe-type
enclosures insulated by superior dielectric gas which greatly reduces the insulation
distance of phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground
▪ Reliability increases in comparison with the AIS type because most of the live parts
can be protected from contamination by salt spray, dust, moisture and so forth
▪ It can improve safety of workers during maintenance or scheduled outages at
ordinary times because the possibility of electric shock and fire is lower
▪ It has the advantage of environmental harmony because the noise from operation of
equipment is lessened, steel structures for constitution of buses are decreased, and
equipment is installed at a low position
▪ This type can reduce civil engineering cost due to a small required area, but material
cost is expensive in comparison with the AIS type
▪ Therefore, it is adopted in cases where the land cost is expensive, securing a large
area is difficult, and environmental harmony is highly required

3.3 Indoor GIS type

In indoor GIS type, advantages and disadvantages shall be classifying as shown
▪ It requires additional construction costs for an exclusive building, and expensive

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 15 Version 1.0
 Substation Type

equipment
▪ Also installation of facilities and replacement when they are out of order is difficult
due to the narrow working space
▪ Therefore, this type is adopted only in downtown areas where is very difficult to
secure the site and requires environmental harmony with its surroundings

4. Review of Required Area

4.1 Overview
The required area for the substation is an important item to be considered for the
selection of substation type because the whole construction cost is influenced according to
land security, land cost and civil engineering cost. The required area becomes an issue
where a substation is constructed in a downtown area where the land cost is expensive and
land security is difficult due to public complaints, or in cases of mountainous areas that
require a high civil engineering cost for site development

However, considering the situation of construction site of Libya, it is expected that the
land security is not difficult and civil engineering cost for site development as well as cost
has no great effect on the overall construction cost. However, a smaller area is better in
view of efficient utilization of national land. Based on this, the required area of each
substation type was compared

Considering the extension in the future, the scale of the substation for calculation of
required area shall be applied according to the final scale suggested in the long-term
system plan. The required area of each type was calculated assuming the arrangement of
equipment as in the layout shown in GDS 5100

4.2 Arrangement of equipment

a) Substation scale
▪ 30 kV Substation
- Power transformer: 30 kV, 25 MVA, 2 Banks
- Feeder: 30 kV 6 feeders, 11 kV 14 feeders
▪ 66 kV Substation
- Power transformer: 66 kV, 25 MVA, 2 Banks
- Feeder: 30 kV 6 feeders, 11 kV 14 feeders

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 15 Version 1.0
 Substation Type

b) Bus-bar scheme
▪ 30 kV Substation
- Double bus and single breaker
▪ 66 kV Substation
- Single bus and single breaker
- Double bus and single breaker
< Table 1 > Result of calculation
Substation Type Installation area (m2) Remark
30 kV Indoor GIS 1290.42 m2 (40.2 × 32.1) Double bus
2
4184.28 m (78.8 × 53.1) Double bus
Outdoor AIS 2
3774.52 m (78.8 × 47.9) Single bus
2
2170.00 m (50.0 × 43.4) Double bus
66 kV Outdoor GIS 2
2170.00 m (50.0 × 43.4) Single bus
2
1907.60 m (50.2 × 38.5) Double bus
Indoor GIS 2
1907.60 m (50.2 × 38.5) Single bus
2
Indoor AIS 2189.2 m (52.0 × 42.1) Single bus
Note:
1. Installation areas are included the road area to construct the substation
2. Detailed required areas refer to the substation layout described in GDS 5100, however, this
layout is only for reference to estimate the required area

As shown in the above table, we will see that the outdoor AIS type requires more than
twice the area of the indoor GIS type (based on the 66 kV substations)

4.3 Site conditions

According to the site survey, all areas of Libya have the disadvantageous configuration
of the ground which is generating many dust, also, there are many problems to maintain
the substations. If we are considering the disadvantageous configuration of Libya, outdoor
AIS type is very disadvantageous to apply at the new substations because the quality
deterioration of equipment caused by contamination is easily progressed and which brings
the reduction of equipment life cycle

However, application of GIS type substation in 66 kV substations is not suitable in terms

of economical efficiency because which are mainly constructed at rural area. Therefore, it
is recommended that the 66 kV substation type shall be selected among the various types
according to circumference conditions

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 15 Version 1.0
 Substation Type

5. Comparative Analysis by Types

In this comparative analysis, the outdoor full GIS type and indoor GIS type, where
construction cost is very high and installation and maintenance is difficult, is expected in
consideration of Libya’s present state. The outdoor AIS type and outdoor GIS type were
reviewed to select the most suitable and practical type through the comparison analysis of
major items required to select substation type namely economical efficiency, reliability,
maintenance and repair conditions, and environmental conditions

5.1 Economical efficiency

▪ The major parameters for comparison of economical efficiency are material cost,
installation cost and required area. Even though the total construction cost is different
according to substation type and site conditions, what influences to the total cost is the
cost of major equipment that accounts for about 60 ~ 80 % of total cost in general
▪ Except for the indoor GIS type which requires an exclusive building, installation cost
is similar between the outdoor AIS and GIS type, or that of the GIS type is slightly
higher than the AIS type
▪ However this cost is too low to have an effect on the total construction cost, because
the AIS type requires a greater cost for site development than the GIS type. On the
other hand, the GIS type requires more cost for assembly of the GIS compared to the
AIS type
▪ As stated in the preceding column, the required area also has no great effect on the
total cost considering the land price and site condition. Therefore in this comparison
analysis, costs of major equipment between the two types are compared to review
economical efficiency
▪ The bellow table for relative cost of major equipment shows that the GIS type is
about 1.6 times as expensive as the AIS type. However, supposing that the power
system is extended and equipment is increased, the difference in costs between the AIS
and GIS type will be more than the present

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 15 Version 1.0
 Substation Type

< Table 2 > Relative cost of major equipment (based on KEPCO)

Outdoor AIS Indoor GIS
Equipment
Quantity Relative cost Quantity Relative cost
Transformer 2 1.00 2 1.00
CB 7 0.32 0.64
154 kV

DS 16 0.09
Main bus 0.46
Bus devices 0.01 0.06
CB 17 0.26 0.31
DS 44 0.07
23 kV

Main bus 0.38

Bus devices 0.01 0.07
Total 1.76 2.92

< Table 3 > Summary of comparative analysis by substation types

Types Remark
Item
Outdoor AIS Outdoor GIS Indoor GIS
Material cost 100% 130% above 130% above
Installation cost 100% 105% above 155% above
Contamination by Very
Disadvantage Advantage
salt spray advantage
Operation and
Disadvantage Advantage Advantage
maintenance
Noise Very disadvantage Average Advantage
Environmental Very
Very disadvantage Advantage
harmony advantage

5.2 Reliability
▪ The reliability of the AIS type is lower than the GIS type because all equipment is
exposed to the air and can lead to spontaneous deterioration or abrasion. Also, the
possibility of a fault caused by substances is increased
▪ On the other hand, the GIS type can increase reliability greatly because the possibility
of faults caused from exposure to air can be greatly reduced
▪ If countermeasures are prepared against inferiority in manufacture and installation

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 15 Version 1.0
 Substation Type

which is the primary factor causing faults in GIS type substations

▪ According to the below figure, the GIS type can be reduced the possibility of faults
than the AIS type as well as 53.1 % because the faults are related to natural condition
can be excluded
▪ Also, it has the advantage in removal of fault factors due to the simple structure and
reduction of parts besides the steel pipes insulated with SF6 gas.

(Outdoor AIS type) (GIS type)

Manufacturing
16.6 %
Inferiority

Installation 70 %
Inferiority 5.9 %
46.9 %
Natural 17.2 % 100 %
Deterioration

Unknown faults 7.2 % 18.9 %

5.4 %
Wind and snow
2.7 %
3.4 %

Thunderbolts 12.7 %

Earthquake and Excluded fault factors

Flood 6.5 % 53.1 %
Salt spray and
in GIS type
Dust 4.6 %
Maintenance
Inferiority 3.8 %

Mal-operation 8.0 %

Touch of 9.3 %
Substance
Influence of
Other faults 4.8 %

< Figure 1 > Comparison of fault factors by substation types

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 15 Version 1.0
 Substation Type

Prevent faults caused by

Natural conditions
Gas Insulated Switchgear Enclosure of live part
Prevent faults caused by

Improved reliability
Substance

Simplification of Reduce fault factors

structure as use reduced parts

Using Non-flammable
Exclusion of fire
Materials

Exclusion of using
Stability about an earthquake
Insulator

< Figure 2 > Improved reliability

5.3 Maintenance condition

▪ Another important thing that should be considered when selecting the substation type
is maintenance conditions and faults after completion of construction. In the AIS type,
the equipment needs to be maintained and inspected frequently because they are
exposed to air and quickly wear out
▪ On the other hand, in the GIS type, the cycle of maintenance and inspection is
extended because most of the equipment is installed in steel pipes insulated with gas
▪ However, even though the GIS type has many advantages in reliability, maintenance
and repair, there are several important preconditions for effective and proper operation
- There must be a GIS manufacturer or its agency to replace equipment immediately
to prevent faults
- Specialized engineers for repair in the faults
- Skilled operators for operation and maintenance under normal circumstances

▪ If these requirements are satisfied, the GIS type is very advantageous since the
maintenance cost can be reduced because of a reduced frequency of maintenance due
to a high reliability
▪ However, it is difficult to satisfy these requirements considering the present situation
of Libya, and it is expected to be difficult to operate and maintain the substation
properly
▪ Therefore, the selection of the GIS type for the new 66kV, 30kV substations will
require consideration of certain educations for operators and technicians to secure the
proper operation and maintenance capabilities over a long period of time

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 15 Version 1.0
 Substation Type

5.4 Environmental harmony

▪ It is difficult to harmonize the AIS type with the environment because it requires a
much higher steel tower to arrange equipment in the switchyard and generates more
noise in CB operation than the GIS type
▪ Therefore, it is difficult to adopt downtown where the environmental conditions are
more important than economical efficiency
▪ However, considering the present situation of the 66 kV substation site, environmental
harmony is not a main concern

6. Result of Review
Considering the practical situations of Libya, the result of study to select substation
types between outdoor AIS type and out door GIS type can be concluded as follows

6.1 Required area

The required area for the outdoor AIS type generally is about 2 times as large as the
outdoor GIS. However, in Libya, there are less concern about environmental limitations
and securing the required area for the new substations especially

6.2 Economical efficiency

Since the cost of major equipment for the outdoor AIS type is about 60 % that of the
outdoor GIS type, the outdoor AIS type can greatly reduce the total construction cost

6.3 Reliability
In general, the reliability of the outdoor AIS type is very lower than the outdoor GIS
type. However, under the present circumstances of Libya, with difficulties in the operation
of the outdoor 66 kV GIS type substation, it cannot be concluded that the outdoor GIS type
is more reliable than the outdoor AIS type

6.4 Maintenance condition

The AIS type is more desirable in consideration of the difficulty in assurance of GIS
technology in Libya

6.5 Environmental harmony

The AIS type is not appropriate in regards to environmental harmony. However, this is
not a main concern in selecting a new 66 kV substation type. However, this point should be

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 15 Version 1.0
 Substation Type

considered in selecting a new 30 kV substation because which is placed at downtown area

or big city

< Table 4 > Conclusion of review between AIS type and GIS type
Item AIS type GIS type Remark
Required area × ○○
○○: good
Economical efficiency ○○ ○
○: not bad
Reliability × ○○
×: bad
Environmental harmony × ○○

7. Selection of Substation Types

7.1 Conclusion
As a result, the GIS type, which is more reliability than the AIS type, is recommended
for the new substations. However, application of GIS type substation at all 66 kV
substations is not suitable in terms of economical efficiency because those are constructed
at rural area. Therefore, it is recommended that the 66 kV substation type shall be selected
among the various types according to circumference conditions

Also, the AIS type is difficult to adopt downtown area because the environmental
conditions are more important than economical efficiency. Therefore, the GIS type is
recommended for the new 30 kV substation

7.2 Selection of substation type

7.2.1 Primary side

The primary side of the new 66 kV substation shall be adopted as outdoor / indoor AIS
type and indoor /outdoor GIS. Also, the primary side of the new 30 kV substation shall be
adopted as indoor GIS type

7.2.2 Secondary side

The secondary side of the new 66 kV, 30 kV substation shall be adopted the indoor
MCSG type because the rated 11kV MCSG type is more economical than the GIS type

7.2.3 Power transformer

Considering the high temperature conditions of ambient air which are reached at about

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 15 Version 1.0
 Substation Type

50 °C in Libya, all transformers except for the auxiliary transformer shall installed in
outdoor

7.2.4 Summary of substation types

The substation types of each voltage levels are shown in below table
< Table 5 > Summary of substation types
Substation Type Bus-bar scheme Remark
Outdoor AIS type 2B-1CB, 1B-1CB
Outdoor GIS type 2B-1CB, 1B-1CB
66/11 kV Secondary side:
Indoor GIS type 2B-1CB, 1B-1CB
Indoor MCSG type
Indoor AIS type 1B-1CB
30/11 kV Indoor GIS type 2B-1CB, 1B-1CB
Note: Substation types shall be selected according to the circumference conditions

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 15 Version 1.0
 Substation Type

Appendix A: References

KDS 2001 Selection of substation type

Technical review report for 765 kV Substation Design Standard
Transmission and distribution electrical engineering, Dr C.R Bayliss

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 15 Version 1.0
 Substation Type

Appendix B: Application of Other Countries

1. Substation types in KEPCO

a) In 1970, most of the substation types are generally adopted in outdoor AIS type
because that time hasn’t GIS technology, Also there are no problems against securing
the land and environmental harmony

b) However, in 1980, all substations constructing the new are adopted in GIS type
because importance of securing the land and environmental harmony are rising, and
compact substations are needed

c) Nowadays, because the reliability and safety about GIS technology are recognized,
not only the substations are constructing new but also existed substations are changing
the GIS type

< Table B1 > Substation types in KEPCO

Substations Type Bus-bar scheme Remark
765/345/23 kV
Outdoor full GIS 2B-1.5CB
Substation
345/154/23 kV Outdoor hybrid GIS Downtown area:
2B-1.5CB
Substation or Indoor full GIS Indoor full GIS

154/23 kV
Indoor full GIS 2B-1CB
Substation
Note: Double bus and 1.5 Breaker (Double bus and breaker-and–a half) means that each feeder
is between the two breakers and there are two buses.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 15 Version 1.0
 Substation Type

2. Substation types in other countries

a) Equally, In case of the other countries, the outdoor AIS type is mainly adopted until
the GIS technology spreads out widely

b) Also countries which have large area are adopted in AIS type.

< Table B1 > Substation types in other countries

Date of
Countries Name of substations Types
installation
765 kV Dumont S/S
Outdoor AIS 1969
(AEP)
U.S.A
765 kV Marcy S/S
Outdoor AIS 1978
(NYPA)
765 kV Chateauguay
Canada Converter Station Outdoor AIS
(HQ)
The Republic of 765 kV S/S
Outdoor Hybrid GIS 1988
South Africa (ESCOM)
1000 kV Alpha S/S
Outdoor full GIS 2000
(TEPCO)
500 kV Shin-sakado S/S
Japan Outdoor full GIS 1996
(TEPCO)
500 kV Shin-Hatano S/S
Outdoor full GIS 1992
(TEPCO)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 15 Version 1.0
 GDS 5100
Version 1.0: Oct 7, 2007

Substation Scale

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. General ···········································································································1
3. Definitions ······································································································1
4. Selection of Substation Site ··········································································2
4.1 Principles of selection ·····························································································3
4.2 Review points··········································································································3
4.3 Procedure of substation site selection ······································································4
4.4 Review of required area···························································································4
4.4.1 30 kV Substation····························································································5
4.4.2 66 kV Substation····························································································6
4.4.3 Appurtenant area····························································································7
5. Selection of Substation Scale········································································8
5.1 Voltages in substation ······························································································8
5.2 Decision of substation scale ····················································································8
5.3 Maximum scale ·······································································································8
5.4 Numbers of 11 kV Feeders ······················································································9

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Dimensions for major equipment in 30 kV substations································ 5

< Table 2 > Result of calculation ···················································································· 6
< Table 3 > Dimensions for major equipment in 66 kV substations································ 6
< Table 4 > Connection types ························································································· 6
< Table 5 > Result of calculation ···················································································· 7
< Table 6 > Voltages in substation··················································································· 8
< Table 7 > Summary of substation maximum scale······················································· 9
< Table 8 > Numbers of 11 kV feeders ··········································································· 9

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

< Figure 1 > Substation site selection procedure····························································· 4

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ··········································································································· 10
B Phase-to-Phase and Phase-to-Earth Clearances ················································ 11
C IEC Standard Voltages ······················································································· 14
D Substation Layouts (For reference) ·································································· 16

v
 Substation Scale

1. Scope

This standard is applicable to decision of substation scale for the new 66 kV, 30 kV
substations. Also, this part also includes the voltages describing the substation scale,
transformer capacity and banks, transmission and distribution lines and selection of the
substation site

2. General
In the field of substation construction planning, an estimation of general scale is
necessary prior to commencement of basic design because the formation of facilities can
go ahead with general substation scale, in addition, which is closely related with site
securing, equipment arrangement and specification, so on

Also, since all equipment are installed at early stage that is non-economical in substation
construction. Therefore, to pursue the economical efficiency, an appropriate scale of
equipment shall be arranged and then those are expanding according to the increasing load
demands

However, an estimation of general substation scale is needed the multiple reviewing

throughout the demand forecast of electricity consumption in terms of a long-term
viewpoint (for example; economic index, economic development plan, population
increment by region, industrial structure and power consumption and so forth)

Nowadays, the required area becomes an issue in cases where a substation is constructed
in a downtown area where the land cost is expensive and land security is difficult due to
the public complaints, or in cases of mountainous areas that require a high civil
engineering cost for site development

Therefore, decision for the estimation of substation scale is needed comprehensive

review along with the long term system planning

3. Definitions

Nominal system voltage

Nominal system voltage means that voltage by which a system is designated

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

Highest voltages of a system

Highest voltages of a system means that the highest value of voltage which occurs under
normal operating conditions at any time and at any point on the system. It excludes
voltage transients, such as those due to system switching, and temporary voltage
variations

Initial scale of substation

The initial scale means that facilities which are installed at early stage of construction
woks according to a long-term planning, these facilities are closely related with the
flexibility of current flows, stability of system operations, power consumption at the
initial stages and load increasing rate for the future so on

Final scale of substation

The final scale means that considered the comprehensive reviews such as the power
consumptions, ability of system connection and aspect of operation at a long-term
viewpoint, which is desirable to select within the maximum scale of substation. However,
if there are any special conditions in power supply, it shall be reviewed separately
according to the site conditions

Maximum scale of substation

It is desirable that the capacity and numbers of power transformer shall be considered
the stability of power system operation, economical efficiency and aspect of
maintenance and repair works. And numbers of feeder shall be considered the power
system operation, arrangement of in /out feeders, arrangement of equipment.

4. Selection of Substation Site

Nowadays, since substations are regarding as reluctant facilities in urban areas especially,
there are growing concerns to secure the substation site. In situations like this, the selection
of ideal site is essential throughout the social, environmental and economical analysis.

Also, reasonably level and well drained so minimum surface dressing and civil ground
works are required to reduce the site developing cost. To select the ideal substation site, the
following characteristics and so on shall be considered;

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

4.1 Principles of selection

The substation site shall be selected at reasonable area throughout the comparison and
review such as the site survey and analysis of objective area, overall economical efficiency,
aspect of operation and maintenance, surrounding environment and condition of in / out
feeders, so on. Especially, when the securing the site, the following areas are desirable to
avoid;
▪ The zone for military facilities
▪ Cultural properties protection zone
▪ The environmental preservation zone
▪ The limited zone by air regulation
▪ The expected areas which are concern about floods
▪ Etc

4.2 Review points

a) Factors about a location
▪ It is required to be located at the center of demand loads as possible as
▪ For preparation of future planning and faults, it should be easily connected to the
power system
▪ Outgoing and incoming lines are required to be connected shortly as possible as
▪ All things considered such as natural conditions, it should not be needed the excessive
countermeasure
▪ Etc

b) Factors about a land configuration

▪ The surrounding land configuration and private house shall not be obstructed the
outgoing and incoming lines
▪ In site developing, it shall not be required the much expense in site leveling such as
reinforcement of base or get rid of solid rock
▪ Traffic conditions should be convenient to transport the heavy equipment such as the
transformer, GIS, and so on
▪ Etc

c) Factors about the surrounding environment

▪ There is no problem against the surrounding area development in the future
▪ In case of the expansion of the substation in the future, it should not be difficult
▪ It should not be affected the harmful gases such as the corrosion and toxic gases

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

▪ Damages against the surrounding areas caused by construction works should reduce
▪ The places which deal with the dangerous materials should be avoided
▪ Etc

d) Factors about others by legal limitation

It is needed the sufficient survey about regional developing plan which can restrict the
substation construction.

4.3 Procedure of substation site selection

Confirmation of a substation construction plan comply with the

relevant plans

Estimation of required area comply with the substation type and

final scale

Selection of the pre-proposed site throughout the site survey

(More than 2 areas)

Inquiry to relevant organizations to stay on the right side of the

law

Deliberation about the pre-proposed site in a committee

Selection of the optimal substation site

< Figure 1 > Substation site selection procedure

4.4 Review of required area

The required area for the substation is an important item to be considered for the section
of substation site because the whole construction cost influenced according to the land
security, land cost and civil engineering cost.

However, a smaller area is better in view of efficient utilization of national land. Based

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

on this, the required area of each type was calculated assuming the bellow arrangement as
in the layout shown in the Appendix D. Also, the required area of each type has the
variableness in detail design stages according to the equipment arrangement and so forth

4.4.1 30 kV Substation
a) Review items
▪ Substation type: Indoor GIS
▪ Substation scale
- Power transformer: 30/11 kV, 32/25/12.5 MVA, 2 banks
- Feeder: 30 kV 6 feeders, 11 kV 14 feeders
▪ Major equipment dimension
< Table 1 > Dimensions for major equipment in 30 kV substations
Equipment Dimensions (mm) Remark
Power transformer foundation 8000 × 6000
30 kV GIS panel 900 × 2000
11 kV MCSG panel 700 × 1800
Control or protection panel 700 × 700
AC, DC, Battery charger panel 700 × 900
Note: Above dimensions are applied based on the major equipment dimensions of existing 30
kV substations
▪ Bus-bar scheme
- 30 kV: Double bus and single breaker
- 11 kV: Double bus and single breaker or single bus and single breaker
▪ Connections between major equipment
- Feeder (30 kV, 11kV): Cable
- 30 kV GIS - Power transformer: Cable
- 11 kV MCSG - Power transformer: Cable
▪ Access road
Because most heavy equipment in substation is a power transformer, the access road
shall be considered to transport power transformers
- Main access road for construction work: 6 m
(Row bed trailer width for transformer transportation: about 2.7 m + margin 2.3 m)
- The other roads: 4 m

b) Required area
The required area was calculated according to the equipment arrangement as in the

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

layout shown in Appendix D

< Table 2 > Result of calculation
Substation Type Installation area (m2) Remark
2
30 kV Indoor GIS 1290.42 m (40.2 × 32.1) Double bus
Note: The required area shall be changeable according to the major equipment provider’s
specification or equipment arrangement. The detailed layout of each substations refer to
the Appendix D

4.4.2 66 kV Substation
a) Review items
▪ Substation type: Indoor GIS, Outdoor GIS, Outdoor AIS, Indoor AIS
▪ Substation scale
- Power transformer: 66/11 kV, 25/12.5 MVA, 2 banks
- Feeder: 66 kV 6 feeders, 11 kV 14 feeders
▪ Bus-bar scheme
- 66 kV: Double bus and single breaker, single bus and single breaker
- 11 kV: Double bus and single breaker or single bus and single breaker
▪ Major equipment dimension
< Table 3 > Dimensions for major equipment in 66 kV substations
Equipment Dimensions (mm) Remark
Power transformer foundation 8000 × 6000
11 kV MCSG panel 700 × 1800
Control or protection panel 700 × 700
AC, DC, Battery charger panel 700 × 900
Bay dimension in indoor AIS type 3800 × 6200
Note: Above dimensions are applied based on the major equipment dimensions of existing 66
kV substations
▪ Connections between major equipment
< Table 4 > Connection types
Type 66 kV Feeder 11 kV Feeder 66 kV SW - TR TR - 11 kV SW
Outdoor AIS Overhead line Cable
Outdoor GIS Cable Cable
Overhead line Cable
Indoor GIS Cable Cable
Indoor AIS Cable Cable

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

▪ Phase-to-phase clearance (66 kV)

- Outdoor AIS type : 1.6 m
- Indoor/outdoor GIS type: 1.5 m
- Indoor AIS type: 1.5 m
▪ Access road
Because most heavy equipment in substation is a power transformer, the access road
shall be considered to transport power transformers
- Main access road for construction work: 6 m
(Row bed trailer width: about 2.7 m + margin 2.3 m)
- The other roads: 4 m

b) Required area
The required area was calculated according to the equipment arrangement as in the
layout shown in Appendix D
< Table 5 > Result of calculation
Substation Type Installation area (m2) Remark
4184.28 m2 (78.8 × 53.1) Double bus
Outdoor AIS 2
3774.52 m (78.8 × 47.9) Single bus
2
2170.00 m (50.0 × 43.4) Double bus
Outdoor GIS 2
66 kV 2170.00 m (50.0 × 43.4) Single bus
2
1907.60 m (50.2 × 38.5) Double bus
Indoor GIS 2
1907.60 m (50.2 × 38.5) Single bus
2
Indoor AIS 2189.2 m (52.0 × 42.1) Single bus
Note:
1. The required area shall be changeable according to the major equipment provider’s
specification or equipment arrangement. The detailed layout of each substations refer to
the Appendix D
2. Bus arrangement in GIS: vertical format

4.4.3 Appurtenant area

The appurtenant area is the additional area which shall be secured to institute the other
appurtenant facilities except for the installation areas respectively. Also, it shall be
sufficiently secured considering the following items
▪ In case that there is a need about the technical consideration related with the
arrangement of equipment or site preparation
▪ In case of establishment of an access road

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

▪ In case of securing the tower area for transmission lines

▪ In case that there is a need on security facilities
▪ Etc

5. Selection of Substation Scale

5.1 Voltages in substation

Voltages are used in the 66 kV, 30 kV substations shall be arranged as shown in below
table
< Table 6 > Voltages in substation
Nominal system voltage (kV) Highest voltage of a system (kV) Remark
66 72.5
30 36
11 12

5.2 Decision of substation scale

▪ Initial scale
The initial scale means that facilities such as numbers of transmission and distribution
lines, capacity and numbers of power transformer banks and reactor or capacitor,
which are installed at early stage of construction woks, this scale shall be determined
considering the flexibility of current flows, stability of system operations, power
consumption at the initial stages and load increasing rate for the future so on
▪ Final scale
- The final scale shall be decided according to a long system planning prior to the
commencement stage of a substation site selection
- Numbers of transmission and distribution lines, capacity and numbers of power
transformer banks and so on shall be decided within the maximum scale of
substations
- However, if there are any special conditions in power supply, it shall be reviewed
separately comply with the power system conditions

5.3 Maximum scale

The maximum scales of each substation shall be following as shown in below
▪ 66 kV Substation
- 66 kV Feeders: 6

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

- 11 kV Feeders: 14
- Power transformer capacity: 32 / 25 / 12.5 MVA
- Numbers of banks: 2 Banks
▪ 30 kV Substation
- 66 kV Feeders: 6
- 11 kV Feeders: 14
- Power transformer capacity: 25 / 12.5 MVA
- Numbers of banks: 2 Banks
< Table 7 > Summary of substation maximum scale
Numbers of power Feeders
Remark
transformer 66kV 30kV 11kV
66kV substation 2 6 14
30kV substation 2 6 14

5.4 Numbers of 11 kV Feeders

Numbers of 11 kV feeders shall be decided comply with the power transformer capacity
and an standard capacity of the 11 kV feeder as shown in a below formula
DF ( generally use 1.2)
N = P×
S
N: Numbers of 11 kV Feeders
P: Power transformer capacity
DF: Diversity Factor
S: Standard capacity of the 11 kV Feeder
< Table 8 > Numbers of 11 kV feeders
Power transformer capacity
Substation Feeders per a bank Remark
(MVA)
66 / 11 kV 25 7 25
N= × 1.2 = 7
30 / 11 kV 25 7 4.2
Note:
1. The maximum limited current for the 11 kV feeder shall be applied as 327 A(based on XLPE
240㎟×3C, 363 A×0.9=327)
2. However, since the 11 kV feeder has a connection point with another 11 kV feeder to secure
the reliability, therefore, the standard capacity of the 11 kV feeder shall be applicable as 4.2
MVA as shown

3 × 11kV × (327 × 67%) = 4.2MVA

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

Appendix A: References

KDS 5003 Selection of Substation scale

Technical review report for 765 kV Substation Design Standard
Transmission and distribution electrical engineering, Dr C.R Bayliss
IEC 60071-2 Insulation co-ordination application guide
IEC 60038 IEC standard voltages

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

Appendix B: Phase-to-Phase and Phase-to-Earth Clearances

1. IEC 60071

IEC 60071 deals with insulation co-ordination and proposes standard insulation levels
and minimum air distances. Also, BSI 7354 specifies phase-phase and phase-earth
clearances. Extracts from BSI covering International practice are shown in the below table
and from IEC in the below table

Phase-to-phase clearances and isolating distances are usually specified as 10 ~ 15 %

greater than phase-to-earth clearances.
< Table B1 > Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth clearances (IEC)
Highest Phase- Phase- Vertical Horizontal
SIL BIL Insulation
voltage earth air phase air Safety Safety
(kV) (kV) height
(kV) clearance clearance clearances clearances
peak peak (m)
r.m.s (m) (m) (m) (m)
3.6 20 0.06 0.06 3 2 2.5
7.2 40 0.06 0.06 3 2 2.5
12 60 0.09 0.09 3 2 2.5
75 0.12 0.12 3 2 2.5
17.5
95 0.16 0.16 3 2 2.5
125 0.22 0.22 3 2 2.5
24
145 0.27 0.27 3 2 2.5
36 170 0.32 0.32 3 2 2.5
52 250 0.48 0.48 3 2 2.5
72.5 325 0.63 0.63 3.1 2.1 2.5
123 450 0.9 0.9 3.4 2.4 2.5
145 550 1.1 1.1 3.6 2.6 2.5
170 650 1.3 1.3 3.8 2.8 2.5
750 1.5 1.5 4.0 3.0 2.5
850 1.6 1.7 4.1 3.1 2.5
245
950 1.7 1.9 4.2 3.2 2.5
1050 1.9 2.1 4.4 3.4 2.5
300 750 850 1.6 2.4 4.1 3.1 2.5

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

2. Minimum clearance based on some countries (IEC 61936-1)

Values of minimum clearance in air for 1kV 〈U m ≤ 245kV for highest voltages for
equipment U m not standardized by the IEC based on current practice in some countries
< Table B2 > Minimum clearance in air for 1kV 〈U m ≤ 245kV
Minimum phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase
Highest voltage for
clearance (mm) Remark
equipment (kV)
Indoor installations Outdoor installations
120 150
8.25
160 160
160 160
15
180 180
220 220
25.8
280 280
36 380 380
72.5 690 690
Note: A different minimum clearance is applying in some voltage levels according to the adopted
insulation levels

3. Clearance of bus (AIS type substation in KEPCO)

3.1. Clearance
Phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase clearance of bus in KEPCO’s AIS type substations
are applying as shown below
< Table B3 > Clearance of bus in KEPCO’s AIS type substation
Nominal voltage Outdoor Indoor
Clearance (mm)
(kV) P-P P-E P-P P-E
Standard 650 400 400 270
22
Minimum 400 300 300 220
Standard 1,200 1,000 1,000 600
66
Minimum 800 700 700 550
Standard 3,000 1,700 2,500 1,500
154
Minimum 1,900 1,500 1,600 1,300
Standard 5,000 3,300 4,600 2,800
345
Minimum 3,600 2,900 3,200 2,400
Note:

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

1. P-P: Phase-to-phase, P-E: Phase-to-earth

2. Above figures are simulated based on insulation levels below

3.2. Bus height

Bus-to-ground and charging conductor-to- charging conductor height of bus in KEPCO’s
AIS type substations are applying as shown below

< Table B4 > Height of bus in KEPCO’s AIS type substation

Nominal Outdoor Indoor
voltage B-G height (mm) C-C height B-G height (mm) C-C height
(kV) Standard minimum (mm) Standard minimum (mm)
22 4,000 3,500 2,600 3,500 3,000 2,500
66 5,000 4,000 3,000 4,000 3,500 2,800
154 5,000 4,300 3,800 4,200 4,000 3,600
345 7,000 6,600 5,200 6,400 6,000 4,700
Note:
B-G: Bus-to-ground, C-C: charging conductor-to-charging conductor

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

APPENDIX C: IEC Standard Voltages

1. The nominal voltage above 1 kV and not exceeding 35 kV

Two series of highest voltages for equipment are given below, one for 50 Hz and 60 Hz
systems (Series I), the other for 60 Hz systems (Series II – North American practice). It is
recommended that only one of the series should be used in any one country. It is also
recommended that only one of the two series of nominal voltages given for Series I should
be used in any one country
< Table C1 > IEC standard voltages above 1 kV and not exceeding 35 kV
Series I Series Ⅱ
Highest voltage Nominal system Highest voltage for Nominal system
for equipment voltage equipment voltage
[kV] [kV] [kV] [kV]
1) 1)
3.6 3.3 3 1) 4.40 1)
4.16 1)

7.2 1) 6.6 1) 6 1) - -
12 11 10 - -
2) 2)
- - - 13.2 12.47
2) 2)
- - - 13.97 13.2
1) 1)
- - - 14.52 13.8
(17.5) (15) - -
24 22 20 - -
2) 2)
- - - 26.4 24.94
3) 3)
36 33 - - -
2) 2)
- - - 36.5 34.5
40.5 3) - 35 3) - -
The values indicated in parentheses should be considered as non-preferred values. It is
recommended that these values should not be used for new systems to be constructed in
future.
1) These values should not be used for public distribution systems.
2) These systems are generally four-wire systems.
3) The unification of these values is under consideration.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

2. The nominal voltage above 35 kV and not exceeding 230 kV

Two series of nominal system voltages are given below. It is recommended that only
one of the two series should be used in any one country. It is recommended that in any one
country only one value in the following groups should be used for the highest voltage for
equipment:
< Table C2 > IEC standard voltages above 35 kV and not exceeding 230 kV
Highest voltage for equipment Nominal system voltage
[kV] [kV]
(52) (45) –
72.5 66 69
123 110 115
145 132 138
(170) (150) –
245 220 230
The values indicated in parentheses should be considered as non-
preferred values. It is recommended that these values should not be
used for new systems to be constructed in future. The values are
voltages between phases.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

Appendix D: Substation Layouts (For reference)

These layouts are only for reference to estimate the substation’s required area. Therefore,
substation layout shall be changeable according to the major equipment providers

1. 30 kV Substation

< Figure D1 > 30kV Substation (Indoor GIS type)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

2. 66 kV Substation

< Figure D2 > 66kV Substation (Outdoor AIS type, Double bus)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

< Figure D3 > 66kV Substation (Outdoor AIS type, Single bus)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

< Figure D4 > 66kV Substation (Outdoor GIS type, Double and single bus)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

< Figure D5 > 66kV Substation (Indoor GIS type, Double and double bus)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 21 Version 1.0
 Substation Scale

< Figure D6 > 66kV Substation (Indoor AIS type, Single bus)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 21 Version 1.0
 GDS 5200
Version 1.0: Oct 7, 2007

Bus-bar Scheme

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. General ···········································································································1
3. Classifications of Bus ····················································································1
4. Bus-bar Schemes ···························································································2
4.1 Single bus················································································································2
4.2 Ring Bus··················································································································3
4.3 Double bus ··············································································································3
4.3.1 Double bus and single breaker ·······································································3
4.3.2 Double bus and breaker-and-a half ································································4
4.3.3 Double bus and 4 bus tie breakers··································································4
4.3.4 Double bus and double breaker······································································5
5. Review of bus-bar schemes ··········································································5
5.1 Comparative review by bus-bar schemes ································································6
5.1.1 Single bus and single breaker·········································································6
5.1.2 Double bus and single breaker ·······································································7
5.1.3 Double bus and breaker-and-a half ································································8
5.1.4 Double bus and double breaker······································································9
5.2 Result of review ···································································································· 11
5.2.1 Summary of comparative analysis ······························································· 11
5.2.2 Decision of priority······················································································ 11
6. Selection of Bus-bar Scheme ······································································12
6.1 Primary side (66 kV, 30 kV) ··················································································12
6.2 Secondary side (11 kV) ·························································································12
6.3 Summary of bus-bar schemes················································································13
6.4 Single line diagrams for bus-bar scheme ·······························································13
6.4.1 Primary side·································································································13
6.4.2 Secondary side ·····························································································14

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Summary of comparative analysis ····························································· 11

< Table 2 > Score and weight························································································ 11
< Table 3 > Decision of priority···················································································· 11
< Table 4 > Bus-bar schemes for each substation·························································· 13

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

< Figure 1 > Classifications of bus ················································································· 2

< Figure 2 > Diagram of ring bus ··················································································· 3
< Figure 3 > Diagram of double bus and 4 bus-tie breakers············································ 5
< Figure 4 > Diagram of single bus ················································································ 7
< Figure 5 > Diagram of double bus and single breaker ················································· 8
< Figure 6 > Diagram of double bus and breaker-and-a half··········································· 9
< Figure 7 > Diagram of double bus and double breaker ·············································· 10
< Figure 8 > Double bus and single breaker (for 66 kV, 30 kV substations) ················· 13
< Figure 9 > Single bus and single breaker (for 66 kV substations)······························ 14
< Figure 10 > Single bus and single breaker (for the 66 kV indoor AIS type) ·············· 14
< Figure 11 > Bus-bar scheme in secondary side Ⅰ ···················································· 15
< Figure 12 > Bus-bar scheme in secondary side Ⅱ ···················································· 15

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ············································································································· 16
B Inverse type bus ···································································································· 17
C Bus-bar scheme in KEPCO ················································································· 18

v
 Bus-bar Scheme

1. Scope

This standard is applicable to selection of bus-bar schemes for new 66 kV, 30 kV

substations to pursue the stabilized operation, also there are purposes that the reliability of
power systems shall be maintained even if faults or maintain works occur

2. General

Buses in the substation are major facilities those are taken in charge of the gathering and
distributing of the current flow, also, which will play a major role in the electric power
trade. A Selection of bus-bar schemes is the most important basic element with selection of
substation type and scale at the substation design. The points generally considered are as
follows;
▪ When a fault occurs, the fault must be minimized to a small area and accomplished the
quick restoring operation through the system changing, load changing and so on
▪ A partial suspension of equipment should not influence the entire system and extension
and maintenance should be easy
▪ When repairing or extending facilities, work should be done safely, and the outage
should be limited to as small an area as possible
▪ It should compose facilities simply and reduce construction cost

Considering this matters, the bus-bar schemes applied to new 66 kV, 30kV substations
shall be selected throughout the comparative analysis of reliability, flexibility and
economic performance. However, it is recommended that bus-bar schemes against new
66kV, 30kV substations shall be adopted as the same scheme as possible as, according to
the rated voltage level regardless the substation type to organize the suitable protection
scheme

3. Classifications of Bus

Classifications of bus in substations are classified as main bus, branch bus and outgoing
bus and these roles are as follows;
▪ Main bus
The main bus shall manage the current flow of all feeders. Therefore, this term means

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 18 Version 1.0
 Bus-bar Scheme

that all feeders are connected to main bus such as divergence buses, outgoing buses to
make integrated current flows as shown in figure below
▪ Branch bus
In double bus-bar scheme, the branch bus shall be connected between main buses as
shown in figure below
▪ Outgoing bus
Outgoing bus shall connected to the main bus or branch bus to connect the feeder
lines or the transformer lines as shown in figure below

Outgoing BUS

Main BUS

Branch BUS

Main BUS

Outgoing BUS
`

< Figure 1 > Classifications of bus

4. Bus-bar Schemes
Bus-bar schemes are classified as single bus, ring bus, double bus and selected on the
basis of reliability, flexibility in system operation, and economic performance, considering
the importance of the substation to the power system. The characteristics of each bus-bar
scheme are as follows:

4.1 Single bus

The single bus scheme is used on a comparatively small scale or simple substations with
no need to change systems that don’t have many feeders such as distribution substations
with low voltage levels

Configuration is simple and equipment cost is low, but it can cause outages of entire
feeders in case of a fault at the bus, circuit breaker, or disconnecting switch of the bus side.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 18 Version 1.0
 Bus-bar Scheme

Therefore, it is difficult to apply to major substations that require high reliability and
flexibility.

4.2 Ring Bus

These buses are partially out during a fault at the bus and it is possible to maintain the
circuit breaker without a feeder outage. However flexibility is low because feeders should
be out in case of breaker trouble or breaker failure, and the protection scheme is
complicated. This scheme is applied usually to small size substations with 4 or less feeders

Feeder

Feeder

Feeder
BUS
Feeder

< Figure 2 > Diagram of ring bus

4.3 Double bus

This scheme is applied mainly to the major substations which have many transformer
banks and lines and require high reliability. Equipment cost and area are higher than the
single bus scheme, but maintenance of facilities and system operation is convenient
because it can prevent all line outages in case of a fault at one side of bus, and
disconnecting switch at bus side can be maintained without an outage of the feeder

The double bus scheme can be classified as double bus and single breaker, double bus
and break-and-a half, and double bus and double breaker, double bus and four bus tie
breaker

4.3.1 Double bus and single breaker

▪ Double bus and single breaker scheme has more flexibility of power system than
single bus scheme. As compared with single bus-bar scheme, which has higher
equipment cost and construction area but inspection of bus-bar or system operation are

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 18 Version 1.0
 Bus-bar Scheme

more convenient because bus changing is possible

▪ The economical efficiency of this scheme is most excellent in double bus schemes as
one breaker is installed per a line. However, in case of the maintenance of breaker, the
relevant line experiences an outage and when a breaker failure occurs, half of the
buses experience an outage
▪ When a bus tie breaker failure occurs, the entire substation experiences an outage.
However, the faults like this does not occur rarely,

4.3.2 Double bus and breaker-and-a half

▪ Double bus and break-and-a half scheme, each line is between two breakers, and 3
breakers are installed per 2 lines
▪ This scheme is mainly adopted in a substation which requires high reliability
especially so that a bus fault do not effects to power system, and in case of the
maintenance of breaker, the relevant line not experiences an outage
▪ However, there are disadvantages such as, in case of a breaker failure at the bus side,
the relevant line and half of bus experiences an outage, and in case of a breaker failure
at the center breaker experiences an outage of entire substation
▪ Especially, this scheme is being adopted widely at the high voltage level because it
has advantage in connection to power system through the center breaker when #1, 2
buses are outage.

4.3.3 Double bus and 4 bus tie breakers

▪ Double bus and 4 bus-tie breaker scheme, as shown in the bellow, is connected with
double bus of 2 through the bus section breaker
▪ When a bus fault occurs, this scheme can reduce the influence of power system
because it can limit the outage range at quarter
▪ However, in case of the maintenance of breaker at line side, the relevant line
experiences an outage

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 18 Version 1.0
 Bus-bar Scheme

Line Line

#1 BUS

BUS Tie BUS Tie

#2BUS

#1M.Tr #2M.Tr

< Figure 3 > Diagram of double bus and 4 bus-tie breakers

4.3.4 Double bus and double breaker

▪ Double bus and double breaker scheme, as shown in the < Figure 7 >, is connected
with double breaker per line
▪ This scheme is mainly applicable to the high-capacity level substations requiring the
high reliability, especially
▪ However, because this scheme requires many breakers, disconnecting switches and
construction area, economical efficiency is disadvantageous

5. Review of bus-bar schemes

New 66 kV, 30 kV substations will play a major role in the electric power trade with
neighboring substations as well as the back-bone of the power system in Libya. Therefore,
the bus-bar scheme applied to the 66kV, 30kV substations are selected through the
comparative analysis of reliability, flexibility, and economic performance of the bus-bar
schemes.
The ring bus scheme was excluded from this analysis because the flexibility is low
compared to the double bus scheme, the protection scheme becomes complex, and the
extension for system expansion in the future is difficult
a) Objects of review
▪ Single Bus and Single Breaker

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 18 Version 1.0
 Bus-bar Scheme

▪ Double Bus and Single Breaker

▪ Double Bus and Breaker-and-A half
▪ Double Bus and Double Breaker

b) Substation scale : Transformer 2 banks, Transmission line 6 feeders

c) Review items: Reliability, Flexibility, Economic performance

5.1 Comparative review by bus-bar schemes

5.1.1 Single bus and single breaker

This scheme has one main bus with all feeders connected directly to the bus as shown in
figure below
a) Reliability: Very low
▪ In case of breaker failure, the entire substation experiences an outage
▪ In case of a bus fault, the entire substation experiences an outage

b) Flexibility: Very low

▪ In case of the maintenance of a breaker, the relevant feeder experiences an outage
▪ In case of a breaker failure or bus fault, it is impossible to change the feeders to
another bus
▪ To elevate flexibility, a checking bus or a sectional breaker can be installed to divide
the single bus

c) Economic performance: Very high

▪ One breaker per feeder and a small area
▪ Switching devices: CB 8 ea, DS 16 ea
▪ Relative cost: 1.0

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 18 Version 1.0
 Bus-bar Scheme

Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder

BUS

DS

#1M.Tr #2M.Tr

< Figure 4 > Diagram of single bus

5.1.2 Double bus and single breaker

This scheme has two main buses connected to each feeder breaker and a bus-tie breaker
as shown in figure below
a) Reliability: High
▪ In case of a breaker failure, all feeders connected to the same bus, and half of the bus,
experience an outage
▪ In case of a bus-tie breaker failure, the entire substation experiences an outage
▪ In case of a fault at one bus of two buses, all feeders connected to the relevant bus
experience an outage

Compared to Single Bus, reliability and flexibility increases because it can reduce
range of outage

b) Flexibility: Low
▪ In case of the maintenance of a breaker, the relevant feeder experiences an outage
▪ In case of a breaker failure, it is impossible to change the relevant feeder to another
bus
▪ In case of a bus fault, it is possible to operate without an outage after changing the
bus
Compared to a single bus, the flexibility increases because bus changing is possible

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 18 Version 1.0
 Bus-bar Scheme

c) Economic performance: High

▪ Compared to a single bus, it requires more equipment and area
▪ Switching devices: CB 9 ea, DS 26 ea
▪ Relative Cost: about 1.2 times compared to single bus single breaker

Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder

#1BUS

BUS Tie

#2BUS

#1M.Tr #2M.Tr

< Figure 5 > Diagram of double bus and single breaker

5.1.3 Double bus and breaker-and-a half

In this scheme, each feeder is between two breakers, and there are two main buses as
shown in figure below
a) Reliability: High
▪ Incase of a breaker failure at the bus side, the relevant bus experiences an outage
▪ In case of a center breaker failure, two feeders experience an outage
▪ In case of a fault at one bus of two buses, half of the buses experience an outage
without the outage of feeders
This scheme is adopted in a substation which requires high reliability so that even a
bus fault does not affect to the power system, because it can greatly reduce the range
of the outage compared to double bus and single breaker schemes.

b) Flexibility: Very high

▪ In case of the maintenance of a breaker, there is no outage of feeder

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 18 Version 1.0
 Bus-bar Scheme

▪ In case of a breaker failure, it is possible to operate without a feeder outage after

isolating the relevant breaker from the power system
▪ In case of a bus fault, it is possible to operate without a feeder outage after isolating
the relevant bus from the power system
Flexibility is higher than the double bus and single breaker scheme because it is
possible to operate without a feeder outage during maintenance and faults

c) Economic performance: Average

▪ Compared to a double bus and single breaker, it requires more equipment and area
▪ Switching devices: CB 14 ea, DS 36 ea
▪ Relative cost: about 1.7times compared to single bus single breaker

Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder

#1BUS

#2BUS

#1M.Tr #2M.Tr

< Figure 6 > Diagram of double bus and breaker-and-a half

5.1.4 Double bus and double breaker

This scheme provides a very high level of reliability by having two separate breakers
available to each feeder as shown in figure bellow

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 18 Version 1.0
 Bus-bar Scheme

a) Reliability: Very high

▪ In case of a breaker failure, the relevant feeder and half of the buses experience an
outage
▪ In case of a breaker failure at the #1bus side when there is breaker trouble at the
#2bus side, the entire substation has an outage
▪ In case of a fault at one bus of two buses, half of the buses experience an outage
without a feeder outage
It can decrease the possibility of a power failure compared to a double bus and
breaker-and-a half scheme, and it is adopted when reliability is especially preferred
to economic performance

Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder

#1BUS

#2BUS

#1M.Tr #2M.Tr

< Figure 7 > Diagram of double bus and double breaker

b) Flexibility: Very high

▪ In case of the maintenance of a breaker, there is no outage of the feeder
▪ In case of a breaker failure, it is possible to operate without a feeder outage after
isolating the relevant breaker from the power system
▪ In case of a bus fault, it is possible to operate without a feeder outage after isolating
the relevant bus from the power system
Flexibility is higher than the double bus and single breaker scheme, because it is
possible to operate without outage during maintenance or faults like the double bus
and breaker-and-a half scheme

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 18 Version 1.0
 Bus-bar Scheme

c) Economic performance: Very low

▪ Compared to the double bus and breaker-and-a half, it requires more equipment, area
and a complicated protection scheme
▪ Switching devices: CB 16 ea, DS 40 ea
▪ Relative Cost: about 2.1 times compared to single bus single breaker

5.2 Result of review

5.2.1 Summary of comparative analysis

< Table 1 > Summary of comparative analysis
Bus-bar scheme Reliability Flexibility Economic performance
1B 1CB Very low Very low Very high
2B 1CB Average Low High
2B 1.5CB High Very High Average
2B 2CB Very high Very high Very low

5.2.2 Decision of priority

To select the most suitable bus-bar scheme for new 66 kV, 30kV substations, the score
and weight are applied as in the below table under the consideration of the importance of
the substation to the whole power system and practical economic conditions
< Table 2 > Score and weight
Score Weight
Very Low: 0.2
Low: 0.4 Reliability: 40 %
Average: 0.6 Flexibility: 20 %
High: 0.8
Economic performance: 40 %
Very High: 1.0

< Table 3 > Decision of priority

Economic
Bus-bar scheme Reliability Flexibility Sum Rank
performance
1B 1CB 0.2×0.4 0.2×0.2 1.0×0.4 0.52 4
2B 1CB 0.6×0.4 0.4×0.2 0.8×0.4 0.64 3
2B 1.5CB 0.8×0.4 1.0×0.2 0.6×0.4 0.76 1
2B 2CB 1.0×0.4 1.0×0.2 0.2×0.4 0.68 2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 18 Version 1.0
 Bus-bar Scheme

According to the decision of priority, double bus and breaker-and-an half scheme is the
most superior comparing other schemes, however, this scheme is generally used at
important high voltage substations and large generating substations. Furthermore, there
are additional costs of circuit breakers which are involved together with complex
protection arrangements

6. Selection of Bus-bar Scheme

6.1 Primary side (66 kV, 30 kV)

The 66kV, 30kV substations will play a major role in the electric power trade with
neighboring substations in Libya. Therefore, the substations must be able to minimize
effects of power failure, and accomplish quick restoring the operation, such as system
changing, load changing and so forth, even if a fault occurs.

The single bus and single breaker scheme is the most economical but very
disadvantageous in reliability and flexibility. The double bus and double breaker scheme is
the most advantageous in the reliability aspects but very disadvantageous in economic
performance

Therefore, the double bus and single breaker scheme, which is the most advantage in
reliability and flexibility as well as economical efficiency, is desirable for the bus-bar
scheme of the primary side basically, however, an application of double bus and single
breaker scheme at all substations is not suitable in terms of economical efficiency

6.2 Secondary side (11 kV)

The secondary side of the 66 kV, 30kV substations shall act as the distribution lines
which are closely related with customers.

In case that the single bus and single breaker scheme are applied, it shall be decreased
the reliability of the power supply. If the double bus scheme is adopted, it can not only
prevent the outage of all feeders, but also reduce the outage time significantly because each
feeder can be connected to different buses.

Therefore, a double bus scheme is desirable for the bus-bar scheme of the secondary
side basically. However, to pursue the economical efficiency, application of the bus-bar
scheme for the secondary side is recommended according to the supply areas

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 18 Version 1.0
 Bus-bar Scheme

6.3 Summary of bus-bar schemes

< Table 4 > Bus-bar schemes for each substation
Bus voltage
66 kV 30 kV 11 kV Remark
Substation
2B-1CB 2B-1CB
66 kV -
1B-1CB 1B-1CB
2B-1CB
30kV - 2B-1CB
1B-1CB
Note:
1. B: Numbers of bus (2B: Double bus, 1B: Single bus)
2. CB: Numbers of circuit breaker per a circuit

6.4 Single line diagrams for bus-bar scheme

6.4.1 Primary side

Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder

#1BUS

BUS Tie

#2BUS

#1M.Tr #2M.Tr

Note:
1) If the bus section breaker is necessary, the bus section CB shall be installed with the bus
section DS
2) The Bus tie breakers should be installed for bus protection whenever it was divided by the
bus section
< Figure 8 > Double bus and single breaker (for 66 kV, 30 kV substations)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 18 Version 1.0
 Bus-bar Scheme

Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder

66 kV BUS

#1M.Tr #2M.Tr

< Figure 9 > Single bus and single breaker (for 66 kV substations)

Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder

66 kV BUS

#1M.Tr #2M.Tr

Note: The withdrawal type CB shall be applicable to this case to reduce the required area
according to the manufacturer’s specification
< Figure 10 > Single bus and single breaker (for the 66 kV indoor AIS type)

6.4.2 Secondary side

a) Double bus and single breaker
The areas which are required the highly reliable supply or expected the huge damage
when a momentary outage occurs in an electricity supply such as the major national and

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 18 Version 1.0
 Bus-bar Scheme

public facilities, hospitals, sewage treatment plants and so forth

#1M.Tr #2M.Tr

BUS Section #1BUS

BUS tie

BUS Section #2BUS

Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder Feeder

Note:
1) Bus section breakers shall be installed whenever power transformers are installed
2) Considering the smooth bus changing, the bus tie CB shall be installed as showing above
< Figure 11 > Bus-bar scheme in secondary side Ⅰ

b) Single bus and single breaker

The areas which are located in a rural area and required the low load demands, also not
expected the load increase in the future

#1M.Tr #2M.Tr

BUS Section

Line Line Line Line Line Line Line

Note: Bus section breakers shall be installed whenever transformers are installed
< Figure 12 > Bus-bar scheme in secondary side Ⅱ

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 18 Version 1.0
 Bus-bar Scheme

Appendix A: References

KDS 2101 Bus-bar scheme

Technical review report for 765kV Substation Design Standard
Electrical substations engineering “2003”, John D. Mcdonald

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 18 Version 1.0
 Bus-bar Scheme

Appendix B: Inverse type bus

1. Bus-bar scheme of inverse type

Partially, this scheme is applying to AIS type substation with double bus and breaker-
and-a half, and which requires large construction area

Line Line Line Line

#1BUS

#2BUS

M.Tr

<Figure B1 > Diagram of inverse type

2. Characteristics

< Table B1 > Characteristic Comparison of each type

Conditions Inverse type Open type Remark

Required area Large Comparatively small

Location of Center Both side
main bus
Outgoing line Advantageous Disadvantageous
Arrangement of Complicated Simple
equipment

Drop of earth line ofSimultaneously, faults

all buses are possible
Simultaneously, faults of
all buses are rare

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 18 Version 1.0
 Bus-bar Scheme

Appendix C: Bus-bar schemes in KEPCO

Table shows the various bus-bar schemes applying in KEPCO.

< Table C1 > Bus-bar scheme in KEPCO
Primary side Secondary side Tertiary side

765/345/23 kV
2B-1.5CB 2B-1.5CB 2B-1CB
substation
345/154/23 kV
2B-1.5CB 2B-1CB 2B-1CB
substation
154/23 kV
2B-1CB 2B-1CB
substation
Note:
1) B: Numbers of bus (2B: Double bus, 1B: Single bus)
2) CB: Numbers of circuit breaker per a circuit

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 18 Version 1.0
 GDS 5300
Version 1.0 : Oct 7, 2007

Protection

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. General ···········································································································1
2.1 Requirement of protective relay system ··································································1
2.2 Application of protective relay types ·······································································2
2.3 Checking points for applying protective relays ·······················································2

3. Protection and Measuring············································································3

3.1 66, 30 kV Feeders····································································································3
3.2 66, 30 kV Bus··········································································································5
3.3 Power transformers ·································································································6
3.4 11 kV Feeders··········································································································7

4. Current and Voltage Transformers·····························································8

4.1 Current transformers································································································8
4.1.1 Definitions ·····································································································9
4.1.2 Markings······································································································10
4.1.3 Requirements for measuring current transformers ······································· 11
4.1.4 Requirements for protective current transformers ········································ 11
4.1.5 Location of protective relay CT ···································································12
4.1.6 CT connections of 3 phase circuits·······························································12
4.1.7 Detail connections························································································13
4.1.8 Power transformer protection·······································································14
4.1.9 The 11 kV feeder··························································································15
4.2 Voltage transformers······························································································16
4.2.1 Definitions ···································································································16
4.2.2 Marking ·······································································································17
4.2.3 Requirements for single-phase measuring VT ·············································18
4.2.4 Requirements for single-phase inductive protective VT·······························18
4.2.5 Rated voltages for secondary windings························································19
4.2.6 VT connections of 3 phase circuits ······························································19

ii
 4.2.7 Detail connections························································································20
4.2.8 The 11 kV bus ······························································································21
5. Surge Arrester······························································································22
5.1 Definitions·············································································································22
5.2 Insulation co-ordination basic policy·····································································22
5.3 Application of substation types··············································································23
5.4 Selection of surge arrester ·····················································································23

iii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Protective relay schemes for 66, 30 kV Feeders··········································· 3

< Table 2 > Protective relays for the 66, 30 kV bus ························································ 5
< Table 3 > Protective relay for the power transformer··················································· 7
< Table 4 > Protective relay for 11 kV Feeder ································································ 8
< Table 5 > Limits of current error and phase displacement (classes from 0.1 to 1) ····· 11
< Table 6 > Limits of current error and phase displacement (classes 0.2S, 0.5S)·········· 11
< Table 7 > Limits error for protective current transformers········································· 12
< Table 8 > Limits of voltage error and phase displacement ········································· 18
< Table 9 > Limits of voltage error and phase displacement for protective VT············· 18
< Table 10 > Ratings of SA··························································································· 23

iv
 LIST OF FIGURES

< Figure 1 > 66, 30 kV Feeder protection (loop system)················································· 4

< Figure 2 > 66, 30 kV Feeder protection (radial system)··············································· 4
< Figure 3 > Current differential phase comparison relay··············································· 6
< Figure 4 > Voltage differential relay ············································································ 6
< Figure 5 > Power transformer protection ····································································· 7
< Figure 6 > 11 kV Feeder protection ············································································· 8
< Figure 7 > Marking of terminals················································································ 11
< Figure 8 > Location of protective relay CT································································ 12
< Figure 9 > CT connections for 66, 30 kV feeder and bus protections ························ 14
< Figure 10 > CT connections for 87T relay ································································· 14
< Figure 11 > CT connection for power transformers ··················································· 15
< Figure 12 > CT connection for 11 kV feeders···························································· 15
< Figure 13 > Marking of terminals·············································································· 18
< Figure 14 > VT connections for 66, 30 kV feeders ···················································· 20
< Figure 15 > VT connection for 66, 30 kV bus ··························································· 21
< Figure 16 > VT connection for 11 kV bus ································································· 21

v
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ············································································································ 24
B Review of transmission line protection ································································ 25
C Review of communication methods ······································································ 27
D Standard ratings of SA ·························································································· 32

vi
 Protection

1. Scope

This standard is applicable to the protective relay and measuring system which are
installed in the new 66 kV, 30 kV substations for the purpose of transmission and
distribution of electricity including the connections of CT and VT

2. General

Switchgear, cables, transformers, overhead lines and other electrical equipment require
protection devices in order to safeguard them during fault conditions. In addition, the rapid
clearance of faults prevents touch and step potentials on equipment from reaching levels
which could endanger life

2.1 Requirement of protective relay system

Protective relay system shall be applied to satisfy the followings
a) Reliability
Reliability is indispensable for warranting the accurate operating duty of the protective
system. This reliability should feature;
▪ Dependability
The ability to make a physical activation of a device in an instant fault of power
system
▪ Security
The ability to prevent any mal-operations or failures of protective relays

b) Selectivity and coordination

A high rate of selectivity should be secured to identify the exact location of the fault
within internal or external protection zones or adjacent transmission systems.
Coordination must be maintained between the main protection zone (for high speed
operation) and the backup protection zone (for delayed operation) so that the areas
affected by interrupted power would be minimized

c) Sensitivity
Protective relays must have the ability to sense and measure instantaneous fault
currents flowing in the transmission system

d) Operating speed

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

Protective relays must have the ability to provide high speed operation within 1 ~ 2
cycles so that damage can be minimized and the stability of the transmission system
can be achieved. Also they would be able to coordinate with the backup protective
system

e) Function vs. cost efficiency

Excellent functions, such as high reliability, high selectivity and a decrease of influence
at a fault through high speed operation, will improve the system stability, but may
cause the cost to rise in return. Therefore, cost efficiency as well as functions required
should be taken into account.

f) Simplicity
The chances of malfunction could be greatly reduced and the reliability could be
increased by the reduction of unnecessary elements of the protective relays. The recent
trend is to secure system reliability through the use of single multi-functional relays
capable of performing various programs

2.2 Application of protective relay types

The protective relay type has been developed in the order of electro-mechanical type,
solid-state type and digital type. Nowadays, digital relays have been adapted throughout
the world and their costs are decreasing. When the digital relay type is adopted, it can
decrease the burden of the CT and VT. The digital relays would make it possible to alter or
modify the protective function solely by changing the software

Moreover, it could provide itself with an automatic supervisory function and self-
diagnostic function without the addition of hardware. In adding the self-diagnostic function,
it is best to use such digital functions that can be processed with software only, without any
additional hardware

Also, the digital relay can accommodate various functions such as speed, accuracy,
miniaturization of facilities, and multi-protection scheme. Therefore, the digital relay type
is recommended for the protective relays to be installed at the new substations in
consideration of the reliability

2.3 Checking points for applying protective relays

The following relevant equipment should be effectively selected to operate the

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

protective relay systems efficiently

▪ Location & connection of VT and CT for protective relays
▪ CB and control circuit
▪ Communication system
▪ DC power supply and so on

3. Protection and Measuring

3.1 66, 30 kV Feeders

a) Protective relay system for 66, 30 kV feeders shall be adopted according to the
formation of 66, 30 kV feeders and importance regardless of bus-bar schemes

b) It is recommended that protective relay systems in loop system shall be arranged in

main and back-up mode to eliminate the faults within its protection zone promptly.
The main protective relay shall be equipped with a differential current relay to secure
the selectivity and high speed operation. The back-up protective relay shall be
equipped with 3-step distance timing relay. However, in radial system, protective relay
shall be arranged in single mode as shown below diagram

c) Therefore, the protective relay systems shall be applied as shown below diagram, and
a detailed connection about each protective relays complies with the manufacturer’s
specification

d) Also, measuring devices for 66, 30 kV feeders shall be equipped with “MW”,
“MVAR” and “A” meter as shown in below diagram
< Table 1 > Protective relay schemes for 66, 30 kV Feeders
Protective relay
Objective Main Re-closing
Back-up
Relay Communication
3-step Having the
Loop Differential current
Fiber-optic distance function
system relay
relay (3Ø × 1 time)
Short
Having the
Radial 51S or 67 relay
- - function
system Ground
(3Ø × 1 time)
51G or 67G relay

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

66, 30 kV Bus

87 21S 21G FD FL 68SB 79 25

W VAR A
43PD

43PD
#2Bus VT
Bus DCR 87: Current differential relay
21S: Phase distance relay
21G: Ground distance relay
FD: Fault detect
FL: Fault location
68SB: Out of step blocking relay
25: Synchronizing check relay
Feeder 79: Re-closing relay
43PD: VT selector switch

< Figure 1 > 66, 30 kV Feeder protection (loop system)

66, 30 kV Bus

51S 51G 67 67G 79 25

W VAR A
43PD

43PD
#2Bus VT
Bus DCR 51S: Over current relay
51G: Over current ground relay
67: Directional over current relay
67G: Directional over current ground relay
79: Re-closing relay
25: Synchronizing check relay
Feeder 43PD: VT selector switch

Note:
1. In case of the radial system, 51 and 51S relays are applied in general, however, if there is a
necessity to coordinate the protection scheme, 67 and 67G relays shall be applicable
2. In case of using the separateness CT, the CT locations shall be changeable
< Figure 2 > 66, 30 kV Feeder protection (radial system)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

3.2 66, 30 kV Bus

a) Basically, the protective relay for 66, 30 kV buses shall be applied at bus-bar which
has the 4 feeders and more using for transmission feeders

b) The CT for the bus protection shall be arranged for exclusive use. And, for the
effective protective relay system, bus protective relay schemes shall be applied
according to the bus-bar schemes

c) The standard of protective relay system shall be applied as shown in below table, and
a detailed connections about each protective relays comply with the manufacturer’s
specification

d) Also, measuring devices for bus shall be equipped with “V” and “A” meters whenever
the bus divided as bus-tie or bus-section breakers
< Table 2 > Protective relays for the 66, 30 kV bus
Objective Protective relay Remark
Current differential phase comparison
Double bus Supervisory factor:
relay
-Under-voltage relay or frame
Voltage differential relay or Current
Single bus leakage current relay
differential phase comparison relay
Note: the frame leakage relay shall be applicable to GIS or MCSG type bus to detect the phase-
to-ground faults as a supervisory factor

#1Bus
101 102 103 104 ID

Bus-tie CB
201 202
ID
203 204
#2Bus

27S1 27G1 27S2 27G2

ID ID ID ID
87B: Phase comparison differential relay
ID: Input device
201 101 202 102 203 103 204 104
27S: Under voltage relay for phase fault 87B1
27G: Under voltage relay for ground fault
101, 201: DS auxiliary contact 87B2 87B

#1F/D #2F/D #3F/D #4F/D

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

Note: In case of using the separateness CT, the CT locations shall be changeable
< Figure 3 > Current differential phase comparison relay

Bus

Line protection
Measuring

27S 27G

87B CT common bus

#1F/D #2F/D #3F/D #4F/D

87B: Voltage differential relay
27S: Under voltage relay for phase fault
27G: Under voltage relay for ground fault

Note: In case of using the separateness CT, the CT locations shall be changeable
< Figure 4 > Voltage differential relay

3.3 Power transformers

a) In case that the power transformer’s capacity is 10 MVA and more, the power
transformer protection shall be arranged in main and back-up mode to obtain high
reliability

b) The current differential relay is commonly used as main protective relay. And the
back-up protective relay shall be equipped with over current relay for short circuit
faults and grounding faults.

c) The standard of protective relay system shall be applied as shown in below table, and
a detailed connection about each protective relays complies with the manufacturer’s
specification.

d) In case NGR (Neutral Ground Relay) is installed at neutral points of power

transformer, the over-voltage relay shall be applied to protect the disconnection of
NGR in 11 kV bus

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

e) Also, measuring devices for power transformer’s secondary side shall be equipped
with “MW”, “MVAR”, “A” and “V” meters as shown in below diagram

< Table 3 > Protective relay for the power transformer

Protective relay
Objective Back-up
Main
Primary Secondary
66, 30 kV power Phase-to-phase: OCR
Current differential relay OCR
transformer Phase-to-ground: OCGR

66, 30 kV Bus
Measuring

Bus protection
51P

△
87T
Y
51SN 51S

W VAR A V

11 kV Bus

Note: In case of using the separateness CT, the CT locations shall be changeable
< Figure 5 > Power transformer protection

3.4 11 kV Feeders
a) In principle, the protective relay of 11 kV bus shall not be applied except for special
cases. And measuring devices shall be equipped as “V” and “A” meters whenever the
bus divided as bus-tie or bus-section

b) The protection of 11 kV feeder shall be arranged as over current relay as shown in

below table and a detailed connection about each protective relays complies with the
manufacturer’s specification

c) Also, measuring devices for the 11 kV feeders shall be equipped with “WH” and “A”

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

meters

d) The circuit breakers of 11 kV feeders shall be applied the re-closing relay to auto re-
close and coordinate with other protective relays
< Table 4 > Protective relay for 11 kV Feeder
Objective Protective relay Re-closing
Phase-to-phase: OCR
11 kV Feeder Having the function(3Ø × 1 times)
Phase-to-ground: OCGR

11 kV bus

79
51 51N

Auxiliary transformer
△ WH A
Y
WH

11 kV F/D

Note: In case of using the separateness CT, the CT locations shall be changeable
< Figure 6 > 11 kV Feeder protection

4. Current and Voltage Transformers

Current and voltage transformers are required to transform high currents and voltages
into more manageable quantities for measurement, protection and control

4.1 Current transformers

It is recommended that the bushing current transformer (BCT) shall be installed inside
the transformer and dead-tank type CB bushing is used by the current transformer for
measuring and protective relay system. However, the separateness CT shall be used in live-
tank type CB

Also, because the distance of control cable is not far from the CT to the protective relay,
the secondary burden is not a big concern. Therefore the rated secondary current of CT is
recommended as 5 A. However, in case if there are some problems in secondary burden

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

because the distance is very far from CT to protective relay, the rated CT current 1 A shall
be applicable

4.1.1 Definitions

Instrument transformer
A transformer intended to supply measuring instruments, meters, relays and other
similar apparatus

Current transformer
An instrument transformer in which the secondary current, in normal conditions of use,
is substantially proportional to the primary current and differs in phase from it by an
angle which is approximately zero for an appropriate direction of the connections

Current error (ratio error)

The error which a transformer introduces into the measurement of a current and which
arises from the fact that the actual transformation ratio is not equal to the rated
transformation ratio
The current error expressed in percent is given by the formula;

(K n I s − I p )
Current error (%) = × 100
Ip

K n : The rated transformation ratio

I p : The actual primary current

I s : The actual secondary current when I p is flowing

Phase displacement
The difference in phase between the primary and secondary current vectors, the direction
of the vectors being so chosen that the angle is zero for a perfect transformer
The phase displacement is said to be positive when the secondary current vector leads
the primary current vector

Accuracy class
A designation assigned to a current transformer the errors of which remain within

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

specified limits under prescribed conditions of use

Composite error
The composite error ε c is generally expressed as a percentage of the rms values of the
primary current according to the formula;

100 1 T
εc =
Ip T ∫
0
( K n i s − i p ) 2 dt

K n : The rated transformation ratio

I p : The rms value of the primary current

i p : The instantaneous value of the primary current

i s : The instantaneous value of the secondary current

T : The duration of one cycle

Burden
The impedance of the secondary circuit in ohms and power-factor, the burden is usually
expressed as the apparent power in volt-amperes absorbed at a specified power-factor
and at the rated secondary current

4.1.2 Markings
The markings of current transformer shall be indicated as shown

P1 P2
Single ratio transformer
S1 S2

P1 P2
Transformer with an intermediate
tapping on secondary winding
S1 S2 S3

P1 P2
Transformer with three secondary
Windings, each with its own magnetic
1S1 2S1 2S1 2S2 3S1 3S2
core

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

Note: To prepare the uncertainty, secondary winding shall prepared with minimum 2 tap ratios
< Figure 7 > Marking of terminals

4.1.3 Requirements for measuring current transformers

The current error and phase displacement at rated frequency shall not exceed the values
given in table when the secondary burden is any value from 25 % to 100% of the rated
burden. And, the specific requirement complies with IEC 60044-1
< Table 5 > Limits of current error and phase displacement (classes from 0.1 to 1)

% burden ± Percentage current ± Phase displacement

error Minutes Cent-radians
Class 5 20 100 120 5 20 100 120 5 20 100 120

0.1 0.4 0.2 0.1 0.1 15 8 5 5 0.45 0.24 0.15 0.15

0.2 0.75 0.35 0.2 0.2 30 15 10 10 0.9 0.45 0.3 0.3

0.5 1.5 0.75 0.5 0.5 90 45 30 30 2.7 1.35 0.9 0.9
1.0 3.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 180 90 60 60 5.4 2.7 1.8 1.8

< Table 6 > Limits of current error and phase displacement (classes 0.2S, 0.5S)

± Percentage current ± Phase displacement

%
burden error Minutes Cent-radians
Class 1 5 20 100 120 1 5 20 100 120 1 5 20 100 120

0.2S 0.75 0.35 0.2 0.2 0.2 30 15 10 10 10 0.9 0.45 0.24 0.15 0.15

0.5S 1.5 0.75 0.5 0.5 0.5 90 45 30 30 30 2.7 0.9 0.45 0.3 0.3

4.1.4 Requirements for protective current transformers

Accuracy class designation for protective current transformers, the accuracy class is
designed by the highest permissible percentage composite error at the rated accuracy limit
primary current prescribed for the accuracy class concerned, followed by the letter “P”.
About the specific requirement complies with IEC 60044-1

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

< Table 7 > Limits error for protective current transformers

± Percentage ± Phase displacement Percentage
Class
current error Minutes Cent-radians composite error
5P ±1 ± 60 ± 1.8 5
10 P ±3 - - 10

4.1.5 Location of protective relay CT

It is recommended that the protective relay CT shall be installed to prevent the blind
point protection as shown in the figure below

Bus
Feeder

For bus protection For feeder protection

< Figure 8 > Location of protective relay CT

4.1.6 CT connections of 3 phase circuits

General CT connections in 3 phase circuits are shown below. Also, when the CT is
connecting to the circuits, the secondary circuits shouldn’t make the open circuits
a) V connection
P
A
S Current
B ▪ In case of the measuring of 3 phase
P currents with 2 CTs
C S ▪ In case of the detection of shorts fault
only

b) Y connection

P1
Current
A
S1 ◊ In case of accurate measuring of 3
P1 phase currents
B
S1
P1 ◊ Easy to detect the phase-to-ground
C
S1 faults in the solidly earthed neutral
system

c) △ connection

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

P1 Current flow
A
S1

B P1
S ◊ Used for protective relay of power
C P1
transformer or short distance relay
S1
I ac
( I ac = I a − I c )

P1 Current flow
A S1

B P1
S1
C P1
S1
I ab
( I ab = I a − Ib )

d) ZCT connection

Current flow
◊ Used for the detection of the phase-
A P1 to-ground faults in the isolated
B neutral system
C S1

4.1.7 Detail connections

The standard connections of CT circuits are recommended as shown below
a) The 66, 30 kV feeder and bus protection
▪ The bushing type CT or separateness type CT shall be applicable to the 66, 30 kV
feeders and bus protection, but the bushing type CT is more advantageous in terms of
protective range considerations
▪ The exclusive CT shall be used for the 66, 30 kV feeders and bus protection as
shown. Also, the 3 phase connections for feeder protection shall be constituted as Y
connection and the common point is the feeder side
▪ Bus-bar schemes shall be constituted as single bus or double bus, and 3 phase CT
connections for the bus protection shall be constituted as Y connection and the
common point is the bus side

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

66, 30 kV bus
Feeder protection

Measuring

Bus protection

Feeder

Note: In case of using the separateness CT, the CT locations shall be changeable
< Figure 9 > CT connections for 66, 30 kV feeder and bus protections

4.1.8 Power transformer protection

a) The CT connections which are connected in 87 relay (main protection) shall be
constituted as shown below figure comply with the connections of power transformer

< Figure 10 > CT connections for 87T relay

b) In principle, CT for the power transformer main protection (87T) shall be arranged at

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

the circuit breaker side for power transformer as shown in below figure

c) Also, CT for power transformer back-up protection (51P, 51S, 51SN) shall be
prepared at the bushing of each windings of power transformer as shown

66, 30 kV Bus
Measuring

Bus protection
Bushing
51P
87T
△

Y
51S
51SN Bushing
Measuring

11 kV Bus

Note: In case of using the separateness CT, the CT locations shall be changeable
< Figure 11 > CT connection for power transformers

4.1.9 The 11 kV feeder

The separateness type CT shall be applicable to the 11 kV feeder protections, and the 3
phase connections shall be constituted as Y connection and the common point is the feeder
side as shown

11 kV Bus

51, 51N

Metering

11 kV Feeder

< Figure 12 > CT connection for 11 kV feeders

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

4.2 Voltage transformers

The VT is installed at each bus separated by bus-sec or bus-tie CB and are used for
metering, relay and synchronizing and line VT which are exclusively used for protective
relays, are used for re-closing, synchronizing and line protection

4.2.1 Definitions

Voltage transformer
An instrument transformer in which the secondary voltage, in normal conditions of use,
is substantially proportional to the primary voltage and differs in phase from it by an
angle which is approximately zero for an appropriate direction of the connections
Voltage error (ratio error)
The error which a transformer introduces into the measurement of a voltage and which
arises when the actual transformation ratio is not equal to the rated transformation ratio
The voltage error, expressed in percent is given by the formula;

( K nU s − U p )
Voltage error (%) = × 100
Up

K n : The rated transformation ratio

U p : The actual primary voltage

U s : The actual secondary voltage when U p is applied under the conditions of

measurement

Phase displacement
The difference in phase between the primary voltage and the secondary voltage vectors,
the direction of the vectors being so chosen that the angle is zero for a perfect
transformer. The phase displacement is said to be positive when the secondary voltage
vector leads the primary voltage vector, it is usually expressed in minutes or cent-radians

Accuracy class
A designation assigned to a voltage transformer, the errors of which remain within
specified limits under prescribed conditions of use
Burden
The admittance of the secondary circuit expressed in power factor (lagging or leading),

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

the burden is usually expressed as the apparent power in volt-amperes absorbed at a

specified power-factor and at the rated secondary voltage

4.2.2 Marking
Markings shall be in accordance with below figure as appropriate. Capital letters A, B, C
and D denote the primary-winding terminals and the lower-case letters a, b, c and n denote
the corresponding secondary-winding terminals

A B
Single-phase transformer with fully insulated terminals and a
single secondary
a b

A N
Single-phase transformer with a neutral primary terminal with
reduced insulation and a single secondary
a n

A B C N

Three-phase assembly with a single secondary

a b c n

A B C N

Three-phase assembly with two secondary windings

1a 1b 1c 1n

2a 2b 2c 2n

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

A B C N

Three-phase assembly with one multi-tap secondary

a3 b3 c3
a2 b2 c2

a1 b1 c1 n

< Figure 13 > Marking of terminals

4.2.3 Requirements for single-phase measuring VT

The voltage error and phase displacement at rated frequency shall not exceed the values
given in table at any voltage between 80% and 120% of rated voltage and with burdens of
between 25% and 100% of rated burden at a power factor of 0.8 lagging. And, the specific
requirement complies with IEC 60044-2
< Table 8 > Limits of voltage error and phase displacement
± Phase displacement
Class ± Percentage voltage error
Minutes Cent-radians
0.1 0.1 5 0.15
0.2 0.2 10 0.3
0.5 0.5 20 0.6
1.0 1.0 40 1.2
3.0 3.0 Not specified Not specified

4.2.4 Requirements for single-phase inductive protective VT

The voltage error and phase displacement at rated frequency shall not exceed the values
in table at rated voltage multiplied by the rated voltage factor with burdens of between
25% and 100% of rated burden at a power factor of 0.8 lagging. And, the specific
requirement complies with IEC 60044-2
< Table 9 > Limits of voltage error and phase displacement for protective VT
± Phase displacement
Class ± Percentage current error
Minutes Cent-radians
3P 3.0 120 3.5
6P 6.0 240 7.0

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

4.2.5 Rated voltages for secondary windings

110
The rated secondary voltage of VT shall be 110 V or V
3

4.2.6 VT connections of 3 phase circuits

VT connections in 3 phase circuits are shown in the below
a) Connection of single-phase VT × 1

A
B ▪ In case of the voltage detection for
C synchronizing

b) Y connection (single-phase VT × 3)

A
B ▪ Measuring the phase-to-phase voltage and
C phase-to-ground voltage
▪ Used for protective relay connections

c) △ connection (single-phase VT × 3)

A
B ▪ △ connection is not applied generally
C

d) Y-Y-open △ connection

A
B
C ◊ In case of detection of zero-phase voltage
Y
Y

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

4.2.7 Detail connections

The standard connections of VT circuits are recommended as shown below, which are
divided according to the protection objects such as for feeder, bus, transformers and so on
a) The 66, 30 kV feeder
VT for 66, 30 kV feeder shall be installed in each line sides with only a single-phase
VT as shown, and the secondary voltages shall be used for synchronizing

66, 30 kV F/D
F/D protection panel (for RC)

The others (ILC, etc)

#1Bus Single-phase VT × 1

#2Bus

110
Note: Voltages for secondary windings shall be applicable to 110 V or V according to
3
the relay type or so on
< Figure 14 > VT connections for 66, 30 kV feeders

b) The 66, 30kV bus

66, 30 kV bus VT shall be installed at each buses whenever the bus divided as bus-tie
or bus-section CB. VT connection for 66, 30 kV bus shall be connected as Y
connection with single-phase VT × 3ea, and each windings have the two secondary
windings as shown in figure below

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

#1Bus

Same as #2Bus VT
Bus-tie CB

#2Bus

Bus, F/D Protection panel

Measuring

Single-phase VT × 3

< Figure 15 > VT connection for 66, 30 kV bus

4.2.8 The 11 kV bus

11 kV bus VT shall be installed at each buses whenever the bus divided as bus-tie or bus-
sec CB
#1Bus

Same as #2Bus VT

#2Bus

F/D
The others (NGR, etc)

Measuring
3-phases VT

< Figure 16 > VT connection for 11 kV bus

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

5. Surge Arrester
In the power system, over voltage frequently occurs due to natural phenomena and
operating facilities. Consequently facilities malfunction from the dielectric breakdown of
facilities unless there is some protection against over voltage. To protect facilities from
over voltage, insulation coordination, which is the relation between insulation strength and
protective equipment, is necessary

The surge arrester, one of the devices used widely for over voltage protection, plays an
important role in insulation coordination and protects the insulation of facilities by
restricting impulse voltage caused by lightening or switching surge

5.1 Definitions

Rated voltage of an arrester

The designated maximum permissible rms value of power-frequency voltage between its
terminals at which it is designated to operate correctly. This voltage may be applied to
the arrester continuously without changing its operating characteristics

Rated frequency of an arrester

The frequency of the power system on which the arrester is designed to be used

Discharge current of an arrester

The surge or impulse current which flows through the arrester after a spark-over of the
series gaps

Nominal discharge current of an arrester

The peak value of discharge current having an 8/20 μs wave-shape which is used to
classify an arrester

Residual voltage (discharge voltage) of an arrester

The voltage that appears between the terminals of an arrester during the passage of
discharge current

5.2 Insulation co-ordination basic policy

▪ Internal over voltage: prevent the flashover
▪ External over-voltage: maintain the suitable reliability

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

5.3 Application of substation types

▪ 66 kV side: Indoor /outdoor AIS or GIS
▪ 30 kV side: Indoor GIS
▪ 11 kV side: Indoor MCSG

5.4 Selection of surge arrester

a) Ratings of surge arrester
The ratings of surge arrester are recommended as shown table comply with the voltage
levels
< Table 10 > Ratings of SA
Nominal voltage Rated voltage Nominal discharge current Residual voltage
(kV) (kV) (kA) (kV)
66 75 10 216
30 36 10 108
11 12 5 36

b) Installation locations of surge arrester

Installation locations of surge arrester follow the insulation coordination part

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

Appendix A: References

KEPCO Substation Design Standard, metering and protection

IEC 60044-1 Instrument transformers - part 1: current transformers
IEC 60044-2 Instrument transformers - part 2: inductive voltage transformers
IEC 60099-4 Non-linear resistor type gapped surge arresters for AC systems
IEC 60071 Insulation co-ordination

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

Appendix B: Review of transmission line protection

1. Main protective relay

Presently, the method of protection used worldwide for high voltage transmission is
shown below:
▪ Directional comparison (blocking, unblocking scheme)
▪ Transfer trip
▪ Phase comparison (individual phase comparison, total phase comparison) Differential
current
< Table B1 > Comparison of protection method for transmission line
Operating
Description Sensitivity Transfer line Application
speed
Directional comparison Medium Average Fiber-optic USA 765 kV
M/W Korea 345 kV
Transfer trip Low Average PLC
Phase comparison High High Fiber-optic Japan 500 kV
Differential current High High M/W Canada 735 kV

As shown in the above table, various types of protective relay systems are widely used
around the world. As the Libya power system is determined to be incomplete in terms of
the protection coordination, it is imperative that the priority should be placed on the secure
selectivity and high speed operation in selecting the transmission line protection system

The main protective relay for the 66, 30 kV transmission line should be equipped with a
differential current relay system capable of eliminating 100 % of the faults within its
protection zone promptly. Therefore, differential current relay is determined as the 66, 30
kV transmission line main protective relay in order to ensure that the faults are positively
eliminated

The differential current relaying system sends the reading of the instantaneous current at
each terminal by using a high-precision/high speed transfer line capable of remote
transmission, and at each terminal the collected reading of each instantaneous current will
be computed by the “differential current theory” to identify the fault

As this method uses differential current theory known to have excellent performance, it
could be applied to the protection of multi-terminal transmission lines that are generally
known to be difficult to protect. Also, the calculation of setting value is relatively easy

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

In this differential current relaying, the modes of transmission of instantaneous current

readings are principally as follows: Amplitude Modulation (AM), Frequency Modulation
(FM), Phase Modulation (PM), Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)

2. Back-up Protection System

The backup protection system for the transmission line will be equally equipped with 3-
step distance timing relay

3. Auto Re-closing
The 66, 30 kV transmission line protection systems shall be arranged to enable the
choice of the auto re-closing function (off, three phases)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

Appendix C: Review of communication methods

1. Power communication methods

Communication methods for the power system are the optical fiber cable, power line
carrier (PLC) and wireless (Micro Wave, UHF) method.

1.1. Optical communication

Automation of the power system operation and broadband communication require a high
reliability and high data rate. Optical communication is adopted for power communication
because it has a lot of strong points such as non-induction, a broadband, and a low loss,
compared with conventional communication lines

The optical communication system consists of optical terminal equipment (OTE),

optical repeater equipment (ORE) and an optical fiber cable as shown in the below figure
and it is compounded with multiple converters to multiplex a lot of information into one
signal

The optical fiber consists of the high refractive index part called a ‘CORE’ and a low
refractive index part called a ‘CLAD’ which surrounds the core. The optical signal
propagates within the inner material repeating total reflection on the boundary between the
core and the clad

A composite overhead ground wire with optical fiber (OPGW) is made by putting
optical fiber into the overhead ground wire which is mounted on the top of the tower to
protect the transmission line from lightning. It can be utilized as a stable and sturdy
transmission line route

Optical communication has a lot of merits compared with PLC or wireless

communication and unlimited growth possibility at the lowest cost with respect to its
transmission capacity

The merits of the optical communication system compared with other system are as
follows:
▪ Low loss
The signal must be repeated every 1.5 km on the coaxial cable but 50 ~ 120 km non-
repeat transmission is available on an optical fiber cable. Enlargement of non-repeat

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

transmission distance by the optical amplifier is a great merit of the optical fiber
▪ Broadband
The transmission capacity of the optical fiber recently used is 10 Gbps and
transmission technology with a capacity of 100 Gbps is going to be in practical use
soon. Enlargement of transmission capacity will allow the support of variable
multimedia services that require broadband with data as well as voice
▪ Non-induction
Optical fiber is not affected by external electromagnetic fields because it is made of
crystal or plastic. Therefore, there is no noise, crosstalk and interference due to
electromagnetic fields

<Figure C1 > Composition of optical communication system

1.2. Power Line Carrier (PLC)

This type is very stable even in case of storm or flood damage, because it uses a power
line as a transmission line. By using such common-place and widely distributed power
lines, a power company could establish communication systems anyplace they want, so it
assumes the important role of the power company's main telecommunication measure

However, the PLC system can offer only 6 lines. Therefore, the optical communication
method is used when more lines are required. The frequency bandwidth for the PLC
telephone is from 50 to 450 kHz and from 200 to 250 kHz for the PLC relay. A carrier’s
telephone equipment transmits a voice wave signal (0-4 kHz) modulated to the power line
carrier frequency

System output, noise, minimum receive level etc. are closely related to each other when
a system modulates a voice signal to load up to the carrier frequency or demodulates it to
its original voice wave. At this point, the minimum receive level is determined based on
the noise level

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

28 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

A high signal/noise ratio can be good, but it depends on which economic and technical
reason places a restriction on the system output when you improve the S/N ratio as much
as a regulation does, and which uses and types that are needed
a) The PLC method has the following advantages:
▪ Very high stability in transmission line
▪ Low transmission loss
▪ No additional cost for the wire installation because of use of pre-installed power line

b) However the power line is not designed for high frequency (50-450 kHz). For this
reason, the PLC is not adequate for the communication system. The followings are
disadvantages of the PLC:
▪ As the power voltage increases, the variable noise (corona noise, etc.) occurs in a
higher frequency band
▪ The transient phenomena of the disconnecting switches or circuit breakers in
substations have bad effects that contain a high frequency factor. Inductive and
capacitive reactance in various machines can cause a loss of carrier current and side
effects
▪ Additional complementary measures should be considered, to block carrier
frequency from flowing out from the communication section and a high voltage of
power frequency from flowing into communication equipment

c) A basic diagram of the PLC system is shown in below figure

<Figure C2 > Basic diagram of PLC system

1.3 Digital micro wave system

Digital M/W system's characteristics are as follows:
▪ Possible to transmit in band

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

29 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

▪ High quality transmission with clear transmission characteristics

▪ Directional antenna has a direction function and can get rid of interference
▪ Easily affected by environmental factors like typhoons, downpours and lightning

It is recommended not to consider the digital M/W system because of various

restrictions. It is not reliable if the power company doesn’t have its own M/W system and
it requires a very high cost to construct a power M/W network

2. Review of the signal transmission devices

2.1. Power line protective signal transmission system

If only a distance relay is applied to transmission line protection, it will be difficult to
get rid of a failure instantaneously occurring on the end of the transmission line. That is,
Zone-1, an element of the instantaneous action of the distance relay, has coverage to
supervise from 75 % to 80 % of its power line

Since it is impossible to protect against faults that occur on the remaining section from
25 % to 15 % instantaneously, you are not able to get rid of these faults and should use a
Zone-2 or Zone-3 element

This is a better way to use the carrier-relay system, which is equipped on both ends, to
protect the whole target line by confirming the exact fault location through the sending and
receiving signals between two systems

Types of carrier-relay systems vary by the types of communication lines, their methods
and methods of forming the protection system. Those are directional comparison, transfer-
trip, phase comparison, pilot wire relay, and current differential relay

▪ Protective Information Transmitter & Receiver (PITR)

The digital power line protection system uses an optical or a digital micro-wave
communication system for its transmission line and can multiplex all kinds of power
line protection and voice information in those panels. Also, combined with the
protection panel, it protects the power system in the event of a fault

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

30 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

▪ PLC Type
As was stated above, this type converts transmission signals from a Carrier-Relay
system into a communication signal using PLC transmission technology. Currently, the
leading companies with global technology have developed a lot of equipment that can
take a digital signal, like X.21/V11 or G.703, V.28 terminal and transmit data of 64kbit
/ sec. or less at the present

2.2. Review of the signal transmission devices

The purpose of using a signal transmission device on the protective relay is to send a
protective signal at high speed to get rid of faults, since the importance of its role is so high,
a high reliability is required

Therefore, a signal transmission device needs to be considered not only to reduce

transmission failure in system faults, but also to be configured to give the shortest
transmission delay time which has a big influence on the protective relay's performance.
Also, a signal transmission device with a low fluctuating delay time should be applied

On the basis of the requirements, the PITR type (Digital power line protection relay
system) is chosen using the optical communication method and the PLC method.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

31 / 32 Version 1.0
 Protection

Appendix D: Standard ratings of SA

1. Standard voltage ratings

Standard values of rated voltages for arresters shall be as listed
< Table D1 > Standard voltage ratings of SA (kV, rms)
0.175 6 18 36 75 126
0.280 7.5 21 39 84 138
0.500 9 24 42 96 150
0.660 10.5 27 51 102 174
3 12 30 54 108 186
4.5 15 33 60 120 198

2. Standard rated frequencies

The standard rated frequencies are 50 Hz and 60 Hz

3. Standard nominal discharge currents

The standard nominal discharge currents are: 10 kA, 5 kA, 2.5 kA and 1.5 kA, having an
8/20 μs wave-shape

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

32 / 32 Version 1.0
 GDS 5400
Version 1.0: Oct 7, 2007

Power Transformer

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. General ···········································································································1
3. Service Condition ··························································································1
3.1 Normal service conditions·······················································································1
3.2 Unusual service conditions······················································································2

4. Definitions ······································································································2
5. Power transformer Structure·······································································4
5.1 Type·························································································································4
5.2 Cooling methods ·····································································································4
5.3 Oil preservation system ···························································································5

6. Rating··············································································································5
6.1 Rated voltage···········································································································5
6.2 Rated frequency ······································································································5
6.3 Rated power ············································································································5
6.4 Insulation level ········································································································6

7. Winding connection and cooling method ···················································6

7.1 Phase displacement symbol ·····················································································6
7.2 Connection ··············································································································7
7.3 Cooling method ·······································································································7

8. OLTC (On Load Tap Changer) ···································································7

9. Bushing ···········································································································8
9.1 Rating for bushing···································································································8
9.2 Insulation level of bushing ······················································································8
9.3 Connection type ······································································································8

10. Oil Preservation System ·············································································9

ii
11. Protection and Measuring Devices····························································9
11.1 Mechanical protection devices···············································································9
11.2 Electrical protection and measuring devices························································10

12. Sound Level································································································10

13. Tank and Control Box···············································································10
14. Rating Plate································································································11
14.1 Information to be given in all cases ····································································· 11
14.2 Additional information to be given when applicable ··········································· 11

iii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Cooling methods ·························································································· 5

< Table 2 > Oil preservation systems ·············································································· 5
< Table 3 > Rated voltage and tapping voltage ······························································· 5
< Table 4 > Rated power [MVA]····················································································· 6
< Table 5 > Insulation level of power transformers························································· 6
< Table 6 > Vector group and terminal symbol ······························································· 6
< Table 7 > Connection of power transformers ······························································· 7
< Table 8 > Cooling method ··························································································· 7
< Table 9 > Number of steps and tapping step ································································ 7
< Table 10 > Current ratings and number of bushings ···················································· 8
< Table 11 > Insulation level of bushings········································································ 8
< Table 12 > Connection types for bushing····································································· 8
< Table 13 > Limit of sound level ················································································· 10

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ······················································································································· 13
B Review of current rating for bushing ··············································································· 14
C Identification symbols according to cooling method ······················································ 17
D Connection and phase displacement ··············································································· 19
E Standard insulation levels for bushing ··········································································· 23
F Rated withstand voltages for transformer windings ······················································· 24
G Short circuit impedance ································································································· 26
H Parallel operation ············································································································ 28

v
 Power Transformer

1. Scope

This standard is applicable to selection of power transformer types and ratings for new
66 kV, 30 kV substations. Also, the specifications for power transformer were suggested to
select the most suitable equipment on the basis of site survey

2. General

The power transformer is a basic and the most important piece of equipment in the
substation. To select the specifications of transformers, matters related to the system such
as capacity, voltage and % impedance should be reviewed in consideration of the
constitution of banks. Also, the size and weight of the transformer are important points of
consideration because the transformer is a heavy piece of equipment and its specifications
can be affected by load conditions and transport equipment

When selecting the suitable capacity and type of power transformer shall be considered
the load increasing in the future, ingoing and out going lines, transfer of loads, preparations
against the faults, substation scale and connection to relevant equipment

Also, in this standard, the specifications of a power transformer whose capacity is 25

MVA suggested in consideration of the present load conditions of Libya. And what is not
mentioned about the specification in this standard complies with IEC 60076

3. Service Condition

Normal service conditions are specified or recommended that an agreement shall be

reached concerning alternative or additional technical solutions or procedures. Also, such
agreement is to be made between the manufacturer and the purchaser. The matters should
preferably be raised at an early stage and the agreements included in the contract
specification.

3.1 Normal service conditions

The power transformers shall be installed at outdoor and indoor which shall be suitable
for continuous operation at the below site conditions
▪ Maximum altitude: 1 000 m (3 300 ft)
▪ Maximum ambient air temperature: + 50 °C

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

▪ Minimum ambient air temperature: -10 °C

▪ Monthly average temperature of the hottest month: + 40 °C
▪ Yearly average temperature: : + 30 °C

3.2 Unusual service conditions

Conditions other than those listed in above for the power transformer are considered to
be unusual. And manufacturers should discuss with purchaser for the unusual service
conditions

4. Definitions

Power transformer
A static piece of apparatus with two or more windings which by electromagnetic
induction, transforms a system of alternating voltage and current into another system of
voltage and current usually of different values and at the same frequency for the purpose
of transmitting electrical power

Two winding transformer

This is the basic transformer type with two windings connecting a higher voltage system
to a lower voltage system. This type is the normal arrangement for step-down
transformers in distribution and sub-transmission systems, and for generator
transformers

Three winding transformer

There are situations where, for design reasons, or because a third voltage level is
involved, that a third winding is added. Mainly, a star/star transformer is open supplied
with a third winding (delta-connected) for suppression of the third harmonics and supply
to an auxiliary load

Auto-transformers
The basic transformer principle can be achieved using a single winding (per phase). By
eliminating the second winding, an auto-transformer is potentially cheaper than a two
winding counterpart. In practice, an auto-transformer is applied in substations where the
transformation ratio is about double or below

Oil-immersed type transformer

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

A transformer of which the magnetic circuit and windings are immersed in oil

Dry-type transformer (for indoor transformer)

A transformer in which the core and windings are not immersed in an insulating liquid,
the cooling method of a dry-type transformer may be natural, natural/forced or forced
circulation

Oil preservation system

The system in an oil immersed transformer by which the thermal expansion of the oil is
accommodated. Contact between the oil and external air may sometimes be diminished
or prevented

Star connection (Y-connection)

The winding connection so arranged that each of the phase windings of a three-phase
transformer is connected to a common point (the neutral point) and the other end to it’s
appropriate line terminal

Delta connection (D-connection)

The winding connection so arranged that each of the phase windings of a three-phase
transformer is connected in series to form a closed circuit

Tapping step
The difference between the tapping factors, expressed as a percentage, of two adjacent
tapping

Tapping range
The variation range of the tapping factor, expressed as a percentage, compared with the
value “100”. If this factor ranges from 100 + x to 100 – y, the tapping range is said to be
+ x %, -y % or ± x %, if x = y

On-Load-Tap-Changer
A device for changing the tapping connections of a winding, suitable for operation while
the transformer is energized or on load

Rated current for bushing

Maximum rms value of current which the bushing can carry continuously under the

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

operating conditions without exceeding the temperature rise limits of appendix D

Liquid-filled bushing
Bushing in which the space between the inside surface of the insulating envelope and the
solid major insulation is filled with oil

Bushing for separable connector (Plug-in type bushing)

One end of which is immersed in an insulating medium and the other end designed to
receive a separable insulated cable connector, without which the bushing cannot
function

Standard values of highest voltage for bushing

The values of highest voltage of a bushing shall be chosen from the standard values of
the highest voltage for equipment, defined in IEC 60038 as given below, in kilovolts;
12 - 17.5 – 24 - 36 – 52 – 72.5 – 100 – 123 – 145 – 170 – 245 – 300 – 362 kV

Standard values of rated current for bushing

The values of rated current of a bushing shall be chosen from the standard values as
given below, in amperes;
100 – 250 – 315 – 400 – 500 – 630 – 800 – 1000 – 1250 – 1600 – 2000 – 2500 – 3150 –
4000 – 5000 – 6300 – 8000 A
☞ Bushings for transformer selected with rated current not less than 120 % of rated
current of the transformer are considered to be able to withstand the overload
conditions according to IEC 60354 without further clarification or tests

5. Power transformer Structure

5.1 Type
Types of power transformers can be divided according to the classification method, but
they are classified as auto-transformers, two-winding and three-winding transformers.
However, in this standard, the type of power transformer shall be applied as two-winding
and three-phase transformer except for special cases

5.2 Cooling methods

Cooling methods for power transformers shall be following the below table

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

< Table 1 > Cooling methods

Capacity Cooling system Remark
Below 10 MVA AN
10 ~ 60 MVA ONAN or ONAF
Note: In indoor or underground substations, the power transformers of below 60 MVA shall be
applicable to OFAF cooling method

5.3 Oil preservation system

Oil preservation system for oil immersed transformers shall be following the below table
< Table 2 > Oil preservation systems
Capacity Oil preservation system Remark
Below 3 MVA Conservator system
Above 3 MVA Diaphragm or inert gas type conservator system

6. Rating
The selection of ratings for power transformers shall be considered the parallel operation
in accordance with the existing transformer. Also, those ratings shall be such that the
transformer can deliver its rated current steady loading conditions without exceeding the
limits of temperature rise

6.1 Rated voltage

Rated voltage and taping range about each transformers are shown in the below.
< Table 3 > Rated voltage and tapping voltage
High voltage winding Low voltage winding
(Primary winding) (Secondary winding) Remark
Rated voltage(kV) Taping range(kV) Rated voltage(kV)
66 66 ± 10 % 11 17 Taps
30 30 ± 10 % 11 17 Taps
Note: The location of OLTC in a power transformer shall be located at the primary winding.

6.2 Rated frequency

The standard value of the rated frequency in the transformer is 50 Hz

6.3 Rated power

The transformer shall be capable of carrying in continuous service, the rated power

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

without exceeding the temperature-rise limitations specified in IEC 60076-2. Also, a two-
winding transformer has only one value of rated power, identical for both windings. The
rated power of each power transformers shall be following as shown in below table
< Table 4 > Rated power [MVA]
Transformer ONAN ONAF Remark
25 MVA 20 25
66 / 11 kV
12.5 MVA 10 12.5
25 MVA 20 25
66 / 30 kV
32 MVA 25 32
25 MVA 20 25
30 / 11 kV
10 MVA 10 12.5 For special use

6.4 Insulation level

Insulation level in the power transformer winding described the BIL (Basic Impulse
Level) shall be following as shown in bellow table
< Table 5 > Insulation level of power transformers
Highest voltage Lightning impulse withstand Power-frequency withstand
(kV) voltage (kV, peak) voltage (kV r.m.s)
72 .5 kV 325 140
36 kV 170 70
12 kV 75 28

7. Winding connection and cooling method

7.1 Phase displacement symbol

The star, delta connection of a set of phase windings of a three-phase transformer shall
be indicated by the capital letters Y, D for the high voltage (HV) winding, the small letters
y, d for the intermediate and low voltage (LV) windings. If the neutral point of a star
connected winding is brought out, the indication shall be YN or yn respectively.
< Table 6 > Vector group and terminal symbol
Transformer Vector group Terminal symbol
66 / 11 kV Dyn11 - High voltage terminal: 1U, 1V, 1W
66 / 30 kV Ynyn0 - Intermediate or low voltage terminal: 2U, 2V, 2W
30 / 11 kV Dyn11 - Neutral terminal: 1N, 2N

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

Dyn11 means that the high voltage winding is delta-connected, the low voltage is star-
connected with neutral brought out, and the low voltage winding lags the high voltage by
330 °

7.2 Connection
Connection of the power transformers shall be following as shown in below table
< Table 7 > Connection of power transformers
Rated voltage(kV) Connection
Rated power(MVA)
Primary Secondary Primary Secondary
66 / 11 kV 25 or 12.5 66 11 Δ Y
66 / 30 kV 25 or 32 66 30 Y Y
30 / 11 kV 25 or 12.5 30 11 Δ Y

7.3 Cooling method

Fans for ONAF cooling system shall circulate the air and increase rated power not less
than 25% which shall be designed for low sound level, high efficiency. Cooling method in
each transformer shall be following as shown in below table
< Table 8 > Cooling method
Power transformer Rated power (MVA) First stage Second stage Remark
66 / 11 kV 20 / 25 or 10 / 12.5 ONAN ONAF
66 / 30 kV 20 / 25 or 25 / 32 ONAN ONAF
20 / 25 ONAN ONAF
30 / 11 kV
10 / 12.5 GNAN GNAF Dry-type

8. OLTC (On Load Tap Changer)

OLTC can regulate the voltage within the tapping range voltage and the number of steps
and tapping step are shown in the below table
< Table 9 > Number of steps and tapping step
Power The number of steps
Tapping step
transformer Step up Step down Total steps
66 / 11 kV 8 8 17 Rated voltage × 1.25 %
66 / 30 kV 8 8 17 Rated voltage × 1.25 %
30 / 11 kV 8 8 17 Rated voltage × 1.25 %

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

9. Bushing

9.1 Rating for bushing

Current rating, number of bushings shall comply with the below table
< Table 10 > Current ratings and number of bushings
Secondary
Power transformer Primary
Line Neutral Number of bushings
12.5 MVA 250A 630A × 2 630A 6 for phase/ 1 for neutral
66 / 11 kV
25 MVA 400A 630A × 3 630A × 2 9 for phase/ 2 for neutral
25 MVA 400A 630A 630A 3 for phase/ 1 for neutral
66 / 30 kV
32 MVA 400A 800A 800A 3 for phase/ 1 for neutral
12.5 MVA 400A 630A × 2 630A 6 for phase/ 1 for neutral
30 / 11kV
25 MVA 630A 630A × 3 630A × 2 9 for phase/ 2 for neutral
Note: Refer to “appendix B” about detailed calculations

9.2 Insulation level of bushing

Insulation levels of bushings are shown in bellow table
< Table 11 > Insulation level of bushings
Lightning impulse withstand Power-frequency withstand
Rated voltage
voltage (kV, peak) voltage (kV, r.m.s)
72 .5 kV 325 140
36 kV 170 70
12 kV 75 28

9.3 Connection type

The connection types of power transformer bushing shall be usable such as Oil-to-Air,
Oil-to-Oil, Oil-to-Gas and Cable-Plug-in type. Connection types of bushing in power
transformers shall be applied as shown in below table
< Table 12 > Connection types for bushing
Secondary
Power transformer Primary
Line Neutral
66/11 kV Bushing type Cable plug-in type Cable plug-in type
66/30 kV Bushing type Cable plug-in type Cable plug-in type
30/11 kV Cable plug-in type Cable plug-in type Cable plug-in type

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

10. Oil Preservation System

For oil-immersed transformers, the type of oil preservation system shall be applicable to
the power transformer in accordance with the inquiry or order. The oil preservation types
are showing
▪ Freely breathing or conservator system
There is free communication between the ambient air and air filled expansion space
above the surface of the oil, in the tank or in a separate expansion vessel (conservator).
A moisture-removing breather is usually fitted in the connection to the atmosphere
▪ Diaphragm-type oil preservation system
An expansion volume of air at atmosphere pressure is provided above the oil but
prevented from direct contact with the oil by a flexible diaphragm or bladder
▪ Inert gas pressure system
An expansion space above the oil is filled with dry inert dry gas at slight over-pressure,
being connected to either a pressure controlled source or an elastic bladder
▪ Sealed tank system with gas cushion
A volume of gas above the oil surface in a stiff tank accommodates the oil expansion
under variable pressure
▪ Sealed, completely filled system
The expansion of the oil is taken up by elastic movement of the permanently sealed,
usually corrugated tank.

11. Protection and Measuring Devices

11.1 Mechanical protection devices

The mechanical protection shall be applicable to the transformer in accordance with the
inquiry or order
a) Buchholz relay (Main tank and OLTC)
Buchholz relay is connected in the oil feed pipe connecting the conservator to the main
and OLTC tank. The relay is designed to;
▪ Detect free gas being slowly produced in the main tank, possibly as a result of partial
discharge, under such conditions the relay may be set to give an alarm condition after
a certain amount of gas has evolved
▪ Detect a sudden surge movement of oil due to an internal transformer fault. Under
such conditions the relay is normally set to trip the breaker
▪ Provide a chamber for collection and later analysis of evolved gas. Chemical analysis
of the gas and transformer oil can give maintenance staff an indication as to the cause

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

of the faults

b) Pressure relief devices

Pressure relief devices should be regarded as an essential accessory to adequately
protect the tank for any oil-immersed transformer. In order to avoid tank rupture
resulting from the high pressures involved in an internal transformer fault a quick
acting pressure relief device is specified

c) Temperature monitoring(Oil, Winding)

A correctly specified and loaded transformer should not develop excessive
temperatures in operation. Oil and winding temperature is monitored in all transformers.
Both oil and winding temperature monitors are fitted with contacts which can be set to
operate at a desired temperature. Such contacts are used for alarm or trip purposes and
to operate auxiliaries. Alarm and trip temperature settings are usually advised by the
manufacturer.

11.2 Electrical protection and measuring devices

The electrical protection shall be equipped at the power transformer in accordance with
the “protection system” part

12. Sound Level

All transformers with their accessories shall be designed and manufactured to reduce the
noise and vibration to acceptable level. The average surface sound level of each
transformers shall not exceed the values as shown the below table. Each transformer shall
be subjected to the sound level measurement as per IEC 60076-10
< Table 13 > Limit of sound level
Maximum sound level (dB)
Rated power(MVA) Remark
ONAN ONAF
12. 5 68 70
20 70 72
25 71 73
32 72 74

13. Tank and Control Box

The power transformer tank and control box shall have the strength to withstand at the
shock or vibration when it transported or deal with. Also, the tank shall withstand a

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

pressure rising developed during normal or abnormal operations without permanent

deformation. Also, the structure of the transformer shall be manufactured which is easy to
transport, install, test and check. Also, the transformer shall be designed to which has the
convenience of maintenance

14. Rating Plate

The transformer shall be provided with a rating plate of weatherproof material, fitted in
a visible position, showing the appropriate items indicated below. The entries on the plate
shall be indelibly marked.

14.1 Information to be given in all cases

▪ Kind of transformer
▪ Number of this standard (for example, IEC 60076)
▪ Manufacturer's name
▪ Manufacturer's serial number
▪ Year of manufacture
▪ Number of phases
▪ Rated power (MVA)
▪ Rated frequency (in Hz)
▪ Rated voltages (kV) and tapping range
▪ Rated currents (in A or kA)
▪ Connection symbol
▪ Short-circuit impedance, measured value in percentage
▪ Type of cooling
If the transformer has several assigned cooling methods, the respective power values
may be expressed as percentages of rated power, for example ONAN/ONAF
70/100 %
▪ Total mass
▪ Mass of insulating oil

14.2 Additional information to be given when applicable

▪ For transformers having a tapped winding, particulars about the tapping are as
follows:
9 Transformers having a tapping range not exceeding ± 5 %: tapping voltages on the
tapped winding for all tapping
9 Transformers having a tapping range exceeding ±5 %: a table stating tapping

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

voltage, tapping current and tapping power for all tapping

▪ Insulating liquid, if not mineral oil
▪ Connection diagram, in cases where the connection symbol will not give complete
information regarding the internal connections
▪ Transportation mass (for transformers exceeding 5 t total mass)
▪ Un-tanking mass (for transformers exceeding 5 t total mass)
▪ Vacuum withstand capability of the tank and of the conservator
▪ In addition to the main rating plate with the information listed above, the transformer
shall also carry plates with identification and characteristics of auxiliary equipment
according to standards for such components (bushings, tap-changers, current
transformers, special cooling equipment).

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

Appendix A: References

KEPCO Substation Design Standard, Substation scale

KEPCO Distribution Design Standard
IEC 60076-1 Power transformer – part 1 general
IEC 60076-2 Power transformer – part 2 temperature rise
IEC 60076-3 Power transformer – part 3 insulation level and dielectric tests and
external clearance in air
IEC 60076-4 Power transformer – part 4 guide to lightning impulse and switching
impulse testing
IEC 60076-5 Power transformer – part 5 ability to withstand short circuit
IEC 60354 Loading guide for oil-immersed power transformers
IEC 60137 Insulated bushing for alternating voltages above 1000V
IEC 60076-8 Power transformer – part 8 power transformer application guide
IEC 60076-1 Power transformer – part 1 general
IEC 60726 Dry-type power transformer
IEC 60038 IEC standard voltages

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

Appendix B: Review of current rating for bushing

1. 66 / 11 kV Transformer

1.1 12.5 MVA

9 Primary side
12.5 × 10 3
I1 = = 109 [A], however, current at the lowest tap (59.4 kV) = 122 [A]
3 × 66
Considering the sufficient margin, the current rating of primary side bushing applies as
250 [A]
9 Secondary side
12.5 × 10 3
I2 = = 656 [A]
3 × 11
Considering the sufficient margin and construction work conditions, the current rating
of secondary side bushing applies as 630 × 2 [A]

1.2 25 MVA
9 Primary side
25 × 10 3
I1 = = 218 [A], however, current at the lowest tap (59.4 kV) = 243 [A]
3 × 66
Considering the sufficient margin, the current rating of primary side bushing applies as
400 [A]
9 Secondary side
25 × 10 3
I2 = = 1312 [A]
3 × 11
Considering the sufficient margin and construction work conditions, the current rating
of secondary side bushing applies as 630 × 3 [A]

2. 66 / 30 kV Transformer

2.1 25 MVA
9 Primary side
25 × 10 3
I1 = = 219 [A], however, current at the lowest tap (59.4 kV) = 243 [A]
3 × 66
Considering the sufficient margin, the current rating of primary side bushing applies as
400 [A]

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

9 Secondary side
25 × 10 3
I2 = = 481 [A]
3 × 30
Considering the sufficient margin, the current rating of secondary side bushing applies
as 630 [A]

2.2 32 MVA
9 Primary side
32 × 10 3
I1 = = 280 [A], however, current at the lowest tap (59.4 kV) = 311 [A]
3 × 66
Considering the sufficient margin, the current rating of primary side bushing applies as
400 [A]
9 Secondary side
32 × 10 3
I2 = = 615 [A]
3 × 30
Considering the sufficient margin, the current rating of secondary side bushing applies
as 800 [A]

3. 30 / 11 kV Transformer

3.1 12.5 MVA

9 Primary side
12.5 × 10 3
I1 = = 240 [A], however, current at the lowest tap (27 kV) = 267 [A]
3 × 30
Considering the sufficient margin, the current rating of primary side bushing applies as
400 [A]
9 Secondary side
12.5 × 10 3
I2 = = 656 [A]
3 × 11
Considering the sufficient margin and construction work conditions, the current rating
of secondary side bushing applies as 630×2 [A]

3.2 25 MVA
9 Primary side
25 × 10 3
I1 = = 481 [A], however, current at the lowest tap (27 kV) = 535 [A]
3 × 30

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

Considering the sufficient margin, the current rating of primary side bushing applies as
630 [A]
9 Secondary side
25 × 10 3
I2 = = 1312 [A]
3 × 11
Considering the sufficient margin and construction work conditions, the current rating
of secondary side bushing applies as 630×3 [A]

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

Appendix C: Identification symbols according to cooling method

1. Oil-immersed type transformer

Transformers shall be identified according to the cooling method employed. For oil
immersed transformers this identification is expressed by a four-letter code as described
bellow

First letter: Internal cooling medium in contact with the windings

- O: mineral oil or synthetic insulating liquid with fire point ≤ 300 °C

- K: insulating liquid with fire point > 300 °C

- L: insulating liquid with no measurable fire point

Second letter: Circulation mechanism for internal cooling medium

- N: natural thermo-siphon flow through cooling equipment and in windings

- F: forced circulation through cooling equipment, thermo-siphon flow in windings

- D: forced circulation through cooling equipment, directed from the cooling

equipment into at least the main windings

Third letter: External cooling medium

- A: air

- W: water

Fourth letter: Circulation mechanism for external medium

- N: natural convection

- F: forced circulation (fans, pumps)

Example)
▪ ONAN/ONAF
The transformer has a set of fans which may be put in service as desired at high
loading the oil circulation is by thermo-siphon effect only

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

▪ ONAN/OFAF
The transformer has cooling equipment with pumps and fans but is also specified with
a reduced power-carrying capacity under natural cooling, For example, in case of
failure of auxiliary power.

2. Dry-type transformer
a) Identification symbols
Transformers shall be identified according to the cooling method employed.

< Table C1 > Letter symbols

Kind of cooling medium Symbol
Air A
Gas G
Kind of circulation Symbol
Natural N
Forced F

b) Arrangement of symbols

< Table C2 > Order of symbols

st
1 letter 2nd letter 3rd letter 4th letter
Indicating the cooling medium that is in Indicating the cooling medium that is in
contact with the windings contact with the external cooling system
Cooling medium Circulation Cooling medium Circulation

▪ ANAN
For a transformer within a protective enclosure through which the cooling air cannot
circulate, with natural air cooling inside and outside the enclosure

▪ GNAN/GNAF
For a transformer in a sealed enclosure with natural nitrogen cooling inside and
alternatives of natural or forced air cooling outside the enclosure

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

Appendix D: Connection and phase displacement

1. Connection symbols
The star, delta connection of a set of phase windings of a three-phase transformer or of
windings of the same voltage of single-phase transformers associated in a three-phase bank
shall be indicated by the capital letters “Y” or “D” for the high-voltage (HV) winding and
small letters “y” or “d” for the intermediate and low-voltage (LV) windings. If the neutral
point of star connected winding is brought out, the indication shall be “YN” (“yn”)
respectively.

2. Terminal symbols
Openly, windings in a three-phase transformer that are not connected together in
transformer but have both ends of each winding brought out to terminals are indicated as
“Ⅰ”, “Ⅱ”, “Ⅲ” or “1U”, “1V”, “1W” for the high voltage terminals and as “ⅰ”, “ⅱ”,
“ⅲ” or “2U”, “2V”, “2W” for the intermediate or low-voltage terminals. The sense of
rotation of the phase diagram is counter-clockwise, giving the sequence Ⅰ- Ⅱ - Ⅲ. If the
neutral point of star connected winding is brought out, the indication shall be “1N” (“2N”)
respectively, this numbering is arbitrary. Terminal marketing on the transformer follows
national practice.

3. Vector symbols
Vector groups are indicated by following examples in the below;

Example 1
A three-winding transformer with high voltage winding is 66 kV delta-connected. The
low voltage winding is 11 kV star-connected with neutral brought out and the LV
winding lags the HV by 330 °

Symbol: Dyn11
Example 2
A three-winding transformer: 123 kV star-connected with neutral brought out. 36kV
star-connected with neutral brought out. 7.2kV delta-connected, lagging by 150 °

Symbol: YNyn0d5
Example 3

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

345 154
A group of three-single-phase auto-transformers, / kV with 22 kV tertiary
3 3
windings, the auto-connected windings are connected in star, while the tertiary
windings are connected in delta. The delta winding phase lags the high-voltage winding
phase by 330°

Symbol: YNautod11 or YNad11

The symbol would be the same for a three-phase auto-transformer with the same
connection, internally.

4. Connection
Example of connections in general use, with connection diagrams, are shown in the below.

Vector Vector
diagrams diagrams
group group

0 Yyo Ddo

1 Yd1 Dy1

5 Yd5 Dy5

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

Vector Vector
diagrams diagrams
group group

6 Yy6 Dd6

11 Yd11 Dy11

2 Dd2

4 Dd4

7 Yd7 Dy7

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

Vector Vector
diagrams diagrams
group group

8 Dd8

9 Dd10

< Figure D1 > Three-phase transformer connections

Vector
Diagrams
group

0 Yao

< Figure D2 > Three-phase auto-transformer connection

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

Appendix E: Standard insulation levels for bushing

< Table E1 > Standard insulation levels for highest voltage less than 300kV
Dry lightning impulse Power-frequency
Highest voltage U m withstand voltage withstand voltage, wet
Remark
kV (r.m.s value) (BIL) and dry
kV (peak value) kV (r.m.s value)
3.6 40 10
7.2 60 20
12 75 28
17.5 95 38
24 125 50
36 170 70
52 250 95
72.5 325 140
380 150
100
450 185
450 185
123
550 230
450 185
145 550 230
650 275
550 230
170 650 275
750 325
650 275
750 325
245 850 360
950 395
1050 460

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

Appendix F: Rated withstand voltages for transformer windings

1. Highest voltage for equipment U m ≤ 170kV

< Table F1 > Rated withstand voltages with U m ≤ 170kV
Rated short duration induced
Highest voltage for Rated lightning impulse
or separate source AC
equipment U m withstand voltage
withstand voltage
(kV r.m.s) (kV peak)
(kV r.m.s)

Note
Dotted lines may require additional phase-to phase withstand tests to prove that the
required phase-to-phase withstand voltages are met
※ Based on European practice

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

2. Highest voltage for equipment U m ≥ 170kV

< Table F2 > Rated withstand voltages with U m ≥ 170kV
Rated short
Rated switching Rated lightning
Highest voltage duration induced or
withstand voltage impulse withstand
for equipment separate source AC
phase-to earth voltage
U m (kV r.m.s) withstand voltage
(kV peak) (kV peak)
(kV r.m.s)

Note 1 Dotted lines are not in line with IEC 60071-1 but are current practice in some
countries
Note 2 For uniformly insulated transformers with extremely low values of rated AC
insulation levels, special measures may have to be taken to perform the short-
duration AC induced test.
Note 3 Not applicable, unless otherwise agreed
Note 4 For voltages given in the last column, higher test voltages may be required to
prove that required phase-to-phase withstand voltages are met. This is valid for
the lower insulation assigned to the different U m in the table.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

Appendix G: Short circuit impedance

1. General
The short circuit impedance or internal impedance is a main parameter for a transformer.
Extreme values are limited by design factors; the lowest value by the minimum physical
distance windings, the highest by the effects of the associated high leakage flux. High
reactance has the disadvantage of a large voltage drop (requiring a large tapping range to
compensate and maintain secondary voltage) and a large amount of reactive power
consumed within the transformer itself

For larger transformer ratings a high reactance may, however, be considered desirable
because it limits the short circuit current and therefore maintains the rating of associated
system switchgear. Also, a low short circuit impedance of a transformer can lower system
loss and is favorable for transmission stability, but causes a high fault current and is heavy

Commonly recognized minimum values for the short circuit impedance of transformers
at rated current are given as shown below table. If lower values are required, the ability of
the transformer to withstand short circuit shall be subject to agreement between the
manufacturers and the purchasers
< Table G1 > Recognized minimum values of short-circuit impedance
Minimum short circuit impedance
Rated power (MVA) Remark
IEC 60076 (%)
Up to 0.63 4.0
0.631 to 1.25 5.0
1.251 to 2.5 6.0
2.501 to 6.3 7.0
6.301 to 25.0 8.0
25.001 to 40.0 10.0
40.001 to 63.0 11.0
63.001 to 100.0 12.5
Above 100.0 > 12.5
Note: Values for rated power greater than 100 MVA are generally subjected to agreement the
manufacturer and the purchaser

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

2. Tolerance

< Table G2 > Tolerance of short-circuit impedance

Item Tolerance
A separate-winding transformer with two windings or a specified first pair of separate
windings in a multi-winding transformer.
When the impedance value is ≥ 10 %
: ± 7.5 % of the declared value
a) Principal tapping
When the impedance value is < 10 %
: ± 10 % of the declared value
When the impedance value is ≥ 10 %
: ± 10 % of the declared value
b) Any other tapping of the pair
When the impedance value is < 10 %
: ± 15 % of the declared value
An auto-connected pair of winding, or a specified second pair of separate windings in a
multi-winding transformer
a) Principal tapping ±10 % of the declared value
b) Any other tapping of the pair ±15 % of the declared value for that tapping

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

Appendix H: Parallel operation

1. General
Parallel operation means that direct terminal-to-terminal connection between
transformers in the same installations. Only two-winding transformers are considered. The
logic is also applicable to banks of three single-phase transformers. For parallel operation,
the transformers require;
▪ The same phase-angle relation
▪ The same ratio with some tolerance and similar tapping range
▪ The same relative short circuit impedance with some tolerance, this also means that
the variation of relative impedance across the tapping range should be similar for the
two transformers

It is important that the tender specification for a transformer which is intended for
parallel operation with a specific existing transformer contain the existing transformer
information. Some warnings are prudent in this connection
▪ It is not advisable to combine transformers of widely different power rating (more
than 1 : 2)
▪ Transformers built according to different design concepts are likely to present
different impedance levels and different variation trends across the tapping range
▪ The consequences of a small mismatch of data should not be overestimated. But it
is not necessary, for example, to provide precisely the same tapping voltages on two
parallel transformers. The tapping step is usually so small that staggered taps permit
reasonable operation. However, care should be taken where tapping steps are large

2. Matching three-phase connections and phase-angle relations

The common three-phase transformers shown in figure 1 are derived from IEC 60076-
1. In each block, one or two clock numbers are indicated by permutation. This means for
example that if the secondary terminals of a transformer with clock number 1 were quite
simply re-named by cyclic permutation. Some artificial paralleling possibility
connections are shown in the below figure

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

28 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

Clock hour number : 0

Yy0 Dd0
Clock hour number : 1

Yd1 Dy1
Clock hour number : 11

Yd11 Dy11
Clock hour number : 6

Yy6 Dd6
< Figure H1 > Paralleling possibility connections

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

29 / 30 Version 1.0
 Power Transformer

3. Unequal short-circuit impedance

When two transformers have equal short-circuit impedances, this means that they
present the same voltage drop for equal per unit loading (equal load current in per cent of
rated current, or equal load power in per cent of rated power). If connected in parallel, they
will share the load in proportion to their relative rated power values

When transformers with unequal short-circuit impedance values are connected in

parallel, the transformer with lower impedance value will take up a higher percentage of its
rated power than will the higher impedance transformer, so that the absolute voltage drop
will be the same for both transformers. This may cause marginally increased combined
power loss for the transformer but, it may restrict the load ability of the installation. The
unbalance is estimated as follows;

Two transformers “a” and “b” with rated power S ra and S rb , and relative impedance
Z a and Z b . The transformers have equal ratio. The load be shared is S. The units will take
up S a and S b respectively;
Sa S Sb S
= , = ,
S ra Za S rb Zbb
S ra + × S rb S rb + × S ra
Zb Za

Example

Transformers
A : S ra = 10 MVA, Z a = 10%
B : S rb = 20 MVA, Z b = 12%

The combined load is S = 27 MVA, 90 % of the sum of the rated power figures of the
transformers. The actual loading however becomes;
Sa Sb
= 1.01; = 0.84
S ra S rb
S a = 10 × 1.01 ≈ 10 MVA; S b = 20 × 0.84 ≈ 17 MVA;
Transformer “A” is fully loaded, while transformer “B” has only taken up 84 % of its
rated power

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

30 / 30 Version 1.0
 GDS 5500
Version 1.0: Oct 7, 2007

Switchgear

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. General ···········································································································1
3. Service Conditions·························································································1
3.1 Normal service conditions·······················································································1
3.2 Unusual service conditions······················································································2

4. Definitions ······································································································2
5. Circuit Breaker Types···················································································6
5.1 Kind of AC circuit breakers·····················································································6
5.2 Application of circuit breaker types·········································································6

6. Primary Side ··································································································7

6.1 Substation type ········································································································7
6.2 Rating······················································································································7
6.3 GIS Type switchgear ·······························································································9
6.3.1 Design············································································································9
6.3.2 DS and ES····································································································10
6.3.3 Bus···············································································································10
6.3.4 CT················································································································ 11
6.3.5 PT ················································································································ 11
6.3.6 The others ···································································································· 11
7. Secondary Side·····························································································11
7.1 Type······················································································································· 11
7.2 Design ···················································································································12
7.3 Rating····················································································································13

8. Nameplates ···································································································15

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Application of circuit breaker type······························································· 6

< Table 2 > Type and bus-bar in 30 kV, 66 kV substations·············································· 7
< Table 3 > Rated voltage ······························································································· 7
< Table 4 > Rated insulation levels ················································································· 7
< Table 5 > Normal current, short-time withstand current and peak current ··················· 8
< Table 6 > DC, AC voltage for control ·········································································· 9
< Table 7 > Rated break time ·························································································· 9
< Table 8 > Substation type and bus-bar for secondary side ········································· 11
< Table 9 > Rated voltage ····························································································· 13
< Table 10 > Rated insulation levels ············································································· 13
< Table 11 > Normal current, short-time withstand current and peak current ··············· 14
< Table 12 > DC, AC voltage for control ······································································ 14
< Table 13 > Rated break time ······················································································ 15

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

< Figure 1 > Circuit-breaker without switching resister·················································· 5

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ············································································································ 17
B Rated normal current calculation ··········································································· 18
C Review of ratings for switchgear ·········································································· 20
D Limits of temperature and temperature rise ·························································· 24

v
 Switchgear

1. Scope

This standard is applicable to selection of switchgear including their auxiliary equipment

designed for outdoor and indoor installations for the new 66kV, 30 kV substations. Also the
ratings and types are selected among exiting commercial products

2. General

The circuit breakers or switchgear shall be selected considering the short circuit capacity
of power systems, substation types, connections of relevant equipment, outgoing and
incoming lines and so on. If the actual service conditions differ from these service
conditions in installation site, circuit breakers or switchgear associated operating devices
and auxiliary equipment shall be designed in accordance with the any special service
conditions required by the user

Other information concerning classification of environmental conditions is given in IEC

60721-3-3 (indoor) and IEC 60721-3-4 (outdoor). Also, in this standard, which is not
mentioned about the specifications complies with the relevant standards.

3. Service Conditions

Normal service conditions are specified or recommended that an agreement shall be

reached concerning alternative or additional technical solutions or procedures. Also, such
agreement is to be made between the manufacturer and the purchaser. The matters should
preferably be raised at an early stage and the agreements included in the contract
specification.

3.1 Normal service conditions

The circuit breakers including the relevant equipment shall be installed at outdoor and
indoor which shall be suitable for continuous operation at the below site conditions
▪ Maximum altitude: 1 000 m (3 300 ft)
▪ Maximum ambient air temperature: + 50 °C
▪ Minimum ambient air temperature: -10 °C
▪ Monthly average temperature of the hottest month: + 40 °C
▪ Yearly average temperature: + 30 °C

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

3.2 Unusual service conditions

Conditions other than those listed in above for the circuit breakers or switchgears are
considered to be unusual. And manufacturers should discuss with purchaser for the unusual
service conditions

4. Definitions

Switchgear
A general term covering switching devices and their combination with associated
control, measuring, protective and regulating equipment, also assemblies of such devices
and equipment with associated interconnections, accessories, enclosures and supporting
structures, intended in principle for use in connection with generation, transmission,
distribution and conversion of electric energy

Control-gear
A general term covering switching devices and their combination with associated
control, measuring, protective and regulating equipment, also assemblies of such devices
and equipment with associated interconnections, accessories, enclosures and supporting
structures, intended in principle for the control of electric energy consuming equipment

Indoor switchgear and control-gear

Switchgear and control-gear designed solely for installation within a building or other
housing, where the switchgear and control-gear is protected against wind, rain, snow,
abnormal dirt deposits, abnormal condensation, ice and hoar frost

Outdoor switchgear and control-gear

Switchgear and control-gear suitable for installation in the open air, i.e. capable of
withstanding wind, rain, snow, dirt deposits, condensation, ice and hoar frost

Metal-enclosed Switchgear (MCSG)

Switchgear assemblies with an external metal enclosure intended to be earthed and
completely assembled, except for external connections

Gas-insulated metal-enclosed switchgear (GIS)

Metal-enclosed switchgear in which the insulation is obtained, at least partly, by an
insulating gas other than air at atmospheric pressure

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

Gas-insulated switchgear enclosure

Part of gas-insulated metal-enclosed switchgear retaining the insulating gas under the
prescribed conditions necessary to maintain safely the highest insulation level,
protecting the equipment against external influence and providing a high degree of
protection to personnel

Circuit breaker
A mechanical switching device capable of making, carrying and breaking currents under
normal circuit conditions and also making and carrying for specified time and breaking
currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions

Short-circuit current
An over-current resulting from a short circuit due to a fault or an incorrect connection in
an electric circuit

Disconnect switch
A mechanical switching device which provides, in the open position, an isolating
distance in accordance with specified requirements

Earthing switch
A mechanical switching device for earth parts of a circuit, capable of withstanding for a
specified time currents under abnormal conditions such as those of short circuit, but it is
not required to carry current under normal conditions of the circuit. An earth switch may
have a short circuit making capacity

Breaking capacity
A value of prospective current that a switching device is capable of breaking at a stated
voltage under prescribed conditions of use and behavior

Making capacity
A value of prospective making current that a switching device is capable of making at a
stated voltage under prescribed conditions of use and behavior

Short-circuit breaking capacity

A breaking capacity for which the prescribed conditions include a short circuit at the
terminals of the switching device

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

Short-time withstand current

The current that a circuit or a switching device in the closed position can carry during a
specified short time under prescribed conditions of use and behavior

Opening time
The opening time is the interval of time between the instant of energizing the opening
release, the circuit-breaker being in the closed position, and the instant when the arcing
contacts have separated in all poles. The opening time includes the operating time of any
auxiliary equipment necessary to open the circuit-breaker and forming an integral part of
the circuit-breaker

Arcing time
The interval of time between the instant of the first initiation of an arc and the instant of
final arc extinction in all poles

Break time
The interval of time between the beginning of the opening time of a mechanical
switching device and the end of the arcing time

Make time
The interval of time between energizing the closing circuit, the circuit breaker being in
the open position, and the instant when the current begins to flow in the first pole

Closing time
The interval of time between energizing the closing circuit, the circuit breaker being in
the open position, and the instant when the contacts touch in all poles

Pre-arcing time
The interval of time between the initiation of current flow in the first pole during a
closing operation and the instant when the contacts touch in all poles for three-phase
conditions

Open-close time (during auto-re-closing)

The interval of time between the instant when the arcing contacts have separated in all
poles and the instant when the contacts touch in the first pole during a re-closing cycle

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

Dead time (during auto-re-closing)

The interval of time between final arc extinction in all poles in the opening operation
and the first re-establishment of current in any pole in the subsequent closing operation

Re-closing time
The interval of time between the beginning of the opening time and the instant when the
contacts touch in all poles during a re-closing cycle

Re-make time (during re-closing)

The interval of time between the beginning of the opening time and the first re-
establishment of current in any pole in the subsequent closing operation

Close-open time
The interval of time between the instant when the contacts touch in the first pole during
a closing operation and the instant when the arcing contacts have separated in all poles
during the subsequent opening operation

Closed position
Contact movement

Open position

Current flow Current flow

Time
Opening time Make time

Arcing time Pre-arcing time

Break time Closing time
Dead time
Open-close time
Re-make time
Re-closing time

Final arc extinction in all poles Contact touch in all poles

Energizing of closing circuit Contact touch in first poles
Separation arcing contacts in all poles
Start of current in first pole
Energizing of opening release

< Figure 1 > Circuit-breaker without switching resister

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

5. Circuit Breaker Types

5.1 Kind of AC circuit breakers

A comparison of circuit breakers with different arc quenching media is given as
following
a) VCB (Vacuum Circuit-Breaker)
A circuit-breaker in which the contacts open and close within a highly evacuated
envelope. The advantages of the vacuum circuit breaker or contactor are;
▪ Complete isolation of the interrupter from atmosphere and contaminants
▪ Absence of oil minimizes fire risk
▪ Maintenance requirement are low and involve attention to the operating mechanism
▪ Compact metal-enclosed designs are low
b) GCB (Gas Circuit-Breaker)
A circuit-breaker in which the contacts open and close in gas such as SF6 gas. The
advantages of these types of SF6 circuit breaker may be summarized as;
▪ Complete isolation of the interrupter from atmosphere and contaminants
▪ Absence of oil minimizes fire risk
▪ Generally, up to 30 kV the interrupter is considered sealed for life and maintenance
free
▪ The equipment does not require a heavy operating mechanism
c) OCB (Oil Circuit-Breaker)
A circuit-breaker in which the contacts open and close in oil
d) ABB (Air Blast circuit-Breaker)
A circuit-breaker in which the contacts open and close through the compressed air

5.2 Application of circuit breaker types

Circuit breakers shall be applied according to the nominal system voltages as shown
< Table 1 > Application of circuit breaker type
Nominal voltages (kV) Circuit breaker Remark
11 VCB or GCB Indoor MCSG type
30 GCB Indoor GIS type
66 GCB Indoor / outdoor GIS or AIS type

Note: It is recommended that the fixed type switchgear shall be adopted as possible as because
the withdrawal types have the disadvantage such as much changing time, mechanical
contact mismatch and so on

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

6. Primary Side

6.1 Substation type

Substation types and bus-bar schemes of primary side in 30kV, 66 kV substations are
shown in table
< Table 2 > Type and bus-bar in 30 kV, 66 kV substations
Nominal voltage Substation type Bus-bar scheme remark
Double bus and single breaker
Indoor GIS
Single bus and single breaker
Double bus and single breaker
Outdoor GIS
66 kV Single bus and single breaker
Double bus and single breaker
Outdoor AIS
Single bus and single breaker
Indoor AIS Single bus and single breaker
30 kV Indoor GIS Double bus and single breaker
Note: Substation type shall be applied according to circumference conditions

6.2 Rating
a) Rated voltage
The rated voltage indicates the upper limits of the highest voltage of systems for which
the GIS or CB are intended
< Table 3 > Rated voltage
Nominal voltage (kV) Rated voltage (kV) Remark
30 36
66 72.5

b) Rated insulation level

The rated insulation levels of the 66 kV GIS or CB are given as shown bellow
< Table 4 > Rated insulation levels
Power-frequency withstand Lightning impulse withstand
Rated voltage voltage (kV, rms) voltage (kV, peak)
(kV, rms) Across the Across the
Common value Common value
isolating distance isolating distance
36 70 80 170 195
72.5 140 160 325 375

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

Note:
1) Test voltage shall be raised to the test value and maintained for 1 min
2) Tests shall be performed with voltages of both polarities using the standard lightning
impulse 1.2/50 μs according to IEC 60060-1

c) Rated frequency
The standard value for the rated frequency is 50 Hz

d) Rated normal current

The rated normal current is the rms value of the GIS or CB which the circuit breaker
shall be able to carry continuously without deterioration at its rated frequency, voltage,
with a temperature rise not exceeding the values specified in IEC 60694

e) Rated short-time withstand current

The rms value of the current which the GIS or CB can carry in the closed position
during a specified short-time (2s), the standard value shall be equal to the short-circuit
rating assigned the circuit breaker

f) Rated peak withstand current

The peak current associated with the first major loop of the rated short-time withstand
current which the GIS or CB can carry in the closed position. For a rated frequency of
50 Hz and bellow it is equal to 2.5 times the rated short-time withstand current
< Table 5 > Normal current, short-time withstand current and peak current
Rated voltages Rated normal Rated short-time withstand Rated peak withstand
[kV] current [A] current [kA, rms] current [kA, peak]
36 2000, (630) 31.5 80
72.5 2,000, (400) 31.5 80
Note: ( ) power transformer bay

g) Rated duration of short-circuit

The intervals of time for which the GIS or CB can carry in the closed position, a
current equal to its rated short-time withstand current. The standard values of rated
duration of short-circuit is 2s

h) Rated supply voltage for control circuit

The relative tolerance of AC and DC power supply in normal duty measured at the

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

input of the auxiliary equipment is 85% to 110%

< Table 6 > DC, AC voltage for control
DC voltage (V) AC 3Ø 4W / 1Ø 2W system (V)
110 400 / 230

i) Rated operating sequence

The rated operating sequence means successive operating conditions when the CB is
closed and opened more than 1~2 times. For rapid auto-re-closing, the operating
sequence is following below

O – 0.3s – CO – 3min - O

j) Rated break time

The rated break time is defined as the limit of the breaking time, under all ratings and
regulations of circuit conditions, when the circuit breaker opens the rated short-time
withstand current according to the rated operating sequence. The break time should not
exceed the rated break time when the circuit breaker opens more than 30% of the rated
short-circuit withstand current under the rated voltage
< Table 7 > Rated break time
Rated voltage (kV) Rated break time (cycle) Remark
36 3
72.5 3

6.3 GIS Type switchgear

6.3.1 Design
GIS shall be designed so that normal service, inspection and maintenance operation,
earth of connected cables, and the elimination of dangerous electrostatic charges can be
carried out safely including the checking of phase sequence after installation and extension.
Also, all components of the same rating and construction which may need to be replaced
shall be interchangeable.
a) Component
GIS shall be composed with CB, DS, ES, bus, CT, VT, bushing and surge arrester (LA),
all component shall be included in enclosure

b) Earthing

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

The frame of each device of GIS shall be provided with a reliable earth terminal having
a clamping screw or bolt for connection to an earth conductor suitable for specified
fault conditions
▪ Main circuit
To ensure safety during maintenance work, all parts of the main circuit to which
access is required or provided shall be capable of being earthed. Also earth may be
made by earth switches with a making capacity equal to the rated peak withstand
current, if there is still a possibility that the circuit connected is live (e.g. line earth
switch)
▪ Enclosure
The enclosures shall be connected to earth. All metal parts which do not belong to a
main or an auxiliary circuit shall be earthed. For the interconnection of enclosures,
frames and so forth, fastening is acceptable for providing electrical continuity.

c) Gas monitoring
The gas density or temperature compensated gas pressure in each compartment shall
be continuously monitored. The monitoring device shall be provide at least two sets of
alarm levels for pressure or density (alarm and minimum functional pressure or
density)

d) Interlocking
Apparatus installed in main circuit, which are used for ensuring isolating distance
during maintenance work, shall be provided with locking facilities to prevent closing.
Also, Earth switches shall be provided with locking facilities to avoid opening, and
earth switches should be interlocked with the associated DS.

e) Enclosure
The enclosure shall be capable of withstanding the normal and transient pressures to
which it is subjected in service.

6.3.2 DS and ES
The ratings and insulation levels for DS and ES comply with the < table 4>, <table 5>

6.3.3 Bus
The main bus shall be formed as double bus or single bus, and each phase for bus
composition shall be accommodated in one enclosure. Outgoing and branch buses shall

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

be applicable to manufacturer’s specification unless the user requests for special

specifications

6.3.4 CT
The insulation methods of CT applying to GIS shall be applicable to gas type CT or mold
type CT. CT shall be suitable for GIS structure, also, characteristics and ratings comply
with the relevant specification

6.3.5 PT
The insulation methods of PT applying to GIS shall be applicable to gas type PT or mold
type PT

6.3.6 The others

a) SF6 GAS
Specification of SF6 gas using the insulation medium in GIS complies with IEC 60376.
A gas compartment in GIS shall be divided up to pursue a convenience about the
management of gas, minimize the faults range when the fault or extension of GIS
occurs. Also, limit switches to monitoring the pressure condition and gas pressure
gauges shall be settled at suitable places to supervise and check

b) Arrangement of GIS
GIS shall be arranged considering the follow items
▪ Connection of relevant facilities such as the outgoing feeders, power transformers
and so on
▪ Final scale of substation and the plan for extension
▪ The operation, inspection and check, maintenance work of substation

7. Secondary Side

7.1 Type
Substation types and bus-bar of secondary side in 30kV, 66 kV substations are shown in
below table
< Table 8 > Substation type and bus-bar for secondary side
Nominal voltage Substation type Bus-bar scheme remark
Double bus and single breaker
11 kV Indoor MCSG
Single bus and single breaker

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

Note: Bus-bar type shall be applied according to circumference conditions

7.2 Design
MCSG shall be designed so that normal service, inspection and maintenance operations,
determination of the energized or de-energized state of the CB can be carried out safely.
Also, all removable parts and components of the same type and rating shall be
mechanically and electrically interchangeable
a) Earth
The earth circuit is normally designed for a single short-circuit withstand.
▪ Main circuit
To ensure personnel protection during maintenance work, all parts of the main circuit
to which access is required or provided shall be capable of being earthed prior to
becoming accessible
▪ Enclosure
Each functional unit shall be connected to earth conductor. All the metallic parts
intended to be earthed and not belonging to a main or auxiliary circuit shall also be
connected to the earth conductor directly or through metallic structural parts. Also, the
interconnection between the adjacent units shall be capable of carrying the rated
short-time and peak withstand current for the earth circuit
▪ Removable parts
The normally earthed metallic parts of a removable part shall remain connected to
earth in the test and disconnected position and in any position. On insertion, the
normally earthed metallic parts of a removable part shall be connected to earth prior
to the making of the contacts of the fixed and removable parts of the main circuit.

b) Stored energy operation

A switching device arranged for stored energy operation shall be capable of making
and breaking its rated short-circuit current

c) Interlocking
Interlocks between different components of the equipment should be equipped for
protections and convenience of operation
▪ The withdrawal or engagement of a CB, switch or contactor shall be prevented
unless it is in the open position
▪ Also, the interlock shall prevent the closing of CB, switch or contactor in the service
position unless any auxiliary circuits associated with the automatic opening of these

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

devices are connected.

d) Enclosure
Enclosure shall be metallic and HV parts are completely enclosed by metallic partitions
or shutters intended to be earthed. Also, the enclosure shall provide at least the degree
of protection IP 2X, according to IEC 60694.

e) Compartment
A compartment shall be designated by the main component therein, for example, CB
compartment, bus-bar compartment, cable compartment and so on.

7.3 Rating
a) Rated voltage
The rated voltage indicates the upper limits of the highest voltage of systems for which
circuit breaker is intended
< Table 9 > Rated voltage
Nominal voltage (kV) Rated voltage (kV) Remark
11 12 Indoor MCSG type

b) Rated insulation level

The rated insulation levels of the 11 kV MCSG are given as shown bellow
< Table 10 > Rated insulation levels
Power-frequency withstand Lightning impulse withstand
Rated voltage voltage (kV, rms), voltage (kV, peak)
kV, rms) Across the Across the
Common value Common value
isolating distance isolating distance
12 28 32 75 85
Note:
1) Test voltage shall be raised to the test value and maintained for 1 min
2) Tests shall be performed with voltages of both polarities using the standard lightning impulse
1.2/50 μs according to IEC 60060-1

c) Rated frequency
The standard values for the rated frequency is 50 Hz

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

d) Rated normal current

The rated normal current is the rms value of the current which the CB shall be able to
carry continuously without deterioration at its rated frequency, voltage, with a
temperature rise not exceeding the values specified in IEC 60694

e) Rated short-time withstand current

The rms value of the current which the CB can carry in the closed position during a
specified short-time (2s), the standard value shall be equal to the short-circuit rating
assigned the CB

f) Rated peak withstand current

The peak current associated with the first major loop of the rated short-time withstand
current which the CB can carry in the closed position. For a rated frequency of 50 Hz
and bellow it is equal to 2.5 times the rated short-time withstand current
< Table 11 > Normal current, short-time withstand current and peak current
Rated voltages Rated normal Rated short-time withstand Rated peak withstand
[kV] current [A] current [kA, rms], current [kA, peak]
12 1600, (630) 25 63
Note: ( ) 11 kV feeder bay

g) Rated duration of short-circuit

The intervals of time for which CB can carry in the closed position, a current equal to
its rated short-time withstand current. The standard values of rated duration of short-
circuit is 2s

h) Rated supply voltage for control circuit

The relative tolerance of AC and DC power supply in normal duty measured at the
input of the auxiliary equipment is 85% to 110%
< Table 12 > DC, AC voltage for control
DC voltage (V) AC 3Ø 4W / 1Ø 2W system (V)
110 400 / 230

k) Rated operating sequence

The rated operating sequence means successive operating conditions when the CB is
closed and opened more than 1~2 times. For rapid auto-re-closing, the operating

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

sequence is following below

O – 0.3s – CO – 3min - O

l) Rated break time

The rated break time is defined as the limit of the breaking time, under all ratings and
regulations of circuit conditions, when the CB opens the rated short-time withstand
current according to the rated operating sequence. The break time should not exceed
the rated break time when the CB opens more than 30% of the rated short-circuit
withstand current under the rated voltage

< Table 13 > Rated break time

Rated voltage (kV) Rated break time (cycle) Remark
12 5

8. Nameplates
a) Switchgear and their operation devices shall be provided with nameplates which
contain the necessary information. And for outdoor switchgear, the nameplates and
their fixings shall be weatherproof and corrosion-proof. Also, technical characteristics
on nameplates and in documents which are common to several kinds of high voltage
switchgear shall be represented by the same symbols. Rated characteristics to be given
all CB
▪ Rated voltage
▪ Rated insulation level
▪ Rated frequency
▪ Rated normal current
▪ Rated short-time withstand current
▪ Rated peak withstand current
▪ Rated duration of short-circuit
▪ Rated supply voltage of closing and opening devices and of auxiliary circuits
▪ Rated pressure of compressed gas supply and/or of hydraulic supply for operation,
interruption and insulation, as applicable
▪ Rated short-circuit breaking current
▪ Rated short-circuit making current
▪ Rated operating sequence

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

b) Rated characteristics to be given in the specific cases indicated below

▪ Characteristics for short-line faults related to the rated short-circuit breaking current,
for CB designed for direct connection to overhead transmission lines and rated at 52
kV and above and at more than 12.5 kA rated short-circuit breaking current
▪ Rated line-charging breaking current, for three-pole CB intended for switching over-
head transmission lines (mandatory for circuit-breakers of rated voltages equal to or
greater than 72.5 kV)
▪ Rated cable-charging breaking current, for three-pole CB intended for switching
cables (mandatory for circuit-breakers of rated voltages equal to or less than 52 kV)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

Appendix A: References

IEC 60694 Common specifications for high-voltage switchgear and control-gear

standards
IEC 62271-100 High-voltage switchgear and control-gear
: High-voltage alternating-current circuit-breakers
IEC 62271-102 High voltage switchgear and control-gear–Alternating current dis-
connectors and earthing switches
IEC 60071-1 Insulation Co-Ordination Part 1: Definitions, Principles and Rules
Seventh Edition
IEC 60050-441 International Electro technical Vocabulary Switchgear, control-gear and
fuses
IEC 62271-200 High-voltage switchgear and control-gear
AC metal-enclosed switchgear and control-gear for rated voltages
above 1 kV and up to and including 53 kV
IEC 62271-203 High-voltage switchgear and control-gear
Gas-insulated metal-enclosed switchgear for rated voltages above 52
kV
KEPCO Substation Design Standard,
Transmission and distribution electrical engineering-second edition-by
Dr C.R. Bayliss CEng FIEE

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

Appendix B: Rated normal current calculation

1, Primary side for 66, 30 kV substations

1.1 30 kV Substation
▪ 30 kV Bus and feeder bay
Based on XLPE 630 mm2 × 1C (a 30 kV feeder): 811 A×90 % (Utilization rate) = 730
(A). However, if we assumed the voltage drop by 0.5%, the current is 767A (730×1.05)

However, assuming that an incoming feeder has faults, other feeders will take an
overload during a short time. If we are considering this situation, the rated normal
current of bus and feeder shall be selected having the sufficient margin. Therefore, set
the rated normal current of bus and feeder as 2,000 A

▪ Power transformer bay

Based on 25 MVA: 481 A, therefore, considering the sufficient margin, set the rated
normal current as 630 A

1.2 66 kV Substation
▪ 66 kV Bus and Feeder bay
Based on ACSR 315mm2 (a 66 kV feeder): 1,040 A×90% (Utilization rate) = 936 (A).
However, if we assumed the voltage drop by 0.5%, the current is 1,037A (983×1.05)

Also, assuming that an incoming feeder has faults, other feeders will take an overload
during a short time. If we are considering this situation, the rated normal current of bus
and feeder shall be selected having the sufficient margin. Therefore, set the rated
normal current of bus and feeder as 2,000 A.

▪ Power transformer bay

Based on 25 MVA: 219 A, therefore, considering the sufficient margin, set the rated
normal current as 400 A

2. Secondary side for 66, 30 kV substations

▪ 11 kV MCSG
Based on 25 MVA (power transformer capacity): 1312 A, therefore, considering the
sufficient margin, set the rated normal current of MCSG as 1600 A

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

▪ 11 kV Feeder
Based on XLPE 240mm2 × 3C (an 11 kV feeder): 363 A × 90% (Utilization rate) = 327
(A). However, if we assumed the voltage drop by 0.5%, the current is 343A (327×1.05),
therefore, considering the sufficient margin. Set the rated normal current as 630 A

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

Appendix C: Review of ratings for switchgear

1. Rated voltages
The rated voltage indicates the upper limit of the highest voltage of systems for which
the switchgear is intended. Standard values of rated voltages are given below;

a) Series Ⅰ
3.6 kV – 7.2 kV - 12 kV – 17.5 kV - 24 kV - 36 kV - 52 kV – 72.5 kV - 100 kV - 123
kV - 145 kV - 170 kV – 245 kV

b) Series Ⅱ (Based on the current practice in north America)

4.76 kV – 8.25 kV - 15 kV – 25.8 kV - 38 kV – 48.3 kV - 72.5 kV

2. Rated insulation level

The rated insulation level of switchgear shall be selected from the values given in tables.
In this tables, the withstand voltage values applies at the standardized reference
atmosphere specified in IEC 60071-1. For special service conditions, refer to the relevant
standards
< Table C1 > Rated insulation levels
Rated power-frequency withstand Rated lightning impulse withstand
Rated
voltage (kV, rms) voltage (kV, peak)
voltage
(kV, rms) Across the Across the
Common value Common value
isolating distance isolating distance
60 70
12 28 32
75 85
75 85
17.5 38 45
95 110
95 110
24 50 60
125 145
145 165
36 70 80
170 195
52 95 110 250 290
72.5 140 160 325 375

3. Rated normal and short-time withstand current

The values of rated normal currents and rated short-time withstand current shall be

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

selected from the R 10 series, specified in IEC 60059. The R 10 series comprises the
number 1 – 1.25 – 1.6 – 2 – 2.5 – 3.15 – 4 – 5 – 6.3 – 8 and their products 10n
< Table C2 > Standard current ratings (A)
1 1.25 1.6 2 2.5 3.15 4 5 6.3 8
10 12.5 16 20 25 31.5 40 50 63 80
100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800
1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000
10000 12500 16000 20000 25000 31500 40000 50000 63000 80000
100000 125000 160000 200000
Note:
1. The steps may vary according to the equipment concerned, depending on their use or
properties
2. The selection of the values to be adopted should be considered in each case on its merits and
it may be found that there are good grounds for choosing 1.5 – 3 – 6 – 7.5 instead of 1.6 –
3.15 – 6.3 – 8

4. Rated duration of short circuit

The rated duration of short circuit is the maximum time capable of carrying rated short-
time withstand current without any interruption, the international standards and
applications are shown in the following table.
< Table C3 > Rated duration of short circuit
Thailand / Vietnam KEPCO
IEC ANSI Hydro-Quebec JEC
(550 kV) 345 kV 765 kV
1 sec 1 sec 1 sec 2 sec 1 sec 1 sec 2 sec

As shown in the table, the rated duration of short circuit is generally applied within 3
seconds and represents the mechanical strength of the material in the circuit breaker,
which means that a longer conducting time needs more conductor insulating strength or a
circuit breaker insulating medium

Therefore, the rated duration of short circuit usually decided to be within the limit of
time that experiences no problems in protective coordination

5. Rated operating sequence

a) The rated operating sequence means successive operating conditions when the circuit
breaker is closed and opened more than 1 ~ 2 times. In the IEC, the duty cycle is

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

represented as follows:

O - t - CO - t' - CO
t = 3 min for circuit breakers not intended for rapid auto re-closing
t = 0.3 sec for circuit breakers intended for rapid auto re-closing
t' = 3 min, instead of t' = 3 min, other values t' = 1 min and t' = 15 sec are also used for
circuit breakers intended for rapid auto re-closing

CO - t'' - CO
t'' = 15 sec for circuit breaker not intended for rapid auto-re-closing

O: represents an opening operation

CO: represents a closing operation followed immediately by an opening operation
< Table C4 > Rated operating sequence in KEPCO
25.8 kV 170 kV and 362 kV 800 kV
O-0.3s-CO-15 sec-CO O-0.3s-CO-3 min-CO O-0.3s-CO-1 min-CO

b) Selection of duty cycle

When a fault occurs, the circuit breakers frequently repeat opening and closing
operation in re-closing processes, and must be done without failure. Considering the
rapid auto re-closing and applications, the duty cycle is recommended as shown the
following table
< Table C5 > Rated operating sequence
Rated voltage (kV) Rated operating sequence Remark
12, 36, 72.5 O-0.3s-CO-3min-CO Rapid auto re-closing: 1time

c) Operating performance
A circuit breaker including its operating devices shall be capable of completing its
rated operating sequence, and designed with a trip-free mechanism.

6. Rated break time

a) The rated break time is defined as the limit of the break time, under all the ratings and
regulations of circuit conditions, when the circuit breaker opens the rated short-time
withstand current according to the rated operating sequence and operating conditions

b) The rated break time should not exceed the rated break time when the circuit breaker

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

opens more than 30 % of the rated short-time withstand current under the rated
voltage. For reference, several applications are shown in the following table
< Table C6 > Application of other countries
Rated voltage (kV) KEPCO Japan Thailand
Voltage (kV) 25.8 170 and 362 800 550 550
Rated break time (cycle) 5 3 2 2 2

c) For the break time of circuit breakers, a short break time is favorable with
consideration of the prevention of fault spreading to the power system and the
restriction of electromagnetic inductive disturbance

d) However, considering the economical efficiency, the rated break time recommended
as shown the following table.
< Table C7 > Rated break time
Rated voltage (kV) 12 36 72.5
Rated break time (cycle) 5 3 3

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

Appendix D: Limits of temperature and temperature rise

< Table D1 > Limits of temperature and temperature rise

Temperature rise at ambient
Part, material and dielectric Temperature (°C)
air not exceeding 40 (°C)
1. Contacts
(Bare-cooper or bare-cooper ally)
① In air 75 35
② In SF6 gas 105 65
③ In oil 80 40
(Silver-coated or nickel-coated)
① In air 105 65
② In SF6 gas 105 65
③ In oil 90 50
(Tin-coated)
① In air 90 50
② In SF6 gas 90 50
③ In oil 90 50
2. Connection, bolted or equivalent
(Bare-cooper, bare-cooper alloy or
bare-aluminum alloy)
① In air 95 50
② In SF6 gas 115 75
③ In oil 100 60
(Silver-coated or nickel-coated)
① In air 115 75
② In SF6 gas 115 75
③ In oil 100 60
(Tin-coated)
① In air 105 65
② In SF6 gas 105 65
③ In oil 100 60

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 / 25 Version 1.0
 Switchgear

Temperature rise at
Temperature
Nature of the part, material and dielectric ambient air not
(°C)
exceeding 40 (°C)
3. Terminals for the connection to external
conductors by screws or volts
① Bare 90 50
② Silver, nickel or tin-coated 105 65
4. Oil for oil switching device 90 50
5. Any part of metal or of insulating material
100 60
in contact with oil, except contacts
6. Accessible parts
① Expected to be touched in normal 70 30
operation
② Which need not to be touched in normal 80 40
operation
7. Materials used as insulation and metal
parts in contact with insulation of the
following classes
①Y 90 50
②A 105 65
③E 120 80
④B 130 90
⑤F 155 115
⑥ Enamel: oil base 100 60
synthetic 120 80
⑦H 180 140

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 / 25 Version 1.0
 GDS 5600
Version 1.0: Oct 7, 2007

Substation Auxiliary Power

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Station Power Design ····················································································1
3. AC Station Power ··························································································1
3.1 AC station power source··························································································1
3.1.1 Main station power ························································································1
3.1.2 Emergency station power···············································································2
3.2 Flow chart for AC station power design ··································································2
3.3 Composition of AC station power ···········································································3
3.3.1 General case···································································································3
3.3.2 Special case····································································································3
3.4 Classification of loads and estimation of capacity ···················································4
3.4.1 Kinds of loads for station power ····································································4
3.4.2 Estimation for auxiliary transformer capacity ················································5
3.5 Allocation of loads ··································································································6
3.6 Auxiliary transformer ······························································································6
3.7 Control and protection·····························································································8
3.7.1 Control and measuring···················································································8
3.7.2 Supervision ····································································································8
3.7.3 Protection·······································································································8
4. DC Power ·······································································································9
4.1 General····················································································································9
4.2 DC system composition·························································································10
4.2.1 General case·································································································10
4.2.2 Special case··································································································10
4.3 Supervision············································································································ 11
4.4 Protection of DC power circuit·············································································· 11
4.5 The others··············································································································12

ii
5. Design of Control Cable ·············································································12
5.1 Rated voltage·········································································································12
5.2 Materials ···············································································································12
5.3 Size························································································································13
5.4 Cable routes and wiring·························································································13

iii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Example of the classification of loads·························································· 6

< Table 2 > Rated power of auxiliary transformer ·························································· 7

iv
 LIST OF FIGURES

< Figure 1 > Flow chart for station power design ··························································· 2
< Figure 2 > Composition of station power in general substations ································· 3
< Figure 3 > Composition of station power in important substations······························ 4
< Figure 4 > Composition of DC power ······································································· 10
< Figure 5 > DC system composition in general substations········································· 10
< Figure 6 > DC system composition in important substations····································· 11

v
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ··········································································································· 14
B Example of aux transformer capacity estimation ················································ 15
C Example of control cable design ········································································ 18

vi
 Substation Auxiliary Power

1. Scope

This standard is applicable to selection of the substation auxiliary power supplies

including the AC station power, DC power and design of control cable for the new 66 kV,
30 kV substations

2. Station Power Design

The station power is a basic and important facility for equipment operation and control
in the substation. An interruption of the station power causes a big problem in substation
operation and its importance becomes higher in large capacity substations especially.
Therefore, equipping appropriate station power facilities in accordance with scale and
importance of the substation is necessary

In general, the station power is designed considering its maximum load according to
the extension and master plan of the substation. General considerations of station power
design are as follows:
▪ Dual system capable of transfer to each system in the event of a fault
▪ Simplification to reduce possibility of fault or interruption
▪ Convenience of operation and maintenance

3. AC Station Power

3.1 AC station power source

The AC station power source for the 66, 30 kV substations shall be possible formed by
two methods as follows:
▪ From the 11 kV bus through the dedicated auxiliary transformers
▪ From the dedicated emergency generators

3.1.1 Main station power

Among the above methods, the source from the 11 kV bus is the most stable and
economical. Therefore, it is recommended that the station power is formed from the 11 kV
bus through the dedicated auxiliary transformers and in dual considering the importance of
station power

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

3.1.2 Emergency station power

It is important to supply station power without any interruption in important substations
especially. Supposing that all power transformers are shut down in a substation, it is
impossible to supply station power because the station power source is all out. To prevent
these kinds of accidents, emergency power from another source shall be prepared. In
general, feeder line and diesel generator are adopted as an emergency power source in
important substations
a) Feeder line
The 11 kV feeder lines shall be applicable to emergency power, which are adjacent to
both of the substations. On the other hand, the emergency power shall be supplied in
substation, the distance from the nearest substation. However, this method is non-
economical because new 11 kV feeder line need to be constructed for exclusive use
only for an emergency power source

b) Diesel generator
If the diesel generators are used for emergency station power instead of the 11 kV
feeder lines, the diesel generator cost less than a new feeder line

Therefore, the dedicated diesel generator is recommended as an emergency station

power source in consideration of the economical efficiency

3.2 Flow chart for AC station power design

The AC station power shall be designed considering the reliability and its performance
coincided with the substation scale and importance. The flow chart for AC station power
design is as follows

Estimation of main facility scales in accordance with substation final scale

Selection of basic composition methods for primary side

Classification of kinds of loads and load distribution

Determination for required auxiliary transformer capacity

< Figure 1 > Flow chart for station power design

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

3.3 Composition of AC station power

3.3.1 General case

The AC station powers in general substations shall be arranged in dual to improve the
reliability which shall be fed by each 11 kV bus-bars through the dedicated auxiliary
transformers. Therefore, the composition of AC station power shall be constituted as
shown in figure below

△ △
#1M.tr #2M.tr
Y Y

Bus sec’ CB 11 kV Bus

11 kV CB

Feeders Feeders

△ Aux transformer △
Y 11 kV / 230 ~ 400 V Y

Interlocking
ACB1 ACB2

ACB3
(Normal open)

Branch Branch Branch Branch Branch Branch

Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit

< Figure 2 > Composition of station power in general substations

3.3.2 Special case

The AC station powers in important substations shall be arranged in triple to secure the
high reliability which shall be fed by 11 kV bus-bars through the dedicated auxiliary
transformers and emergency generator. Therefore, the composition of AC station power
shall be constituted as shown figure below

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

△ △
#1M.tr #2M.tr
Y Y

11 kV Bus
Bus sec’ CB
11 kV CB

Feeders Feeders
From
Generator
△ Aux transformer △
Y 11 kV / 230 ~ 400 V Y

Interlocking
ACB1 ACB4
ACB2

ACB3
(Normal open)

Branch Branch Branch Branch Branch Branch

Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit

< Figure 3 > Composition of station power in important substations

3.4 Classification of loads and estimation of capacity

3.4.1 Kinds of loads for station power

AC station power shall be settled on the use of control, auxiliary instrument, appurtenant
facility and extra load, and then detailed loads shall be decided in accordance with the
purpose of use, Also, which shall be classified in terms of the degree of importance and the
state of using
a) Classification according to degree of importance
▪ Important loads
▪ General loads
▪ Emergency loads

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

b) Classification according to state of using

▪ Continuousness loads
The loads are required the continuous supply for 24 hours during a day. Therefore,
the demand factor ( α ) shall be applied to 1 (for example: fans for power
transformer)
▪ Continuance loads
Continuance loads mean that the roads shall be operated during a regular time only.
Therefore, the demand factor ( α ) shall be applied to 0.5 ~0.75 (for example: heater,
lighting)
▪ Intermittence loads
Intermittence loads mean that the roads shall be operated during a short time for a
day. Therefore, the demand factor ( α ) shall be applied to 0.25 ~0.4 (for example:
motor, compressor)
▪ Temporariness loads
For the use of construction work, so on

3.4.2 Estimation for auxiliary transformer capacity

a) Auxiliary transformer capacity shall be selected as the enough capacity to supply all
branch circuits

b) Also, when one auxiliary transformer has experienced the fault, another bank shall be
continuously supplying the power without interruption. Formulation is shown below

S = A + α1B + α 2C
S: auxiliary capacity
A: continuousness loads
B: continuance loads α1 : 0.5 ~0.75
C: intermittence loads α 2 : 0.25 ~0.4

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

< Table 1 > Example of the classification of loads

Degree of importance State of using
Kinds of loads
Importance General A B C D
Operation ○
Control

Signal ○ ○ ○
Charger ○ ○
Communication ○ ○

Fans for M.Tr ○

Auxiliary

Motor for oil pump ○ ○ ○

Compressor ○ ○
Heater ○ ○

General lighting ○
Lighting

○
Underground lighting ○ ○
Indoor lighting ○ ○

Motor for water supply and ○

○
Appurtenant

draining
Fire extinguishing ○
○
Ventilation fan ○
○
Ventilation system ○ ○
Temporariness

Construction work ○ ○

Note: Continuousness (A), Continuance (B), Intermittence (C), Temporariness (D)

3.5 Allocation of loads

Allocation of loads for each branch circuits shall be arranged to fit at the arrangement of
main equipment, bus-bar scheme and reliability
▪ Each phase loads shall be arranged to keep the balance
▪ Composition of branch circuits shall be divided according to the purpose or location

3.6 Auxiliary transformer

The auxiliary transformer type shall be applicable to the oil-immersed type or dry type
according to installation place, however, if the auxiliary transformers are installed in indoor,

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

the dry type is recommended to avoid the fire spreading

a) Rated voltage
▪ The nominal primary voltage shall be 11kV and the highest voltage for equipment
shall be 12kV
▪ The nominal secondary voltage shall be 400/230V
▪ The normal voltage ratio of the auxiliary transformers at principal tapping shall be 11
/ 0.4 kV
▪ The HV winding of the transformers shall have five tapping-positions which are the
principal tapping and ± 2.5%×2 tapping positions operated by an off-circuit tapping
switch clearly marked position indicator

b) Connection
The primary winding connection shall be ∆ connection and the secondary winding
connection shall be Y connection. Vector group shall be Dyn11 and the neutral point
shall be earthed

c) Rated power
The rated power of auxiliary transformer shall be chosen within below range
throughout the calculation of loads
< Table 2 > Rated power of auxiliary transformer
Voltage ratio (kV) Rated power (kVA) Remark
11 / 0.4 kV 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 500, 630, 750

d) Cooling
Cooling system of the transformers shall be natural circulation of oil and air (ONAN)

e) Connection type for bushing

The connection types of auxiliary transformer HV bushings shall be plug-in type which
are connected with elbow connector or tee connector. They shall be mounted on the
tank and sealed by cable box. LV bushings including neutral bushing shall be outdoor
porcelain type conforming to IEC 60137. They shall be mounted on tank and sealed
cable box
f) The others
The type of transformer applies the three-phase transformer, and what is not mentioned
about the specification in this standard complies with IEC 60076

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

3.7 Control and protection

3.7.1 Control and measuring

a) Main circuit breaker and switch
The control of the primary main circuit breaker and secondary main switch shall be
remotely controlled at dedicated AC control panel. Also, local operation shall be
possible at any time

b) Branch switches
Switches of branch circuits shall be using the MCCB (Molded Case Circuit Breaker),
also, MCCB control shall be operated at local site directly

c) Interlock
Secondary main switches of auxiliary transformer shall be equipped with the interlock
device to prevent the parallel operation between both auxiliary transformers

d) Measuring
Measuring device for secondary side of auxiliary transformer shall be equipped with
MW, V and A meters

3.7.2 Supervision
a) AC station power outage
The supervision of power outage caused by faults or power failures shall be applying as
shown
▪ Contact of CB or switches
▪ Voltage using the under voltage relay

b) Over loads
The function of over loads supervision shall be added at the ACB of the main circuits,
and alarm device shall be setting at 90% of the rated power to protect the over loads

3.7.3 Protection
a) Primary side
▪ Phase-to-phase faults protection: over current relay
▪ Phase-to-ground faults protection: over current ground relay

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

b) Secondary side
▪ Main circuits
The low-voltage main circuits those are branched from the auxiliary transformer shall
be utilizable ACB considering the importance of AC station power, also, ACB has the
over current protection functions to protect the phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground
faults
▪ Branch circuits
The branch circuits shall be protected as MCCB (Molded Case Circuit Breaker)

4. DC Power
DC power is used to feed essential services such as circuit breaker trip coils and
associated relays, supervisory control, data acquisition and communications equipment.
Therefore, it is important that DC power shall be supplied without an interruption under at
any situations. And the rating voltage of DC power is 110 V

4.1 General
a) Grouping and distribution of DC circuits
DC circuits and feeders shall be grouped appropriately by their use and distributed as
follows so that a DC faults does not cause the DC failure to other facilities,
▪ Grouping by use
- Signaling
- Alarm
- Control
- Protection
- Emergency lighting
- Etc
▪ Grouping by location or facility

- voltage
- Bay
- Transformer bank
- Etc

b) The general rules for composition of DC power

If there is no any special reason, the composition of DC power shall be organized
following as shown in below figure

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

Local control panel

Control or
Battery & DC panel CB
protection
charger
panel

NVR

Alarm Alarm Alarm

< Figure 4 > Composition of DC power

4.2 DC system composition

Economical efficiency and reliability shall first be considered before defining the battery
and battery charger combination to be used for a specific installation. Therefore, the DC
systems shall be composed as single or duplicate combinations in accordance with the
importance of substations

4.2.1 General case

The simple single battery and single charger combination DC system is suitable for
general substations. Therefore, the DC system composition in general substations shall be
constituted as shown

DC Distribution board

Charger
∼ Loads
AC Input ▷
3Ø 400 V / 1Ø 230V

Battery

< Figure 5 > DC system composition in general substations

4.2.2 Special case

For the larger and important substations, the double battery and double charger

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

combinations is usually chosen for DC system. Therefore, the DC system composition in

general substations shall be constituted as shown

Battery Battery

Charger Charger
∼ ∼

AC Input
3Ø 400 V / 1Ø 230V

Interlock
▽ ▽

DC Distribution board

Loads

< Figure 6 > DC system composition in important substations

4.3 Supervision
The supervision device of DC power including the earth alarm, DC power cut,
disconnection of fuse shall be arranged at following places to give a notice to operators
▪ Battery and battery charger
▪ DC power circuits of main control boards or protective relay boards
▪ DC power circuits of CB
▪ The others

4.4 Protection of DC power circuit

MCCB and DC ground detection relay shall be installed for the protection of DC power
circuits
▪ MCCB for the protection against the over current and short circuit faults
▪ DC ground detection relay for the detection of the DC circuit ground, they are
equipped at all of the branch feeders in the DC panel

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

4.5 The others

Though the site survey of some exiting substations, DC voltages of 48 V, 100 V and 110
V were found, they need to be unified for more efficient maintenance. Therefore, 110 V is
recommended for the standard in accordance with the current trend

5. Design of Control Cable

5.1 Rated voltage

A wide range of cables exits for a multitude of specific applications. Control cables are
usually multi-core 450 / 750 V PVC insulated copper conductor types laid in cable tray
from the substation control building to the switchgear

Such cables are described by the individual conductor cross-sectional area (㎟) together
with the number of individual standards and standard diameter (mm) making up the
conductor core

The rated voltage is expressed by the combination of two values U 0 / U , expressed in

volts. U 0 is being the rms value between any insulated conductor and "earth" (metal
covering of the cable or the surrounding medium)

U is being the rms. value between any two-phase conductors of a multi-core cable or of
a system of single-core cables

In an alternating current system, the rated voltage of a cable shall be at least equal to the
nominal voltage of the system for which it is intended, this condition applies both to the
value U 0 and to the value U

In a direct current system, the nominal voltage of the system shall be not higher than 1.5
times the rated voltage of the cable

Generally, the operating voltage of a system may permanently exceed the nominal
voltage of such a system by 10 %. A cable can be used at a 10 % higher operating voltage
than its rated voltage if the latter is at least equal to the nominal voltage of the system

5.2 Materials
Control cable should have an insulation layer and a sheath made of flame retardant PVC

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

respectively. And a copper tape shield with a drain wire that will be grounded

5.3 Size
Care must be taken to ensure the adequate cable conductor cross-sectional area when
selecting sizes for association with substation current relay located some distance from
their associated CT. Important criteria for determining the cross-sectional area of the cables
are as follows:
▪ Capacity and voltage drop should be taken into consideration
▪ Cable should be able to endure the maximum short-circuit current while the circuit
breaker clears the fault
▪ The total burden of cables and meters (or relays) does not exceed the rated burden of
the instrument transformer
▪ The cross-sectional area is not less than 2.5 mm2 even if it satisfies the above three
conditions

5.4 Cable routes and wiring

Each and every cable should be wired separately for each use as follows:
▪ AC or DC power
▪ CT or PT
▪ Control cable
▪ The others (e.g. lighting)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

Appendix A: References

KEPCO Substation Design Standard, AC station power

KEPCO Distribution Design Standard
IEC 60076-1 Power transformer – part 1 general
IEC 60076-2 Power transformer – part 2 temperature rise
IEC 60076-3 Power transformer – part 3 insulation level and dielectric tests and
external clearance in air
IEC 60076-4 Power transformer – part 4 guide to lightning impulse and switching
impulse testing
IEC 60076-5 Power transformer – part 5 ability to withstand short circuit
IEC 60076-8 Power transformer – part 8 power transformer application guide
IEC 60038 IEC standard voltages
IEC 600228 Conductors of insulated cables
IEC 600227 Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and including
450/750 V
Transmission and distribution electrical engineering-second edition,
By Dr C.R Bayliss CEng FIEE-chapter 12

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

Appendix B: Example of aux transformer capacity estimation

1. Classification of loads (assumed)

a) Classification and calculation of loads about the AC station power is designed
considering its maximum load according to the extension and master plan of the
substation

b) Since the appurtenant facility in each substations shall be different, calculation of

loads about each substations shall be revised in stage of detail design

1.1. Continuousness loads

< Table B1 > Continuousness loads in substation
Loads Capacity (kW) Remark
Power transformer
ULTC 3.4 1.7kVA×2 bank
Fan 3 1.5kVA×2 bank
The others 2
Importance

Communications equipment 5
Battery charger 20
Lighting in indoor
Control room 2
Relay room 2
The others 1
Subtotal 38.4
Lighting
Communications room 1
General

Battery room 1
Aisle and the others 1
Ventilation system 5
Subtotal 8
Total 46.4

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

1.2. Continuance loads

< Table B2 > Continuance loads in substation
Loads Capacity (kW) Remark
Lighting
Importance

Security light 5
Lighting for switchyard 6
Subtotal 11
Heater for equipment
66, 30 kV GIS panel 5
11 kV MCSG panel 5
General

Power transformer control panel 0.5

Switchboard 3
Air conditioning and heating system 10
Subtotal 23.5
Total 34.5

1.3. Intermittence loads

< Table B3 > Intermittence loads in substation
Loads Capacity (kW) Remark
GIS and MCSG
Compressor 8 1kVA×8bay
Importance

Motor 7.5 0.5 kVA×15bay

Water and drainage 15
Water pump for fire extinguishing 5
Subtotal 15.5

For construction work 20

General

The others 10

Subtotal 30
Total 45.5
Note: The loads are indicating as the kW unit shall be changed as kVA

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

2. Calculation of auxiliary transformer capacity

2.1. Formula
(P × α )
S =∑
cosθ

S: Auxiliary transformer capacity (kVA)

P : Each loads (kW)
α : Demand factor
cos θ : applies 0.9

2.1. Capacity calculation

S = (46.4 × 1.0 + 34.5 × 0.5 + 45.5 ×0.25) / 0.9 = 83.361
Therefore, The 100 kVA transformer shall be applicable

2.3. Review of transformer type

Auxiliary transformers shall be applicable to the composition as single phase type × 3 ea
or three phase type × 1ea, advantages and disadvantages about each type are shown below
< Table B4 > Comparison of compositions
Item 1Ø × 3 3Ø × 1 Remark
Required area Large Reduced area
Construction cost A little high Cheap
Application
Flexible -
(when the faults occur)
Composition of circuits Complicate Simple

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

Appendix C: Example of control cable design

1. General design criteria

The following factors shall be considered in the design of cables
a) The cross-sectional area of the conductors chosen should be of the optimum size to
carry the specified load current or short circuit short term without overheating and
should be within the required limits for voltage drop

b) The insulation applied to the cable shall be adequate for continuous operation at the
specified working voltage with a high degree of thermal stability, safety and reliability

c) All materials used in the construction shall be carefully selected in order to ensure a
high level of chemical and physical stability throughout the life of the cable in the
selected environment

d) The cable must be mechanically strong and sufficiently flexible to withstand the re-
drumming operations in the manufacturer’s works, handling during transport or when
the cable is installed by the burial, in trenches, pulled into ducts or laid on the cable
racks

e) Adequate external mechanical and chemical protection shall be applied to the

insulation and metal or outer sheathing to enable it to withstand the required
environmental service conditions

2. Type of cables and materials

After voltage selection, cables tend to be specified by describing the materials and their
properties from the phase conductors to the outer covering

Manufacturers shall provide a detail drawing showing a cross-section through the cable
and the relevant technical parameters and guarantees associated with design

Copper is still the predominant material in stranded and shaped. Also, solid or stranded,
shaped or segmental aluminum is also open specified on the basis of cost. Aluminum is
also lighter and assists with ease of handling large cables. The each type of cables are
shown in following table

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

< Table C1 > Types of cables

Voltage level Usage Voltage range Insulation
Telephone 50V PVC or PE
LV Control 450 /750 V PVC
Solid dielectric 450 / 750 V PVC, XLPE, EPR
MI or mind 450 / 750 V Paper
Fire resistant / retardant 450 and 750V Mineral, silicone rubber,
LSF
or 450 / 750 V LSOH

Solid dielectric 3 kV to 7 kV PVC, PE, XLPE, EPR

MV MI or mind 3 kV to 7 kV Paper
Solid dielectric 10 kV to 150 kV XLPE, EPR

MIND 10 kV to 36 kV Paper
HV Oil filled, gas pressure 80 kV to 150 kV XLPE, Paper
Gas insulated ducts 10 kV to 150 kV SF6

Oil filled 150 kV to 300 kV Paper, XLPE

VHV Gas insulated ducts 150 kV to 300 kV SF6

Oil filled Above 300 kV Paper, XLPE

EHV Gas insulated ducts Above 300 kV SF6

3. Selection of cable size

3.1. CT circuits
Cross-sectional area of each CT circuits is not less than 4 mm2 considering the
mechanical solidity. Also, cross-sectional area of each CT circuits shall be selected to
satisfy as below

Rated CT burden ≥ ( Meter and Re lay burden) + Control cable burden

However, CT burden should be recalculated comply with the using CT tap on the CT
with multi-tap because rated CT burden just means the figure at the maximum tap position

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

Example) this data assumed

CT burden: 100 VA
CT Ratio: 2000, 1200, 600 / 5A
Relay burden: 40 VA
Metering burden: 10 VA
CT tap: using 1200 / 5 A
Connection: 3Ø 4W (Y connection)
Distance between CT and control pnl: 100 m
⇒ CT burden: 100 VA ×1200/2000 = 60 VA
⇒ Limit of cable burden: 60 VA – (40 VA + 10 VA) = 10 VA
⇒ In case of 10 VA, maximum one way length limit value
4 mm2: 86 m
6 mm2: 129 m
Therefore, select the 6 mm2 cable

Therefore, cross-sectional area of each CT circuits in case of rated secondary current

5A shall be selected as shown in table according to maximum one way length limits of
CT circuits
< Table C2 > Maximum one way length limits of CT circuits [m]
Connection 1Ø 2W 3Ø 3W (V connection)
Cable burden (VA)
5 10 15 20 25 30 5 10 15 20 25 30
Cable size (mm2)
4 21 43 65 86 108 130 25 50 75 100 125 150
6 32 64 97 129 162 194 37 74 112 149 187 224
10 54 109 163 218 273 327 63 126 189 252 315 378
16 86 173 290 347 434 521 100 200 301 401 502 602
25 137 275 412 550 687 825 158 317 476 635 794 953
35 190 381 572 763 954 - 220 440 661 881 - -

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

Connection 3Ø 3W (△ connection) 3Ø 4W (Y connection)

Cable burden
(VA)
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
Cable size
(mm2)
4 14 28 43 57 72 86 101 43 86 130 173 216 260 303

6 21 43 64 86 108 129 151 64 129 194 259 324 389 454

10 36 72 109 145 182 218 255 109 218 327 437 546 655 765

16 57 115 173 231 289 347 405 173 347 521 695 869 - -

25 91 183 275 366 458 550 641 275 550 825 - - - -

35 127 254 381 508 636 763 890 381 763 - - - - -

Note:
1. Secondary current: 5A
2. Electric resistance of control cable: based on < table 13 >

9 Formulas to calculate the one way electric resistance limits

U 1
1Ø 2W R= ×
I2 2
U 1
3Ø 3W R= 2
× (V connection)
I 3
U 1
R = 2 × (△ connection)
I 3
U
3Ø 4W R = 2 (Y connection)
I
R: electric resistances of each cable
U: cable burden

9 Example of calculation (In case of 3Ø 4W)

U
R= (I = 5 A, U = 5 VA) = 0.2 [Ω]
I2
In case of 4 [mm2], 1 [km]: 4.61 [Ω] = X [km]: 0.2 [Ω], Therefore, X = 0.043 [km]

3.2. VT circuits
Cross-sectional area of each VT circuits is not less than 4 ㎟, however, if there is no
problem in the mechanical solidity, 2.5 ㎟ shall be applicable. Generally, the maximum
voltage drop in VT circuits is not more than 1%

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

Therefore, cross-sectional area of each VT circuits shall be selected as shown in table

according to maximum one way length limits of VT circuits
< Table C3 > Maximum one way length limits of VT circuits [m]
Connection 1Ø 2W 3Ø 3W (V connection)
Burden per a phase (VA)
50 100 150 200 250 50 100 150 200 250
Cable size (mm2)
2.5 163 81 54 40 32 188 94 62 47 37
4 262 131 87 65 52 303 151 101 75 60
6 392 196 130 98 78 453 226 151 113 90
10 661 330 220 165 132 763 381 254 190 152
16 - 526 350 263 210 - 607 404 303 242
25 - 832 554 416 332 - 960 640 480 384

Connection 3Ø 3W (△ connection) 3Ø 4W (Y connection)

Burden per a phase
(VA) 50 100 150 200 250 50 100 150 200 250 300
Cable size (mm2)
326 163 108 81 65 54
2.5 108 54 36 27 21
(108) (54) (36) (27) (21) (18)
524 262 174 131 104 87
4 174 87 58 43 34
(174) (87) (58) (43) (34) (29)
785 392 261 196 157 130
6 261 130 87 65 52
(261) (130) (87) (65) (52) (43)
- 661 440 330 264 220
10 440 220 146 110 88
(440) (220) (146) (110) (88) (73)
- - 701 526 420 350
16 701 350 233 175 140
(701) (350) (233) (175) (140) (116)
- - 832 665 554
25 - 554 369 277 221 -
(554) (369) (277) (221) (184)
Note:
1) ( ): based on 110 V / 3 tap
2) Electric resistance of control cable: based on < table 13 >

9 Formulas to calculate the one way electric resistance limits in case of burden U per a
phase

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

110 1
1Ø 2W R= × × 1. 1
U 2
110 1
3Ø 3W R= × × 1.1 (V connection)
U 3
110 1
R= × × 1.1 (△ connection)
U 3
110
3Ø 4W R= × 1.1
U
110 1
R= × × 1.1 (Using 110/ 3 tap)
U 3
R: electric resistances of each cable
U: cable burden

9 Example of calculation (In case of 3Ø 4W, 110V tap)

110
R= × 1.1 (U = 50 VA) = 2.42 [Ω]
U
In case of 4 [mm2], 1 [km]: 4.61 [Ω] = X [km]: 2.42 [Ω]. Therefore, X = 0.524 [km]

3.3. DC control circuits

Cross-sectional area of each DC control circuits is not less than 4 mm2, however, if there
is no problem in the mechanical solidity, 2.5 mm2 shall be applicable. Generally, the
maximum voltage drop in DC control circuits is not more than 10%
< Table C4 > Maximum one way length limits of DC control circuits [m]
DC Cable size [mm2] Length limits [one way]
power Control current [A] 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50
1 742 - - - - - - -
5 148 238 357 601 - - - -
10 74 119 178 300 478 756 - -
20 37 59 89 150 239 378 524 -
30 24 39 59 100 159 252 349 473
110 V
50 - 23 35 60 95 151 209 284
75 - - 23 40 63 100 139 189
100 - - - - 47 75 104 142
125 - - - - - 60 83 113
150 - - - - - - 69 94
Note: Electric resistance of control cable: based on < table 13 >

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

Therefore, cross-sectional area of each DC control circuits shall be selected as shown in

table according to maximum one way length limits of DC control circuits

9 Example of calculation
a) Premised conditions

◊ DC power voltage: 110 V

◊ Range of control: 110 V ± 10 %

◊ Voltage drop: 11 V
◊ Current of circuit breaker for close or trip: 10A

b) Calculation of length limits

2
▪ In case of 2.5 mm

11(V )
L= = 74 [m]
7.41
2× (Ω / m) × 10( A)
1000
▪ In case of 4 mm2
11(V )
L= = 119 [m]
4.61
2× (Ω / m) × 10( A)
1000
▪ In case of 6 mm2
11(V )
L= = 178 [m]
3.08
2× (Ω / m) × 10( A)
1000

3.4. AC control circuits

Cross-sectional area of each AC control circuits is not less than 4 ㎟, however, if there
is no problem in the mechanical solidity, 2.5 ㎟ shall be applicable. Generally, the
maximum voltage drop in AC control circuits is not more than 10%

Therefore, cross-sectional area of each AC control circuits shall be selected as shown in

table according to maximum one way length limits of AC control circuits

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

< Table C5 > Maximum one way length limits of AC control circuits [m]
Cable size [mm2] Length limits [one way]
AC power [V]
Control current [A] 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50
5 310 498 746 - - - - -
10 155 249 373 628 - - - -
20 77 124 186 314 500 790 - -
30 - 83 124 209 333 527 731 -
Single-phase
40 - - 93 157 250 395 548 742
230 (V)
50 - - - 125 200 316 438 594
60 - - - 104 166 263 365 495
70 - - - - 142 225 313 424
80 - - - - 125 197 274 371
Note: Electric resistance of control cable: based on < table 13 >

9 Example of calculation
a) Premised conditions

◊ AC power voltage: single-phase 230 V

◊ Range of control: 230 V ± 10 %

◊ Voltage drop: 23 V
◊ Current of circuit breaker for close or trip: 10A

b) Calculation of length limits

2
▪ In case of 2.5 mm

23(V )
L= = 155 [m]
7.41
2× (Ω / m) × 10( A)
1000
▪ In case of 4 mm2
23(V )
L= = 249 [m]
4.61
2× (Ω / m) × 10( A)
1000
▪ In case of 6 mm2
23(V )
L= = 373 [m]
3.08
2× (Ω / m) × 10( A)
1000

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

< Table C6 > Maximum one way length limits of AC control circuits [m]
Cable size [mm2] Length limits [one way]
AC power [V]
Control current [A] 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50
5 632
10 311 500 749
20 155 250 374 630
30 166 249 420 669
Three-phase
40 187 315 502 794
400 (V)
50 252 401 635 881
60 210 334 529 734 994
70 286 453 629 852
80 251 397 550 745
Note: Electric resistance of control cable: based on < table 13 >

9 Example of calculation
a) Premised conditions

◊ AC power voltage: three-phase 400 V

◊ Range of control: 400 V ± 10 %

◊ Voltage drop: 40 V
◊ Current of circuit breaker for close or trip: 10A

b) Calculation of length limits

2
▪ In case of 2.5 mm

40(V )
L= = 311 [m]
7.41
3× (Ω / m) × 10( A)
1000
▪ In case of 4 mm2
40(V )
L= = 500 [m]
4.61
3× (Ω / m) × 10( A)
1000
▪ In case of 6 mm2
40(V )
L= = 749 [m]
3.08
3× (Ω / m) × 10( A)
1000

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 / 27 Version 1.0
 Substation Auxiliary Power

< Table C7 > Resistances of solid conductors

Maximum resistance of conductor at 20 °C ( Ω / km )
Cross-sectional
Aluminum and
area (mm2) Cooper Metal-coated cooper
aluminum alloy
2.5 7.41 7.56 -
4 4.61 4.70 -
6 3.08 3.11 -
10 1.83 1.84 3.08
16 1.15 1.16 1.91
25 0.727 - 1.20
35 0.524 - 0.868
50 0.387 - 0.641
70 0.268 - 0.443
95 0.193 - 0.320
120 0.153 - 0.253
150 0.124 - 0.206
185 0.101 - 0.164

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 / 27 Version 1.0
 GDS 5700
Version 1.0: Oct 7, 2007

Battery and Battery Charger

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. General ···········································································································1
3. System Voltage Consideration ·····································································1
4. Definitions ······································································································2
5. Nickel-cadmium Battery ··············································································3
5.1 Nickel - cadmium battery technology······································································3
5.2 Designation and marking·························································································4
5.2.1 Cell designation ·····························································································4
5.2.2 Marking ·········································································································5
6. Capacity Selection of Battery and Charger ···············································5
6.1 Defining loads ·········································································································5
6.1.1 Load classifications························································································5
6.1.2 Duty cycle diagram························································································7
6.2 Battery sizing ··········································································································7
6.2.1 Number of battery cells··················································································8
6.2.2 Design margin································································································8
6.2.3 Aging factor ···································································································8
6.2.4 Cell size ·········································································································8
6.3 Battery charger sizing······························································································8
6.3.1 General description ························································································8
6.3.2 Determination of rated output ········································································9
6.3.3 Operation without a connected battery···························································9

ii
 LIST OF FIGURES

< Figure 1 > Diagram of a duty cycle ············································································· 7

iii
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ················································································································· 10
B Example of battery and charger size ······································································· 11
C The supply voltage of closing and opening devices ··············································· 18

iv
 Battery and Battery Charger

1. Scope

This standard is applicable to capacity selections of batteries and battery chargers which
are using the major equipment operation, control devices, emergency power and so on for
the new 66 kV, 30 kV substations.

2. General

All substations require the DC auxiliary power to operate those DC components such as
circuit breaker trip/closing coils and associated relays, supervisory control and data
acquisition (SCADA) and communications equipment.

To ensure that the output voltage and current of the complete system, the battery charger
is compatible with the connected electrical loads, the capacity and number of cells should
be equipped as sufficient capacity to supply the loads which are connected DC systems.
Also, the battery charger is required to ensure that the state of charge of battery is
maintained at an adequate level, without reducing battery life or necessitating undue
maintenance

Cells or batteries shall be designed for service in fixed locations and which are
permanently connected to the load and to the DC power supply. Also, the rated DC system
voltage 110 V and Nickel-Cadmium type is applied which have long life with widely
operating temperature range and smaller volume than the other types.

3. System Voltage Consideration

The nominal voltages of 110, 48, and 24 are generally utilized in substation DC
auxiliary power system. The type, rating, availability and location of the connected
equipment should be used to determine which nominal system voltage is appropriate for a
specific application

A greater than 110 V DC power is typically used to power motors for emergency pumps,
large valve operators, and large inverters. Therefore, 110 V DC power is typically used for
control power for most relay logic circuits and the closing and tripping of switchgear
circuit breakers. Therefore DC 110 V is recommended for the standard DC voltage in
accordance with the current trend

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

4. Definitions

Cell
The basic functional unit consisting of an assembly of electrodes, electrolyte, container,
terminals and usually separators that is a source of electric energy obtained by direct
conversion of chemical energy

Secondary cell
Cell is designed to be electrically recharged and the recharge is accomplished by way of
a reversible chemical reaction

Battery
One or more cells fitted with devices necessary for use

Vented cell
Secondary cell having a cover provided with an opening through which products of
electrolysis and evaporation are allowed to escape freely from the cell to the atmosphere

Nominal voltage
The nominal voltage of a vented nickel-cadmium rechargeable single cell is 1.2 Volts

Rated capacity
The ampere-hour capacity assigned to a storage cell by its manufacturer for a given
discharge rate and time, at a specified electrolyte temperature and specific gravity, to a
given end- of – discharge voltage

Nickel cadmium battery

Secondary battery with an alkaline electrolyte, a positive electrode containing nickel
oxide and a negative electrode of cadmium

Floating charge
Secondary battery whose terminals are permanently connected to a source of constant
voltage sufficient to maintain the battery approximately fully charged, and which is
intended to supply power to an electric circuit, if the normal supply is temporarily
interrupted

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

5. Nickel-cadmium Battery

5.1 Nickel - cadmium battery technology

The batteries are resistant to mechanical and electrical abuse, operate well over a wide
temperature range, and can tolerate frequent shallow and deep discharging.
a) Features
▪ Operation over a temperature range between -20 °C to + 50 °C
▪ Life in excess of 25 years in many applications
▪ Good performance at low temperature
▪ Resistance to high temperature ageing, electrical abuse and shock and vibration

b) Charging in service
The nominal voltage for the nickel-cadmium cell is 1.2 V. The manufacturers of nickel-
cadmium batteries provide charging recommendations for each battery type. General
charging recommendations are shown below;
▪ Continuous parallel operation (example)
9 For two level charge

Float level
= 1.42 ± 0.01 V / Cell for L cells
= 1.40 ± 0.01 V / Cell for M cells and H cells
High level
= 1.47 ~ 1.70 V / Cell for L cells
= 1.45 ~ 1.70 V / Cell for M cells and H cells

9 For single level charge

= 1.43 ~ 1.50 V / Cell

▪ Buffer operation (example)

Where the load exceeds the charging voltage, recommended charging voltage is 1.50
~ 1.60 V/Cell

c) Discharge types
▪ H range
The H range uses very thin plates and is designed for applications where there is a
demand for a relatively high current over short periods, usually less than 30 minutes

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

in durations. The applications can have frequent or infrequent discharges. The range is
typically used in starting and power back-up applications
▪ M range
The M range is designed for applications where the batteries are usually required to
sustain electrical loads for between 30 minutes to 3 hours or for mixed loads which
involves a mixture of high and low discharge rates. The applications can have
frequent or infrequent discharges. The range is typically used in power back-up
applications
▪ L range
The L range has the thickest plates and is designed for applications where the battery
is required to provide a reliable source of energy over relatively long discharge
periods. Normally, the current is relatively low in comparison with the total stored
energy and the discharges are generally infrequent. Typical uses are power back-up
and bulk energy storage.

d) Capacity
The cell can tolerate complete discharge with almost no permanent deterioration of
capacity or life. Depending on the number of cells used, the typical end–of–discharge
voltage (final voltage) in this application may vary from 1.00 – 1.14 V/cell. It is
advisable to use the lowest end-of discharge voltage and the largest possible number of
cells that will satisfy the manufacturer’s recommendations, since this will result in the
most economic battery for the application

e) Gassing
During the last part of charging, the battery is emitting gases (such as oxygen and
hydrogen mixture). However, at normal float-charge the gas evolution is very small,
but some ventilation is necessary

5.2 Designation and marking

5.2.1 Cell designation

a) Vented nickel-cadmium prismatic single cells shall be designated by the letter “K”
followed by a letter L, M, H or X which signifies;
▪ L: low rate of discharge
▪ M: medium rate of discharge
▪ H: high rate of discharge

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

▪ X: very high rate of discharge

b) This group of two letters shall be followed by a group of figures indicative of the rated
capacity of the cell in ampere-hours

Example: KH 185

c) Cells in cases of plastic material shall be designated by the letter “P” after the figures.
For example: KH 185 P

5.2.2 Marking
Each cell or mono-bloc shall carry durable markings giving the following minimum
information;
▪ Type of cell, it is permissible for a manufacturer to use own type designation
▪ Name or identification of manufacturer or supplier
▪ Positive terminal, either a red washer or an intended or raised symbol(Refer to
graphical symbol 5005 of IEC 60417

6. Capacity Selection of Battery and Charger

6.1 Defining loads

The duty cycle imposed on the battery by any of the conditions described herein will
depend on the DC system design and the requirement of the installation. Also, the battery
shall supply the DC power requirements when the following conditions occur
▪ Load on the DC system exceeds the maximum output of the battery charger
▪ Output of the battery charger is interrupted
▪ AC power is lost

6.1.1 Load classifications

The individual DC loads supplied by the battery during the duty cycle shall be classified
as continuous or non-continuous loads. Non-continuous loads lasting 1 min or less are
designated momentary loads. Also, the loads which are impossible to estimate are
designated random loads
a) Continuous loads
Continuous loads are energized throughout the duty cycle. Normally, these loads are
carried by the battery charger and those initiated at the inception of the duty cycle when

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

the AC power is cut off. Typical continuous loads are as follows;

Lighting
Signal lamp
Motors which are operated continuously
Coils which are energized continuously
Fault indicators
Measuring equipment
Communication system
Etc

b) Non-continuous loads
Non-continuous loads are energized only during a portion of the duty cycle. These
loads are may come on at the any time within the duty cycle and may be on for a set
length of time, be removed automatically or by operator action, or continued to the end
of the duty cycle. Typical non-continuous loads are as follows;

Emergency pump motors

Motors for ventilation system
Motor-driven valve operations (stroke time > 1 min)
Fire protection system actuations
Etc

c) Momentary loads
Momentary loads can occur one or more times during the duty cycle but are of short
duration not exceeding 1 min at any occurrence. Although momentary loads may exist
for only a fraction of a second, it is common practice to consider each load will last for
a full minute. Typical momentary loads are as follows;

Start current for motors

Operation current for switches
Motor-driven valve operations (stroke time ≤ 1 min)
Etc

d) Other considerations
The above lists of typical loads are not a full catalog of the DC loads at any one

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

installation. The designer should review each system carefully to be sure all possible
loads and their variations are included.

6.1.2 Duty cycle diagram

A duty cycle diagram showing the total load during the cycle is an aid in the analysis of
the duty cycle. To prepare such a diagram, all loads expected during the cycle are tabulated
along with their anticipated inception and shutdown times. The total time span of the duty
cycle is determined by the requirements of the installation
a) Defined loads
Loads whose inception and shutdown times are known are plotted on the diagram as
they would occur. If the inception time is known, but the shutdown time is indefinite, it
should be assumed that the load will continue through the remainder of the duty cycle

b) Duty cycle example

< Figure 1 > Diagram of a duty cycle

L1 40 A for 3 hours, continuous load;
L2 280 A for the 1st min, momentary load;
L3 60 A from the 1st min through the 120th min, non-continuous load;
L4 100 A from the 30th min through the 120th min, non-continuous load;
L5 80 A from the 30th min through the 60th min, non-continuous load;
L6 80 A for the last minute, momentary load;
L7 100 A for 1 min, random load; (Actually this loads can occur at any time within the
duty cycle. Therefore, the assumption is that they all occur simultaneously)

6.2 Battery sizing

The maximum and minimum allowable system voltages determined the number of cells
in the battery. It has been common practice to use 9-10, 18-20, 36-40, 92-100, or 184-200
cells for system voltages of 12, 24, 48, 110 / 125, or 250 V, respectively. In some cases, it

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

may be desirable to vary from this practice to match the battery more closely to system
voltage limitations

6.2.1 Number of battery cells

When the battery voltage is not allowed to exceed a given maximum system voltage, the
number of cells will be limited by the manufacturer’s recommended cell voltage required
for satisfactory charging

max imum allowable system voltage

Number of cells =
Cell voltage required for satisfactory ch arg ing

6.2.2 Design margin

It is prudent design practice to provide a capacity margin to allow for unforeseen
additions to the DC system, and less-than-optimum operating conditions of the battery due
to improper maintenance, recent discharge, ambient temperature lower than anticipated, or
a combination of these factors. A method of providing this design margin is to add 10-15%
to the cell size determined by calculations.

6.2.3 Aging factor

IEEE Standard recommends that a battery be replaced when its actual performance
drops to 80% of its rated performance because there is little life to be gained by allowing
operation beyond this point. Therefore, to ensure that the battery is capable of meeting its
design loads throughout its service life, the battery’s rated capacity should be at least
125 % of the load expected at the end of its service life.

6.2.4 Cell size

A worksheet has been designed, and may be used to simplify the manual application of
the procedure. Examples of its use will be found in appendix b.

6.3 Battery charger sizing

6.3.1 General description

The substation battery chargers are used to convert AC to DC to charge the substation
batteries and to supply power to DC loads during normal operation.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

6.3.2 Determination of rated output

The substation battery chargers should be sized in accordance with the following
formulas;
1.1 × Ah
I 1 = Lc +
T

I1 is the minimum required charger rated output (in amperes)

Lc is the continuous dc load (in amperes), including future load growth
1.1 is the constant that compensates for the battery losses
Ah is the discharge from the battery measured in ampere-hours (3 hr)
T is the time to recharge the battery to approximately 95% of capacity (10hr)

6.3.3 Operation without a connected battery

For some designs, it may be appropriate to disconnect the battery from the system for
maintenance of the battery. Under this condition, the charger/battery eliminator should be
capable of supplying the load without a battery connected and should be so specified for
these applications.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

Appendix A: References

IEC 60623 Vented nickel-cadmium prismatic rechargeable single cells

IEC 61434 Guide to the designation of current in alkaline secondary cell and battery
standards
IEEE Std 946- Recommended practice for the design of DC auxiliary power system for
1992 generating stations
IEEE Std 1184 Guide for the selection and sizing of batteries for uninterruptible power
-1994 systems
IEEE Std 1115 IEEE Recommended practice for sizing nickel-cadmium batteries for
-2000 stationary applications
IEC 60694 Common specification for high voltage switchgear and control gear
standards
KEPCO Substation Design Standard, Battery and battery charger

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

Appendix B: Example of Battery and Charger Size

1. Scale of facilities (assumed)

▪ 30kV feeders: 6 Feeders
▪ Transformers: 2 Banks
▪ 11kV feeders: 10 Feeders

2. Criteria of reviewing
▪ Nominal voltage for DC power system: 110 V
▪ Range of Usage: control of equipments, signal lamps, emergency lighting

3. Battery specification
▪ Type: Vented nickel-cadmium type
▪ Nominal discharge voltage: 1.20 V
▪ Cell voltage required satisfactory charging: 1.42 V
▪ End-of-discharge voltage: 1.0 V
▪ Correction of Aging factors: 0.8
▪ Recharge time: 10 hr
▪ Battery duty cycle: 3 hr

4. Required number of cells

The DC system voltage limits are from 94 V to 121 V (85 ~ 110%), the manufacturer
recommends a cell voltage of 1.42 V for satisfactory charging. The battery and charger
must remain directly connected to the DC system at all times.

max imum allowable system voltage

Number of cells =
Cell voltage required for satisfactory ch arg ing

121 V
= =85.21, therefore 86 cells
1.42 V / per cell

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

5. Reviewing of loads

< Table B1 > Hypothetical loads table

Loads of each time [A]
No Loads 0-0.5 0.5-30 30-60 60-179 179-180 Remark
min min min min Min
[30kV side]
GIS local
1 9 9 9 9 9 1 A/bay * 9 = 9
PNL
2 T/L pro’ PNL 9 9 9 9 9 1.5 A * 6 F/D = 9
M.Tr pro’
3 3 3 3 3 3 1.5 A * 2 =3
PNL
4 Bus pro’ PNL 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 A * 1PNL = 1.5
5 CB Trip 45 5 A * 9 CB = 45
(Bus fault)
6 CB Close 5
•
•
[11kV side]
7 MCSG PNL 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 0.5 A/bay*13 = 6.5
8 CB Trip 25 5 A * 5 CB = 25
9 CB Close 5
•
•
•
Emergency
9 5 5 5 5 5
lightning
10 etc 5 5 5 5 5

Total 109 39 39 39 49

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

6. Required cell capacity

I (A)
I 1 = 109

I 3 = 49
Discharge
current I 2 = 39

0.5 179 180 Time (min)

< Figure B1 > Battery duty cycle diagram

From the battery duty cycle diagram, we can construct < Table B2 >, which will be of
value in filling in the cell sizing worksheet. The last column shows the capacity removed
for each period. Also, the total ampere-hour capacity removed may be used to determine
the initial cell size for the calculation

<Table B3> shows hypothetical tabular discharge data for the KM medium performance
cell range manufactured by ABC Company. The table gives current values for discharges
started at 25 ℃ and terminated when the average cell voltage reaches 1.00 V

Also, in this example, the total capacity removed is 117.76 Ah and the next larger cell is
KM 130 P. Therefore, the capacity rating factors ( K t ) for the initial calculation are derived
from the data for this cell type.

< Table B2 > Sample cell sizing data

Period Total amperes (A) Duration (min) Capacity removed (Ah)
1 109 0.5 0.91
2 39 178.5 116.03
3 49 1 0.82
Total 117.76

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

< Table B3 > Discharge currents for M range manufactured by ABC Company
[Discharge amperes to 1.00 V/cell after prolonged float charging]
Rated 15 30 60 90 120 180 300 480
Cell type 1s 60s
Ah min min min min min min min min
KM 70P 70 276 188 95.8 74.6 52.4 40.4 33.5 22.9 14.0 8.82
KM 90P 90 354 241 123 95.9 67.3 51.9 43.0 29.4 18.0 11.3
KM 110P 110 433 295 150 117 82.3 63.4 52.6 36.0 22.0 13.9
KM 130P 130 512 349 178 139 97.2 75.0 62.1 42.5 26.0 16.4
KM 145P 145 571 389 198 155 108 83.6 69.3 47.4 29.0 18.3
KM 165P 165 650 442 226 176 123 95.2 78.9 54.0 33.0 20.8
KM 185P 185 728 496 253 197 138 107 88.4 60.5 37.0 23.3
KM 215P 215 782 554 291 228 161 124 103 70.3 43.0 27.1
KM 240P 240 873 619 325 254 180 138 115 78.5 48.0 30.2
KM 285P 285 1036 735 386 302 213 164 136 93.2 57.0 35.9
KM 310P 310 1127 799 419 328 232 179 148 101 62.0 39.1

The K t factor for time t is calculated in the following table by interpolation using the
formula
( K t 2 − K t1 ) × (t 2 − t )
Kt = Kt2 −
(t 2 − t1 )

< Table B4 > Calculation of capacity rating factors ( K t )

Time Time Factor Factor
(1) (2)
Discharge t1 t2 K t1 Kt2
Amperes Amperes Factor K t
time t from from for time for time
for time for time for time t
(min) data data t1 t2
t1 t2
(min) (min) 130 ÷ (1) 130 ÷ (2)
0.5 0.017 1 512 349 0.254 0.373 0.313
1 1 - 349 - 0.373 - 0.373
178.5 120 180 62.1 42.5 2.093 3.059 3.035
180 180 - 42.5 - 3.059 3.059

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

< Figure B2 > Temperature de-rating curves manufactured by ABC Company

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

< Figure B3 > Cell sizing worksheet

7. Rated output of battery charger

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

1.1 × Ah
I 1 = Lc +
T
I1 is the minimum required charger rated output (in amperes)
Lc is the continuous dc load (in amperes), including future load growth; 39A
1.1 is the constant that compensates for the battery losses
Ah is the discharge from the battery measured in ampere-hours (3 hr); 215Ah
T is the time to recharge the battery to approximately 95% of capacity (10hr)

1.1 × 215
I 1 = 39 + = 62.7 A
10
Therefore, the rating of battery charger recommended 80 A.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

Appendix C: The Supply Voltage of Closing and Opening Devices

1. General
The supply voltage of closing and opening devices and auxiliary and control circuits
shall be understood to mean the voltage measured at the circuit terminals of the apparatus
itself during its operation, including, if necessary, the auxiliary resistors or accessories
supplied or required by the manufacturer to be installed in series with it

But not including the conductors for the connection to the electricity supply. It shall be
noted that normal operation of equipment is to be assured when the supply voltage is
within the tolerances described.

2. Tolerances
The relative tolerance of AC and DC power supply in normal duty measured at the input
of the auxiliary equipment (electronic controls, supervision, monitoring and
communication) is 85 % to 110%

For supply voltages less than the minimum stated for power supply, precautions shall be
taken to prevent any damage to electric equipment and / or unsafe operation due to its
unpredictable behavior

3. Rated voltage
The rated supply voltage should be selected from the standard values given in below
table. The values marked with an asterisk are preferred values for electric auxiliary
equipment

< Table D1 > DC voltage

Rated voltage[V]
24
48
60
110 * or 125 *
220 * or 250 *

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 19 Version 1.0
 Battery and Battery Charger

< Table D2 > AC voltage

Three-phase, three-wire Single-phase, three-wire Single-phase, two-wire
or four wire systems systems systems
[V] [V] [V]
- 120 / 240 120
120 / 208 120
(220 / 380) (220)
230 / 400 * 230 *
(240 / 415) (240)
277 / 480 277
347 / 600 347
Note 1 The lower values in the first column of this table are voltages to neutral and
higher values are voltages between phases. The lower value in the second
column is the voltage to neutral and the higher value is the voltage between the
lines
Note 2 The value 230 / 400 V indicated in this table should be, in the future, the only
IEC standard voltage and its adoption is recommended in new systems. The
voltage variations of existing systems at 220 / 380 V and 240 / 415 V should be
brought within the range 230 / 400 ± 10 %. The reduction of this range will
be considered at a later stage of standardization.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 19 Version 1.0
 GDS 5800
Version 1.0: Oct 7, 2007

Substation Earthing

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. General ···········································································································1
3. Definitions ······································································································1
4. Safety Criteria································································································3
5. Standard Earthing Resistance ·····································································4
6. Selection of Conductor··················································································5
6.1 Basic requirement····································································································5
6.2 Selection of connections··························································································5
6.3 Calculation of cross-sectional area ··········································································6

7. Connections to Earth Grid···········································································7

7.1 Objects ····················································································································7
7.2 Connection methods to earth grid············································································8

8. Construction of a Earthing System·····························································8

8.1 Methods of construction work·················································································8
8.2 Methods of connection ····························································································8

9. Earthing of substation fence ········································································9

10. Procedures for Earthing Design ································································9
11. Soil treatment to lower resistivity····························································11

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Standard earthing resistance values······························································ 5

< Table 2 > Value of parameters for different materials ·················································· 6
< Table 3 > Value of parameters for different covering materials···································· 7
< Table 4 > Earth conductor cross-sectional area···························································· 7

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

< Figure 1 > Earthing design procedure block diagram ················································ 11

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ··········································································································· 13
B Explanation of Earthing System Design ···························································· 14
C Example of earth system design ········································································· 19

v
 Substation Earthing

1. Scope

This standard is applicable to earthing design of the new 66 kV, 30 kV substations which
is connected with outdoor or indoor equipment installations, also, this part covers either
conventional or gas-insulated type substations

2. General
The basic intents of a substation earthing system to ensure the safety of human life in
any place are as follows;
▪ The earthing system shall be selected with the suitable impedance to ensure that the
passage of fault currents under normal and fault conditions without exceeding any
operating and equipment limits or affecting continuity of service
▪ It shall be assured that a person or animal in the vicinity of grounded facilities is not
exposed to the danger of critical electric shock during the fault conditions at earthed
facilities.

During typical fault conditions, the flow of current to earth will produce potential
gradients within or around the substation. Unless proper precautions are taken in design,
the maximum potential gradients along the earth’s surface may be of sufficient magnitude
during ground fault conditions to endanger a person in the area.

Moreover, the dangerous voltage may develop between grounded structures or

equipment frames and the nearby earth. Therefore, design of an earthing system shall be
considered the following
▪ Based on earth fault current and duration
▪ The characteristics of the human body
▪ Determine the soil characteristics of the zone of interest
▪ Determine the earthing system
▪ Other factors contribute to an excessive potential gradient
▪ So on

3. Definitions

Bonding conductor
A protective conductor providing equip-potential bonding

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

Earthing
The conductive mass of the earth, whose electric potential at any point is conventionally
taken as zero

Earthing electrode
A conductor or group of conductors in intimate contact with and providing an electrical
connection to earth

Earthing electrode resistance

The resistance of an earthing electrode to earth

Earth potential rise (EPR)

The maximum electrical potential that a substation grounding grid may attain relative to
a distant grounding point assumed to be at the potential of remote earth. This voltage is
equal to the maximum grid current times the grid resistance

Functional earthing
Connection to earth necessary for proper functioning of electrical equipment

Main earthing terminal

The terminal or bar (which is the equip-potential bonding conductor) provided for the
connection of protective conductors and the conductors of functional earthing, if any, to
the means of earthing

Mesh voltage
The maximum touch voltage within a mesh of a ground grid

Neutral conductor
A conductor connected to the neutral point of a system and capable of contributing to the
transmission of electrical energy

PEN conductor
A conductor combining the functions of both protective conductor and neutral conductor

Potential gradient
The potential difference per unit length measured in the direction in which it is

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

maximum value

Protective conductor
A conductor used as a measure of protection against electric shock and intended for
connecting any of the following parts;
▪ Exposed conductive parts
▪ Extraneous conductive parts
▪ Earthed point of the source or an artificial neutral

Touch voltage
The potential difference between a grounded metallic structure and a point on the earth's
surface separated by a distance equal to the normal maximum horizontal reach,
approximately one meter

Transferred voltage
A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage is transferred into or out of the
substation from or to a remote point external to the substation site

Soil resistivity
A factor such that the conduction-current density is equal to the electric field in the soil
divided by the resistivity

Step voltage
The potential difference between two points on the earth's surface, separated by distance
of one pace that will be assumed to be one meter on the direction of maximum potential
gradient

Earthing grid
A system of earthing electrodes consisting of inter-connected connectors buried in the
earth to provide a common earthing for electrical devices and metallic structures

4. Safety Criteria

The safety of a person depends on preventing the critical amount of shock energy from
being absorbed before the fault is cleared and the system de-energized. The maximum
driving voltage of any accidental circuit should not exceed the limits defined as follows.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

Generally, the body weight shall be applied as 70 [kg]

a) The limit for step voltage

E step = ( RB + 2 R f ) ⋅ I B

0.116
▪ E step 50 = (1000 + 6 ⋅ C s ρ s ) (for body weight of 50 kg)
ts
0.157
▪ E step 70 = (1000 + 6 ⋅ C s ρ s ) (for body weight of 70 kg)
ts

b) The limit for touch voltage

Rf
Etouch = ( RB + )⋅ IB
2
0.116
▪ Etouch50 = (1000 + 1.5 ⋅ C s ρ s ) (for body weight of 50 kg)
ts
0.157
▪ Etouch 70 = (1000 + 1.5 ⋅ C s ρ s ) (for body weight of 70 kg)
ts

RB : The resistance of the human body in Ω

R f : The ground resistance of one foot in Ω
I B : Tolerable body current limit
C s : The surface layer de-rating factor according to the surface material
ρ s : The resistivity of the surface material in Ω ⋅ m
t s : The duration of shock current in seconds

5. Standard Earthing Resistance

The standard earthing resistances for substation earthing system construction are the
settled the resistance values to earth the power transformer neutral points, frames of the
electrical facilities, surge arresters and so on

Also, in earthing design, both the safety (the limits of step and touch voltages) criteria
and standard earth resistance shall be satisfied to ensure the safety of person and power
system operation

The earthing electrode of the power transformer neutral conductors, frames of the
electrical facilities and surge arresters shall be connected separately, however if their

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

resulting value (earthing resistance) is not less than 1 Ω, which are desirable to connect as
earthing grid jointly

The standard earthing resistance values are following as shown below according to the
nominal voltage levels
< Table 1 > Standard earthing resistance values
Nominal voltage Earthing resistance (Ω) Remark
(kV) Neutral point Frames SA
66 5 10 5
30 10 10 15
11 10 10 15

6. Selection of Conductor
In assessing which conductor material and what conductor size or what maximum
allowable temperature limit needs to be applied in individual design situations, the final
choice should always reflect the consideration outlined in below

6.1 Basic requirement

Each element of the earthing system, including grid conductors, connections, connecting
leads and all primary electrodes shall be so designed that for the expected design life of the
installation
▪ Resist fusing and mechanical deterioration under the most adverse combination of a
fault magnitude and duration
▪ Be mechanically reliable and rugged to a high degree
▪ Have sufficient conductivity, so that it will not contribute substantially to local
voltage differences
▪ Be able to maintain its function even when exposed to corrosion or physical abuse
▪ Have economical efficiency and convenience for construction work

6.2 Selection of connections

All connections made in a grounding network above and below ground shall be
evaluated to meet the same general requirements of the conductor used, namely electrical
conductivity, corrosion resistance, current carrying capacity and mechanical strength. The
connections should be strong enough to withstand the mechanical forces caused by the
electromagnetic forces of maximum expected fault currents and be able to resist corrosion
for the intended life of the installation

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

6.3 Calculation of cross-sectional area

a) The formula to select the earth conductor cross-sectional area shall be complied with
IEC 60364-5-54 as shown

I 2tc
A= [mm2]
k

A: is the cross sectional area, in mm2

I: is the value (rms) in A of prospective fault current for a fault of negligible impedance,
which can be flow through the protective device
t c : is the operating time of the protective device for automatic disconnection in second
k: is the factor dependant on the material of the protective conductor, the insulation and
other parts and the initial and the final temperatures

b) Also, the factor “k” is determined from the following formula

Qc ( β + 20) θ f − θi
k= ln(1 + )
ρ 20 β + θi

Qc : is the volumetric heat capacity of conductor material (J / °C mm3) at 20℃

β : is the reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity at 20 °C for the conductor

(°C)
ρ 20 : is the electrical resistivity of conductor material at 20 °C (Ω mm)
θ i : is the initial temperature of conductor (°C)

θ f : is the final temperature of conductor (°C)

< Table 2 > Value of parameters for different materials

Qc ( β + 20)
Material β (°C) Qc (J/°C mm3) ρ 20 (Ω mm)
ρ 20

Copper 234.5 3.45 × 10 −3 17.241× 10 −6 226

Aluminum 228.0 2.5 × 10 −3 28.264 × 10 −6 148

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

< Table 3 > Value of parameters for different covering materials

Cable covering
Item
PVC XLPE, EPR Butyl rubber

θf 160 °C 250 °C 220 °C

θi 30 °C (assumed)
Material of conductor Values for “k”
Copper 143 176 166
Aluminum 95 116 110

c) Therefore, the earthing conductor cross-sectional area shall not be less than the values
which are determined by above formula
< Table 4 > Earth conductor cross-sectional area
(Unit: mm2)
Duration of fault current (sec)
Fault current (kA)
0.1 0.5 0.7 1.0 2.0
20 50 95 120 120 185
25 50 120 150 185 240
31.5 70 150 185 240 300
40 95 185 240 240 400
50 95 240 300 300 500

7. Connections to Earth Grid

The connections between earth grid and major equipment installed in substations inside
are following below

7.1 Objects
▪ All metal housings (power transformer, panel, VT, CB, LS, DS, ES, SA, GIS, MCSG
and so on)
▪ Steel frame for the building, steel post and metal structures
▪ Metal pipe and water pipe
▪ Cable sheath or shielding
▪ Neutral points of power circuits or equipment
▪ The reinforcing rod in concrete

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

▪ Overhead earthing wire

▪ All above-grounded conductive metal parts

7.2 Connection methods to earth grid

▪ Earthing conductors connected to earthing grid shall have the adequate mechanical
strength
▪ The connection or coupling of earthing conductors shall be installed in place to easy
the inspection or maintenance. Otherwise, the earth conductor shall be used with 2
conductors or more
▪ Earth conductors which are connected to the housing of power transformer, CB and
DS shall be used with cross-sectional area as large as 2 times of the earth grid,
otherwise, which shall be connected at the different 2 points of earth grid as the same
cross-sectional area of earthing grid
▪ Neutral point of power circuits or equipment shall be connected at the different 2
points of earthing grid as the same cross-sectional area of earthing grid
▪ Earthing terminal and structure of surge arrester, structure of ES and secondary
earthing of instrument transformer shall be used with cross-sectional area as large as
2 times of the earthing grid, otherwise, which shall be connected at the different 2
points of earthing grid as the same cross-sectional area of earthing grid
▪ Earth conductor cross-sectional areas against other facilities shall be determined by
fault currents which are applying to half current of earthing grid fault current

8. Construction of a Earthing System

8.1 Methods of construction work

Construction of the earthing system shall be adopted with earthing grid methods to
satisfy the safety standard of earthing design basically. However, if it is impossible to
satisfy the safety standard of earthing design with earthing grid methods, earthing rods or
earthing electrode and ground enhancement materials by a method of boring shall be
applied to construction of a earthing system. Also, the depth of earthing conductor burial
shall not be less than 0.5m

8.2 Methods of connection

Since earthing conductor connections are required to ensure the continuity of service
between earthing conductors and earthing objects, which should prevent the generation of
electrical earthing potential gradient between earthing conductors and earthing objects

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

There are some methods in connection methods for earthing conductors such as the
exothermic weld, brazed and pressure type connections (bolt or sleeve). Generally,
exothermic weld, sleeve type and bolt type are widely adopted in connection between
earthing conductors and earthing objects

Therefore, to secure the electrical continuity of service and mechanical strength, the
pressure sleeve type shall be applied between earthing conductors and the pressure bolt
type shall be applied between earthing conductors and earthing objects

9. Earthing of substation fence

Fence earthing is of major importance because the fence is usually accessible to the
general public. Therefore, metal fence earthing requirement may be accomplished by
bonding the fence to the substation earth grid or to a separate underground conductor
below or near the fence line
a) Fence is connected to the substation earth grid
In case that the substation earth grids are near the substation fence, the substation earth
grid shall be extended up to 0.5 ~ 1 m outside of the fence perimeter and the fence
earthing connected every 5 ~ 8 m to substation earth grid

b) The fence is connected to a separate earthing conductor

In case that the fence is located at 5m or more distant from the substation earth grid,
the fence shall be locally earthed every 5 ~ 8m using the earthing rods

10. Procedures for Earthing Design

The block diagram illustrates the sequence of steps to design the earthing system. The
following shows each step of the procedure
a) Step 1, collect the data about substation site
▪ Required area (width × length)
▪ Measuring soil resistivity and analysis
▪ Decide the fault current

b) Step 2, decide the cross-sectional area and material of the earthing conductor
▪ Consider the fault current, duration of fault current and material of conductor

c) Step 3, decide the limit of step voltage and touch voltage to ensure the safety
▪ Based on 70 (kg)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

d) Step 4, the first stage design of earthing system

e) Step 5, decide the resistance of earthing system

f) Step 6, the earthing current is determined by the equation

▪ Decide the current division factor
▪ Decide the decrement factor

g) Step 7, calculate the earthing resistance about designed earthing system

h) Step 8, compare the calculated earthing resistance with standard earthing resistance, if
this figure is satisfied to standard earthing resistance pass by step 10, otherwise, go to
step 9

i) Step 9, revision of earthing grid design is required, these revisions may include
smaller conductor spacing or additional earthing rods or enhancement materials

j) Step 10, if the calculated EPR is below the limit of touch voltage, the earthing design
may be complete, otherwise, go to next step

k) Step 11, calculate the mesh and step voltages for the earthing grid as designed

l) Step 12, if the calculated mesh voltage is below the limit of touch voltage, process the
next step, otherwise go to step 9

m) Step 13, compare the calculated step voltage with the limit of step voltage and if the
calculated step voltage is less the limit of step voltage, the earthing design may be
complete. Otherwise, go to step 9

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

Substation field data Step 1

Select conductor size Step 2

Touch and step criteria Etouch , E step Step 3

Earth grid design Step 4

Grid resistance goal value RE Step 5

Grid current, fault current division factor Step 6

Earth grid resistance design value R g Step 7

Modification Step 9
RE 〉 R g Step 8
No
Yes
Yes Step 10
GPR〈 Etouch
No

Mesh and step voltages Em , Es Step 11

E M 〈 Etouch Step 12
No
Yes

E s 〈 E step Step 13
No
Yes

Earth system design finish Step 14

< Figure 1 > Earthing design procedure block diagram

11. Soil treatment to lower resistivity

It is often impossible to achieve the desired reduction in ground resistance by adding
more grid conductors or ground rods. An alternate solution is to effectively increase the

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

diameter of the electrode by modifying the soil surrounding the electrode. The inner shell
of soil closest to the electrode normally comprises the bulk of the electrode ground
resistance to remote earth. This phenomenon is often utilized to an advantage, as follows:
a) Use of sodium chloride, magnesium, and copper sulfates, or calcium chloride, to
increase the conductivity of the soil immediately surrounding an electrode.

b) Use of bentonite, the natural clay containing the mineral montmorillionite, which was
formed by volcanic action years ago. It is noncorrosive, stable, and has a resistivity of
2.5 Ω·m at 300% moisture.

c) Chemical-type electrodes consist of a copper tube filled with a salt. Holes in the tube
allow moisture to enter, dissolve the salts, and allow the salt solution to leach into the
ground. These electrodes are installed in an augured hole and typically back-filled
with soil treatment.

d) Ground enhancement materials, some with a resistivity of less than 0.12 Ω·m (about
5% of the resistivity of bentonite), are typically placed around the rod in an augured
hole or around grounding conductors in a trench, in either a dry form or premixed in a
slurry.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

Appendix A: References

KEPCO Substation Design Standard, Substation scale

KEPCO Distribution Design Standard
IEC 60364-5- Selection and erection of electrical equipment-
54 Earthing arrangement, protective conductors and protective bonding
conductors
IEC 61936-1 Power installations exceeding 1kV AC-common rules
IEEE 80 Guide for safety in AC substation grounding

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

Appendix B: Explanation of Earthing System Design

1. Definition of shock voltage

In earthed substations, if the earthing fault current is conducted by a substation earthing
grid into the earth causes the rise of the grid potential with respect to remote earthing. So,
shock voltage is defined as these phenomenon are generated in substations which may be
affected to person and animals inside the substation or around

< Figure B1 > Basic shock situation

a) EPR (Earthing Potential Rise)

The maximum electrical potential that a substation earthing grid may attain relative to
a distant earthing point assumed to be at the potential of remote earthing. This voltage
is equal to the maximum grid current times the grid resistance

b) Touch voltage
The potential difference between the earthing potential rise (EPR) and the surface
potential at the point where a person is standing while at the same time having a hand
in contact with an earthed structure

c) Step voltage
The difference in surface potential experienced by a person bridging a distance of 1m
with the feet without contacting any other earthed object

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

d) Mesh voltage
The maximum touch voltage within a mesh of an earthing grid

2. Safety of the human body

Effects of an electrical current passing through the vital parts of a human body depend
on the duration, magnitude and frequency of this current. The most dangerous consequence
of such an exposure is a heart condition known as ventricular fibrillation, resulting in
immediate arrest of blood circulation
a) Resistance of the human body
For DC and 50 Hz or 60 Hz AC currents, the human body can be approximated by a
resistance. The current path typically considered is from one hand to both feet or from
one foot to the other one. A value of 1,000 Ω which represents the resistance of a
human body from hand-to-feet and also from hand-to-hand or from one foot to the
other one shall be used throughout this standard

b) Tolerable body current limit

The magnitude and duration of the current conducted through a human body at 50 Hz
or 60Hz should be less than the value that can cause ventricular fibrillation of the heart.
According to the result of experiment by Dalziel, tolerable body current limit is
described as following considering the duration of the current and person’s body
weight

kw
IB =
ts

k w : is the factor which is decided according to body weight

t s : is duration of the current exposure
Because above equation is based on tests limited to a range of between 0.03 sec and 3.0
sec, it obviously in not valid for very short or long durations. Also, the factor which is
decided according to body weight as following
9 For 50 kg body weight: 0.116
9 For 70 kg body weight: 0.157
This standard may select k =0.157 provided that the average population weight can be
expected to be at least 70 kg

c) Accidental circuit equivalents

▪ Touch voltage

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

Circuit equivalents shall be described as showing when the fault currents are
generated in earthed structure. The tolerable body current is shown below

< Figure B2 > Exposure to touch voltage

Terminal H

VTh ~
RB=body resistance
ZTh

Terminal F
VTh=Touch voltage ZTh=Rf / 2

< Figure B3 > Touch voltage circuit

VTh
Ib =
Z Th + R B
▪ Step voltage
If the fault current is being discharged to the ground by the earthing system of the
substation, the potential rise shall be appeared at earth space. Circuit equivalents shall
be described as showing. The tolerable body current is shown below

< Figure B4 > Exposure to step voltage

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

Terminal F1

VTh ~
RB=body resistance
ZTh

Terminal F2
VTh=Step voltage ZTh=2Rf

< Figure B5 > Step voltage circuit

d) Tolerable voltage considering the equivalent circuit

In equivalent circuits of touch and step voltage, equivalent impedance ( Z Th ) shall be
described considering the homogeneous earthing of resistivity ρ (Ωm) and the ground
resistance of foot
9 Z Th (touch) = 1.5ρ (For touch voltage accidental circuit)
9 Z Th ( step) = 6.0 ρ (For step voltage accidental circuit)
The permissible total equivalent voltage (i.e., tolerable touch and step voltage), using
above equation is
9 Etouch = I B ( RB + 1.5ρ )

9 E step = I B ( RB + 6.0 ρ )

e) Effect of a thin layer of surface material

Above tolerable touch and step voltage equation is based on the assumption of uniform
soil resistivity. However a 0.08~0.15 m layer of high resistivity material, such as gravel,
is often spread on the earth’s surface above the ground grid to increase the contact
resistance between the soil and the feet of persons in the substation. In that case, the
tolerable limit voltages are described as shown

kw
9 Etouch = I B ( R B + 1.5C s ρ ) = ( RB + 1.5C s ρ )
ts

kw
9 E step = I B ( RB + 6.0C s ρ ) = ( RB + 6.0C s ρ )
ts

C s : is the surface layer de-rating factor

The surface layer de-rating factor ( C s ) shall be considered as a corrective factor to
compute the effective foot resistance in the presence of a finite thickness of surface

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

material. Also, the deflection factor between different material resistivities (K) is the
characteristics between surface material resistivity and resistivity of the earth beneath
the surface material which are described as shown
ρ −ρ s
K=
ρ + ρs
ρ : is the resistivity of the earth beneath the surface material in [Ωm]
ρ s : is the surface material resistivity in [Ωm]

< Figure B6 > C s versus hs

1
k= -0.1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6 k=
-0.1
-0.2
0.5 k= -0.95 -0.3
-0.4
0.4 -0.5
-0.6
0.3 -0.7
-0.8
0.2 -0.9
-0.95
0.1

0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2 0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.3

Also, C s shall be calculated as following formula

ρ
1−
1 ρs
Cs = (1 − 0.106( )
0.96 2hs + 0.106

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

APPENDIX C: Example of earthing system design

Example 1

1. Conditions to design earthing system

Fault duration ( t c ) : 0.5 sec
Duration of the current exposure ( t s ) : 1 sec
Maximum fault current ( I F ) : 31.5 kA
Decrement factor ( D f ) : 1.0
Extension factor for system ( C p ) : 1.0
Current division factor ( S f ) : 0.6
Two layer soil: The upper layer (271.48 [Ω-m], 1.44 [m])
The lower layer (49.87 [Ω-m], ∞ [m])
Crushed rock resistivity ( ρ s ) : 3,000 [Ω-m]
Thickness of crushed rock surfacing ( hs ) : 0.1 m
Depth of grid burial ( h) : 0.5 m
Available grounding area (A): 75 m × 60 m = 4500 [mm2]
Spacing between each conductor (D): 3 m

2. Selection of cross sectional area

To select the cross sectional area of main earth conductor, the factor “k” was determined
based on cooper conductor and XLPE covering

I 2tc
S= [mm2]
k

Qc ( β + 20) θ f − θi
k= ln(1 + )
ρ 20 β + θi

As a result, cross sectional area is 126.5 mm2. However, considering the mechanical
strength and margin, the cross sectional area shall be applied as 150 mm2 (d=0.016 m)

3. Touch and step voltage criteria

a) Equivalent resistivity calculation of earthing (considered equivalent depth: 60 m)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

d 60
ρ= = = 50.867[Ω − m]
h1 d − h1 1.44 60 − 1.44
+ +
ρ1 ρ2 271.48 49.87
b) The reflection factor considering the crushed rock resistivity ‘K”
ρ − ρ s 50.867 − 3000
K= = = −0.9667
ρ + ρ s 50.867 + 3000

c) The surface layer de-rating factor “C”

Considered the reflection factor ( K ) and thickness of crushed rock surfacing (0.1 m)
ρ
0.09(1 − )
ρs
Cs = 1 − = 0.6949
2hs + 0.09

d) The tolerable step and touch voltages

Since the fault duration is 0.5 sec in conditions to design earthing system as shown
above, the tolerable step and touch voltage about each body weight shall be calculated
as shown

▪ Step voltage criteria

0.116 0.116
9 E step (50 ) = (1000 + 6 ⋅ C s ⋅ ρ s ) = (1000 + 6 ⋅ 0.6949 ⋅ 3000) = 2216.0[V ]
ts 0.5
0.157 0.157
9 E step ( 70 ) = (1000 + 6 ⋅ C s ⋅ ρ s ) = (1000 + 6 ⋅ 0.6949 ⋅ 3000) = 299.25[V ]
ts 0.5
▪ Touch voltage criteria
0.116 0.116
9 Etouch ( 50 ) = (1000 + 1.5 ⋅ C s ⋅ ρ s ) = (1000 + 1.5 ⋅ 0.6949 ⋅ 3000) = 677.0[V ]
ts 0.5
0.157 0.157
9 Etouch ( 70 ) = (1000 + 1.5 ⋅ C s ⋅ ρ s ) = (1000 + 1.5 ⋅ 0.6949 ⋅ 3000) = 916.3[V ]
ts 0.5

4. Initial design
Assume a preliminary layout of 75 m × 60 m grid with equally spaced conductors as
shown below, with spacing D = 3 m, grid burial depth h = 0.5 m, and no earth rods

In conditions to design earth system

Depth of grid burial: 0.5 m
Spacing between each conductor: 3 m

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

75m

3m

60m

3m

< Figure C1 > Square grid without earth rods

L p = ( L x + L y ) × 2 = (75 + 60) × 2 = 270m

Lc = ( Lx × n y ) + ( L y × n x ) = (75 × 21) + (60 × 26) = 3135m

Lr = l × n r = 0

Lc Lp 3135 270
n = n1 n2 = 2 ⋅ =2 ⋅ ≅ 24
Lp 4 A 270 4 4500

L p : The outer block length of earth grid

Lc : The total length of earth grid

Lr : The earthing rods total length

Lr
Ltouch = Lc + (1.55 + 1.22( )) Lr = 3135
2 2
Lx + L y

Lstep = 0.75 ⋅ Lc + 0.85 ⋅ Lr = 471[V ] = 0.75 ⋅ 3135 = 2351.25

4. Determination of grid resistance

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

In conditions to design earth system

Depth of grid burial: 0.5 m
Available grounding area: 75 m × 60 m = 4500 m2

According to Sverak formula

1 1 1 1 1 1
R g = ρ[ + (1 + ) = 50.867[ + (1 + )
Lc 20 A 20 3135 20 ⋅ 4500 20
1+ h 1 + 0 .5
A 4500
= 0.34987(Ω)

5. Maximum grid current

In conditions to design earth system
Maximum fault current: 31.5 kA
Decrement factor: 1.0
Extension factor for system: 1.0
Current division factor: 0.6

I g = S f ⋅ DF ⋅ C p ⋅ I F = 0.6 ⋅ 1.0 ⋅ 1.0 ⋅ 31500 = 18900( A)

5. EPR
EPR = I g ⋅ R g = 18900 ⋅ 0.34987 = 6612.47(V )

6. Mesh voltage
a) Standard depth of grid burial: 1m

b) Corrective weighting factor that emphasizes the effects of grid depth: K h

h 0 .5
Kh = 1+ = 1+ = 1.2247
h0 1 .0

c) Corrective weighting factor that adjusts for the effects of inner conductor on the
corner mesh: K ii

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

1 1
K ii = 2
= 2
= 0.7243
( 2 ⋅ n) n
(2 ⋅ 24) 24

d) Spacing factor for mesh voltage: K m

1 D2 ( D + 2h) 2 h K 8
Km = [ln( + − ) + ii ⋅ ln( )]
2 ⋅π 16 ⋅ h ⋅ d 8⋅ D ⋅d 4⋅d Kh π (2 ⋅ n − 1)
1 32 (3 + 2 ⋅ 0.5) 2 0 .5 0.7243 8
= [ln( + − )+ ln( )]
2 ⋅π 16 ⋅ 0.5 ⋅ 0.016 8 ⋅ 3 ⋅ 0.016 4 ⋅ 0.016 1.2247 π (2 ⋅ 24 − 1)
= 0.4622

e) Correction factor for grid geometry: K i

= 0.644 + 0.148 ⋅ n = 0.644 + 0.148 ⋅ 24 = 4.196

f) Mesh voltage: E m
ρ ⋅ I g ⋅ K m ⋅ K i 50.867 ⋅18900 ⋅ 0.4622 ⋅ 4.1960
Em = = = 594.74(V )
Lmesh 3135

Tolerable touch voltage (916.3) > mesh voltage (594.74)

This initial design is satisfied to safety criteria because the mesh voltage is lower than
tolerable touch voltage.

8. Step voltage
a) Spacing factor for step voltage: K s
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Ks = [ + + (1 − 0.5 n−2 ) )] = [ + + (1 − 0.5 24−2 )
π 2h D + h D π 2 ⋅ 0.5 3 + 0.5 3
= 0.5157

b) Step voltage

ρ ⋅ I g ⋅ Ks ⋅ Ki 50.867 ⋅18900 ⋅ 0.5157 ⋅ 4.1960

Es = = = 884.77(V )
Lstep 2351.25

Tolerable step voltage (2999.25) > step voltage (884.77)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

This initial design is satisfied to safety criteria because the step voltage is lower than
tolerable step voltage.

9. Earthing design results

Earthing design resulted in 0.35 Ω, 594.74 V and 884.77 V for the grid resistance, touch
voltage and step voltage for this example

a) Resistance of earthing system: R g

1 1 1 1 1 1
R g = ρ[ + (1 + )] = 50.867[ + (1 + )]
L 20 A 20 3135 20 ⋅ 4500 20
1+ h 1 + 0 .5
A 4500
= 0.34987(Ω)

b) Mesh voltage: E m
ρ ⋅ I g ⋅ K m ⋅ K i 50.867 ⋅18900 ⋅ 0.4622 ⋅ 4.1960
E mesh = = = 594.74(V )
Lmesh 3135

c) Step voltage: E s

ρ ⋅ I g ⋅ K s ⋅ Ki 50.867 ⋅18900 ⋅ 0.5157 ⋅ 4.1960

E step = = = 884.77(V )
Lstep 2351.25

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

Example 2

1. Conditions to design earthing system

Fault duration ( t c ) : 0.5 sec
Duration of the current exposure ( t s ) : 1 sec
Maximum fault current ( I F ) : 31.5 kA
Decrement factor ( D f ) : 1.0
Extension factor for system ( C p ) : 1.0
Current division factor ( S f ) : 0.6
Two layer soil: The upper layer (154.99 [Ω-m], 2.65 [m])
The lower layer (172.99 [Ω-m], ∞ [m])
Crushed rock resistivity ( ρ s ) : 3,000 [Ω-m]
Thickness of crushed rock surfacing ( hs ) : 0.1 m
Depth of grid burial ( h) : 0.5 m
Available grounding area (A): 75 m × 60 m = 4500 [mm2]
Spacing between each conductor (D): 3 m

2. Selection of cross sectional area

To select the cross sectional area of main earth conductor, the factor “k” was determined
based on cooper conductor and XLPE covering

I 2tc
S= [mm2]
k

Qc ( β + 20) θ f − θi
k= ln(1 + )
ρ 20 β + θi

As a result, cross sectional area is 126.5 mm2 . However, considering the mechanical
strength and margin, the cross sectional area shall be applied as 150 mm2 (d=0.016 m)

3. Touch and step voltage criteria

a) Equivalent resistivity calculation of earthing (considered equivalent depth: 60 m)
d 60
ρ= = = 172.11[Ω − m]
h1 d − h1 2.65 60 − 2.65
+ +
ρ1 ρ2 154.99 172.99

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

b) The reflection factor considering the crushed rock resistivity ‘K”

ρ − ρ s 172.11 − 3000
K= = = −0.8915
ρ + ρ s 172.11 + 3000

c) The surface layer de-rating factor “C”

Considered the reflection factor ( K ) and thickness of crushed rock surfacing (0.1 m)
ρ
0.09(1 − )
ρs
Cs = 1 − = 0.7075
2hs + 0.09
d) The tolerable step and touch voltages
Since the fault duration is 0.5 sec in conditions to design earthing system as shown
above, the tolerable step and touch voltage about each body weight shall be calculated
as shown

▪ Step voltage criteria

0.116 0.116
9 E step (50 ) = (1000 + 6 ⋅ C s ⋅ ρ s ) = (1000 + 6 ⋅ 0.7075 ⋅ 3000) = 2253.2[V ]
ts 0.5
0.157 0.157
9 E step ( 70 ) = (1000 + 6 ⋅ C s ⋅ ρ s ) = (1000 + 6 ⋅ 0.7075 ⋅ 3000) = 3049.6[V ]
ts 0.5
▪ Touch voltage criteria
0.116 0.116
9 Etouch ( 50 ) = (1000 + 1.5 ⋅ C s ⋅ ρ s ) = (1000 + 1.5 ⋅ 0.7075 ⋅ 3000) = 686.3[V ]
ts 0.5
0.157 0.157
9 Etouch ( 70 ) = (1000 + 1.5 ⋅ C s ⋅ ρ s ) = (1000 + 1.5 ⋅ 0.7075 ⋅ 3000) = 928.9[V ]
ts 0.5

4. Initial design
Assume a preliminary layout of 75 m × 60 m grid with equally spaced conductors as
shown below, with spacing D = 3 m, grid burial depth h = 0.5 m, and no earth rods

In conditions to design earth system

Depth of grid burial: 0.5 m
Spacing between each conductor: 3 m

L p = ( L x + L y ) × 2 = (75 + 60) × 2 = 270m

Lc = ( Lx × n y ) + ( L y × n x ) = (75 × 21) + (60 × 26) = 3135m

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

Lr = l × n r = 0

Lc Lp 3135 270
n = n1 n2 = 2 ⋅ =2 ⋅ ≅ 24
Lp 4 A 270 4 4500

L p : The outer block length of earth grid

Lc : The total length of earth grid

Lr : The earthing rods total length

Lr
Ltouch = Lc + (1.55 + 1.22( )) Lr = 3135
2 2
Lx + L y

Lstep = 0.75 ⋅ Lc + 0.85 ⋅ Lr = 471[V ] = 0.75 ⋅ 3135 = 2351.25

4. Determination of grid resistance

In conditions to design earth system
Depth of grid burial: 0.5 m
Available grounding area: 75 m × 60 m = 4500 m2

According to Sverak formula

1 1 1 1 1 1
Rg = ρ[ + (1 + ) = 172.11[ + (1 + )
Lc 20 A 20 3135 20 ⋅ 4500 20
1+ h 1 + 0 .5
A 4500
= 1.184(Ω)

5. Maximum grid current

In conditions to design earth system
Maximum fault current: 31.5 kA
Decrement factor: 1.0
Extension factor for system: 1.0
Current division factor: 0.6

I g = S f ⋅ DF ⋅ C p ⋅ I F = 0.6 ⋅ 1.0 ⋅ 1.0 ⋅ 31500 = 18900( A)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

5. EPR
EPR = I g ⋅ Rg = 18900 ⋅1.184 = 22377.6(V )

6. Mesh voltage
a) Standard depth of grid burial: 1m

b) Corrective weighting factor that emphasizes the effects of grid depth: K h

h 0 .5
Kh = 1+ = 1+ = 1.2247
h0 1 .0

c) Corrective weighting factor that adjusts for the effects of inner conductor on the
corner mesh: K ii

1 1
K ii = 2
= 2
= 0.7243
( 2 ⋅ n) n
(2 ⋅ 24) 24

d) Spacing factor for mesh voltage: K m

1 D2 ( D + 2h) 2 h K 8
Km = [ln( + − ) + ii ⋅ ln( )]
2 ⋅π 16 ⋅ h ⋅ d 8⋅ D ⋅d 4⋅d Kh π (2 ⋅ n − 1)
1 32 (3 + 2 ⋅ 0.5) 2 0 .5 0.7243 8
= [ln( + − )+ ln( )]
2 ⋅π 16 ⋅ 0.5 ⋅ 0.016 8 ⋅ 3 ⋅ 0.016 4 ⋅ 0.016 1.2247 π (2 ⋅ 24 − 1)
= 0.4622

e) Correction factor for grid geometry: K i

= 0.644 + 0.148 ⋅ n = 0.644 + 0.148 ⋅ 24 = 4.196
f) Mesh voltage: E m
ρ ⋅ I g ⋅ K m ⋅ K i 172.11 ⋅18900 ⋅ 0.4622 ⋅ 4.1960
Em = = = 2012.3(V )
Lmesh 3135

Tolerable touch voltage (928.9) < mesh voltage (2012.3)

This initial design is not satisfied to safety criteria because the mesh voltage is higher
than tolerable touch voltage. Therefore, the grid design must be modified by changing any
or all of the following
▪ Grid conductor spacing

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

28 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

▪ Total conductor length

▪ Grid depth
▪ Addition of earth rods

7. Modify design
Usually reduction of the available earth fault current is difficult or impractical to achieve.
In this example, the preliminary design will be modified to include 300 earth rods, each 1.5
m long, around the perimeter of the grid, and grid conductor spacing shall be relocated as
2.5 m

L p = ( L x + L y ) × 2 = (75 + 60) × 2 = 270m

Lc = ( Lx × n y ) + ( L y × n x ) = (75 × 25) + (60 × 31) = 3735m

Lr = l × nr = 1.5 × 300 = 450

Lc Lp 3135 270
n = n1 n2 = 2 ⋅ =2 ⋅ ≅ 24
Lp 4 A 270 4 4500

L p : The outer block length of earth grid

Lc : The total length of earth grid

Lr : The earthing rods total length
Lr
Ltouch = Lc + (1.55 + 1.22( )) Lr
2 2
Lx + L y

450
= 3735 + (1.55 + 1.22( )) × 450 = 7004.7
75 2 + 60 2

Lstep = 0.75 ⋅ Lc + 0.85 ⋅ Lr = 471[V ] = 0.75 ⋅ 3735 + 0.85 ⋅ 450 = 3183.75

Mesh voltage E m is recalculated

ρ ⋅ I g ⋅ K m ⋅ K i 172.11 ⋅18900 ⋅ 0.4622 ⋅ 4.1960
Em = = = 900.6(V )
Lmesh 7004.7

Tolerable touch voltage (928.9) > mesh voltage (900.6)

This calculated mesh voltage is well below the tolerable touch voltage E touch(70) of
928.9 V

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

29 / 30 Version 1.0
 Substation Earthing

8. Step voltage
c) Spacing factor for step voltage: K s
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Ks = [ + + (1 − 0.5 n −2 ) )] = [ + + (1 − 0.5 24−2 )
π 2h D + h D π 2 ⋅ 0.5 2.5 + 0.5 2.5
= 0.5509

d) Step voltage

ρ ⋅ I g ⋅ K s ⋅ Ki 172.11 ⋅18900 ⋅ 0.5509 ⋅ 4.1960

Es = = = 2361.7(V )
Lstep 3183.75

Tolerable step voltage (3049.6) > step voltage (2361.7)

This calculated step voltage is well below the tolerable step voltage E step (70) of 3049.6
V

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

30 / 30 Version 1.0
 GDS 5900
Version 1.0: Oct 7, 2007

Building Service

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ···············································································································1
2. Lighting···········································································································1
2.1 General····················································································································1
2.2 Definitions···············································································································1
2.3 Standard illumination ······························································································2
2.3.1 General lightings····························································································2
2.3.2 Emergency DC lightings················································································3
3. Air Circulation ·······························································································3
4. Temperature and Humidity Condition·······················································4
4.1 Review of relevant standards···················································································5
4.1.1 IEEE standard ································································································5
4.1.2 IEC standard ··································································································6
4.1.3 Temperature conditions for UPS and RTU·····················································6
4.2 Recommendation·····································································································7
4.2.1 Temperature range ·························································································7
4.2.2 Humidity range ······························································································7
4.2.3 Summary of temperature and humidity ranges···············································7
5. Fire Counter-plans ························································································8
5.1 General····················································································································8
5.2 Indoor facilities ·······································································································8
5.2.1 Fire extinguisher ····························································································8
5.2.2 Fire detection and suppression system ···························································8
5.3 Power transformers ·······························································································10
5.3.1 Firewall········································································································ 11
5.3.2 Diagrams of firewall ···················································································· 11

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Standard illuminance ··················································································· 3

< Table 2 > Standard illuminance of emergency lighting················································ 3
< Table 3 > Numbers of air changes ··············································································· 4
< Table 4 > Operating temperature and humidity by location ········································· 5
< Table 5 > Minimum ambient air temperature······························································· 6
< Table 6 > Maximum ambient air temperature ······························································ 6
< Table 7 > Temperature condition of UPS ····································································· 6
< Table 8 > Temperature condition of RTU ···································································· 7
< Table 9 > Temperature and humidity conditions ·························································· 7
< Table 10 > Classifications for fires ·············································································· 8

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

< Figure 1 > Example of formation diagram for FM-200 extinguishing system ··········· 10
< Figure 2 > Example of formation diagram for CO2 extinguishing system················· 10
< Figure 3 > Firewall height and thickness for power transformer ······························· 11
< Figure 4 > Firewall length for power transformer······················································ 12

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

A References ············································································································ 13
B Example of internal lighting ················································································ 14
C External lighting ·································································································· 17

v
 Building Service

1. Scope

This standard is applicable to the substation building services for the new 66 kV, 30 kV
substations that are including the basic lighting, air-circulation, temperature and humidity
conditions and fire counter-plans

2. Lighting

2.1 General
Lighting schemes shall be necessary for the following substation areas;
▪ Indoor and outdoor schemes for control buildings and indoor switch-rooms under both
normal and emergency conditions
▪ Floodlight for outdoor switchyard
▪ Security and road lighting
▪ Etc

Also, emergency DC lighting involves battery backup derived from the main substation
DC supply. The units shall be designed to have a given autonomy such that upon AC
failure the lighting continues to operate for a specified number of hours from the battery
source. Also, the flameproof lighting fittings shall be necessary in the battery room because
of fumes given off from unsealed batteries

2.2 Definitions

Candela
The illuminating power of a light source in a given direction, the unit of luminous
intensity

Color rendering
General expression for the effect of an illuminant on the color appearance of objects in
conscious or subconscious comparison with their color appearance under a reference
illuminant

Efficacy
Luminance efficiency of lamps measured in lumens per watt (lm/W)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 18 Version 1.0
 Building Service

Flicker
Impression of fluctuating luminance or color, occurring when the frequency of the
variation of the light stimulus lies within a few hertz of the fusion frequency of the
retinal images

Illuminance or illumination, E (lux or lx)

The measure of light falling on a surface, the illumination produced by one lumen over
an area of one square meter measured in flux
E = Φ/ A

Luminous flux, Φ (lumen or lm)

Unit of light flux, the amount of light contained in one steradian from a source with an
intensity of one candela in all directions, the amount of light falling on unit area of the
surface of a sphere of unit diameter from a unit source

Intensity, I (candela or cd)

A measure of illuminating power of a light source in a particular direction, independent
of the distance from the source

Luminance, l (cd/m2)
Measure of light reflected from a surface or in some cases emitted by it. The units of
measured brightness are candela per square meter

Room index, RI
Code number representative of the geometry of the room used in calculation of the
utilization factor. Unless otherwise indicated;
l ×b
RI =
H m (l + b)

l : length of room, b : width of room

H m : dista tan ce of lu min aires above the working plane

2.3 Standard illumination

2.3.1 General lightings

The adequate illuminance shall give a person the maximum working efficiency,

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 18 Version 1.0
 Building Service

convenience and comfortable environment in the substation operation and maintenance

works, therefore, it is recommended that standard illuminance of each area comply with
the following table
< Table 1 > Standard illuminance
Area Illumination (lx) Remark
Switch-room 400
Control room 500
Office room 500
Battery room 100
Auxiliary TR room 100
Telecommunication room 300
Floodlight (outdoor switchyard) 20
Entrance hall, lobby 100
Corridor, passageway, stair 100
Lavatory, storeroom 100
Perimeter lighting 10
Exterior lighting, etc 15
Note: The mounting height of the fittings above the working plane is usually taken as 0.85m above
floor level

2.3.2 Emergency DC lightings

In case that the emergency DC lightings are needed excepts for below places, the
minimum illuminance shall not be less than 5 (lx). Also, the emergency DC lighting
illuminations are recommended that accounts for 1 ~ 5 % of the general lighting
illuminance
< Table 2 > Standard illuminance of emergency lighting
Substation area Illumination (lx) Remark
Control room 50
Telecommunication room 30
Switchgear room 30
Corridor, passageway, stair 5
Battery room 5

3. Air Circulation
The correct air circulation or number of air changes per hour is essential to ensure

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 18 Version 1.0
 Building Service

comport of substation operations and maintenance personnel. The number of air changes
depends on the number of personnel and size of the room, but a minimum of four fresh air
changes per hour is recommended. In addition, it is necessary to prevent the build up of
dangerous gases such as may occur in a battery room using vented cells. Typical air
changes per hour for substation building areas are listed below. Also, the necessary
ventilation air flow heat transfer Qv is then calculated with a simple thermal heat balance
equation as shown below
cρNV (t i − t 0 )
Qv =
3600
Qv = ventilation heat transfer (W)
c = specific heat of air ( J / kg ° K )
ρ = density of air (kg / m3)
N = number of air changes per hour
V = volume of room (m3)
t i = inside temperature (°C)
t 0 = outside temperature (°C)
cρ
For practical purpose = 0.33
3600
< Table 3 > Numbers of air changes
Substation area Air changes per hour Remark
Switchgear room 4~8
AC or DC switch-room 4~8
Control and relay room 4~8
Battery room 6 ~ 10
Communication room 4~8
Offices 4~8
Toilet and wash room 10 ~ 12
Corridor 3~6

4. Temperature and Humidity Condition

The ambient temperature condition of substation building should be selected considering
the equipment arrangement, mechanical generation of heat and costs to maintain suitable
temperature to ensure the mechanical performance and reliability. Therefore, the suitable
ambient temperature and humidity for substation building shall be selected according to the
review of relevant specification

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 18 Version 1.0
 Building Service

4.1 Review of relevant standards

4.1.1 IEEE standard

Ambient temperature and humidity are defined as the conditions of the air surrounding
the enclosure of the equipment even if this enclosure is contained in another enclosure or
room. Ambient temperature and humidity conditions used for supervisory control, data
acquisition and automatic control are described as following table. Also, methods to
resolve these problem include following
▪ Low temperature
A thermostatically controlled heater strip should be used in the cabinet enclosure or
use wide temperature equipment
▪ High temperature
A sun shield, some other cooling method, or wide range equipment should be used
▪ High humidity
Heater strips or special shelters should be used
▪ Low humidity
A humidifier should be used to maintain acceptable humidity levels
< Table 4 > Operating temperature and humidity by location
Allowable rate of
Temperature Humidity
Location of the equipment change of
range (°C ) range (%)
temperature (°C /h)
In a building with air-
1 +15 ~ +30 10 40 ~ 60
conditioned areas
In a building with heating or
2 cooling but without full air +5 ~ +40 10 10 ~ 90
conditioning
In a building or other sheltered
3 area without special 0 ~ +55 20 10 ~ 95
environmental control
Outdoors or location with
4 -25 ~ +60 20 10 ~ 95
wide temperature variations
Note:
1) In groups 1 and 2 of table, all equipment cabinets that are vented shall have dust filters
2) In groups 3 and 4 of table, equipment that is exposed to moisture, corrosive or explosive gases,
or other unusual environmental conditions shall have a special enclosure
3) The equipment shall be suitable for operation at altitudes up to at least 2000 m

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 18 Version 1.0
 Building Service

4.1.2 IEC standard

IEC standard is defined the permissible temperature and temperature rise of equipment
as following
a) The ambient air temperature does not exceed 40 °C when the equipment is installed
and its average value measured over a period of 24 h does not exceed 35 °C. Also, the
annual average does not exceed 20 °C. Also, the below temperature limits apply at
altitudes not exceeding 2000 m.
< Table 5 > Minimum ambient air temperature
Minimum ambient air temperature
Class of equipment Remark
Indoor Outdoor
-5 °C indoor -5 °C
-25 °C indoor -25 °C
-25 °C -25 °C
-40 °C -40 °C

b) At altitudes exceeding 2000 m the following figures shall be applied as shown

< Table 6 > Maximum ambient air temperature
Altitude (m) Maximum ambient air temperature (°C ) Remark
0 ~ 2000 40
2000 ~ 3000 30
3000 ~ 4000 25

4.1.3 Temperature conditions for UPS and RTU

a) UPS
The temperature conditions of UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply) are described in
relevant standards as shown
< Table 7 > Temperature condition of UPS
IEC 146-4 IEEE 944 Remark
Ambient temperature 0 ~ 40 °C 10 ~ 40 °C

b) RTU
The temperature conditions of RTU (Remote Control Unit) are applying in KEPCO as
shown

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 18 Version 1.0
 Building Service

< Table 8 > Temperature condition of RTU

Device Ambient temperature condition Remark
CPU - 30 °C ~ + 80 °C
I / O Module - 30 °C ~ + 80 °C
D / O Module - 30 °C ~ + 80 °C
Optical cable - 30 °C ~ + 60 °C

4.2 Recommendation

4.2.1 Temperature range

It is recommended that appropriate temperature ranges shall be selected between the
optimal range (24±2 °C) and the maximum range (0~40 °C) considering the performance,
reliability and life cycle of indoor equipment and maintenance costs. In the case of
switchgear room in which is installed the major equipment and relay, maximum
permissible temperature is recommended as 27 °C considering the specification and
performance of equipment the minimum permissible temperature is recommended as
5 °C, these range shall not be affected to performance of equipment

4.2.2 Humidity range

Generally, the malfunction of equipment can be causing at ambient temperature 40 °C
and humidity 95 % or more since the leakage current and insulation resistance is increasing.
The appropriate humidity ranges shall be selected between the optimal range (50±10%)
and general range (30~80%) considering the reliability and maintenance costs. Therefore,
it is recommended that the relative humidity of indoor equipment is maintaining as 40 ~
80 %.RH

4.2.3 Summary of temperature and humidity ranges

The installation and operation of heating or air-conditioning system and humidity device
are needed to maintain the appropriate temperature and humidity
< Table 9 > Temperature and humidity conditions
Area Maximum Minimum Optimum
Control, relay room 27 °C, 80 % 5 °C, 40 % 24±2 °C, 50±10%
Switch room
Aux. TR room 40 °C, 80 % 5 °C, 40 % 24±2 °C, 50±10%
Battery room

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 18 Version 1.0
 Building Service

5. Fire Counter-plans

5.1 General
The substation fire safety philosophy is to safeguard personnel and maintain the
functional state of the substation. The internal fire of substation should be limited or
prevented spreading other facilities by the fire detection and suppression system, even
though the fire occurs in substations

5.2 Indoor facilities

A selection of fire extinguishing arrangement for indoor facilities shall be considered the
occupation of personnel, electrical conductivity of facilities, economical efficiency and
health complication or risk

5.2.1 Fire extinguisher

Hand or trolley mounted fire extinguishers are the cheapest form of manual fire
extinguishing. Such extinguishers shall be mounted in the substation control and switch-
room as well as the switchyard, the types of commonly available fire extinguishers and
their usage under different conditions are shown
< Table 10 > Classifications for fires
Class Usage Remark
A Combustible materials (wood, cloth, paper, rubber, plastic)
Flammable and combustible liquids, petroleum greases, cars,
B
oils, oil-based paints, solvents, lacquers, alcohols, flammable gas
C Energized electrical equipment
Combustible metals (magnesium, titanium, zirconium, sodium,
D
lithium, potassium)

5.2.2 Fire detection and suppression system

Sensor circuits are arranged on a zonal basis in order to isolate the fire into certain areas,
also, each of rooms shall be covered by a separate zone of protection. The zone where the
fire has occurred is indicated on the fire detection control panel, the panel sends a signal to
alarm sounders to alert personnel and to sends signals to the automatic fire extinguishing
system. Also, it is important to avoid anomalous operation of the fire detection and
suppression system, therefore a double knock system is usually employed where two
sensors have to detect the alarm before the suppression system is activated

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 18 Version 1.0
 Building Service

a) Kind of the fire detection sensors

Two types of fire detection sensor shall be applicable to substation applications
▪ Heat detector
These sense changes in the thermal environmental very locally or in the immediate
vicinity of the unit, in order to differentiate between normal temperature rise and fire
condition the sensor detects the temperature above a pre-selected limit and the rate of
temperature rise
▪ Smoke detector
These sense small particles of matter or smoke in the air which are the result of a fire

b) Fire extinguishing medium

Nowadays, many different types of extinguishing systems are producing. The usual
modern automatic extinguishing medium is FM200® as a replacement for halon gas
because the halon gas is an ozone layer depleting gas. Therefore, FM200® or CO2
systems shall be applicable to substation building

FM200®: FM200® is a clean, safe, zero ozone-depleting and proven extinguishing gas
▪ Quick discharge (the minimum design concentration is within 10 seconds)
▪ Very effective fire extinguisher (suitable for Computer & telecommunication areas,
Power generation)
▪ Safe for use in normally occupied areas
▪ Very low environmental impact (With an ODP of zero)
▪ Harmless for sensitive equipment

CO2: An extremely effective extinguishing gas that has been used for many years, it is
best suited to more specialist applications such as:
▪ Electrical switchgear enclosures
▪ Low and High Voltage Transformer rooms
▪ Paint spray cubicles
▪ Flammable liquid storage areas
▪ Process machinery
However, CO2 is not suited to normally occupied spaces. Although it is immediately
recognizing as a greenhouse gas contributing to global warming

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 18 Version 1.0
 Building Service

< Figure 1 > Example of formation diagram for FM-200 extinguishing system

< Figure 2 > Example of formation diagram for CO2 extinguishing system

5.3 Power transformers

The most common type of extinguishing arrangement employed to protect transformers
is water (automatic water spray system). Occasionally, foam systems are installed to
extinguish power transformer fires (IEEE 979). However, if the fire occurred at power
transformers, there are some difficulties to extinguish the fire and repair it practically as

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 18 Version 1.0
 Building Service

adopting the fire extinguishing system including the automatic water spray system

Considering these matters, it is recommended that a firewall to prevent the fire spreading
along with hand or trolley mounted extinguishers shall be installed for power transformer
fire measures. Therefore, in case of the fire, a firewall shall firstly prevent spreading the
fire to another power transformer and then flames shall be extinguished by hand or trolley
mounted extinguishers

5.3.1 Firewall
A firewall shall be installed for power transformers. Structures and materials are
recommended as follows
a) Firewall materials shall be concrete or something equivalent to concrete that can
withstand fire for more than 2 hours

b) In general, reinforced concrete is used for the firewall and a 30 cm thickness can
endure fire for 2 hours

c) Size of firewall
▪ Height: 0.5 m higher than the height of power transformer
▪ Length: 2 m (for one side) longer than the length of power transformer
▪ Thickness: more than 30 cm
▪ Distance from power transformer: more than 2 m

5.3.2 Diagrams of firewall

0.3m

h2
TR TR h1

GL

h2 ≥ h1 + 0.5 m

< Figure 3 > Firewall height and thickness for power transformer

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 18 Version 1.0
 Building Service

2m

L3

L2 L1 TR TR

L3

L1 + 2L3 ≤ L2 (L3 ≥ 2m)

< Figure 4 > Firewall length for power transformer

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 18 Version 1.0
 Building Service

Appendix A : References

NFPA 11 Portable fire extinguishers

NFPA 12 Standard on carbon dioxide extinguishing systems
IEEE 944 IEEE Recommended practice for the application and testing of
uninterruptible power supplies for power generating substations
IEC 60146-1 General requirements and line commutated converters
KS A 3011 Luminance standards
Transmission and distribution electrical engineering, Dr C.R Bayliss
KEPCO Design standard

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 18 Version 1.0
 Building Service

Appendix B: Example of Internal Lighting

1. Design Procedure
The following design procedure is suggested
a) Decide upon the level of illumination required
b) Determine the mounting height of the fittings above the working plane, a desktop
height is usually taken as 0.85 m above floor level
c) Ascertain the minimum number of fittings to be employed from the spacing factor,
normally taken as 1.5 for batten type fluorescent fittings) and the mounting height

for H m = 2.25 and spacing factor 1.5, then minimum number of fittings for a 20 m ×

⎡ 20 ⎤ ⎡ 10 ⎤ 20 10
10 m room = ⎢ ⎥ ×⎢ ⎥ = × = 18
⎣ (2.25 × 1.5) ⎦ ⎣ (2.25 × 1.5) ⎦ 3.37 3.37
(l × b)
d) Calculate room index. RI =
[ H m (l + b)]
l = room length, b = room width, H m = mounting height above the working plane.
20 × 10
For the 20 m × 10 m room RI = =3
2.25(20 + 10)
e) Having decided upon the general type of fitting to be used, ascertain the utilization
factor, UF, from manufacturers’ tables taking into account the reflectance factors of
the room. Since accurate information is rarely available, it is common to take
reflectance factors of 20, 70 and 50 % for the working plane, ceiling and walls
respectively
f) Decide upon the maintenance factor, MF, to be used; typically taken as 0.8, this
allows for a reduced light output from the fitting due to ageing and formation of dust
on the luminaires
g) Calculate the total light input to the room necessary, Φ lumens, to give the
( E × l × b)
illumination level, E lx, required. Total luminous flux Φ =
(UF × MF )
h) Calculate the number and size of fittings required

2. Example of Interior Lighting Calculation Sheet

2.1 Premised conditions

a) 30 m × 10 m room
b) Room height: 3.25 m

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 18 Version 1.0
 Building Service

c) Spacing factor: 1.5

d) Required illumination: 400 lx
e) Utilization factor: 0.67 (from manufacturers’ table)
f) Maintenance factor: 0.8

2.2 Interior lighting calculation sheet

< Table B1 > Lighting calculation sheet

Parameters Formula Notes
1 Room length, m l 30
2 Room width, m b 15
3 Room height, m H1 3.25
4 Working plane, m H2 0.85
Fitting suspension
5 H3 0.1
height, m
Height above working
6 H m = H 1 − ( H 2 + H 3) 2.3
plane, H m
(l × b)
7 Room index, RI RI= 4.35
H m (l + b)
Spacing factor SF and
l b
8 minimum number of × 38
( SF × H m ) ( SF × H m )
fittings
Reflection factor-
9 RFc 0.7
ceiling
10 Reflection factor-walls RFw 0.5
11 Reflection factor-floor RFF 0.2
Average illumination
12 E AV 400 lx
required, E lx
13 Utilization factor UF 0.67
14 Maintenance factor MF 0.8
(400 × 30 × 15)
Lamp flux required, ( E AV × l × b)
15 (0.67 × 0.8)
lumens (UF × MF )
=335821 lumens
Power and type of 1800mm, 75W twin fluorescent wrap
16
fittings around enclosure
17 Select lamp luminous 5750 lumens per tube (after 2000 hours) 1.8×5750 = 10350

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 18 Version 1.0
 Building Service

flux, Φ lumens Use 1.8×individual output for twin Lumens per fitting
fitting
335821
Number of fittings ( E AV × l × b) = 32.4,
18 N= 10350
required, N (Φ × UF × MF )
Say 33
Actual number of
19 For a symmetrical layout 34
fittings, N’
Projected actual ( N '×Φ × UF × MF )
20 419 lx
illuminance, lx (l × b)

Spacing
Fitting
suspension H3 Ceiling level
Luminaires
height

Mounting Hm
height H1, Room height

Working plane

H2, Working plane

above floor level

Floor level

< Figure B1 > Relationship between each fitting

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 18 Version 1.0
 Building Service

Appendix C: External Lighting

1. General
For substation access road lighting calculations, the reflective properties of the road
surface must really be known, the surface luminance bay be calculated by the point
calculation method from knowledge of the luminous intensity of the lighting fittings
involved and the addition of the contributions of their partial luminances, such hand
computations would be time consuming and assistance may be obtained from the major
lighting fitting manufacturers who have computer programs to determine the correct type

2. Point Calculation Method

a) The illumination E p lx at a location d meters from a point source of intensity I

candela is given by the cosine law of illumination as shown below

I cos θ
Ep =
d2

Intensity I cd
Iθ

Illuminance at point P
I cos θ
Ep =
d2
P

< Figure C1 > Illumination from a point source

b) For the more general case the illumination Eγ lx at point P on any plane the normal of

which makes an angle γ with the direction of incidence of the light is given by
I θ cos 2 θ cos γ
Eγ =
h2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 18 Version 1.0
 Building Service

Iθ

θ
I θ cos 2 θ cos γ
Eγ =
h h2

< Figure C2 > Illumination on any plane

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 18 Version 1.0
 GD6 6000
Version 1.0: Oct 7, 2007

Survey & Profile

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ··························································································································· 1

2. Route Selection ··········································································································· 1

3. Survey ························································································································· 1
3.1 Permanent survey monuments ··········································································· 1
3.1.1 General ···································································································· 1
3.1.2 Permanent bench marks ··········································································· 2
3.1.3 Ground survey ························································································· 2
3.1.4 Observation techniques ············································································ 2
3.1.5 Field accuracy ·························································································· 3
3.1.6 Survey information and reports ································································ 3
3.1.7 Protection of monuments ········································································· 4
3.2 Setting out ········································································································· 4
3.3 As-built survey ·································································································· 5
4. Mapping ······················································································································ 6
4.1 General ·············································································································· 6
4.2 Spot levels ········································································································· 6
4.3 Accuracy of grid ································································································ 6
4.4 Accuracy of detail ······························································································ 6
4.5 Accuracy of spot levels ······················································································ 7
5. Profiles Drawings ······································································································· 7
5.1 Size & scales ····································································································· 7
5.2 Details ··············································································································· 7
5.3 Sag templates ···································································································· 8
5.4 Tower location on profiles ················································································· 9
6. Clearance ···················································································································· 9
6.1 Clearance to obstacles ······················································································· 9
6.2 Crossing of obstacles ························································································· 10
7. Environmental Preservation ····················································································· 10

ii
 Survey & Profile

1. Scope

This standard specifies the basic requirements for survey work, mapping and reporting
to be carried out for establishment of permanent survey monuments and bench marks, for
setting out the work, and for as-built surveys if needed about 66KV overhead transmission
line.

2. Route Selection

The preliminary routing work determines the physical constrains involved and allows
the establishment of the least-cost solution for the overhead line. In addition, by careful
preliminary routing the effect on the environment may be minimized.
The detailed routing survey and profile allows the towers to be located in the most
economic manner. It will take into account proximity restrictions and maintenance of
specified design parameters such as electrical clearances, wind span, angle of deviation, etc.
The engineer will indicate the proposed route of the transmission line either on maps or
during visits to the sites, with approximate positions of the angle and terminal tower and
the positions of intermediate towers.

3. Survey

3.1 Permanent survey monuments

3.1.1 General
GECOL will supply to contractor available description cards of permanent survey
monuments giving their location, co-ordinates and height above datum.
Contractor shall establish any additional permanent survey monuments required to form
a reference system for setting out based on identical plan metric and height datum. Each
monument shall be visible from at least two adjacent monuments and the distance between
monuments shall not exceed 2000 m.
Permanent survey monuments provided by GECOL and established by contractor shall
be the basis for all setting out performed by contractor.
Permanent survey monuments shall be to class II second order accuracy as defined by
the United States National Ocean Survey (N.O.S).
Permanent survey monuments are intended to remain stable for minimum period of five
years and shall be constructed.
The contractor shall inscribe on each permanent survey monument the station name or

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 10 Version 1.0
 Survey & Profile

number conforming to an identification system to be approved by GECOL.

3.1.2 Permanent bench marks

Permanent bench marks shall be combined with permanent survey monuments or shall
be established where indicated on the drawings or as directed on the drawings or as
directed by GECOL. Permanent bench marks shall be constructed in the same form as
permanent survey monuments.

3.1.3 Ground survey

Contractor shall carry out a closed traverse survey establishing permanent survey
monuments with co-ordinates calculated with reference to the Libyan transverse Mercator
system using the existing horizontal datum and levels related to the National height datum.
(i.e. mean Sea level of the Mediterranean Sea as defined by the survey department of Libya
crica 1986). The contractor may utilize the existing network of survey control established
for the main conveyance.
Contractor shall carry out a full leveling network, connecting all GMPP Bench marks
used in the survey with each other, with permanent survey monuments and permanent
bench marks. Before field observations begin from new monuments they shall be directly
related to adjacent GMPP bench marks.

3.1.4 Observation techniques

The following observation techniques shall be utilized when establishing permanent
survey monuments:

Horizontal Ground Control:

Requirements for horizontal ground control shall be as follows:-

i. Horizontal angle observations:

• Four full sets with a one second theodolite
• Maximum residual error shall not exceed four seconds.
ii. Vertical angle observations:
• Four full sets with a one second theodolite
• Maximum residual error shall not exceed four seconds.
iii.Distance measurements:
• With middle/long range electro-optical distance meter equipment.
• Two distance in each direction between monuments.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 10 Version 1.0
 Survey & Profile

• Meteorological observations at both stations for pressure and temperature.

• Maximum discrepancy between forward and inverse distances 5mm +, - 4ppm.

The relative positional accuracy of traverses shall be a minimum of 1:20,000 following

adjustment. Azimuth adjustment shall not exceed two seconds per angle station.

Vertical Control
Levels shall be double run (from A to B and from B to A) using automatic levels
observing both scales of precise invar rods between monuments in such a manner as to
produce a continuous ground profile if required. Level instruments shall be provided with
micrometers. Distances for profile stations shall be taped or calculated from stadia readings.
Length of sight shall not exceed 50 meters.

Global Positioning System

If Global Positioning Systems (GPS) are used then the subcontractor shall meet all
requirements in the “Guidelines and specifications for GPS Surveys” Draft 2.0 produced
by Geodetic Survey Division, Canada Center for Surveying.

3.1.5 Field accuracy

The maximum closing error for all distances between points used to determine the
location of the grid and permanent survey monuments shall not exceed 5mm +,- 4ppm
when checked by precise measurement. For distances between adjacent permanent survey
monuments of less than 300 meters the maximum error shall not be greater than +, - 6mm.
The maximum error between stated difference in level and the difference in level
measured by precise spirit leveling between any two points used as permanent bench
marks or permanent survey monuments shall not exceed +,-8mm multiplied by square root
of K, where K is the distance in Kilometers between the two points being considered, or
+,-5mm, whichever is the greater.

3.1.6 Survey information and reports

Contractor shall furnish original field survey notes, calculations, computations which
document errors of closure and accuracies of work, descriptions of the monument locations
and daily logs to owner on a weekly basis.
Contractor shall furnish A4 (210mm x 297mm) or equivalent laminated drawings with
reference numbers, location diagrams, location descriptions, color photographs, Libyan
Transverse Mercator co-ordinates or required datum and vertical control datum for all

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 10 Version 1.0
 Survey & Profile

control monuments. Drawings shall be submitted as monuments are installed and their
locations recorded. Contractor shall furnish final tabulations in book form showing
monument numbers with relevant co-ordinate and elevations.

3.1.7 Protection of monuments

Contractor shall protect previously established or newly constructed survey monuments
and permanent bench marks with guard rails. No site traffic, storage areas, temporary
buildings or plant shall be allowed within 25 m of the monument. Should any damage be
caused to either the monument or the guard rail contractor shall verify the accuracy of
location and level of the survey point or shall, if directed by owner to do so, establish a
new permanent survey monument.

3.2 Setting out

Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the work and for the
correctness of the position, levels, dimensions and alignment of all parts of the work.
Setting out surveys shall be to a third order accuracy. Horizontal angle observations will
be two full sets with the maximum spread from the mean being five seconds of arc.
Positional misclosures after adjustment shall be a minimum of 1:5,000.
The maximum vertical misclosure between any two points shall not exceed +, - 12mm
multiplied by the square root of the distance between them in kilometers, or +, - 10mm,
whichever is the greater.
The setting out survey shall serve as a basis for completion of survey records. These
records shall show the exact location and detail of the utilities and other project facilities.
In addition, the notes and records shall provide data for future planning and construction. It
is essential that accurate and complete survey records be kept at all times. Contractor shall
be responsible for gathering this information and recording it in the field notes in a collated
manner.
The centerline of utilities shall be established as shown on the drawing or directed by
owner. Stakes or wooden pegs shall be set along the centerline at 50 m intervals, at points
of intersection (PI) and at tangent points (TP), and on each side of the centerline at a
sufficient distance so as not to be disturbed during construction. Existing services within
fifty 50 m of proposed utilities shall be staked and flagged and the markers maintained
throughout the construction period.
The contractor shall measure distances between tower structures locating centers which
shall be duly marked starting tower number and type.
Where a proposed utility crosses an existing service, the location of the existing service

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 10 Version 1.0
 Survey & Profile

shall be determined at the intersection and at not more than 50 m intervals for a minimum
of 200 m on either side of the crossing.
Where a proposed utility parallels an existing service, the existing service shall be staked
and flagged at 50 meters intervals. Ties to the centerline of the proposed utility from the
existing service shall be made at maximum intervals of 100meters and at all PIs. All ties
shall be intervisible along each section of the utility and service.
Bench marks shall be established at intervals of 3 kilometers along alignments and in the
vicinity of all structures and crossings.
Setting out stakes or pegs and bench marks which are disturbed by construction shall be
reinstated or relocated. Notes shall be made of the reasons for the reinstatement and in the
case of relocation all evidence of the original markers shall be removed.
Contractor shall confirm ground levels along the route of all utilities and shall prepare
route and profile drawings at 1:2,500 horizontal 1:500 vertical or such other suitable scales
as shall be approved by the owner, showing cable or overhead line levels and the precise
illustration of all fittings, junctions, towers, poles and other appurtenances. Profiles shall be
submitted of a utility.
Stout Perspex sag templates and height templates shall be made in the same scale as the
profile drawing for checking tower locations. Three 3 sets of these shall be issued to the
owner before tower locations can be approved. Sag templates shall show for the conductor
the sag at 75℃ and still air over spans of at least 1.5 times the basic span.
The contractor shall submit all requested survey records and drawings in an approved
digital format.

3.3 As-built survey

The as-built survey shall be made during and immediately after construction and
recorded in field books similar to those used for the setting out survey. The as-built survey
shall be run in the same direction and in the same manner as the setting out survey.
Horizontal ties shall be made between all utilities and existing services using the same
corners or markers that were used as tie points for the setting out survey. Horizontal angles
and distances shall be observed to give grid co-ordinates to each intersection point and
tangent point. When paralleling other utilities, ties to the existing utilities done with a steel-
core heavy-duty tape and all utility lengths shall be recorded. The following utility features
and appropriate stationing shall be recorded:

• Length, elevation and height above ground of each installed utility.

• Description of each utility, tower type and number.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 10 Version 1.0
 Survey & Profile

• Location of major engineering items within each utility service.

• Centerline of all other existing services, haul roads and collector pipelines etc.

The results of the as-built survey shall be recorded on the as-built drawings. A complete
set of as-built drawings and related survey information shall be supplied to GECOL on
completion of the works.
The contractor shall submit all requested as-built drawings and related survey
information in an approved digital format.

4. Mapping

4.1 General
Contractor shall use the existing topographic mapping and produce ground survey
profiles from further field surveys, to show notable topographic features such as wadis,
sand dunes, steep changes in slope, existing haul roads, roads, pipelines, overhead cables
and underground services crossing or adjacent to the right-of-way shall be indicated.
Contractor shall perform his mapping work in accordance with the following articles.

4.2 Spot levels

Spot levels shall be determined precise spirit leveling from permanent bench marks.
Spot levels shall be shown at all road intersections, along the center line of all roads and
accesses and all significant changes of slope crossing or adjacent to the right-of-way.

4.3 Accuracy of grid

The grid, permanent survey monuments and ground control points shall be plotted and
drawn to an accuracy of 0.2 mm at mapping scale relative to the straight lines forming the
reference axis.

4.4 Accuracy of detail

All plotted detail shall be field checked. The plan position of plotted detail shall be such
that no point of well defined detail shall contain a co-ordinate error of more than +,-
0.5mm at mapping scale when measured from the nearest grid line, permanent survey
monuments or survey control points.
The distance on the drawing between any two well defined points of detail, when
checked by horizontal ground measurement, shall not contain an error of more than +,-
0.5mm at mapping scale.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 10 Version 1.0
 Survey & Profile

4.5 Accuracy of spot levels

The values of all spot levels, when checked by precise spirit leveling from datum shall
be correct to within the following tolerance for the appropriate scale:

• 1/500 scale ± 0.02m,

• 1/1000 scale ± 0.1m,
• 1/2500 scale ± 0.3m,
• 1/5000 scale ± 0.3m,
• 1 /10000 scale ± 1.0m.

5. Profiles Drawings

5.1 Size & scales

Unless specified to the contrary the scales of the profiles shall be
• 1 : 2500 horizontally and
• 1 : 500 vertically

The profiles shall be plotted with the direction of the line route left to right on the profile
sheet. In general, individual profile sheets shall commence and finish at tension supports
but where this is not practicable and continuation sheets are found to be necessary the
ground line is to be drawn so that there is an overlap of at least 300 mm between adjacent
sheets. Each section shall normally be started on a new sheet. The date of survey of each
section shall be added.

If more than one section is drawn on one sheet a gap shall be left in the ground line of
not less than 200 mm.

5.2 Details
The following details and information are to be included on the profile drawings:

• The direction of the line and angle of deviation are to be shown stating also whether
the deviation is left or right. Where reliable maps of reasonable scale and accuracy are
not available for locating and plotting support positions, survey methods acceptable to
the engineer shall be employed to establish grid co-ordinates and supports towers and
ground features shall be related to these. (a)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 10 Version 1.0
 Survey & Profile

• All features such as hedges, fences, graves, ditches, roads railways, rivers, buildings,
canals, telephone and railway lines and all power lines shall be shown. Road numbers
or name of roads shall be stated or, if unclassified, the destination. (b)

• The visual nature of the ground shall be noted, whether cultivated, woodlands, etc.
with special reference to marsh, soft ground or rock and other relevant information
such as soil instability. (c)

• All buildings or high obstructions within 30 m of the centre line shall be shown dotted
at their measured height with the distance left or right of line indicated. (d)

• Where the ground contour rises to a point which is less than 100 mm from the top of
the profile sheet, the ground line shall be terminated and continued on a new sheet
with an overlap of 300 m of line route. (e)

• The following detail shall be shown for crossings of power lines. (f)
- Voltage and type of construction;
- Ground levels at point of crossing and support structures;
- Height of top conductor and earth wire at point of crossing and at points of support;
- Distance from crossing point to support structures along route of line to be crossed;
- Angle of crossing;
- Temperature at time levels were taken (state date and time);
- Support structure numbers;
• Along the bottom of the profile sheet shall be drawn, to the same scale as the horizontal
scale of the profile, a route map showing all relevant details, within a distance of 30 m
each side of the route centre line. All items covered by subparagraphs (a) and (f) above,
as appropriate, shall be included.

5.3 Sag templates

Templates are prepared on Perspex (≈3mm thick) with all the engraving on the back
using the same scales as the ground profile. The templates show
• The maximum sag condition curve (75℃, No wind)
• The minimum sag condition curve
• Basic span and cases up to, say, ±50% above and below the basic span.

With modern computer tools the sag/tension relationship may be calculated using full

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 10 Version 1.0
 Survey & Profile

catenary equations. Normally the parabolic approximation will suffice unless special long
spans or hilly terrain with slope >15˚ are envisaged. Using the parabolic approximation
the tension for any equivalent span is then given by equation in the sag & tension design
standard.

5.4 Tower location on profiles

It is necessary that route maps, and profile drawings upon which shall be indicated the
proposed location and type of each tower, span, section length, (i.e.)(distance between
tension towers), equivalent spans, wind and weight span, difference in level between phase
conductor attachment points and the sag templates used. Also on the profiles shall be
plotter the relevant position of the bottom or lowest phase conductor at the specified
maximum conductor temperature and at the minimum statutory ground clearance specified
below to the phase conductor line.
Towers shall be so located that span criteria specified in GD6 6000 Towr is not exceeded.

6. Clearance

6.1 Clearance to obstacles

Clearances to obstacle shall be in accordance with criteria specified in the following
standard.
The following minimum clearances for the conductors against maximum sag at 75° C
with no wind for the purpose of crossing over shall always be maintained.

• Normal ground 8m
• Main roads 12 m
• Secondary roads 10 m
• Railways
- from the rail plane 16 m
- from the components of electric traction system 3m
• Major water pipelines 12 m
• Gas pipelines 12 m
• Wadi 12 m
• Power and Telecommunications lines 3m
• Trees 4.5 m
• Right of way 60m (Total width)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 10 Version 1.0
 Survey & Profile

6.2 Crossing of obstacles

Crossing of building is not allowed.
The minimum horizontal distance from the outer conductors to buildings shall be 10 m
with conductors in vertical position.
The minimum horizontal from center of the towers to the nearest part of major water
pipelines, gas pipelines and railways shall be 60 m, unless otherwise specified by the
owner of these installations.
For special crossing such as power or telecommunication lines, road, and passing over
cultivated lands or built up areas, it may be necessary to install a protective to avoid any
accidents, breakdowns and other inconvenience.

7. Environmental Preservation

Preservation of the natural environment is of utmost importance during the execution of

project. Worker involved with the construction shall exercise all possible precautions in
order to leave the construction site and all lands affected by the construction as nearly as
possible in the same condition as it was prior to construction.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 10 Version 1.0
 GD6 6100
Version 1.0: Oct 7, 2007

Steel Tower

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ··························································································································· 1
2. General ······················································································································· 1
3. Tower Types ················································································································ 1
4. The Name of the Tower Member ·············································································· 2
5. Tower Heights ············································································································ 2
6. Clearance from Tower Steelwork ············································································· 4
7. Weather-Related Loads ····························································································· 5
7.1 Wind velocity ···································································································· 5
7.2 Wind force ········································································································· 5
7.3 Air density factor ······························································································· 5
7.4 Terrain factor ····································································································· 5
7.4.1 Exposure categories ················································································· 6
7.4.2 Effective height ························································································ 7
7.5 Gust response factor ·························································································· 7
7.6 Force coefficient ································································································ 9
7.6.1 Latticed truss structures ··········································································· 9
7.6.2 Conductor and earth wire ········································································· 9
7.6.3 Insulator ··································································································· 10
8. Wind Force Recommended for 66kV Transmission Line ······································ 10
9. Design Basis for Loadings ························································································· 11
9.1 Loads on supports ······························································································ 11
9.1.1 Transverse loads ······················································································· 11
9.1.2 Vertical loads ··························································································· 11
9.1.3 Longitudinal loads ··················································································· 12
9.2 Special loadings ································································································· 12
9.2.1 General ···································································································· 12
9.2.2 Construction and maintenance loads ························································ 12
9.2.3 Diagonal wind load ·················································································· 12

ii
 9.2.4 Single circuit load ···················································································· 13
9.2.5 Lineman ··································································································· 13
9.3 Design temperature ···························································································· 13
10. Loading Assumptions ······························································································ 14
10.1 Suspension (Tangent) towers – 1DD02 type tower ·········································· 14
10.1.1 General ·································································································· 14
10.1.2 Design spans ·························································································· 14
10.1.3 High wind loading – Maximum weight span ········································· 14
10.1.4 High wind loading – Minimum weight span ·········································· 14
10.1.5 Broken wire loading ··············································································· 14
10.1.6 Construction and maintenance loads ······················································ 14
10.2 Angle towers – 1DD10, 1DD30 and 1DD60 type tower ·································· 15
10.2.1 General ·································································································· 15
10.2.2 Design spans ·························································································· 15
10.2.3 High wind loading – Maximum weight span ········································· 15
10.2.4 High wind loading – Minimum weight span ·········································· 15
10.2.5 Broken wire loading – Maximum weight span ······································· 15
10.2.6 Broken wire loading – Minimum weight span ······································· 16
10.2.7 Construction and maintenance loads ······················································ 16
10.3 Dead end/90° towers – 1DD90 type tower ······················································ 16
10.3.1 General ·································································································· 16
10.3.2 Design spans ·························································································· 16
10.3.3 High wind loading – Maximum weight span ········································· 16
10.3.4 High wind loading – Minimum weight span ·········································· 16
10.3.5 Broken wire loading – Maximum weight span ······································· 17
10.3.6 Broken wire loading – Minimum weight span ······································· 17
10.3.7 Construction and maintenance loads ······················································ 17
10.4 Gantry tower – 1GT00 type tower ··································································· 17
10.4.1 General ·································································································· 17
10.4.2 Design spans ·························································································· 17
10.4.3 High wind loading ················································································· 17
11. Load Tree ·················································································································· 17

iii
 11.1 Suspension (Tangent) towers – 1DD02 type tower ·········································· 17
11.2 Angle towers – 1DD10 type tower ··································································· 18
11.3 Angle towers –1DD30 and 1DD60 type tower ················································ 19
11.4 Dead end/90° towers – 1DD90 type tower ······················································ 19
12. Steel Quality ············································································································· 20
12.1 General ············································································································ 20
12.1.1 International Standards Organization ····················································· 20
12.1.2 American Society for Testing and Materials ··········································· 20
12.1.3 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) ··································· 21
12.1.4 American Welding Society (AWS) ························································· 21
12.2 Bolts and nuts ·································································································· 22
12.3 Step bolts ········································································································· 22
13. Tower Design ············································································································ 22
13.1 General ············································································································ 22
13.2 Minimum thickness of members ······································································ 23
13.3 Tower bases ····································································································· 23
13.4 Unequal leg extensions – Hill-side conditions ················································· 23
13.5 Long tension members ···················································································· 23
13.6 Connections ····································································································· 24
13.6.1 General ·································································································· 24
13.6.2 Main leg member ··················································································· 24
13.6.3 All other members ·················································································· 24
13.7 Fillers ·············································································································· 24
13.8 Crossarms ········································································································ 25
13.9 Conductor and overhead earth-wire attachments ············································· 25
13.10 Maximum length of members ········································································ 25
13.11 Factor of safety ······························································································ 25
13.11.1 Tower members included stub and cleats ············································· 25
13.11.2 Foundation ··························································································· 25
13.12 Determination of slenderness ratio (L/r) ························································ 25
13.12.1 General ································································································· 25
13.12.2 Single angle members ·········································································· 26

iv
 13.13 Net section ····································································································· 26
13.14 Allowable stresses ························································································· 27
13.14.1 Tension members ················································································· 27
13.14.2 Compression members ········································································· 27
13.14.3 Effective slenderness ratios ·································································· 28
13.15 Ultimate allowable bending, shearing and bearing stress ······························· 29
13.16 Beam – Columns – Combined axial compression and bending ····················· 29
13.17 Maximum allowable slenderness ratios, L/r ·················································· 30
13.17.1 Tension members ················································································· 30
13.17.2 Compression members ········································································· 30
13.18 Allowable bolt stresses ·················································································· 30
13.18.1 Allowable shear stress on bolts for reference only ······························· 30
13.18.2 Allowable bearing stress on bolts ························································· 30
13.19 Bolt spacing and edge distances ···································································· 30
14. Fabrication ··············································································································· 31
14.1 General ············································································································ 31
14.2 Preparation ······································································································ 31
14.3 Shearing and cutting ························································································ 32
14.4 Use of torch ····································································································· 32
14.5 Holes ··············································································································· 32
14.6 Bending ··········································································································· 32
14.7 Welding ··········································································································· 33
14.8 Galvanizing ····································································································· 33
15. Tower Accessories ···································································································· 34
15.1 Anti-Climbing devices and step bolts ······························································ 34
15.1.1 Location and general requirements ························································ 34
15.1.2 Standardization ······················································································ 35
15.1.3 Step bolts ······························································································· 35
15.2 Danger, number, phase and circuit plates ························································· 36
15.2.1 General requirements ············································································· 36
15.2.2 Danger plates (GECOL specification GES 12450) ································· 36
15.2.3 Number plates (GECOL specification GES 12452) ······························· 36

v
 15.2.4 Phase plate (GECOL specification GES 12451) ···································· 37
15.2.5 Circuit plate (GECOL specification GES 12453) ··································· 37
16. Foundation ··············································································································· 37
16.1 General ············································································································ 37
16.2 Type of soil ······································································································ 37
16.3 General design criteria ····················································································· 39
16.3.1 Standards ······························································································· 39
16.3.2 Loading conditions ················································································· 39
16.3.3 Factors of safety ····················································································· 39
16.4 Reinforced concrete foundations ····································································· 40
16.4.1 Type ······································································································· 40
16.4.2 Material ·································································································· 40
16.4.3 Design criteria ························································································ 40
16.5 Special type foundations ·················································································· 41
16.5.1 Type ······································································································· 41
16.5.2 Material ·································································································· 41
16.5.3 Design criteria ························································································ 41
16.6 Measures to be taken in presence of sand dunes ·············································· 44
16.7 Erosion protection in Wadi ·············································································· 44
16.8 Tower Leg/Foundations Interconnections ························································ 44
16.9 Setting tolerance ······························································································ 44
16.10 Tests and acceptance criteria ·········································································· 45
17. Marking ···················································································································· 45
17.1 Members and plates ························································································· 45
17.2 Bolts ················································································································ 46
18. Testing and Inspection ····························································································· 46
18.1 Testing ············································································································· 46
18.2 Full scale tower loading test ············································································ 46
18.3 Assembly test ·································································································· 48
18.4 Other tests ······································································································· 49
18.4.1 Mechanical and chemical properties of tower material ·························· 49
18.4.2 Bolts and nuts ························································································ 49

vi
 18.4.3 Galvanizing ···························································································· 49
19. Packing and Delivery ······························································································· 49

vii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Tower types ···························································································· 1

< Table 2 > Terrain factor ·························································································· 7
< Table 3 > Exposure category constant ···································································· 8
< Table 4 > Wind force ····························································································· 10
< Table 5 > Minimum thickness of members ···························································· 23
< Table 6 > The minimum spacing of bolts and edge distances ································ 31
< Table 7 > Type of soil ···························································································· 38
< Table 8 > Setting tolerance ···················································································· 45

viii
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] transposition section ················································································· 2

[Figure 2] The name of tower member ····································································· 3
[Figure 3] Clearance from tower steelwork ······························································· 4
[Figure 4] The name of tower member ····································································· 24
[Figure 5] The spacing of bolts and edge ·································································· 31
[Figure 6] Spike type anti-climbing device ······························································· 35
[Figure 7] Raft foundation ························································································ 43
[Figure 8] Setting tolerance ······················································································ 45

ix
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

Appendix A : References ·························································································· 51

Appendix B : Tower Configuration ··········································································· 52
Appendix C : Stub and Cleats ··················································································· 57
Appendix D : Mechanical Requirement ···································································· 58
Appendix E : Wind Force Calculation ······································································ 59

x
 Steel Tower

1. Scope

This standard specifies steel tower design for 66kV overhead transmission tower that
consists of single or double circuit with single earth-wire.

2. General

Tower structures shall be of the self-supporting lattice-type galvanized steel frame with
square bases.
The structural designs shall be based on this design and the attached drawings and shall
be in accordance with the most modern techniques of design and fabrication.
The precise loadings shall be determined for each type of tower according to the
methods and loading combinations outlined in this design.
All towers shall have an independent foundation for each of the four legs.
Mounting holes for danger signs, anti-climbing and earthing devices, etc., shall be
provided on each tower.

3. Tower Types

The tower types are classified in table 1 of this design according to the line angle.
< Table 1 > Tower types
Line Angle Maximum Maximum
Type Description
(Degrees) Wind Span (m) Weight Span (m)
1DD02 Tangent Suspension 0 to 2 350 385
1DD10 Light Angle Strain 2 to 10 350 525
1DD30 Medium Angle Strain 10 to 30 350 525
1DD60 Heavy Angle Strain 30 to 60 350 525
Dead End Strain 0 to 45 entry 230 345
1DD90
Extra Heavy Angle 60 to 90 350 525
1GT00 Dead End Strain 0 230 345
Notes

1) Minimum weight spans to be applied 245 m for tower and foundation design.
2) Type:
• First digit represents the number of sub-conductors per phase.
• The letter in second position represents the nominal voltage; D, 66kV

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

• The letter in third position represents the number of circuits; S, Single circuit, D, Double circuit
• The last two digits represent the maximum line angle for the tower; But GT means gantry tower.

3) Transposition tower
If the transmission line is larger, an imbalance in the line constant for each phase would occur. To solve
his problem, a transposition tower should be installed as in the below diagram. Generally, transposition
tower shall be installed in the straight transmission line. The type of transposition tower is classified as
light angle strain; therefore, design condition of transposition follows light angle strain. Transposition
tower picture in Appendix B shows scheme that indicate transposition tower position for reference.

≈1/6 ≈1/3 ≈1/3 ≈1/6

Substation Transposition Transposition Transposition Substation
Gantry Tower Tower Tower Gantry

[Figure 1] Transposition section

4. The Name of the Tower Member

The name of the tower member is indicated in the figure 2.

5. Tower Heights

The basic height for any tower type shall maintain more than 8.0 m Min clearance from
the bottom conductor to the normal ground level at the lowest point in the span. The sag in
the conductor shall be at 75 deg. C still air.
All towers shall be provided with body extensions which will increase the tower height
by 3.0 m, 6.0 m and 9.0 m as required. With the approval of GECOL, tower body
extensions of greater height may be considered in case of the provision of such body
extensions to be economic.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

TITLE :

[Figure 2] The name of tower member

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

The designer shall also design and provide for variation of the lengths of individual legs
of both basic height towers and of body extensions so that the legs may be either 1.0 m and
2.0 m longer or 1.0 m and 2.0 m shorter than standard. The varied leg lengths shall be used
where towers are located on sloping ground.
The detail information of clearances shall be considered with survey & profile design
standard.

6. Clearance from Tower Steelwork

A spacing from the conductor to tower members are determined based on flash over
characteristics of insulators and air gaps for swing angles of the insulator string as well as
the jumper conductor.
A normal insulation clearance and a minimum insulation clearance are considered,
which shall be maintained when the insulator string on the jumper sways by the normal or
maximum swing angle.
The normal swing angle will occur and last for a finite period of time during the
operation, while the maximum swing angle will occur only momentarily.
The allowable swing angle and clearances are defined as followings;
z
Between live metal and tower steelwork in 0 deg. swing; 760 mm
z
Jumper swinging 30 deg. to the vertical; 650 mm
z
Suspension insulator string included 60 deg. to the vertical; 650 mm
z
Shield angle of earth wire in still air; 35 deg. Max.
z
Horizontal spacing between circuits; 5.0 m Min.
z
Vertical spacing between phases on same circuits; 2.7 m Min.

[Figure 3] Clearance from tower steelwork

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

7. Weather-Related Loads

The weather-related loads shall be calculated in accordance with ASCE (American

Society of Civil Engineers) Standard 74, Guidelines for Electrical Transmission Line
Structure Loading and as outlined hereafter.

7.1 Wind velocity

35 m/s (78.75mph) of wind velocity shall be applied to the general regions. 45m/s
(100mph) of wind velocity shall be applied to the regions of Jalo, Tripoli city and Ghat.

7.2 Wind force

The wind force acting on the surface of transmission line components can be determined
by using the force formula, shown in the following equation.
F = Q(ZvV)2GCfA
Where
F The wind force in the direction of wind unless otherwise specified, in pound
Q The air density factor
Zv The terrain factor
V The fastest-mile design wind velocity, in mph
G The gust response factor
Cf Force coefficient values
A The projected or cylindrical area

7.3 Air density factor

The air density factor Q, converts the kinetic energy of moving air into the potential
energy of pressure. For wind speed in mph and pressure in psf, the recommended value is;
Q = 0.00256
This value is based on the specific weight of air at 60˚F at sea level. For some cases, the
effects of temperature and elevation on the air density factor may be considered.

7.4 Terrain factor

The terrain factor, Zv, modifies the basic wind speed to account for terrain and height
effects. It is recognized that wind velocity varies with height because of ground friction
and that the amount of friction varies with ground roughness. The ground roughness is
characterized by the various exposure categories described here.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

7.4.1 Exposure categories

Three terrain roughness or exposure categories are recommended for use with this
standard and are specified in ASCE standard 7-88(ASCE1999b) as follows;
Exposure B: This exposure is classified as urban and suburban areas, well-wooded areas,
or terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions having the size of single-family
dwellings or lager. It is necessary that a distance of 1500 feet or 10 times the height of the
structure, whichever is greater, be representative of Exposure B terrain before this exposure
category can be used for design. If this criterion of distance is not satisfied for a given
direction at the transmission line location, Exposure C should be used for wind in that
direction.
In the use of Exposure B, a question arises as to what is the largest distance of flat
unobstructed terrain located in the middle of a suburban area permitted before the
Exposure C category has to be used. A guideline is 600 feet or 10 times the height of the
structure, whichever is smaller, as the size of intermediate flat open country allowed for
continued use of the Exposure B category.
Exposure C: This exposure is described as flat open country, farms, and grasslands. This
exposure category should be used whenever terrain does not fit the descriptions of the
other exposure categories. It should be noted that this exposure is representative of airport
terrain, where most wind velocity measurements are recorded.
Exposure D: This exposure is described as unobstructed coastal areas directly exposed to
wind flowing over large bodies of water. The Exposure D category is intended to be used
for structures directly exposed to bodies of water and coastal beaches. Structures
located away from beaches and having other structures or buildings between themselves
and the bodies of water are not required to use Exposure D. Exposure D should be used
away from water up to a distance of 1500 feet or 10 times the height of the structure,
whichever is greater, for transmission lines that have unobstructed exposure to wind
blowing over water.
Exposure A is not appropriate for transmission line applications.
Values of the terrain factor, Zv, are listed in Table 2 for Exposure Categories B,C, and D
and for heights up to 200 feet aboveground.
Effects of terrain factor on wind force for the different terrain exposure categories are
significant. It is essential that the appropriate exposure category be selected after careful
review of surrounding terrain. In accordance with Libya terrain, it is recommended that
Exposure C be used. If the designer has absolutely determined that Exposure B or
Exposure D is more appropriate, exposure category B or C can be used.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

< Table 2 > Terrain factor

Height above ground level (ft) Exposure B Exposure C Exposure D
50 0.79 1.06 1.23
60 0.82 1.09 1.26
70 0.85 1.11 1.28
80 0.88 1.14 1.29
90 0.91 1.16 1.31
100 0.93 1.17 1.32
120 0.96 1.20 1.35
140 0.99 1.23 1.37

7.4.2 Effective height

The effective height, z0, for a conductor or ground wire is the height above the ground to
the center of pressure of the wind load. The effective height is used for selection of a
terrain factor, Zv, and wire gust response factor, Gw
The effective height of a conductor and ground wire subjected to wind is influenced by
the blow-out swing of the wire. For the purpose of this design standard, the effective height
of the conductors can be approximated as the average height aboveground of conductor
attachment points to the structure minus one-third the sum of the insulator length (for
suspension insulators only) and the sag of the conductor. The effective height of the ground
wire can be approximated as the height aboveground of the ground wire attachment point
minus one –third the sag of the ground wire. The sag can be assumed for the condition of
bare wire weight, zero wind, and everyday temperature.
The effective height, z0, of the support structures with total heights of 200 feet or less
can be approximated as two-thirds of the total structure height aboveground. This
simplifying assumption will give a uniform terrain factor and wind velocity over the height
of the structure.

7.5 Gust response factor

The gust response factor accounts for the dynamic effects of gusts on the wind response
of transmission line components. It has been recognized that gusts do not envelop the
entire span between transmission structures and that some reduction reflecting the spatial
extent of gusts should be included in the gust loading. However, the dynamic response of
the wires and structures to wind guest may result in amplification of the wind loadings that
tends to offset the spatial reductions.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

The wire gust response factor, Gw is used for computing the peak dynamic wind loads
acting on conductors and overhead ground wire and Gw is a function of exposure category,
design wind span between structures, and the effective height z0.
The structure gust response factor, Gt is used for computing the wind loads acting on
transmission structures and on the insulator and hardware assemblies attached to the
structure and Gt is a function of exposure category and the total structure height, h, rather
than the effective height, z0, which is used in computing the terrain factor, Zv. The effective
height was eliminated from the structure gust response factor relationship by the
assumption that it is equal to two-thirds the height of the structure.
The wire (conductor and earth wire) and structure gust response factors, Gw and Gt
respectively, may be determined from the following equations.

G w = 0.7 + 1.9 E Bw

Gt = 0.7 + 1.9 E Bt

In which
1/ α
⎛ 33 ⎞
E = 4.9 k ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ z0 ⎠
1
Bw =
1 + 0.8L / Ls
1
Bt =
1 + 0.375h / Ls
Where
z0 The effective height, in feet
L The design wind span of conductors and earth wire, in feet
h The total structure height, in feet
α , k, Ls Wind parameters
< Table 3 > Exposure category constant
Exposure Power law Surface drag Turbulence
Category coefficient coefficient scale (ft)
α k Ls
B 4.5 0.010 170
C 7.0 0.005 220
D 10.0 0.003 250

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

7.6 Force coefficient

The force coefficient, Cf, accounts for the effects of a member’s characteristic (shape,
size, orientation with respect to the wind, solidity, shielding, and surface roughness) on the
resultant force. The force coefficient is the ratio of the resulting force per unit area in the
direction of the wind to the applied wind pressure.

7.6.1 Latticed truss structures

7.6.1.1 Solidity
An important factor that influences the force coefficient for lattice truss structures is the
solidity of the frame. The force coefficient for the total structure is dependant on the
airflow resistance of individual members and on the airflow patterns around the members.
The force coefficients are a function of the solidity ratio, Φ, defined as
Φ = Am/Ao
Where
Am The area of all members in the windward face of the structure
Ao The area of all outline in the windward face of the structure
For latticed structures, the solidity ratios for the various tower panels over the height of
the transverse and longitudinal faces may be averaged to simplify the wind load calculation.

7.6.1.2 Shielding
When two members are placed in line with the wind, such as in a latticed tower structure,
the leeward frame is partially shielded by the windward frame. The shielding factor is
defined as the ratio of force coefficient for a shielded frame to the force coefficient for an
unshielded frame.

7.6.1.3 Recommended force coefficient

This standard recommends that force coefficients for square-section latticed truss
structures be determined from ASCE Standard 7-88(1990b) unless other requirements
dictate the design. As a result, the proper coefficient of tower for 66kV transmission line
may be applied to 2.0. These force coefficients account for only the windward, excluding
shield of the leeward face by members in the windward face. In case of including shielding
of the leeward face, the force coefficient shall be applied to 3.0.

7.6.2 Conductor and earth wire

The constant force coefficient value of Cf =1.0 is recommended for single and bundled
conductors and for earth wire, as indicated in the NESC Loadings (NESC 1990).

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

7.6.3 Insulator
The constant force coefficient value of Cf =1.4 is recommended for Insulator and fitting,
as indicated in the KDS 1111. This force coefficient value has no regard for solidity of
insulators.

8. Wind Force Recommended for 66kV Transmission Line

This value is based on basic height tower and the following assumption condition. In
special tower, because several coefficients for calculating wind force are different from the
following value, wind force shall be modified by calculation. In standard tower, wind force
shall be recommended as like the following table.
Assumption condition
z
Exposure Category ; C
z
Power law coefficient ( α ) ; 7.0
z
Surface drag coefficient (k) ;0.005
z
Turbulence scale (Ls) ; 220 ft
z
Wind span; 1148.3 ft (350m)
z
The height of tower ; 98.4 ft (30m)
z
Force coefficient ; tower 2.0, conductor 1.0, earth wire 1.0, insulator 1.4
- The value of force coefficient for tower does not consider shielding factor.
- The value of force coefficient for insulator does not consider solidity factor.
- In case of conductor and earth wire, shielding and solidity factor is considered in
the force coefficient.

< Table 4 > Wind force

Wind velocity Tower Conductor Earth wire Insulator
Area
(m/s) (daN/m2) (daN/m2) (daN/m2) (daN/m2)
35 235 90 100 180 Other areas
Jalo, Tripoli city
45 380 145 160 285
and Ghat

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

9. Design Basis for Loadings

The tower design loadings shall be calculated in accordance with ASCE (American
Society of Civil Engineers) Standard 10, Design of Latticed Steel Transmission Structure
and as outlined hereafter. Shielding factor of the leeward face shall be applied to 1.5 for
tower and solidity factor of insulator shall be applied to 0.5 for insulator.

9.1 Loads on supports

9.1.1 Transverse loads
(a) Due to wind on conductors
z
Case1: In case of area that wind velocity is 35m/s
Maximum projected area of conductors; 90 daN/m2
z
Case2: In case of area that wind velocity is 45m/s
Maximum projected area of conductors; 145 daN/m2
(b) Due to wind on earth wire
z
Case1: In case of area that wind velocity is 35m/s
Maximum projected area of earth-wire; 100 daN/m2
z
Case2: In case of area that wind velocity is 45m/s
Maximum projected area of earth-wire; 160 daN/m2
(c) Due to wind on insulators
z
Case1: In case of area that wind velocity is 35m/s
Maximum cylindrical area of insulator; 0.5 × 180 daN/m2
z
Case2: In case of area that wind velocity is 45m/s
Maximum cylindrical area of insulator; 0.5 × 285 daN/m2
(d) Due to wind on tower itself
z
Case1: In case of area that wind velocity is 35m/s
Maximum projected area of tower steel members; 1.5 × 235 daN/m2
z
Case2: In case of area that wind velocity is 45m/s
Maximum projected area of tower steel members; 1.5 × 380 daN/m2
(e) Combined load due to line deviation
(f) Diagonal wind load; See clause 9.2.3

9.1.2 Vertical loads

(a) The weight of conductors and earth-wire
(b) The weight of insulators and hardware for conductors and earth-wire
(c) Special vertical load due to different level of tower with adjacent towers

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

(d) Tower dead weight.

9.1.3 Longitudinal loads

(a) Unbalanced tension load due to different span of strain towers;
20% of maximum working tension shall be considered at normal condition for
1DD30, 1DD60 and 1DD90 (angle tower condition only) type tower.
(b) Maximum working tension due to broken condition of conductors and earth-wire
(c) Maximum working tension on terminal position (dead end) tower
(d) Diagonal wind load; see clause 9.2.3

9.2 Special loadings

9.2.1 General
Special care is required during construction and maintenance operations as they are the
occasions when failure of a line component is most likely to cause injury or loss of life.
Construction and maintenance practices should be regulated to eliminate unnecessary
and temporary loads which would otherwise demand expensive reinforcing of the supports.

9.2.2 Construction and maintenance loads

(a) Tower erection procedures frequently impose dynamic and unbalanced loads. The
strength of all lifting points and of all components should be verified for the static
loads produced by the proposed erection method.
(b) In the calculation of loads on the structures, wire tensions shall be used as everyday
temperature still air condition.
(c) Vertical loads resulting from the tensions as determined above shall be calculated for
the vertical angles applicable in any combination of loads.
(d) Angle tower should withstand the transverse loads produced by the tensions as
determined above.
(e) Supports used as dead-ends during stringing and sagging shall withstand longitudinal
loads resulting from the sagging tensions given above in any combination of loads.

9.2.3 Diagonal wind load

Transverse wind loadings shall be calculated as per wind span in clause 3, but with ø =
45º. These shall be combined with the vertical loads due to the weight spans given in
clause 3.
This load case applied to 1DD02 and 1DD10 type tower only.
The diagonal wind loading shall not be considered as the broken wire conditions.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

In case of area that wind velocity is 35m/s, the diagonal wind loads may be considered
as follows:
z
For tower body; (Pa × 1.42 × 1.5 × 235 daN/m2) × 0.71 in the transverse and
longitudinal direction simultaneously.
z
For crossarm; (Pa × 0.75 × 1.5 × 235 daN/m2) × 0.71 in the transverse and
longitudinal direction simultaneously.
z
For conductor; (Pa x 0.75 x 90 daN/m2) × 0.71 in the transverse and longitudinal
direction simultaneously.
z
For earth wire; (Pa x 0.75 x 100 daN/m2) × 0.71 in the transverse and longitudinal
direction simultaneously

In case of area that wind velocity is 45m/s, the diagonal wind loads may be considered
as follows:
z
For tower body; (Pa × 1.42 × 1.5 × 380 daN/m2) × 0.71 in the transverse and
longitudinal direction simultaneously.
z
For crossarm; (Pa × 0.75 × 1.5 × 380 daN/m2) × 0.71 in the transverse and
longitudinal direction simultaneously.
z
For conductor; (Pa x 0.75 x 145 daN/m2) × 0.71 in the transverse and longitudinal
direction simultaneously.
z
For earth wire; (Pa x 0.75 x 160 daN/m2) × 0.71 in the transverse and longitudinal
direction simultaneously.
Where, Pa = Projected area of one face

9.2.4 Single circuit load

All double circuit towers shall be designed for both single circuit and double circuit
loading. The single circuit loading includes one earth-wire and only one three phase circuit.
The single circuit loading shall not be considered as the broken wire conditions.

9.2.5 Lineman
All structural members that may be required to support a lineman should demonstrate,
by calculation, the capacity to support a 1500N load, applied vertically at their mid-point.

9.3 Design temperature

The following design temperatures shall be considered for tower design

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

z
EDS (Every Day Stress); +25 degree C still air condition.
z
MSC (Maximum Sag Condition); +75 degree C still air condition.
z
MLC (Maximum Load Condition); +10 degree C with wind condition.
z
Minimum temperature for reference; -5 degree C still air condition.

10. Loading Assumptions

10.1 Suspension (Tangent) towers – 1DD02 type tower

10.1.1 General
Suspension (Tangent) towers shall be designed to withstand the different combinations
of loads as specified hereafter. All members sloped at less than 30º to the horizontal shall
be capable of carrying a central vertical load of 1500 N without permanent distortion.

10.1.2 Design spans

Design spans shall be as given in clause 3.

10.1.3 High wind loading – Maximum weight span

The towers shall be designed to withstand the transverse wind loadings acting on the
different components of the line calculated as per clause 9.1. These shall be combined with
the vertical loads (including those due to insulators and line accessories), due to the weight
spans given in clause 3.

10.1.4 High wind loading – Minimum weight span

Transverse wind loadings shall be as in clause 10.1.3 combined with minimum vertical
loads.

10.1.5 Broken wire loading

The towers shall be designed to withstand the breakage of any one conductor or one
earth-wire. The working tensions of conductor shall be taken 70% of maximum working
tension.
50% of the vertical loads shall be applied to the attachment points on the broken side of
the conductor and/or earth-wire.

10.1.6 Construction and maintenance loads

The tower shall be designed accordance with clause 9.2.2.
The towers shall be designed to withstand twice the stringing or sagging tensions

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

combined with the resultant vertical loads.

These loading conditions shall be verified with every possible combination of stringing
sequence on conductors and earth-wire.

10.2 Angle towers – 1DD10, 1DD30 and 1DD60 type tower

10.2.1 General
The towers shall be designed for both single circuit and double circuit loading as
described in clause 10.1.1.
The additional loads due to wind on jumper strings, and the weight of jumper strings,
shall be taken into account when determining the design loadings of heavy angle (1DD60
type) tower only.
Angle towers shall be designed to withstand the different combinations of loads as
described hereafter.
All members sloped at less than 30° to the vertical shall be capable of carrying a central
vertical load of 1500 N without permanent distortion.

10.2.2 Design spans

These shall be as given in clause 3.

10.2.3 High wind loading – Maximum weight span

The towers shall be designed to withstand the transverse wind loadings acting on the
different components of the line calculated as per clause 9.1. These shall be combined with
the vertical loads (including those due to insulators and line accessories), due to the weight
spans given in clause 3.

10.2.4 High wind loading – Minimum weight span

The loads as calculated in clause 10.2.3 shall be applied with minimum vertical loads.

10.2.5 Broken wire loading – Maximum weight span

Any two broken conductors or one conductor and one earth-wire with minimum angle
and maximum angle of line deviation and tensions in unbroken conductors and vertical
loads calculated as above. 50% of the vertical loads shall be applied to the attachment
points on the broken side of the conductor and/or earth-wire.
For the single circuit tower, broken condition shall be considered any one conductor or
earth-wire broken with above loads.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

10.2.6 Broken wire loading – Minimum weight span

The loads as calculated in clause 10.2.5 shall be applied with minimum vertical loads.

10.2.7 Construction and maintenance loads

The tower shall be designed in accordance with clause 9.2.2.
The towers shall be designed to withstand twice the stringing or sagging tensions
combined with the resultant vertical loads.
These loading conditions shall be verified with every possible combination of stringing
sequence on conductors and earth-wire.

10.3 Dead end/90° towers – 1DD90 type tower

10.3.1 General
Dead End/90° towers shall be designed for both single and double circuit loading as
described in clause 10.1.1.
The additional loads due to wind on jumper strings and the weight of jumper strings
shall be taken into account when determining the design loadings of these towers.
Dead end towers shall be designed to withstand the different combinations of loads as
described hereafter.
All members sloped at less than 30º to the vertical shall be capable of carrying a central
vertical load of 1500 N without permanent distortion.

10.3.2 Design spans

These shall be as given in clause 3.

10.3.3 High wind loading – Maximum weight span

The towers shall be designed to withstand this loading condition as calculated in clause
10.2.3 for an angle of line deviation of 90º.
The tower shall be designed to withstand, when erected at actual angles to the incoming
line, the loads imposed by the conductors and earth-wires strung on the line side only with
a longitudinal wind on the tower.
The entry line angle of Dead end tower shall be considered from 0 to 45 degrees with
maximum working tension and the other side, 0 degree with slack span.

10.3.4 High wind loading – Minimum weight span

The loads as calculated in clause 10.3.3 shall be applied with minimum vertical loads.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

10.3.5 Broken wire loading – Maximum weight span

The tower shall be designed to withstand this loading condition as for clause 10.2.5 for
both 0º and 90º angle.

10.3.6 Broken wire loading – Minimum weight span

The loads calculated as clause 10.3.5 above shall be applied with minimum vertical
loads.

10.3.7 Construction and maintenance loads

The loads calculated and applied in clause 10.2.7 above shall be applied for angles of 0°
and 90°.

10.4 Gantry tower – 1GT00 type tower

10.4.1 General
Gantry tower shall be designed for entry position of substation or power plant. This type
of tower has to one beam and two columns for one circuit with two earth wires.

10.4.2 Design spans

These shall be as given in clause 3.

10.4.3 High wind loading

The towers shall be designed to withstand the transverse wind loadings acting on the
different components of the line calculated as per clause 9.1 and maximum working
tensions in longitudinal direction. These shall be combined with the vertical loads
(including those due to insulators and line accessories), due to the weight spans given in
clause 3.
Broken wire, diagonal wind, construction and maintenance conditions are not required
for this tower.

11. Load Tree

The load tree of tower design loadings may be usually listed as like the following clause.

11.1 Suspension (Tangent) towers – 1DD02 type tower

z
Case 1: All wire intact with wind and max. weight span
z
Case 2: All wire intact with wind and min. weight span

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

z
Case 3: Shield wire broken with wind and max. weight span
z
Case 4~6: Any one phase broken with wind and max. weight span
z
Case 7: Shield wire stringing at EDS
z
Case 8~10: Any one phase stringing at EDS
z
Case 11: Diagonal wind load and max. weight span
z
Case 12: Diagonal wind load and min. weight span
z
Case 13: One circuit not installed with wind and max. weight span
z
Case 14: One circuit not installed with wind and min. weight span

11.2 Angle towers – 1DD10 type tower

z
Case 1: All wire intact with wind and max. weight span
z
Case 2: All wire intact with wind and min. weight span
z
Case 3~ Case 5: Shield & any one phase broken with wind, max. weight span and
max angle
z
Case 6~ Case 8: Shield & any one phase broken with wind, max. weight span and
min. angle
z
Case 9~ Case 11: Shield & any one phase broken with wind, min. weight span and
max. angle
z
Case 12~ Case 14: Shield & any one phase Broken with wind, min. weight span and
min. angle
z
Case 15~ Case 20: Any two phases broken with wind, max. weight span and max.
angle
z
Case 21~ Case 26: Any two phases broken with wind, max. weight span and min.
angle
z
Case 27~ Case 32: Any two phases broken with wind, min. weight span and max.
angle
z
Case 33~ Case 38: Any two phases broken with wind, min. weight span and min.
angle
z
Case 39: Shield wire stringing at EDS
z
Case 40~Case42: Any one phase stringing at EDS
z
Case 43: Diagonal wind load and max. weight span
z
Case 44: Diagonal wind load and min. weight span
z
Case 45: One circuit not installed with wind and max. weight span
z
Case 46: One circuit not installed with wind and min. weight span

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

11.3 Angle towers –1DD30 and 1DD60 type tower

z
Case 1: All wire intact with wind and max. weight span
z
Case 2: All wire intact with wind and min. weight span
z
Case 3~ Case 5: Shield & any one phase broken with wind, max. weight span and
max angle
z
Case 6~ Case 8: Shield & any one phase broken with wind, max. weight span and
min. angle
z
Case 9~ Case 11: Shield & any one phase broken with wind, min. weight span and
max. angle
z
Case 12~ Case 14: Shield & any one phase Broken with wind, min. weight span and
min. angle
z
Case 15~ Case 20: Any two phases broken with wind, max. weight span and max.
angle
z
Case 21~ Case 26: Any two phases broken with wind, max. weight span and min.
angle
z
Case 27~ Case 32: Any two phases broken with wind, min. weight span and max.
angle
z
Case 33~ Case 38: Any two phases broken with wind, min. weight span and min.
angle
z
Case 39: Shield wire stringing at EDS
z
Case 40~Case42: Any one phase stringing at EDS
z
Case 43: One circuit not installed with wind and max. weight span
z
Case 44: One circuit not installed with wind and min. weight span

11.4 Dead end/90° towers – 1DD90 type tower

z
Case 1: All wire intact with wind and max. weight span
z
Case 2: All wire intact with wind and min. weight span
z
Case 3~ Case 5: Shield & any one phase broken with wind, max. weight span and
max angle
z
Case 6~ Case 8: Shield & any one phase broken with wind, max. weight span and
min. angle
z
Case 9~ Case 11: Shield & any one phase broken with wind, min. weight span and
max. angle
z
Case 12~ Case 14: Shield & any one phase Broken with wind, min. weight span and
min. angle
z
Case 15~ Case 20: Any two phases broken with wind, max. weight span and max.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

angle
z
Case 21~ Case 26: Any two phases broken with wind, max. weight span and min.
angle
z
Case 27~ Case 32: Any two phases broken with wind, min. weight span and max.
angle
z
Case 33~ Case 38: Any two phases broken with wind, min. weight span and min.
angle
z
Case 39: Shield wire stringing at EDS
z
Case 40~Case42: Any one phase stringing at EDS
z
Case 43: One circuit not installed with wind and max. weight span
z
Case 44: One circuit not installed with wind and min. weight span
z
Case 45: All wire Intact with wind and max. weight span and max. angle (Dead end
strain)
z
Case 46: All wire Intact with wind and max. weight span and min. angle (Dead end
strain)
z
Case 47: One circuit not installed with wind and max. weight span and max. angle
(Dead end strain)
z
Case 48: One circuit not installed with wind and max. weight span and min. angle
(Dead end strain)

12. Steel Quality

12.1 General
The steel to be supplied shall comply with the requirements of the following standards
or other equivalent standards and codes. At the discretion of the designer some or all of the
tower members may be used high tensile steel but, all bolts shall be high tensile steel.

12.1.1 International Standards Organization

(a) ISO Standard ISO 630: Structural Steels
(b) ISO Recommendation ISO/R657: Hot-Rolled Steel Sections

12.1.2 American Society for Testing and Materials

(a) ASTM A36: Specification for Structural Steel Standard
(b) ASTM A121: Specification for Zinc-Coated (galvanized) Steel Barbed Wire
(c) ASTM A123: Specification for Zinc (hot-galvanized) Coatings on Products
fabricated from rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

(d) ASTM A143: Safeguarding against embrittlement of hot galvanized structural steel
products and procedure for detecting embrittlement
(e) ASTM A153: Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (hot dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
(f) ASTM A239: Standard Test Method for Locating the Thinnest Spot in a Zinc
(Galvanized) Coating on Iron or Steel Articles by the Preece Test
(g) ASTM A242: Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
(h) ASTM A307: Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard
Fasteners
(i) ASTM A325: Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel
Joints
(j) ASTM A370: Method and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
(k) ASTM A384: Safeguarding against Warp age and Distortion during Hot-Dip
Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies
(l) ASTM A385: Recommended Practice for providing High Quality Zinc Coatings
(Hot-Dip)
(m) ASTM A394: Standard Specification for Galvanized Steel Transmission Tower Bolts
(n) ASTM A441: Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural
Manganese-Vanadium Steel
(o) ASTM A572: Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-
Vanadium Steel of Structural Quality
(p) ASTM A588: Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
with 50ksi (345Mpa) Minimum Yield point to a 4-inch (100 mm) Thickness
(q) ASTM A751: Methods, Practice and Definitions for Chemical Analysis of Steel
Products

12.1.3 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

(a) Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings (AISC Steel Specification)
(b) Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (AISC Standard Practice)
(c) Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts
(d) Structural Steel Detailing
(e) Manual of Steel Construction

12.1.4 American Welding Society (AWS)

(a) AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

12.2 Bolts and nuts

All bolts and nuts shall comply with the latest revisions of ASTM A325 and ASTM
A394 or ISO1461 Grade 5.8/6.8/8.8 or other equivalent specification and be galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A153.
Bolt threads shall be such that the nut can be easily screwed over the entire threaded
length without excessive play. The threaded length shall be such that the nut can be fully
tightened up but also that none of the thread lies within the section being jointed. There
shall be a minimum projection of three (3) full threads beyond the nut when it is tightened
on the bolt.
All bolts shall be supplied with flat washers, spring washer and nuts. Preferably bolts of
only one size diameter shall be supplied if possible. All bolts shall be of the same grade. If
more than one bolt diameter is used the variation diameter between different sizes shall be
at least 4 mm.

12.3 Step bolts

These shall be a minimum of 16 mm in diameter and 180 mm length. They shall
conform to steel quality above. Each bolt shall be supplied with two nuts and spring washer.
Holes for step bolts shall be provided about 350 mm apart in two diagonally opposite
corners, commencing from the anticlimbing device up to 1,000 mm below the tower top.
Step bolts shall not be used as part of any bolted connection.

13. Tower Design

13.1 General
The detailed tower design shall generally be in accordance with the principles set out in
the “Design of Latticed Steel Transmission Structure” of the American Society of Civil
Engineers 10-97.
At the crossarms of heavy angle, extra heavy angle and terminal towers provision shall
be made to fit a jumper string.
Strain plates on strain and terminal towers shall have auxiliary maintenance strain holes
on each side of the strain hole; suspension tower crossarms shall have a maintenance lifting
plate close to the normal suspension points.
Two holes of 17.5 mm in diameter shall be provided in all leg members of each tower
for an earthing connector. Holes shall also be provided on the earth-wire peak of all towers
for the connection of earth-wire bonding leads.
The towers shall be designed to withstand the loads as calculated in clause 9 and 10

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

without failure or distortion of any component. These calculated loads are the loads which
will be applied to the tower when full scale tests in accordance with this design standard
(clause 18.2) are carried out.

13.2 Minimum thickness of members

The members shall not be less than the following thickness:

< Table 5 > Minimum thickness of members

General requirements, tower legs and main crossarms 5 mm
Other stress, carrying members 4 mm
Redundant members 4 mm
Connection plates, including gussets 4.5 mm
Minimum diameter of connecting bolts 12 mm

13.3 Tower bases

The towers shall be designed that the lower portions can be assembled separately from
the upper portions, and used for setting foundations. A light horizontal bracing shall be
provided for the lower portion of each tower, to ensure that it remains square in plan while
the foundation is being set.
The height above ground level of the main horizontal member at the top of the base shall
not exceed 7.5 m. An increase in height to 8.5 m may be permitted in exceptional cases,
but only if it can be shown that this is a considerable economic or easy erection advantage.
The dimensions on the drawings of the bases shall be sufficient to enable the lengths of
temporary tie members, to be used to maintain the correct leg spacing when foundation
setting, to be calculated.

13.4 Unequal leg extensions – Hill-side conditions

In rough terrain use of different height leg extensions is not unusual. Under these
conditions, applied horizontal loads do not split equally between applicable tower faces.
This shall be accounted for in the determination of member stresses.

13.5 Long tension members

All tension members shall be detailed shorter than the theoretically required length by an
amount equal to one millimeter for each meter of length. The amount that the member is
shortened shall be shown on the Supplier’s detail drawing.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

13.6 Connections
13.6.1 General
Joints and connections shall be detailed so as to facilitate assembly, inspection and
painting, and to avoid spaces in which water can lodge.
Unless specified or denoted otherwise, all connections shall be bolted. Braces and
redundant members may be connected by one bolt which shall be placed on the inner
gauge line.

13.6.2 Main leg member

Butt splices shall be used in all cases for connection of equal sized angles. Where lap
splices are used, the heel on the inside angle shall be chamfered to clear the fillet of the
outside angle. If lap splicing is used, additional calculations shall be made to prove the
adequate strength of the joint. Leg splices shall be located near and above the horizontal
members or above diagonal brace connections, but clear of the connected all members.

[Figure 4] The name of tower member

13.6.3 All other members

All other members shall be in one piece where practical and all double diagonal web
system members shall be connected at their point of intersection by at least one bolt.
Where gusset plates are used, brace members designed for compression should, as far as
practical, be connected to the main members with at least one bolt.
Cross bracing angles are not to be cropped where they cross each other. If connection
cannot be made without cutting, both angles shall be cut and a gusset plate used.

13.7 Fillers
Fillers are required at the gap more than 3 mm on connection between members. Two or
more adjacent holes, filler plate should be used instead of ring fillers.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

13.8 Crossarms
Eccentric loading on crossarms shall be reduced to a minimum and avoided, if possible.
Where brackets cause bending near ends of arms, the arms shall be reinforced with
additional angles.
Redundant bracing shall be required between the upper and lower chords of crossarms
when diagonal braces are used between the two lower chords of an arm.

13.9 Conductor and overhead earth-wire attachments

Design and detail requirements for conductor and overhead earth-wire attachment points
shall be provided. These shall be sufficient to provide for conductor or insulator set type
proposed in accordance with GD6.

13.10 Maximum length of members

Individual tower members shall not exceed 8.0 m in length except by special agreement
in each specific case.

13.11 Factor of safety

All towers and tower foundations shall be capable of resisting any combination of the
basic design loads multiplied by a factor of safety as follows;

13.11.1 Tower members included stub and cleats

(a) 2.5 for Normal condition – All wire intact of double or single circuit
(b) 1.5 for Broken wire condition
(c) 2.0 for Construction and maintenance condition

13.11.2 Foundation
(a) 2.5 for Normal condition – All wire intact of double or single circuit
(b) 2.0 for Broken wire, construction and maintenance condition

13.12 Determination of slenderness ratio (L/r)

13.12.1 General
Leg member is defined as a member which is bolted in both faces and where
connections are at both ends of the member or of the unsupported panel, resulting in
concentric loading. Double angle members connected back-to-back with loadings through
back-to-back legs may be considered a leg member. Brace member is defined as a member
with normal framing eccentricities at both ends of the members connected by one leg.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

13.12.2 Single angle members

The maximum L/r of angles with symmetrical bracing on each leg of the angle shall be
computed as follows:
z
L is the unsupported length between bracing points (redundant members considered
fully effective) and, r is the minimum radius of gyration of the member.

The maximum L/r of angles with staggered bracing on each leg of the angle shall be as
follows:
z
L is the distance between bracing points (redundant members considered fully
effective) on one leg of the angle and, r is the radius of gyration of the member for its
axis which is parallel to the supporting member; or,
z
L is the distance between the bracing point on one leg and the adjacent bracing point
on the other leg and, r is the minimum radius of gyration of the member.

The maximum L/r of single angle brace members connected by one leg in a double-
brace system (the crossed diagonals are bolted at their intersection) shall be computed as
follows:
z
L shall be the greatest length from centre of end connection to point of intersection
and, r is the minimum radius of gyration of the member.

The maximum L/r of single angle brace members connected by one leg with
intermediate support (or supports) in one plane shall be computed as follows:
z
L shall be the distance between centers of end connections; and, r is the radius of
gyration of the member for its axis which is parallel to the supporting member(s) or,
z
L shall be the greatest length from centre of end connection to point of support or
greatest distance between adjacent supports, whichever is greater; and, r is the
minimum radius of gyration of the member.

13.13 Net section

The determination of net section shall be as specified in the AISC Manual of steel
Construction and as noted below:
The net section of single angle tension members connected by one leg shall be the net
section of the connected leg plus the net area of the unconnected leg. The area of open
holes in the unconnected leg should be deducted.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

13.14 Allowable stresses

13.14.1 Tension members
Ultimate allowable unit tensile stress through the minimum net section shall not exceed
the following,
Where Ft is the specified minimum yield stress:
z
Members concentrically loaded such as leg members bolted at connection in both
faces and double angle members (connected though the back-to-back legs).

Ft = Fy

z
Single angle members connected by one leg for lap joint.

Ft = 0.90 Fy

z
For tension members with large eccentric loading, a combined bending and tension
load analysis may be required (see AISC Manual of Steel Construction).

13.14.2 Compression members

Compression on the gross section of axially loaded compression members where (KL/r)
is less than C c :

⎡ 1 ⎛ KL / r ⎞ 2 ⎤ KL
Fa = ⎢1 − ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ ⎥ Fy for ≤ Cc (9.14-1)
⎢⎣ 2 ⎝ C c ⎠ ⎥⎦ r

Compression on the gross section of axially loaded compression members where (KL/r)
is greater than or equal to C c :
1970000 KL
Fa = 2
for > Cc (9.14-2)
⎛ KL ⎞ r
⎜ ⎟
⎝ r ⎠
C c Shall be equal to:

2E
Cc = π
Fy

Where
Fy Min. guaranteed yield strength of the steel in MPa
E Modulus of elasticity of the steel (199810 MPa)
Fa Allowable compressive stress in MPa
Cc Column slenderness ratio dividing elastic and inelastic buckling

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

(KL/r) in equations shall be equal to the largest effective slenderness ratio of any un-
braced segment of the member. L shall be as determined from working point to working
point on the design drawings.

The above equations are applicable provided the largest width-thickness ratio (b/t) is not
more than the limiting value given by:

⎛b⎞ 210
⎜ ⎟ lim =
⎝t⎠ Fy

Where
b Distance from edge of fillet to extreme fiber
t Thickness of material

If the width – thickness ratio exceeds (b/t) Lim, but is not greater than 20 the equations
(9.14-1), (9.14-2) shall be modified by substituting for Fy the value of Fcr given by:

⎡ b/t ⎤ ⎛b⎞ b 377

Fcr = ⎢1.677 − 0.677 F , for ⎜ ⎟ lim ≤ ≤
⎣ (b / t ) lim ⎥⎦ y ⎝t⎠ t Fy

65455 ⎛ b ⎞ 377
Fcr = , for ⎜ ⎟≥
(b / t )2 ⎝t⎠ Fy

13.14.3 Effective slenderness ratios

The effective length KL of members shall be determined in the following sections.

13.14.3.1 Leg member

For leg sections or post members bolted at connections in both faces, K shall be used as
1.0.
KL L
=
r r
13.14.3.2 Other compression members
For all other compression members carrying calculated stress the following adjusted
slenderness ratios, KL/r, shall be used:

z
For members with concentric loading at both ends of the unsupported panel and L/r
≤120

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

28 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

KL L
=
r r
z
For members with concentric loading one end and normal framing eccentricities the
other end of the unsupported panel and L/r ≤120
KL L
= 30 + 0.75
r r
z
For members with normal framing eccentricities at both ends of the unsupported
panel and L/r ≤120
KL L
= 60 + 0.5
r r
z
For members unrestrained against rotation at both ends of the unsupported panel
and L/r from 120 to 200
KL L
=
r r
z
For members partially restrained against rotation at one end of the unsupported
panel and L/r from 120 to 225
KL L
= 28.6 + 0.762
r r
z
For members partially restrained against rotation at both ends of the unsupported
panel and L/r from 120 to 250
KL L
= 46.2 + 0.615
r r

13.15 Ultimate allowable bending, shearing and bearing stress

Ultimate allowable bending stress, Fb, on extreme fibers shall be taken as the applicable
yield point, Fy.
Ultimate allowable shearing stress, Fv, shall be taken as 5/8 of the applicable yield point,
Fy.
Ultimate allowable bearing stress, Fp, shall be taken as 1.5 times the applicable yield
point, Fy but, not exceed Fu (Min tensile strength).

13.16 Beam – Columns – Combined axial compression and bending

Members simultaneously subjected to both axial compression and bending stresses shall
be designed in accordance with Section 1.6, Combined Stresses, AISC Manual of Steel
Construction, latest edition. Latticed beam columns shall be designed considering effects
of shear deformation.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

29 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

13.17 Maximum allowable slenderness ratios, L/r

13.17.1 Tension members
Tension members of tower crossarms (hangers) - 370

13.17.2 Compression members

Main leg and crossarm chord member - 150
For other members having calculated stress - 200

For redundant members without calculated stress - 250

All redundant members, without computed stress, may be designed to carry a stress of
not less than 2.5% of the stress in the member they brace.

13.18 Allowable bolt stresses

13.18.1 Allowable shear stress on bolts for reference only

z
For ASTM A394 bolts:
On gross area of shank - 207 MPa (30,000 psi)
On net area at root of threads - 310 MPa (45,000 psi)

z
For ASTM A325 bolts:
On gross area of shank - 276 MPa (40,000 psi)
On net area at root of threads - 393 MPa (57,000 psi)

13.18.2 Allowable bearing stress on bolts

See clause 13.15 about allowable bearing stress on bolts.
Connecting members shall bear only on the shank of bolts and not on the threaded
portion.

13.19 Bolt spacing and edge distances

The minimum spacing of bolts and edge distances shall be maintained as follows:

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

30 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

< Table 6 > The minimum spacing of bolts and edge distances
Bolt diameter Minimum bolt Minimum edge distance (mm)
(mm) spacing (mm) Rolled edge Sheared edge Flame Cut edge
12 30 13 16 19
16 40 19 23 26
20 50 28 31 34
24 64 35 38 42

[Figure 5] The spacing of bolts and edge

Bolt hole diameters shall be no more than 1.5 mm greater than bolt diameters. Holes in
mild steel material more than 20 mm thick or in high tensile steel material more than 14
mm thick shall be drilled or sub-punched and reamed. Holes may be punched in thinner
material.

14. Fabrication

14.1 General
The Specification for “The Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings” from the Manual of Steel Construction, American Institute of Steel
Construction shall apply where appropriate.

14.2 Preparation
Before being laid out or worked on in any manner, the structural shapes shall be straight
and undamaged. Straightening will not be permitted. Sharp kinks or bends will be cause for
rejection of the material. Templates shall be laid flat without distortion while work is being
laid out.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

31 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

14.3 Shearing and cutting

Shearing and cutting shall be performed with care and all portions of work shall be
finished neatly. Any burrs detrimental to the tower or a safety hazard shall be removed by
grinding or other means. Ends shall be square within 1.5 degrees.

14.4 Use of torch

Curved edges and sections impractical to shear and edges being prepared for welding
may be cut with a burning torch. Wherever practicable, the torch shall be mechanically
guided. Edges prepared for welding or subject to high stresses shall be free from sharp
notches.

14.5 Holes
All holes shall be cylindrical and perpendicular to the surface of the member. Where
necessary to avoid distortion of the holes, holes close to the points of bend shall be made
after bending. The bolt holes shall be not more than 1.5 mm larger in diameter than the
nominal diameter of the bolt.
The welding of mispunched holes shall not be permitted. When holes are mispunched so
that the net section of a member is decreased, the member shall be discarded.
No holes shall be punched in members within 100 mm of a point of bending until after
such member has been bent.
The holes in the tower steel members shall be provided for mounting of all signs and
anti-climbing devices as specified in clause 15.2.

14.6 Bending
Material shall be heated to bend, except plates which may be bent cold. However, no
heating or cold working shall be permitted which would cause embrittlement of the steel
and high tensile members may not be bent cold through more than 5°.
All bending shall be done in such a manner that the full section and member length will
be maintained within 5% reduction and that the physical properties of the material will not
be impaired.
Members bent hot shall be heated in a non-oxidising flame over a sufficient area to
prevent excessive deformation.
Hot bends shall be nested for slow cooling in air. And all bends shall be finished free
from waves and folds.
When material is bend, all holes near the bend shall be punched after the bending.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

32 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

14.7 Welding
Where severe bending of crossarm or other members is unavoidable, flanges of angle
sections may be cut and welded with the prior approval of the engineer. Otherwise welding
of members or gusset plates shall not be permitted unless by special arrangement with the
engineer.
Cutting the outstanding leg of angles or flanges of channels and then welding at the bend
point shall not be permitted.
All welding involving steels shall be done in accordance with ASTM A384 and the
welding procedure requirements of AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code.”

14.8 Galvanizing
Galvanizing shall be as follows:
z
After the shop work on members is completed and accepted the members shall be
cleaned of rust, loose scale, dirt, oil grease and other foreign substances preferably by
a combination of sand blasting and acid bath.
z
After being cleaned, all materials, except tower bolts and nuts, shall be coated in
accordance with ASTM A123. Where members are of such lengths that they cannot
be dipped in one operation, great care shall be exercised to prevent warping. Sharp
kinks or bends will be cause for rejection of the material.
z
Tower bolts, nuts, washers and spring washer for the tower member connections shall
be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.
z
After being galvanized, all materials shall be straightened by being rerolled or
pressed, where required, to remove warps caused by the galvanizing process. The
material shall not be hammered or otherwise straightened in a manner that will injure
the protective coating. If the GECOL considers the material has been harmfully bent
or warped in the process of fabrication or galvanizing, such defects shall be cause for
rejection. Material on which the galvanizing has been damaged by straightening shall
be redipped. Any member on which the galvanized coating becomes damaged after
having been dipped twice shall be rejected.
z
All galvanized members shall be safeguarded against embrittlement in accordance
with ASTM A143 “Safeguarding against Embrittlement of Hot Galvanized Structural
Steel Products and procedure for Detecting Embrittlement” and all galvanizing shall
be done in accordance with ASTM A384 and A385.
z
Preventive treatment against “White Rust”: All parts shall be treated with “Sodium
Bichromate” to protect the galvanizing from white rust formation.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

33 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

15. Tower Accessories

15.1 Anti-Climbing devices and step bolts

15.1.1 Location and general requirements
Each tower shall be fitted with an approved anti-climbing device at height of not less
than 3 m, but not more than 4.5 m, from the ground on sloping ground the height is
measured from the ground which is highest.
The anti-climbing device shall be provided with a hinged gate at the corner of the tower
where steps are approved in order to allow easy access of linesmen and other authorized
persons.
The hinged gate shall open away from the direction of ascent. These hinged sections
shall be provided with a closing fitting suitable for accommodating a padlock but shall be
left by the Supplier with a nut and bolt until such time as padlocks are fitted by the
GECOL.
In general areas galvanized spikes shall be used in the horizontal member of lower panel.
In special areas, if necessary, barbed wire may be utilized.
In the spike type, the spike grade shall be grade 6.8 and the minimum distance between
spikes shall not be less than 150 mm. where spikes are bolted to the tower member the
spike threads must be clenched after installation. The drawing of spike is as the following
figure.
In case of barbed wire type, Barbed wire shall be 12.5 gauges with 14 gauge 4 point
round barbs 100 mm on centre, with galvanized coating conforming to ASTM A121.
Galvanizing of other parts of the anti-climbing device shall be to ASTM A123.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

34 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

77
13
62

30
M12 x 6a
before hot dip gaivanizing
SH LLI
RO
AN NG
K D BL
IA AN

10 37
=T K
10 EADA
.53
.
HR DI

250
25

[Figure 6] Spike type anti-climbing device

15.1.2 Standardization
The position of the anti-climbing device should preferably be such that a standard device
is used regardless of the arrangement of the tower body and leg extensions which may be
employed.
Spikes or anti-climbing devices equipped with tensioned good quality barbed wire to the
approval of GECOL are preferred.
Where the design of tower is such that they can be climbed on the inner face, the anti-
climbing device shall extend inside the tower to prevent this. In this respect particular
attention should be given to application on leg extensions.

15.1.3 Step bolts

Step bolts shall be provided on all towers to the requirements of clause 12.1.
The steps shall be spaced on the inner gauge line of alternate legs of angle about 350
mm on centers. The step bolt holes shall be spaced so that any combination of assembled
tower body, body extension and leg extension shall result in the 350 mm spacing of the
entire step bolt ladder. Permanent step bolts shall be installed immediately above the anti-
climbing device and continuing to the overhead earth-wire.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

35 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

The first step bolt below each crossarm shall be conveniently located on the transverse
face of the tower and the remaining step bolts shall be alternatively placed on the
remainder of the tower leg and any extension.
Holes for removable step bolts below the anti-climbing device shall be provided at a
maximum of 350 mm spacing to a point one meter above ground level.

15.2 Danger, number, phase and circuit plates

15.2.1 General requirements
Conspicuous danger plates, route and number plates, resistant to fading under climatic
conditions on site shall be provided for all towers and phase color plates as specified
hereafter and GECOL specifications.
All danger and number plates shall generally be attached to towers on the transverse
faces of all towers so that they may be read when looking along the line with one’s back to
the source. At road crossings and possibly at a few other locations it may be necessary to
fit plates to one of the longitudinal faces, and this should be allowed for in the design of
fixing brackets.
All plates shall be of adequate thickness (min. 2mm) of material to ensure no bending of
plates can take place and no cracking of surface coloring can occur. Damaged, chipped or
cracked plates and surface coloring will not be accepted.
All plates shall be textile-glass reinforced plastics and shall be provided with bolt (M12
× 40mm), nut and washer.
All numbers and notices on the plates covered in the section will be duplicated in both
English and Arabic.
Prior to commencing mass production of plates the Supplier shall submit a sample for
approval by the GECOL.

15.2.2 Danger plates (GECOL specification GES 12450)

Danger plates shall be 300 mm long by 200 mm wide and 2 mm thick and fitted to every
tower, being fitted centrally just above the anti-climbing guard level (2 plates for every
tower). Danger plates shall be approved by the GECOL. Lettering shall be red color on
white background.

15.2.3 Number plates (GECOL specification GES 12452)

Tower number plates, carrying also the circuit identification numbering shall be fitted to
every tower and adjacent to and below the danger plates. Numbering shall be black color
on yellow background.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

36 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

15.2.4 Phase plate (GECOL specification GES 12451)

Phase plate shall be provided separately for each circuit on each tower suitably located
under the respective circuit on each tower.

15.2.5 Circuit plate (GECOL specification GES 12453)

Circuit plate shall be provided each circuit on each tower suitably located top conductor
crossarm end.

16. Foundation

16.1 General
The type of foundation to be used at each tower position shall be determined from the
results of the geotechnical investigation.
Tower foundations shall be of concrete pad & chimney. In certain areas rock anchor
foundations are to be used.
Concrete shall generally be used as much as soil conditions allow. Where these are not
applicable the other forms of foundations shall be used as required. The foundation
conditions include permissible bearing pressures expected at each tower together with the
type of foundation considered applicable.
Dimensions of all leg footings shall be determined for tower reactions for the maximum
down-thrust, uplift, and horizontal shear and all tower base reactions shall be computed
from design structure loading.
The exact bearing capacity has to find from real soil investigation at the site.

16.2 Type of soil

The soil conditions and characteristics shall be ascertained using approved methods to
determine the type of foundation applicable. The soil characteristics applicable for the soil
conditions concerned shall be considered in accordance with the following table 7 unless
other values result from special investigation.
The possible deterioration of the consistency of cohesive soils and the resulting
reduction therefrom of the bearing capacity shall be considered. If ground water exists, the
corresponding decrease of weight of soil due to uplift conditions shall be considered in the
calculations.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

37 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

< Table 7 > Type of soil

Angle of Permissible Frustum
Density Internal Bearing Angle per
Type of Soil
Friction Pressure Footing,
KN/m3 Degrees DaN/cm2 Degrees
1) Loose Soil

Depending on nature, thickness,

compactness, and uniformity 14 to 16 20 to 25 0 to 1.0 14 to 20

2) Natural soil

i. Organic and Marshy Mud and

Peat Bog. 6.5 to 11 0 0.50 10
ii. Fine Soils
(Loams silts and clays)
a) Very soft 16 0 0.5 10

b) Soft 18 11 to 17 0.8 10

c) Stiff 18 16 to 22 1.0 14 to 20

d) Medium hard 17 20 to 24 2.0 30

e) Hard 17 22 to 30 4.0 30

iii. Granular Soils

a) Fine and Medium sand grain

size up to 1 mm 16 31 to 32 2 to 3.0 20 to 22

b) Coarse sand, grain size 1

mm to 3 mm 17 31 to 33 3.5 20 to 30

c) Sand and gravel of at least

1/3 volume gravel grain size
up to 70 mm 18 33 to 35 4.0 20 to 30

3) Rock

i. Weathered rock 20 to 22 > 35 5.0 to 10.0 40

ii. Hard rock Special foundations

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

38 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

16.3 General design criteria

16.3.1 Standards
The formulae to be used to determine the foundation resistance are those given in the
agreed international standards.
The industrial standards codes for foundation design are as follows:
(a) ACI 318-05: Building code requirement for structural concrete and commentary
(b) AISC M016-89: Manual of steel construction allowable stress design
(c) ASCE 7-88(1990): Minimum design loads for buildings and other structures
(d) AWS D1.1-92: Structural welding code steel

The geotechnical parameters to be used in the design may be either assessed directly
from the results of soil investigations or assumed in accordance with the type of soil
encountered.
The characteristic value of a soil or rock property may be based on the results of
laboratory and field tests. It should be selected as a cautions estimate of conditions
affecting the specific property.
Reference shall be made to IEC 1773 “Testing of foundations for overhead line
structures”, wherever applicable.

16.3.2 Loading conditions

The bearing pressure on soil shall not exceed the limits laid down for each type of
foundation.
Unless otherwise directed all tower footings shall be designed as individual leg footings,
4 footings per towers. Dimensions of all leg footings shall be determined from tower
reactions and the maximum down-thrust, uplift, and horizontal shear should be considered.
All tower base reactions shall be computed from design structure loading.

16.3.3 Factors of safety

During design of towers, the tower reactions on the foundation shall be calculated
considering appropriate maximum simultaneous loading on the tower. During foundation
design the obtained reactions shall be multiplied by the factor of safety and the resultant
reactions shall be used for foundation design.
The stability of the foundations shall be determined at a safety factor of 2.5 (in normal
conditions) and of 2.0 (in broken wire conditions).

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

39 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

16.4 Reinforced concrete foundations

16.4.1 Type
For all towers where the soil has normal properties may be used reinforced concrete
footings.
They shall consist of four concrete independent footing pad & chimney, anchoring type,
etc. for each leg of the tower, i.e. a bottom concrete pad anchoring the footing to the
surrounding soil and connected to the legs by a steel stub-angle.
The top 20 cm of the chimney shall be pyramid shaped.
The concrete shall be reinforced in order to ensure that the concrete stresses not exceed
the values indicated in the specification.

16.4.2 Material
Stubs for tower body and leg extensions shall be of the same design as that for a
standard height tower. Only one design of stub shall be permitted for each type of tower,
and shall be bent or cranked.
The stub-angle size shall not be less than the size of the tower leg to which it attached.
Stub-angles shall have a pull-out resistance at least equal to 2.5 times the net uplift on the
leg. The stub-angles shall be completely galvanized.
The concrete compressive strength shall be a minimum of 30 MPa after 28 days.
The reinforcement bars to be used shall be selected among the types in accordance with
the agreed international standards.

16.4.3 Design criteria

This foundation takes the form of a reinforced concrete flat slab surmounted by a
chimney. Alternatively, the slab may be replaced by a truncated concrete pyramid
surmounted by a chimney.
Uplift resistance is assumed to be provided by the mass of soil within the inverted
frustum of a pyramid constructed from the upper edge of the base slab, or the lower edge
for a pyramid. However where slab are cast against undisturbed soil, or undercut, the
frustum may be constructed from the lower edge of the slab base. The angle of the frustum
depending on the soil properties, due consideration shall be taken of buoyancy effect,
reduced densities of backfill and design test result.
For design under compression loading, the area of the base is determined by the design
ground bearing pressure under ultimate loads. In assessing the bearing pressure beneath the
foundation, the additional weight of the foundation over that of the displaced soil shall be
multiplied by the appropriate foundation dead weight-factor.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

40 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

The maximum actual bearing pressure of soil shall not exceed the permissible bearing
pressure at tower site.
Frustum angles, ground density and safety factor shall be as stated as in test results.
The density of reinforced concrete shall be assumed to be a maximum of 22 KN/m3.
The compressive strength of concrete shall be a minimum of 30 MPa after 28 days.
For the resistance to uplift the concrete foundations shall be assumed to engage the
frustum of an inverted pyramid of earth the sides of which form an angle maximum of 30°
with the vertical. The actual angle values shall be established according to the soil
characteristics, as shown in above paragraph.
The density of earth shall be taken 16 KN/m3.
The stability of foundations with respect to uplift shall be determined at a safety factor
of 2.5 (in normal conditions) and 2.0 (in broken conductors).
The most economical solution shall be selected as to concrete volume, depth and
dimensions.

16.5 Special type foundations

16.5.1 Type
Rock anchor foundations are to be used for areas where footings may be secured to solid
bedrock by means of steel tension members grouted into rock. Anchorage shall be adequate
to develop the full yield strength of the steel tension members.
Where ground characteristics are very soft and usually with water present, special
footings such as spread concrete piers or pilings shall be used.
While raft foundations for wide based lattice towers shall be used in areas subjected to
mining settlement, or very poor ground where piling is not possible.

16.5.2 Material
Stub-angles shall have a pull-out resistance in concrete at least equal to 2.5 times the net
uplift on the leg. Stub-angles shall not be smaller in section than the legs to which they
connect. Stub-angles shall be completely galvanized.
The bars to be used shall be selected among the types indicated in the Standards adopted
by the owner in accordance with the agreed international standards.
The concrete compressive strength shall not be less than those specified in the adopted
standard.

16.5.3 Design criteria

Anchorage shall be adequate to develop the maximum strength of the steel tension

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

41 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

members.

Anchor foundation
Anchor foundations may be used where the rock mass is sound, homogenous, free from
fissures and where the long term stability of the rock can be ensured. All design methods
and procedures shall be in accordance with the agreed international standards.
The foundation shall comprise a reinforced concrete pad at, or below ground level in
conjunction with suitably designed anchor tendons grouted into holes previously drilled
into the rock.
Where the arrangement of the anchorage is such that the horizontal shear loads are not
designed to be wholly or partially taken by the anchor tendon acting in tension, such
horizontal loads, or any balance thereof shall be catered for in the design of the concrete
pad.

Pile foundations
Stability of pile foundation of whatever types proposed shall be checked according to
established principles of soil mechanics.
The following shall apply:
z
Stability shall be checked under compression plus shear loads and uplift plus shear
loads with the most critical combinations for all tower loading cases.
z
A minimum of the top 1 meter of each individual pile shall be assumed to have no
contact with surrounding soils. The effective surface area of the pile shall be
calculated accordingly.
z
Stability of a group of piles shall be checked, in addition to the friction along the pile
shafts reduced by the proper group factor, using the uplift frustum angle specified in
the test results or in the data sheets, with the frustum starting from the end of the piles
with a base equal to the box formed by the pile group.

No lateral earth pressure shall be allowed on pile caps. Pile caps shall not be taken into
account to baring pressure checks.
To resist horizontal shear loads, piles shall normally be contacted by collar beams
extending between the tower legs at the ground surface. The tower stub shall be grouted
into a concrete block extending over the pile group and whole shall be properly reinforced
to ensure no rupture of the concrete when subjected to simultaneous ultimate applied
loading.
Bearing for pile foundations shall be sum of pile end bearing and shear resistance of the

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

42 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

soils developed over the effective surface area of the piles and the weight of any pile
footing shall not be less than the uplift load developed under EDS conditions. Due
allowances shall be made in all calculations for hydrostatic pressure where the water table
occurs above the base of the piles. The soil sub-grade reaction to horizontal forces shall
also be evaluated and the piles and/or tie beams reinforced as found necessary.
Pile foundations of whatever type shall be type tested in each soil by full scale uplift
load tests or combined shear and uplift load tests when small diameter multi pile
foundations are proposed. Routine tests shall be required for small diameter piles and
grouted anchor rods.

Raft foundations
Raft foundation fixes the four legs of tower on one concrete basis and compensates
overturning moment of steel tower that is caused in external loads by means of resistance
moment caused by concrete of basis department, soil, electric wire and steel tower for the
purpose of preventing collapse of steel tower.

[Figure 7] Raft foundation

Raft foundation needs an amount of concrete compared to other foundation and also lots
of reinforcement bars fairly but pile is needless compared to pile foundation and heavy
machinery for setting up pile is needless too.
The following shall apply:
z
Overturning moment of tower should be smaller than moment caused by total weight
of foundation, conductor and tower.
z
The center of gravity of external loads may move due to overturning moment of
tower. At that time, Stability shall be checked under deflections
z
Safety of a rectangular section in bending with both tension and compression
reinforcement shall be investigated.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

43 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

z
Cracking in concrete is generally the result of the following actions [1,2]: (1)
volumetric change, including that due to drying shrinkage, creep under sustained load,
thermal stress, and chemical incompatibility of concrete components; (2) internal or
external direct stress due to continuity, eversible load, long-time deflection, camber in
prestressed concrete, or differential movement in structures; and (3) flexural stress
due to bending. Flexural crack in raft foundation may appear in comparison with
other foundations. Therefore, it shall be necessary to consider flexural crack control
for beams and slubs.

16.6 Measures to be taken in presence of sand dunes

The presence of mobile dunes along the line route shall be notified
All the measures necessary shall be undertaken to guaranty the stability of the structures.
In particular as regard foundations, grillage foundations should be used and rock
material or boulders of adequate size are recommended for backfilling.
Sand is not permitted as backfill.
More over stones of adequate dimensions shall be laid within the tower basis so as to
ensure the stability of the soil cover.

16.7 Erosion protection in Wadi

If towers are located in proximity to Wadi, all the measures necessary shall be
undertaken to guaranty the stability of the structures.
A full description of such situations and the solutions intended to adopt against soil
erosion shall be submitted.

16.8 Tower Leg/Foundations Interconnections

In the case of concrete foundations, the tower leg/foundation interconnections shall be
realized by means of bolted cleats designed taking into account the maximum loads to be
transferred both in uplift and compression, taking in consideration the effect of concrete
friction is neglected.

16.9 Setting tolerance

The maximum permitted stub tolerances measured at the top of the stubs shall be as
detailed in the following table and are to apply immediately prior to erecting the tower.
Records of the foundation setting out measurements shall be made available to the
engineer.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

44 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

< Table 8 > Setting tolerance

Principal Dimension Tolerance

· Nominal face dimension 0.1% of face dimension

· Nominal diagonal dimension 0.1% of diagonal dimension
· Slope
(a) In case that length of stub is less than 5m ±2 mm of slope dimension
(b) In case that length of stub is more than 5m ±3 mm of slope dimension
· Maximum difference in stub level between ±5 mm (per leg)
another three stubs and a standard stub
· Twist of stubs ±1 mm (per leg)
· Twist of tower (body) ±0~0.5 degree

Stub level
l1

l2

Stub twist: l1 - l2

Slope

[Figure 8] Setting tolerance

16.10 Tests and acceptance criteria

To guarantee that the design is in full compliance with this design standard if necessary,
full-scale type tests on an element of each type of foundation and proof-tests on a max of
2% of the total number of foundations shall be performed.
Such test shall be made in accordance to IEC 1773 “Testing of foundations for overhead
line structures.”

17. Marking

17.1 Members and plates

All members of the structures shall be stamped prior to galvanizing with numbers and/or
letters to conform to the piece marks on the erection drawings.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

45 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

Each piece of structural steel shall be marked by stamping with a heavy steel stamp
which produces a mark at least 16mm high and of sufficient depth to be legible after
galvanizing.
The mark shall be placed, preferably near one end in the same relative position on each
member, so as to be easily seen after assembly of the tower. They shall be positioned so as
not to reduce the effective net section of the member.
The marking shall also include the brand of the manufacturer and identification symbols
for the grade and quality of the steel.

17.2 Bolts
All bolts heads shall be marked by raised or depressed mark, to identify the
manufacturer. In addition they shall be marked to indicate the grade of steel used.

18. Testing and Inspection

18.1 Testing
All towers shall be tested in accordance with the IEC 652 – Loading Tests on overhead
Line Towers and the standards as specified herein.
Routine and sample tests shall be carried out at the Supplier’s factory, as required.
Type tests shall be carried out at an approved independent test station or at the Supplier’s
station and be witnessed by a representative of an approved independent test authority or
other representative acceptable to GECOL. However, the tower load calculations and the
complete tower stress analysis, including the computer input and output, must have been
previously approved by GECOL.
Inspection may be made during all stages of manufacture, testing and shipment.
Inspection may be at the point of shipment or delivery or construction site, etc. at
GECOL’s option. However, inspection and acceptance shall not relieve the Supplier of his
responsibility for conformance with this design standard.

18.2 Full scale tower loading test

(a) For a full scale tower loading test, one of each type of tower (body, body extension
and leg extensions) shall be fabricated in accordance with approved detailed
drawings, assembled in accordance with approved erection drawings and tested on a
fixed foundation at an approved tower test site according to IEC 60652.
Each type of tower shall be tested for each of the specified loading conditions, except
for a condition where the calculations show that every member is more highly

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

46 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

stressed under other conditions for which tests are carried out. The tests shall be
performed on a galvanized tower with the longest body and leg extensions.
Each loading corresponding to each load step and the corresponding longitudinal and
transversal deflections shall be measured before and after removing of the load.
(b) Test deflections shall be recorded to provide at least the following information:
Longitudinal and transverse deflections at ground wire peak, ends of conductor
crossarms, centre of tower and at tower waist.
(c) The tower testing program shall list the loadings and load combination cases that will
be used for testing of the tower.
The testing program shall also include a description of the testing installation, of the
load application procedure and of the equipment intended to measure the loads and
the deflections. All measuring equipment used such as dynamometers, load cells, etc.
shall be calibrated in the presence of GECOL’s representative or be certified by a
qualified independent testing agency immediately before and after testing.
(d) The adjustment of loads in steps shall be as detailed in clause 4 of IEC 60652. For
the final 100% step the loads shall be maintained for 3 minutes. Should a failure
occur during this period, the tower shall be considered to have failed the test
(e) Failure shall be defined as:
z
Any noticeable permanent distortion of a member or elongation of bolt holes of
more than 1mm.
z
Any shear failure in bolts.
z
Any member failure in bearing.
In case of any such failure, the Supplier shall consult with GECOL in modifying the
design and details. These modifications must be approved by GECOL before
retesting for the loading condition which caused failure and for all untested
combinations until the structure has been found satisfactory. Retesting of previously,
successfully completed tests are not required.
Upon completion of testing, disassembly of the tower shall include inspection of all
members for any evidence of excessive permanent set, shear failure of bolts, or
member failure in bearing not determined during the full scale testing program.
(f) All design and detailing defects determined during the tests or during the
disassembly shall be corrected on all towers of that type and also on other types not
tested having similar configuration, details or design concept.
The Supplier upon receipt of written approval from GECOL of acceptance of
satisfactory performance of the tower loading test may start fabrication of the
structures except those members requiring modifications. Fabrication of these

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

47 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

members may not commence until revised detail and erection drawings have been
approved by GECOL.
After disassembly inspection (see below) of the tower and confirmation that all
components are completely undamaged the tower may be supplied against delivery
requirements.
(g) Within 7 days after completion of the tower loading test, the Supplier shall furnish a
full and comprehensive report (three copies) as specified in IEC 60652 of each tower
test and shall include detailed diagrams and tabulation showing amounts and
methods of load application and deflection records of each load test, photographs of
test setup and description (with photographs) of all failures.
Included in the report shall be mill test reports of the material used and the results of
any tensile tests of specimens cut from any members which failed during the testing
program. Particular emphasis shall be placed on the determination of the yield point
of the material.

18.3 Assembly test

To confirm the correct fitting and perfect interchangeability of all corresponding parts
one of each type of tower to be supplied shall be assembled completely on the ground at
the manufacturing works with parts taken at random from lots of finally treated
components. The tower bodies shall be assembled in sections and shall demonstrate that
each section fits the adjacent section, that the leg extensions fit all body extensions and that
foundation stub angles.
During testing all members, plates, bolts and nuts shall fit together snugly without any
distortion of any part. If it is demonstrated that all components fit together correctly when
the complete tower has been assembled and tightened the tower will be deemed to have
complied with this test.
If there is any distortion, fouling of members, or bolts or any misalignment or distortion
of components the Supplier shall consult with GECOL in modifying the details or design if
necessary. These modifications must be approved by GECOL and correct with the
modified components verified.
The Supplier shall also provide to GECOL a certificate of the proof of fit test for each
tower type, all associated body and leg extensions, and foundation stub angles that have
been assembled satisfactorily.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

48 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

18.4 Other tests

18.4.1 Mechanical and chemical properties of tower material
Tests shall be performed on samples as per ISO 630 Section 6. These shall include
tensile tests, bend tests, impact tests and product analysis for chemical composition.

18.4.2 Bolts and nuts

Tests shall be performed on samples according to ASTM A325 and A394. These shall
include tests for chemical composition, hardness and tensile strength.

18.4.3 Galvanizing
The weight, thickness, uniformity and adherence of the zinc coating shall be tested
according to ASTM A123, ASTM A153 and ASTM A239 to comply with the requirements
of the Technical Schedules.

19. Packing and Delivery

The Supplier shall provide packing of the tower as is required to prevent their damage or
deterioration during transit to their final destination and long period of storage. The
packing shall be sufficient to withstand, without limitation, rough handling during
transportation and the exposure to extreme temperatures, salt and precipitation.

(a) Small parts such as “U” bolts, tower bolts and nuts, pack washers, spring washer,
filler plates, etc. shall be shipped in bulk with like items packaged separately.
(b) Maximum permissible length of a single member specified from the point of view of
convenience in handling transport and erection shall not be more than 8.0 meters or
the limits fixed by the shipping or other transport agencies whichever less is.
(c) The angle sections up to 1 m length and all the gussets plates shall be dispatched in
strong wooden boxes whereas separate bundles shall be made for sections from 1-2
m, 2-4 m, 4-6 m, 6-7 m length for every tower towards better inventory control
handling and easy erection.
(d) The bundles shall be prepared with strong and galvanized binding steel wire up to
length of 2 m and galvanized steel strip beyond 2 m with intermediate strips at an
interval of 1.5 m with ends well tagged and packing underneath.
(e) Cleat angles, gusset plates, brackets, filler plates and other loose pieces shall be
nested and bolted together in multiples or securely wired together through holes.
Each bundle or package shall be appropriately marked. Each tower has to be packed

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

49 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

separately with all its elements in one package and if the tower is heavy it can be
separated in two boxes.
(f) These bundles shall also be dispatched in wooden boxes if necessary as per the
requirements of shipping or other transport agencies.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

50 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

Appendix A: References

ASCE Design of Latticed Steel Transmission Structure

Standard 10
ASCE Guidelines for Electrical Transmission Line Structure Loading
Standard 74
AISC The Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings
ASTM A123 Specification for Zinc (hot dip galvanized) Coatings on products
fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars
and strip.
ASTM A153 Standard specification for zinc coating (hot dip galvanizing) on iron
and steel hardware.
ASTM A370 Methods and definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel product.
AWS D1.1 Structural welding code (American Welding Society)
IEC 652 Loading Tests on overhead Line Towers
ASTM A325 Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel
Joints
ASTM A394 Standard Specification for Galvanized Steel Transmission Tower
Bolts

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

51 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

Appendix B: Tower Configuration

BASIC TOWER

3m EXTENSION
TOWER

6m EXTENSION
TOWER

9m EXTENSION TITLE :
TOWER

66kV SUSPENSION TOWER TYPE "1DD02"

[Figure B1] Tower configuration for “1DD02” type tower

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

52 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

66kV TENSION TOWER TYPE "1DD30" 66kV TENSION TOWER TYPE "1DD60"

TYPE "1DD10" TYPE "1DD30"

BASIC TOWER

3m EXTENSION
TOWER

6m EXTENSION
TOWER

TYPE "1DD60"

TITLE :
9m EXTENSION
TOWER

66kV TENSION TOWER TYPE "1DD10"

[Figure B2] Tower configuration for “1DD10”, “1DD30”and “1DD60” type tower

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

53 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

EXTRA HEAVY ANGLE TOWER

DEAD END TOWER

BASIC TOWER

3m EXTENSION
TOWER

6m EXTENSION
TOWER

TITLE :
9m EXTENSION
TOWER

66kV TENSION TOWER TYPE "1DD90"

[Figure B3] Tower configuration for “1DD90” type tower

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

54 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

TITLE :

ARRANGEMENT OF SIGN PLATES AND ANTI-CLIMBING DEVICE

[Figure B4] Arrangement of sign plate

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

55 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

Item Description No per tower

1 Single tension string set 12
2 Single suspension string set without arcing horn 4
3 Single tension inverted string set 2
4 Single tension string set without arcing horn 2
[Figure B5] transposition tower

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

56 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

Appendix C: Stub and Cleats

Project:
Tower Type
Reference
Description
Compression C
Uplift U
Size
Surface l'th I
Stub
Length L
Bond Strength FB FB = Allowable bond strength × I × L
Size
Bearing Area A × be A(Length of cleats) × be
Cleats
Nos. n
Bearing Strength SB SB = Pc × A × be × n
Total Strength SC SC = FB+SB
Safety Factor (more than 2.5) Safety Factor = SC/C
Diameter
Connection
Nos.
Bolt of
Shearing v
Cleat
Bearing p
Safety Factor = (v × Numbers of bolt per a
Safety Factor(V/(C-FB)) cleats × Number of cleats per a leg)/
(Compression per a leg - FB per a leg)
Notes
1) Allowable bond strength between
Concrete and galvanized steel : 0.686 Mpa
2) Pc = Allowable bearing strength of
Concrete = 25.5 Mpa
3) 28 days concrete strength = 30 Mpa
4) A = Length of cleats
5) be = b + t

b= t × Fy / 3Pc

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

57 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

Appendix D: Mechanical Requirement

Yield Point Min. (㎏/㎟) Elongation

Kind Tensile Strength
Thickness Strength Test Piece Min
(ASTM) (㎏/㎟)
(mm) (㎏/㎟) (mm) .%
200 20
A 36 25.31 40.78-56.25
50 23
5/8"Ø : 614, 3/4"Ø : 9090 200 20
A 394 -
7/8"Ø : 12560, 1"Ø : 16480 50 23
t≤19 35.15 49.21 MIN. 200 18
200 18
19<t≤38 32.34 47.11 MIN.
A 440 50 21
200 18
38<t≤102 29.53 44.29 MIN.
50 21
t≤19 35.15 49.21 MIN. 200 18
200 18
19<t≤38 32.34 47.11 MIN.
50 21
A 441
200 18
38<t≤102 29.53 44.29 MIN.
50 21
102<t≤203 28.12 42.18 MIN. 50 21
Grade 200 13
A 588 t≤200 42.18 52.73
60 50 16
Grade 200 20
29.53 42.18
42 50 24
200 19
45 31.64 42.18
50 22
200 18
50 35.15 45.70
50 21
A 572
200 17
55 38.67 49.21
50 20
200 16
60 42.18 52.73
50 18
200 15
65 45.70 56.25
50 17

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

58 / 62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

Appendix E: Wind Force Calculation

With the information given in assumption condition , We can now continue the
calculation of wind force. It is possible to determine the correct standard wind force for
transmission line using the tower of height 30m as discribed below .

1. Effective height (Zo)

a. Height of tower 30.0 m

b. Tower 65.6 ft
[30 m*(2/3)*(3.208 ft/m)]= 65.6 ft
c. Earthwire 87.5 ft
[30 m - (10 m, sag)*(1/3)]*(3.208 ft/m) = 87.5 ft
d. Conductor 64.5 ft

[(24 m, B phase attachment point at tower) - (13 m, sag+insulator string length)*(1/3)]*

(3.208 ft/m) = 64.5 ft

e. Insulator 82.0 ft
[30 m*(5/6)]*(3.208 ft/m) = 82.0 ft

2. Terrain coefficient (Zv)

Zo (ft) B C D
Tower 65.6 0.85 1.11 1.28
Earthwire 87.5 0.91 1.16 1.31
Conductor 64.5 0.85 1.11 1.28
Insulator 82.0 0.91 1.16 1.31

3. Power law coefficient (α)

Terrain B C D
Coefficient 4.5 7.0 10.0

4. Surface drag coefficient (k)

Terrain B C D
Coefficient 0.010 0.005 0.003

Oct 7, 2007
GECOL 59/62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

5. Turbulence sccale (Ls) Unit:f eet

Terrain B C D
Coefficient 170 220 250

6. Total tower height (h)

30 m that is 98.4 ft

7. Design wind span(L)

350 m that is 1148.3 ft

8. SI Conversion factors
Original unit Conversion factor New unit
1 kgf/m 2 0.981 daN/m 2
1 psf 4.88240 kgf/m 2
1 pound 0.45359 kgf
1 pound 4.45 N
1 ft 0.3048 m
1m 3.2808 ft

9. Wind force
9-1. Wind force, in case of terrain coefficient (Zv) B and wind velocity 100 mph Wind Force
E Bw, Bt Gw, Gt V (mph) Q Cf Zv psf kgf/m 2 daN/m 2
Tower 0.421 0.822 1.424 100 0.00256 2 0.9 52.7 257.3 252.4
Earthwire 0.395 0.156 0.996 100 0.00256 1 0.9 21.1 103.1 101.2
Conductor 0.422 0.156 1.017 100 0.00256 1 0.9 18.8 91.8 90.1
Insulator 0.400 0.822 1.389 100 0.00256 1.4 0.9 41.2 201.3 197.5

9-2. Wind force, in case of terrain coefficient (Zv) C and wind velocity 100 mph Wind Force
E Bw, Bt Gw, Gt V (mph) Q Cf Zv psf kgf/m 2 daN/m 2
Tower 0.314 0.856 1.252 100 0.00256 2 1.1 79.0 385.7 378.4
Earthwire 0.301 0.193 0.952 100 0.00256 1 1.2 32.8 160.1 157.0
Conductor 0.315 0.193 0.963 100 0.00256 1 1.1 30.4 148.3 145.5
Insulator 0.304 0.856 1.235 100 0.00256 1.4 1.2 59.6 290.8 285.2

Oct 7, 2007
GECOL 60/62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

9-3. Wind force, in case of terrain coefficient (Zv) D and wind velocity 100 mph Wind Force
E Bw, Bt Gw, Gt V (mph) Q Cf Zv psf kgf/m 2 daN/m 2
Tower 0.251 0.871 1.144 100 0.00256 2 1.3 96.0 468.7 459.8
Earthwire 0.243 0.214 0.914 100 0.00256 1 1.3 40.2 196.0 192.3
Conductor 0.251 0.214 0.921 100 0.00256 1 1.3 38.6 188.5 184.9
Insulator 0.245 0.871 1.135 100 0.00256 1.4 1.3 69.8 340.7 334.2

9-4. Wind force, in case of terrain coefficient (Zv) B and wind velocity 78.75 mph Wind Force
2
E Bw, Bt Gw, Gt V (mph) Q Cf Zv psf kgf/m daN/m 2
Tower 0.421 0.822 1.424 78.75 0.00256 2 0.9 32.7 159.5 156.5
Earthwire 0.395 0.156 0.996 78.75 0.00256 1 0.9 13.1 63.9 62.7
Conductor 0.422 0.156 1.017 78.75 0.00256 1 0.9 11.7 57.0 55.9
Insulator 0.400 0.822 1.389 78.75 0.00256 1.4 0.9 25.6 124.9 122.5

9-5. Wind force, in case of terrain coefficient (Zv) C and wind velocity 78.75 mph Wind Force
E Bw, Bt Gw, Gt V (mph) Q Cf Zv psf kgf/m 2 daN/m 2
Tower 0.314 0.856 1.252 78.75 0.00256 2 1.1 49.0 239.2 234.6
Earthwire 0.301 0.193 0.952 78.75 0.00256 1 1.2 20.3 99.3 97.4
Conductor 0.315 0.193 0.963 78.75 0.00256 1 1.1 18.8 92.0 90.2
Insulator 0.304 0.856 1.235 78.75 0.00256 1.4 1.2 36.9 180.3 176.9

9-6. Wind force, in case of terrain coefficient (Zv) D and wind velocity 78.75 mph Wind Force
2 2
E Bw, Bt Gw, Gt V (mph) Q Cf Zv psf kgf/m daN/m
Tower 0.251 0.871 1.144 78.75 0.00256 2 1.3 59.5 290.7 285.1
Earthwire 0.243 0.214 0.914 78.75 0.00256 1 1.3 24.9 121.6 119.3
Conductor 0.251 0.214 0.921 78.75 0.00256 1 1.3 23.9 116.9 114.7
Insulator 0.245 0.871 1.135 78.75 0.00256 1.4 1.3 43.3 211.3 207.3

Oct 7, 2007
GECOL 61/62 Version 1.0
 Steel Tower

10. Result of calculation

Wind Force
Terrain
Wind Velocity Tower Earthwire Conductor Insulator
Coefficient 2 2 2 2 Area
(mph) (daN/m ) (daN/m ) (daN/m ) (daN/m )
(Zv)

Jalo, Tripoli city

100 (45m/s) 252.4 101.2 90.1 197.5
and Ghat
B
78.75 (35m/s) 156.5 62.7 55.9 122.5 other areas

Jalo, Tripoli city

100 (45m/s) 378.4 157.0 145.5 285.2
and Ghat
C
78.75 (35m/s) 234.6 97.4 90.2 176.9 other areas

Jalo, Tripoli city

100 (45m/s) 459.8 192.3 184.9 334.2
and Ghat
D
78.75 (35m/s) 285.1 119.3 114.7 207.3 other areas

11. Wind Force applied in Design Standard

Wind velocity is apart from two kinds. One is 35m/s that is applied to Jalo, Tripoli city
and Ghat, the other is 45m/s that is applied to general area. In terrain coefficient,
Because Libya can be usually described as flat open country, farms, and grasslands,
The C terrain category shall be used whenever terrain does not fit the descriptions of
the other exposure categories. It should be noted that this C exposure is representative
of Libya in general. With above mentioned conditions, Wind Force of this design standard
shall be listed in the following table.

Wind Force
Terrain
Wind velocity Tower Earthwire Conductor Insulator
coefficient 2 2 2 2 Area
(mph) (daN/m ) (daN/m ) (daN/m ) (daN/m )
(Zv)

Jalo, Tripoli city

100 (45m/s) 380.0 160.0 145.0 285.0
and Ghat
C
78.75 (35m/s) 235.0 100.0 90.0 180.0 other areas

Oct 7, 2007
GECOL 62/62 Version 1.0
 GD6 6200
Version 1.0: Oct 7, 2007

Tower Earthing

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ································································································································· 1

2. General ····························································································································· 1

3. Definition ·························································································································· 1

4. Standard Earthing Resistance ························································································ 1

5. Construction····················································································································· 2

6. Earthing Electrode ·········································································································· 2

7. Earthing Design and Construction Procedure······························································ 3

8. Connection Method of Earthing Electrode ··································································· 4

9. Installation Drawing of Earthing Electrode·································································· 4

10. Earthing Resistance Calculation of Counterpoise······················································ 5

ii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Earthing electrode to obtain standard earthing resistance 30Ω ················· 2

iii
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Earthing design and construction procedure ··············································· 3

[Figure 2] Installation of earthing electrode ································································ 5

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

Appendix A : References ···························································································· 6

Appendix B : Earthing Resistance Calculation ··························································· 7

v
 Tower earthing

1. Scope

This standard specifies earthing design of steel tower for 66kV overhead transmission
line.

2. General

Ground connection of tower for overhead transmission line is one of important element
that decides possibility of inverse flashover in case attacking with lightning arises. earthing
resistance should be lowered to control electric potential rise of tower by attacking with
lightning current. Therefore, standard value of earthing resistance shall be decided and this
value shall be maintained.

3. Definition

The definitions for purpose of this design standard are as follows:

Earthing or Grounding: The conductive mass of the earthing, whose electric potential
at any point is conventionally taken as zero

Earthing (grounding) electrode: A counterpoise or ground rod in intimate contact with

and providing an electrical connection to earth

Earthing (grounding) electrode resistance: The resistance of an earthing electrode to

earth

Soil Resistivity: A factor such that the conduction-current density is equal to the electric
field in the soil divided by the resistivity

4. Standard Earthing Resistance

The steady state earthing resistance and transient earthing resistance of tower for 66kV
overhead transmission line including earth-wire must maintain less than 30Ω.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 14 Version 1.0
 Tower earthing

5. Construction

Tower earthing for obtaining standard value of earthing resistance applies construction
method that buries ground rod in depth more than 1.0m the under ground. If do not satisfy
standard value of earthing resistance, counterpoise shall be buried in depth more than 0.5m
under the ground, and additionally earthing resistance reduction materials (ground
enhancement materials) can be applied around counterpoise. The kind and cross-sectional
area of earth conductor shall be copper 35mm2.

6. Earthing Electrode

Earthing electrode should be installed as required by horizontal two layers model

analysis after soil resistivity measurement implemented at each tower location to obtain
standard earthing resistance. If it is difficult to analyze by this method, the number of
earthing electrode can be easily concluded according to rough soil resistance as the
following table.

< Table 1 > Earthing electrode to obtain standard earthing resistance 30Ω

Soil resistivity Earthing electrode needed

Less than 100 Ground rod 1.5m × 4
100 ~ 300 Ground rod 1.5m × 4
300 ~ 500 Ground rod 1.5m × 4 + Counterpoise 5m ×4
500 ~ 700 Ground rod 1.5m × 4 + Counterpoise 10m ×4
700 ~ 1000 Ground rod 1.5m × 4 + Counterpoise 20m ×4
More than 1000 Ground rod 1.5m × 4 + Counterpoise 30m ×4

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 14 Version 1.0
 Tower earthing

7. Earthing Design and Construction Procedure

Measurement and analysis

of soil resistivity

Earthing design & construction

Measurement of steady state earthing resistance

(After tower erection)

Additional earthing construction

No

Result of steady state earthing resistance

Yes

Measurement of transient earthing resistance

(After conductor string)

Additional earthing construction

No
Result of transient earthing resistance

Yes

Finish

[Figure 1] Earthing design and construction procedure

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 14 Version 1.0
 Tower earthing

8. Connection Method of Earthing Electrode

Since earthing conductor connections are required to ensure the continuity of service
between earthing electrode and earthing objects, which should prevent the generation of
electrical earthing potential gradient between earthing electrode and earthing objects.
There are some methods in connection for earthing electrode such as the exothermic
weld, brazed and pressure type connections, that is bolt or sleeve.
Generally, pressure bolt type is widely adopted in connection between earthing electrode
and earthing objects.
Therefore, to secure the electrical continuity of service and mechanical strength, the
pressure bolt shall be applied between counterpoises. Also, the pressure bolt type shall be
applied between earthing electrode (ground rod or counterpoise) and tower leg.

9. Installation Drawing of Earthing Electrode

Installation of earthing electrode is as following figure.

Length of counterpoise

Counterpoise

Tower Foot
Right of way

45°

Ground Rod

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 14 Version 1.0
 Tower earthing

1.0m 0.5m Counterpoise

(Copper wire 35mm2)

Ground clamp

1.0m

Counterpoise clamp

Ground rod
Ground rod connector

[Figure 2] Installation of earthing electrode

10. Earthing Resistance Calculation of Counterpoise

Earthing resistance calculation of counterpoise for overhead transmission line is

described in the following equation.
ρ l2
R= ⋅ ln [Ω]
2 ⋅π ⋅ l 2⋅r ⋅t
Where
r Radius of counterpoise (m)
l Length of counterpoise (m)
t Depth of counterpoise (m)
ρ Soil resistivity (Ω·m)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 14 Version 1.0
 Tower earthing

Appendix A: References

KDS 1101 Tower earthing

IEC 61936-1 Power installations exceeding 1kV AC-common rules
IEEE 81.2-1991 IEEE Guide for measurement of impedance and safety
characteristics of large, extended or interconnected grounding
system

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 14 Version 1.0
 Tower earthing

Appendix B: Earthing Resistance Calculation

1. Method of earthing resistance calculation

Ground structure model is applied to horizontal two layers as like figure B1 for the
purpose of calculating accurate earthing resistance by means of counterpoise and ground
rod. The number of case by means of horizontal 2 layers structure is same with table B1. it
is supposed that reflection coefficient -0.7~0.7, soil resistivity 50~2000 Ω-m and thickness
of top layer (h) 0.5 ~ 20m. Figure B2 shows bottom layer earthing resistivity change in
commensuration with reflection coefficient k change.

Top Layer ( ρ1 ) h

Bottom Layer ( ρ 2 )

[Figure B1] Ground structure model of horizontal two layers

Calculation of earthing resistance used CDEGS (Current Distribution, Electromagnetic

interference, Grounding and Soil structure analysis) that is earthing connection system
design and program for analysis. Calculation method by this program is minuteness
calculation method to calculate correct earthing resistance that looks for solution by using
of voltage - current relation equation after ground connection electrode is divided into the
small piece of conductor.
At first, four ground rods are buried to each tower leg of all towers. Earthing resistance
is calculated by changing length of counterpoise (L) into 5 ~ 50 [m] in assumption that
counterpoise is installed such as figure B3 and model of horizontal two layers is applied.
Table B2~B11 arranges needed length of counterpoise to get standard earthing resistance
value 30 [Ω].
Part marked as 'B' in tables is that tower earthing is satisfied by installing only ground
rod in each steel tower leg, and part marked as 'N/A' is that tower earthing must be
supplemented with using other earthing construction.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 14 Version 1.0
 Tower earthing

< Table B1 > Soil resistance of bottom layer according to ground structure model ( ρ 2 )

ρ1
50 100 150 200 300 500 700 1000 1500 2000
k
-0.7 8.8 17.6 26.5 35.3 52.9 88.2 123.5 176.5 264.7 352.9
-0.6 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 75.0 125.0 175.0 250.0 375.0 500.0
-0.5 16.7 33.3 50.0 66.7 100.0 166.7 233.3 333.3 500.0 666.7
-0.4 21.4 42.9 64.3 85.7 128.6 214.3 300.0 428.6 642.9 857.1
-0.3 26.9 53.8 80.8 107.7 161.5 269.2 376.9 538.5 807.7 1076.9
-0.2 33.3 66.7 100.0 133.3 200.0 333.3 466.7 666.7 1000.0 1333.3
-0.1 40.9 81.8 122.7 163.6 245.5 409.1 572.7 818.2 1227.3 1636.4
0.0 50.0 100.0 150.0 200.0 300.0 500.0 700.0 1000.0 1500.0 2000.0
0.1 61.1 122.2 183.3 244.4 366.7 611.1 855.6 1222.2 1833.3 2444.4
0.2 75.0 150.0 225.0 300.0 450.0 750.0 1050.0 1500.0 2250.0 3000.0
0.3 92.9 185.7 278.6 371.4 557.1 928.6 1300.0 1857.1 2785.7 3714.3
0.4 116.7 233.3 350.0 466.7 700.0 1166.7 1633.3 2333.3 3500.0 4666.7
0.5 150.0 300.0 450.0 600.0 900.0 1500.0 2100.0 3000.0 4500.0 6000.0
0.6 200.0 400.0 600.0 800.0 1200.0 2000.0 2800.0 4000.0 6000.0 8000.0
0.7 283.3 566.7 850.0 1133.3 1700.0 2833.3 3966.7 5666.7 8500.0 11333.3
Note
1) Thickness of top layer (h) = 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 13, 15, 20m
2) Number of case of horizontal 2 layers structure is 1500 cases
[15 (Reflection coefficient) × 10 (Top layer resistivity) × 10 (Depth)]
3) Reflection coefficient, K = ( ρ 2 - ρ1 ) / ( ρ 2 + ρ1 )
[ ρ1 : soil resistivity of top layer, ρ2 soil resistivity of bottom layer]

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 14 Version 1.0
 Tower earthing

Variation of Resistivity of Lower Layer by K

Resistivity of Lower Layer [ohm-m]

Reflection Coefficient

[Figure B2] Soil resistivity change of bottom layer according to reflection change

Length of counterpoise

Counterpoise

Tower Foot
Right of way

45°

Ground Rod

[Figure B3] Tower ground rod and counterpoise (L = 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50m)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 14 Version 1.0
 Tower earthing

2. Counterpoise length needed for standard earthing resistance

< Table B2 > Counterpoise length needed for standard earthing resistance 30Ω ( ρ1 =50Ω-m)

ρ2 h 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 13 15 20
8.8 B B B B B B B B B B
12.5 B B B B B B B B B B
16.7 B B B B B B B B B B
21.4 B B B B B B B B B B
26.9 B B B B B B B B B B
33.3 B B B B B B B B B B
40.9 B B B B B B B B B B
50.0 B B B B B B B B B B
61.1 B B B B B B B B B B
75.0 B B B B B B B B B B
92.9 B B B B B B B B B B
116.7 B B B B B B B B B B
150.0 B B B B B B B B B B
200.0 B B B B B B B B B B
283.3 B B B B B B B B B B

< Table B3 > Counterpoise length needed for standard earthing resistance 30Ω ( ρ1 =100Ω-m)

ρ2 h 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 13 15 20
17.6 B B B B B B B B B B
25.0 B B B B B B B B B B
33.3 B B B B B B B B B B
42.9 B B B B B B B B B B
53.8 B B B B B B B B B B
66.7 B B B B B B B B B B
81.8 B B B B B B B B B B
100.0 B B B B B B B B B B
122.7 B B B B B B B B B B
150.0 B B B B B B B B B B
185.7 B B B B B B B B B B
233.3 B B B B B B B B B B
300.0 B B B B B B B B B B
400.0 B B B B B B B B B B
566.7 B B B B B B B B B B

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 14 Version 1.0
 Tower earthing

< Table B4 > Counterpoise length needed for standard earthing resistance 30Ω ( ρ1 =150Ω-m)

ρ2 h 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 13 15 20
26.5 B B B B B B B B B B
37.5 B B B B B B B B B B
50.0 B B B B B B B B B B
64.3 B B B B B B B B B B
80.8 B B B B B B B B B B
100.0 B B B B B B B B B B
122.7 B B B B B B B B B B
150.0 B B B B B B B B B B
183.3 B B B B B B B B B B
225.0 B B B B B B B B B B
278.6 B B B B B B B B B B
350.0 B B B B B B B B B B
450.0 B B B B B B B B B B
600.0 B B B B B B B B B B
850.0 4×5m B B B B B B B B B

< Table B5 > Counterpoise length needed for standard earthing resistance 30Ω ( ρ1 =200Ω-m)

ρ2 h 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 13 15 20
35.3 B B B B B B B B B B
50.0 B B B B B B B B B B
66.7 B B B B B B B B B B
85.7 B B B B B B B B B B
107.7 B B B B B B B B B B
133.3 B B B B B B B B B B
163.6 B B B B B B B B B B
200.0 B B B B B B B B B B
244.4 B B B B B B B B B B
300.0 B B B B B B B B B B
371.4 B B B B B B B B B B
466.7 B B B B B B B B B B
600.0 4×5m B B B B B B B B B
800.0 4×5m 4×5m B B B B B B B B
1133.3 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m B B B B B B B

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 14 Version 1.0
 Tower earthing

< Table B6 > Counterpoise length needed for standard earthing resistance 30Ω ( ρ1 =300Ω-m)

ρ2 h 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 13 15 20
52.9 B B B B B B B B B B
75.0 B B B B B B B B B B
100.0 B B B B B B B B B B
128.6 B B B B B B B B B B
161.5 B B B B B B B B B B
200.0 B B B B B B B B B B
245.5 B B B B B B B B B B
300.0 B B B B B B B B B B
366.7 B B B B B B B B B B
450.0 4×5m 4×5m B B B B B B B B
577.1 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m B B B B B B
700.0 4×10m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m B B B B B
900.0 4×15m 4×10m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m B B B B
1200.0 4×20m 4×15m 4×10m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m B B B
1700.0 4×30m 4×30m 4×15m 4×10m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m B

< Table B7 > Counterpoise length needed for standard earthing resistance 30Ω ( ρ1 =500Ω-m)

ρ2 h 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 13 15 20
88.2 B B 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m
125.0 B B 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m
166.7 B B 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m
214.3 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m
269.2 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m
333.3 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m
409.1 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m
500.0 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m
611.1 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m
750.0 4×15m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m
928.6 4×20m 4×15m 4×15m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m
1166.7 4×30m 4×20m 4×20m 4×15m 4×15m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m
1500.0 4×40m 4×30m 4×30m 4×20m 4×15m 4×15m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m
2000.0 4×50m 4×40m 4×30m 4×30m 4×20m 4×15m 4×15m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m
2833.3 4×50m 4×50m 4×40m 4×40m 4×30m 4×20m 4×15m 4×15m 4×10m 4×10m

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 14 Version 1.0
 Tower earthing

< Table B8 > Counterpoise length needed for standard earthing resistance 30Ω ( ρ1 =700Ω-m)

ρ2 h 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 13 15 20
123.5 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×15m
175.0 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×15m
233.3 4×5m 4×5m 4×5m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×15m 4×15m
300.0 4×5m 4×5m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m
376.9 4×5m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m
466.7 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×10m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m
572.7 4×10m 4×10m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m
700.0 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m
855.6 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m
1050.0 4×30m 4×30m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m
1300.0 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×15m
1633.3 4×40m 4×40m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m
2100.0 4×50m 4×50m 4×40m 4×40m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m
2800.0 N/A N/A 4×50m 4×50m 4×40m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×20m
3966.7 N/A N/A N/A N/A 4×50m 4×40m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×20m

< Table B9> Counterpoise length needed for standard earthing resistance 30Ω ( ρ1 =1000Ω-m)

ρ2 h 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 13 15 20
176.5 4×5m 4×5m 4×10m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m
250.0 4×5m 4×10m 4×10m 4×15m 4×15m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×30m
333.3 4×10m 4×10m 4×15m 4×15m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×30m
428.6 4×10m 4×15m 4×15m 4×15m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×30m 4×30m
538.5 4×15m 4×15m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m
666.7 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×20m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m
818.2 4×20m 4×20m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m
1000.0 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m
1222.2 4×40m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m
1500.0 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m
1857.1 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×30m 4×30m
2333.3 N/A N/A 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m
3000.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m
4000.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×40m
5666.7 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 14 Version 1.0
 Tower earthing

< Table B10 > Counterpoise length needed for standard earthing resistance 30Ω ( ρ1 =1500Ω-m)

ρ2 h 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 13 15 20
264.7 4×15m 4×15m 4×20m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m
375.0 4×15m 4×15m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m
500.0 4×20m 4×20m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m
642.9 4×20m 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m
807.7 4×30m 4×30m 4×30m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m
1000.0 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m
1227.3 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m
1500.0 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m
1833.3 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m
2250.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
2785.7 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
3500.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
4500.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
6000.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
8500.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

< Table B11 > Counterpoise length needed for standard earthing resistance 30Ω ( ρ1 =2000Ω-m)

ρ2 h 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 13 15 20
352.9 4×20m 4×30m 4×30m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m N/A
500.0 4×30m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m N/A
666.7 4×30m 4×40m 4×40m 4×40m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m N/A N/A N/A
857.1 4×40m 4×30m 4×40m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m N/A N/A N/A N/A
1076.9 4×40m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
1333.3 4×50m 4×50m 4×50m N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
1636.4 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
2000.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
2444.4 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
3000.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
3714.3 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
4666.7 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
6000.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
8000.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
11333.3 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 14 Version 1.0
 GD6 6300
Version 1.0: Oct 7, 2007

Conductor

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ··························································································································· 1

2. Definitions ··················································································································· 1

3. The Kind of Wires ······································································································ 2

3.1 Aluminum ·········································································································· 2
3.2 Zinc coated steel wires (IEC 60888) ·································································· 2
3.3 Aluminum-clad steel wires (IEC 61232) ··························································· 2
4. Conductor Designations ···························································································· 2
4.1 Conductor designations ····················································································· 2
4.2 Designation system ···························································································· 2
5. The Kind of Conductor ····························································································· 4

6. The Characteristics of Stranded Conductors ·························································· 4

6.1 Rated tensile strength ························································································ 4
6.1.1 Homogeneous aluminum conductors ······················································· 4
6.1.2 Composite aluminum-steel conductors ···················································· 5
6.2 Increment due to stranding of conductor ··························································· 5
6.3 Linear density and mass per unit length ···························································· 6
6.3.1 Mass per unit length ················································································· 6
6.3.2 Linear density of aluminum wires ···························································· 7
6.3.3 Linear density of zinc coated steel wires ·················································· 7
6.3.4 Linear density of aluminum-clad steel wires ············································ 7
6.4 Conductivity and D.C Resistance ······································································ 8
6.4.1 Resistivity and D.C resistance of wire ····················································· 8
6.4.2 D.C Resistance of composite conductor ··················································· 8
6.5 The coefficient of linear expansion ···································································· 9
6.6 The modulus of elasticity ·················································································· 10
6.7 Creep ················································································································· 11
7. The Selection of Conductor ······················································································· 13
7.1 Consideration factors ························································································· 13

ii
 7.2 Current carrying capacity ·················································································· 14
7.2.1 The application of allowance current ······················································· 14
7.2.2 Temperature limit ····················································································· 15
7.2.3 Operating permissible current ·································································· 15
7.2.4 Emergency load current ··········································································· 15
7.3 Voltage drop and stability ·················································································· 16
7.4 Mechanical strength and Economical efficiency ··············································· 16
7.5 Environmental condition ··················································································· 16
7.6 Future loads ······································································································· 16
8. Earth Wire ·················································································································· 16
8.1 The number of earth wire ·················································································· 16
8.2 Vertical spacing ································································································· 16
8.3 Used earth wire ·································································································· 17
8.3.1 Kinds ······································································································· 17
8.3.2 Conductivity of conductor ······································································· 17
8.3.3 Characteristics of stranded conductor ······················································ 17

iii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Standard increment due to stranding ····································································· 6

< Table 2 > Linear density of aluminum wires ········································································· 7
< Table 3 > Linear density of zinc coated steel wires ······························································· 7
< Table 4 > Linear density of aluminum-clad steel wires ························································· 8
< Table 5 > The coefficient of linear expansion and the modulus of elasticity for wire ········· 10
< Table 6 > The coefficient of linear expansion and the modulus of elasticity for ACSR ······ 10
< Table 7 > The coefficient of linear expansion and the modulus of elasticity for ACSR/AS · 11
< Table 8 > Typical creep values of stranded conductors ························································· 12
< Table 9 > All aluminum alloy conductors ············································································ 13
< Table 10 > Aluminum conductor steel reinforced ································································ 13
< Table 11 > Aluminum conductor aluminum-clad steel reinforced ······································· 14
< Table 12 > Existing transmission line (ACSR) ···································································· 14
< Table 13 > Temperature limits of conductor ········································································ 15
< Table 14 > Operating permissible current ············································································ 15
< Table 15 > Operating permissible current ············································································ 15
< Table 16 > Kinds of stranded conductors ············································································· 17
< Table 17 > Characteristics of stranded conductor ································································ 17

iv
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

Appendix A : References ·························································································· 18

Appendix B : Current Carrying Capacity ·································································· 19
Appendix C : Transmission Capability Calculations Theory ····································· 27

v
 Conductor

1. Scope

This standard specifies the selection of conductor for 66 kV overhead transmission line.

2. Definitions

Aluminum: All types of aluminum and aluminum alloys listed.

Conductor: A material intended to be used for carrying electric current consisting of a

plurality of uninsulated wires twisted together.

Concentric lay stranded conductor: A conductor composed of a central core

surrounded by one or more adjacent layers of wires being laid helically in opposite
directions.

Direction of lay: The direction of twist of a layer of wires as it moves away from the
viewer. A right hand lay is a clockwise direction and left-hand lay is an anti-clockwise
direction.

Alternative definition: The direction of lay is defined as right-hand or left-hand. With

right-hand lay, the wires conform to the direction of the central part of the letter Z when
the conductor is held vertically, with left-hand lay; the wires conform to the direction of
the central part of the letter S when the conductor is held vertically.

Lay length: The axial length of one complete turn of the helix formed by an individual
wire in a stranded conductor.

Lay ratio: Means the ratio of the lay length to the external diameter of the corresponding
layer of wires in the stranded conductor.

Steel ratio: The ratio of steel areas to aluminum areas as a percentage in Ax/Syz
conductors.

Wire: A filament of drawn metal having a constant circular cross-section.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

3. The Kind of Wires

This design standard specifies the electrical and mechanical characteristics of round wire,
concentric lay, overhead, electrical and conductors made of combinations of any of the
following metal wires:

3.1 Aluminum
1) Hard drawn aluminum, designated A1 (IEC 60889)
The resistivity 28.264nΩm, corresponding to 61% IACS
2) Aluminum alloy type B, designated A2 (IEC 60104)
The resistivity 32,530nΩm, corresponding to 53% IACS
3) Aluminum alloy type A, designated A3 (IEC 60104)
The resistivity 32,840nΩm, corresponding to 52.5% IACS

3.2 Zinc coated steel wires (IEC 60888)

1) Regular strength steel, designated S1A or S1B
2) High strength steel, designated S2A or S2B
3) Extra high strength steel, designated S3A
Where A and B are zinc coating classes

3.3 Aluminum-clad steel wires (IEC 61232)

1) Class 20SA, types A and B, designated respectively SA1A and SA1B
2) Class 27SA, designated as SA2.

4. Conductor Designations

4.1 Conductor designations

The conductor designations included in this standard are:
1) A1: All Aluminum Conductors; AAC
2) A2: All Aluminum Alloy Conductors; AAAC
3) A1/S2A: Aluminum Conductors Steel Reinforced; ACSR
4) A1/SA1A: Aluminum Conductors Aluminum-clad Steel Reinforced; ACSR/AS

4.2 Designation system

1) A designation system is used to identify stranded conductors made of aluminum, with
or without steel wires.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

2) Homogeneous aluminum conductors are designated Ax, where x identifies the type of
aluminum. [For example : AAC, AAAC]
3) Composite aluminum-steel conductors are designated Ax/Syz, where Ax identifies
external wires (or the envelope) and Syz identifies the steel core. In the designation of
steel wires, y represents the type of steel (regular, high or extra high strength) and z
represents the class of zinc coating (A or B). [ For example : ACSR]
4) When aluminum-clad steel wires SA1A are used in a composite conductor instead of
zinc-coated wires, the designation becomes Ax/SA1A. [ For example : ACSR/AS ]
5) Conductors are identified as follows:
• A code number giving the equivalent conductive sections of A1 aluminum expressed in
mm2.
• A designation identifying the type of wires constituting the conductor. For composite
conductors the first designation applies to the envelopes and the second to the core.
• One and two numbers giving the stranding of conductors. For composite conductors,
the first number identifies the number of the envelope and the second identifies the
number of wires of the core.

Examples 1
a. AAC Conductor
250-A1-19: Conductor made of 19 wires of A1 aluminum. Its area is 250mm2.
b. AAAC Conductor
250-A2-19: Conductor made of 19 wires of A2 aluminum with a total conductive
area equivalent to 250mm2 of A1 aluminum. From the table 9 we find its actual
area is equal to 288mm2.
c. ACSR Conductor
250-A1/S2A-26/7: Conductor made of 26 wires of A1 aluminum and 7 wires of
high strength steel with class 1 zinc coating. The area of A1 aluminum is 250mm2
and, from the table 10 the area of S2A steel is 40.7mm2.
d. ACSR/AS Conductor
250-A1/SA1A-26/7: Conductor made of 26 wires of A1 aluminum and 7 wires of
Aluminum-clad steel class 20SA wires, type A (SA1A). The area of A1 aluminum
is equal to 240mm2 and 39.1mm2 for the aluminum–clad steel wires which can be
found in the table 11.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

5. The Kind of Conductor

For 66kV overhead transmission conductor aluminum conductor steel reinforced

(ACSR) may be used in general and other conductors may be used according to
consideration factor.
In specifying conductors, a number of abbreviations for common types are in general
use.
• ACSR: Aluminum Conductors Steel Reinforced
• ACSR/AS: Aluminum Conductors Aluminum-clad Steel Reinforced
• AAAC: All Aluminum Alloy Conductors

From a materials point of view the choice between ACSR and AAAC is not so obvious
and at larger conductor size the AAAC option becomes more attractive. AAAC can achieve
significant strength weight ratios and for some constructions gives smeller sag and or
lower height. With regard to long-term creep or relaxation, ACSR with its steel core is
considerably less likely to be affected. Jointing does not impose insurmountable difficulties
for either ACSR or AAAC type of conductor as long as normal conductor cleaning and
general preparation are observed. AAAC is slightly easier to joint than ACSR. And
ACSR/AS conductor is usually used in order to reduce the risk of corrosion in some
environments.

6. The Characteristics of Stranded Conductors

6.1 Rated tensile strength

6.1.1 Homogeneous aluminum conductors
The rated tensile strength of AAC and AAAC conductor shall be taken as sum of the
minimum tensile strength of all wires.

Example 2
AAC Code Number 125
Area 125 mm2
Wire diameter 2.89 mm
Minimum tensile strength of wires 170 MPa
The rated tensile strength of AAC 125 170 *106*125*10-6 = 21250 N = 21.25 KN

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

Example 3
AAAC Code Number 125
Area 144 mm2
Wire diameter 3.10 mm
Minimum tensile strength of wires 295 MPa
The rated tensile strength of AAAC 125 295*106*144*10-6 = 42480 N = 42.480 KN

6.1.2 Composite aluminum-steel conductors

The rated tensile strength of ACSR and ACSR/AS conductor shall be the sum of the
tensile strength of the aluminum portion plus the strength of steel corresponding to an
elongation compatible with that of aluminum at rupture load. For the purpose of
specification and practicability, this strength of steel is conservatively established as the
stress corresponding at 1% elongation in a 250mm gauge length.
The tensile strength of any single wire is the product of its nominal area and the
appropriate minimum stress given in the technical specification of GECOL.

Example 4
ACSR Code Number 125
Area AL 125 mm2 ST 20.4 mm2
Wire diameter AL 2.47 mm ST 1.92 mm
Minimum tensile strength of wires AL 175 MPa ST 1240 MPa
The rated tensile strength of ACSR 125
175 *106*125*10-6 + 1240 *106*20.4*10-6 = 47171 N = 47.171 KN

6.2 Increment due to stranding of conductor

The mass of a stranded conductor is affected by the lay factor. With the exception of the
centric wire, all wires are longer than the stranded conductor and the increase in mass
depends upon the lay ratio employed.
The increments in per cent, for mass due to stranding, based on the mean lay ratio shall
be taken as given in table 1.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

< Table 1 > Standard increment due to stranding

Stranding of Conductor
Mass increment (%)
Aluminum Steel
Number of Number of Number of Number of
Alum. Steel
wires layers* wires layers*
6 1 1 - 1.52 -
18 2 1 - 1.90 -
7 1 - - 1.31 -
22 2 7 1 2.04 0.43
26 2 7 1 2.16 0.43
19 2 - - 1.80 -
37 3 - - 2.04 -
45 3 7 1 2.23 0.43
Note:

1) * Number of layers of each type of wire not including the central wire.

6.3 Linear density and mass per unit length

6.3.1 Mass per unit length
The masses have been calculated for each size and stranding of conductor using
densities for aluminum, zinc coated steel as given in the following clause, the stranding
increment given in table 1, and the cross-sectional areas for aluminum and zinc-coated
steel wires based on their theoretical unrounded diameters.

The mass of conductor [kg/km] = A × ( B + 1) × C + D × ( E + 1) × F

Where
A The density of aluminum [g/cm3]
B The increment due to stranding of aluminum
C The cross - sectional areas for aluminum [mm2]
D The density of steel [g/cm3]
E The increment due to stranding of steel
F The cross - sectional areas for steel [mm2]

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

Example 5
ACSR Code Number 200 (26/7)
Area AL 200 mm2 ST 32.56 mm2
Density AL 2.703 g/cm3 ST 7.78 g/cm3
Increment AL 2.16% ST 0.43%
The mass of conductor ACSR 200
2.703[g/cm3] * 200[mm2] * 1.0216 + 7.78[g/cm3] * 32.56[mm2] * 1.0043 = 806 [kg/km]

6.3.2 Linear density of aluminum wires

The characteristic of linear density of aluminum wires is listed in the following table.

< Table 2 > Linear density of aluminum wires

Classifications Density (g/cm3) IACS (%) The resistivity (nΩm)
Hard drawn aluminum; A1 2.703 61 28.264
Aluminum alloy type B; A2 2.703 53 32,530
Aluminum alloy type A; A3 2.703 52.5 32,840

6.3.3 Linear density of zinc coated steel wires

The characteristic of linear density of zinc coated steel wires is listed in the following
table.

< Table 3 > Linear density of zinc coated steel wires

Classifications Density (g/cm3) IACS (%) Class
Regular: S1A, S1B 7.78 9 1, 2 classified by
high strength: S2A, S2B 7.78 9 minimum zinc mass
per unit area
extra high strength: S3 7.78 9

6.3.4 Linear density of aluminum-clad steel wires

The characteristic of linear density of linear density of aluminum-clad steel wires is
listed in the following table.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

< Table 4 > Linear density of aluminum-clad steel wires

Classifications Density [g/cm3] IACS (%) Aluminum covering
20SA (SA1A) 6.59 20.3 Standard
20SA (SA1B) 6.53 20.3 Standard
27SA (SA2) 5.91 27 Medium

6.4 Conductivity and D.C Resistance

6.4.1 Resistivity and D.C resistance of wire
Resistivity and D.C resistance can be calculated by the next equation.

1 100
ρ= ∗ ∗ 10 2 [Ω/m ·mm2]
58 C

ρ
rdc = × 10 3 [Ω/km]
A
Where
ρ Resistivity [Ω/m ·mm2]
C % IACS Conductivity [%]
rdc D.C Resistance of wire [Ω/km]
A Cross-space area of wire [mm2]

% IACS Conductivity [%] means in the international annealed copper standard,

annealed copper possess a resistivity of 17.241 nΩm originally, that is, the conductivity of
the annealed copper means IACS 100% of standard which is used to compare other
conductor.

6.4.2 D.C Resistance of composite conductor

On calculating D.C Resistance for composite aluminum-steel conductors, resistance of
steel may be omitted. When aluminum-clad steel wires are used in composite conduct
instead of zinc-coated wires, D.C resistance for composite conduct should be calculated by
means of considering D.C resistance for aluminum-clad steel. Also this value is expressed
to four decimal figures. D.C resistance of composite conductor can be calculated by the
next equation.
rdc ( AL ) ⋅ (k AL + 1) rdc ( ST ) ⋅ (k ST + 1)
Rdc = + [Ω/km]
N AL N ST
Where

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

rdc (AL) DC Resistance of aluminum wire

k AL Increment due to standing of aluminum wire
N AL The number of aluminum wire
rdc (ST) DC Resistance of steel wire
k ST Increment due to standing of steel wire
N ST The number of steel wire
% IACS conductivity of wires applied in this standard is listed in the table 2, 3, 4.

6.5 The coefficient of linear expansion

Changes in temperature will affect the length of a conductor. The thermal strain or unit
elongation ( ε T ) of homogeneous aluminum conductors have the following format.
ε T = α a ΔT
Where
α Is the coefficient of linear expansion of conductor in C-1
αa For aluminum
αs For steel
ΔT Is the temperature T increment

In the case of homogenous conductors, this is simply the modulus of material used.
For AAC, AAAC conductor, the value of α a = 23 × 10-6 C-1 is used.
For steel wires, the coefficient of linear expansion α s is considered equal to
α s =11.5 × 10-6 C-1.

The thermal elongation of composite conductors is more complex to establish because of

the intimate relationship between elongation and stress of constituent wires when both
aluminum and steel wires are subjected to tensile stresses, thermal strain and tensile strain
are related.
For ACSR, ASCR/AS conductors, the coefficient of linear expansion α is
mα a E a + α s E s
α=
mE a + E s
Where
Ea , Es The modulus of elasticity for aluminum, steel wires
α a ,α s The coefficient of linear expansion for aluminum, steel wires
The ratio of aluminum wires cross sectional areas to steel wires cross
m : Aa / As
sectional areas
Aa , As The cross sectional areas for aluminum, steel wires

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

The coefficient of linear expansion of ACSR, ACSR/AS is listed in the table 6, 7.

In cases where tensile force in aluminum wires are nil, the steel core carries all thee
conductor tension. In such cases, the thermal elongation of the conductor is identical to the
elongation of the steel core alone, that is α = α s .

6.6 The modulus of elasticity

The modulus of elasticity conductors can be derived from following equation
where E a and E s are respectively the aluminum and steel module. m is defined the ratio
of aluminum wires cross sectional areas to steel wires cross sectional are as:

mE a + E s
E=
m +1
The modulus of elasticity of ACSR, ACSR/AS is listed in the table 6, 7.

For homogeneous constructions, the value of the material used is taken.

< Table 5 > The coefficient of linear expansion and the modulus of elasticity for wire
Coefficient of linear expansion Modulus of elasticity
Wire
(10-6C-1) (MPa)
Aluminum wires 23.0 62000
Zinc coated steel wires 11.5 206000
Aluminum-clad steel wires 12.6 155000

< Table 6 > The coefficient of linear expansion and the modulus of elasticity for ACSR

Cross-sectional area (㎟) Coefficient of Modulus of

Code m
linear expansion elasticity
number ( Aa / As )
Al St Total (10-6C-1) (MPa × 103)
125 125 20.4 145 6.1275 18.957 82.204
160 160 26.1 186 6.1303 18.958 82.196
200 200 32.6 233 6.1350 18.960 82.182
250 250 40.7 291 6.1425 18.963 82.161
315 315 51.3 366 6.1404 18.962 82.167

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

< Table 7 > The coefficient of linear expansion and the modulus of elasticity for ACSR/AS

Cross-sectional area (㎟) Coefficient of Modulus of

Code m
linear expansion elasticity
number ( Aa / As )
Al St Total (10-6C-1) (MPa × 103)
125 120 19.6 140 6.1224 19.985 75.057
160 154 25.0 179 6.1600 19.998 74.989
200 192 31.3 223 6.1342 19.989 75.036
250 240 39.1 279 6.1381 19.990 75.029
315 303 49.3 352 6.1460 19.993 75.014

6.7 Creep
Creep is a phenomenon which affects most materials subjected to stress. It manifests it
self by an inelastic stretch of the material in the direction of the stress. Certain materials
such as aluminum are more susceptible than others. For example steel suffers only a
limited amount of creep. The increase in conductor length resulting from inelastic stretch
produces increased sags which must be taken into account in the overhead line design and
installation process so as not to infringe clearances.
A conductor suspended between two supports will in time get an increase in sag which
must be considered by the transmission line engineer in order to satisfy the required ground
and crossing and crossing clearances. This additional sag is caused by a characteristic of
the material called creep, normally defined as the long-term change in shape depending on
applied forces.
Many investigations have been made throughout the world to calculate or measure the
creep in conductors in order to predict the final elongation and thus the final sag.
A general finding is that the elongation for conductor can be divided into two different
parts: One being mainly a geometric settlement when wires are tightened together initiating
stresses at wires are tightened together initiating stresses at wire cross-over points. The
other is regarded as a pure metallurgical creep within the wires.
The total creep elongation for different loads and temperature has been shown to follow
equation.

ε C = K C × e φT × σ Ψ × t μ

Where
εC Permanent inelastic elongation (creep)
KC The creep coefficient depending mainly on number of wires in the conductor

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

φ The coefficient for the temperature(T) dependence

Ψ The coefficient for the stress( σ ) dependence
μ The coefficient for the time (t) dependence

In order to determine these coefficients, tests must be made according to a very precise
procedure. The reason for this is that a large portion of the creep will take place in the very
beginning of the test. The method for loading the conductor and starting the reading of the
elongation must therefore be accurate.
The coefficients K C , φ , Ψ and μ are shown to depend upon the number of component
wires and their materials. This together with the fact that creep tests take a long time to
perform complicate the establishing of the creep equation coefficients.
Normally the final sag calculation is made by using the creep at 10 years. The reason for
this is that additional creep from 10 to 50 years is relatively small and that a reasonable
amount of the creep may have been elapsed from the time of stringing up to the time of
clamping in the conductor.
The following creep values and correspondingly calculated temperature are typical. The
values have been taken as rounded mean values from many creep tests reported. It may be
pointed out that these values refer to ordinary conductors and ordinary stringing tensions.
In some cases especially designed conductors and/or prestress stringing technique
significantly reduce the creep. Also abnormal conductor conditions such as, for example,
very high temperatures or high everyday tensions could be expected to increase the creep
more than that mentioned in table 8.

< Table 8 > Typical creep values of stranded conductors

Type of conductor Estimated creep after 10 years ( μm / m )
AAC 800
AAAC 500
ACSR 500

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

7. The Selection of Conductor

7.1 Consideration factors

The selection of the most appropriate conductor must take into account next items as
listed below.
• Current carrying capacity
• Mechanical strength
• Economical efficiency
• Environmental condition
• Future loads

The characteristic of the conductor is listed in the following table.

< Table 9 > All aluminum alloy conductors

DC
Wire Conductor Linear Rated
Code Cross-sectional area Number Resistance
Diameter Diameter mass strength
number (㎟) of wires at 20℃
(mm) (mm) (㎏/㎞) (kN)
(Ω/㎞)
125 144 19 3.10 15.5 395.4 42.44 0.2302

160 184 19 3.51 17.6 506.1 54.32 0.1798

200 230 19 3.93 19.6 632.7 67.91 0.1439

250 288 19 4.39 22.0 790.8 84.88 0.1151

315 363 37 3.53 24.7 998.9 106.95 0.0916

< Table 10 > Aluminum conductor steel reinforced

Wire DC
Cross-sectional area Number Conductor Linear Rated
Code Diameter Resistance
(㎟) of wires Diameter mass strength
number (mm) at 20℃
(mm) (㎏/㎞) (kN)
Al St Total Al St Al St (Ω/㎞)

125 125 20.4 145 26 7 2.47 1.92 15.7 503.9 48.54 0.2310

160 160 26.1 186 26 7 2.80 2.18 17.7 644.9 61.34 0.1805

200 200 32.6 233 26 7 3.13 2.43 19.8 806.2 74.69 0.1444

250 250 40.7 291 26 7 3.50 2.72 22.2 1007.7 93.37 0.1155

315 315 51.3 366 26 7 3.93 3.05 24.9 1269.7 114.02 0.0917

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

< Table 11 > Aluminum conductor aluminum-clad steel reinforced

Wire DC
Cross-sectional area Number Conductor Linear Rated
Code Diameter Resistance
(㎟) of wires Diameter mass strength
number (mm) at 20℃
(mm) (㎏/㎞) (kN)
Al St Total Al St Al St (Ω/㎞)

125 120 19.6 140 26 7 2.43 1.89 15.4 460.8 44.49 0.2308

160 154 25.0 179 26 7 2.74 2.13 17.4 589.8 56.18 0.1803

200 192 31.3 223 26 7 3.07 2.39 19.4 737.2 69.27 0.1443

250 240 39.1 279 26 7 3.43 2.67 21.7 921.5 86.58 0.1154

315 303 49.3 352 26 7 3.85 2.99 24.4 1161.1 107.58 0.0916

< Table 12 > Existing transmission line (ACSR)

Wire DC
Cross-sectional area Number Conductor Linear Ultimate
Code Diameter Resistance
(㎟) of wires Diameter mass strength
number (㎜) at 20℃
(mm) (㎏/㎞) (kN)
Al St Total Al St Al St (Ω/㎞)

Bear 264.4 61.7 326.1 30 7 3.35 3.35 23.45 1214 111.2 0.1093

Lion 238.3 55.6 293.9 30 7 3.18 3.18 22.26 1094 100.4 0.1213

Tiger 131.2 30.6 161.8 30 7 2.36 2.36 16.52 602 58.00 0.2202

Zebra 428.9 55.6 484.5 54 7 3.18 3.18 28.62 1621 131.9 0.06740
Penguin 107.2 17.9 125.1 6 1 4.77 4.77 14.31 433.1 3820 0.2676

Owl 135.4 17.6 153.0 6 7 5.36 1.79 16.09 508.9 4345 0.2120

Goose 323.1 41.9 365.0 54 7 2.76 2.76 24.84 1220 10740 0.08949
Note

1) Bear, Lion, Tiger, Zebra: manufactured in accordance with British standard 215 part2
2) Penguin, Owl, Goose: manufactured in accordance with CSA C-49
3) Penguin: used for 30, 66 kV Transmission
4) Bear, Lion, Tiger, Zebra, Owl, Goose: used for 66 kV Transmission

7.2 Current carrying capacity

7.2.1 The application of allowance current
• Continuous permissible temperature
The steady-state current should not exceed operating permissible current.
• Temporary permissible temperature

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

When one circuit of two circuits fails, the possibility of outbreak is a relatively few
state, Current should not exceed emergency load current.

7.2.2 Temperature limit

The temperature limit of conductor is as the following temperature.

< Table 13 > Temperature limits of conductor

Continuous permissible temperature Temporary permissible temperature
[Operating permissible current] [Emergency load current]
80℃ 125℃

7.2.3 Operating permissible current

The operating permissible current of conductor is listed in the following table.

< Table 14 > Operating permissible current

Kinds
ACSR (A) ACSR/AS (A) AAAC (A)
Code
125 366 364 369
160 427 426 432
200 492 490 497
250 568 564 573
315 657 654 662

7.2.4 Emergency load current

The emergency load current of conductor is listed in the following table.

< Table 15 > Operating permissible current

Kinds
ACSR (A) ACSR/AS (A) AAAC (A)
Code
125 572 569 580
160 671 668 682
200 777 772 788
250 900 894 913
315 1046 1040 1060

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

7.3 Voltage drop and stability

Transmission capability should be determined in consideration of voltage drop and
stability margin by means of power system analysis.

7.4 Mechanical strength and economical efficiency

An optimal conductor should be selected through the consideration of stringing tension,
tower height and construction cost, etc according to transmission line route.

7.5 Environmental condition

If it is necessary to reduce the risk of corrosion in some environments, the usage of the
following conductor should be examined:
• ACSR/AS (Aluminum Conductors Aluminum-clad Steel Reinforced)
• The steel core of the ACSR shall be greased with good quality of grease of high heat
resistance for anti corrosive protection.

7.6 Future loads

An optimal conductor should be selected through the consideration of future loads
increase.

8. Earth Wire

8.1 The number of earth wire

Where there is risk of a direct lightning strike to the phase conductors, transmission lines
are provided with overhead earth wires to shield them and also to provide a low impedance
earth return. That is, to reduce the influence of lightning, ground wires should be installed
on the top of the tower. The degree of shielding of the overhead line phase conductors from
lightning strikes is determined by the shielding angle afforded by the earth wire(s) running
over the overhead line. In general, this standard makes it a rule to install single earth wire.
But where lines are erected in areas of high lightning activity, two earth wires may be
provided to permit a lower shielding angle and superior protection.

8.2 Vertical spacing

The vertical spacing between the earth and phase conductors must be such as to ensure
sufficient clearance to prevent mid-span flashovers under transient conditions. The sagging
should be arranged so as to ensure that the vertical mid – span clearance between the phase
and earth conductors.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

Though the temperature of earth wire does not rise to the temperature as equal to that of
conductor but the sag of the earth wire shall be calculated considering the same conditions
of conductor. However the sag of earth wire shall be at least 10% less than that of phase
conductor under all temperature conditions under still wind at the normal spans so as to
give a mid span clearance greater than that at the supports.

8.3 Existing earth wire

Aluminum-clad steel stranded conductor shall be generally used as earth wire.

8.3.1 Kinds
The kinds of stranded conductors are listed in Table 16.

< Table 16 > Kinds of stranded conductors

Code Nominal cross-sectional area Number of Diameter (㎜)
number (㎟) wires Wire Conductor
30 30 7 2.34 7.02
58 58 7 3.26 9.78

8.3.2 Conductivity of conductor

The conductivity of homogeneous conductors with aluminum-clad steel wires is based
on the relevant conductivity, 61% IACS of aluminum and 9% IACS of steel, the total
conductivity is 20.3 % IACS of value given in IEC 61232.

8.3.3 Characteristics of stranded conductor

After stranding, the characteristics of stranded conductor shall meet the requirements
listed in Table 17 of this specification.

< Table 17 > Characteristics of stranded conductor

Code Linear mass Minimum rated tensile strength Maximum DC resistance
number (㎏/㎞) (kN) at 20℃ (Ω/㎞)
30 200.3 40.20 2.8637
58 389.6 76.50 1.4630

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

Appendix A: References

IEC 60888 Zinc coated steel wires for stranded conductors

IEC 61232 Aluminum-clad steel wires for electrical purposes
IEC 60889 Hard-drawn aluminum wires for overhead line conductors
IEC 60104 Aluminum-magnesium-silicon alloy wire for overhead line
conductors
IEC 61089 Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded conductors
IEC 61597 Overhead electrical conductors- calculation methods for stranded
bare conductors
KDS 1210 Conductor
KDS 1220 Earth wire
BICC OVERHEAD CONDUCTOR DESIGN
The Aluminum electrical conductor handbook, third edition
Aluminum
Association

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

Appendix B: Current Carrying Capacity

1. General

The current carrying capacity (CCC) of a conductor is maximum steady-state current

inducing a given temperature rise in the conductor, for given ambient conditions.
The CCC depends on the type of conductor, its electric resistance, the maximum
allowable temperature rise and the ambient conditions.

2. Calculation method

In the technical literature there are many methods of calculating each component of
above equation. However, for steady-state conditions, there is reasonable agreement
between the currently available methods and they all lead to current carrying capacities
within approximately 10%.
Various methods were as follows.
• IEC 1597, 943
• JCS (Japan)
• ANCI/IEEE 738(1993)
• CIGRE WG22-12

IEC 1597, 943 methods is used for calculating the current carrying capacities of
conductors included in this design standard.

3. Alternating current resistance

The electric resistance of a conductor is a function of the conductor material, length,

cross-sectional area and the effect of the conductor lay. In more accurate calculations, it
also depends on current and frequency.
In order to evaluate the electrical resistance at other temperatures, a correction factor has
to be applied to the resistance at 20 ℃.
The alternating current (AC) resistance at a given temperature T is calculated from the
DC resistance, corrected to the temperature T and considering the skin effect increment on
the conductor that reflects the increased apparent resistance caused by the inequality of
current density.
The AC resistance is calculated from the DC resistance at the same temperature. The DC

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

resistance of a conductor increase linearly with the temperature, according to the following
equation.
Rdc (Tc ) = Rdc (20) ⋅ [1 + α 20 (TC − 20)]
Rac (Tc ) = β1 ⋅ β 2 ⋅ Rdc (Tc )
Where
Rdc (20) The DC resistance at temperature 20℃ [Ω/km]
Rdc (TC ) The DC resistance at temperature Tc
Rac (TC ) The AC resistance at temperature Tc
α 20 The temperature coefficient of electrical resistance at temperature T20
β1 The coefficient of skin effect
β2 The coefficient of magnetic effect

In this chapter, Rdc (20) corresponds to the DC resistance at 20℃. The temperature
coefficients of resistance at 20℃ are the following.
For type A1 aluminum α 20 = 0.00403 C-1
For types A2 and A3 Aluminum α 20 = 0.00360 C-1
Based on these values at 20℃, the DC resistances have been calculated for temperatures
of 80℃, 125℃.

Various methods are available for computing the ratio between AC and DC resistances.
The AC resistance of the conductor is higher than the DC resistance mainly because of
the skin effect. The cause of this phenomenon can be explained by the fact that the inner
portion of the conductor has a higher inductance than the outer portion because the inner
portion experiences more flux linkages. Since the voltage drop along any length of the
conductor must be necessarily the same over the whole cross-section, there will be a
current concentration in the outer portion of the conductor, increasing the effective
resistance.
Otherwise, for conductors having steel wires in the core (ACSR), the magnetic flux in
the core varies with the current, thus the AC/DC ratio also varies with it, especially when
the number of aluminum layer is odd. Because there is an unbalance of magnetomotive
force due to opposite spiraling directions characteristics of adjacent layers.

The values of coefficient of skin effect and magnetic effect may be used as like the
following table.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

< Table B1 > AC/DC ratio for AC resistance calculation

Aluminum The coefficient The coefficient
Conductors
layers of skin effect of magnetic effect
β1 = 0.99609 + 0.018578χ
− 0.030263χ 2 + 0.020735χ 3
Homogenous
Where
conductors All conductors β2 = 1
(Aluminum) 8πf
χ = 0.01 ⋅
Rdc

β1 = 0.99609 + 0.018578χ
Even layers − 0.030263χ 2 + 0.020735χ 3 β2 = 1
Where
Composite D + 2 Di
χ = 0.01 ⋅ ⋅
conductors D + Di
(Aluminum + 8πf ( D − Di)
⋅
Steel wire) ( D + Di) Rdc Application of
Odd layers D: Diameter of conductor values obtained
Di: Diameter of core from test
f: Frequency

4. Heat balance equation

4.1 Heat balance equation

The steady-state temperature rise of a conductor is reached whenever the heat gained by
the conductor from various sources is equal to the heat losses. This is expressed by
following equation.
Pj + Psol = Prad + Pconv
Where
Pj The heat generated by joule effect
Psol The solar heat gain by the conductor surface
Prad The heat loss by radiation of the conductor
Pconv The convection heat loss

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

4.2 Joule effect

Power losses Pj (W), due to joule effect are given by following equation.

Pj = RT I 2

Where
RT The electric resistance of conductor at a temperature T (Ω / m)
I The conductor current (A)

4.3 Solar heat gain

Solar heat gain, Psol (W/m), is given by following equation.
Psol = γDS i
Where
γ The solar radiation absorption coefficient
D The conductor diameter(m)
Si The intensity of solar radiation (W / m 2 )

4.4 Radiated heat loss

Heat loss by radiation, Prad (W), is given by following equation.

Prad = sπDK e (T24 − T14 )

Where
s The Stefan-Bolltzmann constant (5.67 × 10 −8 W .m −2 .K −4 )
D The conductor diameter (m)
Ke The emissivity coefficient in respect to block body
The temperature (K )
T T1 ambient temperature (K )
T2 final equilibrium temperature (K )

4.5 Convection heat loss

Only forced convention heat loss, Pconv (W), is taken account and is given by following
equation.
Pconv = λNu (T2 − T1 )π

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

Where
The thermal conductivity of the air film in contact with the conduct assumed
λ
constant and equal to : 0.02585W.m-1.K-1
The Nusselt number, given by the following equation
Nu
Nu = 0.65 Re 0.2 + 0.23 Re 0.61
The Reynoids number given by the following equation
Re
Re = 1.644 × 10 9 vD[(T1 + 0.5(T2 − T1 )]−1.78
D The conductor diameter (m)
v The wind speed in m/s
The temperature (K )
T T1 ambient temperature (K )
T2 final equilibrium temperature (K )

4.6 Method to calculate current carrying capacity (CCC)

From heat balance equation, the steady-state current carrying capacity can be calculated.

I MAX = [( Prad + Pconv − Psol ) / RT ]1 / 2

Where
RT The electric resistance of conductor at a temperature T (Ω / m)

Psol , Prad and Pconv are calculated form equation related

4.7 Determination of the maximum permissible aluminum temperature

The maximum permissible aluminum temperature is determined either from the
economical optimization of losses or from the maximum admissible loss and tensile
strength in aluminum.
In all cases, appropriate clearance under maximum temperature has to be checked and
maintained.

4.8 Calculated values of current carrying capacity (CCC) of any conductor in any
condition to be calculated
As a reference, the table in this design standard gives the CCC of the recommended
conductor size under the following conditions. It is important to note that any change to
these conditions (especially with wind speed and ambient temperature) will result in
different CCC which will have to be recalculated according to above equation.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

• Speed of cross wind (90℃ to the line), v = 1 m/s

• Intensity of solar radiation, S i = 1120 W/m2
• Solar absorption coefficient γ = 0.5
• Emissivity with respect to black body K e =0.6
• Aluminum temperature T2 = 80℃, 125℃
• Ambient temperature, T1 = 50℃
• Frequency = 50 Hz (Values for 60 Hz are very close, usually within 2 %)

4.9 Current carrying capacity (CCC)

Current carrying capacity is listed in the following table according to assumed
conditions of 4.8 clauses.

< Table B2 > Aluminum conductors steel reinforced CCC at 80℃

Cross-sectional Number DC Resistance AC Resistance CCC
Code
area (㎟) of wires at 80℃ at 80℃ at 80℃
number
Al St Total Al St (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (A)
125 125 20.4 145 26 7 0.2869 0.2871 366
160 160 26.1 186 26 7 0.2241 0.2244 427
200 200 32.6 233 26 7 0.1793 0.1796 492
250 250 40.7 291 26 7 0.1434 0.1438 568
315 315 51.3 366 26 7 0.1139 0.1143 657

< Table B3 > Aluminum conductors steel reinforced CCC at 125℃

Cross-sectional Number DC Resistance AC Resistance CCC
Code
area (㎟) of wires at 125℃ at 125℃ at 125℃
number
Al St Total Al St (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (A)
125 125 20.4 145 26 7 0.3287 0.3289 572
160 160 26.1 186 26 7 0.2569 0.2571 671
200 200 32.6 233 26 7 0.2055 0.2058 777
250 250 40.7 291 26 7 0.1644 0.1647 900
315 315 51.3 366 26 7 0.1305 0.1309 1046

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

< Table B4 > Aluminum conductors aluminum-clad steel reinforced CCC at 80℃
Cross-sectional Number DC Resistance AC Resistance CCC
Code
area (㎟) of wires at 80℃ at 80℃ at 80℃
number
Al St Total Al St (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (A)
125 120 19.6 140 26 7 0.2866 0.2868 364
160 154 25.0 179 26 7 0.2239 0.2241 426
200 192 31.3 223 26 7 0.1792 0.1795 490
250 240 39.1 279 26 7 0.1433 0.1436 564
315 303 49.3 352 26 7 0.1137 0.1141 654

< Table B5 > Aluminum conductors aluminum-clad steel reinforced CCC at 125℃
Cross-sectional Number DC Resistance AC Resistance CCC
Code
area (㎟) of wires at 125℃ at 125℃ at 125℃
number
Al St Total Al St (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (A)
125 120 19.6 140 26 7 0.3285 0.3286 569
160 154 25.0 179 26 7 0.2566 0.2568 668
200 192 31.3 223 26 7 0.2054 0.2056 772
250 240 39.1 279 26 7 0.1642 0.1645 894
315 303 49.3 352 26 7 0.1304 0.1307 1040

< Table B6 > All Aluminum alloy conductors CCC at 80℃

DC Resistance AC Resistance CCC
Code Cross-sectional Number
at 80℃ at 80℃ at 80℃
number area (㎟) of wires
(Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (A)
125 144 19 0.2799 0.2803 369
160 184 19 0.2186 0.2190 432
200 230 19 0.1750 0.1755 497
250 288 19 0.1400 0.1405 573
315 363 37 0.1114 0.1121 662

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

< Table B7 > All aluminum alloy conductors CCC at 125℃

DC Resistance AC Resistance CCC
Code Cross-sectional Number
at 125℃ at 125℃ At 125℃
number area (㎟) of wires
(Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (A)
125 144 19 0.3172 0.3175 580
160 184 19 0.2478 0.2481 682
200 230 19 0.1983 0.1987 788
250 288 19 0.1586 0.1591 913
315 363 37 0.1262 0.1269 1060

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

Appendix C: Transmission Capability Calculations Theory

1. Overhead line impedance

An electric transmission line has four parameters which affect its ability to fulfill its
function as part of a power system; resistance, inductance, capacitance and conductance.
Since leakage of at insulators of overhead lines is negligible, the conductance between
conductors of an overhead line is usually neglected.

1.1 Inductive reactance

Calculation of the inductance and inductive reactance of a transmission line involves a
straight-forward application of the familiar concepts of magnetic fields and magnetic
induction. Inductance,
For a three phase system the mutual effects of one conductor on another modify the
formula and the expression under symmetrical operating conditions becomes:

L = 0.2(log e GMD / GMR) [mH / km] Line to neutral inductance

GMD is geometric mean distance between any numbers of conductors.

GMD = 3
Dab ⋅ Dbc ⋅ Dca

GMR is geometric mean radius of conductors

The following table gives values of GMR for ACSR and all aluminum stranded
conductors of conductor radius, r.

< Table C1> Value of GMR for inductive reactance calculations

Aluminum Steel
GMR
No of wires No of layers No of wires No of layers
18 2 1 - 0.7765r
7 1 - - 0.7256r
22 2 7 1 0.7949r
26 2 7 1 0.8116r
19 2 - - 0.7577r
37 3 - - 0.7678r

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

1.2 Conductive reactance

For short overhead lines at higher voltages the capacitance is usually ignored if data is
not immediately available.
The expression for capacitance, C, is in the form:

C = 1 /(18 log e GMD / r ) [ μF / km]

GMD is geometric mean distance between any numbers of conductors and r is conductor
radius.

1.3 Resistance
Resistance values for different conductor materials are given in clause Appendix B
Current Carrying Capacity. The effective resistance of high voltage overhead lines is
usually negligible in comparison to the inductive reactance and is therefore often neglected
in simple hand calculations for load flow or fault current analysis. Only at low and medium
voltages does the resistance become significant for short circuit calculations.

1.4 Zero sequence reactance (for reference)

Zero sequence reactance (Xo) is complicated to calculate, the vale depends upon he
position and materials of conductor and log of the square root of the ground resistivity.
With assumptions of the next conditions, the rough values of positive and zero sequence
impedance for overhead lines are given in following tables.

• Tower = 2 circuits overhead line and 1 earth wire

- Horizontal spacing between circuits on top·middle crossarm; 5.7 m
- Horizontal spacing between circuits on bottom crossarm; 5.9 m
- Vertical spacing between phases on same circuits; 3.2 m
- Vertical spacing between phase and earth wire; 3.1 m
• Pole = 1 circuits overhead line and 1 earth wire
- Horizontal spacing between phases; 3.4 m
- Vertical spacing between phases and earth wire; 3.0 m
• Ground resistivity = 100 Ω·m
• Frequency = 50Hz
• Earth wire = Aluminum-clad steel stranded code 58
• Temperature = 20℃

If above conditions mentioned shall be changed, of conductor position in particular,

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

28 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

positive and zero sequence impedance should be recalculated according to new conditions.

< Table C2 > ACSR, Zero sequence reactance (Tower)

Cross-sectional Number
Code R1 X1 R0 X0
area (㎟) of wires
number (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞)
Al St Total Al St
125 125 20.4 145 26 7 0.2310 0.4053 0.7751 2.1125
160 160 26.1 186 26 7 0.1805 0.3977 0.7246 2.1050
200 200 32.6 233 26 7 0.1444 0.3907 0.6685 2.0980
250 250 40.7 291 26 7 0.1155 0.3835 0.6596 2.0908
315 315 51.3 366 26 7 0.0917 0.3763 0.6358 2.0836

< Table C3 > ACSR, Zero sequence reactance (Pole)

Cross-sectional Number
Code R1 X1 R0 X0
area (㎟) of wires
number (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞)
Al St Total Al St
125 125 20.4 145 26 7 0.2310 0.4091 0.5336 1.2768
160 160 26.1 186 26 7 0.1805 0.4015 0.4831 1.2692
200 200 32.6 233 26 7 0.1444 0.3945 0.4470 1.2622
250 250 40.7 291 26 7 0.1155 0.3873 0.4181 1.2550
315 315 51.3 366 26 7 0.0917 0.3801 0.3943 1.2478

< Table C4 > ACSR/AS, Zero sequence reactance (Tower)

Cross-sectional Number
Code R1 X1 R0 X0
area (㎟) of wires
number (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞)
Al St Total Al St
125 120 19.6 140 26 7 0.2308 0.4065 0.7749 2.1137
160 154 25.0 179 26 7 0.1803 0.3988 0.7244 2.1061
200 192 31.3 223 26 7 0.1443 0.3920 0.6884 2.0993
250 240 39.1 279 26 7 0.1154 0.3849 0.6595 2.0921
315 303 49.3 352 26 7 0.0916 0.3775 0.6357 2.0848

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

29 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

< Table C5 > ACSR/AS, Zero sequence reactance (Pole)

Cross-sectional Number
Code R1 X1 R0 X0
area (㎟) of wires
number (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞)
Al St Total Al St
125 120 19.6 140 26 7 0.2308 0.4103 0.5334 1.2780
160 154 25.0 179 26 7 0.1803 0.4026 0.4829 1.2703
200 192 31.3 223 26 7 0.1443 0.3958 0.4469 1.2635
250 240 39.1 279 26 7 0.1154 0.3887 0.4180 1.2564
315 303 49.3 352 26 7 0.0916 0.3814 0.3942 1.2491

< Table C6 > AAAC, Zero sequence reactance (Tower)

Code Cross-sectional Number R1 X1 R0 X0
number area (㎟) of wires (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞)
125 144 19 0.2302 0.4104 0.7743 2.1176
160 184 19 0.1798 0.4024 0.7239 2.1097
200 230 19 0.1439 0.3956 0.6880 2.1029
250 288 19 0.1151 0.3884 0.6592 2.0957
315 363 37 0.0916 0.3803 0.6357 2.0875

< Table C7 > AAAC, Zero sequence reactance (Pole)

Code Cross-sectional Number R1 X1 R0 X0
number area (㎟) of wires (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞) (Ω/㎞)
125 144 19 0.2302 0.4142 0.5328 1.2819
160 184 19 0.1798 0.4062 0.4824 1.2739
200 230 19 0.1439 0.3994 0.4465 1.2671
250 288 19 0.1151 0.3922 0.4177 1.2599
315 363 37 0.0916 0.3841 0.3942 1.2518

2. Limitation factors for transmission capacity

Generally, the transmission capability is dependent on the conductor's thermal limitation,

voltage drop and system stability.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

30 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

2.1 Thermal limitation

The allowable current of conductor is dependent on the increase of the conductor
temperature. This temperature rising is decided by the equilibrium when Joule heat and
solar heat are equal to the loss of convection heat and radiation heat.
Allowable temperature refers to the temperature limit so as not to lower the mechanical
characteristics of the conductor and the thermal capacity is decided by the factor that the
transmissible capacity under 50 miles not exceed this allowable temperature.
Thermal capacity refers to the transmissible capacity with a current not exceeding this
allowable temperature, which is usually dominant for less than 50 miles.

2.2 Voltage drop

As the transmission line gets longer, the receiving end voltage becomes lower because
of a voltage drop. Transmission capability is dependent on this factor with lines of 50 ~
200 miles, it is normal that the receiving end voltage should be more than 95 % of the
sending end voltage (Voltage drop: 5 % below).

2.3 Stability
In spite of faults, the power system should be operated stably with a stability margin.
Generally, 30% of stability margin is planned, which corresponds to an angular
displacement of 44degrees. So, the stability margin is the governing criterion in long-range
transmission lines.

3. Transmission line characteristics

3.1 Line constants

The transmission lines are uniformly distributed by four elements R, L, C, and G that are
called the line constants. Those are necessary for calculating transmission line
characteristics.
These line constants are decided by the type, radius and arrangement of conductor, not
by voltage, current and power factor.

3.2 Ferranti effect

The phenomenon where the receiving end voltage is higher than the sending end
voltage at no-load, is the Ferranti effect.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

31 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

3.3 Surge impendence (SIL: Surge impendence loading)

When the loss of transmission line is negligible (Y《X), the characteristic impedance
Z
ZC = of a transmission line, is independent of frequency.
Y
This characteristic impedance refers to surge impedance that is given by:

Z L
SI = =
Y C

Surge impedance loading (or intrinsic load) refers to the power that can be supplied to
the resistive load such as the surge impedance.
V V2
SIL = 3VI = 3V = [ MW ]
3SI SI
V : Static line voltage (kV), SI : surge impedance (Ω)
When the power flow of transmission line is equal to SIL, the loss of reactive power
becomes 0. This means that the power at the sending end corresponds to the power at the
receiving end.
Once the power flow on a transmission line exceeds the SIL, the loss of reactive power
and voltage drop is increased and then ultimately, transmission capability becomes
constricted.
Since the SIL is the target for transmission capability, transmission power can be
expressed as the form multiplied by the SIL. The SIL is about 1/3 to 1/6 the surge
impedance loading capability.

3.4 Stability
Stability is the case that all generators remain in synch and maintain power angle under a
sudden change in load and fault. Stability is dependent on many factors such as the amount
of disturbance, the load connection method and so forth. A transmission system with its
synchronous machines has to withstand, with a stability margin, sudden disturbances under
steady state and transient operation conditions.
The transmission line is supposed to transmit power with a steady-state stability of
30 %.

3.5 Loadability for phase spacing

As the phase spacing becomes narrower, the loadability in long-distance transmission
can be increased.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

32 / 33 Version 1.0
 Conductor

3.6 Loadability for ambient temperature

As the ambient temperature becomes higher, the loadability in long-range transmission
line can be decreased slightly.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

33 / 33 Version 1.0
 GD6 6400
Version 1.0: Oct 7, 2007

Insulator & Fitting

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ··························································································································· 1

2. Kind ····························································································································· 1

3. The Number of Insulator ·························································································· 1

4. The Selection of Insulator String ·············································································· 2

5. The Application of Strength ······················································································ 2

5.1 Single suspension string set ··············································································· 2
5.2 Double suspension string set ············································································· 3
5.3 Single tension string set ····················································································· 3
5.4 Double tension string set ··················································································· 4
5.5 Jumper suspension string set ············································································· 4
5.6 Earth wire ·········································································································· 4
5.6.1 Suspension set ·························································································· 5
5.6.2 Tension set ······························································································· 5
6. The Points to be Considered on Selection of Insulator String Set ························· 5

7. Factors of Safety ········································································································ 6

8. The Characteristics ···································································································· 6

8.1 Glass and porcelain insulators ··········································································· 6
8.1.1 Kinds ······································································································· 6
8.1.2 Ratings ····································································································· 7
8.2 Composite insulator ··························································································· 8
8.2.1 Structure ··································································································· 8
8.2.2 Reliability review for transmission line polymer insulator ······················· 8
8.2.3 Application ······························································································· 9
8.3 Hardware fittings ······························································································· 9
8.3.1 General ···································································································· 9
8.3.2 Suspension clamps ··················································································· 9
8.3.3 Tension clamp ·························································································· 10

ii
8.3.4 Mid span compression joint ····································································· 10
8.3.5 Vibration dampers ···················································································· 10
8.3.6 Repair sleeves ·························································································· 11
8.3.7 Preformed Armor Rod ·············································································· 12

iii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > The number of insulator ········································································· 1

< Table 2 > The strength of insulator string ······························································ 2
< Table 3 > Single suspension string set ··································································· 2
< Table 4 > Double suspension string set ·································································· 3
< Table 5 > Single tension string set ········································································· 3
< Table 6 > Double tension string set ········································································ 4
< Table 7 > Jumper suspension string set ·································································· 4
< Table 8 > Suspension set ························································································ 5
< Table 9 > Tension set ····························································································· 5
< Table 10 > Kinds of insulator ················································································· 7
< Table 11 > Ratings of insulators ············································································· 7
< Table 12 > Number of damper ··············································································· 11
< Table 13 > The positions of vibration damper ························································ 11

iv
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Standard or fog type insulator ···································································· 8

v
 LIST OF APPENDIX

Appendix A : References ·························································································· 13

Appendix B : The Strength of Insulator String Set ···················································· 14
Appendix C : Drawing of Insulator String Set ·························································· 20
Appendix D : The Number of Insulator for 66kV Transmission Line ······················· 26
Appendix E : Strength Calculation. ··········································································· 30

vi
 Insulator & Fitting

1. Scope

This standard specifies the basic requirements for the installation of the insulator and
fitting for 66KV overhead transmission line.

2. Kind

The kind and classification of insulator string is as follows.

○ Insulator string for overhead conductor
■ Suspension insulator string: single, double
■ Tension insulator string: single, double
■ Jumper insulator string
○ Insulator string for earth wire
■ Suspension set
■ Tension set

The single suspension strings shall be used on all the suspension towers except on those
suspension towers which are near main roads or other key locations, where double
suspension string shall be used.
Similarly single tension strings shall be used on all the angle and terminal towers and
double tension strings on all the angled towers crossing main roads, transmission lines and
other key locations.
The jumper insulator strings shall be used on heavy angled terminal towers, where
clearance requirements so demand.
Also, arching horn should be installed for the purpose of protecting insulator string.

3. The Number of Insulator

The number of insulator connected to per insulator string shall be used according to
table given in appendix D.
< Table 1 > The number of insulator
Pollution level
Kind
Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Suspension string set 6 6 6 6
Tension string set 5 5 6 7

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

4. The Selection of Insulator String

Suspension insulator string shall be installed in the straight type of supports. In the other
case, tension insulator string shall be installed.
But in case of exceeding the strength range of the insulator string set by reason that
strength caused by too long span and height differential between supports exceeds
allowance strength of insulator string set, it is necessary to strengthen insulator strength
and use tension insulator string.

5. The Application of Strength

The application of the strength of insulator & insulator string applied to 66KV
transmission line is based on the following table.
< Table 2 > The strength of insulator string
Strength
Voltage Kind Number
Insulator Insulator string set
66kV Single 100KN 120KN
Suspension
66kV Double 100KN 120KN
66kV Single 160KN 160KN
Tension
66kV Double 160KN 160KN
66kV Jumper Single 100KN 120KN
Note:

1) The factors of safety for insulators applies 3.0 and that of hardware fitting applies 2.5

The procedure to assemble fitting into insulator string is the following clause.

5.1 Single suspension string set

This set shall normally consist of the following table.
< Table 3 > Single suspension string set
Item Denomination N GES Code M.B.S
1 Anchor shackle 1 1202040 120KN
2 Ball eye 1 1202145 120KN
3 Arcing horn 2 1242310
4 Socket tongue 1 1242245 120KN

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

3)
5 Suspension clamp 1 124306* 120KN
1) Designated size of coupling is 16mm (IEC 60120)
2) The type of insulator is U100 BLP (IEC 60305)
3) * 3) differs from code number according to the diameter or kinds of conductor

5.2 Double suspension string set

This set shall normally consist of the following table.
< Table 4 > Double suspension string set
Item Denomination N GES Code M.B.S
1 Anchor shackle 1 1202040 120KN
2 Twist shackle 1 1202045 120KN
3 Triangular yoke 2 1242540
4 Ball clevis 2 1242640 120KN
5 Arcing horn 4 1242320
6 Socket clevis 2 1242740 120KN
3)
7 Suspension clamp 1 124306* 120KN
1) Designated size of coupling is 16mm (IEC 60120)
2) The type of insulator is U100 BLP (IEC 60305)
3) *3) differs from code number according to the diameter or kinds of conductor

5.3 Single tension string set

This set shall normally consist of the following table.
< Table 5 > Single tension string set
Item Denomination N GES Code M.B.S
1 Anchor shackle 1 1202050 160KN
2 Ball eye 1 1202155 160KN
3 Arcing horn 2 1242330
4 Socket tongue 1 1242255 160KN
3)
5 Compression dead clamp 1 12431** 95% cond
1) Designated size of coupling is 20mm (IEC 60120)
2) The type of insulator is U160 BL (IEC 60305)
3) *3) differs from code number according to the diameter or kinds of conductor

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

5.4 Double tension string set

This set shall normally consist of the following table.
< Table 6 > Double tension string set
Item Denomination N GES Code M.B.S
1 Anchor shackle 1 1202050 160KN
2 Twist shackle 1 1202055 160KN
3 Triangular yoke 2 1242550 160KN
4 Ball clevis 2 1242650 160KN
5 Arcing horn 2 1242331
6 Socket clevis 2 1242750 160KN
3)
7 Compression dead clamp 1 12431** 95% cond
1) Designated size of coupling is 20mm (IEC 60120)
2) The type of insulator is U 160 BL (IEC 60305)
3) *3) differs from code number according to the diameter or kinds of conductor

5.5 Jumper suspension string set

This set shall normally consist of the following table.
< Table 7 > Jumper suspension string set
Item Denomination N GES Code M.B.S
1 Anchor shackle 1 1202040 120KN
2 Ball eye 1 1202145 120KN
3 Arcing horn 2 1242310
4 Socket tongue 1 1242245 120KN
5 Anchor shackle 1 1202045 120KN
3)
6 Suspension clamp 1 124308* 120KN
1) Designated size of coupling is 16mm (IEC 60120)
2) The type of insulator is U100 BLP (IEC 60305)
3) * 3) differs from code number according to the diameter or kinds of conductor

5.6 Earth wire

The suspension and tension type of fitting set for earth wire shall normally consist of the
following table.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

5.6.1 Suspension set

This set shall normally consist of the following table.
< Table 8 > Suspension set
Item Denomination N GES Code M.B.S
1 Anchor shackle 1 1202040 120KN
2 Suspension clamp 1 1243058 120KN
3 Earthing clamp 1 1246510
1)
4 Parallel groove clamp 1 12337*0
1) * 1) differs from code number according to the diameter or kinds of conductor
The minimum strength of the set (without clamp) shall not be less than 120KN. No
insulator shall be used.

5.6.2 Tension set

This set shall normally consist of the following table.
< Table 9 > Tension set
Item Denomination N GES Code M.B.S
1 Anchor shackle 4 1202040 120KN
2 Compression dead clamp 2 1243158 95% EW
3 Earthing clamp 2 1246510
1)
4 Parallel groove clamp 2 12*37*0
1) * 1) differs from code number according to the diameter or kinds of conductor
The minimum strength of the set (without clamp) shall not be less than 120KN. No
insulator shall be used.

Fitting assembly mentioned in the above table may be changed according to the facility
of connection.

6. The Points to be Considered on Selection of Insulator String Set

The following conditions shall be taken into account.

• Hardware fitting, insulators and the relative strength between conductors should be
considered.
• Generally, the connection between tension insulator string and conductor uses a type of
compression.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

• In case of connection of insulator string set, the direction of bolt and pin is as following
for the purpose of facilitating inspection and maintenance.

◦ In case of horizontal direction, it is installed in the direction from inner supports to

outer supports.
◦ In case of vertical direction, it is installed in the direction from the bottom to upper
part.
◦ if it is difficult to execute manner mentioned, it is installed on considering of
expedient maintenance.

7. Factors of Safety

In particular the following factors of safety shall be used in the design.

• Insulators: 3
• Fittings: 2.5

8. The Characteristics

8.1 Glass and porcelain insulators

8.1.1 Kinds
This standard applies the cap and pin type with insulating parts of toughened glass or
porcelain material to insulator.
Both glass and porcelain are commonly used materials for insulators and have given
excellent service. There is little difference in cost or performance between glass and
porcelain. Toughened glass has the advantage for overhead lines that broken insulators tend
to shatter completely upon impact and are therefore more easily spotted during
maintenance inspections.
Relative merit of insulator materials is as follows.
• Porcelain: high impact and self-cleaning support
• Glass: obvious failure may be spotted with glass shattering.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

< Table 10 > Kinds of insulator

Maximum nominal Nominal Minimum Standard
diameter of the spacing nominal creeping coupling
Designation Material insulating part distance
[D] [S] [P]
mm mm mm mm
U 100 BLP 280 146 440 16A
Glass
U 160 BL 280 170 340 20
U 100 BLP 280 146 440 16A
Porcelain
U 160 BL 280 170 340 20
Note:

1) Creepage distance: The shortest distance along the surface of an insulator between two conductive parts.
Considering the electrical requirements, where pollution is the limiting factor, the type
and size of insulators shall be so selected so as to achieve minimum number of insulators
with best cleaning properties. As such anti fog type insulators with creepage distance of
about 440 mm shall be used for suspension insulators whereas standard type insulator with
creepage distance of 340 mm may be used for tension strings.

8.1.2 Ratings
The insulator shall fulfill the electrical and mechanical ratings of insulator listed in
Table11.
< Table 11 > Ratings of insulators
Items U 100BLP U 160BL
Mechanical failing load (KN) 100 160
Maximum nominal diameter(A3, B3) (㎜) 280 280
Nominal spacing (A1, B1) (㎜) 146 170
Minimum creepage distance (㎜) 440 340
Standard coupling size (A2, B2) (㎜) 16 A 20
Power frequency withstand voltage (Dry/min.) (㎸) 85 75
Power frequency withstand voltage (Wet/min.) (㎸) 50 45
Lightning impulse withstand voltage (㎸) 125 110
Puncture withstand voltage (㎸) 130 130
Net weight (㎏) (Approx.) 5.8 6.5

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

(a) Standard type (b) Fog type

[Figure 1] Standard or fog type insulator

8.2 Composite insulator

8.2.1 Structure
Composite insulators consist of the following component.
• Core
The core is the internal insulating part of a composite insulator and is designed to ensure
the mechanical characteristics.
• Housing and sheds
The housing is the external insulating part of an insulator which provides the necessary
leakage distance and protects the core from the weather. An intermediate sheath made of
insulating material is a part of the housing. A shed is a projecting part of the housing
intended to increase the leakage distance.
• Metal fitting
The metal fitting is a device forming part of a composite insulator, intended to connect it
to a supporting structure and conductor.
• Mechanical failing load
Mechanical failing load of suspension tower shall be minimum 100KN and that of
tension and deadend tower shall be 160KN.

8.2.2 Reliability review for transmission line polymer insulator

• For the effects of mountain fires
The loss of insulation material due to mountain fires may cause a system fault: however,
since the land of Libya is mostly sands and plain fields, effects of mountain fires are
considered ignorable.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

• For damage by birds

In case of foreign countries, some flashover accidents due to damage of the sheds by
birds have been reported. However, after HTV silicone, which is harder than RTV, was
introduced, there was no more damage or accidents due to birds.

8.2.3 Application
Currently, composite insulators are steadily adopted worldwide. Though there are some
week points. Thus it may be possible to apply composite insulators, which guarantees
reliable performance, in Libya.

8.3 Hardware fittings

8.3.1 General
The fittings shall be manufactured from first class material, technically functional, and
perfectly adoptable to both the conductor as well as insulator. These fittings shall conform,
strictly, to IEC 60120.
The design of every single component shall be distinguished by a high coefficient of
safety with minimum weight in respect to maximum working load as well as the best
mobility. The sharp edges and corners shall be avoided in order to limit the corona. As such
the fittings shall have a round profile finishing which is especially characteristic for rivets,
bolts and nuts. The connection of mobile components of the equipment shall preferably be
made by means of rivets with safety split pins and convex washer. All components of the
equipment made from ferrous materials shall be hot dip galvanized. All bolts and nuts and
threaded parts shall also be hot dip galvanized. The threads of nuts and tapped holes shall
also, preferably, be galvanized and shall be well greased. The cotter pins of socket where
ever used shall be of stainless steel.

8.3.2 Suspension clamps

The suspension clamps shall be made from non magnetic material of Aluminum Alloy
suitable for conductor with preformed armor rods. The ends of the clamp shall be bell
mouthed to avoid any damage of conductor and to ensure freedom from corona losses.
The clamps shall not lead to localized pressure or damage to the conductor in service.
The clamp shall have sufficient surface to minimize damage due to fault currents.
The clamp shall permit the conductor to slip when the tension exceeds 25% of the
breaking strength of conductor. Also the clamp should be given in designing the clamp so
as to avoid the concentration of any stress towards damage of conductor at suspension
point.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

8.3.3 Tension clamp

The tension clamps shall be compression type with minimum slip strength not less than
95% of the breaking strength of conductor.
For ACSR this shall consist of;
• Clevis ended Al tube made from extruded Al. Alloy pipe
• Stainless steel tube
• Al. terminal jumper
For earth wire it shall consist of a stainless steel tube with minimum slip strength not
less than 95% of breaking strength of conductor of earth wire.

8.3.4 Mid span compression joint

The mid span tension joint shall be designed so as to have conductivity not less than
those of relevant conductor and resistance of mid span tension joint shall be less than those
of the equivalent length of relevant conductor
For ACSR conductor this shall be of compression type with slip strength not less than
95% of rated ultimate tensile strength of conductor and shall have the conductivity not less
than the conductor.
The mid span compression joint shall consist of;
• Compression type Al tube made from extruded Al. Alloy pipe
• Stainless steel tube
For earth wire it shall consist of a stainless steel tubes with minimum slip strength not
less than 95% of earth wire breaking strength of conductor of earth wire.
For AAAC the mid span tension clamp shall be made from high strength aluminum.
The mid span tension joint shall be of the tubular type, used to joint two conductors of
same size.
• For AAC, AAAC having a single strand of steel wire, the mid span tension joint shall
be a single part fitting. In case of single part fitting, the mid span tension joint shall be
provided with a center stop indent for correctly positioning of conductor before
compression.
• For ACSR with multi-stranded steel wires, the mid span tension joint shall be two parts
fitting of aluminum and steel tube and the steel tube shall be provided with a center
stop indent for correctly positioning of conductor before compression.

8.3.5 Vibration dampers

Stock bridge type vibration dampers shall be used on both conductor and earth wire. One
damper shall be applied at each end of the span for each conductor but for larger spans two

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

dampers shall be applied at each end of the span. However the design spacing and testing
of dampers shall be accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Also distance from
the clamp to first and second damper shall be given by manufacturer.
It shall be designed for conductor to insert easily with maintaining the circular and shall
sustain the weight continuously and sufficiently from the subsequent vibration happened
by strong wind and light wind in service.
Installation number of vibration dampers is as following table.
< Table 12 > Number of damper
Span length Number of damper
Up to 500m 1 damper / span end
Over 500m 2 dampers / span end

The positions of vibration damper are listed in next table.

< Table 13 > The positions of vibration damper
GES No. Applicable conductor Positions (cm) Damper weight (kg)
ACSR 125
1243461 AAAC 160 100 3.63
AAC 160
ACSR 160
1243462 AAAC 250 110 4.5
AAC 250
ACSR 250
1243464 AAAC 315 125 5.5
AAC 315
1243465 ACSR 315 140 6.4

Position means distance from clamp end (suspension or dead end) to mid of stock bridge.
If armor rods are used at suspension clamp then dampers must be placed at least 100mm
from the ends of the armor rods.

8.3.6 Repair sleeves

For conductor this shall be of compression type made from Al. Alloy extruded tube in
two pieces one being capable of sliding in to other. This shall be used to repair the
conductor when not more than one sixth of the strands in the outermost layer are damaged.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

For earth wire the repair sleeve shall be of mild steel hot dip galvanized.
The repair sleeve shall be designed so as to have conductivity not less than relevant
conductor. Resistance of repair sleeve shall be less than those of the equivalent length of
relevant conductor.
Furthermore, the repair sleeves must be characterized by a mechanical capacity of no
less than 95% of the conductor rated ultimate strength.

8.3.7 Preformed Armor Rod

Reinforcement of conductors to prevent fatigue occurring at suspension points is
achieved by means of galvanized steel rods. The rods are preformed into a helix
approximately 1~2m long and wrapped round the conductor at the most vulnerable
suspension point. The effective increase in conductor diameter caused by the addition of
the rods also tends to reduce the amplitude of vibrations and increase conductor fatigue life.
The preformed armor rods shall be laid in a manner of right hand which is a same
direction to conductor gripped by it.
Also the preformed armor rods shall be bundled into specific numbers of rods (sets)
specified in Table 1 GES.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

Appendix A: References
IEC 60120 Dimension of ball and socket coupling of string insulator unit
IEC 60305 Characteristics of insulator units of the cap and pin type
IEC 61897 Requirements and tests for stockbridge type aeolian vibration
dampers
IEC 61325 Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000V
IEC 60815 Guide for the selection of insulators in respect of polluted conditions
IEC 60372 Locking devices for ball and socket couplings of string insulator
IEEE 987 Guide for the application of composite insulators
KDS 1310 Insulator and fitting design standard
KDS 1211 Sag and tension design standard

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

Appendix B: The Strength of Insulator String Set

1. Review of the electrical and mechanical characteristics of insulators

Generally, insulators are designed by considering mechanical and electrical

characteristics. Especially, in case of ultra high voltage insulators, the following
characteristics should be considered.

1.1 Mechanical characteristics

• Conductor and insulator string should share equal tension.
• When the tension of the conductor is changed by wind load, galloping and sleet jump,
all joints should stand against exhaustion and frictional wear.
• Appropriate restoration characteristics and strength is needed for revolution motion.
• Connection of insulator, sagging and repair works should be easy.

1.2 Electrical characteristics

Other than the arcing horn, it is sufficient that the insulator has the characteristics of the
supporting conductor. But, to meet the characteristics of corona, the corners of the
hardware should be treated as round, and the arcing ring and shield ring should be designed
properly.
• When a flashover is occurred, it should take place between the arcing horns.
• Insulators should prevent thermal destruction from creepage flashover.
• With proper structure design, noise level of corona should be lowered to below the
level of the noise the conductor is making.

2. Insulator set

2.1 Suspension insulator set

Suspension insulator sets simply support conductors on the transmission line. They are
mainly used with I and V-types.
Since an I-type on the tower arm supports conductors in the vertical direction directly by
creating an array of insulators and hardware, which allows movement toward the
conductor and a transverse along the tower arm joint.
Therefore, when a contingency load occurs, an insulator string's swing angle and
clearance diagram should be reviewed. If suspension insulator sets are not applicable,
tension insulator sets should be used.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

The V-type suspension supporting set was designed as a back-up for the I-type.
The V-type is good for insulator set swing, so that it can reduce the clearance toward the
tower arm.

2.2 Tension insulator set

Tension insulator sets are used to grab conductors in towers. The types of the towers are
dead-end towers, angle towers, specific towers for difference of span elevation and
reinforcing towers for the transmission line.
Jumper supporting sets are used to maintain the insulation clearance between jumper
wires and structures. In some cases, they are used for suspension insulators.

2.3 Jumper supporting insulator set

Jumper sets electrically connect both conductors in the tension towers.
Jumper supporting sets are used to maintain the insulation clearance between jumper
wires and structures. In some cases, they are used for suspension insulators.
The jumper sets used in the transmission line are equal composition with the main
conductor.
A counter weight is installed to prevent swing of conductor. In this case, it can prevent
swing through its weight.

3. Insulator set strength

3.1 Suspension insulator set strength

3.1.1 Equation of strength
The equation for calculation the suspension insulator set strength is as follows.
2
⎡ θ θ ⎤
G
=F= [W ⋅ S w + I ]
2
+ ⎢Ww ⋅ S m ⋅ cos 2 + 2T ⋅ sin + I w ⎥
α ⎣ 2 2 ⎦

Where,
G Insulator guaranteed strength [N]
F Applied load of each insulator string [N]
α Safety factor
Sw Weight span [m]
Sm Wind span [m]
I Insulator string weight (Total weight in case of multiple insulator string) [N]
Iw Insulator string wind force load [N]

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

W Weight of unit conductor [N]

Ww Wind force load of unit conductor [N]
T Conductor tension [N]

3.1.2 Result of strength

The calculated result of suspension insulator is as follows.

< Table B1 > Strength of suspension insulator set (In case of using ACSR 315)
Wind Span Weight span Result of calculation KN
Selection
( Sm ) ( Sw ) 35 m/s 45 m/s
400 27.97 37.34
500 30.32 39.13
250
600 32.92 41.18
700 35.72 43.45
400 30.76 42.27
500 32.90 43.86
300
600 35.31 45.70
· I-String: 120 KN
700 37.94 47.75
· Mechanical failing load
400 33.65 47.31
of Insulator:100KN
500 35.62 48.73
350
600 37.86 50.39
700 40.32 52.27
400 36.62 52.42
500 38.44 53.71
400
600 40.52 55.22
700 42.83 56.93

According to the result of transmission line design, the longest weight span is around
650m. On table above, in case of 700 m (weight span), the insulator strength is about 57
KN but the actual strength of tension insulator may be above 57KN in the mountainous
areas because big height differential. Also the strength of suspension string set usually uses
60% of the strength of tension insulator string set. Therefore, insulator string set strength of
120 KN is recommended for suspension insulator string set. In case of important area (i.e.
highway, river and so forth.), double string insulator (120 KN × 2) is recommended for

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

reliability of transmission line. The examples in the Appendix E shows detailed description
about the suspension insulator set strength.

3.2 Tension insulator set strength

3.2.1 Equation of strength
The equation for calculation the tension insulator set strength is listed in the following.
Vertical load pressured on tension insulator string is calculated by the composition load of
conductor weight and insulator string weight. The equation of the vertical load is given by
WS h
V = +T + I
2 S

Horizontal load pressured on tension insulator string is calculated by the vector sum of
wind pressure of conductor, insulator string and conductor tension. The equation of the
horizontal load is given by

Horizontal longitudinal load: H V = T

S
Horizontal transverse load : H H = WW + I W
2

Horizontal load : H = H V2 + H H2

Maximum resultant load pressured on tension insulator string is the vector sum of the
vertical load and horizontal load. The equation of the maximum resultant load is as follows.
G
= F = V2 +H2
α
Where,
G Insulator guaranteed strength [N]
F Applied load of each insulator string [N]
α Safety factor
V Vertical load [N]
H Horizontal load [N]
Sw Weight span [m]
Sm Wind span [m]
I Insulator string weight (Total weight in case of multiple insulator string) [N]
Iw Insulator string wind force load [N]
W Weight of unit conductor [N/m]
Ww Wind force load of unit conductor [N/m]

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

T Conductor tension [N]

S Related span [m]
h Elevation difference of front-to-back span [m]
Tower installed at the higher place applies to “+h” and a tower installed at the
lower place applies to “-h” , as compared with two towers

3.2.2 Result of strength

By using this equation above mentioned, the calculated result of tension insulator is as
follows.
< Table B2 > Strength of tension insulator set (In case of using ACSR 315)
Wind Span Weight span Result of calculation KN
Selection
( Sm ) ( Sw ) 35 m/s 45 m/s
400 137.47 138.00
500 137.61 138.14
250
600 137.77 138.30
700 137.96 138.49
400 137.60 138.33
500 137.74 138.47
300
600 137.90 138.63
·String: 160 KN
700 138.09 138.81
·Mechanical failing load
400 137.75 138.71
of Insulator: 160KN
500 137.88 138.85
350
600 138.05 139.01
700 138.23 139.19
400 137.91 139.14
500 138.05 139.28
400
600 138.21 139.44
700 138.40 139.63

According to the result of transmission line design, strength of tension insulator is about
140 KN in the worst case of not considering elevation difference but the actual strength of
tension insulator may be above 140KN in the mountainous areas because big height
differential. Therefore, insulator string set strength of 160 KN is recommended for tension
insulator. In case of important area (i.e. highway, river and so forth.), double string

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

insulator (160 KN × 2) is recommended for reliability of transmission line. The examples

in the Appendix E shows detailed description about tension insulator set strength.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

Appendix C: Drawing of Insulator String Set

24

M16
1

137 65
2

500

500

4
75 110

Item Denomination N GES Code M.B.S

1 Anchor shackle 1 1202040 120KN
2 Ball eye 1 1202145 120KN
3 Arcing horn 2 1242310
4 Socket tongue 1 1242245 120KN
5 Suspension clamp 1 124306* 120KN
6 Insulators U 100BLP

[Figure C1] 66kV Transmission line single suspension set

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

24

M16
1

70 60 90 65
2

465 465

300

8
465 465

6
75 60 55

Item Denomination N GES Code M.B.S

1 Anchor shackle 1 1202040 120KN
2 Twist shackle 1 1202045 120KN
3 Triangular yoke 2 1242540
4 Ball clevis 2 1242640 120KN
5 Arcing horn 4 1242320
6 Socket clevis 2 1242740 120KN
7 Suspension clamp 1 124306* 120KN
8 Insulators U 100BLP
[Figure C2] 66kV Transmission line double suspension set

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

24

M20
1

65
170
2

375

375

3
110

Item Denomination N GES Code M.B.S

1 Anchor shackle 1 1202050 160KN
2 Ball eye 1 1202155 160KN
3 Arcing horn 2 1242330
4 Socket tongue 1 1242255 160KN
5 Compression dead clamp 1 12431** 95% cond
6 Insulators U 160BL
[Figure C3] 66kV Transmission line single tension set

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

1 24

M20
2

65 90 60 90
3

372

330

372

5
68 60

Item Denomination N GES Code M.B.S

1 Anchor shackle 1 1202050 160KN
2 Twist shackle 1 1202055 160KN
3 Triangular yoke 2 1242550 160KN
4 Ball clevis 2 1242650 160KN
5 Arcing horn 2 1242331
6 Socket clevis 2 1242750 160KN
7 Compression dead clamp 1 12431** 95% cond
8 Insulators U 160BL
[Figure C4] 66kV Transmission line double tension set

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

24

M16
1

137 65
2

500

500

4
80 75 65 110

Item Denomination N GES Code M.B.S

1 Anchor shackle 1 1202040 120KN
2 Ball eye 1 1202145 120KN
3 Arcing horn 2 1242310
4 Socket tongue 1 1242245 120KN
5 Anchor shackle 1 1202045 120KN
6 Suspension clamp 1 124308* 120KN
7 Insulators U 100BLP
[Figure C5] 66kV Transmission line jumper suspension set

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

24

M16
1

65
2

163
9.78

65
190

4 3

M
12

Item Denomination N GES Code M.B.S

1 Anchor shackle 1 1202040 120KN
2 Suspension clamp 1 1243058 120KN
3 Earthing clamp 1 1246510
4 Parallel groove clamp 1 12337*0
[Figure C6] 66kV Suspension set for earth wire

65 65 265
48

9.78
24

M 16

1 2 4

M 12

Item Denomination N GES Code M.B.S

1 Anchor shackle 4 1202040 120KN
2 Compression dead clamp 2 1243158 95% EW
3 Earthing clamp 2 1246510
4 Parallel groove clamp 2 12*37*0
[Figure C7] 66kV Tension set for earth wire

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

Appendix D: The Number of Insulator for 66kV Transmission Line

1. The number of insulator based on power frequency voltage

1.1 The desired value of withstand voltage

The desired value of withstand voltage based on power frequency voltage shall be
applied to 72.5kV in accordance with the desired value of temporary overvoltage.

1.2 The kind of insulator

The characteristics of insulator used for 66KV overhead transmission line is as follows.

< Table D1 > The kind of insulator

Type Minimum nominal creeping distance Nominal spacing Remark
Standard type 340mm 170mm Tension
Anti fog type 440mm 146mm Suspension

1.3 Pollution levels

1.3.1 The leakage distance per 1kV
Pollution levels are classified in the IEC 60815 as Light, Medium, Heavy, and Very
heavy. The leakage distance according to the contamination level is the followings,

< Table D2 > Creepage distance

Pollution level Minimum nominal specific creepage distance [㎜/KV]
Light 16
Medium 20
Heavy 25
Very heavy 31

1.3.2 Design withstand voltage per 1 disc

The withstand voltage per 1 insulator disc is listed in the following table.

Calculation method to conclude design withstand voltage per 1 disc is as follows.

• Light area, Standard type; (340mm/1disc) / (16mm/1kV) = 21.25 kV /disc
• Light area, Anti fog type; (440mm/1disc) / (16mm/1kV) = 27.50 kV /disc

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

• Medium area, Standard type; (340mm/1disc) / (20mm/1kV) = 17.00 kV /disc

• Medium area, Anti fog type; (440mm/1disc) / (20mm/1kV) = 22.00 kV /disc
• Heavy area, Standard type; (340mm/1disc) / (25mm/1kV) = 13.60 kV /disc
• Heavy area, Anti fog type; (440mm/1disc) / (25mm/1kV) = 17.60 kV /disc
• Very heavy area, Standard type; (340mm/1disc) / (31mm/1kV) = 10.97 kV /disc
• Very heavy area, Anti fog type; (440mm/1disc) / (31mm/1kV) = 14.20 kV /disc

< Table D3 > Design withstand voltage

Design withstand voltage [KV /disc]
Pollution level
Standard type Anti fog type
Light 21.25 27.50
Medium 17.00 22.00
Heavy 13.60 17.60
Very heavy 10.97 14.20

1.4 The number of insulator based on power frequency voltage

If transmission line is maintained under power frequency voltage, the needed number of
insulator is indicated in the following table.

Calculation method is as follows

• Light area, Standard type; 72.5kV / (21.25 kV /disc) = 3.4 disc
• Light area, Anti-fog type; 72.5kV / (27.50 kV /disc) = 2.6 disc
• Medium area, Standard type; 72.5kV / (17.00 kV /disc) = 4.3 disc
• Medium area, Anti fog type; 72.5kV / (22.00 kV /disc) = 3.3 disc
• Heavy area, Standard type; 72.5kV / (13.60 kV /disc) = 5.3 disc
• Heavy area, Anti fog type; 72.5kV / (17.60 kV /disc) = 4.1 disc
• Very heavy area, Standard type; 72.5kV / (10.97 kV /disc) = 6.6 disc
• Very heavy area, Anti fog type; 72.5kV / (14.20 kV /disc) = 5.1 disc

< Table D4 > The number of insulator based on power frequency voltage
The number of insulator
Pollution level
Tension type Suspension type
Light 4 (←3.4) 3 (←2.6)
Medium 5 (←4.3) 4 (←3.3)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

Heavy 6 (←5.3) 5 (←4.1)

Very heavy 7 (←6.6) 6 (←5.1)
Note

1) Standard type of insulator shall be installed for tension tower and anti fog type of insulator shall be
installed for suspension tower.

2. The number of insulator based on lightning impulse

2.1 The desired value of withstand voltage (Critical flashover voltage)

Critical flashover voltage shall be 1.3 times the lightning impulse withstand voltage of
66kV power system. Therefore, the desired value shall be 422kV, (i.e,325 kV *1.3=422 kV)

2.2 Distance of arcing horn

The positive critical flashover voltage of arcing horn having the shape of round to round
shall be as the next equation as result of experiment.

V50 [kV] = 0.55d + 80

Where
d The distance of arcing horn
V50 Critical flashover voltage

Therefore, the distance of arcing horn shall be 622㎜ in case of critical flashover
voltage 422Kv.

2.3 The number of insulator based on lightning impulse

2.3.1 Efficiency of arcing horn
If do large efficiency of arcing horn, while it is difficult to guarantee occurrence path of
flashover at the arcing horn, length of arcing horn can be shortened because probability of
flashover occurrence become low, otherwise, if do small efficiency of arcing horn, though
it is easy to guarantee occurrence path of flashover at the arcing horn, distance of arcing
horn should be prolonged because probability of flashover occurrence rises.
Therefore, it is necessary to choose proper efficiency of arcing horn. In general,
efficiency is small in low voltage system. The other hand, efficiency is large in high
voltage system. Efficiency of arcing horn may be recommended as 75% in the tension and
suspension insulator string for 66kV system. In the result, in case that distance of arcing
horn is 622㎜, the required total length of insulator string becomes 829㎜.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

28 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

2.3.2 The number of insulator based on lightning impulse

Because contamination of insulator does not influence flashover by lightning impulse,
the needed number of insulator based on lighting impulse is decided by total length of
insulator as like following table.

< Table D5 > The number of insulator by lightning impulse

Type Insulator Nominal spacing Needed Number
Suspension type Anti fog type 146mm 6 (←5.7)
Tension type Standard type 170mm 5 (←4.9)
Note

1) Suspension type; 829mm / 146mm = 5.7

2) Tension type; 829mm / 170mm = 4.9

3. The number of insulator for 66kV overhead transmission line

In the result, the needed number of insulator decided in consideration of both power
frequency voltage and lightning impulse according to pollution level is as following.

< Table D6 > The needed number of insulator

Kind Light Medium Heavy Very heavy
Power frequency 3 4 5 6
Suspension type Lightning impulse 6 6 6 6
Needed number 6 6 6 6
Power frequency 4 5 6 7
Tension type Lightning impulse 5 5 5 5
Needed number 5 5 6 7

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

29 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator & Fitting

Appendix E: Strength Calculation.

A. Suspension insulator set strength (In case of using ACSR 315)

B. Tension insulator set strength (In case of using ACSR 315)

C. Suspension insulator set strength (In case of using ACSR 160)

D. Tension insulator set strength (In case of using ACSR 160)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

30 / 38 Version 1.0
 Insulator and FIitting

A. Suspension insulator set strength (in case of using ACSR 315)

1. Formula 2. Assumed conditions

Conductor
V = W ⋅Sw + I a. Code number 315 ACSR
b. Diameter 0.025 m
θ θ
H =Ww ⋅ Sm ⋅ cos + 2T ⋅ sin + Iw
2
c. linear mass (W) 1.27 kg/m
2 2
d. Rated strength 114 KN
F = V 2
+ H 2
e. Maximum working tension 45.6 KN
HV = T f. 35m/s, Wind force (WW) 22.41 N/m

V 4850 N 45m/s, Wind force (WW) 36.11 N/m

H 9789 N Insulator
F 10925 N a. Kind U 100 BLP
F 11.00 KN b. Diameter 280 mm

S.F 3.0 KN c. Spacing 146 mm

G (S.F) 33.00 KN d. Mechanical failing load 100 KN

Span (Sm, Sw) : 350 m e. Approx. Net weight 5.8 kg

Wind Velocity 35m/s f. Weight (I) 490.50 N

Where g. 35m/s, Wind force (IW) 356.3 N

G Insulator guaranteed strength [N] 45m/s, Wind force (IW) 564.1 N

V Vertical loads Line deviation (θ) 2 ˚

H Horzontal loads Wind force per unit areas

α Safety factor 3.0 a. Wind velocity 35 m/s
Sw Weight span [m] ⅰ) Conductor 90 daN/m2
Sm Wind span [m] ⅱ) Insulator 180 daN/m2

I Insulator string weight [N] b. Wind velocity 45 m/s

Iw Insulator string wind force load [N] ⅰ) Conductor 145 daN/m2

W Weight of unit conductor [N] ⅱ) Insulator 285 daN/m2

Ww Wind force load of unit conductor [N] Areas of insulator string set 0.20 m2

T Maximum working tension [N]

F Applied load of each insulator string [N

H V = T

Oct 7, 2007
GECOL 31/38 Version 1.0
 Insulator and FIitting

3. Result

Wind Weight Calculation Strength (N) Calculation Strength (Including S.F) KN Selection
Span (m) Span (m) 35m/s 45m/s 35m/s 45m/s Strength

400 9324 12447 27.97 37.34 100KN

500 10105 13042 30.32 39.13 100KN
250
600 10973 13726 32.92 41.18 100KN
700 11908 14484 35.72 43.45 100KN
400 10252 14090 30.76 42.27 100KN
500 10967 14619 32.90 43.86 100KN
300
600 11771 15232 35.31 45.70 100KN
700 12647 15918 37.94 47.75 100KN
400 11215 15769 33.65 47.31 100KN
500 11872 16243 35.62 48.73 100KN
350
600 12619 16796 37.86 50.39 100KN
700 13440 17422 40.32 52.27 100KN
400 12205 17472 36.62 52.42 100KN
500 12812 17902 38.44 53.71 100KN
400
600 13507 18405 40.52 55.22 100KN
700 14276 18977 42.83 56.93 100KN
※ Assumed condition
1. Conductor : 315 ACSR
2. Insulator : U 100 BLP, Single suspension insulator string
3. Line deviation (θ) : 2 ˚

Oct 7, 2007
GECOL 32/38 Version 1.0
 Insulator and Fitting

B. Tension insulator set strength (in case of using ACSR 315)

1. Formula 2. Assumed conditions

Conductor
WS h
V= +T + I a. Code number 315 ACSR
2 S
S b. Diameter 0.0249 m
H = HV2 + H H2 HV = T HH = WW + IW
2 c. linear mass (W) 1.2697 kg/m
F = V 2
+ H 2
d. Rated strength 114.02 KN

V 2768 N e. Maximum working tension 45.6 KN

H 45812 N f. 35m/s, Wind force (WW) 22.41 N/m

HV 45608 N 45m/s, Wind force (WW) 36.11 N/m
HH 4318 N Insulator
F 45895 N a. Kind U 160 BL
F 46.00 KN b. Diameter 280 mm

S.F 3.0 KN c. Spacing 170 mm

G (S.F) 138.00 KN d. Mechanical failing load 160 KN

Span (Sm, Sw) : 350 m e. Approx. Net weight 6.5 kg

Wind Velocity 35m/s f. Weight (I) 588.60 N

Where g. 35m/s, Wind force (IW) 395.84 N

G Insulator guaranteed strength [N] 45m/s, Wind force (IW) 626.75 N

V Vertical loads Elevation difference (h) 0 m

H Horzontal loads Wind force per unit areas
α Safety factor 3.0 a. Wind velocity 35 m/s
Sw Weight span [m] ⅰ) Conductor 90 daN/m2
Sm Wind span [m] ⅱ) Insulator 180 daN/m2

I Insulator string weight [N] b. Wind velocity 45 m/s

Iw Insulator string wind force load [N] ⅰ) Conductor 145 daN/m2

W Weight of unit conductor [N] ⅱ) Insulator 285 daN/m2

Ww Wind force load of unit conductor [N] Areas of insulator string set 0.22 m2

T Maximum working tension [N]

F Applied load of each insulator string [N

H V = T H H = 2 W W + I W

Oct 7, 2007
GECOL 33/38 Version 1.0
 Insulator and Fitting

3. Result

Wind Weight Calculation Strength (N) Calculation Strength (Including S.F) KN Selection
Span (m) Span (m) 35m/s 45m/s 35m/s 45m/s Strength

400 45823 45999 137.47 138.00 160KN

500 45869 46045 137.61 138.14 160KN
250
600 45924 46100 137.77 138.30 160KN
700 45986 46162 137.96 138.49 160KN
400 45866 46109 137.60 138.33 160KN
500 45912 46155 137.74 138.47 160KN
300
600 45966 46209 137.90 138.63 160KN
700 46029 46271 138.09 138.81 160KN
400 45915 46236 137.75 138.71 160KN
500 45961 46282 137.88 138.85 160KN
350
600 46015 46336 138.05 139.01 160KN
700 46078 46398 138.23 139.19 160KN
400 45971 46380 137.91 139.14 160KN
500 46017 46426 138.05 139.28 160KN
400
600 46071 46479 138.21 139.44 160KN
700 46134 46542 138.40 139.63 160KN
※ Assumed condition
1. Conductor : 315 ACSR
2. Insulator : U 160 BL, Single tension insulator string

Oct 7, 2007
GECOL 34/38 Version 1.0
 Insulator and Fitting

C. Suspension insulator set strength (in case of using ACSR 160)

1. Formula 2. Assumed conditions

Conductor
V = W ⋅Sw + I a. Code number 160 ACSR
b. Diameter 0.018 m
θ θ
H =Ww ⋅ Sm ⋅ cos + 2T ⋅ sin + Iw
2
c. linear mass (W) 0.645 kg/m
2 2
d. Rated strength 61.34 KN
F = V 2
+ H 2
e. Maximum working tension 24.54 KN
f. 35m/s, Wind force (WW) 15.93 N/m

V 2705 N 45m/s, Wind force (WW) 25.67 N/m

H 6786 N Insulator
F 7306 N a. Kind U 100 BLP
F 8.00 KN b. Diameter 280 mm

S.F 3.0 KN c. Spacing 146 mm

G (S.F) 24.00 KN d. Mechanical failing load 100 KN

Span (Sm, Sw) : 350 m e. Approx. Net weight 5.8 kg

Wind Velocity 35m/s f. Weight (I) 490.50 N

Where g. 35m/s, Wind force (IW) 356.3 N

G Insulator guaranteed strength [N] 45m/s, Wind force (IW) 564.1 N

V Vertical loads Line deviation (θ) 2 ˚

H Horzontal loads Wind force per unit areas

α Safety factor 3.0 a. Wind velocity 35 m/s
Sw Weight span [m] ⅰ) Conductor 90 daN/m2
Sm Wind span [m] ⅱ) Insulator 180 daN/m2

I Insulator string weight [N] b. Wind velocity 45 m/s

Iw Insulator string wind force load [N] ⅰ) Conductor 145 daN/m2

W Weight of unit conductor [N] ⅱ) Insulator 285 daN/m2

Ww Wind force load of unit conductor [N] Areas of insulator string set 0.20 m2

T Maximum working tension [N]

F Applied load of each insulator string [N

H V = T H H = 2 W W + I W

Oct 7, 2007
GECOL 35/38 Version 1.0
 Insulator and Fitting

3. Result

Wind Weight Calculation Strength (N) Calculation Strength (Including S.F) KN Selection
Span (m) Span (m) 35m/s 45m/s 35m/s 45m/s Strength

400 6008 8397 18.02 25.19 100KN

500 6350 8644 19.05 25.93 100KN
250
600 6734 8930 20.20 26.79 100KN
700 7153 9250 21.46 27.75 100KN
400 6708 9605 20.12 28.82 100KN
500 7016 9822 21.05 29.47 100KN
300
600 7365 10074 22.10 30.22 100KN
700 7751 10359 23.25 31.08 100KN
400 7428 10830 22.28 32.49 100KN
500 7707 11023 23.12 33.07 100KN
350
600 8026 11249 24.08 33.75 100KN
700 8381 11505 25.14 34.52 100KN
400 8162 12067 24.49 36.20 100KN
500 8417 12241 25.25 36.72 100KN
400
600 8710 12444 26.13 37.33 100KN
700 9038 12676 27.11 38.03 100KN
※ Assumed condition
1. Conductor : 160 ACSR
2. Insulator : U 100 BLP, Single suspension insulator string
3. Line deviation (θ) : 2 ˚

Oct 7, 2007
GECOL 36/38 Version 1.0
 Insulator and fItting

D. Tension insulator set strength (in case of using ACSR 160)

1. Formula 2. Assumed conditions

Conductor
WS h
V= +T + I a. Code number 160 ACSR
2 S
S b. Diameter 0.0177 m
H = HV2 + H H2 HV = T HH = WW + IW
2 c. linear mass (W) 0.6449 kg/m
F = V 2
+ H 2
d. Rated strength 61.34 KN

V 1696 N e. Maximum working tension 24.54 KN

H 24742 N f. 35m/s, Wind force (WW) 15.93 N/m

HV 24536 N 45m/s, Wind force (WW) 25.67 N/m
HH 3184 N Insulator
F 24799 N a. Kind U 160 BL
F 25 KN b. Diameter 280 mm

S.F 3.0 KN c. Spacing 170 mm

G (S.F) 75.00 KN d. Mechanical failing load 160 KN

Span (Sm, Sw) : 350 m e. Approx. Net weight 6.5 kg

Wind Velocity 35m/s f. Weight (I) 588.60 N

Where g. 35m/s, Wind force (IW) 395.84 N

G Insulator guaranteed strength [N] 45m/s, Wind force (IW) 626.75 N

V Vertical loads Elevation difference (h) 0 m

H Horzontal loads Wind force per unit areas
α Safety factor 3.0 a. Wind velocity 35 m/s
Sw Weight span [m] ⅰ) Conductor 90 daN/m2
Sm Wind span [m] ⅱ) Insulator 180 daN/m2

I Insulator string weight [N] b. Wind velocity 45 m/s

Iw Insulator string wind force load [N] ⅰ) Conductor 145 daN/m2

W Weight of unit conductor [N] ⅱ) Insulator 285 daN/m2

Ww Wind force load of unit conductor [N] Areas of insulator string set 0.22 m2

T Maximum working tension [N]

F Applied load of each insulator string [N

H V = T H H = 2 W W + I W

Oct 7, 2007
GECOL 37/38 Version 1.0
 Insulator and fItting

3. Result

Wind Weight Calculation Strength (N) Calculation Strength (Including S.F) KN Selection
Span (m) Span (m) 35m/s 45m/s 35m/s 45m/s Strength

400 24721 24902 74.16 74.71 160KN

500 24747 24928 74.24 74.78 160KN
250
600 24776 24958 74.33 74.87 160KN
700 24810 24991 74.43 74.97 160KN
400 24763 25009 74.29 75.03 160KN
500 24788 25035 74.36 75.11 160KN
300
600 24818 25064 74.45 75.19 160KN
700 24852 25098 74.56 75.29 160KN
400 24811 25132 74.43 75.40 160KN
500 24836 25157 74.51 75.47 160KN
350
600 24866 25187 74.60 75.56 160KN
700 24899 25220 74.70 75.66 160KN
400 24865 25271 74.60 75.81 160KN
500 24890 25296 74.67 75.89 160KN
400
600 24920 25325 74.76 75.98 160KN
700 24953 25358 74.86 76.07 160KN
※ Assumed condition
1. Conductor : 160 ACSR
2. Insulator : U 160 BL, Single tension insulator string

Oct 7, 2007
GECOL 38/38 Version 1.0
 GD6 6500
Version 1.0: Oct 7, 2007

Sag

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ··························································································································· 1

2. Basic Condition ·········································································································· 1

2.1 Ambient air temperature ···················································································· 1
2.2 Conductor temperature ······················································································ 1
2.3 Conductor tension ····························································································· 1
2.3.1 Maximum working tension ······································································ 1
2.3.2 Tension of earth wire ················································································ 1
3. Design Condition ········································································································ 1
3.1 Loading condition ····························································································· 1
3.1.1 Every day stress condition ······································································· 1
3.1.2 Maximum load condition ········································································· 2
3.1.3 Maximum sag condition ··········································································· 2
3.2 Coefficient of sag design ··················································································· 2
3.2.1 Wind span (Sm) ······················································································· 2
3.2.2 Weight span (Sw) ····················································································· 3
3.2.3 Equivalent span ························································································ 4
3.2.4 Loading coefficient (q) ············································································· 4
3.2.5 Modulus of elasticity (E) ·········································································· 5
3.2.6 Coefficient of linear expansion ( α ) ························································· 5
4. Sag ······························································································································· 6
4.1 Catenary or parabola ························································································· 6
4.2 Level span ········································································································· 6
4.2.1 Catenary equations ··················································································· 7
4.2.2 Parabolic equations ·················································································· 8
4.3 Non level span ··································································································· 8
4.3.1 Catenary equations ··················································································· 8
4.3.2 Parabolic equations ·················································································· 9
5. Tension Condition ······································································································ 9

6. True Length of Conductor ························································································ 11

ii
7. Creep ··························································································································· 11

8. Load Pressured on Insulator String Set ··································································· 12

8.1 Suspension insulator string set strength ····························································· 12
8.1.1 Vertical load ····························································································· 12
8.1.2 Horizontal load ························································································ 12
8.1.3 Maximum resultant load ·········································································· 12
8.2 Tension insulator set strength ············································································ 13
8.2.1 Vertical load ····························································································· 13
8.2.2 Horizontal load ························································································ 13
8.2.3 Maximum resultant load ·········································································· 13
9. Suspension Insulator Swing Due to Wind ······························································· 14

10. Catenary Angle ········································································································ 15

iii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Wind velocity ··························································································· 2

< Table 2 > Modulus of elasticity ················································································ 5
< Table 3 > Coefficient of linear expansion ································································ 6

iv
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Wind span ································································································ 3

[Figure 2] Weight span ······························································································ 3
[Figure 3] Equivalent span ························································································ 4
[Figure 4] Level span ································································································ 7
[Figure 5] Non-Level span ························································································ 8
[Figure 6] Insulator swing ························································································· 14
[Figure 7] Catenary angles·························································································· 16

v
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

Appendix A : References ·························································································· 17

Appendix B : Example– Sag and Tension ································································· 18
Appendix C : Suspension Insulator String Set Swing ··············································· 22

vi
 Sag

1. Scope

This standard specifies sag design for overhead power transmission.

2. Basic Condition

2.1 Ambient air temperature

This design standard is considered under the following environmental conditions.
• Maximum ambient air temperature: 50℃
• Minimum ambient air temperature: -10℃

2.2 Conductor temperature

• Temperature to examine maximum sag condition: 75℃
• Temperature to examine E.D.S condition: 25℃
• Temperature to examine maximum working tension condition: 10℃

2.3 Conductor tension

2.3.1 Maximum working tension
Maximum working tension does not exceed 40% of rated tensile strength of conductor
on the consideration of safety factor 2.5

2.3.2 Tension of earth wire

Though the temperature of earth wire does not rise to the temperature as equal to that of
conductor but the sag of the earth wire shall be calculated considering the same conditions
of conductor. However the sag of earth wire shall be at least 10% less than that of phase
conductor under all temperature conditions under still wind at the normal spans so as to
give a mid span clearance greater than that at the supports.

3. Design Condition

3.1 Loading condition

3.1.1 Every day stress condition
As loads condition related to the durability for conductor, to restrain conductor fatigue
phenomenon, the following condition should be considered.

• Wind velocity: No wind

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

• Temperature: 25℃
• Sleet: No sleet
• Tension: Every day stress tension does not exceed 25% of ultimate tensile strength or
rated tensile strength of conductor on the consideration of safety factor 4.

3.1.2 Maximum load condition

Worst conditions are confronted when the percentage maximum relative humidity
coincides with the heavily sand loaded high velocity winds generally known as “GHIBLI.”

• Wind velocity
< Table 1 > Wind velocity
Regions 1 areas 2 areas
Wind velocity 35m/s 45m/s
Note

1) 1 areas; General regions except Jalo, Tripoli city and Ghat

2) 2 areas; Jalo, Tripoli city and Ghat

• Temperature: 10℃
• Sleet: No sleet
• Tension: Maximum working tension does not exceed 40% of rated tensile strength of
conductor on the consideration of safety factor 2.5.

3.1.3 Maximum sag condition

This gives the condition of greatest vertical sag to decide the height of tower. In this
condition, the sag should be satisfied with clearance to ground.

• Wind pressure: No wind

• Temperature: 75℃
• Sleet: No sleet

3.2 Coefficient of sag design

3.2.1 Wind span (Sm)
The wind span is half the sum of the adjacent span lengths as shown in Fig 1.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

S1 S2

S1 + S 2
Sm = [m]
2
[Figure 1] Wind span

3.2.2 Weight span (Sw)

The weight span is the distance between the lowest points on adjacent sag curves on
either side of the tower as also shown in Fig 2. It represents the equivalent length or weight
of conduct supported at any one tower at any time. For design purposes, it is the value
under worst loading conditions (minimum temperature in still air) which gives the greatest
value. A tower at the top of a hill may be heavily loaded and it is usual to assume a weight
span which can reach up to twice the value of the basic span. In fairly level terrain a value
of 1.6 to 1.8 may be adopted.

h1 h2

a1 a2
S1 S2

[Figure 2] Weight span

S1 ch1 S ch 1 h h
Sw = a1 + a2 = ( + ) + ( 2 + 2 ) = ( S1 + S 2 ) + c ( 1 + 2 ) [m]
2 S1 2 S2 2 S1 S 2
Where,

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

T
c=
W

W Weight of unit conductor length

T Conductor tension
.
3.2.3 Equivalent span
The equivalent span is defined as a fictitious single span in which tension variations due
to load or temperature changes are nearly the same as in the actual spans in a section. The
mathematical treatment to obtain the equivalent span is based on parabolic theory and there
is no similar concept using full catenary equations. For sagging the overhead line
conductor the tension appropriate to the equivalent span and the erection temperature as
shown in Fig 3 is used. Erection tensions are calculated from final tensions making an
allowance for creep. This is equated to a temperature shift which is applied to final
tensions.

Equivalent span =
∑ each _ span 3

=
S13 + S 23 + S 33 + • • • + S n3
∑ each _ span S1 + S 2 + S 3 + • • • + S n

Tension Tower Tension Tower

Suspension Tower Suspension Tower Suspension Tower

S1 S2 S3 S4

[Figure 3] Equivalent span

The equivalent span is used for determination of sag in spans for which the tension in
any section length is that which would apply to a single span equal to the equivalent span.

3.2.4 Loading coefficient (q)

Loading coefficient refers to ratio of composition load about conductor self-weight per
unit length of conductor, and composition load calculates by vector unit of measure of

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

horizontal transverse load (wind pressure load) and vertical load (conductor self- weight).

WS W 2 + WW2
Loading coefficient q = =
W W

Wind pressure load of conductor: WW = P × d × 10−3 [N/m]

Where,
q Loading coefficient
WS Composite load [N/m]
W Weight of unit conductor length [N/m]
Ww Wind force load of unit conductor length [N/m]
P Wind force load of unit square [N/m2]
d Diameter of conductor [mm]

3.2.5 Modulus of elasticity (E)

Modulus of elasticity means ratio of tension per unit areas per variation ratio of
conductor length if tension is pressured and increased on conductor.
T Δl
Tension per unit areas ( ) / Variation ratio of length ( )
A l
In the case of homogenous conductors, this is simply the modulus of material used.
For conductors of two materials, a formula derived from compound bar theory is used.
mE1 + E2
E=
m +1
Where
area of material1
m=
area of material2
< Table 2 > Modulus of elasticity
Zinc coated Aluminum clad
Conductor Aluminum wire
steel wire steel wire
Modulus of elasticity 62000 MPa 206000 MPa 155000 MPa

3.2.6 Coefficient of linear expansion ( α )

As with the value for modulus of elasticity, the coefficient of thermal expansion
calculation for composite conductors has been derived from compound bar theory.
mα1E1 + α 2 E2
α=
mE1 + E2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

Where
area of material1
m=
area of material2
For homogeneous constructions, the value of the material used is taken.

< Table 3 > Coefficient of linear expansion

Zinc coated Aluminum clad
Conductor Aluminum wire
steel wire steel wire
Coefficient of
23 × 10 −6 [1/℃] 12.6 × 10 −6 [1/℃] 11.5 × 10 −6 [1/℃]
Linear Expansion

4. Sag

A designer may be asked to design a conductor which satisfies certain sagging

conditions or he may be required to supply a table or chart giving the sagging particulars of
a design.

4.1 Catenary or parabola

A conductor hung freely between two supports will assume the catenary shape. For
normal spans this shape is very close indeed to a parabola. The formula obtained from
treating the curve as a parabola are simpler and so long as the ratio of span to sag is greater
than 20:1, parabolic formula will be accurate to about 0.5 per cent.
In this clause, level and non level spans are considered, giving first the catenary
equations and then the parabolic equations.

4.2 Level span

A conductor ACB is supported by rigid, level supports at A and B, as shown in figure 4.

Where
L True conductor length
S Span length
D Sag
T Tension at C
W Wight per unit conductor length
c Distance between original and point C

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

A S/2 S/2 B

Y
C

O x

[Figure 4] Level span

4.2.1 Catenary equations

The equation of the catenary from C to B is:
x
y = c ⋅ cosh
c
The origin is chosen so that, by definition:
T
c=
W
The true conductor length from C to B is given by
L S
= c ⋅ sinh
2 2c
True conductor length
2T WS
L= ⋅ sinh
W 2T
The conductor sag
T ⎛ SW ⎞
D =Y −c = ⎜ cosh − 1⎟
W⎝ 2T ⎠
Both the above equations may be expanded, giving

2T ⎡WS ⎛ WS ⎞ 3 1 ⎛ WS ⎞ 5 1 ⎤ W 2S 3
True length L = ⋅⎢ +⎜ ⎟ + ⎜ ⎟ + • • • ⎥ = S + +•••
W ⎢⎣ 2T ⎝ 2T ⎠ 3! ⎝ 2T ⎠ 5! ⎥⎦ 24T 2

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

T ⎡⎛ WS ⎞ 1 ⎛ WS ⎞ 1 ⎤ WS 2
2 4

And sag D = ⋅ ⎢⎜ ⎟ +⎜ ⎟ + • • •⎥ = +•••

W ⎣⎢⎝ 2T ⎠ 2! ⎝ 2T ⎠ 4! ⎦⎥ 8T

4.2.2 Parabolic equations

If the curve is taken to be a parabola it can be shown that
WS 2
Sag D =
8T
W 2S 3 8D 2
And true conductor length L = S + = S +
24T 2 3S
It is interesting to note that the parabolic equations are the same as the first terms of the
expansions of the catenary equations.

4.3 Non level span

C is the lowest point in the span.

4.3.1 Catenary equations

The curves from A to C and from C to B are each catenaries having half spans of;
x and (S-x) respectively,
T ⎛ Wx ⎞
D1 = ⎜ cosh − 1⎟
W⎝ T ⎠
D2 = D1 + H

S B

H D2

D1

C
x S-x

[Figure 5] Non-Level span

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

4.3.2 Parabolic equations

The horizontal distance, S-x, from the right support point to the low point in the catenary
is
S⎛ H ⎞
S−x= ⎜1 + ⎟
2 ⎝ 4D ⎠
The horizontal distance, x, from the left support point to the low point in the catenary is
S⎛ H ⎞
x= ⎜1 − ⎟
2 ⎝ 4D ⎠
Where,
H Vertical distance between support point

In each sub-span, he sag is relative to the corresponding support point elevation.

Wx 2 W ( S − x) 2
D1 = D2 =
2T 2T
Or, if D is the sag in a level span for the same tension and span length, i.e., D = WS2/8T,
then;
2
⎛ H ⎞
D1 = D⎜1 − ⎟
⎝ 4D ⎠

2
⎛ H ⎞
D2 = D⎜1 + ⎟ ,
⎝ 4D ⎠

If {1-(H/4D)} is negative, Then this is an uplift case of the non-level span, no part of the
conductor being lower than the lowest support.

5. Tension Condition

The type of tension calculation most likely to be carried out by designer is that to
determine the change in tension with conductor load and temperature.
In this design standard, the worst conditions to which a conductor is likely to be
subjected are usually taken as;

• Wind velocity: 35, 45 m/s

• Temperature: 10℃
• Sleet: No sleet

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

Under these conditions, the conductor must have a mechanical safety factor of not less
than 2.5. The tension of the conductor under these conditions is called maximum working
tension.
The maximum temperature that a conductor is likely to reach is usually taken as 75℃,
the maximum operating temperature for overhead line. This gives the condition of greatest
vertical sag.
The conductor is considered, for practical purposes, to spend most of its life at about
25℃ and its tension at this temperature is often referred to as the every day stress, or just
E.D.S. This value of E.D.S is normally about 25% of the rated tensile strength of conductor.
A request for a conductor design may specify maximum working tension, every day
stress and maximum vertical sag limits. The designer must then choose which he considers
to be the most demanding of these conditions and calculate the values of the other two.
Since these calculations involve only changes in sag and tension, the following equation
derived from parabolic equations is usually sufficiently accurate.

Initial conductor length (L1) + Change in length = Final conductor length (L2)

With modern computer tools the sag/tension relationship may be calculated using full
catenary equations. Normally the parabolic approximation will suffice unless special long
spans or hilly terrain with slopes >15 are envisaged. Using the parabolic approximation the
tension for any equivalent span is then given by:

T2 − T1
L1 + αS (t 2 − t1 ) + S = L2
AE

T −T
2 2
W S3 W S3
S + 1 2 + αS (t 2 − t1 ) + 2 1 S = S + 2 2
24T1 AE 24T2

(q1W ) 2 S 3 T2 − T1 (q 2W ) 2 S 3
S+ + α S (t 2 − t 1 ) + S = S +
24T12 AE 24T22
Subtracting S from each side and multiplying throughout by EA/S
2 2
W S 2 EA W2 S 2 EA
EAα (t 2 − t1 ) + 1 − T1 = − T2
24T12 24T22

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

Where,
S Span length [m]
L1, L2 Initial, final true conductor length
q1 , q 2 Initial, final loading coefficient
W Weight of unit conductor length [N/m]
T1 , T2 Initial, final conductor tension [N]
α Coefficient of Linear Expansion [1/℃]
t1 , t 2 Initial, final temperature [℃]
A Total cross-sectional area of conductor [m2]
E Modulus of elasticity [N/m2]
W 1 , W2 Initial, final effective weight of unit conductor length [N/m]
W1, W2 may include wind loading
L Conductor length [m]

6. True Length of Conductor

If the curve is taken to be a non-level it can be shown that

W 2S 3 8D 2
L=S+ = S +
24T 2 3S
In case of level, it can be shown that
W 2S 3 h2 8 D 2 h2
L=S+ + = S [1 + ( ) ] +
24T 2 2S 3 S 2S

Where, h means the height difference.

7. Creep

Creep is a phenomenon which affects most materials subjected to stress. It manifests

itself by an inelastic stretch of the material in the direction of the stress. Certain materials
such as aluminum are more susceptible than others. For example steel suffers only a
limited amount of creep. The increase in conductor length resulting from inelastic stretch
produces increased sags which must be taken into account in the overhead line design and
installation process so as not to infringe clearances.
The conductor creep shall be compensated by over tensioning the conductor suitably at
the stringing temperature.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

8. Load Pressured on Insulator String Set

8.1 Suspension insulator string set strength

8.1.1 Vertical load
Vertical load pressured on suspension insulator string is calculated by the composition
load of conductor weight and insulator string weight. The equation of the vertical load is
given by
h h
V = W ⋅ Sw + I = W ⋅ Sm + T ⋅ ( 1 + 2 ) + I
S1 S 2
1 T
Sw = ( S1 + S 2 ) + P(h1 / S1 + h2 / S 2 ) = S m + (h1 / S1 + h2 / S 2 )
2 W

8.1.2 Horizontal load

Horizontal load pressured on suspension insulator string is calculated by the
composition load of wind pressure of conductor, insulator string and horizontal component
force of conductor tension. The equation of the horizontal load is given by
θ θ
H = Ww ⋅ S m ⋅ cos 2 + 2T ⋅ sin + Iw
2 2

8.1.3 Maximum resultant load

Maximum resultant load pressured on suspension insulator string is the vector sum of
the vertical load and horizontal load. The equation of the maximum resultant load is as
follows.

F = V2 +H2

Where,
F Applied load of each insulator string [N]
V Vertical load [N]
H Horizontal load [N]
Sw Weight span [m]
Sm Wind span [m]
I Insulator string weight [N]
Iw Insulator string wind force load [N]
W Weight of unit conductor length [N/m]
Ww Wind force load of unit conductor length [N/m]
T Conductor tension [N]

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

θ Line deviation
S1 , Front, back span [m]
S2
h1 , Elevation difference of front-to-back span [m]
h2 Tower installed at the higher place applies to “+h” and a tower installed at the
lower place applies to “-h” , as compared with two towers

8.2 Tension insulator set strength

8.2.1 Vertical load
Vertical load pressured on tension insulator string is calculated by the composition load
of conductor weight and insulator string weight. The equation of the vertical load is given
by
WS h
V = +T + I
2 S

8.2.2 Horizontal load

Horizontal load pressured on tension insulator string is calculated by the vector sum of
wind pressure of conductor, insulator string and conductor tension. The equation of the
horizontal load is given by

Horizontal longitudinal load: H V = T

S
Horizontal transverse load: H H = WW + I W
2

Horizontal load: H = H V2 + H H2

8.2.3 Maximum resultant load

Maximum resultant load pressured on tension insulator string is the vector sum of the
vertical load and horizontal load. The equation of the maximum resultant load is as follows

F = V2 +H2

Where,
F Applied load of each insulator string [N]
V Vertical load [N]
H Horizontal load [N]
Sw Weight span [m]

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

Sm Wind span [m]

I Insulator string weight [N]
Iw Insulator string wind force load [N]
W Weight of unit conductor length [N/m]
Ww Wind force load of unit conductor length [N/m]
T Conductor tension [N]
S Related span [m]
h Related elevation difference [m]
Tower installed at the higher place applies to “+h” and a tower installed at the
lower place applies to “-h” , as compared with two towers

9. Suspension Insulator Swing Due to Wind

The formula for suspension insulator swing is given by

θ θ IW
Ww ⋅ S m ⋅ cos 2 + 2T ⋅ sin +
H 2 2 2
ϕ = = tan −1
V h1 h2 I
W ⋅ Sm + T ⋅ ( + ) +
S1 S 2 2
With worst condition, the angle of suspension insulator swing appropriately becomes up
to 60~70 degrees.

Iw

H
I

V
ϕ

[Figure 6] Insulator swing

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

10. Catenary Angle

The catenary angle is the angle between the horizontal line intersecting the conductor
and the conductor itself on the equal plate.
In the case when the elevation difference is high, the catenary angle becomes larger.
Therefore, both catenary angles of the line are decided to be less than 50 ˚. If the angles are
over 50˚, a rectangular type arm should be used.
The formula below for calculating catenary angle of suspension insulator string and
tension insulator string shall be used.

⎡W ⋅ S + W J + I T h ⎤
φ = tan −1 ⎢ + ⎥
⎣ 2T S⎦

Where,
φ Catenary angle
T Conductor tension of E.D.S condition, in general [N]
W Weight of unit conductor length [N/m]
S Span [m]
WJ Weight of jumper insulator string (in case of suspension insulator string, 0 applied) [N]
IT Weight of tension insulator string (in case of suspension insulator string, 0 applied) [N]
h Elevation difference [m]
Tower installed at the higher place applies to “+h” and a tower installed at the
lower place applies to “-h” , as compared with two towers

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

15 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

β
h

φ1 φ2
C

(S/2)-(ch/S) (S/2)+(ch/S)

[Figure 7] Catenary angles

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

16 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

Appendix A: References
IEC 61597 Overhead electrical conductors- calculation methods for stranded
bare conductors
IEC 60888 Zinc coated steel wires for stranded conductors
IEC 61232 Aluminum-clad steel wires for electrical purposes
IEC 60889 Hard-drawn aluminum wires for overhead line conductors
IEC 60104 Aluminum-magnesium-silicon alloy wire for overhead line
conductors
IEC 61089 Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded conductors
KDS 1211 Sag and tension design standard
BICC OVERHEAD CONDUCTOR DESIGN
The Aluminum electrical conductor handbook, third edition
Aluminum
Association

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

Appendix B: Example– Sag and Tension

1. Assumption conditions

We need to calculate the maximum working tension at temperature 10°C and ensure this
is within the capacity of the ACSR A1/S2A conductor. In addition, we need to calculate the
maximum sag, at maximum temperature, to ensure correct tower height. Parabolic
equations are used to simplify the arithmetic in this hand calculation example. Assume the
following conditions:
Maximum working tension temperature = 10°C (Wind, 680 N/m2)
Everyday temperature = 25°C (No wind)
Span = 330 m
Wind pressure = 680 N/m2
Conductor maximum working tension = 79.8 KN
Conductor mass = 0.842 Kg/m
Conductor diameter = 19.53 mm

2. Checking for ruling tension condition

Maximum working tension (MWT) factor of safety (with wind and ice loads) = 2.5
Everyday stress(E.D.S.) factor of safety (no wind, no ice) = 4.0
At 10°C, with wind; tension = Rated strength of wire / 2.5 79.8/2.5 (KN) 31.92
At 25°C, no wind; tension = Rated strength of wire / 4.0 79.8/4.0 (KN) 19.95

Wind load = p(y + x) [N/m]

Where,
p = wind pressure = 680 N/m2
y = radial thickness of ice = 0 mm
x = conductor diameter = 19.53 mm

The effective weight of the conductor, W1, under maximum loading conditions is
derived from the resultant of wind and the weight of the conductor itself.
2 2
W1 = [(weight of conductor + ice) + (wind load) ]
= [(0.842*9.81)2 + (680*0.01953)2]
=15.64 N/m = 0.01564 KN/m =1.594 kgf/m

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

At 10°C, T1 = 31.92 KN so calculate T2 at 25°C from the general change-of-state

equation for tensions in conductors.

2 2
W1 S 2 EA W2 S 2 EA
EAα (t 2 − t1 ) + − T1 = − T2
24T12 24T22

Where,
E = modulus of elasticity = 84 × 103 MN/m2
A = conductor cross-sectional area = 226.2mm2
α = coefficient of Linear Expansion = 19.3 × 10-6 per °C
t2 − t1 = Temperature differential = 15°C
W1 = effective weight of conductor at
conditions which produce tension T1 = 15.64 N/m
W2 = final conductor unit effective weight
alone at T2 conditions = 8.26 N/m
S = Span length = 330m
T1 = Initial known conductor tension based on ruling situation of most
onerous condition with a factor of safety on MWT temperature
or everyday temperature 31920 N
T2 = final required conductor tension (N)

84 × 103 × 106 * 226.2 × 10-6 * 19.3 × 10-6 * (25 - 10)

+ {(15.642 * 3302 * 84 × 103 × 106 * 226.2 × 10-6)/(24* 319202)} - 31920
= {(8.262 * 3302 *84 × 103 × 106 * 226.2 × 10-6)/(24 * T22)} - T2

- 5720.89 = (5.8823 × 1012/T22) - T2

T2 = 20174 N

This may be solved by trial and error or by using a simple calculator subroutine. Further
iterations give T2 = 20174 = 20.17 KN. Since this value is greater than the permissible
value at 25°C of 19.95 KN, the latter value must be used as the sagging base. Therefore the
limiting condition becomes 19.95 KN.
Under such circumstances a check is advisable as to the MWT resulting from this
sagging basis since the MWT will affect the design of the tension structures. We use the
same general change of state equation as before but put:

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

E = modulus of elasticity = 84 × 103 MN/m2

A = conductor cross-sectional area = 226.2mm2
α = coefficient of Linear Expansion = 19.3 × 10-6 per °C
t2 − t1 = Temperature differential = -15°C
W1 = effective weight of conductor at
conditions which produce tension T1 = 8.26 N/m
W2 = final conductor unit effective weight
alone at T2 conditions = 15.64 N/m
S = Span length = 330m
T1 = Initial known conductor tension based on ruling situation of most
onerous condition with a factor of safety on MWT temperature
or everyday temperature 19950 N
T2 = final required conductor tension (N)
2 2
W1 S 2 EA W2 S 2 EA
EAα (t 2 − t1 ) + − T1 = − T2
24T12 24T22

84 × 103 × 106 * 226.2 × 10-6 * 19.3 × 10-6 * (10 - 25)

+ {(8.262 * 3302 * 84 × 103 × 106 * 226.2 × 10-6)/(24* 199502)} - 19950
= {(15.642 * 3302 *84 × 103 × 106 * 226.2 × 10-6)/(24 * T22)} - T2

- 106741.12 = (2.10893 × 1013/T22) - T2

T2 = 31681 N

Hence a value of 31.681KN may be used as a value for checking the strength of towers.

3. Next check the sag at maximum temperature

Having established that the everyday temperature, no wind, is the ruling condition the
maximum sag (at maximum temperature = 75°C) is calculated in order to determine the
height of the tower arm for the lowest phase conductor. In this way adequate ground
clearance is ensured. The parabolic approximation for the conductor shape is again used, in
this case with t2 = 75°C and t1 = 25°C, for this sample hand calculation. In areas liable to
flood, extension legs or body may have to be applied to the towers to ensure clearances
under maximum water height conditions.
At 25°C, T1 = 19.95 KN so calculate T2 at 75°C from the general change-of-state
equation for tensions in conductors.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

2 2
W S 2 EA W2 S 2 EA
EAα (t 2 − t1 ) + 1 − T1 = − T2
24T12 24T22

Where,
E = modulus of elasticity = 84 × 103 MN/m2
A = conductor cross-sectional area = 226.2mm2
α = coefficient of Linear Expansion = 19.3 × 10-6 per °C
t2 − t1 = Temperature differential = 50 °C
W1 = effective weight of conductor at
conditions which produce tension T1 = 8.26 N/m
W2 = final conductor unit effective weight
alone at T2 conditions = 8.26 N/m
S = basic span length = 330m
T1 = Initial known conductor tension based on ruling situation of most
onerous condition with a factor of safety on MWT temperature
or everyday temperature 19950 N
T2 = final required conductor tension (N)

84 × 103 × 106 * 226.2 × 10-6 * 19.3 × 10-6 * (75 - 25)

+ {(8.262 * 3302 * 84 × 103 × 106 * 226.2 × 10-6)/(24* 199502)} - 19950
= {(8.262 * 3302 *84 × 103 × 106 * 226.2 × 10-6)/(24 * T22)} - T2

13165.38 = (5.8823 × 1012/T22) - T2

T2 = 14564.61N

The sag is determined from the equation,

Sag = (W* g*. S2) / (8*T)
= (0.842 * 9.81 * 3302) / (8 *14564)
= 7.720m
Note, for comparison, if catenary equations had been used the
Sag = c (cosh S/2c -1),
Where c = T/W = 14564/8.26 = 1763.19
Sag = 1763.19 (cosh (330/2 × 1763.19) – 1)
= 7.726 m, i.e. very little difference with the parabolic approximation

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

Appendix C: Suspension Insulator String Set Swing

A. Suspension insulator string set swing in case of line deviation “0”

B. Suspension insulator string set swing in case of line deviation “2”

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 / 26 Version 1.0
 Sag

A. Suspension insulator string set swing in case of line deviation "0"

1. Assumed conditions
1.1 Insulator
a. Kind U 100 BLP
b. Diameter 0.28 m
c. Spacing 0.146 m
i. The unit areas of indulator string 0.20 m2
j. The weight of single indulator string 490.5 N
The weight of double indulator string 833.85 N

1.2 Conductor
a. Code number 315 ACSR
b. Diameter 0.0249 m
c. linear mass (W) 1.2697 kg/m
d. Rated strength 114.02 KN

1.3 Wind pressure per unit areas [daN/m2]

Wind (m/s) 0 10 20 30 35 40 45
Conductor 0 7 29 62 90 110 145
Insulator 0 14 56 121 180 216 285

1.4. Horizontal tension of conductor

a. Wind span (Sm) 350 m
b. Temperature (MLS Condition) 10 ℃
c. Horizontal tension of conductor (KN)
Wind (m/s) 0 10 20 30 35 40 45
Tension (T) 17.60 17.77 20.02 26.44 32.83 37.50 45.39

1.5. Line deviation 0˚

1.6. Elevation difference 0 m

Oct 7, 2007
GECOL 23/26 Version 1.0
 Sag

2. Formula
θ θ I
Ww ⋅ Sm ⋅ cos2 + 2T ⋅ sin + W
H
ϕ = = tan−1 2 2 2
V h1 h2 I
W ⋅ Sm + T ⋅ ( + ) +
S1 S2 2
Where
α

V Vertical load [N]

H Horizontal load [N]
Sm Wind span [m]
I Insulator string weight [N]
Iw Insulator string wind force load [N]
W Weight of unit conductor [N]
Ww Wind force load of unit conductor [N/m]
T Conductor tension [N]
θ Line deviation
S1,S2 Span of front-to-back span [m]
Elevation difference of front-to-back span [m]
h1,h2 Tower installed at the higher place applies to “+h” and a tower installed
at the lower place applies to “-h” , as compared with two towers

3. Result of insulator swing

3.1. Single suspension insulator string
Wind (m/s) 0 10 20 30 35 40 45
Horizontal load 0 623 2582 5523 8021 9800 12918
Vertical load 4604 4604 4604 4604 4604 4604 4604
Swing angle 0.00 7.71 29.29 50.19 60.15 64.84 70.39

3.2. Double suspension insulator string

Wind (m/s) 0 10 20 30 35 40 45
Horizontal load 0 637 2638 5642 8199 10014 13200
Vertical load 4776 4776 4776 4776 4776 4776 4776
Swing angle 0.00 7.60 28.92 49.76 59.78 64.51 70.11
G S w

Oct 7, 2007
GECOL 24/26 Version 1.0
 Sag

B. Suspension insulator string set swing in case of line deviation "2"

1. Assumed conditions
1.1 Insulator
a. Kind U 100 BLP
b. Diameter 0.28 m
c. Spacing 0.146 m
i. The unit areas of indulator string 0.20 m2
j. The weight of single indulator string 490.5 N
The weight of double indulator string 833.85 N

1.2 Conductor
a. Code number 315 ACSR
b. Diameter 0.0249 m
c. linear mass (W) 1.2697 kg/m
d. Rated strength 114.02 KN

1.3 Wind pressure per unit areas [daN/m2]

Wind (m/s) 0 10 20 30 35 40 45
Conductor 0 7 29 62 90 110 145
Insulator 0 14 56 121 180 216 285

1.4. Horizontal tension of conductor

a. Wind span (Sm) 350 m
b. Temperature (MLS Condition) 10 ℃
c. Horizontal tension of conductor (KN)
Wind (m/s) 0 10 20 30 35 40 45
Tension (T) 17.60 17.77 20.02 26.44 32.83 37.50 45.39

1.5. Line deviation 2˚

1.6. Elevation difference 0 m

Oct 7, 2007
GECOL 25/26 Version 1.0
 Sag

2. Formula
θ θ I
Ww ⋅ Sm ⋅ cos2 + 2T ⋅ sin + W
H
ϕ= = tan−1 2 2 2
V h1 h2 I
W ⋅ Sm + T ⋅ ( + ) +
S1 S2 2
Where
α

V Vertical load [N]

H Horizontal load [N]
Sm Wind span [m]
I Insulator string weight [N]
Iw Insulator string wind force load [N]
W Weight of unit conductor [N]
Ww Wind force load of unit conductor [N/m]
T Conductor tension [N]
θ Line deviation
S1,S2 Span of front-to-back span [m]
Elevation difference of front-to-back span [m]
h1,h2 Tower installed at the higher place applies to “+h” and a tower installed
at the lower place applies to “-h” , as compared with two towers

3. Result of insulator swing

3.1. Single suspension insulator string
Wind (m/s) 0 10 20 30 35 40 45
Horizontal load 614 1243 3280 6444 9165 11106 14499
Vertical load 4604 4604 4604 4604 4604 4604 4604
Swing angle 7.60 15.11 35.47 54.46 63.33 67.49 72.39

3.2. Double suspension insulator string

Wind (m/s) 0 10 20 30 35 40 45
Horizontal load 614 1257 3336 6564 9343 11320 14781
Vertical load 4776 4776 4776 4776 4776 4776 4776
Swing angle 7.33 14.75 34.94 53.97 62.93 67.13 72.10
G S w

Oct 7, 2007
GECOL 26/26 Version 1.0
 GD6 6600
Version 1.0: Oct 7, 2007

Poles

General Electricity
Company of Libya
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Scope ····························································································································· 1

2. Composition of the Line ······························································································ 1

2.1 Supports ·············································································································· 1
2.2 Guy ······················································································································ 1
2.3 Cross-arm ············································································································ 1
2.4 Insulator string ···································································································· 1
2.5 Conductors & Ground wire ················································································· 1
3. Assembly ······················································································································· 1
3.1 Standard poles ····································································································· 1
3.2 Minimum height of poles ···················································································· 2
3.3 Normal span ········································································································ 3
3.4 The frame of poles ······························································································· 3
3.5 Reinforcement of line ·························································································· 3
3.6 Special poles ········································································································ 3
4. Mechanical Strength ···································································································· 3
4.1 Load condition ···································································································· 3
4.1.1 Wind velocity ····························································································· 3
4.1.2 Wind force ································································································· 4
4.1.3 Vertical loads ····························································································· 5
4.1.4 Transversal horizontal loads ······································································· 5
4.1.5 Longitudinal horizontal loads ···································································· 5
4.1.6 Design loads ······························································································ 5
4.2 The Strength calculation of poles ········································································ 6
4.2.1 Bending moment by external force (M) ····················································· 6
4.2.2 Resistant moment of poles (Mr) ································································· 9
4.2.3 The formula of strength calculation ························································· 10
5. Foundation ················································································································· 11
5.1 Burial depth ······································································································· 11
5.2 Burial depth increasing according to the soil characteristics ····························· 11

ii
 5.3 Anchor log ········································································································· 12
6. Guy ······························································································································ 14
6.1 Location ············································································································ 14
6.2 Installation position ··························································································· 14
6.3 The strength calculation of guy ········································································· 14
6.3.1 The allowable strength of guy ·································································· 17
6.3.2 The stress of guy due to bending moment ················································ 17
6.3.3 The formula of strength calculation ························································· 17
6.3.4 Strength of guy ························································································· 18
6.3.5 Anchor concrete block ············································································· 19
7. Cross-arm ··················································································································· 19
7.1 Loads on cross-arm ··························································································· 19
7.2 Strength of cross-arm ························································································ 20
8. Earthing ······················································································································ 21

9. The Drawing of Standard Assembly ········································································ 22

iii
 LIST OF TABLES

< Table 1 > Normal span ··························································································· 3

< Table 2 > Wind force per unit areas ······································································· 4
< Table 3 > force coefficient ····················································································· 5
< Table 4 > The characteristics of wood pole ···························································· 10
< Table 5 > The resistant strength of wood poles ······················································ 10
< Table 6 > Strength calculation of H-Frame poles ··················································· 11
< Table 7 > Normal burial depth of wood poles and Mr ··········································· 11
< Table 8 > Burial depth according to the soil characteristics ··································· 12
< Table 9 > Strength calculation of guy for H-Frame poles ······································ 18
< Table 10 > Rated strength of guy ··········································································· 18
< Table 11 > The number of cross-arms ···································································· 19
< Table 12 > Modulus of section ··············································································· 21

iv
 LIST OF FIGURES

[Figure 1] Wind span ································································································ 7

[Figure 2] Straight line ····························································································· 7
[Figure 3] Line deviation ·························································································· 8
[Figure 4] Anchor log for 66kV overhead line ·························································· 13
[Figure 5] Anchor log of H-Frame ············································································ 13
[Figure 6] Guy installation ························································································ 14
[Figure 7] Front view (Transverse couple guy) ························································· 15
[Figure 8] Side view (longitudinal couple guy) ························································· 16
[Figure 9] The force of guy due to bending moment ················································· 17
[Figure 10] Anchor concrete block for overhead line ················································ 19
[Figure 11] Straight concrete and wood poles ··························································· 22
[Figure 12] Light angle concrete and wood poles ····················································· 23
[Figure 13] Heavy concrete and wood poles ····························································· 24
[Figure 14] Dead end concrete and wood poles ························································ 25
[Figure 15] Earthwire connection ············································································· 26

v
 LIST OF APPENDIXES

Appendix A : References ·························································································· 27

Appendix B : Example; In Case of Using ACSR 160㎟, Wood Pole ························ 28

vi
 Poles

1. Scope

This standard specifies the design of 66kV overhead transmission line using concrete or
wood pole.

2. Composition of the Line

2.1 Supports
• Concrete pole or wood poles may be used for supports according as GES.
• The overall length of the poles should be decided after consideration of clearance
regulated to ground.

2.2 Guy
• The zinc coated steel wires shall be usually used for supporting poles.
• The guy diameter must be more than 7/2.2mm.
• Guy should be installed together with anchor rod.

2.3 Cross-arm
• The length and shape of cross-arm should be decided according to result of inspecting
insulation distance between poles and conductor.
• Cross-arm and accessory should be put to earth by using copper wire above 14mm2.

2.4 Insulator string

Installation of insulator string follows insulator string design standard.

2.5 Conductors & Ground wire

Installation of conductors & ground wire follows conductors design standard.

3. Assembly

3.1 Standard poles

Standard pole have relation with standard span. The general scheme of poles is
composed of H-Frame using two poles. The kinds of standard poles are as follows:
• Straight poles
- These poles are used at the straight transmission line.
- Line deviation is up to 3° or including.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

1/36 Version 1.0
 Poles

• Light angle poles

- These poles are used at the light angle part of transmission line.
- Line deviation is up to 20° or including.
• Heavy angle poles
- These poles are used to the heavy angle part of line.
- Line deviation is up to 30° or including.
• Dead end poles
- These poles are taking full line tension loads one side of poles and none or slack span
on other.
• Tension poles
- These poles are used at the place where unbalance tension occurs.
• Reinforcement poles
- These poles are used for purpose of reinforcing transmission line with guy.

The poles may not withstand the load or secure the required clearance in some case. In
particular, poles can not withstand the load if pole is installed at the place where line
deviation is over 30°. At that time, other supporters should be used for 66kV transmission
line to get the strength or the clearance. Other supporters means such supports as steel
poles and tower

3.2 Minimum height of poles

With short spans and lower height poles, the total number of poles and associated
fittings shall increase to cover a certain transmission line route. In case of long spans,
height of poles should be increased because the conductor sag between poles grows.
The needed height of pole shall be decided by the equation.

The overall height of the poles: A + B + C + D + E

• A: Vertical distances between top of poles and crossarm
• B: Suspension insulator string length
• C: Sag
• D: Clearance to ground
• E: Burial depth (1/6 of the overall pole height pole)

To secure clearance to ground, the minimum height of poles should be more than 16m or
including.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

2/36 Version 1.0
 Poles

3.3 Normal span

Normal span that shall be applied to standard poles is as follows.

< Table 1 > Normal span

Wind velocity 35 m/s 45 m/s
Type Suspension Tension Suspension Tension
Span 130 m 130 m 120 m 100 m
Note
1) Normal span mentioned above table can be calculated on the assumption of ACSR 160mm2.
2) Normal span may increase or decrease according to mechanical resistance strength of poles and
mechanical characteristics of conductors.

3.4 The frame of poles

Single poles cannot withstand the loads and satisfy needed height to secure the required
clearance. Therefore we recommend H-Frame poles or H-Frame poles with X-brace.

3.5 Reinforcement of line

When straight poles are successive, transverse couple guys must be installed every 5
poles or less and longitude couple guy must be installed every 10 poles or less.

3.6 Special poles

Special poles should be installed at the place where loads pressured on poles are very
big or at the mountainous area.

4. Mechanical Strength

4.1 Load condition

4.1.1 Wind velocity
Worst conditions are confronted when ambient temperature is 10°C with wind loads
relating with maximum wind velocity. In most regions the maximum wind speed is less
than 35 m/s in Libya. But in some regions the maximum wind speed is more than 35 m/s
according to the environmental data given by a meteorological observatory of Libya. As a
result, 35 m/s of wind velocity shall be applied to all the regions except Jalo, Tripoli city
and Ghat. 45m/s of wind velocity shall be applied to Jalo, Tripoli and Ghat regions.
1) Jalo weather station: 39.1 m/s in April 1972.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

3/36 Version 1.0
 Poles

2) Tripoli city weather station: 46.3 m/s in March 1973.

3) Ghat weather station: 36.0 m/s in April 1991.

4.1.2 Wind force

Wind force per unit areas is listed in the below table.

< Table 2 > Wind force per unit areas

Wind force per unit areas [kgf/m2 (daN/m2)]
Composition Unit
35m/s wind velocity 45m/s wind velocity
Concrete poles (Mp) 60 (58.8) 100 (98.1)
Wood poles (Mp) 60 (58.8) 100 (98.1)
Conductors (Mw) 76 (74.5) 126 (123.6)
Cross-arm (Mc) 122 (119.6) 202 (198.1)
Insulator (Mi) 106 (103.9) 175 (171.6)

The kind of mechanical loads on the transmission line is the wind load, unbalance load,
the linear mass of the facilities, etc. According to the direction of load, we can roughly
divide into vertical load, transversal load and longitudinal load. In general the vertical load
strength of poles is too little to be considered. In mechanical designing of poles, we usually
only consider the transversal load. The most important load pressured on the transmission
line composed of poles is the wind load. The wind force per unit areas can be calculated by
the next equation.
1
p= ρV 2 C
2
Where
p The wind force per unit areas (kgf/ m2)
ρ The air density (kgf·sec2/m4)
The value of ρ is 0.125 at 760mmHg air pressure
V The maximum wind speed (m/s)
C The force coefficient

The force coefficients are as follows. And then the value is known by the experiment.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

4/36 Version 1.0
 Poles

< Table 3 > force coefficient

Kind Poles Conductor Cross-arm Insulator
Coefficient 0.8 1.0 1.6 1.4
The wind force can be expressed by the next equation.
P = pA
Where
P Wind force (N)
p The wind force per unit areas (N/m2)
A Projected area(m2)

4.1.3 Vertical loads

• Weight of poles, conductor, cross arm and insulator string
• Special vertical load due to different level of tower with adjacent towers
(If pole is installed at the place where big vertical angle occurs as like mountainous
areas, vertical component load of conductors occurs)
• Vertical component load originated due to guy tension

4.1.4 Transversal horizontal loads

• Wind force pressured on poles, conductor and insulator
• Transversal component load of conductor originated due to line deviation

4.1.5 Longitudinal horizontal loads

• Wind force pressured on poles, cross-arm and insulator
• Dead end poles apply to the maximum working tension of conductor.
• Tension poles apply to one third of the maximum working tension of conductor.
• Reinforcement poles apply to one sixth of the maximum working tension of conductor.

4.1.6 Design loads

• The design load condition shall be calculated by load originated due to only wind force.
• In relation to vertical loads, poles withstand sufficiently the compressive allowance
stress even if it is smaller.
• If straight pole is installed at the place where difference between spans is much larger,
longitudinal guys must be installed to both sides along direction of transmission line
• Guy should withstand the full combined load due to line deviation
• Guy should withstand the full longitudinal loads.
• Guy can withstand to half of wind force.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

5/36 Version 1.0
 Poles

• The safety factor of concrete poles should be minimum 2.0; on the one hand the safety
factor of wood poles should be minimum 2.5.

4.2 The Strength calculation of poles

The strength of concrete, wood poles may be calculated by the following formula. In
strength of poles, the resistant moment of pole should be bigger than maximum bending
moment of poles by external force. Formula for calculating moment is as follows.

4.2.1 Bending moment by external force (M)

4.2.1.1 Bending moment by wind force on overall poles (Mp)
The bending moment imposed on the pole by the wind load can be calculated by the
next equation.
Do ⋅ H 2 K ⋅ H 3 D−d
Mp = Wp ( − ) [N–m], K=
200 3 100 H
Where
Mp Bending moment by wind force on poles (N-m)
Wp Wind force of pole per unit areas (N/m2)
H Distance from tip of the pole to ground level (m)
Do Diameter of the pole at the ground level (cm)
K The slope value
d Diameter of the pole at the top (cm)
D Diameter of the pole at the bottom (cm)

4.2.1.2 Bending moment by wind force on conductor (Mw)

The bending moment imposed on conductor by the wind load can be calculated by the
next equation.
S ⋅ ∑ Ww ⋅ d ⋅ h
Mw = [N–m]
1000
Where
Mw Bending moment by wind force on conductor (N-m)
Ww Wind force of conductor per unit areas (N/m2)
d Diameter of conductor (mm)
h Height of conductor (m)
S Wind span (m), S=(Sa+Sb)/2

Wind span is half the sum of the adjacent span lengths as shown in the following figure

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

6/36 Version 1.0
 Poles

and weight span is the distance between the lowest points on adjacent sag curves on either
side of the tower.

(Sa+Sb)/2

h
Sa/2 Sb/2

Sa Sb

[Figure 1] Wind span

4.2.1.3 Bending moment by unbalance tension of conductor

In straight line, because the unbalance of conductor occurs when the member of
conductor, the thickness of conductor and sag is different to both spans, unbalance tension
to be considered can be calculated by the next equation.

Ms = ∑ (T A ⋅ h A ) − ∑ (TB ⋅ hB ) [N–m]

Where
Ms Bending moment by unbalance tension of conductor (N-m)
TA, TB Maximum working tension of conductor (N)
hA, hB Height from ground level to conductors (m)

TB
TA

hA
hB

[Figure 2] Straight line

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

7/36 Version 1.0
 Poles

In curve line, bending moment by resultant unbalance tension can be calculated by the
next equation.

Ma = ∑ (T ⋅ h ) [N–m]

T A + TB − 2 ⋅ T A ⋅ TB ⋅ COSϕ
2 2
T= [N]

Especially in case of TA = TB = T
ϕ
T = 2 ⋅ T ⋅ SIN [N]
2
Where
Ma Bending moment by line deviation (N-m)
T Combined force of working tension (N)
TA, TB Maximum working tension (N)
ϕ Line deviation angle
h Height from conductor to ground level (m)

TB
Conductor
ϕ
T

Poles
TA
Crossarm

[Figure 3] Line deviation

4.2.1.4 Bending moment by wind force on cross-arm (Mc)

The bending moment imposed on cross-arm by the wind load can be calculated by the
next equation.
Mc = A ⋅ Wc ⋅ h [N–m]
Where
Mc Bending moment by wind force on cross-arm (N-m)
A Cross-arm projected area (m2)
Wc Wind force of cross-arm per unit areas (N/m2)
h Height from cross-arm to ground level (m)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

8/36 Version 1.0
 Poles

4.2.1.5 Bending moment by wind force on insulator string (Mi)

The bending moment imposed on insulator by the wind load can be calculated by the
next equation.

Mi = A ⋅ Wi ⋅ ∑ h [N–m]

Where
Mi Bending moment by wind force on insulator string [N – m]
A Insulator string projected area (m2)
Wi Wind force of insulator string the per unit area (N/m2)
h Height from insulator string to ground level (m)

4.2.2 Resistant moment of poles (Mr)

4.2.2.1 Wood pole
The strength of wood poles shall be in accordance with BS 1990. The loads imposed on
the poles are assumed to be applied 0.6m from the top of the pole and are based on ‘mean
ultimate bending stress’ 53.8 N/mm2 for redwood pole. The ultimate loads F calculated
according to simple bending theory and assuming a rigidly supported cantilever correspond
to the mean ultimate strength of unsupported poles of the specified sizes. They are based
on the strength at the critical cross section which occurs at the ground line. The value of
the safety factor is usually 2.5 for a wood pole. Resistant moment of poles F is given by the
expression:
fZ
F= [N-m]
S .F
Where
f Ultimate bending stress (N/m2)
S.F Safety factor
Z Section modulus(m3)

Z is the section modulus at the critical section of diameter Do(m) and is given by
π ⋅ Do 3
Z= [m3]
32
“Do” means minimum diameter of the pole at the ground level in mm.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

9/36 Version 1.0
 Poles

< Table 4 > The characteristics of wood pole

Nominal Diameter at top Minimum diameter at
Depth Minimum diameter
length Min Max Average 1.5m from butt end
(m) at the ground (mm)
(m) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
16 2.7 200 265 232.5 365 351.3
17 2.9 200 265 232.5 375 359.2
18 3.0 200 265 232.5 390 372.7
20 3.4 200 265 232.5 415 392.9
22 3.7 200 265 232.5 435 409.8
24 4.0 200 265 232.5 470 440.0
Note; The characteristics of stout wood pole are based on the characteristics of redwood in BS 1990 part1:
1984.

< Table 5 > The resistant strength of wood poles

Nominal Depth Section modulus(Z) Ultimate bending Mr(fZ / SF)

length (m) (m) (mm3) moment(fZ) (N-m) (kN-m)

16 2.7 4,256,321 228,990 91.60

17 2.9 4,549,974 244,789 97.92
18 3.0 5,082,508 273,439 109.38
20 3.4 5,954,509 320,353 128.14
22 3.7 6,756,406 363,495 145.40
24 4.0 8,362,920 449,925 179.97

4.2.2.2 Concrete poles

In case of concrete poles international specification does not exist about mechanical
strength of concrete poles and the pole may be produced as variable strength according to
manufacturer. Therefore, it is reasonable methods to refer to manufacture’s specification.

4.2.3 The formula of strength calculation

Strength calculation by transversal wind pressure is as follows.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

10/36 Version 1.0
 Poles

< Table 6 > Strength calculation of H-Frame poles

Sort Formula
Mw + Mc + Mi
No existing transverse couple guys Mr ≥ Mp +
2
1 Mw + Mc + Mi
Existing transverse couple guys Mr ≥ ( Mp + )
2 2
Note
1) For low voltage, it does not consider Mc and Mi.
2) For 66kV transmission line, in case of Mc the total strength calculation related to transversal wind
pressure considers only 20% of Mc (Bending moment by wind force on cross-arm) and strength
calculation related to longitudinal wind pressure does not consider Mw (Bending moment by wind
force on conductor).

5. Foundation

5.1 Burial depth

Design engineers should set up the poles to withstand the mechanical load on the poles
by the wind pressure or unbalance bending moment. The normal burial depths of pole and
Resistance moment of poles (Mr) are as follows.

< Table 7 > Normal burial depth of wood poles and Mr

Nominal length Burial depth Mr (Resistance moment of stout poles)
(m) (m) (kN-m)
16 2.7 91.60
17 2.9 97.92
18 3.0 109.38
20 3.4 128.14
22 3.7 145.40
24 4.0 179.97
Note: The normal burial depth shall be more than 1/6 of the pole length.

5.2 Burial depth increasing according to the soil characteristics

The other factor affecting the burial depth of pole is the nature of soil. The strength of
the soil can be changed according to the material consisting of the soil. In case the kind of

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

11/36 Version 1.0
 Poles

the soil is hard and rigid, 1/6 of pole length suffices for the burial depth of pole. But if the
soil is soft, 1/6 of pole length doesn’t suffice for the burial depth of pole. In that case we
should increase the burial depth.

< Table 8 > Burial depth according to the soil characteristics

Kind of The strength Burial depth

Class Remarks
soil of soil (㎏/m4) (m)

Soil combined and mixed with a

A Hard 4.0×106 Normal depth lot of gravel, large pebbles, and
general soil

Soil combined and mixed with

B Normal 3.0×106 Normal depth sand, small pebbles, and
general soil

Normal depth
C Sand 2.0×106 Sand without general soil
+ 20cm

Normal depth Soft loam, clay including a lot of

D Soft 0.8×106
+ 50cm moisture, humus, silt, etc

Note
1) Hard soil means dry and stiff soil can be usually seen in the mountainous area.
2) Normal soil means general soil can be easily seen near the urban area.
3) Sand soft consists of sand that is not mixed with general soil. The side soil of rural roadway and the
soil of wild land are included.
4) Soft soil means the wet and fragile soil.

5.3 Anchor log

We will generally use two anchor wood logs for a wood pole. The top surface of an
anchor log should be buried by 0.5m. If the tension of the line is high or the ground is
weak, design engineers can increase the number of the anchor log. The drawing of the
anchor log is as follows.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

12/36 Version 1.0
 Poles

1.0m 1.0m

20cm Min. Dia

.
25cm Max. Dia

Hole

[Figure 4] Anchor log for 66kV overhead line

We should install one anchor log against the direction which is imposed by the bending
moment. And the other anchor log at a right angle to the direction. The anchor log should
be installed like the next drawings.

Pole Pole

Anchor log Anchor log

Pole Pole

0.5m

Anchor log Anchor log

[Figure 5] Anchor log of H-Frame

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

13/36 Version 1.0
 Poles

6. Guy

The guy should be installed to strengthen the resistance moment of poles, enlarge the
safety of overhead lines and balance the unbalance load. But the load burden of the guy
should be lower than 50% of total wind pressure load on the pole. More than 50% load of
the whole wind pressure load should be imposed to the supporter.

6.1 Location
In case the line is straight, the longitude couple guys should be installed in the same
direction of the line every 10 spans. Also the transverse couple guys should be installed in
the vertical direction of the line every 5 spans.

Longitude couple guys Transverse couple guys

Pole Crossarm Conductor

[Figure 6] Guy installation

The guy should be installed at the poles which are imposed to the unbalance load such as
angle poles and dead end poles to withstand the unbalance load. The guy should be
installed at the place which is imposed to the composition of unbalance load.

6.2 Installation position

For straight pole, the position of guy band is below 150cm from the phase cross-arm and
for angle pole, the position of guy band is below 80cm from the phase cross-arm. The
angle between poles and guy is suitable to 45°.

6.3 The strength calculation of guy

Strength calculation of guy taking a share in a part of wind pressure or unbalance tension
is as follows.
The allowance strength of guy should be bigger than maximum loads of guy.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

14/36 Version 1.0
 Poles

① Wood pole ③ ⑦ Bands for guy

② Cross arm ② ⑧ Insulator for guy
③ Earth wire ⑨ Transverse couple guy
④ Conductor ⑩ Guy grip
⑤
⑤ Insulator ⑦ ⑪ Anchor rod for guy
④
⑥ Anchor log ⑫ Concrete block

① ⑨

⑩
⑪

⑥
⑫

[Figure 7] Front view (Transverse couple guy)

July 1, 2007
GECOL 15/36 Version 1.0
 Poles

① Wood pole ⑦ Bands for guy

② Cross arm ③ ⑧ Insulator for guy
③ Earth wire ② ⑨ longitudinal couple guy
④ Conductor ⑤ ⑩ Guy grip
⑤ Insulator ④ ⑪ Anchor rod for guy
⑦
⑥ Anchor log ⑫ Concrete block

①
⑨

⑩
⑪

⑥
⑫

[Figure 8] Side view (longitudinal couple guy)

July 1, 2007
GECOL 16/36 Version 1.0
 Poles

6.3.1 The allowable strength of guy

The allowable strength of guy is as follows.
P
T= [N]
F
Where
T Allowable strength of guy (N)
P Rated strength of guy (N)
F Safety factor

6.3.2 The stress of guy due to bending moment

The force on guy is as follows.
M
T0 = S cos ecθ [N]
h0
Where
T0 Force on guy (N)
Ms Bending moment of pole(N-m)
h0 Height of guy (m)
θ Angle between guy and pole

T0
ho

[Figure 9] The force of guy due to bending moment

6.3.3 The formula of strength calculation

The formula for the strength calculation of guy is as follows.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

17 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

< Table 9 > Strength calculation of guy for H-Frame poles

Kind Formula
2 Mp + Mw
Supporting Wind Pressure [H-Frame] P≥F× cos ecθ
2h0

F ⋅ [∑ T 11 ⋅ h − ( Mr − Mp)]
Supporting Unbalance Tension P≥ cos ecθ
h0

F ⋅ [∑ T12 ⋅ h − ( Mr − Mp)]
P≥ cos ecθ
h0
Supporting Loads due to line deviation

T A + TB − 2 ⋅ T A ⋅ TB ⋅ cos ϕ
2 2
T12 =

Where
P Rated strength of guy (N)
(attaching guy at the point of the combined force of unbalance tension)
F Safety factor (2.0)
h0 Height of guy (m)
h Height of conductor (m)
T11 Maximum working tension of conductor (N) (Unbalance tension)
T12 Combined force of unbalance tension (N) (Angle loads)

6.3.4 Strength of guy

• The zinc coated steel wire is usually used for guy.
• Rated strength of zinc coated steel wire is as below table.

< Table 10 > Rated strength of guy

Diameter Linear Rated
Area Number of
Code Wire Conductor mass strength
[mm2] wire
[mm] [mm] [kg/km] [KN]
4 27.1 7 2.22 6.66 213.3 39.3
6.3 42.7 7 2.79 8.36 335.9 60.2

• The safety factor of guy should be minimum 2.5.

• Guy for angle load adds wind pressure loads

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

18 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

• Dead end guy should be take charge of total longitudinal loads

6.3.5 Anchor concrete block

Anchor concrete block attached to guy have sufficient dimensions and depths to resist
the uplift force of guy. Minimum depth makes 1.5m. The drawing of the anchor concrete
block is as follows.

100

60°

300mm

[Figure 10] Anchor concrete block for overhead line

7. Cross-arm

The L-type steel cross-arm is usually used for 66kV overhead line. The length of phase
cross-arm is 6,800mm. The cross-arm for conductors should be installed 2.1m (suspension
type) and 3.5m (tension type) below from the top of the pole. The cross-arm should be
installed at the opposite direction of the mechanical load. According to the line deviation,
the number of cross-arms is as follows.
< Table 11 > The number of cross-arms
Angle Up to 3° 3° ~ 20° 20°~ 30° Dead end
Number of cross-arm 1 2 2 2

7.1 Loads on cross-arm

• Loads on cross-arm for straight poles are calculated by vertical loads of the following
clauses.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

19 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

1) Weight of poles, conductor, cross-arm and insulator string

2) Vertical component load of conductors due to big vertical angle
• Loads on cross-arm for angle, reinforcement and tension poles is calculated by the
scalar sum of the loads of the following clauses.
1) Weight of poles, conductor, cross-arm and insulator string
2) Vertical component load of conductors due to big vertical angle
3) One third of the maximum working tension of conductor.
• Loads on cross-arm for dead end poles is calculated by the scalar sum of the loads of
following clauses.
1) Weight of poles, conductor, cross-arm and insulator string
2) Vertical component load of conductors due to big vertical angle
3) The maximum working tension of conductor.

7.2 Strength of cross-arm

Cross-arm uses the “L” shape of steel member. The strength of cross-arm materials is as
follows.
• Materials
1) Steel angle size up to L90 × 90 × 6 ; Mild steel
(Min. yield stress 245Mpa, Min. tensile strength 400Mpa)
2) Steel angle size over L90 × 90 × 6 ; High tensile steel
(Min. yield stress 400Mpa, Min. tensile strength 540Mpa)

Member force of cross-arm calculated by the following formula should be more than
loads pressured on cross-arm.
σ sa ⋅ Z n
P= (N)
l
Where
P Member force of cross-arm (N)
σ sa Allowable bending stress (N /cm2)
Fb = Fy (Yield stress of steel)
Zn Modulus of section
l Distance from pole to conductor (cm)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

20 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

< Table 12 > Modulus of section

“L” shape of crossarm (mm) Modulus of section (cm3)
150 × 150 × 10 57.3
100 × 100 × 10 24.4

Double cross-arm and cross-arm tie shall be installed in case of the following condition.
• In case that a projecting part of cross-arm exceeds 175cm, double cross-arm should be
installed.
• Cross-arm tie should be installed in case that the projecting part length of single cross-
arm exceeds 150cm and the projecting part length of the double cross-arm exceeds
160cm.
• In case of using double cross-arm, the Modulus of section makes applies to 2.4 times
that of single cross-arm.

8. Earthing

All overhead devices and the overhead earth wire should be earthed into the ground.
Also every cross-arm should be connected to the overhead earth wire.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

21 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

9. The Drawing of Standard Assembly

DETAIL "1"

SECTION "A"

SECTION "B"

DETAIL "2"

Straight concrete and w ooden poles

[Figure 11] Straight concrete and wood poles

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

22 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

SECTION "A"

SECTION "B"

DETAIL "1"

Light angle concrete and wooden poles

[Figure 12] Light angle concrete and wood poles

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

23 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

SECTION "A-A"

SECTION "B" SECTION "C"

DETAIL "1" SECTION "D" DETAIL "2"

Heavy concrete and wooden poles

[Figure 13] Heavy concrete and wood poles

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

24 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

SECTION "A"

SECTION "B"

DETAIL "1"

Dead end concrete and wooden poles

[Figure 14] Dead end concrete and wood poles

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

25 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

[Figure 15] Earthwire connection

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

26 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

Appendix A: References

BS 1990 Wood poles for overhead power and telecommunication lines

Part 1 : 1984 Specification for softwood poles
KDS 1130 Wooden poles, Concrete poles for overhead transmission line
KDS 4900 Technical calculation
4901 The calculation of mechanical load on the pole
ANSI 05.1 Standard specifications for wood poles,

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

27 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

Appendix B: Example; In Case of Using ACSR 160㎟, Wood Pole

1. Conductor

The characteristic of ACSR 160mm2 is listed in the following table.

< Table B1 > Characteristics of ACSR 160 mm2
Nominal cross-sectional area (㎟) Number of wires Conductor
Size
Al. St. Total Al. St. diameter (㎜)
160 160 26.1 186 26 7 17.7

The characteristic of Aluminum clad steel wire 58 mm2 used for earth wire is listed in
the following table.
< Table B2 > Characteristics of Aluminum clad steel wire 58 mm2
Nominal cross- Number of Diameter (㎜)
Code
sectional area (㎟) wires Wire Conductor
58 58 7 3.26 9.78

2. Sag

2.1 Conditions for sag calculation

The following conditions shall be taken into account.
< Table B3 > Conditions for sag calculation
EDS Every Day Stress + 25 °C no wind
MSC Maximum Sag Condition + 75 °C no wind
10°C with wind loads relating with
MWT Maximum working tension
maximum wind velocity
Wind velocity and Wind force per unit area 35m/s, 76 kgf/m2 (74.5daN)
on conductors and earth wires 45m/s, 126 kgf/m2 (123.6daN)
Maximum wind velocity 35m/s, 45m/s
Maximum working tension 40% of UTS
Safety factors
Every Day Stress 25% of UTS
Note: UTS means the ultimate tensile strength of conductor

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

28 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

2.2 Sag table, In case of temperature 75 ℃

In case of 75 ℃, sag considered to secure ground clearance is as follows.

< Table B4 > Sag table

Span Sag Span Sag
100 1.17 110 1.76
120 1.36 130 1.97
140 1.55 150 2.19

3. Poles height

3.1 The overall height of poles

The height of pole shall be concluded by the equation with picture below.

[Figure B1] The overall height of poles

• A: Vertical distances between top of poles and cross-arm
• B: Suspension insulator string length
• C: Sag
• D: Clearance to ground
• E: Burial depth (1/6 of the overall pole height pole)
• The overall height of pole: A + B + C + D + E

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

29 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

3.2 Minimum height of poles

If span increases, the height of pole should be increased because dip increases.

< Table B5 > Minimum height of poles

Needed Minimum
Span Upper Insulator Sag Clearance Burial
Type Height Height
[m] [m] [m] [m] [m] [m]
[m] [m]
100 1.17 2.7 15.34 16
110 1.36 2.7 15.53 16
120 1.55 2.7 15.72 16
Suspension 2.1 1.37 8
130 1.76 2.7 15.93 16
140 1.97 2.9 16.34 17
150 2.19 2.9 16.56 17
100 1.17 2.7 15.37 16
110 1.36 2.7 15.56 16
120 1.55 2.7 15.75 16
Tension 3.5 0 8
130 1.76 2.7 15.96 16
140 1.97 2.9 16.37 17
150 2.19 2.9 16.59 17
Note
1) This data is calculated on the assumption that ACSR 160mm2 is used in flatland areas
2) The value of sag may change according to the kind of conductor
3) In the mountainous areas, main road, etc, and at the place where level difference between poles is
large, the height of poles must be increased

3.3 Recommendation
The height of poles should be more than 16m or including for the purpose of clearance.

4. The frame of poles

Single poles cannot withstand the load pressured on pole. Therefore we recommend H-
Frame poles. If required, H-Frame poles with X-brace should be installed at the place
where big loads occur.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

30 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

5. Pollution level (The number of insulator)

We will usually use the ball & socket insulator. The used insulators are as follows.
< Table B6 > Characteristics of insulators
Nominal Dimension Minimum nominal
Insulator type
voltage (㎸) (Diameter × Height) creepage distance (㎜)
Standard
66 280 × 170 340
ball & socket
Fog
66 280 × 146 440
ball & socket

Pollution levels are classified in the IEC 60815 as Light, Medium, Heavy, and Very
heavy. The leakage distance according to the contamination level is in the followings.
< Table B7 > IEC 60815
Pollution level Minimum nominal specific creepage distance [㎜/KV]
Light 16
Medium 20
Heavy 25
Very heavy 31

From the pollution level of IEC 60815, the needed number of the ball & socket type
insulators is as follows.
< Table B8 > Number of insulators
The number of ball & socket type insulators according to
minimum nominal specific creepage distance
Insulator type
16 mm/kV 20 mm/kV 25 mm/kV 31 mm/kV
(Light) (Medium) (Heavy) (Very heavy)
Standard
5 5 6 7
ball & socket
Fog
6 6 6 6
ball & socket
Note
1) Maximum operating voltage: 72,5 KV
2) The number of insulator shall be decided by considering minimum nominal specific creepage distance
and the characteristics of lightning overvoltage.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

31 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

6. Mechanical strength

6.1 Bending moment

The span between poles is affected by bending moment by external force such as wind
load, unbalance bending moment and the sag, etc and by the height of poles. The next table
shows the maximum bending moment on the H- Frame straight wood pole. Every straight
wood pole can withstand wind force by wind 35m/s or 45m/s. The applied conductors are
ACSR (Steel Reinforced Aluminum Conductor) 160mm2 for the phase and Aluminum clad
steel wire 58mm2 for earth wire. The results are as follows.

< Table B9 > Bending moment in case of wind velocity 35 m/s

Height Structure Span Mr (KN-m) M (KN-m)

(m) Type (m) Resistance moment of poles (M = Mp + Mw + Mc + Mi)

16 91.60 54.41
17 97.92 59.09
18 109.38 64.58
Suspension 130
20 128.14 74.75
22 145.40 86.07
24 179.97 98.58
16 91.60 60.51
17 97.92 65.99
18 109.38 72.41
Tension 130
20 128.14 84.20
22 145.40 97.24
24 179.97 111.47

< Table B10 > Bending moment in case of wind velocity 45 m/s

Height Structure Span Mr (KN-m) M (KN-m)

(m) Type (m) Resistance moment of poles (M = Mp + Mw + Mc + Mi)

16 Suspension 120 91.60 85.85

17 97.92 93.58
18 109.38 102.39

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

32 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

20 128.14 118.70
22 145.40 136.89
24 179.97 157.05
16 91.60 88.42
17 97.92 96.57
18 109.38 106.18
Tension 100
20 128.14 123.88
22 145.40 143.57
24 179.97 165.22

Where
Mr Resistance moment of red wood pole in BS 1990(1984)
M Bending moment by external force in variable span and height
Mp Bending moment on the pole.
Mw Bending moment on the conductor.
Mc Bending moment on the cross-arm.
Mi Bending moment on the insulator string

6.2 Recommendation
In case of wind velocity 35m/s, the maximum span of poles can be increased up to 150m
according to bending moment calculation. But if we will increases span, the height of poles
must be increased to secure clearance to ground. If we will decide 130m as normal span of
the poles (suspension type, tension type) and use the height of poles that is more than 16m,
every stout pole more than 16m satisfies clearance to ground. Also Considering the safety
factor, the most of utilities in the world use the normal span shorter than the maximum
span.
As a result of clearance and bending moment calculation conclusion, in case of wind
velocity 35 m/s, the applicable span of suspension and tension type poles can be 130 m. In
that case, the vertical clearance above the ground is enough, bending moment too.
But if pole is used at the place where is wind velocity 45 m/s, the normal span of
suspension type poles should be 120 m, the normal span of tension type poles can be 100
m according to bending moment calculation conclusion. In conclusion, we recommend the
values of following table as the normal span between poles for 66kV overhead lines in case
that GECOL use ACSR 160 mm2 as a conductor.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

33 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

< Table B11 > Normal span

Wind velocity Wind velocity 35 m/s Wind velocity 45 m/s
type Suspension type Tension type Suspension type Tension type
Span (m) 130 130 120 100

7. Guy

7.1 The kinds of guy

The kinds of guy shall be classified into transversal, longitudinal, angle guy and dead end
guy.

(Transversal, Longitudinal guy) (Angle guy) (Dead end guy)

[Figure B2] The kinds of guy

7.2 The kinds of guy wire

We will recommend zinc coated steel wire as guy because this wire has advantage of
high tension strength. Rated strength of zinc coated steel wire is as below table.

< Table B12 > Rated strength of guy

Diameter[mm] Linear Rated

Area Number of
Code mass strength
[mm2] wire Wire Conductor [kg/km] [KN]
4 27.1 7 2.22 6.66 213.3 39.3
6.3 42.7 7 2.79 8.36 335.9 60.2

7.3 The strength calculation

In the 66kv transmission line using wood poles and ACSR 160 mm2, the needed strength
of guy is as below table. The formula explained in the former is used for calculation.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

34 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

< Table B13 > The strength of guy

Dead end Guy (KN) Trans & Longi Guy (KN) Angle Guy (KN)
Wind
Dead end Tension Transversal Longitudinal Line deviation
(m/s)
Poles Poles Guy Guy 10° 20° 30°
35 208 49 6 20 10 52 93
45 213 54 10 32 16 57 98
Note: This strength of guy is calculated in assumption that Angle between guy and pole is 45° and the
height of poles is 16m.

For transverse, longitude guy the strength of code 4 is enough. In case of angle guy, if
transmission line angle is so far as 10°, wire code 4 is sufficient, if transmission line angle
is from 10° up to 20° wire code 6.3 is desirable for guy.
Provided deadend guy and angle guy used for more than 20° line deviation, the strength
of code 4 and 6.3 does not withstand needed strength. In other words, in case that
transmission line deviation is over 20° and dead end condition, wood poles should not be
installed. Therefore other supports to withstand unbalance tension shall be installed.

7.4 Recommendation
In the 66kv transmission line using wood poles, the most reasonable guy is as below
table.

< Table B14 > The selection of guy

Dead end Guy (KN) Trans & Longi Guy(KN) Angle Guy (KN)
Wind
Dead end Tension Transversal Longitudinal Line deviation
(m/s)
Poles Poles Guy Guy 10° 20° 30°
35 - Code 6.3 Code 4 Code 4 Code 4 Code 6.3 -

45 - Code 6.3 Code 4 Code 4 Code 4 Code 6.3 -

Note
1) Angle wooden pole can be used at the place where transmission line deviation is up to 20°.
2) Dead end pole cannot be used because of the shortage of guy strength.

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

35 /36 Version 1.0
 Poles

8. Cross-arm

The L-shape steel cross-arm is usually used for 66kV overhead line. Below table shows
the member force of cross-arm and loads on the cross-arm. In the result, the single cross-
arm is suitable for suspension type of pole; Double cross-arm is needed for angle and dead
end in consideration of load calculation. But in case of dead end pole, below table shows
that member force of cross-arm 150*150*10 can withstand load on the cross-arm but
installation of the cross-arm is difficult because dimensions and weight of the cross-arm.
As a result the cross-arm shall not be used for dead-end pole.

< Table B15 > The strength of cross-arm

Dimension σ sa Zn L P P’
Type Result
(mm) (MPa) (cm3) (cm) (N) (N)
Suspension 100*100*10 (1) * 400 24.40 165 5915 1491 Possible

Angle 100*100*10 (2) * 400 58.56 165 14196 9670 Possible

100*100*10 (2) * 400 58.56 165 14196 26027 Impossible

Dead end
150*150*10 (2) * 400 137.52 165 33338 26156 Possible
Where
(1) * Single cross-arm
(2) * Double cross-arm
σ sa Allowable bending stress (MPa)
P Member force of cross-arm (N)
P' Load on the crossarm (N)
l Distance from pole to conductor (cm)
Zn Modulus of section (cm3)

GECOL Oct 7, 2007

36 /36 Version 1.0